Kenneth Womack (Ed.) - The Cambridge Companion To Beatles (2009)

The Cambridge Companion to the Beatles
From Please Please Me to Abbey Road, this collection of essays tells the
fascinating story of the Beatles – the creation of the band, their
musical influences, and their cultural significance, with emphasis on
their genesis and practices as musicians, songwriters, and recording
artists. Through detailed biographical and album analyses, the book
uncovers the background of each band member and provides
expansive readings of the band’s music.
r Traces the group’s creative output from their earliest recordings
and throughout their career
r Pays particular attention to the social and historical factors
which contributed to the creation of the band
r Investigates the Beatles’ uniquely enduring musical legacy and
cultural power
Clearly organized into three sections, covering Background, Works,

and History and Influence, the Companion is ideal for course usage,
and is also a must-read for all Beatles fans.
The Cambridge Companion to the
BEATLES
............
edited by
Kenneth Womack
cambridge university press
Cambridge, New York, Melbourne, Madrid, Cape Town, Singapore, São Paulo,
Delhi, Dubai, Tokyo, Mexico City
Cambridge University Press
The Edinburgh Building, Cambridge CB2 8RU, UK
Published in the United States of America by Cambridge University Press, New York
www.cambridge.org
Information on this title: www.cambridge.org/9780521689762
◦ Cambridge University Press 2009

C
This publication is in copyright. Subject to statutory exception

and to the provisions of relevant collective licensing agreements,
no reproduction of any part may take place without
the written permission of Cambridge University Press.
First published 2009

3rd printing 2011
Printed in the United Kingdom at the University Press, Cambridge
A catalogue record for this publication is available from the British Library
Library of Congress Cataloguing in Publication data

The Cambridge companion to the Beatles / edited by Kenneth Womack.
p. cm. – (Cambridge companions to music)
Includes bibliographical references and index.
ISBN 978-0-521-86965-2 (hardback)
1. Beatles. 2. Rock musicians – England. 3. Rock music – History and criticism.
I. Womack, Kenneth. II. Title. III. Series.
ML421.B4C33 2009
782.42166092 2 – dc22 2009030744
ISBN 978-0-521-86965-2 Hardback

ISBN 978-0-521-68976-2 Paperback
Cambridge University Press has no responsibility for the persistence or

accuracy of URLs for external or third-party internet websites referred to
in this publication, and does not guarantee that any content on such
websites is, or will remain, accurate or appropriate.
For Kenneth E. Zimmerman (1913–2008)
Contents
List of tables [page ix]

Notes on contributors [x]
Foreword: I believe in tomorrow: the posthumous life of the Beatles
Anthony DeCurtis [xiii]
Acknowledgments [xvii]
Chronology of the Beatles’ lives and works [xviii]
Introducing the Beatles Kenneth Womack [1]
Part I • Background
1 Six boys, six Beatles: the formative years, 1950–1962 Dave Laing [9]
Appendix: The repertoire, 1957–1962 [27]
2 The Beatles as recording artists Jerry Zolten [33]
Part II • Works
3 Rock and roll music Howard Kramer [65]
4 “Try thinking more”: Rubber Soul and the Beatles’ transformation
of pop James M. Decker [75]
5 Magical mystery tours, and other trips: yellow submarines, newspaper taxis,
and the Beatles’ psychedelic years Russell Reising and Jim LeBlanc [90]
6 Revolution Ian Inglis [112]
7 On their way home: the Beatles in 1969 and 1970 Steve Hamelman [125]
8 Apple Records Bruce Spizer [142]
9 The solo years Michael Frontani [153]
10 Any time at all: the Beatles’ free phrase rhythms Walter Everett [183]
Part III • History and influence

11 The Beatles as zeitgeist Sheila Whiteley [203]
12 Beatles news: product line extensions and the rock
canon Gary Burns [217]
[vii]
viii Contents
13 “An abstraction, like Christmas”: the Beatles for sale and

for keeps John Kimsey [230]
Notes [255]
Beatles discography, 1962–1970 [286]
Select bibliography [294]
Index [311]
Tables
6.1 Major musical sources of The Beatles [page 122]

10.1 The Beatles’ canon on compact disc [184]
10.2 Representative “floaters” in the Beatles’ music [189]
11.1 Top lies told by people who grew up in the sixties, seventies, or eighties [204]
[ix]
Contributors
Gary Burns is Professor of Communication at Northern Illinois University, Editor of

the journal Popular Music and Society, Executive Secretary of the Midwest Popular
Culture Association, and Vice President of the Popular Culture Association and
American Culture Association.
James M. Decker is Associate Professor of English at Illinois Central College. He is the
author of Ideology (2003) and Henry Miller and Narrative Form: Constructing the
Self, Rejecting Modernity (2005). In addition to contributing numerous articles
to such publications as College Literature and Style, he is editor of Nexus: The
International Henry Miller Journal.
Anthony DeCurtis is a renowned author and music critic who has written for Rolling
Stone, the New York Times, Relix, and a host of other publications. He is the author
of Rocking My Life Away: Writing About Music and Other Matters (1998) and In
Other Words: Artists Talk About Life and Work (2005). He teaches in the creative
writing program at the University of Pennsylvania.
Walter Everett is Professor of Music and Chair of the Department of Music Theory at
the University of Michigan School of Music, Theater, and Dance. He is the author
of the two-volume set The Beatles as Musicians (1999, 2001) and the editor of the
essay collection Expression in Pop-Rock Music (1999), and is currently writing a
book entitled The Foundations of Rock from “Blue Suede Shoes” to “Suite: Judy Blue
Eyes.”
Michael Frontani is Coordinator of American Studies and Associate Professor in the
School of Communications at Elon University, where he teaches courses on film
history, film theory, popular music, and mass culture. He is the author of The
Beatles: Image and the Media (2007), which was selected as a CHOICE Outstanding
Academic Title, and numerous essays on popular music, reception, and culture.
He is currently working on book-length studies of the Italian American image in
American mass consumer society and on American cinema’s development and
evolution within the context of US culture.
Steve Hamelman is Professor of English at Coastal Carolina University, where he
teaches American literature and literary theory. He has written many essays on
early American fiction and pop music. He is the author of But Is It Garbage?
On Rock and Trash (2004), as well as the recipient of Popular Music and Society’s
R. Serge Denisoff Award.
Ian Inglis is Reader in Popular Music Studies at the University of Northumbria. His
doctoral research considered the role of sociological, social-psychological, and
cultural theory in explanations of the career of the Beatles. His books include The
Beatles, Popular Music and Society: A Thousand Voices (2000), Popular Music and
Film (2003), and Performance and Popular Music (2006). He is currently preparing
The Words and Music of George Harrison for Praeger’s Singer-Songwriter series.
[x]
xi Notes on contributors
John Kimsey received his PhD in English from the University of Illinois at Chicago
and serves as Associate Professor in DePaul University’s School for New Learning.
He teaches and writes about modern literature and popular music and has also
worked as a professional musician. His writings have appeared in Sgt. Pepper &
the Beatles: It Was Forty Years Ago Today (2008); Reading the Beatles: Cultural
Studies, Literary Criticism, and the Fab Four (2006); and the Journal of Popular
Music Studies, among other publications.
Howard Kramer is the Curatorial Director of the Rock and Roll Hall of Fame and
Museum in Cleveland, Ohio. Since joining the museum in 1996, Kramer has
curated exhibits on Elvis Presley, the Supremes, Hank Williams, the Doors, Roy
Orbison, Tom Petty and the Heartbreakers, the Beach Boys, and many others. His
writings have appeared in Rolling Stone, the Cleveland Plain Dealer, and Gadfly
Magazine.
Dave Laing is a Visiting Research Fellow at the Institute of Popular Music, University
of Liverpool. His books include The Sound of Our Time (1970) and One Chord
Wonders (1985). He is co-editor of The Faber / Da Capo Companion to Twentieth-
Century Popular Music (1990) and the Continuum Encyclopaedia of Popular Music
of the World (2002–5).
Jim LeBlanc is Head of Database Management Services at the Cornell University
Library, where he has worked since receiving his PhD from Cornell in 1984.
In addition to library-related writing and research, his areas of current schol-
arly interest include popular music, existential phenomenology, and James Joyce
studies.
Russell Reising received his BA in Chinese Studies at Miami University and his
PhD in American literature from Northwestern University in 1983. He teaches
American literature and popular culture at the University of Toledo; he has also
been a Fulbright Teaching Fellow at the University of Jyvaskyla in Finland, and
a Visiting Fellow in Popular Music Studies at the University of Salford. He has
taught, spoken, and published widely on topics in American literature and culture,
Japanese literature and culture, popular culture and popular music.
Bruce Spizer is a first-generation Beatles fan and a life-long native of New Orleans,
Louisiana. He has an extensive Beatles collection, concentrating primarily on
United States and Canadian first-issue records, record promotional items, press
kits, and concert posters. A taxman by day, Spizer is a board-certified tax attorney
and certified public accountant. A paperback writer by night, he is the author
of the critically acclaimed books The Beatles Records on Vee-Jay, The Beatles’
Story on Capitol Records Parts 1 and 2, The Beatles on Apple Records, The Beatles
Solo on Apple Records, and The Beatles Are Coming! The Birth of Beatlemania in
America. His articles on the Beatles are featured regularly in Beatlology Magazine
and Beatlefan.
Sheila Whiteley has written extensively on the Beatles, including chapters in The
Space Between the Notes: Rock and the Counter-Culture (1992), Women and Popular
Music (2000), Mapping the Beat: Popular Music and Contemporary Theory (1998),
“Every Sound There Is”: The Beatles’ Revolver and the Transformation of Rock and
Roll (2002), Reading the Beatles: Cultural Studies, Literary Criticism, and the Fab
Four (2006), and Sgt. Pepper and the Beatles (2008).
xii Notes on contributors
Kenneth Womack is Professor of English at Penn State University’s Altoona College.

He serves as Editor of Interdisciplinary Literary Studies: A Journal of Criticism and
Theory and as Co-Editor (with William Baker) of Oxford University Press’s Year’s
Work in English Studies. He is the author or editor of some twenty books, includ-
ing Postwar Academic Fiction: Satire, Ethics, Community (2001), Key Concepts in
Literary Theory (2002), Reading the Beatles: Cultural Studies, Literary Criticism,
and the Fab Four (2006), Postmodern Humanism in Contemporary Literature and
Culture: Reconciling the Void (2006), and Long and Winding Roads: The Evolving
Artistry of the Beatles (2007).
Jerry Zolten is Associate Professor of Communication Arts and Sciences at Penn
State University’s Altoona College, where he teaches courses on Communications,
American Studies, and Popular Music. He is the producer of CDs by the Fairfield
Four and their bass singer Isaac Freeman, co-host with cartoonist Robert Crumb
of Chimpin’ the Blues, a public radio program on the history of early blues, and
the author of Great God A’Mighty! The Dixie Hummingbirds: Celebrating the Rise
of Soul Gospel Music (2002).
Foreword
I believe in tomorrow: the posthumous life of the Beatles
There is no end to the making of many books about the Beatles, obviously –
and I’m not simply talking about this one. The biographies of the band just
get fatter, as do the biographies of its individual members. Critical studies
proliferate. And it’s not merely books. Magazine and newspaper articles,
blog posts and tributes of various sorts multiply endlessly. The more we
know the more we need to know.
Not only do the Beatles still seem to be everywhere, but they still seem
to matter so much. Paul McCartney’s presence at the Grammy Awards
ceremony amid a host of more contemporary superstars in 2009 elicited
constant comments from the stage, as if being in the presence of a Beatle
titillated even the most jaded celebrities of the music industry. McCartney,
meanwhile, has reincarnated himself as the Fireman and has stormed an
ever-welcoming media, performing in hip contexts and even hosting a
series of “fireside chats” – how perfectly appropriate – on satellite radio.
The tabloid media mark the currents of the sixty-six-year-old cute Beatle’s
romantic life with undiminished zeal and glee, and he’s given them much
to work with.
John Lennon, of course, remains a figure of enormous regard and sig-
nificance, both musical and political. References to him dot the pop culture
landscape, while Yoko Ono has become an avatar of the downtown dance
music scene in New York. Martin Scorsese, meanwhile, works on a doc-
umentary about the life of George Harrison. Even Ringo’s unwillingness
to sign autographs for fans makes international news. Love, the Cirque du
Soleil’s homage to the Beatles’ music, continues to be a long-running hit
in Las Vegas. As I write, the Beatles are soon to have their own version of
the Rock Band video game. The question of when the Beatles’ songs will be
available for digital download is one of the biggest unanswered questions
in what remains of the music industry. And, on the academic front, enter-
prising students will soon be able to take a degree in Beatle Studies, a truly
inevitable development.
So what does this all amount to? Let’s all agree that the Beatles’ music
will last, and deserves to. If that weren’t true, I genuinely believe that no
one would care about the band. (Oh, okay, let’s simply say “many fewer
people.” In the age of the internet, an audience exists for everything.) But
in a turnaround of Gore Vidal’s famed comment (about the Cockettes, if
[xiii] you must know) that sometimes having no talent simply isn’t enough, it’s
xiv Foreword
also true that having enormous talent isn’t enough to sustain the level of
attention that the Beatles have. So what are the reasons for our ongoing
fascination with them?
In one sense the Beatles are like a young artist who died tragically before
his time. As diverse and experimental as the band’s albums are, they serve as
sketches that succeeding generations of musicians have set out in one way
or another to complete. Robert Fripp once told me in an interview that one
of the inspirations for King Crimson was the notion that the Beatles had
abandoned their Sgt. Pepper period without fully exhausting the musical
ideas they had set in motion. It’s not hard to think of bands like Radiohead
or Wilco in similar terms, picking up on and pursuing directions the Beatles
had suggested but never fully defined.
If the Beatles as the inspiration for progressive rock disturbs more than
excites you, perhaps the dozens of power-pop bands who learned wit,
energy and concision from Beatles songs will please you more. The Beatles,
of course, took their own lessons from Buddy Holly, Chuck Berry and Little
Richard, but everyone who came after took their cues in how to create smart,
melodic rock and roll from the Fab Four. And can enough be said about
George Harrison’s exploration of Indian music? Singer-songwriters, too,
who, needless to say, owe their greatest debt to Bob Dylan, often reference
the Beatles. The songs on Rubber Soul and Revolver rank in importance with
Dylan’s early records in creating a model for the enigmatic self-examinations
that would follow in the decades ahead.
It’s often pointed out that, short as it was, the Beatles’ career was in some
senses ideal. The band never were tempted to hang on past their expiration
date, cashing in on their audience’s longing for days gone by and creating
lucrative, mediocre music. Such a grim result was not their only potential
destiny, of course. Dylan, for all of his patchy spots over the past forty years,
has demonstrated that it is possible for a rock and roll musician to create
vital, important work well into their sixties. Neil Young provides an example
of that as well.
But it is much easier for solo artists to accomplish that sort of longevity
than it is for bands. The creative and personal balance required to sustain
a successful band is so delicate that it’s far more remarkable that bands
ever manage to stay together than that they break up. For all the dra-
matic posturing, sniping, business machinations and personal bitterness
that characterized the Beatles’ split, that old cliché “creative differences”
provides as honest an explanation as any other for their estrangement from
one another. Probably more honest, in fact. Paul wanted to get back. John
wanted to move ahead into uncharted territory with Yoko. George wanted
to record his own songs. And Ringo just wanted everyone to get along.
xv Foreword
I’ve written elsewhere about how the Beatles story has the arc of a fairytale
with a heartbreaking ending, and that’s part of the emotional reason why
the story of their rise and fall repeats itself so often. Every time it is told, all of
the joy, optimism and sheer fun of the band’s early days communicate with
exquisite delight. And every time, the ending comes too soon, too soon!
And too sad. Lennon spoke of the Beatles’ breakup as a divorce, and the
band’s fans, it turns out, are the children of that split, even when they were
born decades after it happened. Everyone who learns to love the Beatles
enters their narrative, and travels that not-so-long and winding road with
them. Every time you hear the familiar story again, you yearn for a different
ending, for something truer to the spirit of the band’s music, something
more heartening. And, in the end . . .
I accepted the kind offer to write this Foreword mostly because I never
turn down an opportunity to write about the Beatles – my own version, I
suppose, of that desire to return to the primal scene of my own intellectual
and musical interests to see if somehow, miraculously, the story could end
more happily. I read this book with great pleasure, struck both by how
consistently deep and substantive it is as well as how eminently readable.
The Beatles have had an extraordinary posthumous life, and it’s fair to ask
where the band will go from here. Their albums have long been markers on
the road of rock music history and literacy. Will the inevitable dismantling
of those albums in the digital age diffuse future listeners’ understanding
of the band’s impact? The Beatles, happily, were a great singles band, so it
will always remain possible to enjoy their music. But, along with Dylan, the
Beatles also shattered the hegemony of the single.
The Beatles, it seems to me, are best understood in toto. The early songs
benefit from our knowledge of the complexity of the band’s later work.
The later work’s self-consciousness is mitigated by the effortlessness and
verve of the early songs. The relative brevity of the band’s career enables
even non-specialist fans – among whom I number myself – to gain a three-
dimensional understanding of the band’s music relatively easily.
But how well can the Beatles be understood in bits and pieces – in
downloads (legal or not), mashups, and YouTube videos? In some sense
that’s how young people have been discovering the band for quite some
time now. As millions of parents have learned – and as I’m finding out with
my own three-year-old daughter – children love the Beatles. It will be quite a
while before little Francesca plumbs the depths of Abbey Road or the White
Album. That said, she loves songs from each and, if she so desires, she will
find her way into the full spectrum of the Beatles’ music as I first learned
about the blues through cover versions of individual songs by the Rolling
Stones and the Animals. She’ll pick a starting point and go from there.
xvi Foreword
As I do when I re-encounter the Beatles, Francesca occasionally con-

founds the past, present, and future. She will use the words “yesterday” and
“tomorrow” interchangeably, as a way of saying “not now.” “Remember
what I told you tomorrow?” she asked recently, trying to remind me of
something she had said to me the day before. It struck me as similar to the
temporal blurring I feel whenever I enter the world of the Beatles, where my
own memories, my experiences with members of the band and their wives
and colleagues, and my evolving intellectual comprehension of their music
collide with and color one another.
In my case, that’s somewhat to do with nostalgia, an occasional sin
against the rock critic code that I will admit to, hipsters be damned. As the
world of music fragments, fragments and fragments, the Beatles represent a
time when the notion of popular music meant something beyond millions
of people knowing who you are because you won a singing prize on a TV
show. They are the genius-level consensus choice – for kids and hip-hop
producers, for boomers and millennial bands, for high-minded critics and
casual fans.
When people would ask me in interviews how long I thought the Beatles’
music would last, I would routinely answer, “As long as people care about
popular music” – never imagining that there might come a time when
people didn’t. I do remember, as my daughter put it, what the Beatles
told me tomorrow, back in the past that would indelibly determine my
future. They told me, most importantly, that tomorrow never knows. In
that spirit, this book offers an illuminating guide to all readers who are
moving forward into the precarious world ahead, bringing the Beatles with
them for spiritual nourishment, enriched understanding, necessary insight,
and absolute pleasure.
Anthony DeCurtis
Acknowledgments
This volume would not have been completed without the kindness and gen-
erosity of a host of friends and colleagues. I am indebted to Vicki Cooper
and Becky Jones of Cambridge University Press for their enduring faith in
this project. Thanks are also due to Jo Bramwell, Rosina Di Marzo, Alison
Powell, Laura Evans, and Oliver Lown for their diligence and profession-
alism in seeing this volume through production. I am particularly grateful
for the skill and efforts of my dedicated staff, including Aaron Heresco,
Michele Kennedy, Jacki Mowery, Judy Paul, Annette Smith, Nancy Vogel,
and Sheila Evans. I am especially thankful for the guidance and expertise
of Jerry Zolten, Howard Kramer, Walter Everett, and Amy Mallory-Kani.
Special thanks are due for the encouragement and friendship of Lori J.
Bechtel-Wherry, Todd F. Davis, Dinty W. Moore, and James M. Decker.
Finally, this volume would not exist, quite literally, were it not for the love
and spirit afforded by my wife Jeanine, who makes all things possible.
Kenneth Womack
[xvii]
Chronology of the Beatles’ lives and works
1940 July 7: Ringo Starr [Richard Starkey] born in Liverpool

October 9: John Winston Lennon born in Liverpool
1942 June 18: James Paul McCartney born in Liverpool
1943 February 25: George Harrison born in Liverpool
1957 July 6: McCartney meets Lennon after a Quarrymen

performance at the Woolton Parish Church garden fete
1958 February: Harrison joins Lennon and McCartney as a member

of the Quarrymen
June: the Quarrymen record “That’ll Be the Day” and “In Spite
of All the Danger” at P. F. Phillips Professional Tape and Disk
Record Service in Liverpool
1959 August 29: the Quarrymen begin an extensive engagement at

Mona Best’s Casbah Club in Liverpool
October: the Quarrymen change their name to Johnny and the
Moondogs
1960 January: Stu Sutcliffe wins £65 for his prizewinning painting in
the John Moores Exhibition; Stu purchases a Höfner bass at
Lennon’s behest and becomes the Quarrymen’s bass guitarist
May: Alan Williams becomes the manager of Johnny and the
Moondogs, who change their name, shortly thereafter, to Long
John and the Silver Beetles
May 18: as the Silver Beetles, the band embarks upon a nine-day
Scottish tour in support of Johnny Gentle
August 12: drummer Pete Best joins the band, which changes its
name to the Beatles in advance of its upcoming Hamburg
engagement
August–November: the Beatles perform on the Reeperbahn in
Hamburg, first at the Indra Club and later at the Kaiserkeller
1961 February 9: the Beatles perform at Liverpool’s Cavern Club,

[xviii] eventually becoming the establishment’s regular lunchtime act
xix Chronology of the Beatles’ lives and works
April–July: the Beatles perform on the Reeperbahn in

Hamburg’s Top Ten Club; during this period, McCartney
replaces Sutcliffe as the band’s regular bassist
June: the Beatles record several songs as the Beat Brothers, the
backing band for musician Tony Sheridan
November 9: NEMS record-store owner Brian Epstein watches
the Beatles perform at the Cavern Club
December 10: Brian Epstein officially becomes the Beatles’
manager
1962 January 1: the Beatles audition, unsuccessfully, for Decca

Records in London
January 5: “My Bonnie”/“The Saints” by Tony Sheridan and the
Beatles released by Polydor
April 10: Sutcliffe dies of a brain hemorrhage in Hamburg
April–May: the Beatles perform at Hamburg’s Star-Club
June 6: the Beatles audition at EMI Studios for producer George
Martin, who is impressed with their potential, with the
exception of Best’s drumming ability
August 16: Best is fired from the Beatles
August 18: Starr performs as the Beatles’ drummer for the first
time
August 23: Lennon marries Cynthia Powell
September 11: the Beatles record “Love Me Do,” “Please Please
Me,” and “P.S. I Love You” at EMI Studios
October 5: “Love Me Do”/“P.S. I Love You” single released by
Parlophone; the single reaches no. 17 in the British charts
October: the Beatles return for a brief engagement at Hamburg’s
Star-Club
October 17: the Beatles’ first television appearance on Granada’s
People and Places
November 26: the Beatles complete “Please Please Me” at EMI
Studios
December: the Beatles’ final engagement at Hamburg’s Star Club
1963 January 11: “Please Please Me”/“Ask Me Why” single released by

Parlophone. “Please Please Me” reaches the top position in the
British charts
January 19: the Beatles appear before a nationally televized
audience on Thank Your Lucky Stars
February 11: the Beatles record the Please Please Me album in a
single day’s session at EMI Studios
xx Chronology of the Beatles’ lives and works
March 22: Please Please Me album released by Parlophone

April 11: “From Me to You”/“Thank You Girl” single released by
Parlophone
August 23: “She Loves You”/“I’ll Get You” single released by
Parlophone
October 13: the Beatles perform before a national television
audience of some 15 million viewers on the popular British
variety show Val Parnell’s Sunday Night at the London Palladium.
Beatlemania is born.
November 22: With the Beatles album released by Parlophone
November 29: “I Want to Hold Your Hand”/“This Boy” single
released by Parlophone
1964 February 9: the Beatles perform on the Ed Sullivan Show in New

York City to a nationally televized audience of some 74 million
viewers
March–April: principal photography for A Hard Day’s Night
feature film
March 20: “Can’t Buy Me Love”/“You Can’t Do That” single
June–November: the Beatles’ first world tour
July 6: A Hard Day’s Night premieres at the London Pavilion
July 10: “A Hard Day’s Night”/“Things We Said Today” single
July 10: A Hard Day’s Night album released by Parlophone
November 4: the Beatles’ Royal Variety Command Performance
at the Prince of Wales Theatre
November 27: “I Feel Fine”/“She’s a Woman” single released by
Parlophone
December 4: Beatles for Sale album released by Parlophone
December: the Beatles’ UK winter tour
1965 February 11: Starr marries Maureen Cox

February–May: principal photography for the Help! feature film
April 9: “Ticket to Ride”/“Yes It Is” single released by Parlophone
June–July: the Beatles’ European tour
July 23: “Help!”/“I’m Down” single released by Parlophone
July 29: Help! premieres at the London Pavilion
August 6: Help! album released by Parlophone
August: the Beatles’ North American tour
xxi Chronology of the Beatles’ lives and works
August 15: the Beatles perform at Shea Stadium before an

audience of some 56,000 fans
August 27: the Beatles meet Elvis Presley
October–November: recording sessions for Rubber Soul
October 26: the Beatles receive their MBEs at Buckingham
Palace
December 3: “We Can Work it Out”/“Day Tripper” single
December 3: Rubber Soul album released by Parlophone
December: the Beatles’ final British tour
1966 January 21: Harrison marries Pattie Boyd

April–June: recording sessions for Revolver
June 10: “Paperback Writer”/“Rain” single released by
Parlophone
June–July: the Beatles’ Far East tour
July 29: American magazine Datebook republishes Lennon’s
March 1966 interview in which he proclaims that the Beatles are
“more popular than Jesus”
August: the Beatles’ final American tour
August 5: “Eleanor Rigby”/“Yellow Submarine” single released
by Parlophone
August 5: Revolver album released by Parlophone
August 29: the Beatles play at San Francisco’s Candlestick Park
for their final concert before a paying audience
November 9: Lennon meets Yoko Ono at London’s Indica
Gallery
November–April: recording sessions for Sgt. Pepper’s Lonely
Hearts Club Band
1967 February 17: “Strawberry Fields Forever”/“Penny Lane” single

June 1: Sgt. Pepper’s Lonely Hearts Club Band album released by
Parlophone
June 25: the Beatles perform “All You Need is Love” on the Our
World international telecast
July 7: “All You Need is Love”/“Baby You’re a Rich Man” single
August 24: The Beatles meet the Maharishi Mahesh Yogi at the
London Hilton
xxii Chronology of the Beatles’ lives and works
August 27: Brian Epstein is found dead in London from an

accidental overdose
September–October: principal photography and recording
sessions for the Magical Mystery Tour project
November 24: “Hello, Goodbye”/“I Am the Walrus” single
December 8: Magical Mystery Tour EP released by Parlophone
December 26: Magical Mystery Tour film televized on the BBC
1968 February–April: the Beatles visit the Maharishi’s compound at

Rishikesh
March 15: “Lady Madonna”/“The Inner Light” single released
by Parlophone
May 14: Lennon and McCartney announce the formation of
Apple Corps at a New York City press conference
May–October: recording sessions for The Beatles
July 17: Yellow Submarine cartoon feature premieres at the
London Pavilion
August 30: “Hey Jude”/“Revolution” single released by Apple
November 22: The Beatles album released by Apple
1969 January 2: principal photography for the Get Back project

commences at Twickenham Studios
January 17: Yellow Submarine album released by Apple
January 30: the Beatles’ Rooftop Concert at Apple Studios on
Savile Row
March 12: McCartney marries Linda Eastman
March 20: Lennon marries Yoko Ono
March 21: Allen Klein appointed as business manager for Apple
Corps
April–August: recording sessions for Abbey Road
April 11: “Get Back”/“Don’t Let Me Down” single released by
Apple
May 30: “The Ballad of John and Yoko”/“Old Brown Shoe”
single released by Apple
August 22: the Beatles gather at Lennon and Ono’s Tittenhurst
Park estate for their final photo session
September 26: Abbey Road album released by Apple
October 31: “Something”/“Come Together” single released by
Apple
xxiii Chronology of the Beatles’ lives and works
1970 March 6: “Let It Be”/“You Know My Name (Look Up the

Number)” single released by Apple
April 10: McCartney announces the Beatles’ breakup
May 8: Let It Be album released by Apple
1980 December 8: Lennon is assassinated in New York City
2001 November 29: Harrison dies of cancer in Los Angeles

Cambridge Companions to Music
Topics
The Cambridge Companion to Ballet
Edited by Marion Kant
The Cambridge Companion to Blues and Gospel Music
Edited by Allan Moore
The Cambridge Companion to the Concerto
Edited by Simon P. Keefe
The Cambridge Companion to Conducting
Edited by José Antonio Bowen
The Cambridge Companion to Eighteenth-Century Music
Edited by Anthony R. DelDonna and Pierpaolo Polzonetti
The Cambridge Companion to Electronic Music
Edited by Nick Collins and Julio D’Escriván
The Cambridge Companion to Grand Opera
Edited by David Charlton
The Cambridge Companion to Jazz
Edited by Mervyn Cooke and David Horn
The Cambridge Companion to the Lied
Edited by James Parsons
The Cambridge Companion to the Musical, second edition
Edited by William Everett and Paul Laird
The Cambridge Companion to the Orchestra
Edited by Colin Lawson
The Cambridge Companion to Pop and Rock
Edited by Simon Frith, Will Straw and John Street
The Cambridge Companion to Recorded Music
Edited by Eric Clarke, Nicholas Cook, Daniel Leech-Wilkinson and John Rink
The Cambridge Companion to the String Quartet
Edited by Robin Stowell
The Cambridge Companion to Twentieth-Century Opera
Edited by Mervyn Cooke
Composers
The Cambridge Companion to Bach
Edited by John Butt
The Cambridge Companion to Bartók
Edited by Amanda Bayley
The Cambridge Companion to the Beatles
Edited by Kenneth Womack
The Cambridge Companion to Beethoven
Edited by Glenn Stanley
The Cambridge Companion to Berg
Edited by Anthony Pople
The Cambridge Companion to Berlioz
Edited by Peter Bloom
The Cambridge Companion to Brahms
Edited by Michael Musgrave
The Cambridge Companion to Benjamin Britten
Edited by Mervyn Cooke
The Cambridge Companion to Bruckner
Edited by John Williamson
The Cambridge Companion to John Cage
Edited by David Nicholls
The Cambridge Companion to Chopin
Edited by Jim Samson
The Cambridge Companion to Debussy
Edited by Simon Trezise
The Cambridge Companion to Elgar
Edited by Daniel M. Grimley and Julian Rushton
The Cambridge Companion to Gilbert and Sullivan
Edited by David Eden and Meinhard Saremba
The Cambridge Companion to Handel
Edited by Donald Burrows
The Cambridge Companion to Haydn
Edited by Caryl Clark
The Cambridge Companion to Liszt
Edited by Kenneth Hamilton
The Cambridge Companion to Mahler
Edited by Jeremy Barham
The Cambridge Companion to Mendelssohn
Edited by Peter Mercer-Taylor
The Cambridge Companion to Monteverdi
Edited by John Whenham and Richard Wistreich
The Cambridge Companion to Mozart
Edited by Simon P. Keefe
The Cambridge Companion to Ravel
Edited by Deborah Mawer
The Cambridge Companion to Rossini
Edited by Emanuele Senici
The Cambridge Companion to Schubert
Edited by Christopher Gibbs
The Cambridge Companion to Schumann
Edited by Beate Perrey
The Cambridge Companion to Shostakovich
Edited by Pauline Fairclough and David Fanning
The Cambridge Companion to Sibelius
Edited by Daniel M. Grimley
The Cambridge Companion to Verdi
Edited by Scott L. Balthazar
Instruments
The Cambridge Companion to Brass Instruments
Edited by Trevor Herbert and John Wallace
The Cambridge Companion to the Cello
The Cambridge Companion to the Clarinet
Edited by Colin Lawson
The Cambridge Companion to the Guitar
Edited by Victor Coelho
The Cambridge Companion to the Organ
Edited by Nicholas Thistlethwaite and Geoffrey Webber
The Cambridge Companion to the Piano
Edited by David Rowland
The Cambridge Companion to the Recorder
Edited by John Mansfield Thomson
The Cambridge Companion to the Saxophone
Edited by Richard Ingham
The Cambridge Companion to Singing
Edited by John Potter
The Cambridge Companion to the Violin
Introducing the Beatles
kenneth womack
If the artist could explain in words what he has made, he would not have had to create it.
alfred stieglitz
This book is about the Beatles’ musical art. It is about the songwriting and
recording processes that brought it to fruition, while also studying their
recording career as an evolving text that can be interpreted as a body of work.
But how, then, do we trace the contours of the Beatles’ art? If we understand
a work of art to be both the expression or exploration of a creative impulse
and the process of creating a material object – whether that object be a
novel, a painting, a sculpture, or a song – then we also implicitly recognize
the art work to be the result of an indelibly human drive to communicate a
set of ideas, to draw upon a sustained sense of aesthetics or ethos in order to
establish beauty, and to engage in acts of storytelling in order to generate an
emotional reaction. These latter elements enable the art object to function
as a symbolic vehicle of cultural expression. If we accept the notion of the
Beatles as recording artists, how, then, do we define the principal aesthetic
and literary-musicological elements that inform John, Paul, George, and
Ringo’s enduring “body of work”? In order to comprehend their art as the
result of a creative synthesis, we must work from a set of principles that
assists us in understanding the range of their artistic pursuits as they are
made manifest in the recording studio. With the Beatles, there was a genuine
sense of wonder – a desire, even, for the primitive feel and muscularity
of rock and roll, yet there was also a deeply felt nostalgia that developed
throughout their career, a reverence for the awesome weight of the past, and
a blunt recognition of the creative possibilities and rewards of authorship.
But we’re getting way ahead of ourselves here. Long before Sgt. Pepper
taught the band to play – long before the pressures of real life had reached
their fever-pitch – there were two boys in love with music, gazing upon
a brave new world, and upon each other’s imaginations, under the blue
suburban skies of a Liverpool churchyard. In many ways, the narrative of
the Beatles is – and always will be – their story.
In his classic biography, James Joyce (1959), Richard Ellmann observes
that his volume “enters Joyce’s life to reflect his complex, incessant joining
of event and composition.” In short, Ellmann seeks to understand “the
[1] life of the artist” in order to interpret the great sweep of the novelist’s
2 Kenneth Womack
accomplishment (3). As an artistic fusion, the Beatles merit this same depth
and scope of treatment. The essayists in this volume trace the group’s
creative arc from the band’s earliest recordings through Abbey Road and the
twilight of their career. In so doing, it is my sincere hope that the Cambridge
Companion to the Beatles will reflect the complexity of the Beatles’ work,
while also communicating the nature and power of their remarkable artistic
achievement – both during their heyday and beyond.
In addition to Anthony DeCurtis’s prescient Foreword, this anthology
features a Beatles chronology, as well as such resources as a “General discog-
raphy” of the band’s UK and US recordings through 1970 and a “Select
bibliography” of book-length biographical and critical studies of the Beat-
les. In the Companion’s first section, two contributors address the Beatles’
background, including their early years and their emergence as innovative
songwriters and recording artists. In “Six boys, six beatles: the formative
years, 1950–1962,” Dave Laing traces the early years of the Beatles during
the late 1950s and early 1960s. Laing takes particular care to demonstrate
the future bandmates as express products of the historical process in 1950s-
era England. In addition to documenting their passage from childhood
and adolescence through young adulthood, Laing examines the musical
influences that came together in the personnel of the Quarrymen, Lennon’s
skiffle group, and the early Beatles. In “The Beatles as recording artists,”
Jerry Zolten investigates the technological aspects of the group, as well as
the role of studio wizardry in the formulation of their art. In addition to
discussing the producers and technicians who assisted the Beatles during
their studio years, Zolten identifies the key moments of electronic innova-
tion that propelled the band’s music to new and uncharted sonic heights. In
so doing, Zolten reveals the manner in which the Beatles’ art has not only
weathered but trumped the music of the ages.
In the Companion’s second section, which is devoted to the group’s
album-length productions, the essayists trace the band’s output from Please
Please Me through their solo careers. Howard Kramer’s “Rock and roll
music” traces the Beatles’ growth from their first album, which they recorded
within the space of a single day, through With the Beatles. In addition to
addressing the recording and release of such landmark singles as “She Loves
You” and “I Want to Hold Your Hand,” Kramer discusses the manner in
which the Beatles consolidated their fame at a breakneck, frenzied speed.
Kramer also affords attention to the ways in which the group employed the
sounds of “first generation rock and roll” in the gestation of their own inno-
vative musical foundations. In “‘Try thinking more’: Rubber Soul and the
Beatles’ transformation of pop,” James M. Decker examines Rubber Soul
as the Beatles’ “transitional” album, as the long-playing record in which
they dispensed with high-octane rock and roll in favor of a new sound that
3 Introducing the Beatles
embraces studio technology and the lyricism of pop poetry. Decker devotes
considerable emphasis to the group’s expanding experimental nature in
their work, as well as to their increasing sense of edginess and ambiguity in
their music. With the release of Rubber Soul, Decker argues, the Beatles began
to transcend the creative boundaries of individual tracks in favor of the more
nuanced expression inherent in the album as musical construct. In “Magi-
cal mystery tours, and other trips: yellow submarines, newspaper taxis, and
the Beatles’ psychedelic years,” Russell Reising and Jim LeBlanc explore
the groundbreaking musical accomplishments of the Beatles’ psychedelic
era from Revolver and Sgt. Pepper’s Lonely Hearts Club Band through the
Magical Mystery Tour project. Beginning with the spring of 1966, Reising
and LeBlanc trace the group’s experimentation with psychedelic themes,
sounds, and insights in both their words and their music. In so doing,
Reising and LeBlanc map out the musical dimension of the Beatles’ output
during this period, while also identifying the nature of the musical direction
that would define their latter efforts in the studio.
Ian Inglis’s “Revolution” offers a shrewd reading of the convoluted histor-
ical and cultural context inherent in the labyrinthine recording sessions for
The Beatles (the White Album). Inglis establishes a complex level of acclaim
and uncertainty for the Beatles at the dawn of 1968, ranging from the spell-
binding success of Sgt. Pepper to the critical disdain for Magical Mystery
Tour – not to mention the traumatizing specter of war and assassination
on the international front. Inglis reads the resulting album as a strident
contrast with the careful sense of direction and purpose that marked their
earlier efforts, with the White Album sporting disunity, fragmentation, and
disillusionment as its primary – if not primal – characteristics. In “On their
way home: the Beatles in 1969 and 1970,” Steve Hamelman provides an
expansive analysis of the Beatles’ last recordings, including the Get Back
project and Abbey Road. For Hamelman, the group’s final spate of music –
recorded, for the most part, as the backdrop for the bandmates’ impend-
ing “divorce” – finds the Beatles reaching new artistic heights in terms of
lyricism, and, ironic as it may seem, musical unity. In addition to affording
particular attention to the symphonic suite that closes their career, Hamel-
man addresses the remarkable music synergy that sees the Get Back project
establishing the musical foundation for the Beatles’ swan song on Abbey
Road. In so doing, writes Hamelman, the band “ends with a benediction
(‘And in the end, the love you take / Is equal to the love you make’) sung
sweetly and sincerely to a cushion of strings. The Beatles end the record,
their career in fact, with a couplet worthy of Shakespeare.” Bruce Spizer’s
“Apple Records” examines the peculiar role of Apple Corps in the Beat-
les’ history – particularly as a central creative and economic force during
their final years as an artistic unit and beyond. In addition to tracing the
4 Kenneth Womack
genesis of Apple from holding company to multi-faceted artistic enterprise,

Spizer speculates about the label’s influence during the Beatles’ solo years.
Spizer also identifies the creative and business personalities who piloted the
company during its truncated history.
Walter Everett’s “Any time at all: the Beatles’ free phrase rhythms”
explores the bandmates’ songwriting proclivities in terms of the rhyth-
mic nature of their music. In this powerful work of musicology, Everett
demonstrates that the group’s songs are phrase-based in nature, ultimately
referencing a vast array of compositions throughout their recording career.
As Everett points out, the Beatles’ interest in appropriating their music as
the vehicle for portraying emotional and interpersonal conflicts serves as
the bedrock for their resounding artistic achievement. Michael Frontani’s
“The solo years” offers one of music criticism’s most extensive and thor-
ough examinations of the bandmates’ solo output. Drawing upon John,
Paul, George, and Ringo’s recorded corpus from 1969 through the present,
Frontani enumerates the artistic highs and lows of the ex-Beatles’ solo
careers. Frontani affords special emphasis to the manner in which the for-
mer group members both struggle with and venerate their accomplishments
as a musical unit during the 1960s.
The Companion’s final section, entitled “History and influence,” inves-
tigates the nature of the band’s enduring sociocultural power, as well as
the ways in which successive generations have interpreted the Beatles for
their own purposes and desires. The essayists in this section also impinge
upon the interpersonal, political, and commercial factors that have shaped
the group’s reception and commodification since their disbandment. In
“The Beatles as zeitgeist,” Sheila Whiteley examines the band’s influence
in the 1960s and beyond. Whiteley devotes special attention to the wide-
ranging nature of the Beatles’ inroads into popular culture in terms of
such issues as politics, fashion, commerce, gender, sexuality, and the arts.
Whiteley also discusses the manner in which the Beatles’ influence spans
divergent generations and cultures. In “Beatles news: product line exten-
sions and the rock canon,” Gary Burns addresses the evolution of the Beatles
as a bona fide economic brand. By treating their commercial attainments
separately from their critical status as sociocultural icons, Burns identifies
the bandmates and their representatives as savvy businessmen who have
become increasingly successful during the post-breakup years at promoting
their product. Burns argues that the Beatles’ remarkably fruitful afterlife is
the express result of a deliberate and skillfully marketed product line – a
commercial brand that has been every bit as effective as the band’s inno-
vative and trendsetting artistic model. Finally, John Kimsey’s “‘An abstrac-
tion, like Christmas’: the Beatles for sale and for keeps” offers an extensive
study of the internal and external political dynamics that have shaped the
5 Introducing the Beatles
Beatles’ reception, repackaging, and self-defining (and, indeed, self-

redefining) efforts from 1970 through the present. Kimsey affords con-
siderable attention to such legacy-promoting activities as the Anthology
series of music and videos released during the 1990s; the calculated release
of such albums as 1, Let It Be . . . Naked, and the Capitol Albums; and the
recent success of Love, the band’s Cirque du Soleil venture. In so doing,
Kimsey elucidates a marketing strategy that never loses its momentum, that
never ceases to produce dividends.
part one
Background
1 Six boys, six Beatles: the formative years, 1950–1962
dave laing
The starting point of critical elaboration is the consciousness of what one really is, and is
“knowing thyself” as a product of the historical process to date which has deposited in you an
infinity of traces, without leaving an inventory. Therefore it is imperative at the outset to compile
such an inventory.1 antonio gramsci
Introduction
The chapter deals with the formative years of both the Beatles and the
six youths who were group members in the late 1950s and early 1960s,
including Stuart Sutcliffe and Pete Best, who left the band in 1961 and 1962
respectively. Although it cannot claim to be a complete inventory (to borrow
a term from Gramsci in the quotation above), it is intended to present the
boys and the band as products of the historical process in the England of the
1950s through the presentation of some of the “infinity of traces” deposited
in them by that historical period.
In this account of the dual formation of the group and the six individuals,
I will discuss first the various networks within which the six were enmeshed
as children, adolescents and young men: those of the family and social
class, of the school and youth culture peer group. The second part of
the chapter describes and analyses the musical factors and features that
coalesced to form first the Quarrymen skiffle group and then the early
Beatles.
The data upon which this chapter is based are drawn from published
biographies and autobiographies. These publications are of three types:
authorized biographies such as those of Shepherd, Davies, Miles, and
the Beatles “themselves”;2 unauthorized biographies such as Goldman’s,
Connolly’s, and Sullivan’s psychoanalytical volume;3 and the memoirs
of colleagues, friends, and family such as Epstein, Cynthia Lennon,
and Pauline Sutcliffe.4 The overall quality of this material is uneven,
with a number of errors and discrepancies that have confused the gen-
eral understanding of the early years of the Beatles.5 A useful correc-
tive to much of this is the testimony of Bill Harry, the editor of the
Mersey Beat newspaper from 1961. Many of the articles that appeared
in the newspaper are available on his website (www.triumphpc.com/
mersey-beat).
[9]
10 Dave Laing
War babies
The United Kingdom was at war with Germany and its allies between
1939 and 1945. All six boys were born during that conflict. John Lennon,
Ringo Starr (Richard Starkey), Pete Best and Stuart Sutcliffe were born in
1940, John and Ringo in Liverpool, Pete in India, and Stuart in Scotland.
Paul McCartney and George Harrison were Liverpool-born, in 1942 and
1943 respectively. Although all were infants during the wartime period, the
conflict continued to shape British society and culture for at least the first
decade of peacetime.
One minor but pertinent index of this was John Lennon’s middle name.
Until he replaced it with “Ono,” John’s second forename was Winston, after
the British war leader Winston Churchill. It was a permanent reminder
of his status as a war baby (the name was also very popular for baby
boys in Jamaica, a British colony until 1960) – and there was a set of
Churchill’s works on display in his aunt Mimi and uncle George’s house.
This name became something of a minor obsession with John (perhaps
because Churchill remained a current political figure until the late 1950s,
and regained the post of prime minister from 1951 to 1955). The bio-
graphical literature provides three instances. A Beatles’ instrumental piece
included in a Hamburg set-list was named “Winston’s Walk,”6 and the film
Backbeat shows John telling an anti-German joke onstage in Hamburg:
“My name’s John Winston Lennon, Winston after the butcher.” Finally,
Paul told his biographer of a masturbation session involving several of
the Quarrymen in a darkened room. The ritual was for each boy in turn
to call out the name of a suitable female sex symbol (“Brigitte Bardot,”
etc.) but when it was Lennon’s turn he deflated the erotic mood by saying,
“Winston Churchill.” Even the discarding of the name had some anti-
imperialist significance, according to Yoko, who told one biographer that
John disliked its “implication that he was somehow a subscriber to the spirit
of the upper-class British empire and all that.”7
As a major seaport, Liverpool was one of the main targets of German
bombing in the early part of World War II. Paul McCartney’s biographer
Barry Miles summarized the scale and impact of these air raids:
From the night of 17 August 1940 until 10 January 1942 there were
sixty-eight raids and over five hundred air-raid warnings. Every night
thousands of people huddled together in basements and bomb shelters as
high-explosive, incendiary and parachute bombs rained down upon the city,
killing 2,650, seriously injuring over 2,000 others and leaving much of the
city centre in ruins. The dead were buried in mass graves in Anfield
cemetery. Over 10,000 of the homes in Liverpool were completely destroyed
and over two-thirds of all homes were seriously damaged.8
During the war years, the whole country was militarized. Over 5 million
men and women served in the armed forces, but none of the six boys lost
a close family member in the war, although the bomber pilot father of
Eric Griffiths, a founder member of the Quarrymen, did not return from
a raid over Germany. Millions more people were mobilized on the “home
front.” Jim McCartney (Paul’s father) was rejected by the armed forces
because of defective hearing, but he worked in a munitions factory and
was a volunteer fireman at night. Stuart Sutcliffe’s father was directed to
move from Scotland to Birkenhead on Merseyside to take up a post in the
shipyard that was essential for the war effort. In many cities, young children
were evacuated to the countryside, although it seems that none of the future
Beatles was evacuated from Liverpool.
Even after the air raids had ceased, daily life was subordinated to the war
effort, most notably through rationing. Consumption of twelve foodstuffs
was placed under restriction in 1940 and 1941.9 These ranged from meat,
butter, and cooking fat to sugar, sweets (candy), and chocolate. In 1940,
clothing was rationed and each citizen had an annual number of coupons
that could be exchanged in various combinations at clothing stores. The
British rock and roll singer Marty Wilde recalled that gray, brown, and
black “were all the colours I associate with the war. Almost everything
was grey. It wasn’t until the Fifties that all colours started to come in
clothes.”10
The depleted state of the British economy meant that rationing was not
lifted at the end of World War II. Of the rationed items, only preserves
(jams and marmalade) were de-rationed and freely available before 1952.
In that year, tea was taken “off ration,” but meat, butter, sweets (candy) and
chocolate were not de-rationed until the middle of 1954. Clothing coupons
remained in force until 1948. There were also severe restrictions on imports
from abroad, a decision taken to protect Britain’s limited reserves of foreign
currency. Among the commodities affected were musical instruments, and
it was not possible to import American guitars until the end of the 1950s,
when the rock and roll singer Cliff Richard bought one of the first Fender
Stratocasters to be seen in Britain for his guitarist, Hank Marvin of the
Shadows. The inaccessibility of American instruments in the 1950s meant
that the first guitars of aspiring young players were often poorly made
imports from continental Europe.
While the wartime army was gradually demobilized after 1945, conscrip-
tion or National Service was introduced in 1947 for young men. National
Service cast a shadow over members of the Beatles until, in 1959, the gov-
ernment announced that National Service would be abolished in 1961,
the year in which Ringo, John, Pete and Stu would have become eligible
for call-up. The fear of conscription had been enough to prevent Ringo
12 Dave Laing
committing himself to a full-time career as a musician with leading Liver-

pool group Rory Storm and the Hurricanes. When he heard that National
Service was to be abolished, his first thought was “‘Great, now we can play,’
and I left the factory and turned professional with Rory.”11 Paul McCart-
ney went further by hypothesizing that if National Service had not been
abolished, and if John, in particular, had been forced to do two years’ mil-
itary service, the Beatles would have split up: “So that was great luck, the
government just stopped it in time, allowing us the parting of the waves,
and we went through and we had the freedom and the sixties.”12 The band
had, in fact, been directly affected in 1960, when a drummer called Norman
Chapman, who had played with the Beatles for three weeks, received his
conscription papers.13
British popular culture was saturated with war stories, humour, and
references during the 1950s. Second World War movies, made in both the
US and Britain, poured into the cinemas, war stories featured in children’s
illustrated magazines, and Lennon’s favourite radio series, The Goon Show,
had its roots in the anarchic humour of World War II conscripts.14
Family life
In a classic study published in the 1950s, the British sociologist Peter Town-
shend made a distinction between the immediate family and the extended
family. Of the six households in which the boys grew up, all except that of
John Lennon conformed to the immediate family model of “one or both
parents and their unmarried children living in one household.”15 However,
if the model is limited to the ideal type of “both parents” living with their
children, only the Harrisons fully qualify. As Peter Brown put it, “George was
the only Beatle whose childhood was not marred by divorce [or] death.”16
The position of each household was as follows.
Paul McCartney lived with his father Jim (a cotton salesman), mother
Mary (a nurse and midwife), and younger brother Michael, until his mother
died in 1956, when he was fourteen. John Lennon lived from the age of five
with his childless maternal aunt Mimi and uncle George Smith, owner of a
small dairy, who died when John was fifteen. John’s father Alfred, a ship’s
steward, had separated from his mother Julia when John was three, and
Julia had given him up to Mimi when she found a new partner, Bobby
Dykins, with whom she had two daughters. Julia died in a road accident
when John was seventeen. George Harrison lived with his bus driver father
Harold, mother Louise, and older siblings Harry, Louise, and Peter. George’s
mother gave ballroom dancing lessons, and his father was a trade unionist
and committee member of a bus workers’ social club, where the Beatles
(as the Quarrymen) once performed. Ringo Starr, born Richard Starkey,
was an only child whose bakery worker father Richard separated from his
mother Elsie when he was three. As a child, Ringo spent long periods in
hospital with peritonitis and, later, pleurisy. Elsie supported herself and
her son through housework and as a barmaid, remarrying when Ringo
was fourteen. His stepfather was Harry Graves, a painter and decorator
from Romford, near London. Pete Best lived with his Anglo-Indian mother
Mona, his grandmother, his boxing promoter father Johnny, and brother
Rory. Mona met and married Johnny, who was from a Liverpudlian family,
when the latter was serving in the British Army in India. When Pete was
fifteen, his parents separated and his father left the family home. His mother
later had a child by Neil Aspinall, the Beatles’ road manager. Stuart Sutcliffe
lived with his father Charles, schoolteacher mother Martha (known as
Millie), and sisters Joyce and Pauline. Each of his parents worked away from
home for long periods. After his war work, Charles joined the merchant
navy as an engineer in 1945. Millie never liked Liverpool and around 1952
she temporarily returned to Scotland to work. She was a member of the
Labour Party and an active worker for local Member of Parliament Harold
Wilson, who would become Prime Minister in 1964.
These brief family portraits show that only the Harrisons were a nuclear
family unaffected by death, divorce, or separation; while the Sutcliffe house-
hold was not broken, Stu’s sister wrote that with her husband away at sea,
Millie “essentially . . . became a single parent.”17 John’s adolescence was the
most disturbed, by separation from his mother and the deaths of George
and Julia.
Townshend defined the extended family as relatives of the immediate
family “who live in one, two or more households, usually in a single locality,
and who see each other every day, or nearly every day.”18 Townshend derived
his definition from a study of a strongly working class district of East
London. In the six families of the Beatles, both John and Paul were part
of an extended family. In John’s case, this principally involved his regular
contact with his mother, especially in his teenage years, although Julia and
Millie had two other sisters, and Stuart’s sister Pauline has written that “one
of John’s uncles was Paul’s English teacher.”19 In the case of the McCartneys,
there was a strong link with the family of his paternal uncle, who had played
in a band with Paul’s father in the 1920s; and Barry Miles writes of “a large
extended family of aunts and uncles and cousins”20 who gave direct support
after the death of Paul’s mother. In his authorized biography, Paul mentions
the Communist husband of a cousin who would regularly visit his father
and indulge in political argument.
The existence of an extended family is predicated on the geographical
immobility of generations, and five of the six Beatles had roots in Liverpool
14 Dave Laing
stretching back for two generations or more. Beyond that point, ancestors of
John, Paul, and Ringo have been traced to Ireland, making these three part
of the considerable Liverpool Irish community. However, the biographers
of George, Ringo, and Pete do not refer to any wider family network within
Liverpool. This may imply that none of these lived within an extended
family network, or simply that such issues are of no interest to biographers
of rock stars. Stuart Sutcliffe had no local extended family, because of the
mobility of his parents, who had moved from Edinburgh in Scotland to
Merseyside when Stuart was two. Similarly, no local extended family existed
on Pete’s mother’s side of the family, as she was Anglo-Indian.
Two further features of the family background are religious affiliation
and social class. While the 1950s was an era when observance of the main
Christian religions was in decline in England as a whole, in certain areas
it remained a potent force with sectarian connotations. Such affiliations
with either Roman Catholicism or Protestantism had been an important
component of Liverpool Irish culture, and Paul’s mother was an ardent
Catholic, as was Stuart’s Scottish-born mother. In his contribution to The
Beatles Anthology, Ringo stated that as a child he “was a Protestant, my
mother had been a member of the Orange Lodge,”21 an indication that this
was Ulster Protestantism, a virulent strain of nonconformist Christianity
that contrasted with the less intense Anglicanism that led Mimi to send John
to the Woolton Sunday school and enrol him in the church choir. Ringo
added, in what can be presumed to be a deadpan tone, that in Liverpool the
Irish Protestants would “beat up” the Irish Catholics on St Patrick’s Day,
and the reverse would occur on July 12, “Orangeman’s Day.”22
Biographers and historians have differed widely in their evaluation of
the social and economic position of the family of each Beatle. In Postwar,
a history of Europe since 1945, Tony Judt (an Englishman teaching at New
York University) stated confidently that the Beatles “came from the Liver-
pool working class, with the exception of Paul McCartney who was a notch
or two above.”23 Dominic Sandbrook, in his account of the UK in the 1950s,
opined that only Ringo “had a genuine claim to working-class origins,”24
possibly echoing Ian McDonald’s comment that “the only working class
member of the group was Starr.”25 Sandbrook disqualified George Harrison
(the son of a trade unionist and public housing tenant) from the working
class because “his childhood had been reasonably comfortable.”26 A third
commentator, Paul’s authorized biographer Barry Miles, wrote that John
was “middle class, the product of a broken home,” whereas Paul was “from
a warm working-class family.”27
These striking disagreements serve to confirm Henry Sullivan’s observa-
tion that “the British class system is slippery,”28 and his further contention
that “Paul’s social background belonged in that shadowy area of the British
class structure between the working class and the lower middle class”29 can
serve as a general statement about the six Beatles as a whole.
The “slippery” character of the class system is in large part a matter
of definition. A Marxist approach based on the relationship of individual
economic agents to the “means of production” would distinguish between
George Smith and Johnny Best as entrepreneurs or small-business owners
and everyone else as employees of various kinds. The official categories of
employment used by British government agencies are based on job status.
They place professionally qualified workers such as nurses, engineers, and
teachers in the lower middle class, above skilled working class occupations
such as bus-driving and unskilled work such as that of Elsie Starkey. A
third dimension that should be taken into account is the perception of
individuals and families of their own position in the social hierarchy and
their aspirations for the future. The individual with the greatest awareness
in this respect seems to have been John’s aunt Mimi, and Sullivan speaks
for most commentators when he writes that “Mimi’s class ideals were those
of the bourgeoisie.”30 Several authors have recounted her initial snobbish
disdain for George because of his broad local accent. Mimi’s ideals, of
course, provided something for John to rebel against.
The boundary between lower middle and working class was extremely
porous, not only because individuals or members of different generations of
a family could easily move “up” or “down” the social hierarchy, but because
in the 1950s members of these adjacent social classes shared a common
culture that might be based on religion, politics, or moral schema. This was
most emphatically the case for the war baby generation whose middle class
and working class members were brought together by changes in the British
school system and by the emergence of a youth culture based primarily on
music.
School, work, and youth culture

The British secondary school system was radically reorganized by the 1944
Education Act,31 a meritocratic measure that introduced a tripartite struc-
ture in the state school sector of grammar, secondary modern, and technical
schools. Access to grammar schools was via success in the “11-plus” exam-
ination, taken by all final year primary school students. Primary schooling,
from the age of five to eleven, was co-educational (boys and girls together),
and often schools were run by religious denominations, Anglican, Roman
Catholic, or Jewish.
Across England, the number of children admitted to grammar schools
averaged about 30 per cent,32 although this varied between areas. Paul
16 Dave Laing
McCartney was one of only four out of ninety children at Joseph Williams
Primary School to do well enough to be awarded a place at the prestigious
Liverpool Institute. Five of the six Beatles passed the 11-plus and entered
single-sex grammar schools on Merseyside: Lennon went to Quarry Bank
High School, Best to Liverpool Collegiate, McCartney and Harrison to
the Liverpool Institute, and Sutcliffe to Prescot Grammar School. Almost
inevitably, because of his long absence from primary school through illness,
Ringo failed the exam and went to Dingle Vale Secondary Modern school.
Although numerous working class children attended grammar schools,
many failed to adapt to the academic environment.33 Among them were
John and George. Both left school early, John to go to art college and George
to find work.
Stuart had a parent who had attended grammar school, and he passed
the examinations, as eventually did Paul and Pete. All three had plans for
further study. Stu attended Liverpool College of Art, where he met John,
while Pete and Paul had nascent plans to train as schoolteachers. When the
offer was made for the Beatles to play in Hamburg in summer 1960, these
plans were put on hold (permanently, as it turned out).
George and Ringo were the only Beatles who ever had paid employ-
ment outside music. Ringo had a succession of full-time jobs after leaving
secondary modern school with no examination passes. These included
working as a delivery boy for British Rail, barman-waiter on the Mersey
ferry, and apprentice joiner. While at school, George had a Saturday job as
a butcher’s delivery boy. After school, he was apprenticed as an electrician
at a department store.
According to the biographical literature, Paul was the only Beatle to
benefit culturally from the school syllabus. Through his English teacher,
Alan Durband, he was introduced to a wide range of poetry and drama,
from Shakespeare to Beckett.34 However, grammar schools and art col-
leges were also informal incubators of unofficial youth culture as stu-
dents shared and exchanged new knowledge of music, fashion, films, and
books.
In the 1950s the new generation-specific youth cultures existed along-
side, and sometimes in tension or conflict with, traditional institutions for
the socialization of children. As a young child, John Lennon attended a
Church of England Sunday school, was a member of the church choir, and,
later, attended a youth club attached to the church. Paul was a Boy Scout,
Ringo a Sea Scout, and Stu a member of the Air Training Corps, while
George was a motor racing enthusiast, attending the 1955 Aintree Grand
Prix. However, none of the future Beatles seems to have been a special fan
of either of Liverpool’s fanatically supported soccer teams, Liverpool and
Everton.
Against that was set the discovery of rock and roll through radio broad-
casts and the records discovered by schoolmates. A more directly confronta-
tional practice was the subversion of school uniform through adopting styles
of dress associated with the “Teddy boy” subculture.35 The Liverpool Insti-
tute, attended by George and Paul, had a school uniform of black shoes,
gray flannel trousers, blazer, white shirt, and tie. George (but not Paul)
customized his Teddy boy clothes to wear to school. George’s home-made
outfit included a cast-off box jacket of his brother’s and a pair of flannel
trousers whose legs were “drainpiped” or narrowed. He also had a Teddy
boy “quiff” hairstyle.36
Simon Frith and Howard Horne have documented the important role
of local art colleges in disseminating unorthodox ideas and cultural prac-
tices, as well as the time and space they provided for artistic (including
musical) experimentation.37 At Liverpool College of Art, John was intro-
duced by Stu and Bill Harry to the work of the American beat gener-
ation, and Paul has said that John was a “bohemian Teddy boy” at art
college.38 The Sutcliffe–Harry–Lennon circle occasionally overlapped with
a nascent British beat scene,39 and Royston Ellis, a youthful beat poet,40
was reportedly backed by John, Paul, and George at a poetry reading in a
Liverpool coffee bar. John and Stu also received lurid publicity as beatniks
and bohemians in July 1960, when a national newspaper published pho-
tographs of their pad at Gambier Terrace under the headline “The Beatnik
Horror.”41
Bill Harry encouraged John’s humorous writings, eventually publishing
them in 1961 under the pseudonym “Beatcomber” (a pun on the national
newspaper humorist Beachcomber) in early issues of Harry’s local music
paper Mersey Beat. John was drawn to comedy performance; he went to see
variety shows at Liverpool Empire, starring acts such as Morecambe and
Wise, Jimmy James, and Robb Wilton,42 and he had begun to write poems
and nonsense stories influenced by Edward Lear, Stanley Unwin, the Goons,
and others at a very early age. When these were published in book form in
1968,43 Michael Wood described Lennon’s humour as mainly composed of
jokes that “have already seen good service in most grammar schools in this
country.”44
Early music training and experience

While the rise of rock and roll is often portrayed in terms of a generation
gap or clash, each of the six Beatles received encouragement from parents
or other relatives in their early musical endeavours. The major exception to
this process was John Lennon’s Aunt Mimi, who often displayed hostility
18 Dave Laing
to his practice sessions and performances with the Quarrymen and the
Beatles, although she did buy him a guitar.
Of the future Beatles, only George Harrison and Pete Best had no musi-
cal experience prior to the skiffle and rock and roll era. Each of the others
received musical training or instruction in the years before 1956. The Sut-
cliffe children had piano lessons at an early age, and Stuart also sang in a
church choir. At the other extreme, Ringo first beat out a rhythm during
a hospital therapy session. He maintained his interest on leaving hospital
when his stepfather paid for his first drum kit.
In very different ways, both Paul and John came from families with
a history of professional music-making, a background that ensured that
music would play a role in their early lives. Like Stuart, Paul had piano
lessons but also learned harmony from his father, the erstwhile leader of
Jim Mac’s Jazz Band. Jim’s own father had been a brass band player, in the
works band of Cope’s, a local factory.45 Paul was given a trumpet for his
fourteenth birthday, which he soon swapped for a guitar. He learned how
to play left-handed from seeing a picture of Slim Whitman, the American
country artist with a big UK following – Whitman had a number one hit in
1955 with “Rose Marie.”
His mother, Julia, taught John the banjo. She had learned the instrument
from John’s father, who had performed in the 1930s as an amateur with his
brother. Further back in the Lennon line, John’s grandfather Jack had emi-
grated to the United States with his parents and toured with a professional
minstrel troupe before returning to Liverpool, where he died in 1921.
However, what galvanized five of the six future Beatles into intensive
musical activity was the example of Lonnie Donegan and his skiffle group.
Then, like thousands of other British youths, these skiffle musicians turned
to rock and roll.
Skiffle, rock and roll, and the Quarrymen

Skiffle was a curiously British phenomenon. It was played by acoustic,
guitar-based groups with rhythm sections consisting of washboards and
tea-chest basses. The skiffle repertoire combined (white) American folk
songs, both traditional and newly composed (notably by Woody Guthrie),
with blues and other material from the African American tradition, learned
mostly from the recordings of Leadbelly. Sometimes, British folk tunes or
music hall songs were added to the mix. The spark that lit the prairie fire of
the skiffle boom in Britain was the success of Lonnie Donegan’s recording of
Leadbelly’s “Rock Island Line.” Donegan’s version was faster, more febrile
and more hoarse than the original. “Rock Island Line” and other releases
were hits, and Donegan toured extensively, including playing for a week
at the Liverpool Empire theatre in November 1956, where he was seen
by several future Beatles. The thirteen-year-old George Harrison got his
autograph.46
However, skiffle’s historical significance was not as a genre of music but
as a musical event, one which transformed the instrumental locus of musica
practica, defined by Roland Barthes in a 1970 essay of the same name as
“music one plays” rather than “music one listens to.” Barthes wrote that the
role of the drawing room piano had been taken by “another public, another
repertoire, another instrument (the young generation, vocal music, the
guitar).”47
In 1957, 250,000 guitars were sold in Britain, compared with an average
of 5,000 per year between 1950 and 1955.48 The guitars were strummed,
and the initial skiffle repertoire of songs was shared, by maybe hundreds of
skiffle groups throughout Britain.
The prehistory of the Beatles as a band can be traced to the formation
of the Quarrymen skiffle group around May 1956. The evolution of the
band can be examined in two dimensions; through its changing repertoire
and performance style (skiffle to Merseybeat and rock), and through its
changing personnel, which transformed its ethos from that of a homosocial
friendship group or gang to an equally homosocial professional band whose
membership was based primarily on musical skill and compatibility.
The classic ethnographic, participant-observation description of the
transformation of a gang into a music group is the article “Beat and Gangs on
Merseyside,” written by Colin Fletcher, a Merseyside student, and published
in the magazine New Society in February 1964. Fletcher had been a member
of a street gang that was inspired to form its own group by such records as
“That’ll Be the Day”: “What mattered now was not how many boys a gang
could muster for a Friday night fight but how well their group played on
Saturday night.”49
Liverpool gangs have a peripheral role in the early history of the Beatles,
appearing mainly as menacing forces at dances and concerts where the band
played, although Ringo had a closer relationship to a gang in the Dingle,
where he grew up.50 The “gang” from which the Quarrymen emerged
was less aggressive, being based on John Lennon’s troupe of friends from
primary school, whose infamies were limited to stealing candies from the
village shop and misbehaving at the church youth club. If they were modeled
on any gang, it was William and the Outlaws, heroes of a whimsical series
of children’s books by Richmal Crompton that were among John’s favorite
reading as a child.
The nucleus of the Quarrymen consisted of John and two of his gang,
Pete Shotton and Eric Griffiths. They recruited another Quarry Bank School
20 Dave Laing
boy, Rod Davis, who had attended Sunday school with John and Pete and
was a “good” boy who had acquired a banjo, while gang member Len
Garry took over the bass from another schoolboy who had not turned up
to rehearsals. Another early member, Colin Hanton, was brought into the
Quarrymen because he owned a drum kit.
At the beginning the Quarrymen were a wholly typical skiffle group
of the 1956–7 period, as were the Rebels, a very short-lived group formed
by George Harrison and his gang of school friends. The name Quarrymen
connoted an archaic American rural ethos, while containing a Lennonesque
pun on the name of his school.
The songs performed by the Quarrymen in their early months included
Donegan’s hits and those of other skiffle groups.51 The group’s repertoire
additionally included “Maggie May,” a Liverpool anthem and the only song
from this era to be recorded by the Beatles.
I have referred to the Quarrymen as “homosocial,” a term used by Eve
Kosofsky Sedgwick to describe single-sex affinity groups. These were distinct
from homosexual relationships and institutions, although to be homosocial
did not preclude an element of sexual contact: “For a man to be a man’s man
is separated only by an invisible, carefully blurred, always-already-crossed
line from being ‘interested in men.’”52
Many aspects of English society in the 1950s were homosocial in char-
acter. Secondary schools were a prime example; there were few integrated
grammar or secondary modern schools that admitted both boys and girls.
Many employment situations were similarly segregated. In Liverpool, only
men worked at the docks or on the transatlantic and other ships. Almost all
employees at clerically based companies such as Littlewoods and Vernons,
which operated football pools, were women, who checked the betting slips
by hand. Vernons, in fact, had a female choir that, in a smaller version,
recorded as the Vernons Girls. Many traditional pubs and drinking clubs
still had bars that did not admit women.
Both the Quarrymen and the Beatles reflected the homosocial ethos
of the era, something emphasized by the occasional threat to their homo-
geneity by women. Apart from Liverpool singer Cilla Black, no woman
performed with the band. Even then, John Lennon betrayed an uneasiness
when he “jokingly” referred to her from the stage of the Cavern as “Cyril,”
a masculine name. Cynthia would later describe the Beatles as “a marriage
of four minds, three guitars and a drum.”53 The issue of homosociality was
given a twist by the cultural association of singing and musical performance
with the female. A very young Lennon said to Pete Shotton: “They say you’re
a cissy . . . But you’re not a cissy, all right? Singing’s all right.” The occasion
was a trip to a secluded spot where the boys would sing out of sight and
earshot of others.54
Both the nature of the Quarrymen repertoire and its friendship group
character underwent major changes during the group’s career. From an early
stage, its “manager,” Nigel Whalley (another of John’s gang), described
its music on his business card as “Country. Western. Rock ’n’ Roll.
Skiffle.”
The Quarrymen’s career as a “pure” skiffle group was therefore brief, to
the dissatisfaction of Rod Davis. Rock and roll songs soon came to dominate
their repertoire. The first Elvis hit in the UK, “Heartbreak Hotel,” came in
May 1956, a few months after “Rock Island Line” became a hit, and before
the foundation of the group, which probably took place in September
or October.55 John Lennon was an instant Elvis fan and he introduced
“Heartbreak Hotel,” “Jailhouse Rock,” and “Don’t Be Cruel.”
In the early years, they found songs in various places. A school friend,
Mike Hill, played a record by Little Richard to John sometime in 1956 and
had to inform John that the singer was black. The following year, Paul and
John “went across town” looking for a copy of “Searchin” by the Coasters:
“Colin Hanton knew some guy that had it, but we had to get on the bus, do
two changes of bus routes . . . So we got the words, and I think we stole the
record.”56
The critical point in the history of the Quarrymen was of course the day
John met Paul in July 1957. Paul was already indirectly linked with Lennon’s
“gang” via his friendship with Ivan Vaughan, a childhood member of the
gang who now attended the same school as Paul. Impressed with Paul’s
musicianship, Ivan now invited him to attend the Quarrymen’s performance
at the St. Peter’s Church, Woolton, garden fete, an event whose musical range
included brass band music from the Band of the Cheshire Yeomanry as well
as skiffle and rock.
In her memoir of the day of the fete, Lennon’s half-sister, Julia Baird,
wrote: “We found the gang, the group, on the third or fourth lorry [of
a procession].”57 This was the day the Quarrymen began their gradual
transformation from an activity of the Lennon gang into a group whose
membership was determined mainly by musical skill.
Paul had not been in a skiffle group, though he admired Donegan. By
the middle of 1957 he was already a rock and roll aficionado. He and his
younger brother Michael listened to broadcasts from Radio Luxembourg in
bed.58 They performed an Everly Brothers song at a Butlins holiday camp
talent contest in the summer of 1957, shortly after Paul met John.
At the Woolton fete, Paul was impressed by John’s transgression – chang-
ing the words of the Dell-Vikings soft rock love song “Come Go with Me”
by adding skiffle-type language about a “penitentiary.”59 John, in turn,
was impressed by Paul’s orthodox musical skills – he knew chords and the
“correct” lyrics to Eddie Cochran’s song “Twenty Flight Rock.”
22 Dave Laing
Paul joined the Quarrymen and played at their occasional gigs during the
rest of 1957. The balance of the group changed irrevocably when Paul finally
persuaded John to admit George Harrison in the early part of 1958. Still
aged only fifteen, George had played occasionally with a local skiffle/rock
band, the Les Stewart Quartet, and had auditioned for the Texans, a group
led by Alan Caldwell, who, as Rory Storm, would hire Richard Starkey as
drummer for the Hurricanes and change his name to the Western-sounding
Ringo Starr.
By the end of 1958, the group had been reduced to the trio of John, Paul,
and George, plus occasional drummers, a situation that would continue
until Pete Best became the permanent drummer in mid-1960. The shift to
a fully musician-oriented group was exemplified in the departure of Eric
Griffiths. He was asked by the other members to become the bass guitarist,
but he didn’t want to take on the hire purchase loan needed to buy a guitar
and amplifier.
The trio were seen dismissively as a “Bohemian clique” by Johnny
Gustafson of the Big 3, a leading Liverpool band of the era. With few
paid engagements, John, Paul, George and, occasionally, Len Garry on bass
would do acoustic sets at lunchtimes at the art college, playing Buddy Holly
and Everly Brothers numbers (often with new, ruder words improvised by
John).60
Perhaps the most important feature of the early Lennon-McCartney
relationship was their determination to write songs as well as perform cover
versions of other people’s songs. British popular music had no tradition of
singers writing their own songs, with the exception of certain comedy or
novelty performers from the music hall to George Formby and the Goons.
And the Beatles were unique among their Liverpool contemporaries in
composing and performing their own material.
John and Paul started trying to co-write in the summer of 1957, soon
after they met. They would play truant from art college and the Liver-
pool Institute to use Paul’s house while Jim McCartney was at work. Paul
had already composed his first song, “I Lost My Little Girl,” which was
written shortly after his mother’s death. He also occasionally wrote with
George; a McCartney-Harrison composition, “In Spite of All the Danger,”
was included on the group’s first privately recorded acetate, with Buddy
Holly’s “That’ll Be the Day.”
As already noted, John had been improvising lyrics to existing songs,
and this skill was brought to the co-writing sessions. The first successfully
composed Lennon-McCartney songs included “One After 909,” “Winston’s
Walk,” “Like Dreamers Do,” and “Love Me Do”; the last-mentioned was
written in 1958 but not recorded and released as the first Beatles single
produced by George Martin until four years later.61
The final performance of the Quarrymen took place in August 1959 at

the opening of the Casbah, a club organized by Mona Best in the basement
of her house. All vestiges of skiffle had been sloughed off, and John, Paul,
and George were the nucleus of a group with no name.
The Beatles
There is no definite moment at which the Beatles emerged from the Quar-
rymen like a butterfly from a chrysalis. The group performed as Johnny and
the Moondogs at a Manchester talent show in November 1959 (the winners
were Ricky and Dave, the stage name of future Hollies members Graham
Nash and Allan Clarke). They became the Silver Beetles for an audition for
the London-based impresario Larry Parnes and for a subsequent tour of
Scotland, backing Parnes’s singer Johnny Gentle, in May 1960. Some of the
Silver Beetles adopted individual stage names for the Scottish tour: Paul and
George were Paul Ramon and Carl Harrison, while Stu Sutcliffe on bass was
Stu de Stael, after a famous modern painter. Finally, in this avalanche of
names, John and Paul had performed the previous month at Paul’s cousin’s
pub in Caversham, Berkshire, as the Nerk (or Nurk) Twins.62 The name was
taken from a character in John’s beloved Goon Show.
However, by the time of the first trip to Hamburg in August 1960,
“the Beatles” had been definitively adopted as the group name. Most early
commentators believed that this name was a tribute to the Crickets, the
name of Buddy Holly’s group, both crickets and beetles being species of
insect. However, anecdotal evidence from interviews and autobiographical
sources has suggested that the name was inspired by the film The Wild
One, where the girlfriends of the motorcycle gang were known as “beetles.”
Quoted by his authorized biographer, Paul explained how the making of
the Anthology television series in 1994 led him to investigate the issue and to
conclude that the latter explanation was probably correct: “We were actually
named after chicks, which I think is fabulous.”63 This androgynous element
of the homosocial group was interestingly echoed in the Beatles’ fondness
for girl group songs such as “Baby It’s You” and “Boys” by the Shirelles and
“Chains” by the Cookies.64
The important period of less than a year between the Manchester talent
show and the Hamburg booking saw a step-change in the types of perfor-
mance given by the group. In place of the occasional paid booking and the
art college shows, there were a competition, a tour, and a foreign residency.
Each provided a new challenge and test for the nascent Beatles. For the
competition and the Parnes audition, the task was to impress judges, not
fans. For the tour, the group had to learn how to extend their range to
24 Dave Laing
encompass another artist’s style and to adjust to alien audiences; they had
never before played outside Merseyside.
The Beatles only partly met those challenges, the greatest being the Ham-
burg residency, first because of the need to solidify the group’s membership.
While it had been possible to get through the Johnny Gentle tour with a
temporary drummer (Tommy Moore), two or more months at a single
venue demanded more permanent commitments. To complement the lead
guitar of George and the twin rhythm guitars of John and Paul, a permanent
drummer and electric bass player were needed.
Stu Sutcliffe had joined as a bass player at the end of 1959. However,
his credentials for joining the group were closer to those of the original
Quarrymen – personal friendship – than to the quality of musicianship that
brought Paul and George into the band. Stu was John’s closest art college
friend. He was a talented painter but an untried musician. Nevertheless, John
persuaded him to spend the money from the sale of a painting exhibited at
a Walker Art Gallery event on a new bass guitar, and persuaded the others
to accept Stu as a group member. As a potential drummer for Hamburg, the
trio successfully approached Pete Best of the Blackjacks, who was already
known to them because of the club run by his mother, Mona.
The group spent five months of 1960 playing in Hamburg clubs. The
importance of this period for the evolution of the group was threefold:
the band learned how to communicate with audiences, they became a
wholly integrated unit, and they learned from playing alongside or near an
international range of other musicians.
The Beatles were faced with a totally new performance context. They
were expected to play, with brief intervals, for up to eight hours a night
to foreign (mostly non-English-speaking) audiences, and to prevent the
audiences from drifting off to other clubs in the Reeperbahn red light dis-
trict. After an unsuccessful beginning, they responded to the club owner’s
instruction to mach schon (make a show) by devising dynamic and often
comic stage moves, together with elongating three-minute songs using
extended solos and repetitive choruses. John claimed with a little exagger-
ation that “Paul would do [Ray Charles’s] ‘What’d I Say’ for an hour and
a half.”65
The demands of the eight-hour show clarified the onstage relationships
between group members, especially in vocal arrangements. According to
Paul, they “sang close harmony on the little echo mikes and made a fairly
good job of it. It used to sound pretty good, actually.”66 Finally, the group
learned much about stagecraft and performance dynamics from other bands
and singers on the Reeperbahn. The most notable of these in 1960 was the
uninhibited English singer and guitarist Tony Sheridan, but the group was
able to observe other leading Liverpool bands, including Rory Storm and
the Hurricanes. The Dutch scholar Lutgard Mutsaers has argued that the
Beatles were also influenced by “Indorock” groups formed by Indonesian
immigrants to the Netherlands, who were prominent on the Hamburg scene
in 1960.67
The 1960 residency in Hamburg was the first and by far the longest of five
stints in Germany.68 Between and after those trips, the Beatles established
themselves as virtually the resident band at the Cavern in Liverpool, playing
there 292 times in thirty months between 1961 and 1963.
The sheer quantity of gigs in the two years before the first EMI recordings
placed a strain on the Lennon-McCartney songwriting. As this chapter’s
appendix listing the group’s repertoire shows, John and Paul had composed
perhaps twenty or thirty songs before the end of 1962, but the Beatles
regularly performed only a handful. Their performances were mainly taken
up with cover versions. The appendix lists about 150 songs performed at
least once by the group in the four years or so before their first hit record.
While many of these were hits of the late 1950s and early 1960s by American
pop artists and girl groups, about half were “classic” rock and roll numbers
learned from the records of Little Richard, Chuck Berry, Elvis Presley, Buddy
Holly, and others. Although rock and roll was regarded as outmoded by
the mainstream pop industry at the end of the 1950s, it continued to
form the backbone of Beatles’ performances. Of the sixteen tracks included
on the Rockin’ At the Star Club album recorded in Hamburg in December
1962, ten were rock and roll songs from the mid-1950s.
So when the time came to begin recording for EMI, while every single
contained only original songs, the first two albums, Please Please Me and
With the Beatles (both 1963) each contained six cover versions and eight
original songs. They had to fight to have their own songs as the A sides
of their first and second singles (“Love Me Do” and “Please Please Me”).
On both occasions, George Martin was insistent that they record “How
Do You Do It?” by an old-school songwriter, Mitch Murray, but he even-
tually backed down and foisted the song on another Brian Epstein group,
Gerry and the Pacemakers. That version reached number one in April 1963,
shortly before the third Beatles single, “From Me to You,” topped the British
charts.
The final phase of the prehistory of the band began with the arrival of
Brian Epstein. Musically, the Beatles were already at their peak as composers
and performers, but their reach was limited to their devoted audiences in
Liverpool and Hamburg. Epstein was to be the catalyst for the process
that took them to a national, then global, audience. In brief, he added the
haircuts, the suits, and the recording contract.
Brian Epstein’s early life and his role in the Beatles’ career has been told
in his own somewhat unreliable memoir A Cellarful of Noise, in numerous
26 Dave Laing
Beatle biographies, and most effectively in The Brian Epstein Story by tele-
vision directors Anthony Wall and the late Debbie Geller. Briefly, he had
trained as an actor in London, but in 1961 he was running the record
department of NEMS, a Liverpool store owned by his family, a pillar of the
local Jewish community. He was taken by one of his staff to see a lunchtime
Cavern show by the Beatles in November 1961.
In little more than a month, Epstein had signed a management contract
with the Beatles. He determined to change their bohemian Teddy boy image
by organizing matching suits and haircuts. Most significantly, he ignored
their live career – which in any case was self-generating between the Ham-
burg and Liverpool residencies – in favor of seeking a recording deal with a
London-based company.
Epstein did not scruple to use his status as a leading record retailer to seek
auditions for the band. After an unsuccessful attempt to persuade Decca
to sign the Beatles – where he was memorably told that “guitar groups are
out” – he finally linked up with George Martin at EMI’s Parlophone label.
The Parlophone audition was successful. The band made their first demo
tape at Abbey Road Studios in June 1962. Martin was not overly impressed
but decided to take a chance and record a single. This was, of course, “Love
Me Do,” backed with “P.S. I Love You.”
George Martin also insisted that Pete Best’s drumming was not good
enough, and encouraged Epstein to replace him. Pete’s sacking reverberated
around the Cavern and other Liverpool venues, because for many fans he
was the most popular Beatle. John and Paul determined that Ringo Starr
of Rory Storm and the Hurricanes was the best replacement; they had
known him in Hamburg. They drove to a holiday camp on the English
east coast where the Storm group had a summer residency. Ringo accepted
the job; but, having been sought out for his musicianship, he discovered
he was joining something like a gang, finding the others to be a tight-knit
friendship group with in-jokes.
Finale
On November 26 1962, the Beatles completed the recording of what would
be their second single, “Please Please Me.” George Martin told them: “Gen-
tlemen, you’ve just made your first number one record.”69 The formative
years were at an end.
Appendix: the repertoire, 1957–1962
The following list is the most comprehensive published to date of the songs performed
live by the Quarrymen and the Beatles prior to 1963. I have identified over 150 songs
covered by the band plus twenty-seven original compositions. The list is probably not
definitive: for example, Ian MacDonald plausibly claimed that the group performed
some thirty Elvis Presley numbers,70 but I have found references to only eight. The
sources for the list are both written and recorded.71 One important source of the
group’s pre-fame repertoire is the many sessions for the BBC between 1962 and
1965.72 Each of these sessions usually included some cover versions which would
have been learned by the band prior to 1963, after which the Beatles did not add any
songs by other acts to their live or recorded repertoire.
Pre-1963 recordings were made in Hamburg as backing tracks for Tony Sheridan
and Wally (a member of the Hurricanes), plus the Christmas 1962 Star-Club session,
later issued commercially by Columbia Records. Earlier in 1962, the Beatles had made
audition tapes for Decca and EMI.
In percentage terms, almost half of the list (47 percent) are rock and roll songs,
mostly from the 1950s; 14 percent are compositions by group members, although not
all of these were performed live; 13 percent of the songs are US pop, mainly from the
early 1960s; 10 percent rhythm and blues and early Motown; 6 percent pre-1945 pop
songs; 5 percent songs by US girl groups; and the final 5 percent from miscellaneous
sources.
Lennon-McCartney compositions
“Ask Me Why”
“Cat’s Walk”
“Do You Want to Know a Secret”
“Hello Little Girl”
“Hot as Sun”
“I Call Your Name”
“I Saw Her Standing There”
“I’ll Always be in Love with You”
“I’ll Follow the Sun”
“Just Fun”
“Keep Looking That Way”
“Like Dreamers Do”
“Looking Glass”
“Love Me Do”
“Love of the Loved”
“Misery”
“One After 909”
“Please Please Me”
[27] “P.S. I Love You”
28 Dave Laing
“Somedays”
“That’s My Woman”
“There’s a Place”
“Thinking of Linking”
“What Goes On”
“When I’m Sixty Four”
“Winston’s Walk”
“Years Roll Along”
US rock and roll

Chuck Berry (14 songs)
“Almost Grown”
“Carol”
“Got to Find My Baby”
“Johnny B. Goode”
“Little Queenie”
“Maybellene”
“Memphis, Tennessee”
“Reelin’ and Rockin’”
“Rock and Roll Music”
“Roll Over Beethoven”
“Sweet Little Sixteen”
“Talkin’ About You”
“Too Much Monkey Business”
“Vacation Time”
Eddie Cochran (2 songs)

“C’mon Everybody”
“Twenty Flight Rock”
Everly Brothers (6 songs)

“All I Have to Do is Dream”
“Bye Bye Love”
“Cathy’s Clown”
“So How Come (No One Loves Me)”
“So Sad”
“Wake Up Little Susie”
Buddy Holly (11 songs)

“Crying, Waiting, Hoping”
“Everyday”
“It’s So Easy”
“Mailman, Bring Me No More Blues”
“Maybe Baby”
“Peggy Sue”
“Raining In My Heart”
“Reminiscing”
“That’ll Be the Day”
“Think it Over”
“Words of Love”
Little Richard (12 songs)

“Good Golly Miss Molly”
“Hey! Hey! Hey! Hey!”
“Kansas City”
“Long Tall Sally”
“Lucille”
“Miss Ann”
“Ooh! My Soul”
“Ready Teddy”
“Rip it Up”
“Send Me Some Lovin’”
“Slippin’ and Slidin’”
“Tutti Frutti”
Carl Perkins (11 songs)

“Blue Suede Shoes”
“Boppin’ the Blues”
“Everybody’s Trying to Be My Baby”
“Glad All Over”
“Gone, Gone, Gone”
“Honey Don’t”
“Lend Me Your Comb”
“Matchbox”
“Sure to Fall (in Love with You)”
“Tennessee”
“Your True Love”
Elvis Presley (8 songs)

“Blue Moon of Kentucky”
“I Don’t Care If the Sun Don’t Shine”
“I Forgot to Remember to Forget”
“Love Me Tender”
“Milk Cow Blues”
“That’s All Right (Mama)”
“That’s When Your Heartaches Begin”
“Wooden Heart”
Larry Williams (6 songs)

“Bad Boy”
“Bony Moronie”
“Dizzy Miss Lizzy”
“Peaches and Cream”
“Short Fat Fanny”
“Slow Down”
30 Dave Laing
Other rock and roll (15 songs)

“Be-Bop-A-Lula” (Gene Vincent)
“Clarabella” (Jodimars)
“Corrine, Corrina” (Ray Peterson and others)
“Guitar Boogie Shuffle” (various, instrumental)
“Mean Woman Blues” (Jerry Lee Lewis and various)
“Move On Down the Line”
“Move Over”
“New Orleans”
“Nothin’ Shakin’ (but the Leaves on the Trees)” (Eddie Fontaine)
“Raunchy” (Bill Justis instrumental)
“Red Hot” (Billy Riley)
“Red Sails in the Sunset” (Fats Domino)
“Rock-a-Chicka” (Frankie Vaughan)
“Skinnie Minnie” (Bill Haley)
“Whole Lotta Shakin’ Going On” (Jerry Lee Lewis)
Rhythm and blues and Motown (18 songs)

“A Shot of Rhythm and Blues” (Arthur Alexander)
“Anna (Go to Him)” (Arthur Alexander)
“Hallelujah, I Love Her So” (Ray Charles)
“I Got A Woman” (Ray Charles)
“If You Gotta Make A Fool of Somebody” (James Ray)
“Leave My Kitten Alone” (Little Willie John)
“Money” (That’s What I Want) (Barrett Strong)
“Mr. Moonlight” (Doctor Feelgood and the Interns of Love)
“Searchin’” (Coasters)
“September in the Rain” (Dinah Washington)
“Soldier of Love” (Arthur Alexander)
“Some Other Guy” (Richie Barrett)
“The Hippy Hippy Shake” (Chan Romero)
“Three Cool Cats” (Coasters)
“Twist and Shout” (Isley Brothers)
“What’d I Say” (Ray Charles)
“You Really Got a Hold on Me” (Smokey Robinson)
“Young Blood” (Coasters)
US pop (15 songs)

“Be-Bop Baby” (Ricky Nelson)
“But I Do” (Clarence Henry)
“Don’t Ever Change” (Crickets, composed by Goffin and King)
“Dream Baby” (Roy Orbison)
“Dream Lover” (Bobby Darin)
“He’ll Have To Go” (Jim Reeves)
“I Got a Feeling” (Ricky Nelson)
“I Just Don’t Understand” (Ann Margret)

“Lonesome Tears in My Eyes” (Johnny Burnette)
“Peppermint Twist” (Joey Dee and the Starliters)
“Sharing You” (Bobby Vee, composed by Goffin and King)
“Sheila” (Tommy Roe)
“Take Good Care of My Baby” (Bobby Vee)
“To Know Her is to Love Her” (Teddy Bears)
“Where Have You Been All My Life” (Mann and Weil)
US girl groups (9 songs)

“Baby It’s You” (Shirelles)
“Boys” (Shirelles)
“Chains” (Cookies)
“Devil in Her Heart” (Donays, as . . . ‘His Heart’)
“Keep Your Hands Off My Baby” (Little Eva)
“Mama Said” (Shirelles)
“Please Mr. Postman” (Marvelettes)
“Shimmy Shake” (Orlons)
“Will You Love Me Tomorrow” (Shirelles)
Pre-1945 vaudeville and pop (10 songs)

“Ain’t She Sweet”
“Beautiful Dreamer” (Stephen Foster)
“Bésame Mucho” (Coasters version)
“Darktown” (probably Darktown Strutters Ball, US minstrel song)
“Falling in Love Again” (Marlene Dietrich)
“I Remember You” (as by Frank Ifield)
“I’m Gonna Sit Right Down and Cry (Over You)” (?)
“The Sheik of Araby” (rock and roll version by Lou Monte)
“Up a Lazy River” (probably the Bobby Darin version)
“Your Feet’s Too Big” (Fats Waller)
Miscellaneous
Stage and film musicals (5 songs)
“A Taste of Honey” (film theme recorded by Lenny Welch)
“Honeymoon Song” (film theme by Mikis Theodorakis)
“Over the Rainbow” (Judy Garland)
“Till There Was You” (from The Music Man via Peggy Lee’s 1958 version)
“True Love” (from High Society, duet by Bing Crosby and Grace Kelly)
UK pop (1 song)
“A Picture of You” (Joe Brown)
Others (8 songs)
“Better Luck Next Time” (provenance unknown)
“Dance in the Streets” (provenance unknown)
32 Dave Laing
“Don’t Forbid Me” (provenance unknown)

“My Bonnie” (traditional, sung by Tony Sheridan)
“Nobody but You” (provenance unknown)
“Somebody Help Me” (provenance unknown)
“Swingin’ Thing” (provenance unknown)
“You Don’t Understand Me” (provenance unknown)
2 The Beatles as recording artists
jerry zolten
When the Beatles – John Lennon, Paul McCartney, George Harrison, and
Pete Best – recorded their first tracks as professionals in Hamburg, Germany,
in June 1961, the “art” of electrical analog recording was essentially as it
always had been. Basically, the players positioned themselves in front of
microphones and performed as if they were live on stage – except there was
no audience. Only present were producers, technicians, other musicians,
and onlookers. The performance happened all at once, everyone playing the
whole way through and as many times as it took to get it “right.” And in the
end, it was the producers and technicians, not the Beatles, who had control
over the final sound, what listeners heard when the record was played.
As to the songs, half the ones the Beatles recorded that day were curiously
archaic: “Ain’t She Sweet,” “My Bonnie,” “When the Saints Go Marching
In,” “Sweet Georgia Brown,” all throwbacks to a previous generation, as
were, for that matter, the circumstances of the session itself. Pete Best said
he was taken aback by the makeshift “studio.” “We wondered if we had come
to the right place. We had been expecting a recording setup on the grand
scale . . . Instead, we found ourselves in an unexciting school gym [actually,
Friedrich Elbert Halle] with a massive stage and lots of drapes.”1
Did those initial recording forays significantly advance the artistry or
career of the Beatles? Other than getting a foot in the door, decidedly not,
reported Paul and John with characteristic cheekiness in their first ever 1962
radio interview:
Paul: We made a recording with a fella called Tony Sheridan. We were
working in a club called “The Top Ten Club” in Hamburg. And we made a
recording with him called, “My Bonnie,” which got to number five in the
German Hit Parade.
John: Ach Tung!
Paul: (giggles) But it didn’t do a thing over here, you know. It wasn’t a very
good record, but the Germans must’ve liked it a bit. And we did an
instrumental which was released in France on an EP of Tony Sheridan’s,
which George and John wrote themselves. That wasn’t released here. It got
one copy. That’s all, you know. It didn’t do anything.2
John Lennon was acerbically candid about it with Beatles biographer Hunter
[33] Davies. “When the offer came, we thought it would be easy. The Germans
34 Jerry Zolten
had such shitty records. Ours was bound to be better. We did five of our
own numbers, but they didn’t like them. They preferred ‘My Bonnie Lies
Over the Ocean.’”3
A year or so later, the Beatles – Ringo Starr now occupying the place of
Pete Best – teamed with producer George Martin on a run of LPs that had
a profound impact on pop music worldwide. The earliest collaborations,
though conventionally recorded, were catchy, smartly arranged pop hits.
Then, in a succession of mid-sixties studio-savvy albums that peaked in
1967 with Sgt. Pepper’s Lonely Hearts Club Band, the Beatles and George
Martin entered rarified territory, and in the process played an incisive role
in revolutionizing the art of studio recording. Certainly flashes of things to
come pre-dated the Beatles, not only in American rhythm and blues and
rock and roll, but in earlier genres with a handful of studio wizards pointing
the way. So, who were these “wizards” and what exactly did they do? Let’s
take a sidetrack into the evolution of recording artistry.
“And at the end of the day you had your album”

From the get-go, the technology of recording had a de facto impact on
music. Essentially, the invention of sound recording by Thomas Edison in
the late 1800s introduced an entirely new way to hear music. Before Edison,
musical performance – with the exception of reproducing player pianos –
could only be experienced “live” and “in person.” Recording, both literally
and figuratively, “revolutionized” that experience. Back in the 1920s, Louis
Armstrong fans hearing him in person for the first time were initially put
off because he didn’t sound like his records. In the early 1930s, the buxom
“shout to the rafters” style of blues diva Bessie Smith was displaced by sotto
voce Billie Holiday, the latter’s success dependent on the microphone to
capture and convey her intimate sound. Crooner Bing Crosby, noted his
biographer Gary Giddins, “understood the microphone, and that electricity
paradoxically makes music more rather than less human; because you don’t
have to shout, you . . . can now sing in a normal tone of voice.”4 In the days
of 78-rpm records, even the duration of a performance – three minutes –
was dictated by the limits of how much could fit on a 10-inch shellac
disk.
Now jump to the 1950s and early sixties, the era of American rhythm
and blues and rock and roll. A number of producers and musicians, some
rockers, others not, began experimenting with the “art” of recording. They
recognized that rapidly evolving technologies could be used to create sonic
realities existent only on recordings. They produced performances that
could not, in fact, be duplicated “live” on stage. Small examples surfaced here
and there – echo effects achieved through basement and hallway placement
of ambient microphones; the double, even triple-track layering of vocal
leads; vocal tracks speeded up to mask intonation problems or, with teen
idols more good-looking than able to sing, stitched together a phrase at
a time to create the illusion of continuous performance. Then, capping it
all was Phil Spector, his famous “Wall of Sound” achieved through multi-
tracking, mike placement, voices as upfront in the mix as loud orchestras and
electric instruments, everything awash in a sea of reverberation. Spector was
among the first of a new breed of producer, not merely button-pushing, dial-
turning “techies,” but co-creators with musicians in the “art” of recording
music. In those early days, Phil Spector’s studio ingenuity sparked the
imaginations of many in the upcoming generation of rock and roll producers
and musicians.
One of those was musician, arranger, and lyricist Van Dyke Parks, vision-
ary producer/performer and collaborator with Brian Wilson on the ill-fated
but three-decades-later triumphant Smile, a Beach Boys project that Parks
maintains had a more immediate influence on the Beatles’ Sgt. Pepper (1967)
than the more generally acknowledged Pet Sounds (1966). On his role as
a recording arts revolutionary, Parks labels himself “fair game.” In talking
about his own awakening to studio possibilities, Parks provided a telling
overview of those whose earlier inventiveness influenced both the Beach
Boys and the Beatles.
“When I entered this business of recording,” said Parks, “my first job in
town was in 1963 with ‘Bare Necessities,’ a song from Disney’s The Jungle
Book.” Producers and musicians back then, he says, talked about how a
room “sounded,” meaning the musical sonority inherent in a recording
space. In those days, he adds, “the technology of recording was accelerating
greatly and quickly.”
That was with the advent of “close-miking,” where an instrument that you
would think in a roomful of sax and trumpets and trombones – big band –
would not have been heard. But if you put a mike very close . . . their power –
the potential for plectrum instruments to be heard above the general roar of
full blown instruments – was all a new reality.
Then came a new generation of rockers, studio neophytes, “musicians,” says

Parks, who “were empowered, politically charged, but generally musically
illiterate.”
They didn’t come in with charts that were all prepared. They came in with
various ideas and generally moved the studio away from the efficiency of a
3-hour session in which maybe three tunes would get done in one or two
takes. Dean Martin and Frank Sinatra would say, “That’s enough, boys.”
36 Jerry Zolten
Parks offers the example of one track from Pet Sounds that cost the Beach
Boys more than $62,000 to record and “took a week or even more of pro-
cedural layering . . . And all with the new real estate of multi-track record-
ing . . . but also some understanding about how microphones captured in
an intimate way what had never been featured before.”
That “understanding” evolved for Parks and his contemporaries from
an appreciation of what their predecessors had done in the studio, minor
epiphanies at the time, but later, profoundly utilitarian. “I can remember
hearing Spike Jones doing ‘Cocktails for Two’ in 1948,” says Parks.
And what was interesting to me was that Jones had things like bicycle bells
and whoopee cushions. Whatever he wanted. Spike Jones would put the
sound very close to a microphone . . . and I thought that was a phenomenon!
I recognized that there was something coming through a speaker that wasn’t
available in a room when I walked into a concert.
Parks also became aware of mike placement and synchronized multi-track

recording through the artistry of Les Paul and Esquivel. Les Paul pioneered
the layering of vocal parts and guitar lines. “With ‘Lover’ by Les Paul and
Mary Ford,” said Parks, “he did . . . what they called the ‘choir of wire,’ these
triadic guitar lines . . . , a special sound that he invented for recording . . . and
once again made a step forward. It was stuff I had never heard before.
Absolutely changed my perception.”
As did Juan Garcia Esquivel, the “King of Space-Age Pop,” billed on
his records as simply “Esquivel.” Parks heard Esquivel in the early sixties
when Parks and older brother Carson came to Los Angeles as the “Steeltown
Two” to perform folk music. Though middle-of-the-road in style, Esquivel’s
experiments with two-track stereo were revolutionary. He recorded two
orchestras playing simultaneously in separate studios so that in playback
one could be heard coming out on the right, the other on the left. “Esquivel,”
said Parks, “would put two mikes in a piano, and so when a piano did a
glissando from the bottom to the top of the keyboard, you would hear it
pass like a train from left to right. Very imaginative.”5
The idea to make studio technology part of music artistry, to consciously
apply the medium to the message, flowed from these artists as well as a legion
of unnamed rock and roll and rhythm and blues producers. Van Dyke Parks,
Brian Wilson, and, of course, George Martin and the Beatles were caught
up in the swell.
In the mid-1960s, Brian Wilson, like the Beatles, was enchanted with
studio technique. His influential album Pet Sounds (1966) was famously
characterized as “richly textured, multi-layered, and inventively arranged.”
Pet Sounds, says Wilson, was inspired by the Beatles earlier Rubber Soul
(1965), affirming the rivalry that existed between the two groups during
this peak creative period. On Pet Sounds, Wilson supplemented rock and
roll’s conventional guitar-bass-keyboard-drum with full orchestration and
a Spike Jones ragtag of “accordion, theremin, bicycle bells, kazoo, banjo,
glockenspiel, and even barking dogs and a Sparklett’s water jug,” setting the
stage for the even more sonically ambitious Smile.6
Smile was intended as the follow-up to Pet Sounds, and writing and
recording began in August 1966. The eventual collapse of the project became
the stuff of pop music lore, which is why the reimagining and completion
of Smile by Wilson and Parks in 2004 attracted significant attention . . . and
prompted Wilson to comment retrospectively on his then sense of rivalry
with the Beatles as well as this about the influence of Phil Spector: “What
I learned from Phil Spector,” said Wilson, was “to make songs echo . . . to
combine piano and guitar to make one sound. Combine horns and strings
to make another sound, strings with voices to make a sound. There’s all
kind of possibilities in the studio.”7
The Beatles carried forward those same canons, as did Van Dyke Parks
on his own solo recording project, Song Cycle (1968). The important point
here is that for all of them, technology was not evoked merely as gimmick,
but rather as application that contributed to the music’s ability to convey
meaning and provoke emotional response. “When I got into the position
of actually . . . being in charge of how studio results appeared on a record,”
Parks said, “I was absolutely fascinated by it.”
All of those things to me were not just trivial or prosthetic pursuits, but
could maybe even bring some emotional value to music in new ways and
mean something . . . I plunged right into Song Cycle . . . and I went hog
wild . . . They should have called it Song Psycho . . . In fact, when I took it to
the company president, he said, “it’s a very nice title . . . but where are the
songs?” I forgot to include them!
But I did prove that I was a fanatic, obsessed about studio procedures. I
think I did a lot to advance a kind of a sound which would be unavailable in
performance, and something different . . . So honestly, I’ve got to admit I
happened to be at the right age at the right time and in the right place to
benefit fully from studio technology at the apogee of analog recording. It
was the luck of the draw.8
As it was for the Beatles. Skip back a few years to October 1962 and their
first venture into EMI’s London-based Abbey Road studios with George
Martin, the result a debut British single, “Love Me Do”/“P.S. I Love You.”
Though Martin was more impressed with the Beatles’ charisma than with
their early material,9 the record was surprisingly a modest hit, enough to
merit a follow-up, the second Beatles hit, “Please Please Me”/“Ask Me Why,”
produced a month later in November.
38 Jerry Zolten
The UK success of these four original Lennon-McCartney 45-rpm singles

prompted the recording of the Beatles’ first British 33 13 “long-playing”
album, Please Please Me. The ten additional tracks filling out the album
were recorded in a day’s time at a marathon session in February 1963, the
LP released in March on Parlophone. The Beatles had produced four hit
singles and an album in the space of six months.
Almost half of the debut album’s tracks – “Anna,” “Chains,” “Boys,”
“Baby It’s You,” “A Taste of Honey,” and “Twist and Shout” – were covers
of American rock and roll B sides. The new originals were “I Saw Her
Standing There,” “Misery,” “Do You Want to Know a Secret,” and “There’s
a Place.” “The whole album only took a day,” said Paul McCartney, “. . . so
it was amazingly cheap, no-messing, just a massive effort from us . . . We
started at ten in the morning and finished at ten at night . . . And at the end
of the day you had your album.”10 Back then, though, the technology of
analog recording – soundwaves directly imprinted on tape or disk – even
at EMI, allowed little creativity beyond the straightforward performance
of the songs. Recording machines were two-track stereo, the tape a narrow
quarter-inch in width. Once a master was recorded, introducing additional
sound required a second recording machine.
Beatles session engineer Geoff Emerick recalled from those days George
Martin wanting handclaps added to a completed track. “Because the
song had been recorded directly to a two-track tape . . . this was accom-
plished . . . by loading a blank reel of tape on a second machine and putting
it in record while the first machine played back, essentially making a copy
of the original tape, along with the overdub.”11 In other words, as one or
more of the Beatles clapped along to a playback of the master track, those
claps along with the master track were newly recorded on to the second
machine, resulting in a revised master with clapping now interpolated into
the mix. This was typically the extent of studio artistry in the early days.
George Harrison offered a tidy summary in 1965:
Right from the beginning when we started recording, we’d just record in one
take. You know, things like “Twist and Shout” and “I Saw Her Standing
There,” which were all on our first album in England – we just turned the
recorder on. We got a sound balance in the studio – just put the tape on and
did it like that. So we never did any of this overdubbing or adding orchestras
or anything like that.12
“Four-track . . . made the studios into much more

of a workshop”
In late 1963 and continuing through 1964, the Beatles use of studio tech-
nology evolved as they developed a second album and gained access to
four-track recording. In the process, they became increasingly aware of the

growing disparity between what they did in the studio and what they could
perform on stage. Said George Harrison, “It’s only recently where we’ve
been using a bit of overdub stuff. We’ve added things like tambourine,
which you don’t notice, you know. Because we still like to think we can get
basically the same sound on stage.”13 With each session, though, the Beatles
progressed beyond a point where they could replicate on stage what the
public heard on record.
By late 1963, the Beatles were a phenomenon in Britain, but barely a
whisper in America. EMI’s UK strategy was cautious, namely: release a
single, gauge response, release a timely follow-up, and then if warranted –
which it always was – produce an entire album. The smashing success
of Please Please Me motivated EMI to move ahead with slightly more
aggression.
In the summer and fall of that year, the Beatles exhaustively toured
Great Britain as they worked up songs for a second album. On Thursday,
October 17, they went to Abbey Road to record incidental material in
addition to a new single. The strategy was to keep the Beatles in the public
eye until a second album could be released. That single – “I Want to Hold
Your Hand”/“This Boy” – hit enormously in the UK. Four months later, in
January 1964, “I Want to Hold Your Hand,” released in the US on Capitol
with “I Saw Her Standing There” on the flipside, at last broke the Beatles
into the American Top Ten.
The real significance of “I Want to Hold Your Hand,” however, was that
it was the first to be recorded with four-track technology. The session was a
milestone in the group’s studio artistry, Beatles chronicler Mark Lewisohn
calling it “the dawn of a new era for the Beatles at Abbey Road.” Production
possibilities were amplified exponentially overnight and changed how the
Beatles made records. “The luxury of working in four-track instead of
two-track,” reflected Geoff Emerick, “gave . . . a great deal more control
over balance of the instruments.” And indeed, stereo separation, especially
between bass and rhythm guitar, brought a new dimensionality to the
Beatles’ recorded sound. In a short time, the production team established
what would become a standard “general approach” to recording the Beatles;
the specific procedure being, said Emerick, to “put drums and bass on one
track, combine Lennon’s and Harrison’s guitars on another, and then put
the vocals on a third track. The fourth track was the ‘catch-all’ track for
whatever sweetening George Martin wanted to add – handclaps, harmonica,
keyboard, guitar solo, whatever.”14
Interestingly, EMI had four-track recording capability from the start,
but label execs thought the Beatles too “lowbrow” to warrant access. Only
success on a grand scale opened the doors to optimum facility. After “I Want
to Hold Your Hand,” says Geoff Emerick, the Beatles “always recorded in
40 Jerry Zolten
multi-track. Four-track all the way through to the White Album, eight-track
afterward. Apparently,” said Emerick, “the bigwigs at EMI had decided that
the band had now earned sufficient monies for the label – many millions
of pounds, for sure – to be afforded the same honor as ‘serious’ musicians,
none of whom, I’m sure, brought in even a fraction of the income the Beatles
did.”15
One enormous ramification of four-track was that recording no longer
had to take place in real time. Performances could now be created in layers,
bits and pieces assembled and adjusted post-session. “With four-track,” said
Beatles technical engineer Ken Townsend, “one could do a basic rhythm
track and then add on vocals and whatever else later. It made the studios
into much more of a workshop.”16 Now, for example, John Lennon could
sing and then afterwards lay a harmonica track over his own voice, or, with
instrumental tracks complete, a Beatle could come in anytime to re-record
a guitar part, experiment with an instrumental effect, or improve upon a
vocal lead or harmony. In the end, a finished recording was, like a film
montage, a splicing together and overlay of carefully selected “takes” to
create the final master.
The second album, in the UK titled With the Beatles, was released in
November 1963 with advance orders of 300,000. Most Beatles fans likely
never noticed the differences in four-track recording. The most obvious
changes were in the double-tracking of lead vocals, notably John Lennon
on “It Won’t Be Long” and “Not a Second Time,” Paul McCartney on
“All My Loving,” and George Harrison on “Don’t Bother Me” and the
Chuck Berry cover, “Roll Over Beethoven.” The net effect was an appealing
“fattening” of the vocals, somehow livelier from the millisecond space that
separated the two vocal tracks. A noticeable bit of unreality occurs in John
Lennon’s cover of the Marvelettes’ “Please Mister Postman.” Lennon is
recorded harmonizing with himself, and can be heard on the last syllable
of “delivah the let-tah, the sooner the bet-tah” overlapping as he comes in
with the first word of the next verse. A telling glimpse behind the technical
curtain en route to greater studio complexities to come.
Following the release of With the Beatles – issued by Capitol in the USA
in modified form as Meet the Beatles – the group toured the UK as they also
developed material for future recordings, the desired optimum, two LPs per
year. In early 1964, the Beatles were focused on the soundtrack to A Hard
Day’s Night, their first movie. Though the film and soundtrack LP premiered
in the UK in July, to drum up excitement for the project, some tracks were
issued earlier as singles. Case in point: “Can’t Buy Me Love,” recorded in
one session in late January and released about five months before the film.
Advance orders topped a million, the record charting worldwide and at
number one in America the week of April 4, 1964.
The recording of “Can’t Buy Me Love” is an excellent example of

Beatles studio craft in that phase of their career. “Remarkably,” writes Mark
Lewisohn, “the song was recorded from start to finish in just four takes.”
Each take introduced changes, the first, reports Lewisohn, with a “very
bluesy” McCartney vocal lead, and Lennon and Harrison on backup vocal
harmonies. “Take two,” says Lewisohn, “was much the same, but take three
switches to the style they were eventually to use.” On take three, McCartney’s
vocal shifts from blues to rock and the Lennon/Harrison backups disappear
altogether. Then, in a fourth take – still subject to later remixes – were
added “a vocal overdub by Paul and a lead guitar overdub by George.” His
double-tracked guitar lead was positioned in the mix to cut across both
stereo channels. “In what was probably under one hour’s work the Beatles
had started, altered, and completed one of their biggest selling songs. It was
to be typical of their industry throughout the year.”17
“Can’t Buy Me Love,” however, required an additional tweak before it was
truly complete. A “technical problem” was discovered in post-production,
reported Geoff Emerick, the cause likely an incorrect spooling of the master
tape following the session. “The tape,” said Emerick, “had a ripple in it
resulting in the intermittent loss of treble on Ringo’s hi-hat cymbal.” With
pressure to release and the Beatles unavailable on tour, Emerick, George
Martin, and future Pink Floyd producer Norman Smith took emergency
action. “Norman headed down into the studio to overdub a hastily set-
up hi-hat onto a few bars of the song while I recorded him . . . Thanks to
Norman’s considerable skills as a drummer, the repair was made quickly
and seamlessly, and I doubt if even the Beatles themselves ever realized that
their performance had been surreptitiously augmented.”18
“No one heard us, not even ourselves”

Between 1964 and 1966, the Beatles maintained their maddening pace of
writing, recording, and now “acting.” They turned out twenty hit singles, a
second film, Help!, and four smashing UK albums, Beatles For Sale, Help!,
Rubber Soul, and Revolver, each released in varying forms worldwide. The
Beatles were now stars on the international stage, the penultimate rock and
roll band, the ones to emulate and to beat. In America, competition came
from Bob Dylan and “folk rock,” the Beach Boys and the California sound,
and Motown and southern soul. Also in the Beatles’ wake came the “British
Invasion,” spearheaded by the blues-oriented Rolling Stones, the Animals,
the Who, the Yardbirds with Eric Clapton, and Them, and on the lighter
side, the Dave Clark Five, the Hollies, Herman’s Hermits, Gerry and the
Pacemakers, the Troggs, and Peter and Gordon.
42 Jerry Zolten
During this period, the Beatles extended their touring internationally,

including the market they most wanted to conquer, the United States.
Concerts in the US were staged at mega-venues, the audiences enormous and
so fired up and at such a distance that any artistic connection was impossible.
Their performances, quite simply, could not be heard, obliterated in the
mass hysteria of “Beatlemania.” For the Beatles, touring became increasingly
excruciating.
The first of four US tours was brief, two weeks in February, 1964, the
Beatles playing the Coliseum in Washington DC and Carnegie Hall in New
York City. More important to their American success, however, were their
appearances on The Ed Sullivan Show. Over 73 million viewers tuned in
on February 9 and watched as teenage fans in a studio audience of more
than 700 screamed, jumped, and went wild as the Beatles performed. The
close-miked television broadcast provided home viewers a better hearing
than those actually in the studio.
There would be three more Beatles tours in the USA between 1964
and 1966, the music consistently drowned out by relentlessly screaming
Beatlemaniacs. “That’s the . . . great truth,” said Ringo Starr. “No one heard
us, not even ourselves. I found it very hard . . . I couldn’t do any [drum]
fills . . . I’m just there . . . to hold it together somehow . . . and the timing
usually went all to cock. And that’s why we were bad players.”19
The summer tour of 1964 covered thirty-two shows in thirty-four days.
More than 17,000 attended the first concert at San Francisco’s Cow Palace;
the performance was stopped twice because of fans pelting the Beatles with
jelly beans, a reckless show of affection in response to George Harrison’s
remark that Ringo had been stealing his “jelly babies.” The tour played most
major American cities, the venues convention centers, arenas, or stadiums,
the crowds ranging from 14,000 to more than 20,000.
The tours of 1965 and 1966 followed essentially the same pattern, except
that on this go-round the venues were exclusively baseball stadiums and the
chaos exponentially more unsettling.
The August 15, 1965 New York Shea Stadium concert, 55,600 attending,
was memorable, having been filmed for American television. En route to
Portland, Oregon, a plane engine caught fire. That night, Beach Boys Mike
Love and Carl Wilson visited backstage. At tour’s end in late August, the
Beatles stayed for a few days in a rented Los Angeles mansion and met with
the King, Elvis Presley.
The Beatles’ 1966 tour of America was their last tour ever. The excep-
tionally turbulent year drove the Beatles permanently away from live per-
formance and towards a sequestered life in the studio where they would take
recording art to new heights. John Lennon’s offhand remark that the Beatles
were now more popular than Jesus spawned hate mail and death threats.
Capitol Records released Yesterday and Today, an album pieced together for
American consumption from a mishmash of UK singles and tracks culled
from Rubber Soul and Revolver. The album cover sparked public outrage
with its picture of the Beatles in butcher aprons surrounded by slabs of
bloody meat and disembodied baby doll heads, George Harrison’s upraised
middle finger, judging from the expression on his face, hidden from view
inside one of them. In explaining the album’s recall, Capitol press liaison
Ron Tepper said the cover was intended as “‘pop art’ satire.” John Lennon
called it a protest over Capitol’s crass repackaging of the British albums, a
“butchering” of their artistic integrity, as far as the Beatles were concerned.20
In July, the Beatles were literally pummeled in the Philippines en route
to and in the airport, having inadvertently offended the family of President
Marcos by failing to show at the palace for a special pre-concert gathering.21
In America, fans disrupted the Cleveland Municipal Stadium concert by
rushing the stage. The Beatles were rattled in Memphis by Ku-Klux-Klan
threats over the “Jesus” remark, and momentarily feared for their lives at the
pop-pop-popping of firecrackers. In Cincinnati, they were pressured but
refused to play during a lightning storm at an outdoor concert. The final
tour date was August 29 at San Francisco’s Candlestick Park. The Beatles
drove up from Los Angeles, where they had stayed a few days in a rented
Beverly Hills mansion.
At the time, Brian Wilson and Van Dyke Parks were immersed in the
Smile project at Armen Steiner’s “Eight-Track Studios” on the southwest
corner of Yucca and Argyle. Parks tells of two Beatles, which two he doesn’t
say, visiting the studio. “It’s always seemed probable to me,” says Parks,
“that this was arranged through Derek Taylor.” The visit was prompted
by a desire to sample what rival Brian Wilson was working at, but also to
check out the eight-track recording machine, a light-year jump from the
four-track the Beatles had been using at Abbey Road. “It was the only one
in town at first,” and what they heard, says Parks, were the “Smile master
tapes, unmixed.” “Neither Brian nor I were there. It was a surreptitious
act of British aggression,” Parks adds, now able to joke about it with the
distance of time. “We heard about it from an assistant engineer at the studio
and didn’t take it well.” Parks maintains that “Sgt. Pepper was a direct result
of what they heard from the Smile tapes.”22
“We could . . . create any fantasy”

Eight-track technology was not available to the Beatles at Abbey Road for
two more years, with the recording of “Hey Jude” in August 1968. And
while the Beatles’ brush with Smile may have nudged them toward the
44 Jerry Zolten
idea of a “concept” album, the more probable result was a rededication to

the direction the Beatles, as evidenced by Rubber Soul (1965) and Revolver
(1966), had already boldly taken, if anything reaffirming their established
recording aesthetic.
Whatever the case, the important point here is that the Beatles elected to
trade strife on the road for life within Abbey Road. “Everyone thought we
toured for years,” said Ringo Starr, “but we didn’t . . . We’d finished touring
in ’66 to go into the studio where we could hear each other . . . and create any
fantasy that came out of anybody’s brain.”23 Abbey Road became a haven
for studio creativity, shelter from the chaos of “Beatlemania.” “Some of the
best stuff we did,” said George Harrison, “was when we stopped touring
and spent a lot of time in the studio . . . I think that was some of the best
music.”24
And it was. The Beatles’ coming of age as recording artists was stun-
ningly realized on the two progressively innovative albums Rubber Soul and
Revolver, which coincided with their last two years of touring.
The title Rubber Soul, suggests Mark Lewisohn – a play on the term
“plastic soul” used by black musicians at the time as a dig at Mick Jagger’s
derivative performance style – had been particularly difficult. At that junc-
ture, Lennon and McCartney had no ready-made songs, and the time frame
for release was stressfully short. “John and Paul, really for the first time in
their lives,” said Mark Lewisohn, “had to force themselves to come up with
more than a dozen new songs.” Recording began in October of 1965 with a
UK album release date set three months later in December.25 Nonetheless,
the songs – “Drive My Car,” “Norwegian Wood (This Bird Has Flown),”
“You Won’t See Me,” “Nowhere Man,” “Think For Yourself,” “The Word,”
“Michelle,” “What Goes On,” “Girl,” “I’m Looking Through You,” “In My
Life,” “Wait,” “If I Needed Someone,” and “Run For Your Life” – were
appealing, several outstanding.
Rubber Soul also marked a giant step ahead in the Beatles’ studio artistry,
beyond anything they had done before. Though deadlines loomed, sessions
were longer. Said Paul McCartney at the time: “D’you know the longest
session we ever did in the studios? It was for the Rubber Soul album. It went
on from five in the evening till half-past six the next day. It was tough but
we had to do it. We do a lot of longer sessions now than we used to, because
I suppose we’re far more interested in our sound.”26
As for the recording artistry of Rubber Soul, there were the now standard
overdubs, vocal and instrumental overlays, and departures from “real time”
performance. John Lennon’s “In My Life,” for example, went without a
middle section until one was created and patched in four days later.27
There were new sonic ingredients and textures, as in close-miked solo
acoustic guitar, Lennon’s sensuous intake of breath on “Girl,” Hammond
organ, electric piano, harmonium, and, on “Norwegian Wood,” traditional

Indian sitar, tabla, and, on a scrapped take, finger cymbals. Studio techs
also constructed a fuzz box, “controlled distortion,” said engineer Ken
Townsend, effectively applied to McCartney’s bass in “Think For Yourself.”
Rubber Soul, said George Martin, “was the first album to present a new,
growing Beatles to the world. For the first time we began to think of albums
as art on their own, as complete entities.”28
With the next album, Revolver, the Beatles moved even further into
rarified territory, what Lewisohn described as a “quantum jump into not
merely tomorrow but sometime next week.”29 Paul McCartney predicted
that “it would be the best we’ve ever done. Every track on the LP,” he said,
“has something special . . . George wanted to get his Indian stuff on the
record, I wanted to do some electronic things. And John even had a song
[Tomorrow Never Knows] in which his inspiration was The Tibetan Book of
the Dead.”30 Indeed, there were the blithely spirited: “Good Day Sunshine,”
“And Your Bird Can Sing,” “Taxman,” “I Want to Tell You,” “Got To Get
You into My Life,” “Doctor Robert”; the somberly introspective: “Eleanor
Rigby,” “I’m Only Sleeping,” “For No One,” “Here, There and Everywhere”;
the exotic: “Love You To,” “Tomorrow Never Knows”; and the fantastical
“Yellow Submarine.”
Studio technique abounded, and functioned as an instrument itself,
wholly integrated into the art of the music. Tracks featured string sections,
orchestral horns, backwards lead guitar, “Dopplerized” vocals and guitars
fed through a revolving Leslie organ speaker, “jangle box” electronic guitar
effects, Indian musicians only, no Beatles playing at all (on “Love You To”),
and the illusion of spatial location achieved through stereo imaging, that is,
the placement of sound in varying degrees and at different points along the
virtual stereo arc.
Revolver also incorporated sonic abstractions created by saturating sec-
tions of tape with sound overlays to the point of non-recognition. The tapes
were then “looped” to play back unendingly. Each Beatle had a home tape
recorder rigged for such experimentation, which was how, for example, the
strident seagull-like squawking on “Tomorrow Never Knows” was achieved.
In actuality, the sounds were a tape loop of distorted guitar strums stacked
in overlay and played backwards.31
The “Yellow Submarine” session was characterized by Geoff Emerick
as having a “marijuana-influenced” Marx Brothers atmosphere. Micro-
phones, both ambient and individual, were placed around the room to
capture input from “raucous” guests, who included Marianne Faithful,
Rolling Stones Mick Jagger and Brian Jones, and George Harrison’s wife
Patti. “The entire EMI collection of percussion instruments and sound
effects boxes,” says Emerick, “was strewn all over the studio, with people
46 Jerry Zolten
grabbing bells and whistles and gongs at random. To simulate the sound of
a submarine submerging, John grabbed a straw and began blowing bubbles
into a glass.” At one point, Lennon tried the failed experiment of singing
into a tiny condom-wrapped microphone submersed in a water-filled milk
bottle. The finished “Yellow Submarine” incorporated echo-chambered ad-
libs, clanking chains, sound effects from the EMI record library, and the
pièce de résistance, a non sequitur Sousa-style marching brass band plunked
down in place of an intended guitar solo. To avoid the delay of negotiating
a royalty for the pre-existing brass band track, George Martin instructed
Emerick to record it on tape, chop the tape into pieces, and then splice it
back together randomly for insertion into the song. It was “unrecognizable
enough,” says Emerick, “that EMI was never sued by the original copyright
holder of the song.”32
“Revolver,” said Mark Lewisohn, “is a pop masterpiece . . . the album
which, by common consent, shows the Beatles at the peak of their cre-
ativity, welding very strong, economical but lyrically incisive song material
with brave studio experimentation.”33 The Revolver sessions also yielded
two tracks not on the album but released two months before as a single.
“Paperback Writer” and “Rain” introduced technological artistic elements
that became standard Beatles fare.
“Paperback Writer” was innovative in its use of echo through electronic
delay as well as in boosting Paul McCartney’s bass sound. “‘Paperback
Writer’,” says George Martin, “was the first time that we have had echo on
a Beatles track.” “You know,” said George Harrison, “‘Paperback writer,
writer, writer . . .’”34 McCartney, meanwhile, “had long been complaining
that the bass on the Beatles records wasn’t as loud or as full as on the
American records he so loved,” said Geoff Emerick. McCartney wanted the
pumping front-and-center sound of southern soul and Motown. To get it,
he switched from his usual Hofner bass to a Rickenbacker. Then, instead
of the usual method of miking the bass amp speaker, Emerick rewired a
large studio loudspeaker, in effect reversing its function from sound emitter
to sound receptor, transforming the loudspeaker into a giant microphone.
Placed in front of McCartney’s amp speaker, it captured and boosted his
bass sound like never before.35
“Rain,” a composition with the feel of an Indian raga, marked the Beatles’
first use of variable speed recording and backwards sound. A variable speed
recording machine was rigged to slow down or speed up on command.
The “unusual sonic texture” of “Rain” was accomplished, says Emerick,
“by having the band play the backing track at a really fast tempo while I
recorded them on a sped up tape machine. When we slowed the tape back
down to normal speed, the music played back at the desired tempo, but
with a radically different tonal quality.”36
Backwards sound, on the other hand, came about by chance. “In those
days,” said John Lennon, “we used to take a seven-and-a-half-inch tape cut
of a track home and, by the next night, arrange what we were going to put
on top of it.”
I went home and I was out of my mind, stoned, because we had been
working till five in the morning. I . . . stuck the tape on . . . backwards and
played “Rain” and it came out backwards . . . and I was thinking, “Wow,
this is fantastic.” So, the next day I went in and said, “What about the end
of the song? Why don’t we have the whole of the song again, you know,
backwards?” We didn’t do that, but we just laid my voice track and guitar
track over the last half-minute backwards. You can hear it at the end. It
sounds as if I’m singing Indian.37
In effect, Revolver distanced the Beatles impossibly from what they could
perform on stage. Commenting at the time, George Harrison said, “If we
get to . . . doing some of the things on our LP on stage . . . I suppose we’ll
go on with a couple of tape recorders.”38 That, of course, never happened.
Revolver was released in August 1966, a week before the start of the final
American tour. Other than a straight performance of “Paperback Writer,”
their then hit single, the Beatles performed not one song from Revolver.
They had fully transitioned to the irreproducible.
“There were no creative boundaries”

The enormous critical and commercial success of Rubber Soul and Revolver
endowed the Beatles with confidence to continue experimenting, to trust
their instincts completely. Even before a post-Revolver album was conceived,
Lennon and McCartney were articulating the recording philosophy that
would inform Sgt. Pepper. As to what a future album might contain, John
Lennon told the New Musical Express: “Literally anything. Electronic music,
jokes”:
One thing’s for sure – the next LP is going to be very different. We wanted to
have it so that there was no space between the tracks – just continuous . . .
Paul and I are very keen on this electronic music. You make it clinking a
couple of glasses together or with bleeps from the radio, then you loop the
tape to repeat the noises at intervals. Some people build up whole
symphonies from it.39
In the midst of the Revolver sessions, McCartney revealed himself to

be on the same wavelength. “I’ve stopped regarding things as ‘way-out’
anymore.”
48 Jerry Zolten
I’ve stopped thinking that anything is weird or different. There’ll always be

people about, like that Andy Warhol in the States . . . who makes great long
films of people just sleeping. Nothin’ weird anymore. We sit down and write,
or go into the recording studios, and we just see what comes up . . . I keep
my eyes open and I see what’s going on around me. Anyone can learn if they
look. I mean, nowadays I’m interested in the electronic music of people like
Berlo [Luciano Berio] and Stockhaussens [Karlheinz Stockhausen], who’s
great. It opens your eyes and ears . . . I, for one, am sick of doing sounds that
people can claim to have heard before.40
These attitudes set the tone for what most critics regard as the pinnacle
of the Beatles’ work as recording artists, Sgt. Pepper’s Lonely Hearts Club
Band. Recording began in late November 1966, almost four months after
the last American tour date and the release of Revolver. At this juncture,
the Beatles had proven their mettle, earned the right to do as they wished,
break rules, and move in any musical direction. And, indeed, Sgt. Pepper
was that kind of album. Yes, it was a “concept” album – of sorts – the
songs “bookended” between two versions of the title track, all in the con-
text of a concert presented by the Beatles’ arcane alter ego, Sgt. Pepper’s
Lonely Hearts Club Band. “It was going to be an album of another band
that wasn’t us,” said Paul McCartney. “We were going to call ourselves
something else, and just imagine all the time that it wasn’t us playing this
album” – a mind game that freed the Beatles to break from all prior con-
ceptions of who they were.41 “Because we knew that the Beatles wouldn’t
ever have to play the songs live,” said Geoff Emerick, “there were no creative
boundaries.”42
On Sgt. Pepper, the Beatles indulged every creative impulse that came
to mind. If there was a unifying theme, it was that stature afforded
them the freedom to sound exactly as they pleased – which they did.
The sonic assemblage included a battery of keyboards including piano,
Hammond organ, harpsichord, harmonium, and Mellotron. There were
also orchestral brass and horns, violins, harp, and cellos; chimes, cal-
liope, glockenspiel; and sampled applause, laughter, crowds, and animal
noise.
Lyrical content was slice-of-life, portraiture, evocative, mystical,
psychedelic, and even at times, as George Harrison once put it, “fruity.”
Songs passed by as vignettes, the album an abstract canvas of a Beatles vision
of the world, not only through literal meaning, but through the sweep of
sound, sonic textures, breaks from songwriting convention, themes lifted
from newspaper stories, a child’s drawing, a Corn Flakes advertisement, a
parking ticket from a meter maid, a circus poster, visions from an acid trip.
Sgt. Pepper was a pastiche of swirling timbres, like a Van Gogh painting and
perhaps no less a masterpiece, or at least a shot at trying to create something
that would endure. There is studio artistry at every turn in Sgt. Pepper, far
more, really, than can be covered in a book chapter, though some highlights
can certainly be explored.
John Lennon’s “Strawberry Fields Forever” was the starting point,
though in the end not making it on to the album. George Martin explained
that Beatles manager Brian Epstein, nervous that between projects “The
Beatles were slipping . . . wanted another single out that was going to be a
blockbuster.”43 “Strawberry Fields Forever” got the nod. As sonically radical
as anything the Beatles had ever done, recording it set the tone and aesthetic
that distinguished Sgt. Pepper.
At the heart of the track’s sonic texture was the Mellotron, a wave-of-
the-future keyboard programmed to imitate other instruments or sounds, a
conceptual forerunner of the Moog synthesizer. As Geoff Emerick described
it: “Each key triggered a tape loop of a real instrument playing the equivalent
note . . . You could have flutes, strings, or choir at the touch of a button. Some
of the keys were even set up to trigger complete prerecorded rhythm sections
or musical phrases instead of single notes.”44 The flute-like pump organ
that colors “Strawberry Fields Forever” was worked out and performed by
Paul McCartney.
Another measure of studio wizardry was required to complete the track.
The “Strawberry Fields Forever” we hear is actually stitched together from
two versions in differing keys. John Lennon wrestled for weeks over which
of the various takes he preferred, finally settling on the first half of one and
the second half of another. “Even though the two takes John wanted . . . were
recorded a week apart,” said Geoff Emerick, “ . . . the keys . . . were only a
semi-tone apart – and the tempos were fairly close. After some trial-and-
error experimentation, I discovered that by speeding up the playback of the
first take and slowing down the playback of the second, I could get them to
match in both pitch and tempo.”45
Also contributing to the track’s otherworldly quality were backwards
cymbals, plucked piano, sitar, and an Indian instrument called the sword-
mandel. “Strawberry Fields Forever” closed with an unusual reprieve, a
sort of “freak-out” replay in reverse. The reprieve was notable, however, for
another reason. Recording took place around the time of American Thanks-
giving, and there was studio chatter about “turkey and all the trimmings.”
Lennon got a kick out of inserting non sequitur absurdities into the mix, and
so in the reprieve’s trail-off, he utters, “Cranberry sauce.” Some of the more
obsessed Beatles fans, convinced there were secret messages buried within
the groove, Rorschached the phrase into “Paul is dead,” the rumor lingering
for years. Such was the public’s fixation, denied seeing the Beatles in person,
manifesting a Beatlemania of the imagination.46 John Lennon capped it
perfectly. “‘Cranberry sauce.’ That’s all I said. Some people like ping-pong,
50 Jerry Zolten
other people like digging over graves. Some people will do anything rather
than be here now.”47
The Sgt. Pepper sessions continued on into December with two tracks,
“When I’m Sixty Four,” from the early days jamming at the Cavern, and
“Penny Lane,” a nostalgic reimagining of the old neighborhood in Liverpool:
“Just reliving childhood,” said John Lennon.48 There was nothing remark-
ably unusual in the recording beyond McCartney’s request for orchestral
horns on “Penny Lane,” most notably a high-pitched piccolo trumpet that
caught his ear in a television broadcast of a Bach Brandenburg Concerto.
Also at McCartney’s insistence, in spite of an incredulous George Martin,
“When I’m Sixty Four” was speeded up by at least a half-pitch to give it a
more “youthful” sound.49
“When I’m Sixty Four” found a place on the finished LP, while “Penny
Lane,” an ideal thematic foil to “Strawberry Fields Forever,” did not, des-
tined instead to be paired with that track as Brain Epstein’s desired single.
The year had come to a close, and with a solid start, said George Martin, “we
all went home for Christmas.”50 Recording resumed in mid-January after
a holiday break. Meantime, the “Strawberry Fields Forever”/“Penny Lane”
single, though disappointingly never reaching number one, broke into the
US Top Ten in March three months prior to the release of Sgt. Pepper.
All told, Sgt. Pepper, at a cost of £50,000 (equivalent in 1967 to
about $138,000), took an unprecedented (for the Beatles) six months to
complete.51 “I must confess,’ said George Martin, “as it was getting longer
and longer into the album, and more and more avant-garde, I was beginning
to wonder whether we were being . . . over the top, and . . . maybe preten-
tious. There was a slight niggle of worry. I thought, ‘Is the public ready
for this yet?’” Said Geoff Emerick, “We were getting a bit overwhelmed,
I mean, it was just that we couldn’t see it ever coming to an end.”52 But
of course it did, and when all was said and done, Sgt. Pepper, recording
completed in April 1967, released in the UK on June 1 and in the US on
June 2, was a showcase of studio artistry and innovation, shaking up how
rock and roll would from then on be recorded. “When the Beatles unleashed
Sgt. Pepper’s Lonely Hearts Club Band,” read the editorial kickoff to Mojo
magazine’s 2007 article celebrating the fortieth anniversary of the album’s
release, “they blew the finest minds of their generation and changed all music
forever.”53
“We don’t want it to sound like a guitar”

Electronic innovation was intrinsic to Sgt. Pepper’s aesthetic. Surprisingly,
given the complexity of the production, four-track was still the core means
of recording. Music or sound was recorded across each of four tracks, the
levels mixed and then reduced down to a single master track, the process
repeated until all four tracks were full and deemed complete. The trouble
with repeated dubbing down, however, was a build-up of distracting resid-
ual noise. To rectify that, Sgt. Pepper was recorded using recently developed
Dolby Noise Reduction. Artistically, the benefit was an enabling of more
complex overlay along with a new clarity in the recorded sound. The Beatles
also made liberal use of electronic effects such as “phasing” and “flanging.”
Related to echo, these effects arose out of the subtle variants in tempo and
pitch between slightly out-of-synch playbacks of the same track, achiev-
ing what Geoff Emerick called “a sweeping swoosh.”54 The overall texture
of “Being for the Benefit of Mr. Kite!” relies on phasing, whereas George
Harrison’s guitar solo is flanged on “Fixing a Hole.” ADT, or “Artificial
Double Tracking” was another important electronic innovation. Devel-
oped by engineer Ken Townsend, ADT, by automatically doubling vocals or
instrumentals, eliminated the tedious process of performing the same part
twice.55 Finally, there was the “direct lining” of McCartney’s bass, plugging
the instrument directly into the recording console as opposed to placing a
microphone in front of his bass amp speaker. “I think direct injection,” said
Ken Townsend, “was probably used on Beatles sessions for the first time
anywhere in the world.”56
The net effect of electronic dabbling was that it made the conventional
sound unconventional. Nothing, in fact, was real. Lead vocals, certainly
recognizable as individual Beatles, came at us ethereally, or from a distance,
or somehow thicker, or submersed in something we couldn’t quite put a
finger on. Background voices were sped up or slowed down, reverberated,
equalized, electronically altered one way or another to impart a preter-
natural quality. Engineer Richard Lush recalls Lennon saying: “I want to
sound different today, nothing like I sounded yesterday.”57 “John and Paul’s
attitude,” says Geoff Emerick, “ . . . was ‘we’re going to play guitar, but we
don’t want it to sound like a guitar; we’re going to play piano, but we don’t
want it to sound like piano.’”58
If this all has a psychedelic ring to it, that is entirely accurate. Listen
to the shifting textures of John Lennon’s voice on “Lucy in the Sky with
Diamonds,” the tinkling otherworldly keyboard, the flanged guitar running
parallel to the lead vocal. “Lucy” used variable speed more than any other
track on the album. Lyrics also reinforced the euphoric feel. Lennon says
the images were drawn from Lewis Carroll’s Alice in Wonderland. “It was
Alice in the boat.”
She is buying an egg and it turns into Humpty Dumpty. The woman serving
in the shop turns into a sheep and the next minute they are rowing in a
rowing boat somewhere and I was visualizing that. There was also the image
of the female who would someday come save me . . . a “girl with
kaleidoscope eyes” who would come out of the sky.59
52 Jerry Zolten
Lennon always insisted that any connection between “Lucy in the Sky with
Diamonds” and LSD was purely coincidental. “My son Julian came in one
day with a picture he painted about a school friend of his named Lucy. He
had sketched in some stars in the sky and called it ‘Lucy in the Sky with
Diamonds.’ Simple.”60 And yet not so simple. Even taking Lennon at his
word, the overall “dayglow” aesthetic of Sgt. Pepper without doubt reflected
a generation’s chemically inspired perceptual realignment. Nonetheless,
the artistic strategy was entirely sober and deliberate, the goal being to
create a surreal vision through sound. The resulting work could not be
performed on stage, but existed only in the bubble of the studio; could not
be experienced “live” by a mass audience, but only through turntable spin
and a trip through an electronic speaker.
The scenes in Sgt. Pepper were set with inserted cheers, applause, rooster
crows, stampeding menagerie – or through swirling sound, as on “Being
for the Benefit of Mr. Kite!,” lyrics lifted literally from a poster for “Pablo
Fanque’s Circus Royal.” “John had said he wanted to ‘smell the sawdust
on the floor,’ wanted to taste the atmosphere of the circus,” said George
Martin. “I said to him, ‘What we need is a calliope . . . steam whistles played
by a keyboard.”61 There were none to be found, so Martin and his team
created a fairground in the studio.
I knew we needed a backwash, a general mush of sound, like if you go to a

fairground, shut your eyes and listen: rifle shots, hurdy-gurdy noises, people
shouting and – way in the distance, just a tremendous chaotic sound. So I
got hold of old calliope tapes, playing “Stars and Stripes Forever” and other
Sousa marches, chopped the tapes up into small sections and had Geoff
Emerick throw them up in the air, re-assembling them at random.62
Apparently, this was a frequent technique on Sgt. Pepper. The album’s

finale – a sonic orgasm, a bit of nonsense, and a treat for the dogs –
was, up to that point in time, unprecedented in rock history. The closing
track was “A Day in the Life,” a juxtaposing of John Lennon’s glib news-
paper cutout lines – “a lucky man who made the grade,” “4,000 holes in
Blackburn, Lancashire,” “the English army had just won the war,” “I’d love
to turn you on” – and Paul McCartney’s out-of-breath working man who
“had a smoke” and “went into a dream.” It was McCartney’s idea to end
with an orchestral build-up. Lennon’s directive was: “I want it to be like a
musical orgasm.”63 Forty classical musicians were assembled, their sound
aggrandized by recording the orchestra four times, once on each of the
four tracks, with an ultimate mix-down to a single master. Geoff Emerick
oversaw the recording, carefully adjusting the volume controls “to get the
crescendo of the orchestra just right.”
George Martin created a twenty-four-bar score with measured instruc-

tions. “At the very beginning,” says Martin, “I put into the musical score the
lowest note each instrument could play, ending with an E-major chord.”
And at the beginning of each of the 24 bars I put a note showing roughly
where they should be at that point. Then I had to instruct them. “We’re
going to start very very quietly and end up very very loud. We’re to start very
low in pitch and end up very high. You’ve got to make your own way up
there, as slide-y as possible so that the clarinets slurp, trombones gliss,
violins slide without fingering any notes. And whatever you do, don’t listen
to the fellow next to you because I don’t want you to be doing the same
thing.” Of course they all looked at me as though I was mad.64
“The orchestra just couldn’t understand what George was talking about,”
says Geoff Emerick, “or why they were being paid to go from one note to
another in 24 bars. It didn’t make any sense to them because they were all
classically trained.”65 Nonetheless, the massive rumbling crescendo came
off as planned, followed immediately by a “Ta-Da-a-a-a!” in the form of a
crashing E-major piano chord, John, Paul, Ringo, and Mal Evans at three
pianos all hitting the keys at the same moment, loud pedals full open, the
final chord lingering for forty seconds. Still, Sgt. Pepper was not ended.
“They were all thrilled with what they heard,” said Geoff Emerick,
“but John and Paul felt that they wanted something additional to end the
album . . . John had read somewhere that dogs could hear higher frequencies
than humans could, and requested that a supersonic tone be placed at the
end to give them something to listen to.” A 15-kilocycle tone was patched
in, yet still the Beatles wanted more. John Lennon said: “[Let’s] put on some
gobbledygook, then bifurcate it, splange it, and loop it.” “He always loved the
sound of nonsense words,” says Emerick. “To George Martin’s amusement,
the four Beatles endorsed the idea wholeheartedly and raced down to the
studio while Richard hurriedly put up a couple of microphones.”
They looned about for five minutes or so, saying whatever came to mind as I
recorded them on a two-track machine. When I played the tape back for
them, John identified a few seconds that he particularly liked – it consisted
primarily of Paul repeating the words “Never needed any other way” for no
particular reason while the others chattered away in the background – which
I duly made into a loop, then flew into the ending. And with that, Sgt.
Pepper’s Lonely Hearts Club Band was done.66
A high-water mark in recording artistry, Sgt. Pepper was released in both

mono and stereo versions, the two mixes markedly different. The Beatles
took part in and approved the mono mix, while the stereo mix was created by
Emerick and his team without their input. Hardcore fans maintain that the
mono is Sgt. Pepper as the Beatles intended. Following the album’s release,
54 Jerry Zolten
though, the critical quibbling was not about the preferred mix, but rather
about the Beatles themselves. A critic for the British Daily Mail wrote: “It’s
now around four years since the Beatles happened, and . . . the Beatles have
changed completely . . . They have isolated themselves, not only personally,
but also musically. They have become contemplative, secretive, exclusive
and excluded.”67
Most fans, and especially fellow musicians, however, found the album
eye-opening, exciting, and the wave of the future. The Beatles had graduated
from wanting to hold hands to blowing out minds. At the Sgt. Pepper release
party, George Harrison said: “People are very, very aware of what’s going
on around them nowadays. They think for themselves and I don’t think
we can ever be accused of under-estimating the intelligence of our fans.”
Added John Lennon: “The people who have bought our records in the past
must realize that we couldn’t go on making the same type forever. We must
change and I believe those people know this.”68
“The break-up of the Beatles can be heard”

The Beatles carried forward the studio artistry of Sgt. Pepper to the projects
that marked the last years of their existence as a unified group. No question,
the Beatles and their creative team were the right people at the right place
and time, like Brian Wilson and the Beach Boys, perfectly catching the wave
of advancing recording technology. When all was said and done, though,
the Beatles emerged with a broader, more enduring body of work, a goodly
portion of that post-Sgt. Pepper.
Immediately following Sgt. Pepper was Magical Mystery Tour (1967), the
album pieced together by Capitol for the US market from the soundtrack of
a BBC-filmed television production and collected singles including “Straw-
berry Fields Forever” and “Penny Lane.” Pictured on the cover were the
Beatles in the funny fuzzy animal costumes they wore for the TV show.
“I Am the Walrus” was the TV tie-in track, the lyrics nonsensical with
sonic exotica that included a children’s choir and snippets of radio pro-
grams recorded directly into the sound console. “One track,” said John
Lennon, “was live BBC Radio – Shakespeare or something – I just fed
in whatever lines came in.”69 The most memorable song on the album
was “All You Need is Love,” composed especially for a satellite broadcast
viewed worldwide by more than 200 million on June 25, 1967. The Beatles
recorded a rhythm track earlier that day, and, with invited friends and a small
orchestra, played and sang along to it during the live broadcast. With post-
production adjustments, the resulting single was an international hit by
mid-July.
The first album release on the Beatles’ own Apple label came in Novem-
ber 1968 with the double LP titled The Beatles, called by fans the White
Album because of its plain white covers. The album’s thirty tracks, most
written during the Beatles’ stay in India with the Maharishi Mahesh Yogi,
ranged from brilliant to throwaway to (in the view of some critics) nearly
incomprehensible. More than on any previous album, the lyrics and sonic
characteristics revealed the Beatles not so much as a unified group but as
distinct entities. Discerning listeners sensed fractures in the façade. “The
break-up of the Beatles can be heard on the double-album,” said John
Lennon, “ . . . on which, I thought that every track sounded as if it came
from an individual Beatle.”70
John Lennon offered poignancy in “Julia,” cynical comment in “Happi-
ness is a Warm Gun” and “Revolution,” and a rollicking Chuck Berry-style
send-up of the Beach Boys in “Back in the USSR.” Paul McCartney provided
cartoon-ish character sketches in “The Continuing Story of Bungalow Bill”
and “Rocky Raccoon,” acoustic guitar gems in “Mother Nature’s Son” and
“Blackbird,” and screaming Little Richard intensity in “Helter Skelter,” a
song unfortunately linked to Charles Manson, who claimed it as inspiration
for the brutal 1969 Tate/LaBianca murders.
The White Album also signals the emergence of George Harrison as an
“A” songwriter, with four tracks including the ethereal “Long, Long, Long”
and, with Eric Clapton on lead guitar, “While My Guitar Gently Weeps,” one
of the all-time Beatles favorites. Ringo Starr delivered on his own “Don’t
Pass Me By,” and as the album’s closing lullaby came John Lennon’s tongue-
in-cheek but nonetheless charming “Good Night.” It should be noted that
Ringo Starr, frustrated by growing tensions between band members, left
the group in the midst of recording. “We’re doing this album,” Starr said in
1976, “and I’m getting weird – saying to me-self, ‘I’ve gotta leave this band.
It’s not working,’ . . . and I went away for two weeks. [Laughs] . . . And then
I got a telegram from John saying, ‘Great drums’ on the tracks we’d done.
And I came back and it was great, ’cuz George had set up all these flowers
all over the studio saying welcome home.”71
Two of the tracks on the double White Album are pure studio indulgence,
one the shortest, the other the longest. Paul McCartney’s “Why Don’t We Do
It in the Road” clocked in at one minute and forty-two seconds, a foretaste of
his solo career with McCartney singing and playing all the instruments, no
studio tricks beyond that. John Lennon’s “Revolution 9,” on the other hand,
was total artifice, an abstruse eight-minute-plus pastiche of electronica.
“Altogether, 154 entries from at least 45 sources.”72 “Revolution 9” was
totally about studio as instrument, the track a collage of tape loops and
effects: a “faceless voice” uttering “Number Nine, Number Nine”; George
Martin saying: “Geoff, put the red light on”; sampled orchestral dubs from
56 Jerry Zolten
“A Day in the Life”; backwards-played bits and pieces of choir, symphony,

opera, and Lennon on Mellotron. Paul McCartney did not contribute, but
George Harrison did, he and Lennon lying on the floor “saying strange
things like ‘the Watusi’ and ‘the Twist’” and “reading out bizarre lines of
prose” as Yoko Ono hummed “at a very high pitch.”73
“Revolution 9” drew the fire of critics upon the album’s release. The New
Musical Express called the track “a pretentious piece of old codswallop which
is nothing more than a long, long collection of noises and sounds seemingly
dedicated towards the expanding sale of Aspros [a headache remedy].”74
John Lennon’s cool rebuttal was simply that “I imposed ‘Revolution 9’ on
The Beatles for all the people who just want to hear the beat all the time.”75
“I hope we passed the audition”

In the final two years before the last work on a Beatles track at Abbey Road
on April 2, 1970, four LPs would be released. An emotionally difficult time
for the Beatles, the period was marked by increasing tensions exacerbated by
Yoko Ono’s interjection into the creative process as well as by business issues
that surfaced in the wake of manager Brian Epstein’s death in 1967. None of
it was helped by the fact that the Beatles had now gone three years without
the personal affirmation that comes only from direct contact with people
through live performance. All of these troubling elements were reflected in
the direction and tone of the Beatles’ remaining studio work.
Yellow Submarine came out in January 1969, a recasting of that title track
as plot inspiration for a film depicting the Beatles as animated characters
and ending with actual performance footage. The film was welcomed by
fans hungry for any sort of visual experience of the Beatles, affirmation that
they were still working as a team. The soundtrack LP offered one side of
appealing B tracks supplemented with “All You Need is Love,” and a flipside
of instrumentals recorded for the film by George Martin and orchestra.
Three final albums would come while the Beatles were still intact: Abbey
Road (September 1969), their last collaboration in that studio; Hey Jude
(February 1970), a collection of UK singles packaged for US release; and
Get Back, a derailed effort to simplify, ultimately retitled and released as Let
It Be (May 1970).
Abbey Road, recorded in July and August of 1969 and regarded by many,
including Ringo Starr, as the Beatles’ best, was the first to be released.76
The title was a tip of the hat to the studio that nurtured their evolution as
recording artists. This was the album that showed the Beatles crossing Abbey
Road, Paul McCartney barefoot, adding fuel to the absurdly persistent
rumor that he was dead. The greater irony of Abbey Road, however, is that
it was released before Hey Jude and Let It Be, when in fact most of its tracks
were recorded after the tracks on those albums. Given that and the intention
here to focus on recording artistry, these albums are best reckoned with in
order of recording rather than of release.
Hey Jude was essentially another of Capitol’s cobbling together for the
US market of UK singles. The salient track was, of course, “Hey Jude.”
Otherwise, the album was a collection of unusually disparate singles. “Can’t
Buy Me Love” and “I Should Have Known Better” dated from 1964, “Paper-
back Writer” and “Rain” from 1966.
“Lady Madonna” was a more recent standout, a 1968 hit single and
the last Beatles issue on either Parlophone or Capitol. The track was a
straightforward Paul McCartney rock and roll performance in the mold of
the 1956 British hit “Bad Penny Blues.” Beyond the four-man saxophone
section, fuzzed guitar, and doubled piano, the only other studio artifice was
what sounded like muted trumpets. “In actual fact,” said Ringo Starr, “it’s
just John and Paul sort of humming through their [cupped] hands into the
mike . . . It sounded great, so we decided to use it.”77
The title track, “Hey Jude,” also recorded in 1968, was the Beatles’ first
use of eight-track technology. With “Revolution” as the flip, “Hey Jude”
was the debut single on Apple. Originally titled “Hey Jules,” the song was
written by Paul McCartney for John Lennon’s son Julian, grappling at the
time with his parents’ divorce. McCartney recorded the base track at the
piano singing as he played. Later, a forty-piece orchestra was dubbed in.
“We also got them singing on the end,” said George Martin, and though “I
don’t think they liked doing it very much,” the song “became one of the
biggest single sellers that we ever had.”78
Abbey Road at the time did not yet have eight-track capability. “Hey
Jude” was rehearsed there, but recorded and mixed at Trident Studios, which
did have eight-track. In playback at Abbey Road, however, the track sounded
flawed. “Obviously,” recounted Geoff Emerick, “something at Trident had
been misaligned and the only hope of salvaging the mix was to whack on
massive amounts of treble equalization . . . Eventually we got it to sound
pretty good, although the track still didn’t have the kind of in-your-face
presence that characterizes most Beatles recordings done at Abbey Road.”79
The most compelling feature of “Hey Jude” as a recording is its uncon-
ventional arrangement, a daring seven-minutes-plus long, nearly half of
it a fade-out that never fades, as much a “hook” as the song’s primary
verses. “It certainly was the longest single we had made at the time,” said
George Martin.80 Or, for that matter, anyone had made. “We liked the end,”
said Paul McCartney. “We liked it going on . . . The DJs can always fade
it down if they want to. If you get fed up with it, you can always turn it
over.”81
58 Jerry Zolten
Following the release of the “Hey Jude”/“Revolution” single, John, Paul,

George, and Ringo moved on to an album conceived as the Beatles pared
down, a full-circle return to rock and roll basics – voices, drums, bass,
rhythm and lead guitar. No overdubs, technicalities, or backwards anything.
The studio proceedings were to be filmed for television broadcast, with the
working title, Get Back. Recording began on January 2, 1969 and culminated
on January 30 with the news-making concert staged on the rooftop of the
Beatles’ Savile Row offices, John Lennon famously remarking at the close,
“I hope we passed the audition.”82
Sidestepping the minutia of the Beatles unraveling during this period,
suffice it to say that tracks for the new stripped-down album were recorded
in the group’s own studios at Apple headquarters and in live performance
during the rooftop concert. As events transpired, though, Get Back, the LP,
never made it to record stores. The Beatles’ new adviser, Allen Klein, with
profit in mind, wanted a 35-mm cinematic film in place of the TV broadcast
as well as studio rather than live rooftop recordings.83 There were additional
commercial considerations as well, but the main thrust was that the album
was delayed. Only two tracks, “Get Back” and “Don’t Let Me Down,” were
released to the public in the form of a single in April 1969.
The evolution of “Get Back,” the song, was lengthy, numerous recordings
made over a few months’ time, some live, others in studio. The finished
version was ultimately created by Paul McCartney and producer/engineer
Glyn Johns from the eleventh of fourteen studio takes and a seamlessly
tacked on coda from the third live rooftop performance.84 Glyn Johns would
put together a finished Get Back album true to the original stripped-down
intentions of the Beatles, but his efforts were rejected. The album eventually
saw light a year later, but in modified form and with a new producer. More
on that in a moment, but first, Abbey Road, a homecoming of sorts and a
white flag in the midst of the battle that Get Back had turned out to be.
Abbey Road was a return to the “home” studio, a last opportunity, as
it turned out, to work in house with George Martin, Geoff Emerick, and
some from the old team. There were, however, changes at Abbey Road. One,
noted Emerick, was the switch from outmoded glowing tube electronics to
transistorized components. The new mixing console, for instance, lacked
the warmth of the old tube model in how it captured the Beatles’ sound.
George Harrison was troubled “that there was less body in the guitar sound,”
and Ringo Starr “was playing as hard as ever, but you didn’t hear the same
impact.”85
Another change this time around was more human than technical. John
Lennon and Yoko Ono had been in an automobile accident as the sessions
were starting. The others worked for a time without Lennon, but he seemed
discouragingly disengaged when he at last arrived. To compound matters,
Lennon had a bed placed in the studio for the recuperating Yoko Ono, a
microphone positioned overhead so her artistic suggestions could be heard.
“I’d spent nearly seven years of my life in recording studios,” said Emerick,
“and I thought I’d seen it all . . . but this took the cake.”86
With all the distractions, tensions, and technicalities, Abbey Road still
emerged as rich with memorable tracks, two of them George Harrison’s best
work with the Beatles. The first, a standalone from side one, is “Something,”
a gorgeous love song of unusual texture and structure. Harrison performed
his own vocals, drums, and piano on the initial demo. Three months and
several discarded versions later in May, 1969, the core master take was
recorded with Paul and Ringo on bass and drums respectively, John Lennon
on guitar, George Harrison on guitar played through a rotating Leslie organ
speaker, and American R&B artist Billy Preston on piano. Aside from his
musicianship, Harrison invited Preston because his presence tended to
dampen the other Beatles’ bickering. With strings dubbed into the final
mix, the track was deemed complete in August.
The most compelling aspect of Abbey Road was the second-side roller-
coaster ride, aptly described by author Ken Womack as “Lennon and
McCartney’s ultimate vehicle for their nostalgic journey to a comparatively
genial, untarnished past.”87 Ten songs – some just beyond a minute – and
one an afterthought, pass by in a cyclorama of sound, tempo, and mood.
Listeners come away with a sense that they have somehow experienced the
whole dynamic sweep of the Beatles’ career in twenty-one brief minutes.
The effect derived from pure studio artistry, not merely by how songs were
recorded, but from careful sequencing and interfacing that never provided
the listener with a moment to break away from the action. In this regard,
Abbey Road is a crowning studio achievement.
The side soars from the start with the second of George Harrison’s mas-
terpieces, “Here Comes the Sun,” an optimistic message of clearing sky and
light, a clever construction of major chords and brightly picked acoustic
guitar. With McCartney on bass and Starr on drums, Harrison otherwise
carries the show, performing vocals, guitars, harmonium, and Moog syn-
thesizer, the recently invented keyboard instrument that used computers to
simulate instrumental sounds and beyond. The final sonic texture of the
song was enriched by an overdubbed seventeen-piece orchestra.88
Next came John Lennon’s sultry “Because,” an impressionistic piece
inspired by the chords of Beethoven’s “Moonlight Sonata” sequenced in
reverse. John, Paul, and George sing in close harmony, George Martin on
harpsichord, and George Harrison programming and performing on Moog
synthesizer.89
Here began the stepping-off point, Paul McCartney’s “You Never Give
Me Your Money,” a linkage of four short and distinct themes, serving as a
60 Jerry Zolten
platform that segues into John Lennon’s regal “Sun King,” the recording
replete with Romance languages, chirping crickets, and ethereal harmony.
The pace builds in momentum, four songs of just over a minute to less than
two in unbroken succession before resolving into “Carry That Weight,” a
rousing orchestral piece, the lyrics seeming to speak at once of both the
Beatles’ burden of staying together and the listeners’ need to brace up for a
time when the Beatles would be no more. There is a brief reprise of “You
Never Give Me Your Money” before a return to the main theme and then a
skillful break from tempo as the track transitions into the semi-finale, “The
End.”
That two-minute four-second track encapsulates all that made the Bea-
tles great. Screaming vocals, a hard-driving beat, the first ever Ringo Starr
drum solo, a sampling of searing lead guitar solos from John, Paul, and
George, and, in the end, the mellow side, Paul McCartney’s lead vocal
buoyed by John Lennon’s multi-tracked backup harmony, the words shin-
ing through most of all. “And in the end, the love you take is equal to the
love you make.” A somber farewell until ameliorated by Paul McCartney’s
twenty-three-second afterthought, “Her Majesty,” as if the Beatles had left
the stage and, when the show seemed irretrievably over, his smiling face
peaked out briefly from behind a side curtain – and then he’s gone. The
Beatles all attended the August 20, 1969 session during which the final Abbey
Road mix and running order sequence were fixed. “It was the last time,”
writes Mark Lewisohn, “that they were together inside the recording studio
where they had changed the face of popular music.”90 And, I would add,
how it was recorded.
Yes, it’s true, there was one more album to follow, the retooled Get Back,
now titled Let It Be. The Beatles, long gone from the project, brought in leg-
endary producer Phil Spector to finish the album. Spector, though admired,
was difficult to work with in the studio as he heavy-handedly imposed his
own vision on the Beatles’ work, the concept of “stripped-down” lost in the
mix. Spector, critics would say, overzealously added orchestral and choir
overdubs as well as his trademark reverb. Geoff Emerick described Spec-
tor barking commands at veteran Abbey Road engineers and screaming at
musicians: “You’ll do what I tell you to do, and you’ll like it!” As musicians
rehearsed “The Long and Winding Road,” Emerick recalls that Spector
“turned around and said . . . loudly enough for us all to hear, ‘I hope Paul
likes this, because I’ve changed the chords . . . ’ Spector was not just remixing
the Beatles’ music, he was actually altering it.”91
Let It Be and the theatrical film that coincided with its release in May
1970 were well enough received by both critics and the public, a number of
songs being first-tier Beatles fare. “Two of Us,” a personal favorite, conjured
up the good karma that had been the hallmark of the Lennon-McCartney
partnership. Three of the album’s best songs shine out from the shadow cast
by Phil Spector’s imposing “Wall of Sound.” John Lennon’s “All Across the
Universe,” originally a simple recording, was now overdubbed with a thirty-
five-piece orchestra and fourteen-voice choir. “Let It Be,” Paul McCartney’s
piano-accompanied gospel-tinged hymn, was now supplemented with brass
and cellos. “The Long and Winding Road” was framed unflatteringly by
orchestral overdubs and a choir that sounded disengaged from the emotion
in McCartney’s performance. This is not to diminish Phil Spector, because
his groundbreaking work as a producer was perfectly suited to his own
projects. He simply wasn’t the right fit for the Beatles at that point in time.
If anything, putting the artistic studio decisions in the hands of an outsider,
even one of Phil Spector’s stature, served only to reveal how brilliant George
Martin, the Beatles, and their in-house creative team were in developing the
body of studio work that transformed how pop music was recorded.
The Beatles had made a decision to cut themselves off from the sus-
tenance of live performance in exchange for the freedom that came with
isolation in the studio. By doing so, they positioned themselves to revolu-
tionize the art of recording, and that is what they did, for evermore defining
what it truly meant to be a recording artist. Perhaps it is too obvious or
trite to say, but in the end, all the Beatles really did need was love. They told
us so. And since they could no longer find it among themselves, they went
their separate ways to find it, each on his own.
part two
Works
3 Rock and roll music
howard kramer
George Martin, in many ways, birthed the Beatles as we know them. We

know them through their records, not their performances. They arrived
on his step as a nightclub-hardened beat group with virtually no studio
experience and, under his tutelage, they became the musical group that
personified the studio as an instrument. The Beatles’ first three long-playing
records, Please Please Me, With the Beatles, and A Hard Day’s Night, were a
short ramp leading up to a colossal cultural shift. Astonishingly, they were
all recorded and released in a twenty-two-month period. To examine those
cornerstone recordings, we must first see how they arrived there.
The first experience any of the Beatles had with recording was in 1958,
when the Quarrymen, with John Lennon, Paul McCartney, George Harri-
son, Colin Hanton, and Duff Lowe, cut a shellac disc of two songs at a home
studio in Liverpool. One was Buddy Holly and the Crickets’ “That’ll Be the
Day,” a highly appropriate choice considering Holly’s pervasive influence
on the band. The other was “In Spite of All the Danger,” a McCartney-
Harrison composition characterized by McCartney as “very influenced by
Elvis.”1 To the participants, the event had a magical feel, as they now could
return to their homes and play an actual performance of their own. Still,
a professional studio seemed an unattainable dream, and they were barely
beyond being just a scruffy little skiffle group.
The evolution of the Quarrymen into the Beatles was a path forged on
the streets and in the rank nightclubs of Hamburg, Germany. As Lennon
said, “I grew up in Hamburg, not Liverpool.” During the Beatles’ sec-
ond stay in Hamburg, they were recruited by independent producer Bert
Kaempfert, who would have a substantial career of his own, to back fellow
English performer Tony Sheridan. The Beatles and Sheridan were appear-
ing together at the Top Ten Club. The results were musically unspectacular.
Sheridan’s vocal performance is a pale amalgam of Elvis Presley, Jack Scott,
and Gene Vincent. The Beatles’ instrumental backing shows competence,
but little more. During the sessions, the Beatles cut a few songs not featuring
Sheridan, the well-worn chestnut “Ain’t She Sweet,” sung by Lennon, and
another original instrumental, “Cry for a Shadow.” When the record of
“My Bonnie” was released, Sheridan got top billing, and the Beatles were
renamed the Beat Brothers. It was very anticlimactic for the Beatles.
[65]
66 Howard Kramer
The Kaempfert sessions, however, resulted in a profound event in the

Beatles’ career. Legend has it that on October 28, 1961, a young man named
Raymond Jones came into NEMS Music Store in Liverpool and asked its
proprietor, Brian Epstein, if they had “My Bonnie” by the Beatles in stock.
Within two weeks, Epstein witnessed the Beatles for the first time, and was
managing them by December. His goal was to procure a recording contract.
As the proprietor of a successful record shop, and possessed of a well-
groomed manner, Epstein could open doors for his new clients. In 1961,
there were, essentially, four major record companies in England: EMI, Pye,
Philips, and Decca. Epstein arranged for the Beatles to audition for Decca
Records in London on January 1, 1962.
The Beatles’ session at Decca began at 11:00 a.m. There is little evidence
to suggest the session lasted much longer than the combined duration of
the fifteen songs. John Lennon recalled: “We virtually recorded our Cavern
show, with a few omissions.”2 As in their live performances, and typical of
many of the groups on their circuit, the Beatles covered a wide spectrum
of material: R&B (“Money [That’s What I Want],” “Three Cool Cats”),
standards (“Bésame Mucho,” “The Sheik of Araby”) show tunes (“Till There
Was You”) and rock and roll (“Memphis,” “Crying, Waiting, Hoping”).
Three Lennon-McCartney compositions (“Hello Little Girl,” “Love of the
Loved,” “Like Dreamers Do”) were also performed. The resulting recording
is not much more than a mere transcription of the event. Decca certainly
had no incentive to make it more than that. Essentially, the Beatles set up
their gear and the engineer rolled tape. There were no overdubs and the
only effect used is a uniform echo. You can hear a nervous tightening in
all of their voices. The playing is steady and tight, but clipped. Epstein had
high hopes that the originals would be recognized as a sign of the Beatles’
exceptional talent. The previous two years of near constant performing
made the foursome, with Pete Best still on drums, a respectable unit, but
Decca was unimpressed. They passed on the group.
Despite this disappointment, Epstein was allowed by Decca to use the
tape to shop the band. Pye soon declined to sign the Beatles, too. Epstein’s
confidence, as well as the band’s, was wavering. Epstein continued to beat
a path between Liverpool and London. A series of fortunate events placed
Epstein in a meeting with Parlophone Records’ label head, George Martin.
The Beatles passed the audition with George Martin and Parlophone.
That session, June 1962, yielded only confirmation that Martin was willing
to take a shot at the group. Later, he recalled saying: “I’ve got nothing to
lose.”3 I could go on and on with the minutiae of historical details, but the
key thing here is the Beatles got the break they desperately needed. George
Martin certainly found the band that changed the fortunes of his label (and
all of Great Britain, for that matter). But what he didn’t yet know was that
he was about to begin the most seamless and symbiotic artist–producer

relationship in the history of recorded music.
At the time, an artist’s success was based entirely on the sale of sin-
gles. Martin’s first choice for a single was “How Do You Do It,” a song by
Mitch Murray and Barry Mason that had been on Martin’s desk for several
months. In the June audition, the Beatles recorded “Love Me Do.” After
they signed, Martin pitched the group “How Do You Do It” and they duti-
fully learned and recorded the song in their first fully fledged Abbey Road
session on September 4, 1962. They also cut “Love Me Do,” this time with
Ringo Starr on drums, replacing Pete Best, who had been fired three weeks
earlier. Martin and his lieutenant, Ron Richards, heard potential in “Love
Me Do,” but were not convinced. The following week, the Beatles, with
session drummer Andy White behind the kit and Starr on tambourine, cut
a usable master. Martin conceded to the Beatles, and their own composition
became their debut single. “Love Me Do”/“P.S. I Love You” was released on
October 5.
It’s a misconception that the Beatles’ first release wasn’t much of a hit.
The peak of “Love Me Do” at number seventeen was a solid foothold for the
band. It had an eighteen-week chart run that was mirrored by their follow-
up single, “Please Please Me.” Cut while “Love Me Do” was climbing the
charts, “Please Please Me,” with its upbeat R&B tempo and sweet harmonica
hook, started life as a mid-tempo song in the Roy Orbison mold. George
Martin’s advice to bring up the tempo yielded the group’s first chart-topper.
In between the sessions with Martin, the Beatles were working virtually
every day, with two gigs in one day a common event. The day before the
September 4 session, they played a lunchtime set at their hometown club,
the Cavern, and an evening show in Widnes, Lancashire. The day after the
session, they were back at the Cavern. This pace continued unabated for
the next four years. As the Beatles’ successes mounted, the level of pressure
related to their performances, writing, and recording grew exponentially.
“Please Please Me” shone a light on a new type of pop group in Britain.
The record business was still running on a decades-old business model pred-
icated on a hierarchy of song, publisher, record company, and performer.
Songwriters wrote the material on contract to publishers. The publishers
then pushed the song to record companies and producers who could match
the song with a performer. The publisher was the main money-generator
and beneficiary through the licensing and royalty income. A song could,
and often did, have several competing versions vying for the public’s atten-
tion. The one that hit would also be a boon to the particular label that
released it. As for the artists, they were lucky to be paid at all. Prior to the
Beatles, pop/rock music in the UK adhered to a tight formula; bands had
a named lead singer with a backing band (Cliff Richard and the Shadows,
68 Howard Kramer
Shane Fenton and the Fentones) that often performed steps in unison, or
a lead singer with a dynamic stage name (Billy Fury, Marty Wilde, Adam
Faith). Impresario Larry Parnes, who had passed on the Beatles early in
their career, managed many of the latter. Both of these types of performers
were just another extension of the old model, beholden to publishers and
producers for material. The Beatles were self-contained in the truest sense.
They wrote and performed their own music and, by design, did not stick
one sole member into the limelight.
With two hit singles to their credit, the Beatles now had to create an
album. George Martin said: “I asked them what they had that we could
record quickly, and the answer was their stage act.”4 It was finely honed and
well rehearsed. A session was scheduled for Monday, February 11, 1963. As
Mark Lewisohn, in his essential book The Complete Beatles Recording Ses-
sions, wrote of this day: “There can scarcely have been 585 more productive
minutes in the history of recorded music.”5 It is a bold yet undeniable state-
ment. Between 10:00 a.m. and 10:45 p.m., the Beatles cut thirteen songs,
twelve of which, along with “Please Please Me” and its B side “Ask Me Why,”
became their entire first long-playing record.
Released in the first week of April 1963, Please Please Me promptly
installed itself at number one and remained in the album charts for seventy
weeks. Oddly enough, the album bore a resemblance to the Beatles’ Decca
audition. It contained R&B (“Twist and Shout,” “Chains”) pop (“A Taste of
Honey”) and original rock and roll.
The addition of those McCartney/Lennon originals (as they were billed
on the record) changed the landscape dramatically. The eight originals
on Please Please Me, compared to the three found on the Decca audition,
reveal significant artistic growth. Kicking off the record was “I Saw Her
Standing There,” a fiery original rocker. This track served as a declaration
that there should be no question about the legitimacy of the Beatles. “I Saw
Her Standing There” was a bona fide rock and roll song, joining the rare
company of “Move It” by Cliff Richard and the Shadows and “Shakin’ All
Over” by Johnny Kidd and the Pirates as genuine UK rock songs. It sounded
like it could have been stolen from a Little Richard Specialty Records session.
The Beatles’ influences were on clear display throughout the LP. “Mis-
ery” and “There’s a Place” blend Everly Brothers-type harmonies with a
nod to Brill Building composition. The Brill Building is further evident
in the two Shirelles covers, “Boys” and “Baby It’s You,” and the Cookies’
“Chains.” John Lennon’s vocals on the sublime country soul of Arthur
Alexander’s “Anna (Go To Him)” are a touchstone for virtually everything
he ever recorded afterward. Add to that his throat-shredding performance
on the Isley Brothers’ “Twist and Shout” and Lennon arrives on the scene as
one of the most promising white rock vocalists. Considering that Lennon
was suffering from a terrible cold and sore throat, that February day only
amplifies its greatness.
Released less than three weeks after Please Please Me came the Beatles’
third single. Curiously, it was not included on their debut LP. Then again,
they were still operating in a world where the single was king. Written on
the back of a tour bus while on the road supporting Helen Shapiro and
recorded on March 5, 1963, “From Me to You” became the tipping point for
the band. The complete session, which surfaced on a bootleg CD in 1994,
shows the group running through several takes of the song, complete with
Lennon’s directions to McCartney to “keep right in with your harmonies.”
“From Me to You” wasn’t a revelatory piece of music. Like its predecessors,
it had ringing guitars, vocal harmonies, and a great harmonica hook. This
time, however, the Beatles had a feverishly growing audience, and “From
Me to You” hit number one on May 4 and remained there for seven weeks.
Please Please Me followed it to number one on the album chart the following
week and remained there for an astounding thirty weeks.
In addition to their tireless live performance schedule, the Beatles had to
cut dedicated live sessions of their songs for the BBC to play achieve airplay.
It’s hard for today’s radio audiences to conceive, but in the UK in 1963
most music performances had to be sourced from live sessions. This was
a negotiated contract point with the musicians’ union to ensure that the
broadcasting of records would not take jobs from musicians. Furthermore,
pop music, under the name of light programs, was only one small part
of the programming spectrum found at the BBC. The biggest pop music
program, Saturday Club, could have more than 3 million listeners, nearly
7 percent of England’s population. A single appearance could make a career;
repeated appearances practically ensured it. The power was very similar to
the hold the Grand Ole Opry had on country music in the USA. Between
April 4 and May 21, 1963, the Beatles recorded no fewer than six different
versions of “From Me to You” for broadcast on various BBC programs.
With the explosion of Beatlemania, the Beatles actually began hosting their
own BBC program, Pop Go the Beatles, in June 1963. The sessions for those
broadcasts remained officially unreleased until 1994’s Live at the BBC. For
those who wish to hear what the Beatles sounded like as a performing unit,
this is the record to play.
The Beatles’ star had risen and became fixed at the pinnacle of the UK
entertainment world. Conventional wisdom would dictate that they had
no place to go but down. Nothing could be more wrong. In August, the
Beatles dropped the musical equivalent of the atom bomb. (It wouldn’t be
the last time that would happen.) “She Loves You” is practically viral in its
catchiness. With its explosive tom-tom drum roll and exuberant opening
chorus, complete with the indelible “Yeah, yeah, yeah” vocal hook, “She
70 Howard Kramer
Loves You” was an unstoppable juggernaut. It spent a total of six weeks at

number one and became a hit in several European countries and Australia.
“She Loves You” became the biggest-selling single in UK history until 1977,
when it was displaced by Paul McCartney’s “Mull of Kintyre.”
The Beatles had no real competition at this point. Elvis Presley, the first
rock and roll deity, was ensconced in Hollywood making mediocre films,
and Presley’s contemporaries had mostly fallen away in various ignominious
ways. The Beatles’ immediate predecessors, such as Cliff Richard, seemed
irrelevant by comparison (although Richard did maintain a very successful
career for decades). The machine of Liverpool-based groups also managed
by Brian Epstein, such as Gerry and the Pacemakers, Brian Poole and the
Tremeloes, and Billy J. Kramer and the Dakotas, were also topping the UK
charts, but the Beatles were different. They had more than charisma. They
possessed the type of magnetism that made Presley a revolution seven years
prior, only multiplied by a factor of four. And where Presley had shrouded
his ambition in his polite Southern son persona, the Beatles were openly
ambitious. John Lennon often rallied his bandmates by asking, “Where are
we going, boys?” “To the toppermost of the poppermost, Johnny!!” they
replied. It wasn’t a joke. In February 1963, New Musical Express ran a page
on the Beatles in which they each filled out answers to a questionnaire.
It asked for their personal statistics, likes, and hobbies. In the category of
“Professional ambition,” John Lennon answered, “To be rich and famous.”
The task of a second album was at hand. Success brought with it the
luxury of more time to record. For With the Beatles, the group spread out
the recording sessions to seven days over the course of four months. Luxury
is a relative term, as the group continued to work virtually every day either
in performance, in session for the BBC, or making television appearances.
(They also bade farewell to their hometown haunt of the Cavern on August
3 after nearly 300 appearances there.)
With the Beatles contained eight new originals, including George Har-
rison’s first solo composition, “Don’t Bother Me.” The six non-originals
heavily favored contemporary American rhythm and blues, notably three
from the blossoming Motown stable. The Beatles hadn’t quite shaken show
tunes, and included “Till There Was You” from The Music Man, a song
they had performed at their Decca audition. Again, it was the Lennon-
McCartney originals that set them apart. Pick any tune: “Hold Me Tight,”
“It Won’t Be Long,” or “All My Loving” are all joyous and steady rocking
songs with fantastically emotive lead vocals and harmonies, sharp guitars,
and swinging drums. Even Ringo’s spotlight, “I Wanna Be Your Man,” a song
initially given to the Rolling Stones and thought by Lennon and McCartney
to be substandard, was a kicking rave-up awash with tremolo-laden guitars.
If “She Loves You” was a statement about the pop craftsmanship abilities
of the Beatles and the Lennon-McCartney team, With the Beatles said there
was a lot more where that came from. With the Beatles did not need the
inclusion of “She Loves You” to make it a hit. It entered the album chart
on December 7, posted itself at number one for twenty-one weeks, and was
the best-selling album of 1963.
EMI, the parent corporation of Parlophone, was suddenly awash with
money. They acted as any self-respecting, profit-driven record company
would in that situation; they immediately saw repackaging opportunities
with the Beatles’ limited output. Between July and November, EMI released
three EPs, four-song, 7-inch extended play records, of existing hits and
album tracks. Why release a record only once when you can release and sell
it twice?
No discussion of With the Beatles can be contemplated without consid-
ering the album cover. On Please Please Me, the band assembled above the
entrance to EMI’s Manchester Square headquarters, where photographer
Angus McBean framed the four Beatles in color as vibrant and youthful
extensions of the contemporary architecture, a new band for a new era in
Britain. They were smiling, besuited and clean cut, if you excuse Ringo’s
Teddy boy hair. The cover of With the Beatles created an iconography com-
parable only to Alfred Wertheimer’s 1956 photos of Elvis Presley. Like
Wertheimer’s photos, it was stark yet filled with energy. It was shot by pho-
tographer Robert Freeman in black and white at the Palace Court Hotel in
Bournemouth, the Beatles posing tightly in black turtlenecks with the light
from a window half illuminating their still and fixed facial expressions. It’s
dark and nearly brooding, but the image transmits a message that change is
here. Rock and roll is not dead. The eyes of the four are deep and knowing.
The millions who bought this record, and its North American equivalent,
understood. This image permitted all who connected with it to declare:
“This is new. This is mine. This is not like what came before.” If the visual
wasn’t enough of a cultural demarcation, With the Beatles was released on
November 22, 1963, the day John F. Kennedy was assassinated.
Beatlemania was in full-blown effect in England. The Beatles sometimes
had to dress as policemen to sneak into theatres where they performed.
Hordes of screaming fans drowned out the meager PA systems of the day,
leaving the Beatles to lipread one another just to follow a song in perfor-
mance. Outside of the UK, they were the hottest thing throughout Scan-
dinavia and Australia. In the United States, the birthplace of the Beatles’
musical heroes, they were virtually unknown. Capitol Records, EMI’s part-
ner in the USA, passed on the Beatles, and their first few records were
released on a smattering of independent labels. Frustrated with the lack
of cooperation, Brian Epstein called Capitol Records president, Alan Liv-
ingston, and convinced him to release the records. As this chapter must
72 Howard Kramer
restrict itself to the first three UK albums, I highly recommend any and all
of Bruce Spizer’s books to those who wish to learn more about the Beatles’
records in America.
Hard on the heels of With the Beatles came yet another irresistible free-
standing single. One might say that the Beatles could have put out a record of
them making animal noises and it would have hit number one, just based on
the mass hysteria enveloping them. Whether that is true or not, the Beatles
dropped yet another indelible piece of pop perfection. Britain’s New Musical
Express described “I Want to Hold Your Hand” as “repetitious almost to the
point of hypnosis . . . [a] power-packer disc.” Perhaps the venerable music
magazine was looking for an excuse to account for the Beatles’ hold on the
public. Cut in October during the recording of With the Beatles, “I Want
to Hold Your Hand” rocketed to number one for a five-week run as 1963
closed.
The session for “I Want to Hold Your Hand” also marked the first time
the Beatles cut a session with a four-track recorder. Despite the fact that
this technology had been in use in the US for several years, EMI was slow to
adopt it. Once it was done, though, the Beatles took to it immediately. With
the additional tracks available, overdubbing became easier and allowed for
a more expansive sonic canvas. In the next four years, the Beatles’ mastery
of this medium would be revealed.
The new year saw Beatlemania reach an unstoppable pitch around the
world. As they became an international commodity, the Beatles expanded
their touring. In January 1964, they were in residency at the Paris Olympia,
supporting French singer Sylvie Vartan and American singer-guitarist Trini
Lopez. Odeon Records, EMI’s licensee in Germany, felt that the only way to
sell large quantities of records there was for the Beatles to sing in German.
The session at EMI’s Pathé Marconi studios was meant to cut German-
language versions of “I Want to Hold Your Hand” and “She Loves You.”
After they cut “Komm, Gib Mir Diene Hand” and “Sie Lieb Dich,” ample
time remained to record another Lennon-McCartney original, “Can’t Buy
Me Love.” It was the only session recorded by the Beatles outside of the UK.
To fill the time between singles, EMI continued to release EPs. “All My
Loving,” a track from With the Beatles so strong that Paul McCartney opened
his shows on his 2002 US tour with it, was coupled with “Money (That’s
What I Want)” and the now thrice-released “Ask Me Why” and “P.S. I Love
You.”
It opens with a cold-start vocal, and immediately the Beatles are off to the
races. “Can’t Buy Me Love” is yet another gem steeped in first-generation
rock and roll. The subject of money and riches has a strong tradition in all
pop music, and “Can’t Buy Me Love” fitted the bill like an answer record
to the Drifters’ classic “Money Honey.” In light of the Beatles’ immense

popularity and imminent wealth, it also possesses the makings of a classic
British “piss-take,” at least one with self-deprecating overtones. “Can’t Buy
Me Love” spent three weeks at number one and was the UK’s best-selling
single of 1964.
If a three-week run at number one for “Can’t Buy Me Love” seems puny
by comparison to previous hits, there is a solid economic reason. Although
the Beatles were firmly seated at the mountaintop of pop music in 1964, in
their wake came a flood of performers who now jockeyed with the Fab Four
for chart-toppers. By the end of 1964, the list of fellow British bands to bag a
number one hit reads like a Who’s Who of British rock: the Dave Clark Five,
the Animals, the Rolling Stones, Manfred Mann, the Kinks, and Herman’s
Hermits. So complete was British domination that only two American acts,
Roy Orbison and the Supremes, hit the top in 1964. On the album side of
the business, the Beatles’ dominance was nearly complete. Their albums
clocked a total of forty weeks at number one that year.
Another EP hit the streets in June 1964. The Long Tall Sally EP was full
of covers of American songs and one original. “I Call Your Name” was a
castoff that Lennon gave to Billy J. Kramer and the Dakotas a year earlier,
but had now deemed worthy of recording. The covers of Carl Perkins, Larry
Williams, and Little Richard were straight from the Beatles’ stage repertoire.
The path from the top of the charts to the silver screen was well worn
when the Beatles cut their four-picture deal with United Artists. The first
film was A Hard Day’s Night, a black and white “documentary” of a couple
of days in the life of the Beatles. Written by Alun Owen and directed by
Richard Lester, it proved to be a splendid platform for the group and a
remarkably enduring film. The film was shot over March and April with
recording sessions spread out between February and June.
The soundtrack marked the first time a Beatles album comprised entirely
Lennon-McCartney compositions, thirteen in total, and A Hard Day’s Night
shows them truly blossoming as songwriters. There was collaboration, but
the die was cast with the primary songwriter taking lead vocals. In his New
Musical Express review of July 3, 1963, Allan Evans wrote: “I don’t think this
album has the uninhibited joyous drive of the former Beatles’ LPs, but it
is still way out ahead of rivals.” While there is no question that the Beatles
had no creative rivals, Evans’s perception of a lack of joy missed a key point.
In the face of inconceivable tumult, they found a way to grow, both as
individuals and as artists. Two songs in particular, McCartney’s “Things We
Said Today” and Lennon’s “I’ll Be Back,” ring slightly of melancholy but
point to a style that would develop into the songs that filled Rubber Soul
eighteen months later. Released on July 10, 1964, A Hard Day’s Night sat at
74 Howard Kramer
number one for twenty-one consecutive weeks. It was displaced by Beatles

For Sale.
We look back now and see a lifetime of work. In truth, the Beatles would
be over and done as a working group in little more than five years from this
point. Their first two years as a recording entity were frenzied and prolific,
and truly changed much of the world. This was merely the first step.
4 “Try thinking more”: Rubber Soul and the Beatles’
transformation of pop
james m. decker
The new songs had no humility. They pushed past the veil and opened a window into the darkness
and climbed through it with a knife in their teeth . . . . They were beautiful songs, full of places and
textures – flesh, velvet, concrete, city towers, desert sand, snakes, violence, wet glands, childhood,
the pure wings of night insects. Anything you could think of was there, and you could move
through it as if it were an endless series of rooms and passages full of visions and adventures. And
even if it was about killing and dying – that was just another place to go.
mary gaitskill, veronica 1
While Mary Gaitskill’s character Alison Owen does not refer to the Beatles
in the above epigraph, the musical and lyrical range of what she deems the
“new songs” owes a tremendous debt to the group from Liverpool. While
some early pop artists, such as Chuck Berry, had occasionally explored topics
other than puppy love, teen angst, and the exuberance of youth,2 serious
considerations of subjects beyond this terrain fell mainly to performers in
the traditional and folk genres, and few ever reached the level of “visions
and adventures.” Indeed, had a few brave souls forayed into this uncharted
territory, the audience might have taunted them off the stage. Starting with
A Hard Day’s Night, however, and reaching fruition in Rubber Soul and
Revolver, the Beatles crossed a thematic threshold that would both inspire
their pop contemporaries and develop an audience ready for songs about
more than hand-holding and whispered secrets. It is no coincidence that
Rubber Soul took its narrative cues more from folk crossovers such as Bob
Dylan and the Byrds than from the Beatles’ pop cohorts. Sonically the
influences were numerous, from the soul alluded to in the album’s title to
country and western and Indian sitar music.3
Remarkably, while critics inevitably cite Rubber Soul as the Beatles’ “tran-
sitional” album, the shift from successful pop act to unparalleled masters
of the studio took but three years.4 Ultimately, the demarcation between
Beatlemania and the studio years proves an arbitrary one, for from the
beginning the Beatles, especially John Lennon, showed a lyrical uneasiness
with their expected subject matter. In numerous songs – such as “Misery”
(1963),“Not a Second Time” (1963), “Little Child” (1963), and “Tell Me
Why” (1964) – love’s anxiety and pain burst through among the paeans to
love’s gleaming rewards.5 For the early Beatles, the dark vulnerability of Roy
Orbison battles with the sunny, sexualized confidence of Little Richard. In
[75]
76 James M. Decker
1965, however, a combination of their narcotic tourism, distaste for grueling

concert schedules, broader experiences and reading, increased fascination
with studio technology, and, above all, economic power allowed the former
approach to dominate. With Rubber Soul, the Beatles’ propensity to exper-
iment – always strong – gelled, particularly with respect to a dissatisfaction
with transparent lyrics. The alternation between positive and negative rela-
tionships that marked the movement between their earlier songs now often
appeared within individual tracks, creating an ambiguity relatively unheard
of in pop songs – but lauded in poetry. The Beatles coupled their lyrical
transformation with a stronger awareness of the studio’s possibilities for
transcending the raw energy of quickly recorded songs such as “I Saw Her
Standing There” and “It Won’t Be Long,” and for drawing from a more
nuanced palette of sounds. In Revolver and beyond, the Beatles pressed for-
ward, delving into the creative process with even more zeal, having learned
much from the Rubber Soul sessions.6 Pushing their lyrics beyond the the-
matic boundaries of any previous pop artist, the Beatles later took on such
heady concepts as hallucinogenic consciousness and alienation, while at the
same time their sonic demands pressed their engineers literally to invent
new technology. Another important testament to the Beatles’ commitment
to a new sound on Rubber Soul is that, for the first time, no covers appeared.
In a business where careers were measured in months, the Beatles were old
hands, and on Rubber Soul they proved that they did not merely intend to
rehash yesterday’s aesthetic to an audience that bored quickly.
A glance at the Beatles’ 1964 partial itinerary7 captures but a fraction
of the frenzy, exhilaration, and exhaustion felt by the group during their
triumphant march across the globe. Between concert trips to the United
States and Australia – among many other countries – the Beatles appeared on
countless television and radio programs, recorded two albums, and acted
in A Hard Day’s Night. By 1965, however, the music itself was generally
lost in the din of publicity and thousands of screaming teens, and one
might find it perfectly logical if the Beatles had abandoned any pretense of
producing a quality product and simply rode out the wave of fame until the
crowds found a new Greatest Thing. The cycle of musical popularity and
obscurity, of boom and bust, long pre-dated the rock era, and few would
have dared to speculate that the Beatles would survive the demand for a
fresh face. Even Elvis had faded, after all. The Beatles, though, never created
songs out of complacency,8 perhaps owing to the complicated relationship
between Lennon and McCartney, and discovered in the studio both an
outlet for their creative energies and a haven from the constant demands
on their time. Working on their craft, ironically, became their escape from
selling their product, and as the Beatles looked around Abbey studios and
started paying attention to how George Martin produced their songs, they
77 Rubber Soul and the transformation of pop
discovered that they, too, could contribute. As Lennon recalled, “Rubber

Soul was a matter of having experienced the recording studio; having grown
musically as well, but [getting] the knowledge of the place, of the studio.
We were more precise about making the album, that’s all, and we took
over the cover and everything.”9 Having survived their rites of passage, the
initiated Beatles seized their autonomy and would henceforth become not
the passive instruments of the studio’s magic but the active wavers of the
wand. McCartney put it succinctly: “We’d had our cute period and now it
was time to expand.”10
Expand they did. While externally less radical a break with tradition
than Revolver, Rubber Soul lays the necessary groundwork for the Beat-
les’ more explicit attempts at questioning the pop hegemony of idealized
love. Although some compliment the Beatles for being “ahead of their
time,” the group’s consistent popularity somewhat belies that characteriza-
tion. Typically, avant-garde artists lack a wide audience and measure their
impact more in terms of historical influence. The Velvet Underground,
for instance, failed to chart a single top forty hit, yet the group’s infu-
sion of jarring instrumentation and sordid lyrics inspired numerous bands
that would achieve a far higher degree of popular acclaim once audiences
were better prepared. In the Beatles’ case, however, Brian Epstein’s public-
ity juggernaut ensured both an audience receptive to the Beatles’ “brand”
and one that would be sorely disappointed were the Beatles’ expansion an
overly dramatic one.11 Too many bewildering changes, however intellectu-
ally stimulating to the Beatles, would estrange the base and result in poor
word-of-mouth publicity.12 Theodor Adorno refers to this phenomenon
as “the rupture between autonomous production and the public.”13 For
Adorno, the angry confusion that can result from an audience’s rejection
of experimentation that pursues novelty to the exclusion of conventional
procedures finds its roots in the “alienation of production from consump-
tion,” which ultimately “has its specific basis in this necessity of consumer
consciousness to refer back to an intellectual and social situation in which
everything that goes beyond the given realities, every revelation of their
contradictions, amounts to a threat.”14 Beholden to their label, the Beat-
les still lacked the autonomy to abandon the mature conventions of pop
in favor of emergent techniques. However, by advancing incrementally,
the band supplied consumers with the referential signposts that Adorno
deems a prerequisite for a non-producer to comprehend or “recognize” the
music.15 In Mark Lewisohn’s words, Rubber Soul acts as a “very necessary
platform between the class pop music of Help! and the experimental ideas of
Revolver.”16 Beyond the marketing impact, the Beatle’s Rubber Soul spurred
on competitors such as Brian Wilson, Pete Townshend, and Ray Davies to
experiment with similar methods.
78 James M. Decker
Rubber Soul opens with “Drive My Car,” a hard-charging rocker that

with its bouncy “beep beep” vocals outwardly resembles the band’s earlier
output. Entranced by the tune’s immediate, if ametrical,17 sonic hook,
casual listeners – which included most in the Beatles’ audience – might not
have at first noticed the subtle shift in the narrative dynamic marked by the
song’s first line. Musically, moreover, Tim Riley notes that the song’s beat
“has a new freedom to it.”18 In singing “Asked a girl what she wanted to
be,” the Beatles reveal a lyrical perspective that moves away from the more
solipsistic pop ethos of earlier songs such as “I Want to Hold Your Hand,”
“Not a Second Time,” and even “Ticket to Ride.” In these earlier songs, the
Beatles almost universally objectify the narrator’s lover and focus on how
love or its dissolution makes him feel (or, alternatively, how the narrator
believes he can make her feel). “Drive My Car,” by contrast, establishes a
dialogue in which the female announces her dreams and desires – desires
that include thinly veiled sexual urges (“you can drive my car”; “I can
show you a better time”) but not necessarily love (“maybe I’ll love you”).
No longer the central attraction, the male narrator functions now as a way
station of sorts: “You can do something in between.” Love, while still present
as an idealized state that the female may withhold, fades to the background,
as the lover expresses her true design to “be famous, a star of the screen.”
The cosmopolitan narrator, far from put off by this cynical attitude, fully
participates in the transaction, not pledging, as in “Love Me Do,” to be true,
but stating that his “prospects are good” and that he “could start right away.”
The lack of a car, rather than a male companion – whether the narrator
or not – is the impetus behind the materialistic “girl’s” heartbreak. The
male cares little that his paramour wants to call the shots or that she lacks
the symbol of her would-be superiority – so long as his sexual appetites
are satisfied, and the repeated lines that close the song suggest they are.
In fact, a more complex process of reification may be taking place, one in
which the boy appears to acknowledge the girl’s subjectivity but in actuality
exploits her need for control and fame for his own more immediate wishes:
he lets her think that the lack of commitment is her idea, yet he is perfectly
willing to accede to a one-dimensional relationship and betrays no sign of
emasculation.19 Hiding in plain sight, the Beatles’ innovative approach to
lyrics enables more passive fans to enjoy the song (perhaps even mishearing
“baby, I love you” for “maybe I’ll love you”), while more active listeners
may marvel at the subversion of the most basic tenet of the pop ethos: the
idealization of the love relationship. The disjunction between the catchy
harmony and the cynical lyrics – reminiscent of Bertolt Brecht’s Threepenny
Opera – allows the Beatles to smuggle in their new aesthetic, as it were.
In “Drive My Car,” the Beatles evince ambivalence toward their erstwhile
subject matter and a new willingness to take lyrical and musical chances.
“Norwegian Wood (This Bird Has Flown)” continues Rubber Soul’s

interrogation of sexual ambiguities. With Harrison’s inaugural effort on the
sitar, the song anticipates the more radical instrumentation of Revolver and
later albums. Fusing the sitar’s eastern flavor with crisp, unhurried guitar
lines and understated percussion and bass, “Norwegian Wood” bathes its
listeners in a nostalgic melody that again contrasts with the lyrical narrative,
which, while contemplative, does not contain a longing for the past but
rather reveals an acrimonious memory. As with many of the tracks on
Rubber Soul, “Norwegian Wood” reinterprets a familiar theme, in this case
the loss of “love” (well represented in earlier songs such as “Don’t Bother
Me” and “Misery”), providing listeners with security yet challenging those
inclined to acknowledge the limitations of the standard treatment. In earlier
efforts such as “I Call Your Name,” the narrator, while undeniably hurt
and even confused, recalls an idealized moment of love, a time of perfect
emotional synthesis, the absence of which results in agony. In “Norwegian
Wood,” however, such harmony never existed, and alienation and wasted
potential take its place. Lennon’s lyrics – about one of his affairs – echo the
muddled sense of power in “Drive My Car” and reflect the group’s more
mature analysis of interpersonal relationships: “I once had a girl / Or should
I say / She once had me.” In fact, neither party “has” the other – emotionally
or sexually – and the entire memory casts the scene as an elaborate deception
stemming from jaded self-interest. Subverting the hand-holding innocence
of the Beatles’ initial phase, the “bird” takes the narrator back to her place,
an action likely to be viewed, whether in working-class Liverpool or posh
London, as a clear sign of sexual intent, particularly after she asks the
narrator to stay. The Norwegian wood serves a dual purpose, both as a
symbol of how empty small talk (“Isn’t it good / Norwegian wood?”) may
serve as a prelude to emotionally meaningless sex and of the counterfeit
quality of the relationship: McCartney notes that the fashionable-sounding
wood is in fact “cheap pine.”20 The prospective lover is particularly cryptic
in telling the narrator “to sit anywhere” despite the fact that “there wasn’t
a chair.” Looking back, the narrator detects a false note similar to the
“daytripper” who takes one “half the way there,” yet at the time the narrator
himself is predatory and willing to read the signifiers as he sees fit: “Biding
my time / Drinking her wine.” Clearly, the narrator is willing to put up
with the “bird’s” nonsense so long as the night culminates as he expects
with sex, an expectation heightened by her declaration that “It’s time for
bed.” Perhaps indicating more of a struggle than the song reveals, thirteen
seconds of instrumentation ensue before the would-be lover reveals that
“she worked in the morning and started to laugh.” The first clause indicates
that the narrator’s plans for sexual conquest will come to naught, while the
latter demonstrates that the woman knows perfectly well what the narrator
80 James M. Decker
expected and that she derides him for the assumption. Humiliated, the
narrator “crawled off to sleep in the bath,” only to awake to an empty
house – “This bird has flown.” McCartney remembers that he added the
final sequence in which the narrator “lit a fire” and ironically asks, “Isn’t it
good / Norwegian wood?” He further avers that the narrator turns arsonist,
that the fire was not in a fireplace but in the apartment itself. Such an
interpretation, if on the level,21 makes the relaxed instrumentation even
more jolting, as such a hostile reaction to sexual rebuff is mystifying. The
anger that such a response reveals is undoubtedly disproportionate, even
psychopathic, and it poses the question why the narrator would not have
stormed out at 2 a.m. Perhaps – replayed endlessly – the humiliation leads
the narrator to insert within his memory an empowering fantasy in place
of the mundane reality of leaving the flat. In any event, with “Norwegian
Wood (This Bird Has Flown),” the Beatles move pop music to stunning
new territory, away from lyrics ripe for parody by the likes of Steve Allen
and toward the poetic or, as Riley puts it, the “allusive.”22
In contrast, “You Won’t See Me,” while making some musical strides,
owes far more in terms of narrative to the Beatlemania phase than to
the “more surreal” (in McCartney’s words) tactics of other songs on the
album.23 Walter Everett rightly points out that the tune’s “sterile, manufac-
tured sheen” feels out of place on Rubber Soul, an album that consciously
moved away from slick pop formulas.24 The generic quality of the song is
borne out in the lyrics, which stake out narrative terrain similar to “No
Reply,” with a frustrated lover apostrophizing the object of his affections
and gently indicating that he would continue the relationship despite being
done wrong – though in both cases the girl fails to hear the plea.25 In both
songs, attempts to phone are fruitless, with parents’ (presumably) running
interference in “No Reply” and a busy line sounding in “You Won’t See Me.”
In the former song, a rival is seen walking “hand in hand” with the lover,
but in the latter the engaged line perhaps only hints that the paramour has
found another. In both songs, moreover, the self-centered narrator laments
that he might die. “No Reply” takes the direct approach (“I nearly died”),
while “You Won’t See Me” prefers a more oblique reference (“I just can’t
go on”). Neither song attempts to comprehend the other person’s position,
preferring instead to wallow in self-pity. In short, “You Won’t See Me,”
while a serviceable tune in the pop tradition, fails to measure up to the
strides made by nearly every other song on Rubber Soul.
In sharp distinction, “Nowhere Man” broke much thematic ground,
offering a critique of social detachment and apathy. Indeed, Kenneth
Womack calls the song’s protagonist “the band’s first genuinely literary
character.”26 More than any other track on the album, “Nowhere Man”
breaks the unstated rules for pop content. Love, cars, parental constraints –
“Nowhere Man” leaves these commonplaces behind and explores what

the philosopher Michael Fraenkel termed “the law of function,” a state
wherein individuals resemble machines more than “conscious spiritual
organisms.”27 The Nowhere Man lacks existential curiosity, “Doesn’t have
a point of view.” Rather, this figure weaves “Nowhere plans for nobody,”
moving zombie-like (Fraenkel equated the state to death-in-life) through
motions intended to accomplish no more than feeding his belly and placing
a roof over his head. The higher functions on Maslow’s hierarchy are blithely
ignored, a dangerous strategy in the post-Gulf of Tonkin 1960s: “Just sees
what he wants to see.” This phenomenon, the song notes, might stem from
the bounty of Western civilization, which allows citizens to ignore world
events even as they benefit from them: “Isn’t he a bit like you and me?”
Breaking the third wall, this last question appeals directly to the readers and
forces them to pay attention in a way that even the more complex relation-
ship songs on Rubber Soul fail to achieve. The narrator (really narrators,
as multiple voices sing the words) ponders whether the Nowhere Man can
empathize with his fellows, wondering, “Can you see me at all?” While the
song threatens to wither in despair, Lennon’s lyrics avoid this by pleading
with the anti-hero to “please listen” and connect with humanity, for only
then will he “know what [he’s] missing.” While he does not employ the
word, Lennon is clearly talking about Love, not in the limited sense that
the Beatles used it in prior songs, but as “the underlying theme to the uni-
verse,” as he glossed the primary subject of Rubber Soul.28 The Nowhere
Man, perhaps, loves himself, but more likely he has more in common with
Fraenkel’s machine, performing an anonymous function in an anonymous
corporation. The narrators call on him to Love, to transcend his own mate-
rial needs and to search out both Truth and the rest of the world. Only
empathy and Love can save the Nowhere Man from pure emptiness and the
law of function. If fans had failed to see the Beatles’ transformation on the
first two songs on Rubber Soul, they could hardly fail to do so on the fourth,
particularly given its release as a single in the United States.
With Harrison’s “Think for Yourself,” the group ostensibly returns to
familiar thematic ground. Rather than the dialogue of “Drive My Car,”
the song offers another of the band’s dramatic monologues directed at a
voiceless love interest. However, the message of “Think for Yourself ” differs
strikingly from “Not a Second Time” or “Do You Want to Know a Secret?”
in that it presents a rejection of the paramour’s offers of intimacy and “all
the good things” that it entails. The relationship presented here appears
much more complex, and the narrator advances a more sophisticated per-
spective: “good things” might be tempting but false. “Lies” that perhaps
once would have appealed are now unmasked as the product of fantasy.
The (former, one supposes) lover’s suggestion that if “we close our eyes”
82 James M. Decker
pleasurable events will follow fails to convince the narrator and leads him
to distance himself: “I won’t be there with you.” On one level, the narrator
might simply be expressing a dissatisfaction with previous phases of the
relationship – broken promises, perhaps, or unacceptable behavior on the
part of the lover. However, the injunction to “think for yourself ” indicates
a more expanded consciousness on the part of the narrator, possibly to
the point of rejecting the traditional “good things” attendant to a marriage
(career, family, materialism, etc.) in favor of a spiritually aware existence.
For the narrator, the love interest here reveals an uncritical acceptance of
collective values that, more often than not, lead not to fairytale endings
but “misery” for the participants. An “opaque” mind unwittingly parti-
cipates in a master narrative designed to strip one of individual identity
in exchange for meaningless baubles. The narrator holds out some hope,
though, with his comment that “the future still looks good / and you’ve got
time to rectify / all the things that you should.” Critical thinking – asking
questions skeptical of the love-as-fairytale model – can steer one clear of
the “ruins of the life” that the lover currently cherishes. The narrator clearly
rejects his lover’s ethos and “won’t be there” to witness the disillusionment
he feels inevitable, yet he leaves her with advice to “try thinking more.”
Harrison and the Beatles have thus raised the stakes from the naı̈ve idealism
of hand-holding to the recognition that life offers more possibilities to those
who would actively pursue an expanded consciousness – a theme that they
will plumb even further in Revolver. Combined with what Devin McKin-
ney calls the song’s “piercingly, gratingly wrong” sound, the track provides
the “distressing and confused” qualities that Adorno views as driving the
“critical impulse” of music that would successfully challenge convention.29
An album filled with such shock would no doubt have disaffected those
comfortable with the pop formula, but when juxtaposed with songs such
as “You Won’t See Me,” the innovations seem less drastic, less visible, yet
they still help cultivate a “new” audience that may, when listening to the
more technically and narratologically advanced Revolver, refer backward
(à la Adorno) and sense the “equivalency” that aids comprehension.30
The escape from wretchedness that Harrison offers in “Think for Your-
self ” appears more explicitly in the album’s next song, “The Word.” While
the former song provides a methodology, independent thinking, the latter
offers a philosophy stripped to its minimalist essence. Riley reminds read-
ers that while the song’s “message has grown trite . . . it tapped an attitude
that was then enlisting activists in the civil rights and antiwar causes.”31 A
singular love song, “The Word” only nominally, if at all, directs its atten-
tions to a specific love interest. Superficially, one might suppose that the
narrator is calling on a paramour to acknowledge that their relationship is
indeed based on love. In being “like me,” this interpretation holds that the
narrator desires that his partner view the relationship far more seriously
than she has hitherto. However, the balance of the lyrics scuttles such a
reading as overly simplistic. In “The Word,” the Beatles offer the first of
their songs about Love, the concept, rather than love, the specific act. In
a world full of hatred and violence, the simple act of love can offer “sun-
shine.” Self-reflexively commenting on the Beatles’ earlier corpus, perhaps,
the narrator indicates that “In the beginning I misunderstood / But now
I’ve got it, the word is good.” Love here is presented as a spiritual idea, an
attitude that moves one closer to God. With proselytizing zeal, the narrator-
prophet joyously counsels his listeners (as opposed to the single listener of
the dramatic monologues) to “spread the word” that will set them “free”
in contrast to the opaque mental prison outlined in “Think for Yourself.”
The Truth is so simple and so profound that both the “good and the bad
books” reveal it, but one must be aware and receptive of Love in order to see
the “light.” Love is “just the way,” however. That is, spiritual enlightenment
portends far more than the typical conceptions of love might suggest. The
song’s repeated final lines transform the word into a mantra, a method of
attaining higher consciousness: “Say the word love / Say the word love / Say
the word love / Say the word love.” If one can transcend the communal bag-
gage associated with love-as-fetish – the “misunderstood” vision the Beatles
advance in their early work – then one might experience the ecstasy of true
Love and scale divine heights.
The album’s next two songs illustrate Rubber Soul’s “transitional” sta-
tus well. The metaphysics of songs such as “Nowhere Man” and “The
Word” are counterbalanced by lighter, more traditional narrative fare such
as “Michelle” and “What Goes On,” helping to move the audience slowly
to the more challenging themes and music presented in albums such as
Revolver and Abbey Road. While the songs, especially “Michelle,” make
advances musically and in terms of tone, lyrically they lack the sophistica-
tion of “Norwegian Wood” and “Think for Yourself.” “Michelle” returns
to the dramatic monologue, and while it does acknowledge the ineffable
nature of love (“I’m hoping you will know what I mean”), it nevertheless
expresses desire in straightforward terms: “I want you, I want you, I want
you.” These echo, though employing McCartney’s new more nostalgic tone
(first achieved in “Yesterday” and perhaps perfected in “Eleanor Rigby”),
earlier communications of desire in songs such as “Do You Want to Know
a Secret” (“You’ll never know how much I really love you”), and even the
doubt revealed in the far more aggressive “I Should Have Known Better”
(“If this is love, you’ve got to give me more”). The song does, however,
differ in that it seems far less positive about the definition of love than ear-
lier ones (the narrator assumes, however, that, French or not, Michelle will
have little difficulty grasping the concept: “the only words that I know you’ll
84 James M. Decker
understand”), but lyrically it offers little beyond the bare statement of that
uncertainty, and it even returns to the concept of possession (“ma belle”;
“what you mean to me”) ironically interrogated in “Drive My Car” and
“Norwegian Wood.” The Beatles make up for this deficit via their sentimen-
tal orchestration and the plaintive, wistful tone of the vocals, what Everett
calls “wondrous tonal motions” and “complexities of mode mixture.”32 The
presentation creates the effect of something more existing within the narra-
tor – the ineffable quality mentioned above – an emotional truth that he is
unable to define. In concert, the music and the vocal expression provide the
song a gravitas unearned by the lyrics themselves, yet the familiar referent
of the narrative allows listeners to absorb the complexities of the music in
a fluid way.
“What Goes On,” like “Michelle,” represents a retrograde achievement
lyrically, and Womack asserts that “it is . . . quite arguably the weakest and
most incongruous track on the album.”33 A reiteration of the angst-ridden
theme present in the Beatles’ music since “Please Please Me,” “I Call Your
Name,” and “This Boy,” the tune expresses vexation and confusion over a
“girl’s” infidelity. As in many such songs, and in contrast to the awareness of
“Drive My Car,” “What Goes On” employs an interrogative method, asking
for clarification and placing blame for the relationship’s demise squarely on
the lover’s shoulders: “What goes on in your mind? / What goes on in your
heart? / You are tearing me apart.” The suggestion that the girl tells a “lie”
is unsupported by the narrative, which itself offers a viable alternative: that
the other boy and the lover were, indeed, merely walking as no more than
friends. The narrator’s paranoia, though, admits of no other possibility than
cheating, and his narrative reconstruction of the event offers little evidence
apart from “I saw him with you.” The latent insecurities of the narrator
bubble to the surface (“I was blind”) and finally burst into hyperbole: “Did
you mean to break my heart and watch me die?” The narrator makes no
attempt at self-analysis as in “Norwegian Wood,” and he fails to grow from
the experience. Lyrically formulaic and musically plain (though perhaps
the “country” feel is offered as an arch parody of the lyrics), “What Goes
On” anchors the Beatles in the very tradition that they are exploding during
many other moments on Rubber Soul.
On the surface, “Girl” shares similarities with “What Goes On.” Chief
among these is the (ostensible) rejected-lover paradigm and the lack of
understanding on the part of the narrator. Nevertheless, in “Girl,” the
Beatles handle the material in a far different way and take the subgenre to
its limits by using questions not to convey confusion and frustration but
as a more sophisticated environmental explanation for the lover’s behavior.
Additionally, here the girl “came to stay”: in an ironic twist, the narrator,
while similar to those of “What Goes On” and its ilk, cannot reject a
woman who, while not apparently cheating, fails to live up to her rhetoric
(“she promises the earth to me and I believe her”). The monologue is
directed, moreover, not at the girl but at an existential “anybody”: this is
a lonely plea for understanding and empathy. As in “Drive My Car,” the
relationship presented here is far more complicated than the love-equals-
bliss / rejection-equals-pain prescription offered in earlier songs. The girl
torments the narrator, yet he does not “regret a single day.” Pain and pleasure
are muddled, inseparable in the narrator, and while he recognizes his lover’s
use of emotional manipulation, he cannot resist it: “When I think of all the
times I tried to leave her / She will turn to me and start to cry.” Unlike
the speaker in “What Goes On,” the narrator here has specific grievances
(“She’s the kind of girl / Who puts you down when friends are there”), and
he questions not her but himself: “After all this time I don’t know why.”
Rather than interrogating the lover, the speaker uses questions to theorize
about her behavior and the nature of domestic roles: “Was she told when she
was younger that pain would lead to pleasure? / Did she understand it when
they said / That a man must break his back to earn his day of leisure?” The
Beatles reveal a class consciousness here as well as a notion of internalized
environmental stimuli – even if those stimuli are processed in a faulty way.
The death alluded to here (“Will she still believe it when he’s dead?”) is
far different than the exaggerated pain indicated by the speaker of “What
Goes On” in that it refers not to angst and frustration but to physical stress
endured by a man intent on pleasing his woman but incapable of doing so.
The subtle interrelational dynamic presented here reflects yet again the more
sophisticated ideas being employed covertly in the guise of a traditional pop
format.
“I’m Looking through You,” although not as philosophical as “Think for
Yourself” explores a similar thematic landscape. As with “Girl” and other of
Rubber Soul’s more experimental songs, “I’m Looking Through You” takes
one of the Beatles’ common subgenres – in this case the “confrontation”
song as represented by “You Can’t Do That” and “Not a Second Time” –
and heightens the level of discourse, despite using what Riley calls a “cast of
clichés.”34 While in the aforementioned songs an aggressive speaker masks
his vulnerabilities by taking a “no nonsense” approach to infidelity, in “I’m
Looking Through You” the narrator is more concerned with contemplating
the nature of mental growth and its effects on love. Although the narrator
does confront the lover (and in a typically humiliating way), he notes that
his perception of the woman has transformed: “where did you go?” The
difference, moreover, is not physical but mental: “you’re not the same.”
Quickly, however, listeners recognize that the change has taken place within
the narrator rather than the lover, for while her “voice is soothing . . . the
words aren’t clear.” After a nod to the traditional model (“tell me why you
86 James M. Decker
did not treat me right”), the speaker observes that “Love has a nasty habit of
disappearing overnight,” a phenomenon that he attributes to the ex-lover’s
lack of perception: “You’re thinking of me the same old way.” Clearly, the
narrator has grown, yet the woman has failed to keep up. Her inability
to change costs her the relationship, much as the woman in “Think For
Yourself” is chastised for her stunted mental capacity. Unlike the latter song,
however, the narrative is not markedly distinct from the subgenre’s norms,
and a passive listener could easily miss the more sophisticated narrative
approach.
As with many of the songs on Rubber Soul, “In My Life” adopts a nos-
talgic tone; however, the narrator qualifies his longing for the past with
a recognition of the dynamic nature of the present and of his love for
his partner. Anticipating “Strawberry Fields Forever” and “Penny Lane,”
the song initially situates itself within a positive (though far less specific)
memory of past places, friends, and lovers. The narrator notes that he has
“loved them all,” and observes, but not bitterly, of the places (though, sig-
nificantly, not the people) that “some have changed / Some forever, not for
better.” After establishing the importance of these people and places, how-
ever, the narrator reveals his true subject, his comment to his lover that
“no one compares” with her and that an uncritical, ideal view of the past
is not possible in relation to his feelings toward the newness of love. His
notion of “love as something new” here denotes not a simple novelty but an
evolutionary experience that contrast greatly with the lack of change per-
ceived in “I’m Looking Through You.” While his past is significant, “these
memories lose their meaning” when juxtaposed to the vibrant nature of a
maturing love. The love interest, like those in earlier songs, is paramount,
yet unlike the more one-dimensional figures of “Thank You Girl” or “And I
Love Her,” the world of love is not hermetically sealed. The narrator has out-
side interests, can juggle multiple memories, yet he also recognizes that he’ll
love his woman “more” than he can others competing for his attention. In
the earlier, naı̈ve songs, the possibility of other lovers does not exist, while in
this more mature, complex universe, the narrator is not overcompensating
for any fear that the “ideal” won’t be achieved. Further adding to the song’s
narrative complexity is what McKinney labels the “explicit foretaste of death
within its loving remembrance of things past.”35 Love is here viewed within
the narrator’s life cycle rather than as an all-encompassing preoccupation.
While not nearly as emotionally self-actualized as his counterpart in “In
My Life,” the speaker of “Wait” also differs positively from those of earlier
songs, although the record itself betrays more similarities to earlier efforts
than to Rubber Soul’s best tracks. A “reconciliation” song, “Wait” suggests a
turbulent, passion-filled relationship, but the lack of concrete details harms
the narrative significantly. Nevertheless, the narrator does not rely on a
strategy of braggadocio and threats (as in “Run for Your Life”), but rather
emphasizes a fresh start: “We’ll forget the tears we cried.” Unlike a similar
song, “You Like Me Too Much,” the speaker is not willing to admit fault,
but rather emphasizes the reciprocal nature of the relationship: “I’ve been
good, as good as I can be / And if you do, I’ll trust in you.” The trust,
thus, is not unconditional as with the naı̈ve/idealist subject positions in
earlier songs. The speaker also recognizes and encourages the autonomy
of his lover: “But if your heart breaks, don’t wait, turn me away.” Despite
these nuances, however, the song fails to address the core issues that led
to the initial breakup (though perhaps the speaker’s infidelity is intimated
by the phrase “as good as I can be”) and does not attain the strength
of “Norwegian Wood,” “Girl,” or “Think For Yourself.” It simply lacks
specificity. As Womack writes, “the song simply doesn’t go anywhere.”36
The lack of musical innovation, moreover, cannot rescue it, as is the case
with “Michelle,” from accusations of triviality.
“If I Needed Someone,” as with Rubber Soul’s other weaker tracks, does
reveal some narrative strides, yet it also shares more in common with the
Beatles’ earlier phase than it does with their later triumphs. Like “Wait,” the
song avoids the layered narrative details of “Nowhere Man,” “Drive My Car,”
and other of the album’s most innovative texts. Despite this, however, the
song does offer a counter-narrative to the more traditional pop idealism of
the Beatles’ earlier efforts. The speaker, ensconced in a fulfilling relationship,
rejects an overture from another love interest, but he does so in a way that
ironically diminishes his love with what Sheila Whiteley views as “a sense
of cynicism” and disillusionment.37 In earlier songs, love is unquestionably
“forever,” and even spurned lovers emphasize betrayal rather than a true
loss of love. Here, however, the narrator reveals a curious indifference to
the ideal of eternal love: “If I had more time to spend / Then I guess I’d be
with you my friend.” The casualness of the “I guess” portends something far
different from the inevitability of love as signified in songs such as “Thank
You Girl” or “And I Love Her.” Further, despite the narrator’s protest that
he is “too much in love,” he calls on his admirer to “Carve [her] number
on [his] wall,” hardly an act of loyalty to his present love. He compounds
this emotional infidelity by declaring that if at a future date he “needed
someone,” he might call her. Temporal dilemmas, rather than any notion
of eternal love, seem at issue here, and the speaker cynically mentions that
had the woman “come some other day / . . . it might not have been like
this.” Effectually, he suggests that the “love” is not ideal but dependent
solely on chronological circumstances. He never unequivocally denies that
he could “love” the interested party despite his involvement with another.
The scenario lacks context, though, and listeners cannot as readily visualize
the scene as they can with “Norwegian Wood” or “Girl.” While sonically the
88 James M. Decker
song is relatively conventional, its cynicism is unexpected, although again a

more passive listener might view the track as yet another Beatles’ love song.
Rubber Soul concludes with either one of the album’s most conventional
tracks or with a sly attempt at innovation. At first blush, “Run For Your Life”
appears to be the bitter final act of the drama initiated in “You Can’t Do
That,” an earlier song wherein the narrator threatens his loquacious lover
and declares that he’ll “go out of [his] mind.” In the sequel, the threat is
far more specific and deadly: “I’d rather see you dead, little girl / Than to be
with another man.” Many of the Beatles’ songs – particularly those penned
mainly by Lennon – reveal a misogynistic streak, and this composition is
clearly the most overt, with its depictions of ownership (“little girl”) and
control (“I can’t spend my whole life trying / Just to make you toe the line”)
as well as the obvious violence. The sheer over-the-top nature of the reaction
in relation to the (unspecified) infraction, however, might look forward to
the Beatles’ later use of parody (see “Why Don’t We Do It in the Road” or
“Baby You’re a Rich Man,” for example). It is conceivable that the Beatles are
in fact mocking their earlier efforts, here stripping any romantic pretense
from the lyrics. Lennon remarked that he nicked the central violent image
from Elvis Presley’s “Baby Let’s Play House,” further opening up the door
for an interpretation involving parody.38 Nevertheless, such a reading may
be too generous and dependent on contextualization. After all, the narrator
sings “Let this be a sermon / I mean everything I said.” The song may simply
be a thuggish anomaly that looks backward rather than forward and poses
an odd choice as the culminating track on an album wherein the Beatles
consciously treated the entire recording process as artistic venture.39
Such lyrics as those found on “Run For Your Life” and “Wait” remain
problematic on an album filled with gems such as “Norwegian Wood”
and “Nowhere Man.” Of course, with multiple songwriters, it’s illogical to
expect identical growth, and one must place Rubber Soul within its context as
follow-up to Help!, an album that had a few innovative songs, such as “Yester-
day” and “You’ve Got to Hide Your Love Away,” coexisting with many more
conventional ones such as “The Night Before” and “Another Girl.” Rubber
Soul both changes the ratio and adds further complexities, both musically
(daring instrumentation, technological self-awareness) and narratologically
(expanded thematic range, concrete characterization). Arguably, however,
by retaining vestiges of their earlier aesthetic, the Beatles were able to earn
concessions from both George Martin and his superiors. A sharper break –
one that altogether rejected the expected pop conventions – might have
outpaced the majority of the audience and set up not Revolver and Sgt. Pep-
per’s Lonely Hearts Club Band, but a reprimand and a quick retreat to the
proven formula, the “pre-given and pre-accepted” structure that Adorno
cites as characteristic of popular music.40 With just enough similarities to
recognizable generic archetypes to avoid audience-driven charges of incom-

prehensibility and betrayal, Rubber Soul smuggles in a variety of techniques
hitherto unexplored in popular music and incrementally teaches a sizable
element of the audience both to be cognizant of more flexible definitions
of pop music and to desire and expect them as well. Within months of the
Beatles’ inaugural efforts on Rubber Soul, other groups, such as the Kinks,
Love, and Jefferson Airplane, to name but a few, would be regularly exper-
imenting with techniques unheard of – save on some of the Beatles’ own
earlier records – in the pop realm before December 1965. The “new songs”
indeed “pushed past the veil” and revealed an unlimited potential.
5 Magical mystery tours, and other trips: yellow
submarines, newspaper taxis, and the Beatles’
psychedelic years
russell reising and jim l e blanc
The day of the LSD experience often becomes a dramatic and easily discernible landmark in the
development of individual artists. stanislav grof 1
One evening in April of 1965, Beatles George Harrison and John Lennon,
along with George’s fiancée Pattie Boyd, and John’s wife Cynthia, dined with
John Riley, a prominent dentist in London.2 Their host secretly slipped LSD-
laced sugar cubes into the after-dinner coffees, and so began a night filled
with bouts of intense sensory excitement.3 Lennon later exhorted listeners
to “take a drink from [the] special cup” of a physician named “Doctor
Robert,” a song on which dreamy, seemingly floating vocal harmonies
declared: “well, well, well, you’re feeling fine,” quite likely commemorating
the quaffing of their first and subsequent magic cups.4 In August of that
same year, Harrison and Lennon again took LSD; this time, Ringo Starr
joined in, as did actor Peter Fonda. As Harrison sat poolside, struggling
somewhat with the effects of the drug, Fonda related a story from his youth
in which he nearly died from blood loss. “I know what it’s like to be dead,”
he stated. Lennon, perhaps in an effort to free the group from the morbid
impact of Fonda’s story, retorted: “Who put all that shit in your head?”5
Lennon memorialized this event in “She Said She Said,” a track on which he
changed the sex of his interlocutor and related that: “She said I know what
it’s like to be dead . . . / I said who put all those things in your head.” On
yet another early LSD trip, Lennon distilled his reading of The Psychedelic
Experience, Tim Leary, Ralph Metzner, and Richard Alpert’s reworking
of The Tibetan Book of the Dead into a guide for those seeking spiritual
enlightenment via the psychedelic journey, into the powerful initial verse
(“Turn off your mind, relax and float downstream . . . It is not dying”)6 of
the groundbreaking “Tomorrow Never Knows.” The Beatles recorded all
three of these compositions in the spring of 1966, a time that marks the
band’s initial infusion of psychedelic themes, sounds, and insights into their
music. This chapter examines first, the experimental musical dimension of
the Beatles’ output during their psychedelic phase, and second, important
themes representative of their lyrics.
[90]
91 Magical mystery tours, and other trips
Tuned in and turned on: psychedelia and the 1960s

LSD advocate Timothy Leary’s first encounter with Sgt. Pepper’s Lonely
Hearts Club Band 7 registers the immediate impact of the Beatles’ work:
One hot sunny day Rosemary and I wandered down to the main camp [at
the infamous Millbrook estate] and I found the entire community gathered
around a battery-operated record player. We joined them to listen for the
first time to Sergeant [sic] Pepper’s Lonely Hearts Club Band, a creation that
probably best symbolized the so-called Summer of Love. The album was a
most influential media statement about multiple realities and became an
instant drug-culture classic.8
Leary reveals his ongoing fascination with the album by structuring much
of High Priest (1968), an experimental chronicle of his LSD experiences,
around his punning responses to Beatles’ lyrics. Focusing on Sgt. Pepper,
Leary celebrates his own explorations, trials, and tribulations in Beatlesque
lyrical play, some even echoing Lennon’s bold poetry in songs like “I Am the
Walrus.” After comparing his pre-LSD life in which he was “an anonymous
institutional employee who drove to work each morning . . . drove home
each night and drank martinis” to being “trapped in a dark room,” Leary
draws on the first line from “A Day in the Life” to showcase how his first
dose of LSD propelled him into a state of reborn psychedelic illumination:
“Woke up, fell out of dead.” Being an infamous celebrity under increasing
media and legal scrutiny, he strikes back at his detractors, altering Lennon’s
opening lines to “I led the news today oh joy . . . And though the views was
rather mad . . .” And, in one other memorable variation, Leary plays on his
own famous dictum: “Tune in, turn on, drop out” with “I’d ove turned you
on,”9 signaling his partnership with the Beatles’ own “I’d love to turn you
on.”
Aside from some ineffable fusion between music and listener, what
makes music “psychedelic”? The term stems from the Greek psyche, meaning
“spirit,” and delos, meaning “revealed”; thus “psychedelic” equals something
like “mind-manifesting.” It appears for the first time in an exchange between
Dr. Humphrey Osmond and Aldous Huxley in 1957; Huxley sent Osmond
the following couplet:
To make this trivial world sublime,

Take half a Gramme of phanerothyme.
Not satisfied with Huxley’s cumbersome term, Osmond responded with

what became the countercultural coinage:
To fathom Hell or soar angelic,

Just take a pinch of psychedelic.10
92 Russell Reising and Jim LeBlanc
After synthesizing a batch of LSD-25 (the twenty-fifth variation in his

experiments with lysergic acid, while searching for a cure for migraines)
on April 16, 1943, and handling (and thereby absorbing) the crystalline
compound, Swiss chemist Albert Hofmann experienced “an uninterrupted
stream of fantastic images of extraordinary plasticity and vividness and
accompanied by an intense kaleidoscopic play of colors.”11 Users might
perceive halos and auras surrounding objects, and people and things often
seem to shimmer or actually move about, even when stable, leaving visual
“trails” or “afterimages.” These effects are prone to change quite abruptly
in conjunction with modifications in the environmental, social, or emo-
tional atmosphere of the user’s situation. Thoughts can flow unusually
freely and dreamily, and LSD users often turn reflectively inward. Users
may lose their notion of personal identity as their sense of self merges
with the world around them, and both time and space are commonly
distorted.12
Acoustically, these otherwise visual and psychological effects manifest
themselves synesthetically in musical forms that rock critic Jim DeRogatis
calls “sonic clues.” Among these aural psychedelic effects and their musical
equivalents, DeRogatis lists the “buzz” with which inanimate objects seem
to tremble with energy; the apparent fusion of self with the world (“life
flows on within you and without you,” as Harrison writes in “Within You
Without You”), including its sounds; distortion of time through drifting
or abruptly changing tempos; dreamy, circular, or sustained and droning
melodies and harmonics; alterations of instrumental and vocal sounds;
reverb, echoes, and tape delays that convey an expanded sense of space;
and multi-layered mixes that give recordings a heavily textured sound.13
Similarly, Sheila Whiteley coined the term “psychedelic coding” for the
ways in which different styles of progressive rock share techniques that
convey a musical equivalent of hallucinogenic experience:
These include the manipulation of timbre (blurred, bright, overlapping),

upward movement (and its comparison with psychedelic flight), harmonies
(lurching, oscillating), rhythms (regular, irregular), relationships
(foreground, background) and collages which provide a point of
comparison with more conventionalized, i.e., normal treatment.14
The Wikipedia entry for “psychedelic music” refers to its sonic showcasing
of “a wildly colourful palette” and a “magic carpet of sound.” John Lennon
himself told George Martin that he wished to “smell the sawdust” and
wanted the music to “swirl” in “Being for the Benefit of Mr. Kite!”15 Perhaps
this “otherworldly” element in certain instances of Western rock music,
especially in the LSD-conscious youth counterculture of the mid- to late
1960s, best characterizes a recording as psychedelic.
The Beatles were not the first rock group to showcase the impact of
LSD; their major psychedelic recordings date from the time of LSD’s crim-
inalization and its subsequent underground flourishing. Many important
psychedelic recordings pre-date Revolver. Both the Yardbirds (“Heart Full of
Soul”) and the Kinks (“See My Friends”) experimented with psychedelically
evocative sitars and sitar-like sounds in 1965, even prior to George Har-
rison’s use of the instrument on “Norwegian Wood.” The Byrds released
“Eight Miles High” in 1965, and songs such as Bob Dylan’s “Visions of
Johanna,” Love’s “7 and 7 Is,” the Beach Boys’ “Good Vibrations,” and the
groundbreaking album The Psychedelic Sounds of the 13th Floor Elevators, all
appeared in 1966. The Doors’ “The Crystal Ship,” Moby Grape’s “Omaha,”
and the Jefferson Airplane’s Surrealistic Pillow beat Sgt. Pepper to the shelves
in 1967. As Big Brother and the Holding Company guitarist Sam Andrew
remarked, it was with the release of Revolver that he and other members of
the San Francisco music scene “realized that the Beatles had definitely come
‘on board.’”16
Revolver: the Beatles go psychedelic

Revolver singlehandedly made Beatlemania irrelevant.17
The Beatles entered EMI’s Studio 3 on April 6, 1966, to begin a project

that would revolutionize pop music. During the preceding several weeks,
Harrison had intensified his study of Indian music, which he had begun
the previous year. Paul McCartney had become an integral part of the
“underground” avant-garde culture of swinging London and studied the
work of experimental composers Luciano Berio and Karlheinz Stockhausen.
Lennon had languished at his Weybridge estate throughout much of the
winter, though he had also begun to take a greater interest in politics, as
well as more LSD.18 It was chiefly Lennon who introduced psychedelic
currents into the Beatles’ work, although, as we shall see, Harrison’s interest
in South Asian sounds and McCartney’s dabbling in musique concrète had
an impact as well.
Lennon brought to that session the outline for an ambitiously “trippy”
song to be based on The Psychedelic Experience. Lennon’s lyrics encouraged
listeners to set aside their egos (“Lay down all thought, surrender to the
void”) and turn inward (“That you may see the meaning of within”).
Originally designated “Mark I” (indicating the band’s awareness of the
pioneering nature of the piece),19 “Tomorrow Never Knows” is essentially
a chant backed by a relentless C-major chord, a static harmony sustained
principally by a tamboura played by Harrison, along with tape loops of dense
sound that stay strangely in key. Lennon’s vocal provides little harmonic
variation outside of a passing intonation of B in the fifth measure of each
verse (repeated in the coda), accompanied by a VII chord on an organ,
which enters the instrumental mix seemingly just for this moment. This
sonic droning suggests the meditative state of the psychedelic experience,
and the lyrical references to mental relaxation, along with overt invitations
to synesthesia and oneiric thought in the line “But listen to the color of
your dreams,” intensify the effect. The drug “buzz” is invoked not only
through Harrison’s humming tamboura, but by Starr’s compressed and
limited drums, which sound full, but peculiarly dulled. Moreover, Starr’s
accompaniment throughout the piece consists of a kind of stumbling march,
providing a bit of temporal disruption, in which the first accent of each bar
falls on the measure’s first beat and the second stress occurs in the second
half of the measure’s third quarter, double sixteenth notes in stuttering pre-
emption of the normal rhythmic emphasis on the second backbeat – hardly
a classic rock and roll gesture.20
The new electronic tools at the band’s disposal, developed and deployed
brilliantly by George Martin and engineer Geoff Emerick, contributed
greatly to the innovative psychedelic ambience that would characterize the
Beatles’ recordings throughout 1966 and 1967. For example, John Lennon
wished “to sound like the Dalai Lama chanting from a mountaintop” on
“Tomorrow Never Knows.” To produce this effect in the studio, the EMI
recording staff piped the singer’s vocals through a rotating Leslie speaker
wired to a Hammond organ.21 The resulting sonic swirling creates a sense of
distance that expands the vocal space of the track, first heard after the song’s
instrumental break, beginning with “That love is all and love is everyone”
in the fourth verse and continuing to the end of the song. Moreover, in
the instrumental break we hear the first instance of backward recording,
as what was originally a bluesy, C-minor guitar solo played by Harrison is
reversed, an effect that not only clips certain notes sharply, but injects the
otherwise Western flavor of the song with an Asian feel. A fuzz box and a
Leslie speaker enhance the sound of this backward solo. Finally, there are
the tape loops. That night McCartney created five “little symphonies” on
his home Brennell tape machine. By removing the erase tape heads and
recording over and over on the same tape, he supersaturated the sound,
giving “Tomorrow Never Knows” its electronic density and otherworldly
seagull-like cries, adding an acoustic surreality to the composition.22 The
completed piece showcases nearly all the elements of musical psychedelia
that the band employed on its next three albums and that rock musicians
have continued exploring.
A review of the psychedelic content of some other Beatles compositions
recorded between April and June reveals the extent to which “Tomorrow
Never Knows” informed the rest of the Beatles’ work that spring, beginning
with the single recorded just a few days after the sessions began. “Paperback
Writer,” McCartney’s A side, is not particularly psychedelic, influenced
more by the harmonies on the Beach Boys’ recently released Pet Sounds.
Many Beatles scholars, however, consider the so-called B side of the single,
Lennon’s “Rain” as the band’s first psychedelic record, released on May 23 in
the USA and June 10 in the UK.23 The track is full of technical innovations:
limiters, compressors, Leslie speakers, tapes played backwards, and a new
trick – vari-speed recording in which Lennon’s guitar and Starr’s drums were
taped faster than what is heard on the final version of the piece and Lennon’s
vocal was taped slower, then speeded up for the final mix. Everett remarks
that the electronically slowed drums and rhythm guitar introduce “a subtle
but rich tone of queasy hesitation that could be likened to the nausea of an
acid trip” and Lennon’s speeded-up vocal reflects the “brilliant iridescence
of an acid-streaked sunshine.”24 And the backward vocal that closes the
piece became the first instance of reversed recording released to the public.
The theme of “Rain” – rain or shine, the weather makes no differ-
ence; “it’s just a state of mind” – registers the inwardness of psychedelic
experience. As in “Within You Without You,” which laments “people who
hide themselves behind a wall of illusion” and “never glimpse the truth,”
“Rain” targets one of the most common subjects of psychedelic criticism:
“squares” – those afraid of life and who, as a result, isolate themselves from
authentic experience, a situation represented in the song by the meteoro-
logical image of rain. Exposing their strategies of avoidance (hiding from
rain and the sun), Lennon’s lyrics suggest the most drastic diagnosis of
such escapism: “they might as well be dead,” and, as the reversed lyrics at
the song’s conclusion suggest, such people have it all backwards. The Bea-
tles “don’t mind” what kind of weather the day brings because, from their
psychedelic perspective, “it’s just a state of mind,” and “the weather’s fine,”
regardless of rain or shine, a perspective they insist on with lines like “I can
show you, I can show you” and “can you hear me, can you hear me,” the
doubling of each phrase indicating the degree of certainty and the insistence
they feel. Jimi Hendrix would later compose his own praise of rainy days for
Electric Ladyland’s “Rainy Day Dream Away,” intoning: “Rainy day, rain all
day / Ain’t no use in gettin’ uptight . . . Lay back and dream on a rainy day.”
The first side of the 1966 album Revolver (released on August 5 in
the UK and August 8 in the USA) opens with Harrison’s “Taxman,” in
which the singer’s compressed voice counts off a mysterious (and metri-
cally misleading) “one-two-three-four-one-two” with off-mike studio buzz
behind him. The vaguely Indian tones of McCartney’s distorted guitar
solos, one immediately after the bridge and one in the song’s fade-out, add
psychedelic flavor to the piece.25 Sonically, McCartney’s “Eleanor Rigby” is
hardly psychedelic, though its minimal harmonic variation and the Leslie
speaker used for the singer’s backing counter-melody in the last refrain
reinforce the reflective mood of the piece. Lennon’s “I’m Only Sleeping”
features an intensely psychedelic sound, echoing “Rain” and anticipat-
ing “Tomorrow Never Knows” thematically and musically. As in “Rain,”
the instrumental parts were recorded higher and Lennon’s vocals lower
than what we hear in the finished piece. As in both “Tomorrow Never
Knows” and “Rain,” the band used reversed taping in “I’m Only Sleep-
ing” – this time, with two of Harrison’s overdubbed guitar parts, which
first appear in the fifth measure of the second verse and intensify in the
coda.26
The Indian instrumentation in Harrison’s “Love You To,” especially its
languid opening strums, transports a Western audience to a world that
is ancient and exotic. The lack of a clearly measured tempo in the song’s
overture sets musical and, in this particular context, spiritual time adrift –
until the tune kicks into gear and the singer observes that “Each day just
goes so fast” and “A lifetime is so short.” The song’s sparse chord struc-
ture, consisting of only I and VII (as in “Tomorrow Never Knows”), adds
a meditative harmonic coloring to the drone of the tamboura.27 Except
for the relaxed, time-bending tempo of the introduction, there are no
overt psychedelic elements in McCartney’s “Here, There and Everywhere.”
McCartney’s lush ballad almost seems out of place on the otherwise exper-
imental Revolver, but, perhaps because of this, adds to the record’s overall
atmospheric diversity, another hallmark of psychedelic albums. So too may
McCartney’s “Yellow Submarine,” if it weren’t for the band’s incorporation
of vari-speed technique for the instruments and vocals, echoing off-mike
shouting by Lennon, and a panoply of clinking and rattling sound effects
made by everyone who happened to be in the studio in the wee hours of
June 1, 1966.28 “She Said She Said,” the track that concludes the A side of
the Revolver LP, is another Lennon composition with an inward-looking,
metaphysical theme. More than just acid talk, however, “She Said She Said”
also approximates musically several typical effects of the drug. As Everett
observes, Lennon’s speeded-up vocal, Starr’s frequent use of the crash cym-
bal, and Harrison’s distorted lead guitar intensify “the vividness of [musical]
colors and glow of light” on this track. The shift from 4/4 to 3/4 meter in the
bridge – a move to another “time,” both in terms of musical rhythm and
the thematic evocation of childhood memories – “may suggest the mystical,
dreamlike changes in perceptions of environment and time experienced
among the subjective effects of LSD.”29 Harrison’s occasional repetition of
Lennon’s vocal line at a measure’s remove creates acoustic reverberations
or “trails.” Moreover, “the droning cyclical I – VII – IV – I harmonic
pattern is a further type of repetition that may be related to the timeless
quality of both an LSD trip and the mantra-based meditation in Indian

practice.”30
Sgt. Pepper and Magical Mystery Tour: the Beatles

go over the top
john: Where are we going, fellas?
other beatles: To the toppermost of the poppermost!31
Though their next album, Sgt. Pepper’s Lonely Hearts Club Band, was sig-
nificantly more popular, critics have since gradually begun to acknowledge
the importance of Revolver as the most significant advance in the Beatles’
work.32 In any case, most critics and fans agree that the Beatles reached their
creative apogee at some point between the spring of 1966 and the spring
of 1967 and that the band’s innovative impact, the overall quality of their
work, and the Beatles’ influence on contemporary and later generations of
rock musicians began to decline thereafter – that is, with the summer and
fall singles of 1967 and with Magical Mystery Tour. Once again, a remark-
able single previewed the themes and sounds of the forthcoming album. In
December 1966, after another substantial break during which the Beatles
rested or pursued individual projects, the band began work on a song that
reflected memories from Lennon’s childhood, “Strawberry Fields Forever.”
The opening electronic, flute-like melody, played by McCartney on a Mel-
lotron, assures us that the band had not abandoned its preoccupation with
psychedelic sounds and themes. In “Strawberry Fields,” they continued
to push EMI’s four-track recording technology to its limit through tape
reductions and numerous overdubs. In addition to the Mellotron, Harrison
brought the exotic sound of a reverb-heavy svaramandal to the recording,
and Martin and Emerick perfected the vari-speed technique to such a point
that they were able to splice recordings from two separate takes in two
different keys (!) by slowing down one take and speeding up the other (the
splice occurs approximately 60 seconds into the song).33
The pervasive lyrical theme of dreams versus reality indicates that
Lennon had not abandoned the introspective quest begun in “Tomorrow
Never Knows” and his other compositions for Revolver. “Being for the Ben-
efit of Mr. Kite!,” for example, filters actual circus poster copy through the
Beatles’ whirlwind of sounds, taking on a dreamlike (perhaps nightmar-
ish) quality as a result. McCartney’s “Penny Lane” is another song derived
from childhood memories of Liverpool, and, as in Lennon’s composition,
McCartney toys with the everyday reality of his images – the pretty, poppy-
selling nurse who “feels as if she’s in a play” and “is anyway,” for example.
In “Penny Lane,” the composer sought a “clean sound” (in contrast to
Lennon’s murky tones),34 though to achieve this aim Martin and Emerick
used the vari-speed technique to speed up McCartney’s vocal, giving his
delivery the sharp iridescence heard on the final recording. Lennon plays
limited and slowed-down congas on the piece, and the heavy, electronically
enhanced reverberation of one of the song’s four pianos adds a “stylized
foggy” tone to the chorus and the piece’s final chord.35
A single glance at Peter Blake’s cover art for Sgt. Pepper’s Lonely Hearts
Club Band alerts the listener to the fact that the enclosed record will be heav-
ily psychedelic. Although the conceits meant to characterize this album
and the Beatles’ next collection of songs (the surrogate band in Pepper
and the mystery tour in Magical Mystery Tour) were essentially McCart-
ney’s ideas,36 the most psychedelic compositions during this period, as was
the case with Revolver, came from Harrison and Lennon – though a cer-
tain amount of electronic wizardry was applied to McCartney’s “Getting
Better” and “Fixing a Hole,” and to perhaps his most psychedelic effort
ever, “Lovely Rita.” Lennon’s “Lucy in the Sky with Diamonds,” “Being
for the Benefit of Mr. Kite!” and “Good Morning Good Morning,” along
with Harrison’s “Within You Without You” represent the tracks of greatest
psychedelic interest on the album – apart, of course, from “A Day in the
Life.”
Even before the final touches had been added to Sgt. Pepper, McCartney
had the idea for the band’s next project: a film inspired by Ken Kesey and
the Merry Pranksters’ psychedelic bus trip across the United States. Songs
for this film, along with material destined for the psychedelic cartoon Yellow
Submarine, were recorded throughout 1967. As early as February, in fact,
the band completed Harrison’s “Only a Northern Song,” a reject from
Sgt. Pepper that the Beatles later handed over for use in Yellow Submarine.
In May, they recorded another of Harrison’s compositions, “It’s All Too
Much,” also used for Yellow Submarine. The dense layering, with overdubs
and tape loops, lends both songs a psychedelic flavor. Harrison based his
“It’s All Too Much” on “realizations that appeared during and after some
LSD experiences, which were later confirmed in meditation.”37 “All You
Need Is Love” was written for performance in Our World. Backing its
subsequent release as a single was the Lennon-McCartney collaboration,
“Baby You’re a Rich Man,” featuring Lennon on the clavioline, an unusual
double reed instrument which introduced Indian melodic colors to the
piece, and McCartney on piano, taped backwards for parts of the third
verse.
In their music for Magical Mystery Tour, the Beatles continued to incor-
porate psychedelic themes and effects, without introducing any strikingly
new sounds or innovations to their musical catalog. The chorus of the title
song, in fact, uses the same I–III–IV–I chord progression that we hear in
the title track of Sgt. Pepper’s Lonely Hearts Club Band. The Beatles also
incorporate a Leslie speaker for Harrison’s lead guitar, a tape loop of bus
and traffic sounds, and speeded-up backing vocals and trumpets into this
piece.38 The vari-speed technique is also used in McCartney’s “The Fool
on the Hill” (to speed up the chattering bird-like sounds heard at the very
end of the song) and “Hello, Goodbye” (to speed up the lead vocal, giving
them the “clean” sound the composer often strove to achieve during this
period).39 The band uses a droning organ and reversed backing vocals in
Harrison’s “Blue Jay Way” and, as Everett points out, the song’s “unusual
Lydian scale altered with an occasional 3” gives the melody an Indian
quality.40
In late 1967 and early 1968, the Beatles once again turned to solo projects
and began organizational work for Apple Corps, Ltd., their doomed mul-
timedia business venture. In February, 1968, the four set off for a retreat
with the Maharishi Mahesh Yogi in India, whom they had met the previous
August in the UK. When they returned, fully stocked with new material,
Lennon, McCartney, and Harrison began to work much more indepen-
dently of one another in the studio, ultimately sacrificing the cohesive
sound of the band’s earlier work. In retrospect, then, the Beatles clearly
peaked during their psychedelic period, having fully transformed them-
selves from the tight rock and roll band of the Hamburg years into a group
who embraced, echoed, and shaped the Zeitgeist of the early to mid-1960s
better than other composers and performers of that era, and finally into
masters of the recording studio, who produced a body of psychedelic work
that has stood for decades as the epitome of pop music innovation and
influence.
LSD and the Beatles’ peak

We must always remember to thank the CIA and the Army for LSD . . . They
invented LSD to control people and what they did was give us freedom.41
In addition to the extensive use of electronic gadgetry and effects, the Beatles
turned to more reflective and occasionally surreal lyrical content during this
period. It’s almost a cliché to trace the Beatles’ development from “I Want to
Hold Your Hand” to “I’d love to turn you on.” Psychedelic lyricism did, in
fact, generate a vision infinitely more interested in matters of the intellect,
the spirit, ecstatic merging, hallucinatory clarity, meditative innerness, even
the fate of the species, than surfing or stolen kisses in souped-up hot rods.
They no longer asked coy questions like “Do You Want to Know a Secret”;
rather they recorded communiqués and directives. Beginning with tracks
like “I Want to Tell You,” “Rain,” and “Within You Without You,” the Beatles
adopted an urgent tone, intent on channeling some essential knowledge,

the psychological and/or philosophical epiphanies of LSD experiences, to an
increasingly turned-on fan base: “I want to tell you / My head is filled with
things to say.” As Czech LSD researcher Dr. Stanislav Grof characterizes this
phenomenon:
In addition, an increasing number of reports seemed to suggest that

sometimes a single administration of LSD could have a deep influence on
the personality structure of the subject, his or her hierarchy of values, basic
attitudes, and entire life style. The changes were so dramatic that they were
compared with psychological conversions.42
In some respects, British psychiatrist and LSD pioneer R. D. Laing set

the tone for such imperatives in the “Bird of Paradise” conclusion to his
revolutionary The Politics of Experience, published in January 1967. Laing
echoes Timothy Leary and anticipates “A Day in the Life” as he concludes
that volume: “If I could turn you on, if I could drive you out of your wretched
mind, if I could tell you, I would let you know.”43 In his autobiography,
discussed earlier, Leary registers such thinking with the following plays on
“Sgt. Pepper’s Lonely Hearts Club Band”:
So may I introduce to you . . .

The fact you’ve known for all these years . . .
He don’t really want to top the show
But I thought that you might like to know
That the singer’s going to write a wrong.44
Laing and Leary advance the idea, common among enthusiasts, that the
LSD experience granted the user a new take on reality, one capable of
revealing facts and righting the wrongs perpetrated by a culture inured
to bourgeois values and ordinary perceptions. Indeed, it is this dimension
of the psychedelic experience that characterizes some of the Beatles’ most
psychedelic pronouncements of this phase. The Kaleidoscope’s “I Found
Out” is a representative example of this subgenre: “I found out without a
doubt what it’s all about / And now I know in my soul just where to go.”
As in McCartney’s “Got to Get You Into My Life” and its emphatic horns
and vocals, absolute certainty expressed with rhetorical hyperbole usually
characterizes such songs.
Indeed, the Beatles “want to tell” us something new, something urgent,
and, in so doing, set the stage for an important subgenre of psychedelic
music, that of the messianic pronouncement. They articulate similar modes
of social criticism throughout their psychedelic phase, either bemoaning or
exposing “all the lonely people” (“Eleanor Rigby”), those who make “me feel
like I’ve never been born” (She Said She Said”), those who fill them “up with
[their] rules” (“It’s Getting Better”), and those who need to stare at traffic
fatalities and to count the “holes in Blackburn, Lancashire” (“A Day in the
Life”). In “I’m Only Sleeping,” Lennon bemoans the lives of those “Running
everywhere at such a speed” and beseeches them not to “spoil [his] day”
with the frantic pace at which they live their lives, a line of reasoning he
returns to in the first line of “Tomorrow Never Knows”: “Turn off your
mind, relax, and float downstream” (emphasis added). McCartney mounts
this same critique in Sgt. Pepper’s Lonely Hearts Club Band, when, in “Fixing
a Hole,” he lashes out at the “silly people” who run around and worry him
and whom he doesn’t let “get past [his] door.” This rejection of haste and the
frantic pace of ordinary life, along with a vision of bemused equanimity,
partially reflects the growing influence of Asian forms of spirituality on
psychedelic culture generally.
The Beatles’ critique of materialism also reflects the psychedelic vision
of society. Of course, such a critique pre-dates psychedelic culture, ranging
from the biblical “It is easier for a camel to pass through the eye of a needle,
than for a rich man to enter the kingdom of God” (Matthew 19:24) to
Henry David Thoreau’s condemnations of those entrapped in materialism
and leading lives of “quiet desperation.” The Beatles and many groups after
them returned to these notions with new levels of intensity and serious-
ness, fueled in large part by their LSD experiences. Aside from “Taxman,”
which, paradoxically, bewails the tax burden of increasingly rich rock stars,
the Beatles consistently dismantle the premises and effects of materialism,
examining its many facets. In “Love You To,” Harrison offers to “make love
to you” as an alternative to being screwed in the ground and having one’s
head filled with “things.” Harrison’s notion of being screwed in the ground
can also be taken not only to suggest the colloquial “being screwed,” or
even symbolic burial, but to indicate that being screwed into the muck of
earthly existence inhibits one’s quest for transcendence. Revolver’s “Yellow
Submarine” picks up on the same theme in its anti-materialist tone. The
crew lives “a life of ease” because everyone has “all [they] need,” but such
desires are fulfilled not by money or goods, but rather by the simple “sky of
blue and sea of green.” The song’s exuberant chorus testifies to the simple
pleasures of brotherhood, exotic adventure, and an appreciation of nature,
the latter of which also characterizes “Good Day Sunshine” and its own
melodic embrace of a beautiful day.
In “And Your Bird Can Sing” the Beatles counter various symbols of
consumeristic pleasure with simple directness. The song’s antagonist might
have everything and might have seen everything (“You say you’ve seen seven
wonders”), but eventually, the Beatles suggest, “your prized possessions start
to wear you down.” Moreover, even in the midst of the affluence suggested
by the song, the one who has all and who has seen all can neither see nor
hear the song’s “me,” a diminishment of whatever satisfaction the other

might have. The lines “But you don’t get me,” “But you can’t see me,” and
“But you can’t hear me” each follow some claim to “richness,” and are
all doubled (“But you can’t see me, you can’t see me,” etc.), intensifying
the existential poverty. The Beatles return to this critique in “Baby You’re
a Rich Man,” with its repeated lines “You keep all your money in a big
brown bag inside a zoo / What a thing to do,” mocking the lunacy and
perhaps even subhuman nature of such crude hoarding behaviors. “She’s
Leaving Home,” in which the young woman’s parents, even in the midst of
their sorrow, expose their absolute conviction in the power of money and
things, expresses this critique quite movingly. The parents can’t imagine
their daughter leaving so affluent a home, a perspective made more absurd
by virtue of the dialogical dramatization of the girl’s actions and the parents’
lament:
She (we gave her most of our lives)

Is leaving (sacrificed most of our lives)
Home (we gave her everything money could buy)
That song’s final punning of “buy” with “bye” highlights the dead end of
materialism and the values of a generation that has outlived its relevance,
a sense of obsolescence conveyed by the elegance of the musical score for
harp and string quartet. The sound is beautiful, to be sure, and certainly
an appropriate contribution to Sgt. Pepper’s kaleidoscopic pallet, but hardly
in touch with the musical adventurism of the album or the iconic Carn-
aby Street ethos. It represents the parents’ point of view, one of loss and
confusion.
Psychedelic journeys within and without

“I was alone, I took a ride
I didn’t know what I would find there” “Got to Get You Into My Life”
With “Yellow Submarine” (the song and the film), the Beatles introduce
a new and important thematic element into their work of the psychedelic
era. In fact, one of the differences between the group’s earlier work and that
of the psychedelic phase can be glimpsed in their songs about psychedelic
“tripping,” represented as various forms of traveling, from the literal to
fantastical images of hallucinatory vividness and strangeness. The Beatles
evolve from songs like “Drive My Car” and “Ticket to Ride,” and lines
like “I been told when a boy kiss a girl / Take a trip around the world”
(“Boys”), to compositions like “Tomorrow Never Knows,” “Lucy in the
Sky with Diamonds,” “Magical Mystery Tour,” the soaring instrumental
“Flying,” and, later, “Across the Universe,” all of which feature varieties
of psychedelic “tripping.” Both “Tomorrow Never Knows” and “Lucy in
the Sky with Diamonds” recount ventures into introspective realms, often
with epiphanic results. “Tomorrow Never Knows” begins, of course, with
Lennon’s paraphrase of Leary, Metzner, and Alpert’s psychedelic manual,
“Turn off your mind, relax, and float upstream,” an odd invocation con-
sidering the song has almost no movement, lyrically or musically. “Lucy
in the Sky with Diamonds” opens with the directive to “Picture yourself
in a boat on a river / With tangerine trees and marmalade skies” and adds
even stranger modes of transportation like “newspaper taxis” and train sta-
tions where “plasticine porters with looking glass ties” tote your luggage.
Such attention to vivid detail also characterizes many LSD test subjects.
One such account in Sidney Cohen’s The Beyond Within anticipates the
Beatles’ work in “Lucy”: “Time. Each second separated by infinity. The
Camera has stopped, and the world is caught in a silly snapshot pose.”45
In fact, the rainbow of psychedelic travel possibilities in “Lucy” (all only
“pictured” in one’s head to begin with), along with its multi-colored visual
tableaux (“kaleidoscope eyes,” “tangerine trees,” and “marmalade skies”)
do suggest something akin to postcards sent home from a psychedelic jour-
ney. Moreover, the effects of Lennon’s voice in “Lucy” suggest that of a
seductive guide on an otherworldly excursion. The sound is technically
enhanced using vari-speed and echo, producing at times a “helium-light”
delivery,46 as well as dreamily floating emphasis on the word “Ah” and the
phrase “incredibly high.” Such an alluring presentation looks forward to
Miss Wendy Winters, the sexy tour hostess from the film Magical Mystery
Tour, and the lyrics also reference the street slang of an LSD dealer as a
“travel agent,” providing the potential tripper with a chemical passport
to one’s inner latitudes. Such rhetoric also commonly characterized the
liner notes and promotional copy for the marketing of psychedelic albums.
Consider the following tantalizer for Rotary Connection’s first album:
“Turn yourself on with a diamond needle . . . travel with us in your favorite
color.”47
In even their most ordinary realizations of the idea, the Beatles im-
agine traveling via forms of transportation that strain at literal credibility,
though yellow submarines, after all, may not have been so unusual. Holly-
wood heartthrob Cary Grant rode in a pink one in the 1959 film Operation
Petticoat, made during his own extensive LSD psychotherapeutic regimen
that included over sixty LSD therapy sessions.48 Ringo, of course, sings
about alternative lives of joy and natural beauty all experienced commu-
nally from the ocean depths. Later psychedelic artists expanded on the motif
in songs like the Doors’ “Crystal Ship,” the Beach Boys’ “Sloop John B,” Jimi
Hendrix’s “1983, A Merman I Should Turn to Be,” and Yes’s monumental
Tales from Topographic Oceans. All these songs, like the sound of waves in
Otis Redding’s “Dock of the Bay,” exploit the fluidity and strangeness of
oceanic voyaging, and, as in “Rain,” watery immersions of all sorts, as
appropriate metaphors for the LSD experience. As George sings, “life
flows on within you and without you.”
Expressing the psychedelic motif of metaphorical journeying, the Bea-
tles take numerous “trips” with yellow submarines, newspaper taxis, and
magical mystery tours. Albert Hofmann’s famous ride home on his white
bicycle after discovering LSD-25 set the tone for numerous musical celebra-
tions of traveling (or “tripping”) and its resulting inner transformations.
The Byrds’ “Eight Miles High,” Pink Floyd’s “Interstellar Overdrive,” the
Rolling Stones’ “10,000 Light Years from Home,” Kaleidoscope’s “Flight
from Ashiya,” Steppenwolf ’s “Magic Carpet Ride,” the 13th Floor Eleva-
tors’ “Roller Coaster,” and the Mirror’s “Faster than Light” all pay tribute to
the psychedelic inner journey, as do Jimi Hendrix’s travels by dragonfly and
on eagles’ wings (“Spanish Castle Magic” and “Voodoo Child”). Of course,
their “Magical Mystery Tour” guaranteed “the trip of a lifetime” to anyone
who joined them on their bus tour through the English countryside. The
travel agent at that film’s beginning notes: “When a man buys a ticket for
a magical mystery tour, he knows what to expect. We guarantee him the
trip of a lifetime, and that’s just what he gets.”49 The motif also forms the
basis of the criticism of the “beautiful people” mocked in “Baby You’re a
Rich Man,” those who have traveled only “as far as the eye can see” and,
when they arrived, saw “nothing that doesn’t show,” both indicating the
limitations of their conventionalism.
The Beatles also approach “the trip” as a way of traveling through time.
As Paul sings, “Penny Lane is in my ears and in my eyes”; in other words,
like “rain,” a state of mind. “Eleanor Rigby,” and, to a lesser extent, the later
“She’s Leaving Home” take us back to the classical ambiences of an ear-
lier era by virtue of their string arrangements (they are also two of the four
songs on which no Beatle plays an instrument); and “Love You To,” “Within
You Without You,” and 1968’s “The Inner Light” all sample Asian sounds
of great antiquity, almost like stepping back through time and space. Like
Revolver’s “She Said She Said,” “Strawberry Fields” and “Penny Lane” repre-
sent nostalgic visitations to moments and places of childhood innocence or
strangeness, with quirky bankers and firemen occupying landscapes where,
as John Lennon sang, “nothing is real.” Moreover, even the disturbing
images and bizarre sonic effects of “Being for the Benefit of Mr. Kite!” don’t
obscure the song’s focus on a traditional family entertainment from a bygone
day, albeit one reimagined as a place where “everything is surreal.” Such
time traveling becomes a staple of psychedelic lyricism, and figures promi-
nently in Pink Floyd’s corpus and in such classics as Neil Young’s “Sugar
Mountain” and Donovan’s “Atlantis.” Psychedelia also renewed interest

in traditional English folk music, especially in groups such as Pentangle,
Fairport Convention, Lindisfarne, and the experimental Incredible String
Band. This trippy nostalgia is invoked through suggestions of mysticism
and antiquity: lush, exotic harmonies, and instrumentation (which often
dabbled in Asian exoticism with tablas and sitar sounds). Beatles tunes like
the campy “Your Mother Should Know,” “Octopus’s Garden,” and “Oh!
Darling,” with their samplings of earlier musical styles, round out the most
common themes of psychedelic nostalgia. We could, of course, regard the
entire Sgt. Pepper’s Lonely Hearts Club Band concept, the narrative tenor of
the animated film Yellow Submarine, and the general silliness of the Magical
Mystery Tour escapades (including the Bonzo Dog Band’s performance of
the archly ironic and anachronistic “Death Cab for Cutie” in the cabaret
scene) as being in this category as well. The Beatles add complexity and wit
to this ensemble of songs by having their guru-like figure, “The Fool on the
Hill” who, though “well on his way” with his “head in a cloud,” paradoxi-
cally spends his life “sitting perfectly still.” In a contemporary expansion of
this theme, the most musically and visually thrilling segment of the Cirque
du Soleil’s 2006 production Love, a dazzling tribute to the music and legacy
of the Beatles (imagined by George Harrison and produced by Sir George
Martin and son, Giles Martin), “mashes” together “Within You Without
You” with “Tomorrow Never Knows” and features a group of children in
nightgowns sitting on a bed that appears to be flying through the theater
until the bed disappears and the billowing, white, cloud-like fabric on which
they had been traveling disappears into the stage in a tornadic swirl. That
is psychedelic.
Psychedelic music frequently complements such versions of thematic
traveling through space and/or time by experimenting with notions of
time through unexpectedly shifting meters and noddingly relaxed pacing
(tempo rubato), as well as electronically slowed or accelerated recording
techniques. Fourteen of the forty-four tracks recorded and released during
the Beatles’ psychedelic period (including those new numbers included
on the Yellow Submarine soundtrack in 1968), or some 30 percent of this
material, manifest one of these metric characteristics, and, as we’ve already
noted, the Beatles were fond of the EMI engineers’ experimentation with
vari-speed. Cam Cloud suggests that “the passage of time seems to slow
down tremendously when under the influence of acid . . . . At the peak
of a very powerful trip it may seem as if time has come to a complete
stop, plunging the tripper into a timeless, eternal realm.”50 And, as one
of the subjects interviewed for Cohen’s still influential study, The Beyond
Within, puts it, “Centuries were lived, yet the minute hand of the watch
barely moved. My Rorschach took 200 light years, the longest on record.”51
Harrison tugs at the limits of this phenomenon in his “Blue Jay Way.”
The composition’s repetitious refrain of “please don’t be long . . . don’t be
long” is saturated with artificial double tracking, or ADT (in which double-
tracked vocals are presented just a touch out of sync), reversed tapes, and
phasing, those modes of electronic psychedelic rhetoric that seem to stretch
and bend the very fabric of time into a web of anguished expectation.
Harrison’s sonic experiments plumb the nature of time itself, offering, in
the process, aural approximations of the subjective experience of duration.
Although the hallucinogenic imagery of Lennon’s “I Am the Walrus”
doesn’t deal expressly with time, the musicality of the number’s treatment
of time is dark and threatening. Madow and Sobul have remarked that
the “slow, methodical . . . cello seeps like molasses into the right channel,
miring us in a slow swirling ooze.”52 The surreal lyrics of “Walrus” give
further evidence of the composer’s interest during this period both in
nonsensical wordplay and in reflective questioning of one’s own identity
(recalling “She Said She Said” and “Strawberry Fields Forever”), possibly
a symptom of drug-induced paranoia, given the sinister coloring of this
track. Extensive tape reduction to accommodate multiple dubs, along with
Lennon’s distorted vocal, are among the sonic clues that give this piece its
psychedelic sound – not to mention the unusual melodic and harmonic
progressions in the song.53
And in the end, “All You Need is Love”

The sentiments and celebrations of the “summer of love” pervade the
rhetoric of the era, and new possibilities for the power of love blossomed
across Europe and North America. Ranging from the desperate and loveless
landscapes of “Taxman,” “Eleanor Rigby,” and “A Day in the Life” to the
anthemic tribute of “All You Need is Love,” the Beatles explore the many
faces of love, few of them resembling devotionals to the possibilities of love
imagined earlier in the rock era, in which drive-in movies, back seats of cars,
and lovers panting “I Think We’re Alone Now” defined the genre. For the
Beatles and for millions of others, love and LSD went hand in hand during
the late 1960s. At the same time that the Beatles were recording Revolver and
Sgt. Pepper’s Lonely Hearts Club Band, pseudo-sociological studies like The
Sexual Paradise of LSD (1967) and LSD on Campus (1966) provided lurid
accounts of LSD-fueled orgies and rampant sexual experimentation; and an
entire subgenre of pornographic fiction emerged, churning out titles like Sex
Happy Hippie (“Take a trip with Trippy, the sex happy hippie!”) (1968).54
The now infamous G. Gordon Liddy, then a prosecutor in Duchess County,
New York, and his task force of sheriff’s deputies, staked out Timothy Leary’s
communal Millbrook estate, having heard that “at Leary’s lair the panties
were dropping as fast as the acid.”55 When, early one morning in 1966, their
binoculars detected a film being shown within the mansion, they decided
to raid it, fully expecting to discover “a citadel of smut as well as a den of
dopers.” They were crushed to discover a group of relaxed people enjoying
a waterfall projected on the wall.56 Not that LSD and sex didn’t prove an
explosive combination, but this unconventional “love fest” sets the tone for
the ways the Beatles (and much psychedelic music) examine, and usually
celebrate, love.
Many of the songs of the psychedelic era investigate individuals, their
thoughts and conditions: “I’m Only Sleeping,” “I Want to Tell You,”
“Tomorrow Never Knows,” “Fixing a Hole,” “A Day in the Life,” and oth-
ers. Conventional love songs still punctuate the repertoire, such as “Good
Day Sunshine,” songs of lost love, like “For No One,” and even the tense
overtures of on-the-make songs like “Lovely Rita.” Other love songs, how-
ever, strain at the genre’s conventions. Both “With a Little Help from My
Friends” and “When I’m Sixty-Four” address being loved and accepted
in a slightly whimsical way, but both also insinuate an undercurrent of
insecurity. The singer echoes the Jefferson Airplane’s “Somebody to Love”
when he responds to questions like “What do I do when my love is away”
with answers like “I just need somebody to love” and “I want somebody to
love.” Rather than depending intensely on one person, though, the songs
emphasize a communal sense of getting help from one’s friends, a sentiment
first expressed in “Yellow Submarine,” with its lyrical celebration that “And
our friends are all on board / Many more of them live next door” and the
satiated assurance that “Everyone of us has all we need.” In fact, the joy-
ously repeated “We all live in a yellow submarine” simultaneously affirms
life and communal love. Even the gerontological domestic idyll suggested
by “When I’m Sixty-Four” hints at the insecurities of aging with a loved
one. The speaker genuinely wonders if “she” will need him and feed him
when he’s old, and he reminds her that he might come in “handy mending
a fuse,” quite possibly an allusion to maintaining their “fusion” as a happy
couple.
More consistent with the tradition of psychedelic lyricism, the Beatles
also penned songs in which love figures more as metaphorical or symbolic
union, not necessarily of two people romantically involved. While the “you”
in “Got to Get You Into My Life” suggests that McCartney is writing just
another “silly love song,” the song’s introductory quatrain introduces an
entirely different possibility. McCartney and Lennon recalled that “Got to
Get You Into My Life” was a tribute to McCartney’s early drug experiences,
but they differ on whether the “you” in the song refers to marijuana or
LSD.57
I was alone, I took a ride

I didn’t know what I would find there
Another road where maybe I could see
Maybe another kind of mind there.
Indeed, this “ride” taken with the possibility of finding “another kind of
mind” comports nicely with other songs in which the hypothetical “she” of
the poem is actually a drug-induced ecstasy, Eric Burdon and the Animals’
“Girl Named Sandoz,” with Sandoz referring to the Swiss pharmaceutical
company that manufactured LSD-25 rather than a woman, being a note-
worthy examples. So, the dazzling beauty of the hypothetical “girl” in the
songs actually refers to the hallucinatory effects of psychedelic experience.
Along these same lines, several of the Beatles’ most engaging and
far-reaching “love” songs, especially those penned by George Harrison,
address the concept/emotion from a spiritual and philosophical perspec-
tive. While the singer of “Love You To” does express willingness to “make
love to you,” the lyrics focus more on love as a way of life, a redemption
from the frenzy of daily living, a sentiment returned to in Lennon’s “I’m
Only Sleeping” (“Running everywhere at such a speed / Till they find there’s
no need”) and McCartney’s “Fixing a Hole” (“Silly people run around they
worry me”). “Each day just goes so fast,” the singer bemoans, and “A life-
time is so short,” certainly beyond any material or commercial value. In
addition to these existential pressures, other active, more sinister, problems
face us:
There’s people standing round

Who screw you in the ground
They’ll fill your head with all the things you see.
Like the lovers in Bruce Cockburn’s “Lovers in a Dangerous Time,” these are
two people against a hostile world, and all they can do is “make love all day
long” and “make love singing songs,” their only recourse in an otherwise
loveless and chaotic world.
Harrison’s “Within You Without You” returns to the issues of “Love You
To,” and expresses the new extent of his Hindu-influenced thinking. Equally
critical of illusions of the material world and celebratory of psychedelic
visions of love, “Within You Without You” begins with a meditation on
separateness and alienation (“We were talking about the space between us
all”). Harrison drives deeper into the implications of and solutions to such
a state. The symptoms of detachment and illusion are living behind a veil,
having one’s love go cold, and an obsession with materialism. The solution,
“all you need,” we might say, is love, variously imagined, most powerfully
as a cosmic force.
We were talking about the love we all could share when we find it
To try our best to hold it there with our love
With our love we could save the world.
The song’s title and reassuring refrain, that “life flows on within you and
without you,” is another way of conceptualizing love, the life force whose
circulation fuses self with others, self with cosmos, self with redemption.
Harrison’s later “Long, Long, Long” is probably the epitome of this genre,
fusing and confusing, as it does, the plausible love for a woman with what
Ian MacDonald beautifully refers to as a “touching token of exhausted,
relieved, reconciliation with God.”58
We find the most hyperbolic tributes to love in “Tomorrow Never
Knows” and, of course, “All You Need is Love.” In fact, the three albums
we’re considering begin with the sterility of “Taxman” and “Eleanor Rigby,”
only to end with the affirmations of “All You Need is Love,” perhaps repre-
senting the most significant “trip” the Beatles ever took. On June 25, 1967,
just weeks after the release of Sgt. Pepper’s Lonely Hearts Club Band, the live
broadcast of the Beatles and many famous friends singing “All You Need is
Love” in the first ever global live television link reached an estimated 350
million people in twenty-six countries, the largest television audience up to
that date in history. As the culmination of the Beatles’ explicitly psychedelic
phase, the song is remarkably conventional (except for the verses in 7/4
meter) and almost anachronistic, compared to the experimental and bra-
cing instrumentation and electronic effects that characterize Revolver, Sgt.
Pepper’s Lonely Hearts Club Band, and Magical Mystery Tour. Known, of
course, for its refrain, “All You Need is Love” advances the most hyperbolic
and insistent message in the entire Beatles corpus. It is a song of extreme
statements; nothing is tempered or modulated.
There’s nothing you can do that can’t be done.

Nothing you can sing that can’t be sung
Nothing you can say but you can learn how to play the game.
It’s easy.59
“Nothings,” “no ones,” “nowheres,” “alls,” “all togethers,” and “everybodys”

pervade the song, culminating in the final reversals of “All you need is
love” and “love is all you need.” Given the drift of the anti-materialist
message common to the Beatles’ psychedelic recordings, we might even
guess that the many “nothings” in the song also suggest that happiness and
love depend on “no thing,” rather than the material comforts provided by
the parents of “She’s Leaving Home” and criticized in “And Your Bird Can
Sing,” “Within You Without You,” “Baby You’re a Rich Man,” and more.
Ironic, to be sure, coming from the increasingly rich and powerful Beatles,
but a message fully consistent with the spiritual and psychedelic values they
had all been cultivating during the years of 1966 and 1967, and a fitting coda
to the lines of thought initiated on Revolver. As Lennon sings in “Tomorrow
Never Knows,” anticipating Harrison’s lyrics to “Within You Without You”
and “All You Need is Love,” “Love is all and love is everyone / It is knowing,
it is knowing.” Taken together, then, love is life, love is knowing, love can
save the world. Of course, Lennon’s conclusion to Revolver begins with his
paraphrase of lines from Leary’s Psychedelic Manual, lines and a book which
figure in one of the most beautiful scenes from the annals of psychedelic
history, one that recontextualizes the psychedelic engagement with love in
a non-sexual way.
The Beatles’ tribute to love registers much of the optimism of the “love
generation” and the so-called “Summer of Love,” of course, but it also echoes
in rhetoric and emotion one of the most beautiful stories in psychedelic
history, one also prepared for by their own “Tomorrow Never Knows” and
its source, Timothy Leary’s Psychedelic Manual, based on the Tibetan Book
of the Dead, guidebooks for transitioning into symbolic and literal rebirths
respectively. On November 22, 1963, LSD pioneer and eminent theoretician,
Aldous Huxley, lay on his deathbed, succumbing to cancer of the throat.
At Huxley’s request, his wife, Laura, injected him with 250 mg of LSD. She
reports that, almost immediately, an “immense expression of complete bliss
and love” come over the dying writer’s face, and she whispered to him:
Light and free you let go, darling, forward and up . . . you are going toward
the light . . . . You are going toward a greater love than you have ever known.
You are going toward the best, the greatest love, and it is easy . . . and you are
doing it so beautifully.60
Another equally remarkable account, Malden Grange Bishop’s autobiog-

raphy, appropriately titled The Discovery of Love: A Psychedelic Experience
with LSD-25, documents how an ordinary, middle-aged businessman has
his entire conception of love transformed by a single experience. When
looking at photos of his wife during his trip, Bishop perceives that “there
was a bright, radiant glow about Anniel’s face. I had never seen it so clearly
before. She was filled with love, yet she was waiting for me to give the signal
to let her come in with her great love. I was overwhelmed.”61 Bishop con-
cludes his exploration of love with the following tribute, which anticipates
all of the Beatles’ (and many of Motown’s) celebrations of love by half a
decade:
Love is the most powerful force in the universe. There is no problem love
cannot solve. There is no mountain too high, no stone too hard. Love is the
only force which can save mankind from the inevitable destruction of hate.
There can be no thermonuclear war where there is love. There can be no
poverty where there is love. There can be no lines of color, of creed, of

nationality where there is love. There can be no misery, filth, hate, pain
where there is love. This is all so simple, so plain, that it seems incredible
that man in this so-called modern age of the 20th Century does not
understand it.62
The Beatles’ songs capture precisely these assurances, this gentleness, this
absolute embrace of love, light, and transcendence in their own lyrics,
especially through sheer repetition (recall the similarly repetitious mantra
whispered by Laura Huxley to her dying husband). “All,” “everybody,” “all
together now”: these and other affirmations of communal purpose and
psychedelic certitude anchor much of the spirit of the era. As Bishop might
have said, “All You Need is Love”! And as the Beatles sang near their own
end:
And in the end, the love you take
Is equal to the love you make.
6 Revolution
ian inglis
After five years of uninterrupted success, in which their achievements as

composers, recording artists, and performers had attracted unprecedented
levels of attention and acclaim, the Beatles entered 1968 in somewhat uncer-
tain mood. Delighted with the critical impact of Sgt. Pepper, confused by
the consequences of Brian Epstein’s death, startled at the overwhelmingly
negative reactions to Magical Mystery Tour, and separated through their
growing involvements in a number of (often film-related) projects,1 the
group – for the first time in their career – seemed to have temporarily mis-
laid the sense of direction and purpose that had previously distinguished it.
This lack of unity gradually became so apparent that it became the defining
characteristic of the Beatles’ music throughout 1968.
While it was always true that historical and cultural conditions helped
to implicitly shape the Beatles’ output, the dramatic and divisive events
of 1968 created a political context of fragmentation, argument, disunity,
confrontation, and disillusionment, which inevitably – and explicitly –
found its way into their music. These events included US escalation of the
war in Vietnam, following the Tet Offensive launched by the Viet Cong at
the start of the year; Czechoslovakia’s election of Alexander Dubček as its
leader, and its subsequent invasion by the Soviet Union; the assassinations
of Martin Luther King and Robert Kennedy; the increasing numbers of
student-led demonstrations, rallies, and occupations across Europe; the
violent police response to protests at the Democrat convention in Chicago;
Irish Catholic marches leading to street battles in Londonderry and military
intervention in Northern Ireland; Conservative MP Enoch Powell’s “river
of blood” speech and the focus on anti-immigration policies to which it
led; the punitive response to the iconic black power salute given by 200-
meter medalists Tommie Smith and John Carlos at the Mexico Olympics;
and the election of Richard Nixon as US President. Far from being seen
as unconnected incidents, these and other events were widely regarded as
constituents of a cultural shift through which challenges to the established
order were no longer tolerated, as they had been earlier in the decade, but
were met by a determined resistance to maintain (or reclaim) lost ground:
By the eventful year of 1968, this phase of exhaustion and loss of

[112] momentum, this “fading into reality” of the collective dreams of the fifties
113 Revolution
and sixties, this rightward swing and the beginnings of transition to a

different age, could be seen all over the world . . . The speed with which, in
just a few years, the American Dream, the most powerful image of the
twentieth century, had collapsed into nightmare, had left the world quite
stunned . . . By 1968 there were many other examples of disillusionment
overtaking the dreams which had been so conspicuous over the previous
decade.2
It was equally true, of course, that the Beatles’ own experiences, circum-
stances, and emotions frequently and inevitably colored their songs. In 1968,
there were four specific and significant developments which impacted on
the personal context of their music. The first (partly to fill the vacuum
caused by Epstein’s death) was the formal creation, in January, of Apple, the
group’s own recording, management, and production company. Second, in
February the group decamped to India, for several weeks’ intensive tuition
in transcendental meditation at the Maharishi Mahesh Yogi’s ashram in
Rishikesh. Third, John Lennon left his wife, Cynthia, for the Japanese con-
ceptual artist Yoko Ono. Fourth, Paul McCartney’s five-year romance with
actress Jane Asher ended, shortly after he met New York photographer and
future wife, Linda Eastman.
The unforeseen combination of their disrupted personal lives and a
turbulent political climate effectively shaped much of the music created by
the Beatles throughout the year. Moreover, it raised the prospect of a future
in which the four Beatles themselves might not continue as a group. At the
start of the year, this was nothing more than a remote possibility; by the
end of the year, it had become, for many observers, a probability.
Preparation: Yellow Submarine

In 1963, United Artists had contracted with Brian Epstein to produce three
Beatles films. A Hard Day’s Night and Help! (both directed by Richard
Lester) had been hugely successful, but by 1967 the Beatles, reluctant to
submit themselves to the demands of movie-making and largely unim-
pressed by the potential scripts they had been offered, were unwilling to
agree to United Artists’ demands for the promised third film. The solu-
tion, negotiated between Brian Epstein and Al Brodax (producer of the
US television cartoon series The Beatles) was that the group could fulfill
their obligation by cooperating in the production of a full-length cartoon
inspired by the lyrics of “Yellow Submarine.” Dismayed by the prospect,
the group distanced themselves from the project, refused to supply any new
music, and offered only previously rejected songs for the soundtrack. These
were George Harrison’s “It’s All Too Much” and “Only A Northern Song,”
114 Ian Inglis
Paul McCartney’s “All Together Now” (all recorded during the Sgt. Pepper
sessions in April–May 1967), and John Lennon’s “Hey Bulldog” (recorded
in February 1968).
All four songs were dismissed, by critics and by the Beatles themselves,
as trivial and unimportant examples of their music. The two composi-
tions by Harrison have been described, respectively, as “little more than
formless shrieking”3 and “a self-indulgent dirge . . . quickly set aside and
forgotten.”4 In its obvious haste to reproduce “the repetitive chant of a
children’s game,”5 the nursery-rhyme-based “All Together Now” showed
little attention to either words or music; and John Lennon remarked,
“I knocked off ‘Hey Bulldog’ . . . it’s a good sounding record that means
nothing.”6
Given such adverse comments and the group’s transparent lack of inter-
est in the film and its music, it was ironic that, after viewing some early
footage, they were impressed enough to agree to appear in its final scene;
and following the positive response to its release in July 1968,7 they engaged
in a reappraisal of its merits, thereby allowing themselves to be rather more
associated with its unexpected, and enduring, status:
The film is a masterpiece and it has opened up new and undreamed of

horizons for animation. It bears seeing several times for its content to be
fully appreciated, and it has given such an impetus to the full-length
animation cinema that it is already a classic.8
As a result, the music was also reassessed, so much so that the songs came
to be identified as early and influential examples of contemporary musical
genres: psychedelia (“All Together Now”), blues-based rock (“Hey Bull-
dog”), heavy metal (“It’s All Too Much”), and electronic (“Only a Northern
Song”). However, when the soundtrack album was released (on the group’s
Apple label) in January of the following year (by which time critical scrutiny
had switched to the group’s double album, The Beatles, released in Novem-
ber 1968), it was noticeable that some of the initial apprehension about
the project still persisted: uniquely, Yellow Submarine’s sleeve notes, written
by the Beatles’ press agent, Derek Taylor, said nothing about the music it
contained, but reproduced, in full, a review of The Beatles that had appeared
in the Observer. His explanation that he “wanted the people who bought
the Yellow Submarine album to buy and enjoy the really wonderful The
Beatles album”9 was seen by many as a tacit admission by the group that it
remained less than satisfied by its musical contributions. As a result, Yellow
Submarine occupied, and continues to occupy, a curious and somewhat
uneasy position in the group’s musical history.
115 Revolution
Evolution: “Lady Madonna” to “Hey Jude”

Much of the Beatles’ impact in 1963 and 1964 was achieved through
their remarkable sequence of successful hit singles (eight, from “Love Me
Do” in October 1962 to “I Feel Fine” in November 1964). By 1968, the
configurations of popular music had been transformed (largely as a result
of the Beatles themselves) and two related trajectories had emerged – pop
(built around singles) and rock (built around albums). However, there still
existed a huge demand for Beatles singles, particularly in the USA, which
the group was loath to ignore; and a week-long session in February at the
Abbey Road studios produced four new songs, from which its next single
would be selected.
“Lady Madonna,” written and sung by Paul McCartney, was a stated
attempt by the group to mimic the boogie style of New Orleans rock and roll,
popularized by Fats Domino in the 1950s. Utilizing the same piano riff that
had introduced jazz trumpeter Humphrey Lyttleton’s “Bad Penny Blues”
(also, coincidentally, produced by George Martin) in 1956, the song fused
traditional musical forms with an unexpected, contemporary lyric that paid
tribute to the plight of the working woman. As McCartney acknowledged,
it was a deliberate exercise:
“Lady Madonna” was me sitting down at the piano trying to write a bluesy
boogie-woogie thing. I got my left hand doing an arpeggio thing with the
chord, an ascending boogie-woogie left hand, then a descending right hand.
I always liked that, the juxtaposition of a line going down meeting a line
going up.10
Although “Lady Madonna” was chosen as the A side of the next single, the
inclusion of George Harrison’s “The Inner Light” on the B side was perhaps
the more significant decision, breaking as it did the group’s exclusive reliance
on Lennon-McCartney compositions on both sides of its singles. Harrison
had created the song’s instrumental track a few weeks earlier with vari-
ous Indian musicians at EMI’s studios in Bombay, during his recording of
the film score for Wonderwall. The lyrics were adapted from Juan Mascaro’s
translation of a poem in Lao-Tse’s Tao Te Ching. As with “Lady Madonna,” it
was the extraordinary synthesis of separate musical and lyrical traditions (in
this case, Indian instrumentation, Chinese philosophy, and Western popular
music) that distinguished the song. Harrison was well aware that its innova-
tive structure might deter traditional pop audiences – “I think the song went
unnoticed by most people because I was getting a bit ‘out of it’ as far as West-
ern popular music was concerned”11 – and its appearance on the single was
a bold and unequivocal indication of the ways in which the Beatles were con-
fronting conventional assumptions about their responsibilities as musicians.
116 Ian Inglis
The other two songs were compositions by John Lennon. “Hey Bulldog,”
as discussed above, was immediately discarded until it was used to complete
the allocation of new tracks for Yellow Submarine; it also has the distinction
of being the song most quickly recorded by the Beatles after their decision,
in August 1966, to stop touring in order to concentrate on studio work.
That it took less than ten hours from start to finish says much about the
group’s estimation of its relative importance. Lennon described the other
song, “Across the Universe,” as one over which he had little control, and
whose origins were more magical than musical:
I was lying next to my first wife in bed . . . she’d gone to sleep and I’d kept
hearing these words over and over, flowing like an endless stream . . . I don’t
know where it came from . . . such an extraordinary meter and I can never
repeat it! It’s not a matter of craftsmanship; it wrote itself. It drove me out of
bed . . . I went downstairs and I couldn’t get to sleep until I put it on paper.12
It is, without doubt, one of Lennon’s and the Beatles’ loveliest melodies and
most thoughtful lyrics; Mellers noted how “the flux of the visible universe –
evoked in the beautiful poem – is timelessly stilled in a sublimation of folk
and country-western music.”13 It was, therefore, puzzling that the song was
not released until December 1969, when it was included on a compilation
charity album, No One’s Gonna Change Our World, for the World Wildlife
Fund; and it did not appear on a Beatles’ album until Let It Be in May 1970.
Although Apple had been established at the start of the year, the “Lady
Madonna”/“The Inner Light” single was released, in March, on the Par-
lophone label. To publicly launch the new label (its other artists included
James Taylor, Jackie Lomax, and Mary Hopkin) in August, the Beatles deter-
mined that their next single should be especially memorable. While visiting
Cynthia Lennon and her son Julian, following the collapse of the Lennons’
marriage in May, Paul McCartney had begun to incorporate his reaction to
their situation into a broader songwriting strategy:
I started with the idea “Hey Jules,” which was Julian, don’t make it bad, take
a sad song and make it better. Hey, try and deal with this terrible thing . . .
And I got this idea for a song, “Hey Jude,” and made up a few little things so
I had the idea by the time I got there. I changed it to “Jude” because I
thought that sounded a bit better.14
But while its inspiration was unusual, it was the song’s construction that
attracted more interest. At a time when the typical single was rarely longer
than two or three minutes in length, the seven minutes and eleven seconds of
“Hey Jude” (including a four-minute closing chorus) were quite exceptional,
and, like so much of the Beatles’ music, provided models which others were
quick to follow.15 “Hey Jude” also became the Beatles’ biggest-selling single.
117 Revolution
On the B side of the record was the first of three tracks bearing the
title “Revolution” that the group would record that year. Written by John
Lennon, it signaled his frustration and resentment at the Beatles’ commer-
cial obligation to avoid overt political comment. Envious of Bob Dylan’s
ability to engage in meaningful contemporary debates in song, Lennon’s
politicization had accelerated since his relationship with Yoko Ono, and the
death of Brian Epstein had removed the last serious restraint on his desire to
participate in “serious” forms of discourse. These factors, set alongside the
student protests sweeping Europe and the emergence of a counterculture
fighting for the withdrawal of US troops from Vietnam, encouraged Lennon
to write, and the Beatles to record, the group’s first explicitly political song,
as he later explained:
I wanted it out as a single: as a statement of the Beatles’ position on Vietnam

and the Beatles’ position on revolution. For years, on the Beatles’ tours,
Brian Epstein had stopped us from saying anything about Vietnam or the
war. And he wouldn’t allow questions about it. But on one of the last tours, I
said, “I am going to answer about the war. We can’t ignore it.” I absolutely
wanted the Beatles to say something about the war.16
What the Beatles did say about the war was rather confusing, as the lyrics
ranged across endorsements and denials of violence as a legitimate tactic,
veered between the merits of political and personal change, and failed to
identify any specific ideological solution. The sense of confusion was added
to by the instrumental combination of two distorted lead guitars and an
unusually heavy drum track, which emphasized the atmosphere of discord
and friction both musically and contextually.
What the song also demonstrated was the astonishing evolution in the
personal and professional career of the group over the previous twelve
months. The contrast between the married family man calmly reassuring
audiences that “love is all you need” through the Summer of Love, and
the adulterous political activist screaming of the necessity to “change the
world” in the Year of the Barricades, could not have been better exemplified
than it was here.
Revolution: The Beatles

Within weeks of its release in November 1968, the double album The Beatles
had been unofficially, but effectively, re-christened as The White Album, the
name derived from its plain, all-white cover, designed by Richard Hamil-
ton. Regarded by some as the group’s finest,17 it was certainly the longest,
containing more than ninety minutes of music, mostly written during
118 Ian Inglis
the weeks in Rishikesh earlier in the year. It was recorded over a four-
month period from June to early October, but its significance was not
limited to, or even concentrated on, its musical properties. The tensions
and interactions between three distinct, yet related, components – narra-
tive, aesthetic, and musical – gave The Beatles an immediate momentum and
lasting reputation.
Narrative
Lennon, McCartney, and Harrison had each returned from Rishikesh with
several new songs that they were keen to record. However, the fact that they
were largely individual compositions rather than collaborative efforts led
to intense competition for their inclusion on the new album. Since their
withdrawal from live performance, they were no longer able to rely on their
participation in a demanding touring schedule to bind them together as
colleagues; instead, they became competitors. In addition, the increasing
number of invitations and opportunities to engage in solo projects through
1968 (including McCartney’s work as record producer for Mary Hopkin,
the Bonzo Dog Band and the Black Dyke Mills Band; Harrison’s musical
collaborations with Cream and Jackie Lomax; and Lennon’s adaptation of
In His Own Write for the National Theatre and his You Are Here exhibition
at London’s Robert Fraser Gallery) and the lack of agreement when they did
engage in shared projects (such as the visit to India, when one by one the
Beatles became suspicious of the Maharishi Mahesh Yogi’s motives, leaving
George Harrison as the only remaining follower) further undermined any
sense of common purpose. Given the personal upheavals and professional
reorientations in which the four were involved, it was hardly surprising that
there was an absence of agreement about, and throughout, the making of
The Beatles. In this respect, The Beatles was not an album by the Beatles,
but a collection of thirty separate songs by four performers who happened
(for the time being, at least) to be members of the same group, but who
showed little willingness to cooperate with one another. George Harrison
recognized the change in emphasis at that time:
There was also a lot more individual stuff and, for the first time, people were
accepting that it was individual. I remember having three studios operating
at the same time: Paul was doing some overdubs in one, John was in
another, and I was recording some horns or something in a third . . . What
else do you do when you’ve got so many songs and you want to get rid of
them so that you can write more? There was a lot of ego in the band, and
there were a lot of songs that maybe should have been elbowed.18
But whatever hostility might have been created by musical disagreements

and rivalries, the unease was significantly compounded by the constant
119 Revolution
presence of Yoko Ono during the recording sessions. From the beginning
of their career, the Beatles had vigorously enforced a policy that excluded
any and all outsiders from the recording studio: the presence of girlfriends
and wives, family and friends, even manager Brian Epstein, was strictly
prohibited in order to allow the group, and producer George Martin, to
concentrate uninterruptedly on its music.19 Lennon’s unilateral decision to
encourage Ono’s attendance at every session, even providing a bed for her
in the studio, was unsurprisingly seen by McCartney, Harrison, and Starr,
not only as a personal affront, but also as an explicit abandonment of their
consensual work ethos. And while they may have been prepared to tolerate
this as a temporary, if bizarre, inconvenience, the fact that she was invited
to contribute musically to “The Continuing Story of Bungalow Bill” and
“Revolution 9” was a serious and lasting blow to the unity the four had long
shared. Indeed, this was re-emphasized later in the year by the release of
John Lennon and Yoko Ono’s Two Virgins album, and by their participation
in BBC’s The Rolling Stones Rock ’n’ Roll Circus, in which they performed
songs (including “Yer Blues”) as members of an impromptu group with
Eric Clapton, Mitch Mitchell, and Keith Richards.
As the recording of The Beatles progressed, it became increasingly evident
that the group’s arguments were far more than local disagreements, but
reflected fundamental and evident divisions of approach and ambition: “To
a man, the staff working with the group inside Abbey Road confirm this.
The sessions were becoming tangibly tense and fraught, and tempers were
being lost more easily and more frequently than ever before.”20 In mid-July,
studio engineer Geoff Emerick, who had worked with the Beatles since
1963, departed in response to the group’s incessant quarrels. And when, in
August, McCartney’s criticism of Ringo Starr’s contribution to “Back in the
USSR” led the drummer to walk out, it was perceived by many to be an
unavoidable outcome of the sessions’ personal and professional turmoil, as
Starr admitted:
I felt I was playing like shit. And those three were really getting on. I had this
feeling that nobody loved me. I felt horrible. So I said to myself, “What am I
doing here? Those three are getting along so well and I’m not even playing
well.” That was madness, so I went away on holiday to sort things out. I
don’t know, maybe I was just paranoid. To play in a band you have to trust
each other.21
He allowed himself to be persuaded to return two weeks later, but the

fact that one of the four had (albeit temporarily) left the group signaled a
decisive moment in the history of the Beatles, as was confirmed by John
Lennon:
120 Ian Inglis
After Brian [Epstein] died we collapsed. We broke up then. We made the

double album, the set . . . it’s like if you took each track off and gave it all
mine and all George’s . . . it was just me and a backing group, Paul and a
backing group . . . and I enjoyed it, but we broke up then.22
The photographs and drawings of Yoko Ono that were included on the
album’s lyric sheet, and the formal, printed acknowledgment to Linda East-
man (who had taken many of the photographs), were the final confirmation
that with the album, the Beatles had engaged in a radical restructuring of
obligations and relationships, whose repercussions would govern much, if
not all, of their future careers.
Aesthetic
The Beatles divided critics more than any other of the group’s albums; but
this division was less to do with disagreements about quality than with
confusions about the aesthetics, or cultures, of the album itself. On the one
hand, it was described as “unsurpassed . . . seamless gear changes and bomb
bursts of jaw-dropping brilliance”;23 “unquestionably glorious . . . a rich
tapestry of musical textures”;24 and “a musical outpouring of overwhelming
quantity, richness and diversity.”25
On the other hand, it was seen as “something of a failure . . . it consisted
of rough sketches of songs”;26 “without the necessary spark to lift many of
the songs out of the ordinary . . . a collection of bits and pieces”;27 and “songs
or song fragments [that] reeked of the argument and self-indulgence that
had gone into their making.”28 Whether positive or negative, all assessments
of The Beatles drew attention to its fragmentary aesthetic. However, while
some complained about the lack of a coherent style, others recognized this
as the album’s raison d’être.
In fact, The Beatles has been designated as popular music’s first post-
modern album.29 Within postmodern theory and practice, it has become
axiomatic that the only certainty is that there are no longer any certainties,
and, in this respect, the album was an early example of the rejection of con-
stant principles, determination to transgress and combine creative codes,
and repudiation of familiar systems of classification that characterized artis-
tic production in the last decades of the twentieth century. The strategies
utilized by the Beatles included bricolage (multiple quotation from earlier
styles and periods), fragmentation (paradox, contradiction, incongruity),
pastiche (imitation of another work, artist, or genre), parody (imitation for
comic or satirical effect), reflexivity (self-conscious reference or attribution
to itself), plurality (the absence of a single preferred reading), irony (the
deliberate juxtaposition of meaning), exaggeration (abnormal enlargement
or intensification), anti-representation (the deflection of attempts to define
121 Revolution
“reality”), and meta-art (the admission that all art is constructed). In its
design, production, and execution, The Beatles employed all these elements
(many of which had been present in much of the group’s previous work) to
fashion a contemporary text whose music(s) described the present, recalled
the past, and anticipated the future.
The full significance of these tendencies was often overlooked, even by
those who drew attention to them. Kozinn’s comment that the album was
“a fascinating compendium of compositional and performance styles that
shows how wide-ranging the Beatles’ musical imaginations were,”30 and
O’Grady’s observation that “aside from a frequent preoccupation with satire
and irony of various kinds, the album fails to demonstrate any particular
theme or conceptual reference point,”31 were incomplete in that the features
they identified were seen as interesting and incidental rather than definitive.
The culture of postmodernism may have constituted a new and unfamiliar
trajectory in 1968, but it was one which the Beatles were well positioned to
embrace and exploit:
By employing the disruptive aesthetics of postmodern art, the White Album
calls attention away from itself as a source of meaning and instead clears a
space where readers can engage the issues of what popular music is and what
role it plays. It does not hold up a unified, understandable, interpretable
theme, but blurs any possible theme, making it impossible to grasp its
essential motivation . . . The album deconstructs itself, pop music, the
Beatles themselves, and their own musical history.32
Music
While its extraordinary compilation of musical styles and inflections made
the album impossible to classify as a coherent whole, there were, neverthe-
less, sufficient principal musical constituents within each song to permit the
tentative and broad categorizations set out in Table 6.1. These classifications
can only be indicative, since many of the songs contained elements drawn
from different genres, presented startling combinations of tempo and deliv-
ery, and blurred boundaries between past and present musical approaches.
Paul McCartney revealed that this was quite intentional, when he explained:
“We felt it was time to step back because that is what we wanted to do. You
can still make good music without going forward.”33
Nowhere was this better demonstrated than in the four rock and roll-
based songs; just as “Lady Madonna” had been inspired by the composi-
tions and vocal style of Fats Domino, so McCartney’s “Birthday,” “Helter
Skelter,” “Why Don’t We Do It in the Road,” and Lennon’s “Everybody’s
Got Something to Hide Except Me and My Monkey” reproduced the insis-
tent rhythms, vocal shrieks, and alliterative and onomatopoeic lyrics of two
more of the group’s early mentors, Little Richard and Larry Williams. While
122 Ian Inglis
Table 6.1 Major musical sources of The Beatles
Folk Blackbird; I Will; Mother Nature’s Son

Rock Savoy Truffle; While My Guitar Gently Weeps; I’m So Tired
Rock and Roll Why Don’t We Do It in the Road; Birthday; Everybody’s Got Something to Hide
Except Me and My Monkey; Helter Skelter
Ska Ob-La-Di Ob-La-Da
Psychedelia Glass Onion; Sexy Sadie
Vaudeville Martha My Dear; Honey Pie
Country Don’t Pass Me By; Rocky Raccoon
Doo-Wop Happiness Is a Warm Gun; Revolution 1
Ballad Long Long Long; Julia
Rhythm and Blues Back in the USSR
Avant Garde Revolution 9
Blues Yer Blues
Nursery Rhyme Dear Prudence; The Continuing Story of Bungalow Bill; Piggies; Cry Baby Cry;
Good Night
Miscellaneous Wild Honey Pie
those songs derived from the group’s adolescence in the 1950s, there was a
set of five – “Cry Baby Cry,” “Piggies,” “The Continuing Story of Bunga-
low Bill,” “Dear Prudence,” and “Good Night” – whose origins lay in the
memories of their childhoods in the 1940s. McCartney’s perennial liking
for the legacy of vaudeville and music hall, and for its reinterpretation by
Fred Astaire in his stage and screen musicals of the 1930s, was evidenced
in “Martha My Dear” and “Honey Pie”; and “Rocky Raccoon” and “Don’t
Pass Me By” (the first composition of Ringo Starr) revisited the traditions
of the country ballad.
But while these songs generally recalled past musical styles, their specific
creation often lay in current and spontaneous events. “Helter Skelter” was
a deliberate attempt to surpass the renowned volume and excitement of the
Who; “Dear Prudence” was written for one of their Rishikesh companions,
Prudence Farrow; “Martha My Dear” was about McCartney’s Old English
sheepdog, Martha; “Good Night” was composed as a lullaby for Lennon’s
son Julian; and “Sexy Sadie” chronicled the group’s disillusionment with
the Maharishi Mahesh Yogi. Musically and lyrically, the album was thus
able to incorporate past and present concerns not only between songs but
also within them.
No less important was the contribution of specific friends and peers to
several of the songs. The West Coast harmony vocals on “Back in the USSR”
were added to the track following the group’s association with Beach Boy
Mike Love at Rishikesh; “Rocky Raccoon” was also written in Rishikesh, with
the assistance of the British folk singer-songwriter Donovan; “Revolution 9”
was a joint attempt by Lennon and Ono to translate her avant-garde art into
avant-garde music; and the lead guitar on “While My Guitar Gently Weeps”
123 Revolution
was played by Eric Clapton, who was invited by George Harrison in order to
provide a distinctive guitar solo and as a mark of their growing friendship.
Following the largely positive reaction to “Revolution”, the group were
able to use several of the album’s songs to refer – directly or indirectly – to
the broader political context. “Back in the USSR” was an oblique comment
on the continuing Cold War and Russian occupation of Czechoslovakia;
“Blackbird” was a response to the ongoing racial tensions in the USA;
“Happiness is a Warm Gun” was inspired by the spiraling gun culture in
the same country; and “Piggies” was a savage attack on the corporate greed
of contemporary capitalism. And finally, two songs were intensely personal
statements that revealed much about their authors: “Long Long Long”
was “a yearning, beautiful song . . . an oasis of calm and faith”34 recording
the happiness that came with George Harrison’s discovery of God; and
“Julia” (with lyrics adapted from Kahlil Gibran’s Sand and Foam) was John
Lennon’s song to his dead mother, which managed to “evoke through music
a language that is deeper than words.”35
Although double albums were still comparatively rare, The Beatles was
not popular music’s first,36 and there were doubts about its sales potential.
In addition, George Martin was reluctant to release so much of the group’s
music at one time, especially given his lack of enthusiasm about some of the
songs. However, his objections were overruled by the Beatles’ absolute and
unanimous insistence that their music should be presented in its entirety,
and The Beatles became the group’s biggest-selling album.
Redirection
Although 1968 brought with it an exceptional twelve months of politi-
cal revolution, professional reconstruction, and personal reorientation, the
Beatles had by no means resolved these issues by the end of the year.
The repercussions of Lennon’s controversial relationship with Yoko Ono,
McCartney’s decisive involvement with Linda Eastman, Harrison’s deepen-
ing interest in Eastern religion, Starr’s feelings of despondency, and their de
facto managerless state were only magnified by the failure of Apple to meet
its original objectives: “By the fall of 1968 Apple was slowly rotting away,
losing a reported £20,000 a week from gross mismanagement and employee
pilfering.”37
As the year closed with no satisfactory resolution to these problems and
differences in sight (and with the emergence of new difficulties, following
Lennon’s arrest and conviction in October for possession of cannabis), it
was apparent that the direction along which the Beatles had traveled for
the previous several years was no longer viable. The temporary uncertainty
124 Ian Inglis
present at the start of the year seemed to have relentlessly spiraled into a
permanent discomfort. While the diversity of the music they produced in
1968 indicated a number of plausible alternative trajectories, both individ-
ual and collective, the absence of any common agreement about preferred
destinations had created a sense of distance and unease within the group,
whose outcome could not be predicted.
7 On their way home: the Beatles in 1969 and 1970
steve hamelman
Given the high amount of magnificent music the Beatles recorded in 1969, it
may surprise millions of casual listeners to learn that aside from a few num-
bers, all of the official tracks from the band’s last full year – including classics
such as “Let It Be,” “Get Back,” “The Long and Winding Road,” “Come
Together,” “Across the Universe,” “Something,” “Don’t Let Me Down,” and
the medley on side two of Abbey Road – were created to the tune of four
once inseparable friends going through an ugly divorce. Most of the tracks
belie sessions where egos were so wounded by the slightest offense, whether
real or imagined, that only in patches did the Fab Four function with a
unified vision and in a collaborative spirit. Abbey Road and Let It Be, along
with “The Ballad of John and Yoko” and three B sides, were made amid
spats, sulks, shouting matches, temporary alliances, simmering jealousies,
and many sessions with one or more of the Beatles absent. “Given these cir-
cumstances,” writes Walter Everett, “it is somewhat remarkable that Abbey
Road is universally recognized as a coherent demonstration of inspired
composition, impeccable vocal and instrumental ensemble, and clean and
cleverly colorful engineering.”1 And while Let It Be may not possess the
polish of Abbey Road, many listeners prefer it for that very reason. Shining
through the ramshackle and at times poorly performed and indifferently
recorded pieces are melodies, harmonies, and grooves as addictive as any
in the Beatles’ canon. So artful were the Beatles, and so blessed with good
material, that evidence of internecine strife is concealed on Abbey Road,
the band’s attempt in mid-1969 to end its career with one last masterpiece,
and Let It Be, the band’s attempt in early 1969 (but released in 1970) to
“get back” to its musical roots as the boys commenced the final phase of
disintegration.
Discontent had begun infecting their ranks as early as 1967 – the year
that Brian Epstein died, that Paul’s “Hello Goodbye” was chosen as the A
side to John’s B side “I Am the Walrus” (a decision Everett calls “one more
nail in the Beatles’ coffin”),2 and that Paul saddled the others with Magical
Mystery Tour, a popular and critical disaster. Discord flared up in 1968
during work on The Beatles, and in 1969 conflict dogged them from first
day to last. On January 2, 1969, they arrived at Twickenham Film Studios
in London to film rehearsals for a documentary movie and a come-back
[125] televised concert (the location causing heated debate) at the end of the
126 Steve Hamelman
month-long rehearsals, and record an album named Get Back – all in all,
a Paul-devised project that, after much argument and delay, became the
album Let It Be. Almost exactly one year later, on January 4, 1970, at Abbey
Road/EMI Studios, Paul, George, and Ringo convened the Beatles’ last
recording session (John was on vacation in Denmark).3 The intervening
twelve months saw four musicians who had altered the history of popular
culture vacillating between a pinnacle of creative collaboration and a nadir
of disintegrative self-absorption.
The business of breaking up

Like almost everything else in their career, the Beatles’ breakup was another
unique chapter in rock and roll history. Evidence of its singularity lies mainly
in the music they made in 1969. Of equal note, however, is the excruciating
indecisiveness they brought to the act of dissolution.
The end came and went several times in 1969. On January 10, George quit
the band for a few days following a showdown with John during the Get Back
rehearsals at Twickenham.4 Doug Sulpy and Ray Schweighhardt wonder
how the band held together at all through these fractious sessions, noting
among other impasses the dialog on January 13, when “the Beatles [were]
nearer to breaking up than they had ever been before.”5 Philip Norman
states that “the Beatles ceased to exist”6 on the afternoon of September 12,
1969, when John was invited to play at a festival in Toronto. He boarded a
plane the next day with a makeshift Plastic Ono Band, which, as the ensuing
live album testifies, gave a pedestrian performance. But it was in a business
meeting within days of his return from the gig that Lennon declared he
was “divorcing” the other Beatles.7 His decision was hushed up for half a
year, when on April 10, 1970, Paul trumped his former partner’s card by
feeding the breakup scoop to the media via the inclusion of an insert inside
advance press copies of his first solo album, McCartney.8 To secure his
artistic freedom from the Beatles’ management, Paul filed suit to dissolve
the partnership on December 31, 1970, the band’s business affairs went into
receivership on March 12, 1971, and the band formally “ceased to exist”
on January 9, 1975. Clearly, the Beatles were incapable of ending it all in
one fell swoop, spending most of 1969 either back-stabbing one another or
courting new muses and pursuing new whims, ultimately enhancing their
stature by recording music of a quality impressive even in relation to their
previous peerless work.
For a full appreciation of this peerless work, one must look briefly at
modern and postmodern aesthetics. New Critics in the 1940s preached
that it was a mistake to read authorial intention into works of literary art.
Structuralists and poststructuralists of the 1960s through 1980s took this
dictum of “the intentional fallacy” – no one is fully aware of an author’s

intentions, the author included, which is why in the act of interpretation all
intention must be discounted – to the next extreme. They argued that the
existence of an autonomous author in absolute command of the signifiers
(lines of verse, musical notations, swabs of paint) comprising a text was
an axiom of humanistic ideology holding that transcendent meaning is
encoded in literature and other means of artistic communication. Despite
falling into disfavor with the rise of multicultural, political, and context-
based theories in the 1990s, the legacy of formalism, structuralism, and
poststructuralism lingers sufficiently to bedevil critics who seek to establish
definite correspondences between a given text and the details of a given
creator’s life at the time of composition.
No matter how intriguing from a theoretical standpoint, the Beatles
music of 1969 shatters the New Critics’ argument that private intentions
matter not at all in the analysis of texts made public, and it renders untenable
all arguments that the Author (and the reader’s burden of having to tease
out the unmediated origins of a given text) died c. 1968.9 In fact, there
can be little intelligent discussion of Abbey Road and Let It Be without
awareness of their biographical background. The songs that ended up on
these two disks, as well as “The Ballad of John and Yoko” and “Don’t Let Me
Down,” illuminate the Beatles’ personal affairs in ways that “Do You Want
to Know a Secret,” “I Want to Hold Your Hand,” “When I Get Home,”
“Eight Days a Week,” “Getting Better,” “Day Tripper,” and dozens more
do not. Many tracks from 1969 teem with melancholy and nostalgia, some
drip with sarcasm, and others sound the depths of insecurity, loneliness,
and desire. In all cases, the composer’s thoughts and feelings are transmuted
into original and timeless music by the other three Beatles.10 Since few if
any of the tunes from 1969 lack biographical overtones or reference points,
the critic is obligated to throw the precepts of postmodern aesthetics to
the wind, touching on both particular and universal aspects of the band’s
music.11
What, then, was on their minds in 1969? What caused such close com-
panions to belittle and betray one another at almost every opportunity?
Why did they abandon the Get Back concert-film project, stew in their dis-
content for a few months, pursue solo interests, pool their resources for the
common good by regrouping for Abbey Road, and then, more decisively
than before, go their separate ways at last?
Throughout 1969 the Beatles as single musical corpus was being drawn
and quartered by internal and external forces too potent for each Beatle
to resist. Yoko Ono, soon to be joined by Allen Klein, was pulling – had
been pulling since mid-1968 – John out of one socket. Abetting Lennon’s
withdrawal from the Beatles were, in no particular order, his fury at the
128 Steve Hamelman
others for their rudeness to Yoko (whom he married on March 20, 1969);
his resentment toward Paul for everything from refusing to record “Cold
Turkey” in fall 1969 to Paul’s having become the dominant creative force and
de facto leader of the band; his addiction to heroin, the cause of mental and
emotional instability; his infatuation with experimental and political rock;
and the paranoia that seemed to be his primary state of mind.12 Yanking
Paul was a combination of the need to perform live; his relationship with
Linda Eastman (whom he met in May 1968 and married on March 12, 1969);
mounting impatience with John, George, and Ringo’s indifference to and/or
hostility toward the Beatles as a working unit with a viable future; and the
allure of getting away from it all at his farmhouse in Scotland. George felt
frustration at having his new compositions bypassed time and time again.
“Isn’t It a Pity,” “All Things Must Pass,” and “Let It Down” (all destined
for epic treatment on 1970’s All Things Must Pass) were introduced and
shelved at Twickenham. George, moreover, was further alienated by Paul’s
micromanaging and John’s venom in the studio (or worse, his tolerance of
Yoko’s intrusiveness). Finally, Ringo seemed to be reading the band’s doom
in the tea-leaves: he began to gravitate toward a career in both film (his
role in The Magic Christian got under way in March 1969) and solo albums
(he began recording Sentimental Journey in October). After ten-plus years
together, these four friends and fellow musicians were ripe to go their own
ways artistically, politically, and personally.
Of preeminent concern to all of them, however, was money – that is, the
chaos at Apple Corps. In a January 1969 issue of Disc and Music Echo, John
made public Apple’s tattered state, lamenting that “if it carries on like this, all
of us will be broke in the next six months.”13 Started in December 1967 as a
combination of tax shelter and utopian business model, Apple was already a
losing cause by the time its records division was established at 3 Savile Row,
London, in July 1968. First came the boutique, purveyors of psychedelic
clothing and apparel to London hipsters. Apple quickly branched out into
record, publicity, film, electronics, and publishing divisions. From day one,
sponging, shoplifting, and incompetence characterized Apple’s daily oper-
ations. The boutique closed for good in a sensational public giveaway of its
inventory in July 1968 after a mere eight cash-draining months. While the
other divisions went about tanking, Apple Records fared better. Its first sin-
gle was the worldwide hit “Hey Jude” (October 1968), and its roster included
(the Beatles aside) the Iveys (Badfinger), Mary Hopkin, James Taylor, and
the Modern Jazz Quartet. But the relative success of Apple Records would
not be enough to stop the slide of the Beatles into bankruptcy.
Enter Allen Klein. Stereotypically “New York” in his antagonistic man-
ner, Klein had by the mid-sixties become manager of several British Inva-
sion bands, the Rolling Stones chief among them. In late 1968, with Apple
falling to pieces in step with the group’s loss of direction, Klein’s long-
standing ambition to manage the Beatles was now within reach. He began
to insinuate himself into the Beatles’ inner circle by meeting with John in
January 1969. Swayed by the lawyer’s style and strategic plan, John endorsed
Klein, and Ringo and George soon followed his cue. In the meantime, Paul
had come to terms with Linda Eastman’s brother John and father Lee of
the New York firm Eastman and Eastman. A three-to-one battle shaped
up. Apple was foundering, and the imminent takeover of the Beatles’ first
management company, NEMS (which deducted 25 percent of the band’s
income before sending the rest on to Apple, where the income was further
diminished), intensified the need to act quickly. Klein and the Eastmans
assumed different duties – business manager and general counsel of Apple,
respectively14 – to fend off the Beatles’ financial foes, but in the end the
Beatles lost their bid for NEMS.
Klein was undeterred. A campaign of intimidation helped him gain
some concessions from Triumph Investment Trust, victor in the NEMS
contest. More wrangling remained over Dick James’s sale of his 23 percent
share (compared to the Beatles’ 31 percent) of Northern Songs, the Beatles’
publishing company, to Associated Television Corporation (ATV), which,
commanding 35 percent, moved to gain majority share in the company,
in effect foreclosing the Beatles’ chance to control their own music. Klein
came close to beating ATV until an off-color remark by John, leveled at the
businessmen besieging the band, helped to send Klein’s allies to ATV’s side,
thereby scotching weeks of negotiation and clinching the Beatles’ loss of
their own profitable songbook.15
Klein’s management contract was signed in early May – three for, one
(Paul) against: enough, however, to put Klein in charge of Apple. He pro-
ceeded to purge the offices and operations at 3 Savile Row of all excess.
No one was safe from the New Yorker’s swift, sharp axe. Despite turmoil
at Apple that would last well into the next year, the four Beatles, in addi-
tion to doing solo, session, and production work with new and established
names, made sporadic group-related visits to the studio. According to Mark
Lewisohn’s log for April and May,16 they nailed Harrison’s ferocious B side
“Old Brown Shoe” and hammered out arrangements for some songs to be
perfected within the next few months on Abbey Road. Distraction and ran-
cor notwithstanding, the Fab Four’s impetus to create was not exhausted;
their genius was yet to reach full flood.
Klein persevered. He was determined to renegotiate contracts with EMI
and Capitol Records, largely, observers inclined to cynicism would note, to
collect a 20 percent commission per the contract signed on May 8 by all
the Beatles save Paul (insisting 15 percent was reasonable, he marveled that
his bandmates “were completely besotted with this guy”).17 By September
130 Steve Hamelman
1969, with a majority holding of Northern Songs now in ATV’s grasp, the
indefatigable manager had delivered on his promise to rid Apple Corps of
deadbeats and cost overruns. Moreover, he had pressured Capitol Records
in North America to raise his clients’ royalties to a dazzling 25 percent of
retail.18 Ironically, on the September day that the Beatles gathered to sign the
sweet new deal, Lennon broke up the band. With the Capitol coup barely in
place and another assault on ATV in the works, Klein advised the boys that
leaking news of their split would weaken his bargaining position against
legal teams conspiring to milk every last shilling out of rock music’s biggest
cash cow. The Beatles complied with the cover-up until Paul, enraged by
the band’s demand that he postpone the April 1970 release of McCartney
in favor of Let It Be, forged ahead with the first solo Beatle masterpiece,
beating out George’s All Things Must Pass and John’s Plastic Ono Band by
seven and eight months, respectively.19
The art of making music

No matter how battered and bruised by the collapse of empire, image, and
friendship, the band limped toward death singing like the swans of ancient
fable, sweetly, beautifully, of their own demise. “There’s no success like
failure,” Bob Dylan had sung in 1965, “and failure’s no success at all” –
unless you were the Beatles. Unimaginably gifted, they wrested marvelous
songs from the jaws of their abject failure as friends and business partners.
As musicians, each one channeled the negativity needed to break free from
what had become a claustrophobic collective into music as fine as anything
else recorded in rock history.
In late 1968, the Beatles decided to make a record stripped of artifice
and technical trickery. Psychedelia and baroque pop were fast becoming
obsolete.20 Roots-based records were popping up all around them – Dylan’s
John Wesley Harding (1967), the Rolling Stones’ Beggars Banquet (1968),
the Byrds’ Sweetheart of the Rodeo (1969; the Byrds had already covered
Goffin-King’s “Goin’ Back” in 1968), Fairport Convention’s Liege and Lief
(1969), and, of most interest to George Harrison (in November 1968 he had
jammed with the Band and Dylan in upstate New York), the Band’s Music
from Big Pink and The Band (1968, 1969).
Between January 2 and 31, 1969, first at Twickenham Studios and then
at Apple’s basement studio, the Beatles taped scores of covers (mostly tunes
played in their formative years in Liverpool and Hamburg) and multiple
takes of a few dozen originals. Twelve of these cuts would see life fifteen
months later on Let It Be. So checkered were the recording and production
of this simultaneously penultimate (second-to-last recorded) and ultimate

(last released) album that Let It Be sounds both scrappy and scrapped.
Beset by “old hostilities,” the men creating it were now, according to Mark
Lewisohn, “just a tired, jaded rock group going through the motions.”21
Lennon later confided: “We couldn’t get into it. And we put down a few
tracks and nobody was in it at all . . . it just was a dreadful, dreadful feeling
in Twickenham.”22
And yet something clicked when push came to shove. In Tim Riley’s
view, Let It Be’s
patched history looks worse on paper than it sounds on vinyl. The band’s
mood is more centered than it is on the “White Album,” and sharing the
formulative process of writing with their audience is open and intriguing;
Let It Be doesn’t play parodic games or manipulate images of public identity.
Beneath Spector’s uninspired textures a group is at work, and . . . the Beatles’
distinctive joy in playing together remains palpable.23
Backing up this view is the testimony of several members of the film crew
who found the sessions lively and fun.24 The tapes also reveal plenty of
rip-’em-up takes punctuated by jokes and laughter. Still, a tentative air
hangs over Let It Be, a malaise of mismatched motives, a haggard non-
chalance. Keeping in mind the gigantic inventory of bootlegs derived from
unreleased material, a huge cache of stolen session tapes recovered in
2003, and 2003’s revised version of the record, Let It Be . . . Naked, Steve
Matteo correctly avers that Let It Be “remains an inconclusive and unfinished
work.”25
The album would have been even more “unfinished” had the band not
deserted Twickenham for the warmer confines of Apple Studios on January
15. First, however, there was an inconvenient wrinkle regarding machin-
ery. Apple Corps employee “Magic” Alex Mardas was a self-proclaimed
electronics wizard who had persuaded the band to bankroll a seventy-
two-track recording console encased in a state-of-the-art studio housed in
Apple’s basement. Upon first inspection, George Martin declared Mardas’s
console of sixteen unworkable channels a disaster, on a par with the badly
wired and baffled room, and had it torn out at once, hauling in gear from
EMI. Things got even better when, thanks to George Harrison’s initiative,
the band hooked the services of veteran rhythm and blues keyboardist Billy
Preston. He began jamming with the band on the afternoon of January
22, their first day back to Get Back. Improvement in mood and music was
immediate partly because the Beatles behaved well for their guest but also
because the stress-inducing plan to cap off the rehearsals with a live show,
either at London’s Roundhouse Theatre, a Tunisian amphitheater, a stretch
132 Steve Hamelman
of the Sahara Desert, or on the deck of a ship, was ditched. Instead, the band
brought it all back home: on January 30, the Beatles (with Billy Preston)
put on a forty-two-minute show, their last ever, in front of about twenty
technicians, associates, and friends on the rooftop of 3 Savile Row.
Sound engineer Glyn Johns’s work on Get Back began in earnest in
March when Paul and John, burdening Johns with thirty hours of live and
studio performance, instructed him to make an album. This left John and
Yoko free to play the part of peace diplomats at two “bed-ins” with musical
accompaniment, most famously June’s “Give Peace a Chance,” taped in a
Montreal hotel with bedside celebrities chiming in. The couple also gave the
world Unfinished Music, No. 2: Life with the Lions on the same day, May 9, that
George released his meditations on the Moog synthesizer, Electronic Sound –
the only two disks issued on Apple’s experimental imprint Zapple. While
John and Yoko indulged in feedback, sound effects, and random frequencies,
and George explored the weird beauty of first-generation electronica, Ringo
had been filming The Magic Christian from March to May. Paul’s portfolio
in 1969 lists producing, playing, and/or writing for Jackie Lomax, Mary
Hopkin, and Steve Miller (drums, bass, vocal on Miller’s “My Dark Hour”
in May 1969).
For the band proper, the spring’s main commercial product was not the
album Get Back but the single “Get Back”/“Don’t Let Me Down” (April
11) – Paul’s apostrophe to John, nudging him to return to the Beatles’ nest,
and John’s apostrophe to Yoko and/or some other addiction construed
as first love and last.26 On another day in April, Lennon and McCartney
buried their hatchets to bang out John’s narrative of his marital adventures,
“The Ballad of John and Yoko,” paired with “Old Brown Shoe” for release
on May 30. Eager to tape the A side even though Ringo and George were
unavailable, John played guitars while Paul handled drums, bass, piano, and
shakers. Listeners spellbound by this “ballad’s” propulsion, singalongability,
and audacity might find it hard to fathom that for months John and Paul
had been fighting a legal and musical war.27 The manic shuffle “Old Brown
Shoe,” as well, showed the whole band in blistering form, with Paul’s slithery
bass triplets triggering Ringo’s rolls and George’s slide-lines, the smoking
groove bolstered by Paul’s syncopated piano and George’s lethal vocal about
“escaping from this zoo” of duality through the power of love.
Abbey Road
May and June came and went. Despite having a cover photograph (later
used on The Beatles 1967–1970), there was still no consensus on Get Back
except that it was not good enough to go out. The Beatles did, however,
retain enough common sense and self-worth to rally behind McCartney’s
idea that, with George Martin back where he once belonged at the producer’s
helm, the Beatles should make one more album. Martin, believing Get Back
had done in the Beatles, was taken aback by the proposal but agreed to it
“only if you [the band] let me produce it the way we used to.”28 Martin
was especially concerned about John. At this juncture Lennon may have
been at a personal low, but he was game for one last masterpiece, as were
the others.29 And so, reviving thirteen originals from the January sessions
that were not in the can for the future Let It Be, and conjuring up killer
cuts like “Come Together” and “Here Comes the Sun,” the Beatles worked
throughout July and August on 1969’s topping achievement.
Martin’s condition notwithstanding, there was drama. John arrived,
with Yoko in tow, on July 9, nine days late because of a car crash requiring
hospitalization in Scotland. To everyone’s astonishment, a big bed for Yoko,
convalescent and pregnant, was installed in the studio, a microphone within
her reach. Stifling their exasperation at this spectacle, the other Fabs plugged
on. The level of their collegiality has been the subject of debate ever since.
At one extreme is Ian MacDonald’s harsh verdict: “Basically a set of solo
performances, Abbey Road was largely put together by the group in isolation
from one another and in an atmosphere veering from cold tolerance to
childish violence. Lennon twice argued savagely with McCartney, at one
point taking a less-than-peaceful swing at his wife Linda.”30 Yet George
Martin testified that “everybody worked frightfully well.”31
The truth lies somewhere within the slender crack that divides thesis
and antithesis. Abbey Road, after all, is a synthesis of opposites, the mystery
of dialectics solved in sound: John’s rock aggression offset by Paul’s pop
suavity; George’s transcendent sensibility grounded by Ringo’s earthy tom-
tom rolls;32 the band’s impending disintegration veiled by its temporary and
tentative unity; the miscellany of self-standing numbers (John’s preference)
on side one mirrored by the suite-like medleys (Paul’s innovation, resisted
by John) on side two – side one ending with Lennon’s long, rhythmically
intricate, gut-wrenching confession “I Want You (She’s So Heavy)” cut short
in the midst of its consummation into pure white whoosh, and side two
ending with McCartney’s acoustic bagatelle “Her Majesty” cut short in the
midst of its irreverent poke at England’s queen.
To say the album’s kick-off cut, “Come Together,” is derivative because
Timothy Leary coined the title’s phrase for a political campaign and Chuck
Berry spawned the riff and opening line is like saying Shakespeare’s Hamlet
is derivative because the Bard reconceived an earlier Hamlet by Thomas
Kyd. “Come Together” leaves any debts to Leary and Berry far behind.
Boasting the funkiest rhythm track in the entire Fab catalogue, the tune’s
surreal lyrics burst with images – “He got joo-joo eyeball,” “Hold you in
his armchair you can feel his disease” – that tease listeners with glimpses
into the composer’s narcotic (“shoot me”) and erotic (“come together,”
134 Steve Hamelman
“Ono sideboard”) dysfunctionalism. But that the lyrics say nothing definite
about either of these dysfunctions is one of the tune’s strengths. The Beatles’
resident revolutionary implies in this tour de poetry and groove that inter-
pretation is the most democratic privilege of all. With John bouncing back
from his springtime peevishness, Paul and Ringo respond by laying it down
for his rock and roll word-gumbo. Ringo delivers dead on time through the
blend of hi-hat/snare triplets at the top of each verse with, everywhere else, a
four-beat tom/snare tattoo anchored by a dry bass drum figure. Humming
between high and low registers, Paul’s bass coils around John’s voice like a
vine encircling a swaying limb in a steamy swamp.33
In “Come Together,” Paul may have set a new high for rock bass playing;
the next song, “Something,” meets if not exceeds that high. Dating back
to late 1968, Harrison’s “Something,” tinkered with in January and April,
was brought to fruition in mid-July. Universally celebrated as a masterpiece
commensurate with the best Lennon-McCartney compositions, it is worth
noting, as most sources do, that Frank Sinatra called “Something” the
greatest love song in half a century. The real value of this compliment,
noted by no one, lies in the fact that Sinatra had once called rock and
roll “the most brutal, ugly, desperate, vicious form of expression it has
been my misfortune to hear.”34 And “Something” is rock and roll: behind
Paul’s contrapuntal bass lines (too busy, allegedly, for George) and George’s
gorgeous guitar/vocal are Ringo’s immovable backbeat and varied tom-tom
fills, as urgent as anything he pounded out for spectators in the Cavern or
Star Club.
Next up, “Maxwell’s Silver Hammer,” Paul’s so-called “vaudeville” num-
ber, is frequently maligned; yet is it all that different from “Your Mother
Should Know” or “When I’m Sixty-Four”?35 To some ears, this silly little
tale about Joan, Teacher, Judge, and Maxwell defines McCartney’s funda-
mental triteness; to other ears, the song is as delightful, and surely no more
silly, than Ringo’s “Octopus’s Garden,” which incorporates sound effects
with equally charming results. Never mentioned is that dynamically, each
of these numbers, separated by Paul’s 12/8 pop-blues “Oh! Darling” (more
Fats Domino style than John Lennon substance), makes sense placed, as
some songs had to be, within the long shadow of gravity and grace cast
by “Come Together” and “Something,” and in advance of Abbey Road ’s
longest and only harrowing number, “I Want You (She’s So Heavy).” At
the very least, Paul’s tune provides comic relief while Ringo’s tune, despite
being the utopian fantasy he imagined after quitting the Beatles for a week
or two in 1968, need not engage listeners on anything resembling a serious
personal level. The fact that children invariably love both songs says much
about their underrated qualities.
On the other hand, children would likely be upset by the varying time
signatures and scorching lyrics of “I Want You (She’s So Heavy).” On this
eight-minute cry of love, John Lennon no longer screens his insecurity
behind the pop art of “I’m a Loser” or “Help!”, no longer feels compelled to
“hide his love away,” instead distilling his agony into twelve pleading words
set to a manic-depressive score. Paul’s bass, prominent again, both hooks
into and tugs away from melody and groove; Ringo tumbles around his new
calfskin tom heads and jabs into the ride cymbal’s bell; George feeds starving
John sweet and sharp guitar lines; Billy Preston unleashes cascading organ
chords; and John does the rest – guitars, voice, and Moog synthesizer with
wind generator, cranked louder and louder during the song’s two-minute
run up to, and off, the cliff of silence.36
And that was how Abbey Road was going to end until August 20, the
last time all four Beatles were together in a studio. On that fateful day
the side-two medleys previously recorded were synchronized into place.
Lennon had lobbied against the medley concept, to no avail. “Everybody
praises the album so much,” he said eleven years later, “but none of the
songs had anything to do with each other, no thread at all, only the fact that
we stuck them together.”37 One could argue, however, that beautiful and
consistent sound is a thread unto itself. There is also the fact that at least
three songs – “Here Comes the Sun,” “You Never Give Me Your Money”
(only “your funny paper,” moans Paul, buried in legal documents), and
“Carry That Weight” – echo the business battles of the spring. Another
one, the lush “Sun King,” revisits “Here Comes the Sun,” while “Golden
Slumbers,” Paul’s collaboration with Elizabethan lyricist Thomas Dekker
(Paul stumbled upon the sheet music of Dekker’s “Golden Slumbers” at the
piano at his father’s house), segues organically into “Carry That Weight,”
which itself quotes “You Never Give Me Your Money,” whose theme of
freedom (“Oh that magic feeling, nowhere to go”) and escape (“Soon we’ll
be away from here, / Step on the gas and wipe that tear away”) reconnects
it to the vernal optimism of “Here Comes the Sun.” These tunes are from
the same weave, the same cloth, and, contra Lennon, the second side’s other
numbers are neither more nor less interrelated than the songs on either side
of, say, Help! or Beatles for Sale.
The provenance of “Here Comes the Sun,” side one’s opener, is well
documented. George Harrison in Eric Clapton’s garden relaxing from the
strain of business, guitar in hand, penned a joyful tune, his second instant
classic on Abbey Road. Foreshadowing seventies mellow rock but without
the simpering qualities of its average practitioner, “Here Comes the Sun”
interweaves delicate guitars with mellifluous Moog flourishes, catchy verses,
chorus, and bridge, and, again, Ringo’s tom-rich coloration. The uniqueness
136 Steve Hamelman
of John’s “Because” lies in, first, the Beethoven-inspired melody (a variation

on the “Moonlight” sonata) plucked by George Martin on harpsichord
and, second, the “nine-man choir”38 comprising John, Paul, and George,
triply overdubbed. EMI sound engineer Geoff Emerick cites “Because”
as an example of group harmony at the Abbey Road sessions,39 as was
the recording of the serene “Sun King” and its mate, the swaying “Mean
Mr. Mustard”: “They pulled it off – it really was a group effort, and all four
Beatles played with energy and enthusiasm, each making his own unique
contribution to the sound and arrangement.”40
Resurrected from the January sessions, “Polythene Pam,” modeled partly
on a Fab fan from days of yore, pulses madly, as if the mere memory of this
“attractively built” girl could make male hormones rage; and “She Came
In Through the Bathroom Window,” from 1968, at once chugs, thanks to
Ringo’s percussive attack, and glides, thanks to the call-response of Paul’s
chiming guitar, through three verses filled with clever phrases (“But now
she sucks her thumb and wanders / By the banks of her own lagoon”)
and two choruses. Attaining climax, these two erotic rockers leave “Golden
Slumbers” and “Carry That Weight” to march toward the “The End,” which
encompasses the polarity at the heart of the Beatles: rock and roll earthiness
and spiritual vision. Ringo’s first and last drum solo (fifteen seconds long,
cymbal-less) leads up to a white-hot guitar battle. Emerick again: “For the
hour or so that it took them to play those solos, all the bad blood, all the
fighting, all the crap that had gone down between the three former friends
was forgotten. John, Paul, and George looked like they had gone back in
time, like they were kids again, playing together for the sheer enjoyment of
it.”41 “The End” ends with a benediction (“And in the end, the love you
take / Is equal to the love you make”) sung sweetly and sincerely to a cushion
of strings. The Beatles end the record, their career in fact, with a couplet
worthy of Shakespeare.
But then Abbey Road ends a second time. “Her Majesty” is a twenty-
three second fragment plucked from between “Mean Mr. Mustard” and
“Polythene Pam.” Paul had ordered the fragment to be thrown away; an
engineer bound by EMI policy instead spliced it at the end of the master
tape. Upon hearing “Her Majesty” jump out unexpectedly after a twenty-
second silence following “The End,” Paul was delighted, and thus “Her
Majesty” stayed put. Meaning nothing, it says everything about the Beatles’
irreverence, sense of timing, sense of scale, trust in accident, and faith in
the listener to get the joke at the end of a career-long hard day’s night.
Let It Be
Between the release of Abbey Road in September 1969 and the release of
Let It Be in May 1970, there were two singles by the Plastic Ono Band
and two by the Beatles. October’s “Cold Turkey” (cut by Lennon, Ono,
Starr, Eric Clapton, and Klaus Voormann) depicted Lennon’s struggle with
heroin withdrawal.42 In January 1970, Lennon, now backed by Harrison,
Preston, Voormann, and Alan White, with Phil Spector producing, cranked
out “Instant Karma.” “Something”/“Come Together” was issued in October
1969, and “Let It Be” came out in March 1970, backed with the splendid
lounge act parody that had been kicking around since 1967, “You Know My
Name (Look Up the Number).”
Not until early January 1970 did the band return to Get Back, now
named Let It Be, the soundtrack for the film that would open in New York
City on May 13, 1970. By this time Paul was secretly recording his first solo
album under everyone’s noses and Ringo was wrapping up Sentimental
Journey. Unhappy with Glyn Johns’s latest labors on Let It Be, John and
George hired Phil Spector to finish the album once and for all. Released on
May 8, Let It Be was a mishmash of the back to basics aesthetic and Spec-
tor’s Wall of Sound mannerisms. It retained, as links between tunes, snip-
pets of dialogue cobbled together by Johns from the studio sessions and
rooftop concert. In the space of two weeks Spector remixed, re-edited,
and re-sequenced the album. Before it was pressed and distributed, Paul
objected – too late to do any good – to the orchestral and choral embellish-
ments that Spector, without the composer’s permission, had foisted upon
“The Long and Winding Road.” Also scored for orchestra were “Across
the Universe,” a favorite Lennon track bearing the scars of previous studio
manipulations, and “I Me Mine,” originally ninety-four seconds in length,
almost doubled through Spector’s ingenuity, and then made even bigger
with strings and brass. But this was only the beginning of the criticism.
Lennon and Harrison, both hiring Spector to produce their initial post-
Beatles work, may have been able to stomach his meddlings, but McCartney
was disgusted, as were legions of critics and fans.
Blaming Spector for ruining Let It Be is like blaming Yoko for breaking
up the Beatles. Both figures are default scapegoats for those who cannot
accept certain realities of life or art. Granted, Spector gussied up Paul’s
greatest, starkest study of nostalgia, “The Long and Winding Road,” yet
that Spectorized song did go to number one in America, and “Let It Be”
also topped the charts. As John Lennon noted after the fact, albeit with
some exaggeration, the producer “was given the shittiest load of badly
recorded shit with a lousy feeling to it ever, and he made something out of
it. He did a great job.”43 Indeed, with the passage of time, the New Musical
Express’s barb in 1970 that Let It Be was “a cheapskate epitaph, a card-
board tombstone, a sad and tatty end”44 is hard to countenance. Had the
reviewer, Alan Smith, complained that the record was tentative, arbitrarily
sequenced, rough around the edges, and somewhat eccentrically produced,
138 Steve Hamelman
he would have been closer to the truth, which is that Let It Be was (and
is) indeed all those things – but much more too. It is a posthumous col-
lection of delectable and nourishing scraps tossed away from the table by
four banqueters tired of pretending to enjoy one another’s company at a
gloomy, dyspeptic feast. Cheapskate? No: the Beatles fried their nerves in
its making. Cardboard? Not even close: it croons, howls, chirps, screams,
laughs, cries, whispers, and rocks. Tatty? Hardly: “Let It Be,” “The Long
and Winding Road,” and “Get Back,” the global hits, sound more philo-
sophical than tatty, and these songs are not necessarily the album’s high
points.
In McCartney’s “Two of Us,” George’s wish that the Beatles could make
music on the order of the Band is realized. In a manner that can only be
called “laid back” but without the term’s pejorative shading, Paul pulls off
the neat trick of writing a billet doux to Linda in the verse and an open
letter to John in the six-bar bridge. Paul sings of “chasing paper, getting
nowhere” with Linda, and to John he reflects, “You and I have memories,
longer than the road that stretches out ahead.” As he and “you” make their
“way back home,” Paul posits another identity for “you”: every member
of the audience. “Goodbye,” the sotto-spoken last word in the fade-out,
sets the valedictory mood for the rest of the album, just as it embraces
with typical Beatles generosity every fan who has traveled so far for so
many years with the band. We are all on the same road home somewhere,
suggests Paul, twisting nostalgia into a sentiment close to happy closure and
hope.
The entropy oozing out of the three-beat measures of “Dig a Pony”
imparts a mixture of charm and puzzlement to what creeps along like a
waltz tuned to a junkie’s verbal ramble – until the junkie “comes clean,”
as it were, crying out, “All I want is you / Everything has got to be just like
you want it to.” Lines such as “You can syndicate any boat you row,” or his
swipe at the Rolling Stones, “I roll a stoney, / Well, you can imitate everyone
you know,” are as intriguing as any ever concocted by Lennon, which is not
to suggest they can lay claim to coherence. In the next song, however, they
can. “Across the Universe” finds Spector taking the basic elements (John’s
voice and guitar) from a version taped in February 1968 and drenching
them in strings and female chorale. But the ballad survives this makeover
because its main draw is some of John’s best poetry, sung without irony or
agitation, rare for Lennon in 1969. “Images of broken light . . . dance before
me like a million eyes,” “Limitless undying love . . . shines around me like a
million suns,” he sings, two poignant verses among many rounded out by
the refrain “Nothing’s going to change my world.”
Next, “I Me Mine” has George licking the wounds of ego (“All through the
day, I me mine”) in a smart little rocker employing burning guitars, full-bore
drums, and urgent organ in a face-off between 12/8 time and a head-blasting
shuffle. While the informal – some would say slipshod – nature of the Let It
Be enterprise is evoked in the snatches of dialogue heard between most of
the album’s twelve tunes, “Dig It” and “Maggie May” are other benchmarks
of the record’s poetics of improvisation. “Maggie May” conjures up the
unusual image of the Beatles as buskers. In Liverpudlian dialect, John and
Paul slap out this forty-second portrait of a street-crawler. At forty-nine
seconds, “Dig It” was whittled down from a twelve-minute jam churning
beneath and around Lennon’s associative wordplay.45 Separating these two
exempla of extemporaneity is the majestic “Let It Be.”46 To summon the
courage to push past the collapse of his band, which happened to be the
greatest in history, and to muster the strength needed to keep his head held
high as lawyers and best friend John Lennon closed in on him tooth and
claw, Paul invoked for guidance the spirit of his long-deceased mother Mary
McCartney. Glorious melody notwithstanding, the miracle of “Let It Be” is
that it lacks self-pity or cheap sentiment. “I” is the only pronoun Paul has at
his disposal; but the “I” in the opening clause – “When I find myself in times
of trouble” – identifies much more than he himself; it is the universal “I”
channeled through the voice of the Beatle most sympathetic to the suffering
of his fellow human beings. This is why “Let It Be” is not a pity-party
for Paul McCartney. He knows that to “let it be” is to “let go,” to accept
every manifestation and facet of loss, and, as Emily Dickinson suggested,
to do that is the hardest thing a person ever has to do.47 At once simple
and profound, comparable to Mozart’s “Sonata Facile” or a late painting
by Mark Rothko, “Let It Be” is both medium and message of courage and
compassion.
Side two more than holds its own with such sublimity. “I’ve Got a
Feeling” and “One After 909” (rooftop concert takes) are sublime after their
own fashion. The first number is a conflation of two half-songs, one each
by John and Paul (whose lead vocal returns him, for sheer intensity, to “Hey
Jude” territory), laced together with Harrison guitar lines that prove he
was not afraid of getting back to rock and roll. “One After 909,” composed
by two pre-Beatle teens in 1957, is another minor miracle: Paul’s bad-boy
bass pumps time, dallying with Preston’s electric piano and Harrison’s
Telecaster. George fills the holes between the singers’ grunts and shouts
with needle-like licks, and his sixteen-bar lead rips holes in the physics of
sound. The vocals of John and Paul rip too, as if they were back shredding
their throats in front of drunken sailors in the fifth set on a Saturday night in
Hamburg.
“The Long and Winding Road” retards the impending end, as does
the surpassingly ironic “For You Blue,” a twelve-bar blues, one of the few
recorded by the Fabs. But finally Get Back / Let It Be reaches its arbitrary
140 Steve Hamelman
end. Beginning life as an improvisation on January 14, 1969, “Get Back”

was finished by the 26th of that month and later underwent two surgeries,
one that added a fade-out coda to the single version, and one, the album
version, that tacked on John’s quip at the end of the rooftop concert where
he expresses hope that the group “passed the audition.” Ringo’s snare and
bass nail down the tune’s anapestic rhythm, John and Billy Preston trade
funky eight-bar solos, and Paul, as if to memorialize his latter-day role as
coach, camp-director, manager, and headmaster of the band, does not ask
but tells a certain Jo Jo to “get back to where you once belonged.” If it is easy
to see John in Jo Jo, it is not easy to see “sweet Loretta Martin” in anyone
else in the Beatles’ camp. It is wise, therefore, not to read too much into
Paul at his inconsequential best: “All the girls around her say she’s got it
coming, / But she gets it while she can.”
Let It Be . . . Naked
The epilogue to the saga of Let It Be is short but not particularly sweet. The
movie came and went in 1970; postmodern audiences have been denied a
DVD with restored footage, cleaned-up audio-visual, and extras. But Paul
was determined to undo wrongs done to the music itself. At last the world
would get the album the Beatles intended to make in January 1969.
Bearing the adjective “naked,” the resulting 2003 edition struck many
listeners as a lateral move at best. Absent from the remastered and re-
sequenced program are “Maggie May” and “Dig It.” Present is the fine
rooftop take of “Don’t Let Me Down.” The biggest change in the new
disc is the erasure of Phil Spector’s orchestration from “The Long and
Winding Road,” “I Me Mine,” and “Across the Universe,” and of Glyn Johns’s
between-song banterings. In striking at the enemy (Spector) with the Pro-
Tools technology at their command, however, McCartney’s production team
also laid low the Beatles’ less culpable, less offensive ally (Johns – although
to be fair, Spector did splice much of the convivial chatter into the 1970
album). With the audio verité dimension wiped clean, Let It Be . . . Naked
comes to the consumer nestled in digital excelsior. Yes, the music is punchier,
with increased clarity, but more than a trifle dry, listless, and, worst of all,
redundant. Definitive versions of “The Long and Winding Road” and “I
Me Mine” grace 1996’s Anthology 3, and nothing could surpass the 1970
masters of “One After 909,” “I’ve Got a Feeling,” “Two of Us,” and “Get
Back.” Consequently, fans long familiar with the slap-happiness of “Maggie
May,” the persiflage of John and Paul, and the idiosyncrasies of Phil Spector
may be disconcerted by Naked’s relative sterility.
A step ahead must be measured by the deficiencies that the past factors
into the present. Instead of restoring truth extracted from miles of tape used
in January 1969, Let It Be . . . Naked reinforces a myth of closure. Let It Be is
far from done. And though we know it never can be complete, we do expect
the final attempt at a final artifact to present a much bigger chunk of the
reams of music rehearsed in January 1969, much more dialogue,48 some
bonus video footage, maybe even a booklet of plates from Ethan Russell’s
book of photographs packaged with the original LP. Until some, most, or
all of these things can be effected by any creative forces left at Apple/EMI,
Beatle-lovers will have to let it – their dream for an album at peace with its
initial potential – be.
8 Apple Records
bruce spizer
We’ve got this thing called Apple, which is going to be records, films, and electronics, which all tie
up. john lennon
In mid-May 1968, John Lennon and Paul McCartney flew to New York
to announce the Beatles’ latest venture, Apple. After holding interviews in
their hotel suite with Time, Newsweek, Business Week, and Forbes magazines
and conducting a press conference, the two Beatles appeared on NBC-TV’s
Tonight Show on May 14. While viewers may have naı̈vely hoped the pair
would perform, John and Paul were there to talk business.
John explained that their accountant had told them that they could give
their money to the government or do something with it. “So we decided to
play businessmen for a bit, because we’ve got to run our own affairs now.
So we’ve got this thing called Apple, which is going to be records, films, and
electronics, which all tie up. And to make a sort of an umbrella so people
who want to make films about . . . grass . . . don’t have to get on their knees
in an office, you know, begging for a break. We’ll try and do it like that.
That’s the idea. I mean we’ll find out what happens, but that’s what we’re
trying to do.”
Lennon’s remarks summarize how Apple came about and why the Beat-
les were becoming businessmen. The company was not created for Utopian
reasons. It was formed to shelter the Beatles’ sizable income from British
taxes. Dating back to the spring of 1967, the Beatles had been meeting reg-
ularly with their advisers to discuss ways of spending their money to defer
immediate recognition of income. Although initially involved in common
tax shelters such as real estate, the group rejected additional investments in
traditional businesses before entering into an area suggested by Paul –
music publishing. McCartney, who had received several hefty royalty
checks generated by the numerous performances of songs in the Lennon-
McCartney catalog, was well aware of the money to be made in publishing
hit songs. He and the other Beatles envisioned the development of new song-
writing talent while increasing their wealth. With their attention shifting
away from traditional investments, it was only natural for their plans to
include other areas that interested them, such as music, film, and electron-
ics. As for the Beatles running their own affairs, this was necessitated by the
[142] death of manager Brian Epstein in August, 1967.
143 Apple Records
John and Paul told the TV audience what their Apple company planned
to do. It was to be a place where people with talent could go, rather than
begging for a break from big business. Paul explained: “Big companies are
so big that if you’re little and good it takes you like sixty years to make
it. And so people miss out on these little good people.” John provided a
metaphor based on fellow Beatle George Harrison saying he was “sick of
being told to keep out of the park.” According to Lennon, “That’s what it’s
all about, you know. We’re trying to make a park for people to come in and
do what they want.” So that explained what the Beatles were trying to do.
It wouldn’t take long for the Beatles to “find out what happens.” But on
that idealistic evening in May 1968, it sounded like a noble venture that the
Beatles could pull off. After all, they were the Beatles.
The first public appearance of the Apple name had come nearly one
year earlier, in June 1967, with the release of Sgt. Pepper’s Lonely Hearts
Club Band. The back of the album’s elaborate jacket contains the following
credit: “Cover by MC Productions and The Apple.” This obscure reference
went largely unnoticed, giving no hint of what the Beatles were up to or
that they would soon be operating as Apple.
The Apple name resurfaced five months later in November, 1967, with
Magical Mystery Tour. An Apple logo, surrounded by the phrase “apple
presents,” appears above the group’s name on the inside gatefold covers to
the British EP and the American album. Once again, fans were left in the
dark about the meaning of the Apple.
The Magical Mystery Tour film, which first appeared on December 26,
1967, on the BBC, was the first Apple project. The movie was shot in seg-
ments without the benefit of a script during September through November
1967. Although the film was brutally panned by the critics and described at
the time as the Beatles’ first major failure, it is now regarded as an interesting
period piece depicting the freewheeling spirit of the sixties.
Rather than bringing in experienced businessmen, the Beatles hired
trusted friends to run Apple. Long-time Beatles road manager Neil Aspinall
was named managing director. Alistair Taylor, who had been involved in
the group’s day-to-day logistics as an assistant to manager Brian Epstein,
was brought in to serve as Apple’s general manager. Another former Epstein
employee, Terry Doran, was hired to head Apple Music Publishing.
The first songwriter signed to Apple Music Publishing was George
Alexander. He and three other musicians formed a band, which John Lennon
named Grapefruit in recognition of a poetry book by Yoko Ono. As Apple
had not yet established its record division at that time, the group had to
look elsewhere to obtain a recording contract, signing with EMI’s Stateside
subsidiary in the UK and Equinox in the USA. Although the Beatles par-
ticipated in the group’s promotion, Grapefruit failed to make an impact in
144 Bruce Spizer
either market, being limited to a number twenty-one British hit with its
debut single, Dear Delilah. Apple Music Publishing signed other songwrit-
ers, including Jackie Lomax, who would soon become an Apple recording
artist.
The Beatles’ venture into electronics was entrusted to a twenty-seven-
year-old Greek television repairman, Alexis Mardas. John was impressed
by the self-proclaimed electronic genius and madcap inventor, naming him
“Magic Alex.” He was constantly coming up with ideas, though few of his
projects ever proved practical. Magic Alex claimed he could invent a force
field that would cause a house to hover above the ground. He demonstrated
wallpaper that could serve as a stereo system’s speakers. He created a device
that enabled a person to reach another person by phone merely by saying the
individual’s name. This was an early form of voice-recognition technology.
Although Apple Electronics patented eight of his inventions, none ever went
into production.
The Beatles’ faith in Magic Alex led the group to have him design what
was to be the ultimate recording studio. It was to have a seventy-two-track
recorder at a time when sixteen tracks was state of the art, with most modern
studios being limited to eight. When the Beatles first attempted to use his
studio in the basement of their Apple headquarters, they found it to be
a total disaster and had to bring in a mobile recording unit from EMI
Studios.
Apple also ventured briefly into the retail clothing business by opening
up a boutique on Baker Street. The bulk of the clothing was designed by a trio
of Dutch fashion designers who joined up with a British publicist and called
themselves The Fool. The boutique was run without any business controls,
enabling employees to raid the cash registers. Customers came by to look
at the beautiful clothes and the beautiful people, browse, and shoplift. The
fashion designers’ freewheeling spirit and spending also contributed to
the store losing nearly half a million dollars (about £167,000) in its first six
months. The Beatles, realizing that they had been made fools of by The Fool,
shut the store down and invited the public to attend one last free-for-all
orgy of legal shoplifting.
Having set up film, publishing, electronics, and retail divisions, the
Beatles finally turned their attention to what they did best – making records.
Apple Records was set up with the same idealistic philosophy as the rest of
Apple. It would discover and develop new talent. The Beatles also hoped that
their musician friends would come to Apple when their existing contracts
with other labels expired.
Apple hired Ron Kass, an American who headed Liberty Records’ British
operations, as president of Apple Records. Paul McCartney brought in Peter
145 Apple Records
Asher, who was the brother of Paul’s former girlfriend Jane Asher, and had
gained fame in the mid-sixties as half of Peter and Gordon, to serve as
head of Apple’s A&R (artist and repertoire) department. His job was to
discover and develop recording artists for the label. His first major signing
was James Taylor. At the request of the Beatles, Capitol Records executive
Ken Mansfield was given the title of US manager of Apple Records.
Rather than hire an expensive conventional ad agency, Paul decided he
could fashion a campaign to launch Apple Records. His concept was to
show a one-man band who would be touted as an Apple success story. The
ad showed Alistair Taylor sitting on a stool with a bass drum strapped on
his back. He wore a harmonica around his neck and strummed a guitar.
He was surrounded by a microphone, tape recorder, washboard, and brass
instruments. The ad explained that the man had sent a tape, picture, and
letter to Apple. To drive home the point that his doing so paid off and to
encourage others to submit their music to Apple, the ad concluded with,
“This man now owns a Bentley!”
The ad ran in several music magazines and was distributed as a handbill
poster throughout London. Apple received over 400 tapes in two weeks
and hundreds more during the next few months. While this unique way
of searching for new talent fitted well within the free spirit of Apple, it
was not productive. According to Peter Asher, “None of it was much good
unfortunately. Out of the myriad of tapes we got in the mail, we didn’t sign
anyone.”
Because the Beatles were under contract to EMI and Capitol, the group
were unable to sign a recording agreement with their own company, Apple.
However, EMI and Capitol agreed to press the group’s records with Apple
labels. EMI and Capitol also entered into agreements to manufacture and
distribute Apple product.
The first four Apple singles were released simultaneously in late August
1968. In Britain, Apple prepared an elaborate press kit containing the discs,
pictures of the artists, bios, and descriptions of the music. It came in a
box titled “Our First Four,” and was distributed to British radio stations
and members of the press. In the USA, Capitol assembled a press kit with
equivalent but different-looking contents. It was housed in a glossy cream-
colored folder with a large green Apple logo on its front side. While Apple
in London hand-delivered copies of “Our First Four” to the Queen and the
Prime Minister, Capitol did not send a copy of the press kit to the White
House.
The main item of interest of the first four Apple releases was the new
Beatles single, “Hey Jude”/“Revolution,” which topped both the UK and
American charts for several weeks. “Hey Jude” was a glorious singalong by
146 Bruce Spizer
Paul that clocked in at seven minutes eleven seconds at a time when the
average pop tune was two to three minutes long. “Revolution” was an all-
out rocker with distorted guitars and relevant lyrics sung by John. Future
releases on Apple by the Beatles included the White Album, Get Back, Abbey
Road and Let It Be.
The other three initial releases epitomized the free spirit of Apple and its
quest to discover and develop talent. The artists ranged from an eighteen-
year-old female Welsh folksinger to a veteran Liverpool rocker and a band
founded in 1855.
Mary Hopkin was signed to Apple after supermodel Twiggy told Paul
McCartney of Hopkin’s talent shortly after the young folk singer appeared on
the British talent show Opportunity Knocks. For her debut single, McCartney
selected a Lithuanian folk song adopted by American Gene Raskin, “Those
Were the Days.” Paul produced the single, giving it an orchestral backing
that was bouncy, moving and nostalgic. Although its running time of five
minutes five seconds was well in excess of the length of other singles of its
day (except the new Beatles disc), the song topped the British charts and
peaked at number two in the States, unable to move past the Beatles’ “Hey
Jude.”
Jackie Lomax is a Liverpool native who sang lead and played bass in the
Undertakers, a group that had shared the bill with the Beatles in the early
sixties. After his group broke up, Lomax signed a management contract
with Brian Epstein and released a single under the name Lomax Alliance.
His first Apple single was produced by George Harrison, who wrote the
A side, “Sour Milk Sea.” The song was recorded in June 1968, with an
all-star cast featuring Lomax on lead vocals and rhythm guitar, Harrison
on rhythm guitar, Paul McCartney on bass, Ringo on drums, Eric Clapton
on lead guitar, Nicky Hopkin on keyboards, and Eddie Clayton on conga
drums. Although a great rock single, the disc was overshadowed by “Hey
Jude” and “Those Were the Days” and did not chart.
The Black Dyke Mills Band is a brass band formed in the village of
Queensbury, Yorkshire, England, in 1855. The group was sponsored by
John Foster and Sons, Ltd. In 1968, the group consisted of twenty-seven
members plus a percussion section. In 1967 they had won the National
Championship Band of Great Britain award for the seventh time since 1945.
Their single, which was produced by Paul, consisted of “Thingumybob,” a
theme song written by Paul for a TV show, and a brass band version of the
Beatles hit “Yellow Submarine.” The record baffled radio programmers and
did not chart.
The euphoria of setting up a record company initially prompted Paul to
take a very active role with Apple artists. In addition to participating in all
four of the label’s first releases, McCartney guided the career of Mary Hopkin
147 Apple Records
by selecting the songs for, and producing, her first album, Post Card, and
by writing and producing her follow-up single, “Goodbye.” He also played
bass and guitar on several of her songs. Paul further assisted Jackie Lomax
by producing his recording of the Coasters’ “Thumbin’ a Ride.” McCartney
was also very active in the early recordings of the pop rock band Badfinger.
He wrote, produced, and played piano on the hit “Come and Get It” and
co-produced two other songs, “Carry On Till Tomorrow” and “Rock of All
Ages,” also playing piano on the latter track. Paul played bass on James
Taylor’s first single, “Carolina in My Mind.”
After Allen Klein took over the company’s management in 1969, Paul
limited his involvement with Apple to the release of his own records. His
first solo album, McCartney, was one of the first rock albums to feature
a musician playing all of the instruments. After completing his second
album, Ram, Paul put together a new band, Wings, which included his wife,
Linda, on keyboards and vocals. Paul McCartney and Wings released several
successful singles and albums for Apple, including “My Love,” “Live and
Let Die” and “Band on the Run.”
Shortly after his return from the New York media blitz announcing Apple
to the world, John became involved with Yoko Ono. He took advantage of
Apple’s free spirit by releasing a series of experimental albums with Yoko,
including the notorious Unfinished Music No. 1: Two Virgins, which features
a black and white full frontal nude photograph of John and Yoko on its
cover. Beginning with the release of “Give Peace a Chance” in the summer
of 1969, John released a series of singles credited to the Plastic Ono Band.
The concept of the band was that it had no fixed membership. Apple’s press
agent, Derek Taylor, wrote: “The band may be the property of Apple, but it
also belongs to everyone because what it represents is freedom, freedom for
performers to be themselves, taking no heed of who they are or what they
look like or where they have been or what their music is supposed to be . . . It
could be anything.” Its ever-changing line-up would later include George
Harrison, Ringo Starr, Eric Clapton, Klaus Voormann, Nicky Hopkins, and
Jim Keltner.
John’s first true solo album, John Lennon/Plastic Ono Band, was a stark-
sounding collection of personal songs covering such difficult topics as the
pain of being abandoned by his father and mother, his mother’s death,
and his loss of faith in popular icons, including the Beatles. No artist has
every bared his soul more than John did. The teen angst of grunge music
pales by comparison. His second solo album, Imagine, was an easier listen.
Although the toughness was still present in some of the songs, there were
also themes of optimism and the exuberant joy of love. John described
it as “commercial with no compromise” and “Plastic Ono with chocolate
coating.” The album’s title track remains a classic call for world peace. His
148 Bruce Spizer
later solo work contained some great songs, but did not equal the brilliance
of the first two albums.
While the other Beatles often participated in recording sessions by Apple
artists, John did so only if the project involved Yoko. He produced or co-
produced her early recordings, played on many of the songs, and assembled
musicians such as Eric Clapton, Klaus Voormann, and Ringo Starr to play on
the tracks. Yoko became one of the more prolific Apple artists. In addition
to sharing five albums with John and having seven of her songs appear on
the B sides to Plastic Ono Band singles, she released four solo albums and
four solo singles.
Lennon was responsible for two very diverse signings by Apple. John
Tavener was a classical musician and composer. He recorded two albums
for the label, including 1970’s The Whale, which was recorded at the Church
of St. John the Evangelist in London. Ringo attended the sessions and
contributed voices and percussion. Lennon also gave thumbs up to a tape
by a band containing a reggae arrangement of his “Give Peace a Chance.”
The group, which was named the Hot Chocolate Band by Mavis Smith of
Apple’s press office, was led by Jamaican singer Errol Brown and Trinidadian
Tony Wilson. When their Apple single did not chart, the group left the label,
became associated with producer Mickie Most, shortened their name to Hot
Chocolate, and scored three top ten hits in America.
Shortly after John and Yoko moved to New York in late May 1971, they
ran into political activists Jerry Rubin and David Peel; the latter was also
a streetwise musician. John arranged for Peel to sign with Apple, and co-
produced, with Yoko, his album The Pope Smokes Dope. Through Peel, John
became familiar with Elephant’s Memory, a New York bar band that John
used to back him on his highly political album Some Time in New York City.
After completion of that album, John and Yoko produced an album by the
group for Apple.
George Harrison, who often had to fight to get the Beatles to record
his songs, enjoyed the freedom given to him under Apple. His soundtrack
recording for the film Wonderwall was one of the first projects developed
for Apple. Recorded in London, and Bombay, India, during November 1967
through January 1968, the album features both rock and Indian musicians.
Harrison made his score a “mini-anthology of Indian music” because he
“wanted to help turn the public on to Indian music.” In addition to Indian
chants, drones, and ragas, the album also contains rockers, majestic pop
songs, and cowboy music. It was one of the first albums released in the
genre now known as world music.
George’s second project for Apple was even more unconventional. Elec-
tronic Sound consists of two long selections of sounds generated by a Moog
synthesizer, an electronic keyboard instrument. One composition is full of
149 Apple Records
snapping and hissing sounds and wind and other noises. The other con-
tains wind sound effects, sustained notes, reverberating notes, and random
noises. The record posed the question, “If a Beatle released an album and
nobody played it, would it still make an electronic sound?” Harrison’s expe-
rience with the Moog synthesizer would lead to more practical applications
during the recording of the Beatles album Abbey Road.
After the Beatles broke up, George recorded four studio albums for
Apple. The first, All Things Must Pass, contains several songs that George
auditioned for the Beatles during the group’s January 1969 Get Back sessions.
The album topped the US charts for several weeks and peaked at number
four in the UK.
George produced several discs for Apple artists. In addition to writing
and producing Jackie Lomax’s first single, “Sour Milk Sea,” he produced
Lomax’s first album, Is This What You Want. After bringing in Billy Preston
to record with the Beatles during the Get Back sessions, Harrison arranged
for Apple to buy out Preston’s Capitol contract. He produced Preston’s
first album, That’s the Way God Planned It, which features a stellar cast of
musicians, including Harrison, Eric Clapton, Ginger Baker, Keith Richards,
Klaus Voormann, and Ringo. George co-produced Preston’s second Apple
LP, Encouraging Words, utilizing several of the musicians who took part in
the All Things Must Pass sessions. The album contains Preston’s versions
of George’s My Sweet Lord and All Things Must Pass, as well as one track
co-written by the pair, Sing One for the Lord.
At Harrison’s request, Apple signed American rhythm and blues
singer/songwriter Doris Troy, who had sung backup vocals on, and co-
written songs for, Billy Preston’s second Apple LP. George produced and
co-wrote her first Apple single, “Ain’t That Cute,” and was actively involved
in her Doris Troy album, co-writing a few songs and lining up the musicians
from his All Things Must Pass sessions.
George’s fascination with Indian music and the Hare Krishna movement
prompted him to bring the London branch of the Radha Krishna Temple to
Apple. Harrison produced, and added harmonium, guitar, and bass to, a pair
of traditional Krishna chants, Hare Krishna Mantra and Prayer to Spiritual
Masters. The former became a surprise number twelve hit in Britain. The
group’s follow-up single, Govinda, was even better, but stalled at twenty-six
on the UK charts. Harrison produced a few more tracks to flesh out an
album.
In June 1971, George worked with sitar master Ravi Shankar on the
soundtrack to Raga, an Apple Films documentary on Shankar. He also pro-
duced a single for Shankar. It was during this time that Shankar approached
George about organizing a benefit concert for the refugee children of
Bangladesh. The ensuing event, “the Concert for Bangladesh,” was the first
150 Bruce Spizer
large-scale benefit concert, pre-dating Live Aid by fourteen years. Harrison

put together an all-star band featuring himself, Eric Clapton, Billy Preston,
Leon Russell, Ringo Starr, and other veteran musicians and singers. The
concerts raised nearly $250,000, with proceeds from the film of the event
and the soundtrack album adding to the cause.
Harrison produced four tracks for Badfinger’s third album, Straight Up,
before bowing out to organize the Concert for Bangladesh. He played gui-
tar on two of the tracks, including the hit single “Day After Day.” George
also served as producer for Lon and Derek Van Eaton’s single “Sweet
Music.”
Harrison’s use of Phil Spector as co-producer of his All Things Must Pass
and Bangladesh albums led to him co-producing some tracks with Spector’s
then wife, Ronnie, who gained fame in the sixties as the lead singer of the
Ronettes of “Be My Baby” fame. Her recording of Harrison’s “Try Some,
Buy Some” was issued as a single.
Ringo’s first project for Apple was Sentimental Journey, an album of
standards from the twenties, thirties, forties, and early fifties. One of the
tracks, “Star Dust,” was arranged by Paul. At the time the disc was recorded
during 1969 and 1970, the idea of a rock star doing an album of pop
standards was unheard of. Thirteen years later, Linda Ronstadt shifted gears
and released the first of her three albums of standards arranged by Nelson
Riddle. Aging rockers such as Bryan Ferry, Boz Scaggs, and Rod Stewart
have belatedly jumped on the big band wagon. Ringo was way ahead of the
curve, releasing his collection of standards before his thirtieth birthday at a
time when big band songs weren’t cool.
Ringo’s second album was another specialty project: a collection of
country and western tunes recorded in Nashville and titled Beaucoups of
Blues. During his tenure with the Beatles, Ringo sang lead on country and
western songs such as Carl Perkins’s “Honey Don’t” and Buck Owens’s “Act
Naturally.” One of his original compositions, “Don’t Pass Me By,” has a
distinct country feel, complete with prominent fiddle. As was the case with
his first album, Beaucoups of Blues had difficulty finding an audience as
most Beatles fans were not ready for an entire LP of country and west-
ern, and fans of country music were unlikely to buy an album from an
ex-Beatle.
After issuing albums of standards and country and western tunes, Ringo
finally released a rock and roll record, “It Don’t Come Easy.” The song was
written by Ringo, with substantial, but uncredited, assistance from George
Harrison, who also produced the single. The disc was a substantial hit in
both the UK and the USA. His second single, “Back Off Boogaloo,” was
written by Ringo and produced by George, who also played the track’s
stinging slide guitar.
151 Apple Records
Much to everyone’s surprise, Ringo kept churning out the hits. His self-
titled Ringo LP produced three hit singles in the USA (only two singles
were released in the UK), including “Photograph,” which was co-written by
Ringo and George. John and Paul also contributed songs to the LP. John’s
“I Am the Greatest” was a near Beatles reunion featuring John, George,
Ringo, Billy Preston, and Klaus Voormann. Although not as successful as
its predecessor, Ringo’s next LP, Goodnight Vienna, also gave birth to three
more US hit singles for Ringo. John Lennon wrote and played on the title
track and gave Ringo his arrangement of the Platters’ hit “Only You.”
Although Ringo did not write songs for other Apple artists or produce
any sessions for others, he played drums on records by Jackie Lomax,
Billy Preston, Doris Troy, Yoko Ono, Lon and Derek Van Eaton, and John
Tavener. He also arranged for Apple to sign singer/songwriter Chris Hodge
after hearing his demo of “We’re On Our Way.”
Although the Beatles played a significant role in recruiting Apple artists,
some were brought in by others. Ron Kass, who served as president of Apple
Records until being fired by Allen Klein, signed the Modern Jazz Quartet
away from Atlantic Records. The group recorded two albums for Apple
before returning to Atlantic. Peter Asher signed folk singer James Taylor to
Apple and produced his debut album, James Taylor.
Apple’s Tony King was impressed by a tape sent to him by the Sun-
down Playboys, a band from Lake Charles, Louisiana. Apple released a
single pairing two Cajun songs (sung in a French dialect as spoken by
Acadian immigrants living in Louisiana) written by guitarist Daryl Higgin-
botham: “Saturday Night Special” and “Valse de Soleil” (“Sundown Waltz”).
Although Apple worked hard to obtain radio airplay for the disc, it did not
chart. Authentic roots music had yet to gain interest in 1972.
Although Apple issued records by twenty non-Beatle artists, by the end
of 1973 the label was nothing more than an outlet for solo Beatle releases.
The trend began with the introduction of Allen Klein, who alienated Paul
from participating in Apple and who focused on Apple’s most profitable
artists – John, Paul, George, and Ringo.
The final release of the first Apple era was George’s “This Guitar (Can’t
Keep From Crying),” which was issued in the USA on December 8, 1975,
and in the UK on February 6, 1976. The disc became the first single by an ex-
Beatle to fail to chart in either country. It was a sad end and a far cry from the
success of Apple’s first release, “Hey Jude.” But in between there had been
some great moments of music. Apple’s free-spirit approach had fostered
the release of a diverse batch of records that included pop rock, rock and
roll, big band standards, brass bands, jazz, classical, Indian ragas, Krishna
chants, rhythm and blues, gospel, country, folk, experimental, electronic,
and Cajun hoedowns.
152 Bruce Spizer
Although John became sidetracked and never followed up on his vision

of Apple, his mission statement proved quite prophetic: “We’ve got this thing
called Apple, which is going to be records, films and electronics, which all
tie up.” And it came to be that music, video and electronic computers, cell
phones and personal listening and viewing devices are intertwined in a way
that John could only have imagined.
9 The solo years
michael frontani
On December 31, 1970, Paul McCartney brought suit to end his partnership
with the other three Beatles, making official what had already in fact hap-
pened. The four lovable moptops turned countercultural icons had ceased
to function as a cohesive unit by the time of The Beatles (the White Album,
1968), with Abbey Road (1969) pulling them together only as one last defi-
ant act against the dissolution embodied in Let It Be. And so “John, Paul,
George, and Ringo,” for the first time in their adult lives, faced a future as
something other than Beatles. These four young men, four Beatles alone but
inextricably bound to one another, would spend the next months and years
alternately shunning and embracing their storied past. Three ex-Beatles –
all but Lennon, who was murdered on December 8, 1980, at the age of forty
years – would continue to grapple with their pasts as they entered middle
age and beyond. This chapter provides a broad overview of the post-Beatle
lives and careers of Lennon, McCartney, Harrison, and Starr, and considers
their evolution as individual artists.
As it had been at the time of the Beatles’ arrival on US shores in 1964,
success in America was the “golden ring” of the entertainment industry in
1970, and was the biggest guarantor of success elsewhere. Hence, though
occasionally referring to the British context and sources, the focus here is
on the artistic evolution of the four ex-Beatles within the context of their
reception by American critics and audiences. This chapter, alone in this
book, is not about the Beatles. My purpose here is to answer the same ques-
tion faced by Lennon, McCartney, Harrison, and Starr, not only in 1970,
but for the rest of their lives, namely: what does it mean to not be a Beatle?
This question reverberated in the lives of the solo Beatles. They were stars1
of the first order, and they – and their audience(s) – had to contend with
the band’s highly developed image, one bound up in the imaginations of
a significant portion of baby-boomers. Accounting for perceptions of the
band’s artistic supremacy and unrivaled commercial success, and embody-
ing as it did a counterculture / youth culture ideal, the Beatles’ image(s)
continued to interact with established and emergent societal forces in late
twentieth-century America. In the early 1970s, in an environment in which
a substantial portion of the audience expected rock music and culture
to transcend pleasure into consequence and “meaning,” the shimmering
[153]
154 Michael Frontani
fantasia of the Beatles’ image cast a long shadow – for none so much as for
four ex-Beatles.2
A number of forces impacted the careers of the solo Beatles, including
both those peculiar to the band and those at work in society. First, the
Beatles’ unequaled commercial success prompted huge expectations of the
solo Beatles, particularly the songwriters, and their solo accomplishments
were measured against the commercial achievements of the band. Fans and
critics expected successes to be more frequent, and to reach higher heights,
than those of run-of-the-mill rock stars. Yet even in the trough, which each
at times visited, when critics’ barbs were sharpest and record company
expectations frustrated, the ex-Beatles continued to release gold-certified
albums and singles.3 Second, in establishing themselves as solo artists, the
former Beatles all participated in revision of the Beatles’ “story” and decon-
struction of their myth, Lennon doing so most famously with revelations of
groupies, drug use, and infighting, in the Lennon Remembers (1972) inter-
views with Rolling Stone’s Jann Wenner, in late 1970. Part of this process was
attribution of the songwriting credits for the Beatles’ catalog, particularly –
but not exclusively – by Lennon. Ironically, this “clarification” often had
the contrary effect of further obscuring the contributions and talents of
the individual Beatles to their success, particularly McCartney’s production
and arranging prowess. There were ramifications for the reception of the
former Beatles by various audiences, as can be seen in the relative cool-
ness with which McCartney’s superbly crafted but non-committal pop and
experimental amalgams were initially received by Rolling Stone and other
rock publications, compared to the warm reception for more culturally,
artistically, and lyrically “committed” works like Harrison’s majestic paean
to Krishna Consciousness, All Things Must Pass (1970), and Lennon’s Plastic
Ono Band (1970) and Imagine (1971). Third, the former Beatles – once,
communally, catalysts for the transformation of rock and roll into rock, in
fact into Art, and focal points for much of the discourse that concerned the
youth culture and its relevance – were destined to be considered individually
within that framework. Complicating matters, American progressives and
conservatives were waging a culture war, which, depending on one’s ideo-
logical bent, strongly influenced perceptions of rock music and musicians,
and of the youth culture. The ex-Beatles, embodying the ideal and ideals of
the sixties generation, were inescapably bound up in that battle.
While this chapter offers an account of the careers of the four solo Beatles,
the focus is on the first ten years following the breakup, the 1970s, a period
during which rock music was still definitive in shaping the youth culture and
in which Lennon, McCartney, Harrison, and Starr continued to be viewed
as banner-carriers for the youth movement and its values. Additionally,
the specter of a Beatles reunion allowed a space for the optimism of the
155 The solo years
previous decade, a chance for many to re-ignite the ember of idealism that
remained from their youths. Lennon’s death brought this period to an end,
not only as to expectations of the four ex-Beatles, but as to the progressive
aspirations of many in that generation.
The decade following the end of the Beatles was the most productive
period for the ex-Beatles, certainly within the rubric of rock music. Harrison
released six studio albums, and Starr seven, in the 1970s. In the aftermath of
Lennon’s death, a disenchanted Harrison released only three more studio
albums of new compositions before his death in 2001, while Starr released
only two albums in the 1980s, 1981’s Stop and Smell the Roses and Old
Wave (1983), before a nearly ten-year hiatus from recording of new material
(Time Takes Time [1992] was followed by sporadic recording and numerous
iterations of his nostalgic review, the All-Starr Band [inaugurated in 1989]).
McCartney released ten studio albums in the decade following the end of
the Beatles, and he retained the work ethic he demonstrated as a Beatle,
but, after Lennon’s death, his career witnessed a gradual falling off of rock
studio albums, and he increasingly pursued other interests, particularly
after his classical work, Liverpool Oratorio, was released in 1991. Lennon
released seven studio albums in the 1970s. One studio album, Milk and
Honey (1982), and several compilations were released posthumously.
Over the first decade following the end of the band, as rock continued
along its path of incorporation by the music industry, a rear guard continued
to judge the work of Lennon, McCartney, and Harrison regarding the
extent to which it diminished or fortified the perceived values of the youth
culture. The solo career of Starr, the most “ordinary” of the Beatles – in
the estimation of some, the world’s luckiest sideman – was less bound up
in the prevailing effort to define rock’s function or in the conflict between
ascendant conservatism and withering progressivism. Nevertheless, Starr’s
early solo fortunes rose and fell with his ability to recreate and invoke
the bonhomie and communalism that had been so essential to the youth
culture’s self-perception and to his Beatle persona, and for a time he did
indeed “get by” and even flourish with a little help from his friends.
Ringo Starr: “I get by with a little help from my friends”

While he was still a Beatle, Starr’s solo efforts were concentrated in act-
ing, and he appeared with varying success in Candy (1968) and The Magic
Christian (1969).4 But, with the Beatles fragmenting, Starr undertook an
ambitious solo recording agenda, releasing two albums in 1970. In fact,
with Sentimental Journey, he was the first Beatle to record and release a
non-experimental studio solo album. A collection of standards from his
parents’ generation, with arrangements by, among others, George Martin,

Quincy Jones, Elmer Bernstein, Maurice Gibb of the Bee Gees, and Paul
McCartney, Sentimental Journey charted in the USA and UK, despite luke-
warm reviews.5 Its follow-up, Beaucoups of Blues, was recorded with some
of the best studio musicians in Nashville, including pedal steel guitar player
Pete Drake (whom Starr had met on sessions for Harrison’s All Things Must
Pass), who produced and enlisted some of country music’s best writers to
compose tracks for the album. The collection, which better suited Starr’s
limited range and vocal quality than did its predecessor, was received more
favorably by critics,6 though performing less well in the charts.
Following the release of his first two albums, Starr became a renaissance
man, of sorts, recording and performing at leisure while pursuing interests in
other fields, such as film and furniture design.7 He played on Lennon’s Plastic
Ono Band and Harrison’s All Things Must Pass. He also joined Harrison
for the Concert for Bangladesh benefit. In 1971, Starr recorded the hit
single “It Don’t Come Easy,” a gold record and top five hit in both the US
and UK charts. This was followed, in 1972, by the top ten hit, “Back Off
Boogaloo.” In late 1973, he finally issued another album, the critical and
popular hit, Ringo.8 Joining Starr on the album were Randy Newman, Harry
Nilsson, members of the Band, Billy Preston, Klaus Voormann, Lennon,
Harrison, and McCartney. Lennon penned the album’s opener, “I’m the
Greatest,” and played piano, with Harrison on guitar. Starr’s tongue-in-
cheek delivery is a perfect foil for the bombast of Lennon’s humorous record
of life in “the greatest show on earth.” Lennon and Harrison’s participation
on the track fueled speculation that a Beatle reunion might be near (as
would any meeting of Beatles, real or imagined, over the next seven years).9
McCartney and wife Linda wrote the closing track, “Six O’Clock,” and
contributed elsewhere on the album. Harrison wrote Starr’s number one
single, “Photograph,” as well as “Sunshine Life for Me,” and “You and Me
(Babe).” “Sunshine Life for Me,” recorded with members of the Band and
David Bromberg, is perhaps the most lively track on the album, with the
backup band and Starr giving the song an authentic country-bluegrass feel.
Starr’s cover of Johnny Burnett’s 1960 recording of “You’re Sixteen” was
a number one hit in the USA, and “Oh My My” was a top five single.
Impressively if loosely produced, the album succeeds because Starr, with
his drolly comical delivery, never takes himself too seriously, while those
around him both understand his limitations and his appeal and keep him
within those bounds. A remarkable album, Ringo benefits from the palpable
good cheer that went into its creation, of which Rolling Stone commented:
“In atmosphere Ringo is the most successful record by an ex-Beatle.”10
Goodnight Vienna followed, in late 1974. Critically well received, it
reached number eight in the USA, and was certified gold, but climbed
157 The solo years
no higher than number thirty in the UK charts.11 Two tracks, covers of the
Platters’ “Only You (And You Alone)” and Hoyt Axton’s “No No Song,” were
also top ten hits in the USA. Ringo’s Rotogravure, released in 1976, with con-
tributions from Lennon, McCartney, and Harrison, as well as Eric Clapton
and Peter Frampton, garnered only lukewarm reviews and mediocre sales,12
demonstrating, perhaps, that the formula that had marked his previous
two star-laden albums had run its course. Attempts to move away from
that formula pushed Starr’s limitations to the forefront, as was apparent
on the disco-inflected Ringo the 4th (1977), an ill-conceived and humorless
attempt to find an audience in the burgeoning disco market. That commer-
cial and critical disaster13 was followed by Bad Boy (1978), which Rolling
Stone, echoing the generally held view, called “ersatz trash.”14 Even a con-
current television special, Ringo, failed to resuscitate his stagnating career.
In the fall of 1980, Starr, hoping to re-ignite some interest, grasped at his
winning formula of the early 1970s, employing some of rock’s top names
for his next album, tentatively titled Can’t Fight Lighting. Lennon’s murder
brought production to a halt.
George Harrison: “Beware of Maya”

Of all the Beatles, Harrison had been the most devoted to the spiritual quest
and the most vocal advocate of transcendental meditation and Krishna
Consciousness as alternatives to the Judeo-Christian tradition. Whether
publicly declaring his devotion, as he did early on, or pursuing his spiritu-
ality in a much more private way, as was his later tendency, he sought to
break through the fleeting illusion of the physical world, or maya, into the
transcendent reality of Brahman. “Beware of Maya,” he sings on “Beware of
Darkness,” a track from his first proper studio album following the breakup
of the Beatles. It is a sentiment that anchored his artistic and personal life
over the next three decades.
Harrison’s triple album All Things Must Pass, considered by many critics
to be one of the three best solo Beatle albums (joining Lennon’s Imagine
and McCartney’s Band on the Run), was issued on November 30, 1970, just
weeks after the debut of Let It Be. The Times’s Richard Williams reckoned
that Harrison was “more than he was being allowed to be” in the Beatles,
and, in a review that also evaluated Lennon’s Plastic Ono Band, found
that, of all the solo Beatle albums to date, Harrison’s “makes far and away
the best listening.”15 The album, featuring a loose, all-star, line-up,16 was
produced by Phil Spector. While the notoriously difficult producer’s effort
has been criticized, both for his frequent intoxication and the datedness
of his vaunted “Wall of Sound” mix,17 Spector’s aesthetic propelled the
soul-inflected “What is Life” and gospel-tinged “My Sweet Lord” to com-

mercial and critical success (Rolling Stone called the latter “sensational”).18
Perhaps even more important to the album’s overall sound was the effort
expended on strings and orchestra by Harrison and arranger John Barham,
exemplified on the majestic “Isn’t It a Pity,” Harrison’s supreme warning
about maya, “Beware of Darkness,” and the album’s title track. A spectac-
ular tour de force, the album exhibited the influence of Harrison’s recent
brushes with soul (producing Doris Troy’s self-titled album, in 1970), the
southern blues of Delaney and Bonnie and Friends, and gospel (reflecting
Harrison’s recent work producing the Doris Troy set and a Billy Preston
album). It also benefits from his interaction with Bob Dylan and the Band
in the waning days of the Beatles and, of course, his immersion in Hindu
culture. All Things Must Pass established with critics Harrison’s status as an
artist of stature comparable to that of Lennon and McCartney.19
A product of its time, the album took root in a youth culture that had
received international attention for its spirituality. The year of the debut of
All Things Must Pass saw a noticeable increase in media coverage of youth
religiosity, particularly membership in Christ-oriented movements, cults,
and communes. A particularly perplexing issue for the established religions,
which saw their membership continue a postwar decline, it was the focus
of not only the religious press (including Christianity Today, Christian
Century, and Commonweal), but also the mainstream media.20 It is worth
noting that All Things Must Pass spent three weeks in the Billboard album
charts, before being displaced by Andrew Lloyd Webber and Tim Rice’s
original cast recording of Jesus Christ Superstar,21 and that the original cast
recording of the stage musical Godspell, released in July, 1971, was a top
forty album in the USA. In this environment, the collection of songs, most
grounded in Harrison’s spirituality, managed to sit high in the charts in
both the UK and the USA, where it reached number one. The album also
produced “My Sweet Lord,” the first solo Beatle single to reach number
one in both the UK and US charts. Though critical of Harrison’s tendency
towards earnestness and “taking himself or the subject too seriously,” Rolling
Stone’s Ben Gerson nevertheless captured a widespread sentiment among
rock critics and fans about Harrison’s album and artistry, calling All Things
Must Pass an “extravaganza of piety and sacrifice and joy, whose sheer
magnitude and ambition may dub it the War and Peace of rock ’n’ roll,”
and applauding Harrison as “perhaps the premier studio musician among
rock band guitarists.”22
Harrison followed up All Things Must Pass with the Concert for
Bangladesh, undertaken following a visit by Ravi Shankar, who brought
the plight of flood-ravaged Bangladesh to Harrison’s attention. In response,
Harrison released “Bangladesh,” the first rock charity single. Days later,
159 The solo years
on August 1, 1971, Harrison took the stage with numerous rock lumi-
naries, including Starr, the reclusive Bob Dylan, Eric Clapton, Badfinger,
Billy Preston, and Leon Russell, for two performances before 40,000 fans at
New York’s Madison Square Garden. The Bangladesh benefit pioneered the
whole idea of the charity album and single, as well as of the rock concert
fundraiser.23
In 1973, Harrison released Living in the Material World and, from the
album, the single “Give Me Love (Give Me Peace on Earth)” (backed with
“Miss O’Dell”), which displaced McCartney’s “My Love” at the top of the
Billboard singles chart. Unlike its predecessor, Living in the Material World
was an intimate project on which Harrison eschewed the “cast of thou-
sands” approach for a smaller combo. Spector and his “Wall of Sound”
were jettisoned in favor of Harrison’s far leaner and cleaner production
aesthetic, augmented by the sparing use of Barham’s string and orch-
estral arrangements. Harrison’s slide-playing is featured throughout, with
the swamp-drenched, nocturnal wails of “Sue Me, Sue You Blues,” in partic-
ular, demonstrating his grasp of the form. The title track is one of Harrison’s
hardest-rocking recordings, its pulsing bass and driving piano reminiscent
of the Beatles’ “Old Brown Shoe.” “Give Me Love,” which opens the album,
perfectly encapsulates Harrison’s guitar technique and production: eco-
nomical in notes, it demonstrates virtuosity instead in its augmentation of
the melody, rendered in the layering of two or more fluid slide guitar parts
painstakingly arranged and impeccably recorded.
For the most part fashioned from new compositions, the album showed
that Harrison wasn’t dependent on the back catalog of songs that had
provided most of the tracks for All Things Must Pass. Yet there are hints of
qualities that became less attractive to critics and fans in the ensuing years.
Tracks like “The Light that has Lighted the World,” which carped, “It’s
funny how people won’t accept change,” and “Who Can See It,” on which
Harrison pleads, “I only ask that what I know should not be denied me
now . . . my life belongs to me,” betrayed sentiments of a man increasingly
at odds, not only with an industry narrowly defining success as sales, but
also with fans and critics who wanted him to be “Beatle George,” or at least
to be less fixated on his spirituality. Nevertheless, while receiving variable
comment from critics,24 the album fared well in the charts, reaching number
one in the USA and number two in the UK.
In the fall of 1974, in the midst of the deterioration of his relation-
ship with his wife, Pattie Boyd, and battling laryngitis, Harrison hurriedly
finished Dark Horse to meet the deadline for a tour intended to promote
Harrison’s newly founded Dark Horse label. In retrospect, Harrison can
be faulted for not allowing his voice to strengthen before completing the
album and going on tour. The tight deadline also forced him to forsake
his normally meticulous recording practices in favor of a more “rough and

ready” approach. Songs, rather than being worked out ahead of time, often
emerged in the studio. Dark Horse was a huge critical debacle – Rolling Stone,
heretofore one of Harrison’s great champions, blasted this “embarrassingly
bad record.”25 Similarly, High Fidelity commented that the Federal Food
and Drug Administration should “bust Harrison for selling a sleeping pill
without a prescription, for a downer this definitely is.”26 While Harrison
had his defenders,27 Rolling Stone’s relentlessly negative critique was evi-
dence of growing hostility in Harrison’s relationship with the rock press.
Yet it is difficult to find a justification for the vitriol leveled at the album by
Rolling Stone. There are a number of strong tracks delivered by musician-
ship that is first rate. The instrumental opening the album, “Harris on Tour
(Express),” is an upbeat rocker that highlights Harrison’s slide work and
Tom Scott’s saxophone. “Maya Love” features Billy Preston’s keyboard and
a rhythm section driven by Andy Newmark’s drumming and Willie Weeks’s
bass; they allowed Harrison to expand on his earlier experiments with soul
and record his most funky and R&B-inflected album to date. Perhaps Har-
rison’s greatest sin, as far as fans and critics were concerned, was that the
lyrical content was so relentlessly critical of life as an ex-Beatle. Harrison’s
solo work had revealed his obsessions, but before this album the focus had
been on his spiritual evolution; here, Harrison was, in the view of some,
simply wallowing in self-pity. Critics seem also to have lost their senses of
humor, with wife Pattie Boyd’s and paramour Eric Clapton’s backing vocals
on “Bye Bye Love” and the over-the-top holiday good cheer of “Ding Dong,
Ding Dong” marked for particular scorn. The tour would only contribute
to Harrison’s deteriorating status with critics.
Harrison took to the road in November, with Billy Preston and Ravi
Shankar in tow, thus becoming the first ex-Beatle to stage a major tour of
the USA. Reflecting his superstar status, Harrison even visited the White
House, as guest of President Gerald Ford’s son, Jack. Unfortunately, much to
the chagrin of critics and fans, the shows were, in the words of the New York
Time’s influential critic John Rockwell, “boring and eccentric.” At Madison
Square Garden, where the tour finished with three dates, Harrison only
reluctantly drew from his Beatle past, playing “In My Life” with reworked
lyrics (substituting “In my life, I love God more” for “In my life, I love
you more”). He also programmed an apathetically received set by Ravi
Shankar into the show, and battled a hoarseness that made his singing
virtually unintelligible to the audience. Making matters worse, he badgered
the audience to buy his albums and concert programs and, perhaps the
greatest offense of all, to stop smoking marijuana. Rockwell found that
Harrison’s backup of Billie Preston on the keyboardist’s handful of songs
most suited the ex-Beatle – the role of the “‘silent Beatle,’ humbly taking
161 The solo years
second billing to those more charismatic than himself.”28 Harrison followed

Dark Horse with the last album he owed Apple, Extra Texture, released
in October 1975. Though Harrison’s voice was much improved on the
collection, which featured autobiographical songs that made fewer direct
appeals for the spiritual well-being of its audience, and which was less
disparaging of life in the public eye, criticism was only slightly less derisive
than that for Dark Horse, with Rolling Stone’s review judging that “we are
faced with the fact that Harrison’s records are nothing so much as boring.”29
His recording career seemingly going into freefall, Harrison started 1976
with a case of hepatitis. Still recovering, he testified in court for three
days in the song plagiarism suit brought by Bright Tunes Music over his
biggest solo single, “My Sweet Lord” – the court ultimately found that
he had unintentionally plagiarized one of the company’s properties, the
Chiffons’ 1963 hit, “He’s So Fine.” Though quite happy to be freed from his
contractual obligations to Apple, the ailing Harrison faced a multi-million
dollar lawsuit brought by his current record company, A&M, for “non-
delivery of product,” which was settled only after Warner Brothers bought
Harrison’s contract from the company. His first album on his own Dark
Horse label, and the first with Warner Brothers, Thiry-Three & 1/3, was
released in late 1976. Harrison’s voice, having healed, was at its strongest in
years, and he had a top-notch line-up of musicians, including Billy Preston
and Gary Wright on keyboards and Tom Scott on horns, as well as one of
the best rhythm sections to appear on a Harrison album – Alvin Taylor on
drums, and Willie Weeks on bass. Harrison largely jettisoned spirituality in
favor of more traditional, and commercial, ruminations on life and love.
The Village Voice’s Richard Meltzer was particularly laudatory, noting that
the album was Harrison’s “best LP since All Things Must Pass and on par
with, say, [Bob Dylan’s] Blood on the Tracks.” Britain’s Melody Maker called
the collection “a fine album which must regain for [Harrison] the impetus
he has lost.”30 The album also fared somewhat better with fans than did
the previous two albums; it reached number thirty-five in the UK charts
and number eleven in the US Billboard album charts, and spawned two top
forty hits on its way to gold certification. Promoting the album, Harrison
joined host Paul Simon on Saturday Night Live, where he debuted videos
for the two singles, “Crackerbox Palace,” directed by Monty Python’s Eric
Idle, and a sendup of the Bright Tunes’ “My Sweet Lord” affair, “This Song.”
He and Simon also played an acoustic set featuring the host’s “Homeward
Bound” and Harrison’s “Here Comes the Sun.”
Debuting simultaneously with Thirty-Three & 1/3 was The Best of George
Harrison, over half of which, much to Harrison’s chagrin (he was power-
less to control the content of the EMI/Capitol release), was culled from his
Beatles work. Despite his misgivings, and while it failed to chart in the UK,
the album did well in the USA with critics31 and fans, receiving certifica-
tion as a gold record from the Recording Industry Association of America,
as had his previous albums dating back to All Things Must Pass. Despite
the success, Harrison was increasingly unhappy with the life of the rock
star, and throughout 1977 and much of 1978 he pursued other interests
and started a new family. Having divorced Pattie Boyd in 1977,32 Harrison
married Olivia Trinidad Arias in September, 1978, a month after the birth
of their son, Dhani. Harrison also co-founded Handmade Films, initially
to produce comedy troupe Monty Python’s The Life of Brian. The company
specialized in off-beat comedies and became one of the most important
producers of independent films.33 Harrison returned to music in Febru-
ary 1979 with George Harrison, which yielded the single, “Blow Away.”
Co-produced with Russ Titelman, the album was generally well received34
and continued Harrison’s streak of gold albums. Comfortably ensconced
in his Friar Park studio, Harrison was enjoying private life at home too
much to contemplate a tour and a return to life as a “star,” a sentiment
present later that year when he published I Me Mine, an eccentric collection
of lyrics, photographs, and stories, but precious little to quench the thirst
of curious Beatles fans. Nevertheless, by late 1980 it was time for another
album, and Harrison began work on Somewhere in England.
Paul McCartney: “Some people want to fill the world

with silly love songs”
Paul McCartney faced a rock press that held him responsible for the demise
of the Beatles, and, further, scorned the very things that made him pop-
ular with the mainstream audience. With Lennon assuming, and being
granted, the role of resident Beatle genius, McCartney’s contributions to
the band were increasingly viewed as stylistic and commercial by a rock
press still arguing for rock’s status as an art form carrying forward an anti-
establishment worldview. McCartney’s first ten years after the end of the
Beatles were spent chasing and capturing the heights of commercial and
mainstream success, often with unquestionably silly but expertly rendered
love songs, while facing the most hostile reception of any ex-Beatle for it
from the rock press.
With the demise of the Beatles, McCartney had buried himself in work,
writing and producing this first solo album at home, playing all the instru-
ments and providing the vocals (with additional vocals from his wife, Linda).
McCartney was released in April 1970, just weeks after Starr’s Beaucoups of
Blues, and mere weeks before the release of the Beatles’ Let It Be, and was
accompanied by promotional materials that left little doubt that the Beatles
163 The solo years
were disbanding, including a questionnaire in which McCartney posed the

questions, “Do you miss the other Beatles and George Martin? . . . Do you
foresee a time when Lennon-McCartney becomes an active songwriting
partnership again?” His answer: “No.”35 The album contained “Maybe I’m
Amazed,” “That Would Be Something,” and “Every Night,” the first, a love
song for his wife, becoming one of his best-loved and most covered songs,
and thereafter a staple on his numerous tours. The album reached the top
ten in the USA (number twenty-eight in the UK). Generally well received
in the mainstream press, the album was also given a positive review in
Rolling Stone, though, on editor Jann Wenner’s insistence, a positive review
was rewritten to take into account McCartney’s promotion of McCartney:
“Why did Paul choose to cover a very beautiful and pleasing record with
such tawdry propaganda?”36
He followed up his eponymous first effort with the top ten US and
UK single “Another Day,” backed with “Oh Woman, Oh Why,” released
in February 1971. Recorded during sessions for an album which would
eventually be called Ram, the single was a hint of McCartney’s musical
direction, with “Another Day” introducing a new McCartney vocal sound,
comprising his and wife Linda’s voices, and the flip-side rocker demon-
strating that McCartney had lost little, if any, facility with the rock and
roll shout first demonstrated on early Beatles recordings like “Long Tall
Sally” and “I’m Down.” Ram was released in the wake of Lennon’s Plastic
Ono Band and Harrison’s All Things Must Pass, and expectations were high
for McCartney’s sophomore project. The album opens with “Too Many
People,” a catchy, acoustic-based rocker that knocks “too many people
preaching practices,” which Lennon saw as directed at his and Ono’s very
public politicking. It was not the only slight perceived by Lennon: the cover
collage featured a picture of what appeared to be two beetles coupling,
and a shot of McCartney and wife dressed as clowns and ensconced in a
bag.37 (Lennon would have his pound of flesh on Imagine.) Controversy
aside, the album demonstrates McCartney’s pop sensibility with meticu-
lously crafted melodies and arrangements incorporating forms as varied
as country, jazz, the blues, hard rock, even the Beach Boys. The latter fig-
ure most prominently on “Ram On,” with its Smile era production, and
“Dear Boy,” with one of the album’s most intricate vocal arrangements.
“Smile Away” is one of McCartney’s great driving rock and rollers. “Uncle
Albert / Admiral Halsey” was the kind of whimsical and ambitious produc-
tion that had been the Beatles’ – and George Martin’s – stock in trade,
going back at least as far as the effects created for “Yellow Submarine,” in
1965. Silly, yet infectious, the track was released as a single in the USA,
where it became McCartney’s first post-Beatles number one. The album
reached number one in the UK charts, and number two in the USA. Yet the
album received only fair reviews in the mainstream press, and Rolling Stone
called it “the nadir in the decomposition of Sixties rock thus far.” Further,
reviewer Jon Landau hypothesized that, in the Beatles, Lennon “was there
to keep McCartney from going off the deep end that leads to an album as
emotionally vacuous as Ram . . . . McCartney and Ram both prove that Paul
benefited immensely from collaboration and that he seems to be dying on
the vine as a result of his own self-imposed musical isolation.”38
The apathy, even hostility, with which McCartney’s early solo work was
received by Rolling Stone was part of a process of defining the achieve-
ments and legacy of the youth culture that emerged in the 1960s. Prior to
the breakup, the music of the Beatles was simply attributed to “Lennon
and McCartney,” or “the Beatles and George Martin,” and so on, vague
personifications that did little to explain the specific contributions of any
single actor to the creative process. Much of Lennon’s interview with Rolling
Stone’s Jann Wenner, in December 1970, focused on questions of author-
ship. His attribution of various compositions fostered the creation of nice,
neat – and opposed – categories for the two chief Beatles: “Lennon as artist
and avant-gardiste” and “McCartney as commercial craftsman.” Reflecting
the values of the counterculture and New Left, writers and editors at Rolling
Stone, and the readers to which they appealed, often found common cause
with John Lennon, while McCartney was often demonized as a commercial
hack for his refusal to say anything of consequence.
Lennon’s reception by rock critics, as compared to McCartney’s, betrays
a preference for the written word and, at least in part, a miscalculation of
the importance of McCartney’s vision to the Beatles’ art, particularly that
of the post-touring years. McCartney, of all the Beatles, was most drawn
to the possibilities of the studio, and his integration of varied past and
alternative forms into his rock and pop oeuvre demonstrated both the cen-
trality of sound to his art and his prowess as a producer, a dexterity born of
patient observation and determination over the years. McCartney’s greatest
strength may well have been his ability to translate his immediate influ-
ences (and those of the other Beatles) for his audience by means of the
modern studio. McCartney was the most active of the Beatles in bringing
the experimental currents of the times into the work of the band, and the
most capable in translating them for the pop milieu. In the mid-1960s,
McCartney’s preoccupations, fueled by his immersion in London’s vibrant
artistic environment, and evident on the band’s most experimental work,
were definitive in rock and roll’s evolution into rock, and into art. Equally
important were Lennon’s lyrics, which, with those of Dylan, were expand-
ing the boundaries of the pop rock oeuvre. Yet, speaking primarily of the
lyrics of the songs, Lennon’s revelations (among many) that masterpieces
like “A Day in the Life” and “Strawberry Fields Forever” were primarily his
165 The solo years
works obscured McCartney’s essential contributions, and, so far as much

of the activist youth culture was concerned, demonstrated that the Beat-
les’ artistic genius could be attributed largely to Lennon, a product of his
wordcraft and artistic vision. Lennon’s political radicalism undoubtedly
eased acceptance of this assertion among the more “committed” members
of the youth culture. In short, for many rock critics, the accessibility of
Lennon’s commitment to the issues of the time, and to the “higher calling”
of “art,” embodied most consistently in his lyrics, proved more meaningful
than McCartney’s commercialism, continuing sonic experimentation, and
genre-bending forays.
McCartney continued to draw upon his environment for inspiration as
a solo artist, but his situation was completely different from that of the
pop art intellectual of 1967, and the domesticity of post-Beatledom was
less attractive to a segment of the youth culture audience that continued
to expect rock to rebel. In this environment, McCartney’s strengths were
often discounted by a variably activist rock press, and while he continued
to develop as a musician, songwriter, and producer, to be sure, he often
did so to little appreciation. In fact, McCartney was held to a much higher
standard than contemporaries, such as Jagger and Richards, who were rarely
faulted for their catalog’s dearth of meaning or message. While the opinions
of rock critics gradually came to acknowledge, and occasionally value,39
McCartney’s ease with melodies and his considerable abilities as producer
and arranger, there remained an undercurrent of dissatisfaction with a
talent perceived as extraordinary but misspent.
Shaken by Rolling Stone’s review and lukewarm critical response in the
mainstream press, but heartened by Ram’s commercial success, McCartney
debuted his new band, Wings, in August 1971 (though it did not acquire the
name until the following month), with Denny Laine on guitar and Denny
Seiwell on drums. Wild Life, credited to Wings, was released in November to
variable critical response. Attributing the album’s banality to “nonchalance”
in the face of contractual obligations to a company for which McCartney no
longer wished to work (i.e. Apple), Rolling Stone’s John Mendelsohn tabbed
the album “vacuous, flaccid, impotent, trivial and unaffecting,” yet he also
found it “nicely . . . executed pop music [that] should be taken or left on that
basis alone,” an opinion consistent with reaction in the mainstream press.40
Yet, at a time when even the basic communalism of the youth culture was
under fire in the mainstream press,41 McCartney’s talents counted for little
among the cultural elites of the youth movement.
McCartney added guitarist Henry McCullough to Wings’ line-up, and
quickly recorded Wings’ first single, “Give Ireland Back to the Irish,” written
following the Bloody Sunday violence of January 30, 1972.42 The single was
released in late February and promptly deemed “politically controversial”
and banned by the BBC. This was not McCartney’s only challenge to the
system – in the midst of touring, in August, McCartney and his wife were
arrested in Sweden for hashish possession, one of numerous similar scrapes
with the law.43 Yet McCartney still failed to gain credibility with the political
and cultural left. Certainly hurting any effort he might have expended
to ingratiate himself with the youth movement was ABC’s broadcast, in
April, of the ill-advised44 bit of schmaltz, James Paul McCartney, which was,
in the words of the New York Times’ reviewer, little more than “a series
of disconnected routines strung together with commercials for Chevrolet
cars.” Other critics were similarly dismissive of the effort.45 McCartney
followed in May with Wings’ second single, “Mary Had a Little Lamb,”
a song that had been performed on the special. Written for his daughter
Mary, the song is little more than a child’s idyll pounded out on the piano.
A light, sweet, melody propels the nursery rhyme along to the chorus, “You
can hear them singing, la la, la la la,” on which McCartney is joined by
his wife Linda and daughters Heather and Mary. Rock critics viewed it as
vacuous, self-indulgent nonsense.
Despite such critical setbacks, McCartney forged ahead. The Beatle who
had most wanted to take the band back on the road, McCartney recognized
that reclaiming his stature as a force in the modern music scene required
that he reestablish himself before live audiences. A Wings summer tour
of Europe in 1972 had allowed the band to grow into a cohesive unit, so
much so, in fact, that McCartney felt ready to attempt a tour of the UK the
following spring. Not only was Wings getting a reputation as a tight, hard-
rocking outfit, but McCartney appeared to be finding his voice again as a
writer, and, importantly, the band could now tour in support of the latest
album, Red Rose Speedway. In the hope of boosting sales above those of Wild
Life, the album was credited to “Paul McCartney and Wings.” Bolstered by
the success of the last two singles, “Hi, Hi, Hi” (a hard-rocking song banned
by the BBC for “suggestive” lyrics), and, from the album, a new ballad which
became a concert favorite and a number one hit in the USA, “My Love,” Red
Rose Speedway continued McCartney’s upward climb in the charts; it also
marked a changing critical environment for reception of McCartney’s work
by the rock press. Patti Smith collaborator and guitarist Lenny Kaye, writing
in Rolling Stone, called the album “the most overall heartening McCartney
product given us since the demise of the Beatles.”46 While McCartney’s
music would continue to be criticized by some commentators as vacuous
and facile, Kaye’s review appears to mark the point where art of consequence
was no longer required of McCartney by rock critics, the opinions of whom
were increasingly coming to resemble the generally welcoming reception
found in the mainstream press.47 The album, a blend of country, ballads,
and superior arrangement and production, most noticeable on side two’s
167 The solo years
“Medley,” reached number one in the US Billboard chart, and was followed
by McCartney’s masterful collaboration with George Martin on “Live and
Let Die,” the theme for the new James Bond film of the same name. With
its catchy melody incorporating ska and Hollywood theatrics, most notably
the orchestral bombast arranged by Martin, the recording, credited only to
Wings, rose to number two on the US singles charts and garnered an Oscar
nomination for Best Original Song (though losing to “The Way We Were”).
McCartney’s breakout came with the release in December 1973 of Band
on the Run, considered by many critics to be one of the three best solo
Beatles albums. Fueled by the success of two singles from the collection –
“Jet,” a US and UK top ten single released in February 1974, and the title
track, a number one hit in the USA, released in June – the album was
a worldwide hit and Grammy winner for Best Pop Performance by Duo,
Group, or Chorus, and the top-selling album for 1974. Band on the Run
marks the full flowering and most definitive restatement of McCartney’s
strengths: an unequaled work ethic and production sense allied with an
uncanny ability to find the right sounds with which to render the fruits of
his unsurpassed facility with melodies. The title track opens the album, and
is reminiscent of Martin’s production on side two of Abbey Road, as song
sections segue seamlessly from one to the next. It is followed by the rolling
thunder guitar and synthesizer of “Jet,” then the jazz-inflected “Bluebird.”
Track by track, McCartney demonstrates his mastery of numerous musical
forms, much as the Beatles had, particularly from Rubber Soul onward.
“Mrs. Vanderbilt” highlights McCartney’s bouncy and ever-changing bass
lines. “Mamunia,” in its country feel and deceptively simple arrangement,
is reminiscent of his first two solo albums, not to mention “Mother Nature’s
Song” from The Beatles. “No Words” and “Nineteen Hundred and Eighty
Five” demonstrate that McCartney had learned a great deal about building
song arrangements from George Martin. At last, much as “I Want to Hold
Your Hand” had been a single that Capitol could not turn down, Band on
the Run was a work that critics of all stripes had no choice but to embrace.
Reflecting the widespread positive critical reception for the album, the New
York Times dubbed it “music as natural and fresh as tomorrow,” and Rolling
Stone’s Jon Landau judged the album “(with the possible exception of John
Lennon’s Plastic Ono Band) the finest record yet released by any of the four
musicians who were once called the Beatles.”48
McCartney continued his streak with the next two albums, the critically
acclaimed Venus and Mars49 (released May 1975) and Wings at the Speed of
Sound50 (released March 1976), both reaching number one in the US and
UK album charts. Speed of Sound spawned the single “Silly Love Songs,”
which was McCartney’s response to those critical of his music’s perceived
lack of meaning; it was also his first foray into disco music, and one of
Wings’ biggest sellers. McCartney and Wings toured the UK and, at last,
the USA, in 1976, with Wings’ spring US visit providing the material for
McCartney’s fifth straight number one US album, the triple disk Wings Over
America, released in an era in which that form reigned supreme (note, for
instance, the success of Peter Frampton’s 1976 number one hit, Frampton
Comes Alive, and Kiss’s top ten albums, Alive!, released in 1975, and Alive II,
from 1977). In 1977, Wings released “Mull of Kintyre,” a folk-based ode to
McCartney’s adopted Scottish homeland, where he and his family had lived
since the late 1960s. The single, which featured bagpipes, could not have
been more different from current trends, most notably the advent of punk,
marked by the debuts of the Sex Pistols and the Clash. Nevertheless, “Mull
of Kintyre” went to number one in the British charts, and became one of
the biggest-selling singles in UK history, displacing the Beatles’ “She Loves
You” before being displaced by Band Aid’s “Do They Know It’s Christmas”
in 1984.
London Town, released in 1978, received a generally lukewarm reception.
After the success of the previous five albums, there was every expectation that
McCartney’s success would continue, and it did, commercially speaking. But
the critical angst over the slickness of his productions and his obvious lack
of interest in creating music of “substance” was never far below the surface,
and the latest album was found by many to be, in the words of the New
York Times, “too bland.”51 Back to the Egg, released in June, 1979, was the
final studio album of Wings. Though reaching the UK and US top ten,
and despite its platinum certification for sales (and the inclusion of the
Grammy-winning instrumental “Rockestra Theme”), the album reached a
new low with the critics.52 The next album, recorded solely by McCartney,
was the minimalist synthesizer-driven McCartney II, released in June 1980.
Though reaching number three on the US album charts, it fared less well
with critics, Rolling Stone calling it “an album of aural doodles designed
for the amusement of very young children” and “strident electronic junk
music.” The New York Times’ John Rockwell allowed that the album had
“its moment of charm and even self-revelation,” but concluded that it
“ultimately seems trivial.” He added: “Mr. McCartney seems to need equal
collaborators to stiffen the frothier side of his creative spirit. Like John
Lennon, for instance. Anybody for a Beatles reunion?”53 Of course, time
was quickly running out for such a gathering.
John Lennon: “I just believe in me”

On December 30, 1969, UK broadcaster ITV televised Man of the Decade,
which included segments on John Kennedy, Mao Zedong, and John Lennon.
169 The solo years
In February, 1970, Rolling Stone named John Lennon its “Man of the Year.”54
Lennon had a great deal to prove, particularly with an anti-war left still
stewing from Lennon’s apparent rejection of it on the Beatles’ recording
“Revolution.” He had begun to address its concerns and seek common
cause with his and Yoko Ono’s 1969 peace offensive, and was energized by
a new freedom denied him as a Beatle. By the release of Plastic Ono Band
(1970), on which he sang “I don’t believe in Beatles . . . I just believe in me,”
on the track “God,” he was speaking his mind and acting upon the issues
of his time as an individual, without concern for maintaining the Beatles
myth.
The Lennons christened 1970 “Year One AP” (i.e. After Peace). Lennon
was pleased with the “bed-in for peace” and “War is Over” events of the
past year;55 in the following months, however, he was less satisfied with
symbolic gestures, and took tentative steps toward greater confrontation
with the system. A new agenda required a new look, and in late January,
Lennon and Ono had their hair shorn, in Lennon’s words to “stop being
hyped by revolutionary image and long hair,”56 and donated their locks for
auction at a benefit organized by London Black Power leader Michael X.57
An appearance by the Plastic Ono Band58 on Top of the Pops in mid-February
1970 featured Lennon’s new look: dressed in a black turtleneck sweater, hair
short and uneven, he played keyboard and sang “Instant Karma,” while a
similarly coifed and attired Ono sat behind him, her vision obscured by a
white blindfold, knitting white yarn. This was a stark picture, one at odds
with his Beatles past. For Lennon, ragged and ugly in comparison to the
Beatle image, it was a means of breaking even more fully with his pop star
past.
Trying to bring some order to their personal lives, Lennon and Ono
sought custody (unsuccessfully) of Ono’s young daughter, Kyoko. They also
underwent four months of primal therapy at Dr. Arthur Janov’s Los Angeles
Primal Institute clinic, beginning in April 1970. A therapy that attempts to
move patients to direct emotional experience of past trauma, thus allowing
those repressed feelings to be dealt with openly, Janov’s treatment had a
profound influence on Lennon and Ono, and much of Lennon’s Plastic
Ono Band album, released in December 1970, was composed while Lennon
was in therapy. A masterpiece, this first truly solo project most closely
reflected Lennon’s vision of art as emerging from pain.59 In track after
track, Lennon bared his soul, in the process skewering every institution
that had ever traumatized him, or judged him, or in any sense confined
him. This was an album of “Pain,” as understood in primal therapy. Songs
like “God,” “Isolation,” “I Found Out,” “My Mummy’s Dead,” “Mother,”
and perhaps most audibly “Well Well Well” were the direct artistic fruits
of Lennon’s primal therapy. Not for the timid, the album received mixed
reviews,60 but has since been recognized as one of Lennon’s best and most
influential albums. Promoting the album, Lennon sat down with Rolling
Stone’s Jann Wenner for a massive landmark interview. Over the span of
two installments, in January and February 1971, readers were transfixed by
an account of Lennon’s life that, in detailing the band’s drug use, groupies,
and internal affairs, aggressively sought to shatter the myth of the Beatles,
a move welcomed by New Left advocates.61 The Lennons further aligned
themselves with the radicals through various activities and protests in the
UK62 and in the USA, following their relocation to New York later that year.
Lennon’s next album, Imagine, was released in September 1971, in the
USA (October in the UK). The album signaled the return of Lennon to a
more commercial sound incorporating a variety of textures that had been
absent from the harrowingly single-minded starkness of Plastic Ono Band.
On the title track, suggested by a line from an Ono poem, Lennon imagines
a world in which there are no countries, no greed, no hunger, even no
heaven or religion. He imagines “all the people sharing all the world.” On
numerous tracks, Lennon rejects the establishment and its mechanisms of
control. On “I Don’t Want to Be a Soldier” he sings: “I don’t want to be a
soldier, I don’t want to die. . . . I don’t want to be a lawyer, I don’t want to
lie . . . I don’t want to be a failure, I don’t want to cry.” On “Gimme Some
Truth” Lennon directly challenges the perceived source of so much of the
political left’s anguish, and declares that he will not be had by “no short-
haired, yellow-bellied son of tricky dicky” (i.e. President Nixon). Elsewhere,
Lennon, still in confessional mode after Plastic Ono Band, continues to reveal
his own insecurities, most notably on “Jealous Guy,” “Crippled Inside,”
“It’s So Hard,” and “How?,” which wonders, “How can I go forward when
I don’t know which way I’m facing?” Lennon declares his love for Ono,
who made “everything clear in the world,” on “Oh My Love,” and the
pop-folk hybrid, “Oh, Yoko,” featuring Lennon on harmonica, à la Dylan.
Phil Spector produced the album, though Lennon, like Harrison before
him, successfully reined in his tendency toward overproduction. Lennon
enlists many of the musicians found on All Things Must Pass, with the core
band comprising Lennon on vocals, guitar, and piano, Klaus Voormann on
bass, and Alan White on drums, augmented with Nicky Hopkins’s piano.
George Harrison is also in fine form, lending dobro to “Crippled Inside,”
a delicate guitar part on “Oh My Love,” and slide guitar on “I Don’t Want
to Be a Soldier” and “Gimme Some Truth.” His participation on “How Do
You Sleep?” – a blistering slide part that is among his best recorded work –
only fanned the controversy sparked by the song’s lyrics. Irked by perceived
slights on McCartney’s Ram, Lennon lampooned the cover of Ram, which
shows McCartney restraining a ram by its horns – early pressings of the
album included a postcard of Lennon restraining a pig by its ears. But this
171 The solo years
broadside paled in comparison to “How Do You Sleep?,” on which the

sounds of an orchestra tuning up – a swipe at McCartney’s pretensions to
art, here pointedly referring to the opening of Sgt. Pepper’s Lonely Hearts
Club Band – give way to the kind of character assassination associated with
Dylan in the mid-1960s, on tracks like “Positively Fourth Street” and “Like
a Rolling Stone.” While Dylan’s targets remain undefined, Lennon spells it
out. Humorous, but no less cutting, were lyrics like “The only thing you
done was yesterday, and since you’re gone it’s just another day,” which took a
swipe at McCartney’s biggest song and one of his latest singles. Lennon sings,
“Those freaks was right when they said you was dead,” which referred to the
“Paul is Dead” hoax of the late 1960s, and “The sound you make is muzak to
my ears,” which is a particularly pointed comment on the inconsequential
nature of McCartney’s songs, then the focus of much of the rock press’s
criticism of his post-Beatles work. Adding insult to injury, Lennon took a
swipe at McCartney’s relationship with Linda McCartney, singing, “Jump
when your momma tell you anything,” which might be viewed as somewhat
disingenuous given Lennon’s very public personal and artistic relationship
with Ono. Still, while the Lennon and McCartney tiff made for good press,
even Lennon admitted (to a Syracuse University audience, on the day of the
album’s release), that “How Do You Sleep?” was “an outburst. Things are
still the same between us. He was and still is my closest friend, except for
Yoko.”63 The album was generally well received by the press64 and public,
reaching number one in the US and UK charts, while the single from the
album, “Imagine,” was a number three hit in the USA. Yet there was some
concern over Lennon’s stridency. Rolling Stone’s Ben Gerson gave the album
a mixed review, which appears prescient given the content of Lennon’s next
album, Some Time in New York City:
Most insidiously, I fear that John sees himself in the role of truth-teller, and,
as such, can justify any kind of self-indulgent brutality in the name of
truth . . . Personally, I’m interested in John the man, his personal trials and
dramas, because he has revealed them to us as John the extraordinary artist.
If he does not continue as such, his posturings will soon seem not merely
dull but irrelevant. It seems to me that John is facing the most extraordinary
challenge of his career, both personally and artistically.65
Nevertheless, Lennon’s credibility with the New Left was at a new high –
even one-time president of the Students for a Democratic Society (SDS),
Todd Gitlin, in reacting to Lennon’s first two solo albums and the book pub-
lication of Lennon’s entire Rolling Stone interview,66 applauded Lennon for
shedding the myths of the Beatles and the counterculture, and for provid-
ing a path for renewal of the badly fragmented and rudderless movement:
“Lennon revives the idea of leader as exemplar.” Writing in the lay Catholic
journal Commonweal, Gitlin expressed a desire that Lennon’s authenticity

and “public struggle to be free” would spark a new “commonality” that
might resuscitate political and social activism.67
Relocating to New York in September, 1971, the Lennons were befriended
by Yippies Jerry Rubin and Abbie Hoffman, and took a sharp turn into
radical politics. In November they headlined a benefit for the victims of
the Attica prison riot that had taken place the previous month.68 A month
later, Lennon and Ono visited Ann Arbor, Michigan, for a benefit for John
Sinclair, leader of the White Panther Party, and manager of the rock band
MC5. Sinclair had been sentenced in 1969 to ten years’ incarceration after
being found guilty of selling two joints to an undercover police officer.
Then, in February 1972, Lennon and Ono joined demonstrators outside
the New York office of British Overseas Airways Corporation, supporting a
boycott of British exports as a protest against the deployment of troops in
Northern Ireland. This was followed by a week-long stint as co-hosts of the
popular afternoon variety program The Mike Douglas Show. The audience
was treated to an appearance by Chuck Berry, Lennon’s boyhood idol,
but the Lennons sparked controversy with guests Jerry Rubin and Black
Panther founder (with Huey Newton) Bobby Seale. Lennon was clearly
invigorated by the political ferment that engulfed his Greenwich Village
neighborhood, and was beginning to piece together an ambitious anti-war
agenda. Of particular concern to the Republican administration and party,
the Twenty-Sixth Amendment to the US Constitution had been ratified
on July 1, 1971, thus granting the vote to eighteen-year-olds, who would
now be eligible to vote in the 1972 presidential election, an election that
would focus on the Vietnam War. Fearful that Lennon would lead protests
at the Republican National Convention and mount a voter registration
campaign and tour, and of the forces coalescing into a voting populous that
likely would hold Nixon to account for the country’s continued presence in
Vietnam, Republican Senator Strom Thurmond advised that deportation
of Lennon might be the best option. Lennon’s misdemeanor drug bust in
1968, for possession of cannabis, was ostensibly the cause for issuance of
a deportation order in March 1972, but, as Jon Wiener describes in Come
Together: John Lennon in His Time, the FBI’s campaign of harassment and
wire-tapping, under the direction of Nixon administration officials, proved
crippling to Lennon’s radical activities.69
In real fear of being forced to leave their chosen home, and of being
unable to pursue the custody of Ono’s daughter, Kyoko (eventually granted
by the court in March 1972),70 Lennon dropped his radical agenda, but not
before the release of his and Ono’s most radical album, Some Time in New
York City, produced in late 1971 and early 1972 by Phil Spector. Lennon
enlisted Elephant’s Memory as his backup band for the album. Housed
173 The solo years
in a sleeve that satirized the front page of the New York Times, complete
with a doctored photo showing President Nixon and Mao Zedong dancing
together, nude, the double-disc album is a relentless assault on chauvinism
(“Woman is the Nigger of the World” and Ono’s “Sisters, O Sisters”),71
racism (Lennon and Ono’s “Angela”), army affronts in Northern Ireland
(“The Luck of the Irish” and “Sunday Bloody Sunday”), US involvement
in Vietnam, and the oppressive state (“John Sinclair,” “Attica,” and Ono’s
“Born in a Prison”). Disc two was a live recording of the Lennons at New
York’s Filmore East in June 1971, with Frank Zappa and the Mothers of
Invention. Though it is interesting as an historical artifact, the execution is
uneven, and, while Lennon is clearly leading the effort, the performances
are often dominated by Ono’s wailing and Zappa’s improvisation, though
the versions of “Cold Turkey” and Walter Ward’s “Well (Baby Please Don’t
Go)” show Lennon in top form, aggressive at the mike and bold in his
performance. Released in June, 1972, the album was a critical and commer-
cial failure.72 It is, perhaps, the stridency of Lennon and Ono’s messages
that was most problematic for the audience. Lennon substituted political
commitment and sloganeering for his natural oeuvre of lyrics that are at
once personal and universal. It was this failure to communicate on the per-
sonal level – in stark contrast to Plastic Ono Band and Imagine – that most
disappointed fans and critics. Fans were willing to accompany Lennon as
he exorcised his demons, to share in his pain, and to become intimates,
because he had been an integral part of their youth and had grown up
with them. He had earned the right to confide in them, and his poetics
allowed his personal experience to be shared. For some, Some Time in New
York City, with its harshness and impersonal sloganeering, transgressed this
relationship.73 Crushed by the album’s commercial and critical failure, and
by the weight of the Nixon administration’s efforts to deport him, Lennon’s
future efforts were less likely to be directed through radical politics.
In September 1973, Lennon and Ono separated, and Lennon was alone
for the first time in his adult life. Cracking under the pressure of his sep-
aration from Ono and ongoing efforts by the US government to deport
him, Lennon spent more than a year drowning his demons and insecurity
in alcohol and carousing with friends Harry Nilsson, Ringo Starr, Keith
Moon, and Phil Spector. Recorded shortly before his relocation to Los
Angeles, the self-produced Mind Games was his first solo album without
the input of either Spector or Ono. Released in November, it had better
sales than its predecessor, but received only lukewarm response from the
critics. Nevertheless, Mind Games was a top ten album in the USA, and
the title track made it into the US top twenty singles. Far more varied and
textured than Some Time in New York City, Lennon’s rockers, “Tight A$”
and “Meat City,” retain that album’s energy without its anger, while tracks
like “Aisumasen (I’m Sorry),” “One Day (at a Time),” “Out the Blue,” and
“You Are Here” mark the return of the fragile artist, here pining for Ono
from a deep sense of regret. Lennon’s message songs, “Only People” and
“Mind Games,” are delivered without any of the rancor that blighted much
of the message of the previous album. Even “Bring on the Lucie (Freda
Peeple),” while taking to task the forces aligned against him, including the
Nixon administration, FBI, and INS, and warning that, “your time is up,
you better know it,” manages to do so in a less aggressive manor, deflating
his threat at the beginning of the track with a mock call to arms – “This is
it boys. Over the hill!” While the album might not have risen to the level of
Plastic Ono Band and Imagine, for many fans and critics it was a welcome
step in the right direction.74
Walls and Bridges, issued in October 1974, received fair notices, and was
a number one album in the USA, with “Whatever Gets You Thru the Night”
topping the singles charts.75 Perhaps his most Beatle-esque solo album, the
collection featured some of Lennon’s most intricate arrangements, with
“Old Dirt Road,” “Nobody Loves You (When You’re Down and Out),” and
the magnificent “#9 Dream” incorporating strings in textured soundscapes
not previously heard on a solo Lennon album. Yet tracks like “Steel and
Glass,” and, particularly, “I’m Scared,” while far more the creatures of
studio technique, harken back lyrically to the stark desolation of Plastic
Ono Band. Lennon also demonstrates that he can still rock, giving one of
his best vocal performances on the funky “What You Got.” While “Surprise,
Surprise (Sweet Bird of Paradox)” revels in the awakening of his romance
with May Pang, the assistant Ono had had accompany Lennon during their
separation, Ono figures prominently in “Going Down on Love,” with its
regrets over loss of “something precious and rare,” and “Bless You,” which
hopefully states, “Still we’re deep in each other’s hearts.”
Lennon followed Walls and Bridges with Rock ’n’ Roll, released in Febru-
ary 1975. Though it had been started during the first days of his separation
from Ono, excessive drinking by Lennon and producer Phil Spector led
to recordings of variable quality. Worse yet, their disorderly conduct led to
banishment from the A&M Records studio at which they had been working.
Spector then disappeared with the tapes, returning them while Lennon was
in the midst of recording Walls and Bridges. Lennon revisited the rock and
roll project after completion of that album. Growing out of the settlement
of a dispute between Lennon and Morris Levy, head of Roulette Records
and publisher of Chuck Berry’s early catalog, over Lennon’s cribbing the
line “Here come old flat-top” from Berry’s “You Can’t Catch Me” for the
Beatles’ “Come Together,” Rock ‘n’ Roll included numerous rock and roll
songs from Levy’s holdings and others. It was released by Capitol to uneven
reviews, though solid sales pushed the album into the US top ten.
175 The solo years
In the midst of the booze-fueled holiday, Lennon, surprisingly produc-

tive, had released two solo albums and contributed to Starr’s Ringo and
Goodnight Vienna albums, as well as to Harry Nilsson’s Pussy Cats. By late
1974, however, he was ready to return to Ono. Settling a bet struck with
Elton John, who had played on “Whatever Gets You Thru the Night,” on
Walls and Bridges, Lennon made good on his promise to play live with John
and his band if the track became a US number one, making a surprise
appearance at John’s November 28 Madison Square Garden concert. He
played the single, as well as “Lucy in the Sky with Diamonds,” and “I Saw
Her Standing There.” Ono was in the audience, and a short meeting after
the show was followed by Lennon’s return to New York and Ono in January
1975. He recorded a version of “Across the Universe” for David Bowie’s
Young Americans album, and co-wrote Bowie’s hit from the set, “Fame.”
He performed live for A Salute to Sir Lew, a tribute for British entertain-
ment impresario Sir Lew Grade, which aired on ABC in June.76 The biggest
news of the year, however, was that Ono was pregnant, and on October 9,
1975, Lennon’s thirty-fifth birthday, Ono gave birth to a son, Sean. In 1976,
his contract with Capitol/EMI lapsed and was not renewed. Lennon was
without contractual obligation for the first time in fifteen years. In April,
he made a guest appearance, his last for five years, on Starr’s Rotogravure,
supplying Starr with “Cookin’ (In the Kitchen of Love).” In July, Lennon’s
permanent residency application was finally approved, and his fight to stay
in the country was over.77 Freer than he had been since he was a teenager,
Lennon settled into fatherhood, domesticity, and house-husbandry.
Over the next five years, Lennon made himself available to the public
only sparingly, occasionally appearing in the personality and society pages,
as when he and Ono attended Jimmy Carter’s Presidential Inauguration
Gala in January, 1977, and when they contributed funds for purchasing
bullet-proof vests for New York’s finest.78 But this was not sufficient for
many within the youth culture. “An Open Letter to John Lennon” appeared
in Rolling Stone in 1977, imploring Lennon to come out of retirement and
respond to the public’s curiosity, and give some direction to the failing
youth movement.79 In May 1979, Lennon and Ono took out full-page
advertisements in the New York Times and London’s Sunday Times, as well
as a Tokyo newspaper. Called “A Love Letter from John and Yoko, To People
Who Ask Us What, When and Why,” the piece sang the praises of domesticity
and “magic,” and thanked the public for its good wishes and interest, but
gave no indication that Lennon’s retirement would end anytime soon.80
By mid-1980, Lennon was starting to feel an urge to record again, and,
armed with a number of new songs, returned to the studio in August. In late
September, Lennon and Ono signed with David Geffen’s new independent
label, Geffen Records, which released Double Fantasy in mid-November.
Lennon and Ono each contributed seven songs to the album, subtitled
“A Heart Play.” In the wave of nostalgia and grief that followed Lennon’s
death, the album sent three tracks into the top ten singles charts in the USA,
with “(Just Like) Starting Over” reaching number one three weeks after
his death, “Woman” rising to number two in March 1981, and “Watching
the Wheels” making the top ten in May. Upon its release, however, critical
reception of Double Fantasy, and its core theme of domestic bliss, was
mixed,81 though the album was greeted by the public as a welcome end
to Lennon’s seclusion, and a promising rebirth.82 A reinvigorated peace
movement, a Beatle reunion – with Lennon back, anything seemed possible.
On the night of December 8, 1980, however, as Lennon and Ono returned
home from a recording session, a voice called from the shadows, and in an
instant ringing with gunfire, the dream was over.
Lennon’s death was met with months of grieving and assessment of his
accomplishments and those of the Sixties generation. An editorial in The
Nation spoke of the loss of an “unacknowledged President who stood for
peace.”83 Writing in The Center Magazine, one-time president of the SDS
Todd Gitlin commented on the mass exhibitions of sorrow and solidarity
around the fallen hero: “Could it be that this vast longing for peace . . . this
force of, yes, love which had once seemingly come out of nowhere and
turned so many lives upside down, could it be in some crazy way that its time,
which had once come, could come again?”84 Yet there was also criticism.
Conservatives, flush with Ronald Reagan’s election to the Presidency of
the United States, crowed over the end of 1960s-era liberalism.85 Richard
Brookhiser, senior editor for the National Review, noted: “Lennon and his
friends influenced other things besides music, mostly for the worse.”86
The response to Lennon’s death encapsulated and highlighted lingering
hostility as pundits on the left and right attempted to define the legacy of the
1960s in the USA. Postwar prosperity had ushered in a new class of people
educated at the country’s colleges and universities. This “progressive” mid-
dle class generally opposed the Vietnam War, favored civil rights for black
Americans and equal rights for women, and was sympathetic to environ-
mental and consumer causes. The repercussions for American politics were
vast, most notably in the alienation from the Democratic Party of many
socially conservative (and largely working-class) northeastern Democrats
loyal to the Democratic Party since Franklin Roosevelt’s New Deal pro-
grams of the 1930s. Stressing traditional social and moral values, rejecting
the counterculture, and renouncing big government programs, especially
those tied to race, conservatives exploited the break in Democratic ranks to
court disaffected Democrats.
Ronald Reagan, governor of California from 1967 to 1975, and a fer-
vent opponent of the New Left and counterculture, emerged in 1980 as
177 The solo years
the Republican nomination for president, and became the overwhelming

choice for cultural conservatives, both Republican and Democrat. President
Jimmy Carter remained the candidate for progressives. For voters, the lines
in the culture war were clearly drawn. Unfortunately for Carter and the
Democratic Party, by the mid-1970s the coalition of blacks, women, Jews,
organized labor, and environmentalists, which had been a core progres-
sive constituency in the 1960s, was badly fragmented. In the 1980 election,
Reagan rolled over Carter in a landslide, ushering in an era of Republican
and conservative domination of the executive and judicial branches of gov-
ernment. Thus, in early December 1980, with Reagan’s inauguration just
over a month away, the Republican ascendancy was at hand, and with it
the ruin of 1960s liberalism. With Lennon’s passing, the last vestiges of the
“movement” fell into a retreat from which it has yet to recover.
“And so dear friends, you’ll just have to carry on”

On 1970’s “God,” Lennon had declared that “the dream is over,” bringing
to a close the idealism and fantasy of the previous decade. For many fans,
however, the chance of a Beatles reunion and reanimation of 1960s era
liberalism had postponed this conclusion. For them, his death brought
horrific closure to that idealism, and wondering, again quoting “God,”
how they would “carry on.” Lennon’s stature was elevated following his
death, and his accomplishments and influence amplified, often, perhaps
unavoidably, at McCartney’s expense. Eventually, in 1981, an exasperated
McCartney reacted, confiding to Beatles biographer and friend Hunter
Davies (who later, to McCartney’s shock, published his comments): “He
could be a maneuvering swine, which no one ever realized. Now since
the death he’s become Martin Luther Lennon. But that wasn’t him either.
He wasn’t some sort of holy saint.”87 For some, however, he had indeed
become a kind of secular saint, increasingly beyond reproach, as reaction to
publication of Albert Goldman’s The Lives of John Lennon (1988) indicates.
This tawdry exposé of a megalomaniacal, abusive, drug-addled, bulimic
recluse was too much for his fans and defenders of the 1960s youth legacy,
and led to a public pillorying of its author across a wide swathe of the
mainstream media. Most indignant of all, Rolling Stone blasted its “mean-
spirited scandalousness.”88
In the wake of Lennon’s death, McCartney returned to recording Tug
of War, with producer George Martin and Beatles engineer Geoff Emerick.
“It’s a tug of war, what with one thing and another, we were trying to
outscore each other, in this tug of war,” McCartney sang, and the title
track and “Here Today” were taken by many to be his personal address
to Lennon. The album also featured a duet with Stevie Wonder, “Ebony
and Ivory,” which was an international hit on the singles charts. Created
under the duress of his friend’s murder, and his ambivalent feelings toward
him, Tug of War is, perhaps, McCartney’s most personal album. Critically
acclaimed,89 the album was number one in the US and UK charts.
Disgusted by an industry that dissected and reassembled his work to
suit its own interests, and which capitalized on the horror of Lennon’s
murder, Harrison lost interest in the life of the pop star, and produced
only two more albums before taking a five-year hiatus from recording.
The first was the revamped Somewhere in England, featuring Harrison,
Starr, and the McCartneys on “All Those Years Ago,” a reworking of a
track he originally intended for a new Ringo Starr album, here rewritten
to memorialize Lennon and as an indictment of those who “don’t act with
much honesty” and have “forgotten all about mankind” and God. Pushed
by the wave of nostalgia following Lennon’s murder, the single quickly went
to number two in the US Billboard charts, where it stayed for three weeks
in July 1981. Still, the album garnered little attention from the press, with
what little there was mixed.90 The second album was the less than inspired
Gone Troppo, which ended Harrison’s commitment to Warner Brothers and
marked the beginning of his retirement from public life until 1985.
With the aid of Harry Nilsson, Ron Wood of the Rolling Stones, Stephen
Stills, Harrison, and McCartney, Starr completed Can’t Fight Lighting, now
called Stop and Smell the Roses (1981), his best-received album in years. At
its best, according to the New York Times’s Robert Palmer, the album’s pop
was “infectious and charming. And since he’s Ringo, one doesn’t have to
plumb it for profundity in order to enjoy it.”91 Nevertheless, disappointing
sales prompted RCA to drop Starr in 1982. Though his recording career
was flagging, other interests proved more successful. Starr jumpstarted his
film career92 with the slapstick Caveman, a minor hit released in 1981. Also
that year, Starr married “Bond girl” Barbara Bach, who had appeared in
Caveman. His success in the film was followed, in 1984, by Starr’s first of
two seasons as narrator of Thomas the Tank Engine and Friends, the popular
British children’s show later exported to the USA.93
Though more uncomfortable than ever with his celebrity status, and
generally disenchanted with the industry, Harrison was drawn back to
music in 1985, when he appeared with Carl Perkins, Ringo Starr, and
Eric Clapton on HBO’s Carl Perkins and Friends concert. This was the
beginning of a particularly productive and happy period in Harrison’s life.
In November, 1987, Harrison released Cloud Nine, which, with a generally
positive response from the critics,94 was his first platinum album since All
Things Must Pass. Additionally, the first single from the album, “Got My
Mind Set on You,” was a number one hit in January 1988. Shortly after
179 The solo years
the success of Cloud Nine, Harrison assembled the Traveling Wilburys,

including himself, Bob Dylan, Tom Petty, Jeff Lynne and Roy Orbison.
The band’s first album, The Traveling Wilburys: Volume One, released in
November 1988, was a triple platinum worldwide hit, reaching number
three in the US album charts. This popular and critical success95 led a year
later to the follow-up, The Traveling Wilburys: Volume Three, which went
platinum. Harrison followed this effort with a thirteen-date tour of Japan
in late 1991, some of which made it on to a double disc and documentary in
1992. In the middle of the decade, apart from activities tied to the release of
the Beatles’ Anthology, Harrison was content to withdraw from center stage
and act in support of his friends’ projects, for example his 1997 collaboration
with Ravi Shankar, on Chants of India, an album of chants based on Vedic
scripture.
In late 1999 Harrison survived a nearly fatal knife attack at the hands
of a deranged intruder in his home. Just as Lennon had lost his life to an
insane assailant, Harrison, stabbed several times in the chest, very nearly
suffered the same fate, and in response withdrew further from public life.
Harrison battled cancer throughout the latter part of the 1990s, before
finally succumbing to the illness in 2001. In the last year of his life, though
gravely ill, Harrison continued to work, opening discussions with his friend,
a founder of Cirque du Soleil, Guy Laliberté, about a possible Beatles-
inspired production (the successful Cirque du Soleil production, The
Beatles: Love, premiered in June 2006).96 Harrison also played on sessions
for other musicians,97 began remastering the Traveling Wilburys’ catalog for
reissue (the collection was released in 2007), and worked on recordings for
Brainwashed, an album posthumously completed by Jeff Lynne and Harri-
son’s son, Dhani. Upon Harrison’s death, on November 29, 2001, his family
released a statement saying he “left this world as he lived in it, conscious of
God, fearless of death and at peace, surrounded by family and friends. He
often said, ‘Everything else can wait, but the search of God cannot wait, and
love one another.’”98
Brainwashed was released a year after Harrison’s death. New York Times’s
critic and author of The Beatles (1995), Allan Kozinn, noted the cohesive
thread running through Harrison’s solo career, and culminating in this last
album: “The new material has a familiar ring. The underlying theme, after
all, is one Harrison has explored since All Things Must Pass in 1970: that the
trappings of success are meaningless compared with the spiritual quest.”99
On this final studio album, as on his first, Harrison warned of maya.
Pipes of Peace, released in 1983, was McCartney’s last top ten album
until 1997’s Flaming Pie. Pushed by the second of two duets with Michael
Jackson, the number one hit, “Say Say Say” (the other, “The Girl is Mine,”
appeared on Jackson’s Thriller), the album reached number one in the UK
charts, and number four in the USA, though clearly viewed as inferior to
Tug of War. McCartney also starred in the film Give My Regards to Broad
Street, for which he also wrote the script. The film, depicting a day in
McCartney’s life, as he attempts to reclaim master recordings stolen by an
unsavory underling, was accompanied by McCartney’s soundtrack, which,
like the film, included numerous Beatle covers, including “Here, There and
Everywhere,” “Eleanor Rigby,” “Yesterday,” and “The Long and Winding
Road.” Though “No More Lonely Nights” was a top ten hit in the UK and
US singles charts, the film and soundtrack debuted in 1984 to a dismal
reception.
Press to Play followed, but McCartney’s albums of the late 1980s and
early 1990s demonstrated his technical prowess more than artistic inspi-
ration, and languished in the charts, revived only by Flowers in the Dirt
(1989), which peaked at number one in the UK and number 21 in the USA,
and included McCartney’s collaboration with Elvis Costello, “My Brave
Face,” which was a hit in the USA and UK. Flowers in the Dirt and Off the
Ground (1993) each spawned successful world tours. While McCartney’s
pop output for the 1990s centered on live albums,100 in 1997 he released the
critically acclaimed studio album Flaming Pie, which the New York Times
dubbed his “best solo album since his 1982 solo masterpiece Tug of War.”101
McCartney continued to exhibit the experimental, even adventurous, pro-
clivities that had marked his work as a Beatle, and he mounted several
successful forays into classical music and other forms (which continued
into the new century), beginning with 1991’s Paul McCartney’s Liverpool
Oratorio (co-written with Carl Davis), which was a number one worldwide
hit on the classical charts, as was his second major work of classical music,
Standing Stone, released in 1997. Paul McCartney’s Working Classical (1999),
featuring classical reworkings of songs from his solo career, also did well on
the classical charts. Liverpool Sound Collage, released in 2000, was created
to accompany an exhibition of the works of Peter Blake (the influential pop
artist and designer of the Sgt. Pepper’s Lonely Hearts Club Band cover), and
included, among other things, snippets of Beatles dialog, and the Liverpool
Oratorio. Ecce Cor Meum, released in 2006, did well in the classical charts,
and captured the Best Album Award at the UK’s Classical BRIT Awards.
McCartney also tried his hand at ambient music, recording under the name
“The Fireman.” In 2005, McCartney released Twin Freaks, a double album
of remixes by one of England’s premier DJs, remixers, and producers, the
Freelance Hellraiser.
The loss of Linda McCartney to breast cancer in 1998 sent McCartney
into a deep depression, but he emerged from mourning with a collec-
tion of rock and roll covers, Run Devil Run, released in 1999. Also in
1999, he was inducted into the Rock and Roll Hall of Fame, following in
181 The solo years
Lennon’s footsteps, whom he inducted in 1994. The retrospective collection

Wingspan: Hits and History followed in 2001, and was a top ten hit in the
USA and UK. Driving Rain premiered in November 2001, and included the
9/11-inspired anthem, “Freedom.” Generally well received by the critics,
the album reached only number twenty-six in the US charts, and fared even
worse in the UK, but the tour that followed was a massive worldwide suc-
cess. McCartney was the first artist to release an album on Starbucks’ Hear
Music label: Memory Almost Full, a top five album in the UK and USA, was
promoted heavily on YouTube and Apple Computer’s iTunes, and demon-
strated McCartney’s willingness to approach the audience wherever it might
be found.
McCartney, following in the footsteps of Cliff Richard and George
Martin, was knighted in 1997, in recognition of his “services to music,”
but his commercial success undoubtedly played a part in the award. His
publishing interests have made him one of the richest men in the world
(though he does not own the rights to his own Beatles music). He has
continued to play to packed coliseums and stadiums throughout the world.
McCartney’s advocacy of countercultural values, while often newsworthy,
has been measured. Always a proponent of the legalization of marijuana,
he reportedly swore off marijuana only after the birth of his daughter with
Heather Mills, Beatrice, in 2003. He and wife Linda McCartney supported
People for the Ethical Treatment of Animals (PETA), the largest animal
rights organization in the world. Additionally, Linda introduced her own
line of vegetarian meals, which continued to be sold after her death in 1998.
McCartney and Heather Mills (married in 2002) were vocal opponents of
the use of landmines and the yearly baby seal hunt in Canada. Their joint
activism was short-lived, however, when rancorous divorce proceedings
were engaged in 2006.102
McCartney has become iconic of the sense of freedom and community
that permeated the counterculture. He closed the Live Aid show in 1985 with
“Let It Be,” and twenty years later he opened the Live 8 concert in London,
playing “Sgt. Pepper’s Lonely Hearts Club Band” (“It was twenty years ago,
today”) with U2 singer Bono, and closing the program that night, leading
the day’s performers and the Hyde Park audience in a rendition of “Hey
Jude.” In 2003, he and his band played in Moscow; the DVD that followed,
Paul McCartney Live in Red Square, captured his show and reminiscences
by Russians who had developed their own counterculture in the 1960s, and
for whom the Beatles had become the supreme model.
Harrison’s 1987 “comeback” prompted Starr to contribute drums on
Cloud Nine’s Beatle-esque “When We Was Fab.” Shortly thereafter, having
received treatment after years of alcohol abuse, Starr inaugurated his “All-
Starr Band,” an ever-changing roster of rock notables that has mounted
numerous successful tours, the latest taking place in 2006. His recording
career was also reinvigorated by collaboration with Mark Hudson, dating
back to work Hudson did on Time Takes Time, a critical success103 but com-
mercial failure (prompting Private Music to drop Starr from their label).104
Nevertheless, Starr and Hudson deepened their professional relationship,
and the 1998 album, Vertical Man, which received fair reviews105 but only
meager sales, was the start of a collaboration that continued to the end of
2007. Dropped by Mercury, Starr released his next two albums, Ringo Rama
(2003) and Choose Love (2005), on Koch. Choose Love was his most critically
acclaimed album in years, but failed to chart in the USA and UK. In August
2007, Starr released Photograph: The Very Best of Ringo Starr, a compilation
of recordings dating back to 1970, and comprising work on Capitol (EMI),
Atlantic, Mercury, Boardwalk, Private Music, and Koch. Starr returned to
EMI for Liverpool 8 (released in January 2008), his first with the company
since 1975. Starr has retained his attachment to the values of his youth, and
is as likely to flash a peace sign today as he was in the heyday of the “flower
children.”
At the dawn of a new millennium, Starr and McCartney continue to
record and perform. Their youth, like that of other baby-boomers, fades
into the mists of memory, as do the reasons why they seemed to matter so
much. Grown iconic now, like the “Summer of Love,” and “Woodstock,”
the two Beatles carry on. The vision they put forth is less dogmatic and
didactic than that of their youth, or of their bandmates, for that matter,
and less of a challenge to the powers that be, but, at its heart, it is the same
as it always was, since it first sprang forth in a more innocently optimistic
time – in Starr’s words, “Peace and Love, Peace and Love, Peace and Love.”
The work of four young men, and that of the two that remain, remains a
moving declaration of individual and communal possibilities.
10 Any time at all: the Beatles’ free phrase rhythms
walter everett
A number of those interested in the music of the Beatles have singled out
for discussion its rhythmic inventiveness. Most discussions of the Beatles’
rhythmic devices start and end with an appreciation of their remarkably
wide-ranging approaches to the metric surface, paying particular attention
to asymmetrical meters (those representing measures containing numbers
of beats not divisible by two or three, as in the 5/4 meter appearing in
“Within You Without You” [SP])1 or the many examples of freely mixed
meter (as with the repeated alternation of 4/4 and 3/4 bars in “All You
Need is Love” [MMT ]). Another interesting development in the Beatles’
rhythmic invention is their flexibility with strongly accented patterns of
syncopation, which arises when normally weak beats or weak parts of beats
(such as the second and fourth beats in 4/4 meter, or the second eighth
within a quarter-note beat) are accented by strong melodic events (as with
a sudden high note), rhythmically unexpected chord changes (normally
changing on downbeats but subject to expressive versatility), or obtrusive
dynamics (as with the normal rock drumbeat pattern, which loudly accents
the snare on beats two and four). Because these and other related effects
are manifest for the most part at the beat level (between the barlines),
they are all relatively superficial and may be accounted for chiefly in the
musical foreground (as opposed to groupings of measures and of phrases,
which may be thought to occupy progressively deeper middle-ground and
background orientations).2 But perhaps of even greater significance for the
individual character and expressive potential of many of their hundreds of
songs is the group’s free treatment of phrase rhythm. In this domain, we
must recognize a larger-scale manifestation of regular or irregular accent
patterns, measured in phrase lengths rather than within measures. These
patterns derive from both (1) the manner in which successive downbeats
(often made plain by motivic repetition and harmonic changes) relate to
one another – some will be stronger than others; and (2) the manner in
which multi-measure groupings (often adhering to the scanning of the
poetic text) cohere in larger units such as phrases and periodic groupings
of phrases. The purpose of this chapter will be to examine the rhythmic
nature of the music of the Beatles from a large-scale, hypermetric3 and
phrase-based perspective, making reference to a large number of Beatles
[183]
184 Walter Everett
Table 10.1 The Beatles’ canon on compact disc
(Designation) Full title (Recording dates)
(PPM) Please Please Me (1962–3)

(PM) Past Masters (1962–9)
(WtB) With the Beatles (1963)
(HDN) A Hard Day’s Night (1964)
(BfS) Beatles for Sale (1964)
(H!) Help! (1965)
(RS) Rubber Soul (1965)
(Rev) Revolver (1966)
(SP) Sgt. Pepper’s Lonely Hearts Club Band (1966–7)
(MMT) Magical Mystery Tour (1966–7)
(YS) Yellow Submarine (1967–8)
(WA) The Beatles (the “White Album”) (1968)
(LIB) Let It Be (1969–70)
(AR) Abbey Road (1969)
compositions from throughout their career as recording artists (1962–9). A

handful of illustrations will be examined in somewhat closer detail.
The Beatles’ phrase rhythms are foursquare often enough to permit the
establishment of regular norms (that is, repeated lengths of four bars plus
four bars) against which abnormal lengths can be measured. A large number
of their songs, however, feature in one section or another various irregular-
ities that will be scrutinized according to the following characteristics, each
of which will be defined and exemplified below:
(1) contrasting unit lengths

(2) expanded prototypes
(3) reinterpretations of accent at the hypermetric level
(4) tonicization-related stretching and elision
(5) adjustments required by changes in harmonic rhythm
(6) thoroughly asymmetrical patterns
Because these various approaches to the plasticity of phrase are interwoven

with one another in the Beatles’ music, they will not necessarily be intro-
duced in turn, but will rather be referred to as they are found to influence
our chosen illustrations.
In many cases, irregularities in phrase length are closely tied to the
given phrase’s formal function within the song as a whole. Because of
the presence in each case of a lyric text, some devices have compelling
poetic connotations as well. While all three of the composing Beatles (John
Lennon, Paul McCartney, and George Harrison) experimented with free
phrase rhythms, Lennon was adventurous most often – though the far less
prolific Harrison most consistently – in this regard.
Example 1 “Long Long Long” (verse)
Before we investigate properties of contrasting unit lengths, we should

note that metric groupings comprising odd numbers of measures some-
times appear exclusively, without direct comparison to others of the much
more “normal” duple-measured lengths. The Beatles often embrace asym-
metrical three-bar lengths as their unit of measure, as in “Long Long Long”
(WA). The Renaissance-era mensuration system may help us understand
the nesting of metric levels in this song: the hypermeasure divided into
three bars may be referred to as a “perfection,” as opposed to an “imper-
fection,” which would group pairs of measures into hypermeasures. This
song’s triple division of a hypermeasure into three-bar groups, its normally
duple groupings of beats into two-beat measures, and its triple division of
a beat into three equal eighths, might be conceived, respectively, as illus-
trating an example in “perfect modus,” “imperfect tempus,” and “perfect
prolatio.” (This metric structure might be notated with beats represented
as dotted quarters – perfect prolatio; with two beats per 6/8 measure –
imperfect tempus; and with three measures per phrase – perfect modus. In
nearly all tonal music, the “imperfect modus” pattern governs most phrase-
level ratios that are typically duple in nature, but this was not so much the
case in the Renaissance, hence our inspiration to refer to Beatles patterns in
somewhat archaic, though unusually appropriate, terms.) The vocal melody
and chord patterns for the verse (0:08–0:41)4 of “Long Long Long,” along
with a simple analysis of phrase rhythm, are given in Example 1. In this
and all following examples, horizontal brackets above the staff demarcate
the extent of hypermeasures rather than phrase and subphrase groupings,
although there is usually significant overlap between the meter and the
phrase articulation. Here, the lyric’s reference to an extreme length of time
is portrayed through verses divided as three three-bar units (perfections),
all in a slow 6/8 meter but for a final, stretched-out bar in 9/8.5 In each of
186 Walter Everett
the three hypermetric units, two bars of vocal melody are appended by a
measure-long instrumental tag. Note that the last unit (the hypermeasure
labelled “2a” above its bracket [0:30–0:41]) is an extended revision of the
melodic-harmonic pattern set forth in the second and third bars of unit
2 (0:23–0:29), and thus an unambiguous representation of a “long, long,
long time.” A similar example, the song “Wait” (RS), had been composed
three years earlier by John Lennon, notably on a similar poetic idea, even
using the same opening lyric (“it’s been a long time . . . ”). Here, verses are
built as three bars (0:00–0:06) plus three bars (0:06–0:12). Lennon’s hyper-
metric perfection is not unlike the “Ritmo di tre battute” of the Scherzo
of Beethoven’s Ninth Symphony, and even more like the last movement of
Brahms’s Opus 25 Piano Quartet. Lennon’s uptempo rhythm is more read-
ily comprehensible than that in the ambiguously slow “Long Long Long,”
but I find Harrison’s moody and meditative example more evocative.
Contrasting unit lengths

Often, contrasts are presented between duple and triple units. In McCart-
ney’s “You Never Give Me Your Money” (AR), square 4 + 4 verses ini-
tially in a strict descending-fifth sequence (I7 – IV7 – VII7 – III – VI7 –
II7 – V7 – I [0:23–0:46]) are followed by a repeated three-bar double-plagal
codetta (1:31–1:39). (I use the term “double plagal” to characterize the
descending-fourth progression VII – IV – I, which nests one neighboring
plagal relationship within another.) The three-bar double-plagal cadence
in “You Never Give Me Your Money” (one measure per chord) conveys a
timeless quality that exemplifies the lyric’s reference to a “magic feeling,”
hovering gently on Harrison’s Leslie-tremolo Telecaster (suddenly switched
to the lead pick-up for the slow arpeggiations) as if an aural escape from the
standard duple, business-oriented, “money”-preoccupied verse.6 Contrast
in the form of strong internal disagreement is suggested in McCartney’s
verses of “We Can Work It Out” (PM), the first of which (0:00–0:18) begins
with the words “Try to see it my way.” This is an entire song devoted to
the theme of disaccord and hoped-for resolution. Here, eight-bar phrases
divide unequally as 3 + 3 + 2. Underlining the thoughts expressed in
the lyrics, the hypermetric conflicts pit a stubborn wrong against a declared
right. Lennon’s ensuing bridge passage (“Life is very short . . . ” [0:37–1:03])
paints “fussing and fighting” with the three-against-two metric motive at the
beat level, through the use of triplet quarters; the tension is also expressed
contrapuntally, with 4–3 suspensions above each V/VI in Lennon’s harmo-
nium part (0:44–0:46). As if completing a puzzle, the song’s two-bar codetta
(2:05–2:13) revisits the triplets on the tonic, which is there ornamented with
Example 2 “All I’ve Got to Do” (verse/refrain)
a 4–3 neighboring line reminiscent of the bridge’s suspensions. One imag-

ines that the codetta’s harmonious resolution of the three-two combination
bodes well for the bickering parties portrayed in the poetic text.
Expanded prototypes
Related to the triple-unit perfection is the concept of what I call the “floater,”
usually a two-bar unit that attaches itself to the front or back end of a hypo-
thetical host four-bar phrase and thus an example of our second type, the
expanded prototype. The four-bar phrase will serve as our hypothetical
normal length against which all actual phrases are measured, particularly
when they are expanded beyond that prototypical length into asymmetrical
phrases of, for instance, five or seven bars. The technique of the expanded
prototype is heard in the verses of John Lennon’s “All I’ve Got to Do” (WtB),
the first of which (0:00–0:25) is abstracted in Example 2. Here and hence-
forth, the beginning of the two-bar floater is marked with an italic “f ” above
the bracket, in this case beginning in measure 7. Note the long anacrusis (the
inhalatory upbeat) preceding the double bar that puts the phrase grouping
slightly out of phase with the indicated hypermetric divisions. The har-
monically ambiguous opening two-bar anacrusis (0:00–0:03) leads to the
phrase proper, which seems like it could have been metrically closed after
four bars (note the strong/weak accentuation suggested beneath the bracket
in measures 3–6). This is followed by the varied repetition of measures
3–4 (0:03–0:07) in measures 7–8 (0:11–0:15), as if a four-bar antecedent
(measures 3–6) is to be answered by a parallel four-bar consequent.7 As it
188 Walter Everett
turns out, a contrasting consequent phrase begins only in measure 9, and so

the fragment of measures 7–8 is metrically a conclusion of the antecedent
phrase, now made up of three two-bar sub-units (and thus analogous to
perfections in three-bar units). Grammatically, the passage functions at
the same time as a transition to the consequent phrase, which aligns fairly
closely with a hypermeasure (measures 9–13 [0:15–0:25]) of an odd five-bar
length. This odd length is permitted by a retrospective reinterpretation of
measure 11 (where a poignant descending passing tone is introduced with
C) as weak rather than its initially perceived strong function – thus the
notation above measure 11 shows a questioned strong accent replaced by a
weak one.
In “All I’ve Got to Do,” we’ve seen that the floater (measures 7–8) would
likely first be perceived as the beginning of an antecedent phrase, as its
motivic material is parallel with the opening of the consequent phrase;
however, because its idea is abandoned halfway through, the measures are
likely reinterpreted as a continuation of the antecedent. Commonly, the
correct metric interpretation of the floater, and its motivic and harmonic
interdependence with other units, are perceived only upon the completion
of the entire passage. This same problem arises along with an emotional
outburst in the bridge of John Lennon’s “Yes It Is” (PM) (the contrasting
section that begins with the words “I could be happy . . . ” [1:00–1:18]).8
The section’s third 12/8 bar (“if I could forget her . . . ” [1:08–1:11]) is at
first interpreted as the beginning of a consequent phrase, but in retrospect,
because of textural, motivic, and poetico-grammatical contrast in the next
bar, it floats back to join the antecedent; the original consequent idea has
been abandoned and the bridge is left with a phrase rhythm of 3 + 2 bars. In
the first vocal phrase of George Harrison’s “Something” (AR) (0:05–0:26),
a two-bar floater (measures 6–7 [0:20–0:26]) impetuously transposes the
material of measures 4–5 (0:12–0:19) in harmonic sequence, as if the singer
is reaching ever higher to uncover the inscrutable nature of the “something”
he tries to describe, resulting in a six-bar opening phrase. In McCartney’s
“Two of Us” (LIB), reduced in Example 3, an unusual half-bar floater
(0:23) invades the verse/refrain (0:18–0:49). The irregularity of the floater –
especially when followed by two bars (measures 4–5 [0:24–0:28]) sung in
a remarkably slowed rhythm – conveys the sense of “riding nowhere, not
arriving.”
At about the time that McCartney was writing “Two of Us,” over the
second half of 1968, the same half-bar floater was being used to good
effect by Lennon in “Revolution” (PM [0:12–0:13] and WA [0:21–0:22])
and by McCartney himself in “Martha My Dear” (WA [0:22]). A list of
representative floaters – most often of two bars – appearing throughout the
Beatles’ career is given in Table 10.2.
Table 10.2 Representative “floaters” in the Beatles’ music
Lennon’s refrain to “Not a Second Time” (WtB) [4 + 4 + 2] [0:26–0:45]

McCartney’s verses to “Every Little Thing” (BfS) [4 + 2, 4 + 2] [0:03–0:14, 0:15–0:26]
McCartney’s verses to “Michelle” (RS) [2 + 4, 2 + 4] [0:08–0:20, 0:21–0:32]
Lennon’s bridge to “We Can Work it Out” (PM) [4 + 2, 4 + 2] [0:37–0:50, 0:51–1:03]
Lennon’s verse to “A Day in the Life” (SP) [4 + 4 + 2] [0:12–0:43]
Lennon’s verse to “Revolution” (WA) [2.5 + 4 + 2.5 + 4 + 5.5] [0:16–1:1:02] (cf. PM)
McCartney’s verse to “Martha My Dear” (WA) [1.25 + 2.5 + 2.5 + 1] [0:19–0:38]
McCartney’s bridge to “Two of Us” (LIB) [2 + 4] [1:31–1:44]
Lennon’s verse to “Because” (AR) [4 + 4 + 2] [0:30–1:00]
Example 3 “Two of Us” (verse)
Example 4 “Not a Second Time” (verse)
The floater is an example of how the Beatles expand their basic proto-
typical phrases; other devices appear as well. One method combines triple
and duple units within the phrase, but elides the connection so that a weak
measure will have to be reinterpreted, in hindsight, as strong; this creates
seven-bar verses in Lennon’s “Not a Second Time” (WtB [0:00–0:13]) and
McCartney’s “Yesterday” (H! [0:05–0:22]). The first of these is shown in
Example 4. The suggested accent pattern of strong and weak measures is
190 Walter Everett
Example 5 “Your Mother Should Know” (verse)
based on harmonic and motivic construction. As the example is heard in real

time, the listener must retrospectively reinterpret the hypermetric accent in
measures 4 and 5, based on the unequivocal accents heard subsequently in
measures 6 and 7. The unusual delayed entrance of the drums in measure 5,
however, works against the suggested accent pattern, further complexifying
the issue. To my ear, all of this metric confusion portrays exquisitely the
emotional uncertainty of the sensitive singer, John Lennon.
Reinterpretations of accent at the hypermetric level

In the verse of McCartney’s “Your Mother Should Know” (MMT), shown
in Example 5, the first hypermeasure (0:04–0:12) is of a simple four bars.
In the second unit (measures 5–7 [0:12–0:18]), the vocal phrasing works
against the hypermeter, which momentarily ventures into an irregularly
doubled harmonic rhythm, confusing the listener who would normally wish
to hear its fourth bar as a weak conclusion to the hypermeasure. Instead,
the continuing motivic pattern forces a reinterpretation of measure 8 as
a strong beginning to the third metric unit (measures 8–11 [0:18–0:26]),
thus amputating the second hypermeasure so as to result in a 4 + 3 + 4-bar
passage. The metric irregularity coincides with a brief tonicization of the
minor key’s mediant.
Other expansions are less involved, as in the measured, composed-out
fermata that may create an extended anacrusis or cadence. This method of
extending the cadence, William Rothstein points out, has been discussed
Example 6 “There’s a Place” (verse)
since Kirnberger and Reicha.9 The extended anacrusis is first heard in John
Lennon’s “There’s a Place” (PPM), the first verse of which is shown in
Example 6. Here, the first vocal phrase is extended to six bars (measures
4–9 [0:06–0:15]), opening with a two-bar anacrusis (measures 4–5 [0:06–
0:08]). The third hypermeasure (measures 14–20 [0:22–0:33]) is expanded
further when the same long anacrusis is preceded by a parenthetical rep-
etition (“[and it’s my] mind and there’s no time”). A similar measured
192 Walter Everett
Example 7 “You’ve Got to Hide Your Love Away” (verse)
fermata (0:10–0:14) opens the chorus of Lennon’s textually related “Straw-

berry Fields Forever” (MMT) four years later. The composed-out cadential
fermata is heard in the verse of Lennon’s “You’ve Got to Hide Your Love
Away” (H!), shown in Example 7. In the first phrase (0:02–0:19), I hear the
elongation of each of the prototypical third and fourth beats of measure 5,
each marked with a fermata, stretched into two beats each. The prototypical
fourth beat is expanded even further at the conclusion of the second phrase
(0:20–0:38), leading to a passage of twenty-four eighths that functions as a
single measure. Other measured cadential fermatas appear in the verses of
“The Continuing Story of Bungalow Bill” (WA [0:33–0:37]), “Lucy in the
Sky with Diamonds” (SP [0:27–0:31]), and – expanded through the orches-
tral “glissando” – “A Day in the Life” (SP [1:33–2:16]), all, significantly,
Lennon compositions.
Tonicization-related stretching and elision

Phrase rhythm must adapt to harmonic and formal requirements in several
songs. In both Lennon’s “Yes It Is” (PM [2:20–2:40]) and McCartney’s “I
Will” (WA [1:07–1:33]), and in their jointly composed “I Want to Hold Your
Hand” (PM [2:08–2:23]), phrases are expanded in the codas to permit final
Mozartean deceptive harmonic developments.10 Extra bars are required for
tonicizations in “Lucy in the Sky with Diamonds.” In Lennon’s “You’re
Going to Lose That Girl” (H!), a two-bar floater (0:52–0:55) permits a
rhythmically fluid transition from I to III for the bridge, but an abrupt
retransition to the verse through a tritone-substitute for V (1:06–1:08) cuts
Example 8 “Any Time at All” (verse)
Example 9 “I Will” (verse)
the bridge’s second phrase one bar short. The harmonic surprise takes the
breath out of the phrase, cutting the last metric unit to three bars.
Enjambments (measures that enjoy simultaneously beginning and end-
ing functions) and elisions (functioning but absent measures) appear
often.11 Both techniques work together in the verse of Lennon’s “Any Time
at All” (HDN), reduced in Example 8. Here, a harmonically static four-
bar subphrase (0:15–0:21) is followed by a harmonically active consequent
(0:21–0:24) that misses its third and fourth bars, displaced by the metrically
enjambed opening of the second period with unit three (0:24–0:31). The
second antecedent subphrase (marked as unit 3) is answered by a normal
four-bar consequent (0:31–0:38). Lennon repeats the same fluid enjamb-
ment in “Julia” (0:14) four years later. Hurried phrases result from elisions
in the same composer’s “Cry Baby Cry” (WA [2:08]); the elision here of
measures within phrases represents a large-scale version of the Beatles’ pen-
chant for eliding beats within measures of mixed meter. In Lennon’s “It
Won’t Be Long” (WtB), as in “Any Time at All,” the regulation of time
itself is the song’s subject. Here, a prototypical fourth bar is elided because
an impatient Lennon apparently decides that the third bar (0:19–0:20) has
already served this function; he rarely likes to tread water.
As shown in Example 9, the opening phrase of McCartney’s “I Will”
(WA) comes to an abrupt halt when the roadblock of a non-functional
mediant harmony (0:08), with attendant ambiguity of hypermetric accent,
194 Walter Everett
Example 10 Voice-leading analysis of “I Should Have Known Better”
appears in an extended measure 3 (two bars of 4/4 conclude with a single

bar of 6/4). Because the phrase dangles on the weak III chord, there is a
strong sense of elision. The consequent phrase has two different lengths,
both longer than the antecedent, depending upon whether it returns to
another verse (with one bar of 4/4, one of 6/4, and three bars of 4/4
[0:09–0:21]) or moves on, through the second ending (totaling one bar
of 4/4, one of 6/4, and another single bar of 4/4 [0:30–0:40]), to the
bridge. Other examples of enjambments or elisions can be found in the
retransitions of both McCartney’s “She’s Leaving Home” (SP), where
the only bar containing a tonally and hypermetrically expected V (fol-
lowing 1:17) is entirely removed and thus exists only hypothetically, and
Lennon’s “Sexy Sadie” (WA), the bridge of which returns abruptly to its
verse via an elision (1:10). Also see the verse (0:21) of “Being for the Ben-
efit of Mr. Kite!” (SP) and the chorus (0:07) of “The Continuing Story of
Bungalow Bill” (WA), both songs by Lennon.
In Lennon’s “I Should Have Known Better” (HDN), the Beatles join
an aborted second verse and a bridge with the “linkage” technique, which
Oswald Jonas defined as “a new phrase [taking] its initial idea [from] the
end of the immediately preceding one.”12 The second verse has a length of
6 + 2 (0:25–0:40) as opposed to the initial verse’s length of 6 + 4 (0:07–
0:25). This complex example warrants closer inspection. The voice-leading
sketch given in Example 10, which for convenience reduces the entire song
to its basic tonal structure, elucidates the interrelated parts of the melodic
design. The growth of the sixth scale degree, E, from neighboring motion
through passing motion at A and through roothood to tonicized status at C
is the tonal focus in these sections, which are joined by an enlarged motivic
overlap, the “linkage,” that has a profound effect upon phrase rhythm.
The second verse (B) is cut short to eight bars because of the unexpected
appearance of V7 /VI in support of the melodic leading tone F sharp at
measure 22 (0:38). This initiates a transition to the lyrical and expansive
E-minor melody of the bridge (C). (The applied chord is amplified in
importance by the entrance in measure 22 of Harrison’s electric twelve-
string guitar, which chimes with the bridge’s changes as if accompanying a
measured recitative.) The melodic drop to an inner-voice b1 at measure 23
(a pitch class highlighted later in the bridge with a dramatic register shift
to b2 ) only briefly interrupts the rise to the eighth scale degree, g2 , that
would have marked the conclusion of the second verse had it continued as
did the first. In the graph, this rise at letters A and B from the ornamented
initial tone d2 through passing sixth and seventh scale degrees to the eighth
is marked with a slur and the italic lower-case a.13 From the end of the
second verse, the rise is completed at measure 24 (0:42), effecting a motivic
overlap of the verse, transition, and bridge that expresses the singer’s great
determination to communicate (“can’t you see, when I tell you . . . and when
I ask you . . . ”). With the boost to scale degree 8 from the inner realm of b1 ,
Lennon reaches a new depth of understanding not heard in the previously
blithe neighboring and passing treatment of the sixth scale degree, portrayed
in a new setting of the tonic scale degree with VI of the tonicized VI. It is as
if this area, the submediant, is where Lennon was headed all along, but even
he could not have known so; the tonal evolution of the sixth scale degree
can thus be heard as a portrayal of the deep hindsight that inspires the song.
So my sense is that some level of phrase continues beyond the metric and
harmonic closure at the double bar following measure 22.
The Beatles achieve their most original phrase rhythm effects in Lennon’s
“Sexy Sadie” (WA) and “Because” (AR). In each, the strong and weak accen-
tual characteristics of phrases within verses are reinterpreted in codas by
virtue of appearances there of new superimposed melodic parts. “Because,”
the last verse and coda of which are given in full score in Example 11, will
illustrate. Preceding verses had each ended with an unusual half cadence in
instruments only, halting on a fully diminished seventh chord (0:58–1:00).
The function of this chord is clarified as VII of IV only after the second
verse, by the beginning of the bridge (1:30). In the analogous place fol-
lowing the verse that begins in measure 35 (1:42), shown in Example 11,
the diminished-seventh harmony (falling in measure 44 [2:09–2:11]) car-
ries on as it had instrumentally. That is, the instruments behave as if the
half cadence has been reached in bar 44, and restart in measure 45 (2:12)
196 Walter Everett
Example 11 “Because” (last verse and coda)

Example 11 (cont.)
with a complete verse structure, beginning with the Moog’s statement of

the C-sharp minor arpeggio.14 The singers’ newly added wordless parts,
however, are dreamily out of phase with the instrumental backing: whereas
the instruments believe they are beginning anew in bar 45, the singers had
gotten a head start and actually cadence authentically at this point; whereas
the instruments attempt a half cadence as before in measure 48 (2:21–2:23),
the singers continue, insisting that the phrase cadence deceptively in bar 49
(2:24). Thus the song’s first two verses group phrases into 4 + 4 + 2 (0:30–
1:00) and 4 + 4 + 2 (1:00–1:30) bars, but the third and final verses rearrange
the accentuation so as to group them as 4 + 4 + 4 + 4 + 4 (1:42–2:44). The
phrase grouping and hypermeter are far more acutely out of phase than
in examples provided by Lerdahl and Jackendoff and by Rothstein.15 The
same effect had been achieved a year earlier in “Sexy Sadie,” where scant
new vocal phrases in the coda (2:13–3:12) work against the instrumental
hypermeter; the sly, lasciviously slithery harmonic ambiguities of “Sadie”
enable the metric playfulness.
198 Walter Everett
Example 12 “A Day in the Life” (bridge)
Example 13 “The End” (concluding couplet)
Adjustments required by changes in harmonic rhythm

But perhaps most interesting are the free phrase rhythms that result from
the Beatles’ play with tempo. In some cases, such as in “I Want to Hold Your
Hand” (0:22) and “Your Mother Should Know” (0:18), a doubled harmonic
rhythm doubles the density so that phrase lengths may be halved.16 A
more majestic such relationship empowers McCartney’s bridge of “A Day
in the Life” (SP [2:16–3:17]). This passage opens with the piano-led rhythm
section pounding out frenetic eighths, grouped conventionally as shown in
the lower single-line staff of Example 12; the first word of each phrase,
timings, and all chord changes are given for the reader’s reference. Four
phrases appear, each of the first three comprising a total of 2.5 bars of 8/8
(barred either 8/8 + 4/8 + 8/8 or 8/8 + 12/8). The fourth phrase, in
contrast, is shortened to a more regular two bars of 8/8. With this new
regularity as its only preparation, the tempo slows (at 2:49) to exactly one
half of its value, as regularly recurring 4/4 bars lead to the end of the
bridge in a dreamy retransition in falling fourths (C – G – D . . . ). But
these regular bars are grouped into asymmetrical hypermeasures, five 4/4
measures in each of the last two phrases (indicated in the upper staff as two
hyperbars of 5/1). In retrospect, it can be determined that the first three
phrases of the bridge, asymmetrical on the surface with their changing
meter, can also be heard in hypermetric groupings of five. But because of
the faster tempo in relation to the retransition, these earlier phrases occupy
hypermeasures of 5/2. So it seems that despite the fact that the rhythmic and
melodic-harmonic materials of the 5/2 and the 5/1 sections are unrelated,
McCartney develops his phrase rhythms in a motivic way, emphasizing
five-bar units.
Finally, the Beatles create their own examples of metric modulation in
both Lennon’s “Lucy in the Sky” (0:48) and McCartney’s “The End” (AR
[1:40]), both of which coincide with tonal modulations.17 In the latter,
excerpted in Example 13, subtle shifts in both phrase rhythm and tonal
relations reflect the construction of Paul McCartney’s equation of “the love
you take” and “the love you make,” uncovering the key to the ideas in
the second half of Abbey Road with a seven-bar phrase whose prototype’s
duration is altered not with a halving of tempo or a composed-out fermata,
but with a composed-out ritard.
I hope that, in this limited space, this chapter has been able to suggest
something of the astounding variety of large-scale rhythmic effects in Beatles
songs. The constant flexibility of these composers in juggling irregular
hypermetric lengths (occasionally the result of large-scale perfections but
much more often the product of expansions of hypothetical prototypes)
and structural changes in tempo and harmonic rhythm, and their manifold
demands that the listener reinterpret phrase-level accent patterns to align
with changing tonal, formal, and instrumentational relationships, all make
this music constantly fresh and dynamic. Combined with the Beatles’ poetic
interests in the portrayal of emotional conflicts, contrasts, parenthetical
embellishments, or changing perspectives of time itself, all phrase-rhythm
techniques work together with the multi-leveled meanings of their lyrics to
create one of several dimensions in which this group produced some of the
most compellingly expressive music of its era.
part three
History and influence

11 The Beatles as zeitgeist
sheila whiteley
The sixties and cultural politics

In July 2006, I was invited to take part in a day of national and regional press
interviews. The topic was “The 60s: The Beatles Decade,” a five-part series
by UKTV History which explored the influence of music on the 1960s. The
series was accompanied by a survey which compared the experiences of
those growing up in the sixties, seventies, and eighties, and revealed that
over a third (34 percent of the 3,000 adults interviewed) conceded that at
one time or another they have embroidered their past in order to gain the
respect of their family and friends. A quarter of these claimed that they were
flexible with the truth in order to appear “cool” to their children. Yet only
15 percent of those growing up in the seventies, and a mere 5 percent of
those growing up in the eighties, admitted to lying about their past.
In particular, those growing up in the sixties were most likely to ex-
aggerate their “beat generation” credentials – with a quarter claiming that
they were a part of or had associations with the hippy movement, when in
reality a mere 6 percent could really lay claim to this being true. One in
five admitted lying about the drugs they had taken. Twenty-two percent of
those questioned admitted that they had used the line, “I was too stoned
to remember the sixties,” whereas in reality a mere 8 percent had tried
cannabis and only 1 percent had tried acid.
Claiming to have attended rock festivals and to have seen popular bands
such as the Beatles live was also a popular telltale for the sixties generation,
with 9 percent claiming to have been at famous concerts when in reality they
actually saw the footage on TV. Eleven percent of the sixties respondents also
claimed that they knew people who had attended a “love-in,” with 9 percent
claiming they had been invited to one. In fact these were fabrications, with
just 4 percent knowing someone who had, and 1 percent actually invited to
attend a love-in. Claims to have met famous people from the sixties decade
were also revealed to be lies – 12 percent of those questioned had “made
up” an encounter with someone famous to impress their friends, the most
popular fabrication being an encounter with Paul McCartney.
For the seventies children of the revolution, the overwhelming reasons
for lying about their past experiences were ill-advised fashion decisions,
a desire to be associated with famous people, and a misguided love of
[203]
204 Sheila Whiteley
Table 11.1 Top lies told by people who grew up in the sixties,
seventies, or eighties
Percentage
1960s
Was a hippy 27
Experimented with soft drugs 20
Meeting someone famous from the Beat Generation 12
Knowing someone who took part in a love-in 11
Seeing the Beatles live 9
1970s
Regularly in the disco 33
Wore platform shoes 17
Hated prog rock 11
Meeting someone famous 11
Avoided orange or brown interior furnishings 9
1980s
Didn’t watch Charles and Diana’s wedding on TV 35
Didn’t wear shoulder pads 29
Didn’t vote Tory 15
Owned a computer 11
Attended Live Aid 2
Survey, information and write-up from Lesley Land, Taylor Herring Public Relations, London
indulgent prog rock! It seems the eighties were worth keeping quiet about,
with many of generation X now ashamed of their political stance (the
dreaded Margaret Thatcher), their shoulder pads, and their “uncool” fixa-
tion with the royal family. (See Table 11.1.)
I will return to some of these points later, but I would add that it is
very common for people to look back on their younger, rock and roll days
through rose-tinted glasses. In reality, however, the experience of growing
up in the sixties, for most people, would be more conservative than they
would like to make out: more akin to Cliff Richard than to Keith Richards.
Even so, what most colors our feelings about an era is the cultural politics,
and here, there is no doubt that it is the music that gives it the real edge. As
all the programs in UKTV History’s series stated:
There was a change across the decade from a Conservative Government led
by Harold Macmillan to a Labour Government led by Harold Wilson. By the
end of the decade censorship was over, the pill freed up sex, music and
drama became part of life; there was a growing consumer society and
increasingly this meant taking holidays abroad. The Beatles were at the heart
of this transformation, the symbol of a decade: four lads from Liverpool
who took on the establishment and won!
The last sentence is telling. On the one hand, it reveals the particular slant
of the programs; on the other, it suggests that the Beatles were fully engaged
in cultural politics; that their music can be interpreted as responding to the
political and ideological shifts that took place over the sixties while at the
same time, instigating change.
It is also significant that the sixties are encapsulated by the phrase “the
Beatles decade” – and not, say, “the Rolling Stones decade.” While this could
be attributed to the longevity of the band – 1960, John, Paul, and George
playing the Jacaranda as the Silver Beetles;1 1969, in public still united, in
private splitting up, with McCartney finally leaving the band on April 10,
1970 – it is suggested that their songs are unique in mirroring the changing
face of the decade: from the buoyant optimism of the early years, through
to the overarching feeling in the years 1969–70 that the party was well and
truly over. For those of us of a comparable age, the Beatles seemed to mirror
our own growing up: as teenagers no longer tethered by postwar austerity,
we had a certain amount of disposable income,2 and, with a new emphasis
on attitude – attributable in part to the 1950s advent of rock and roll, coffee
bars, the jukebox, and such role models as Elvis Presley and Buddy Holly –
the paralyzing grayness that had characterized British society during the
postwar period was replaced, almost overnight, by Carnaby Street color,
youth culture, and the Beatles. As Philip Norman observes, “the hormonal
balance of the body was irrevocably upset by the dramatisation of teenage
life”;3 we were different, no longer mini-versions of our parents, but rather
teenagers with a particular identity of our own, an identity fueled by the
potency of beat.
Clearly, it would be an exaggeration to suggest that the Beatles were the
principal catalysts of change, albeit that the series of programs appeared on
a dedicated history channel. Britain in the fifties and sixties was a society in
transition, and the emerging teenage culture was, in part, a response to this
situation. Not least, the increased spending power among teenagers reflected
both an overall rise in the standard of living and a trend toward personal
consumption – fashion, records, and record-players, cinema and other
entertainment, including coffee bar culture. Significant, in this context, are
the specifics of consumption, not least lifestyle and leisure. Hence while
1950s American artists such as Elvis Presley, Buddy Holly, and Chuck Berry
are undoubtedly important in highlighting teenage life, the Beatles provided
a new and specific focus on both national and regional identity which
resonated with the particular experiences of their young fans. Suddenly,
Liverpool was hip and England was where it was happening.
It is interesting, at this early stage of my discussion, to posit the question
of whether the Beatles’ three stages of composition – from beat to self-
conscious artistry via the super-pop of Rubber Soul (1965) and the “mélange
of style and substance” of Revolver (1966)4 – were simply fortuitous or
whether they provided a particular insight into the shifting sociocultural
politics of the time. In the early 1960s, for example, Presley was in the army,
206 Sheila Whiteley
Motown and Stax records were beginning to make an impact, the twist
became the new hit dance, and local bands, stimulated both by the DIY
culture of skiffle (popularized by Lonnie Donegan)5 and the examples of
such home-grown pop stars as Cliff Richard and Tommy Steele, sprang up
in major cities across the UK. In 1961 there were more than 400 bands in
Liverpool alone, with the Beatles’ lunchtime gig at the Cavern introducing
a growing fan base to cover versions of Chuck Berry, Little Richard, and
Carl Perkins.
The Beatles first came to national attention with their debut single, “Love
Me Do,” and their subsequent appearance on British television’s Thank Your
Lucky Stars on February 13, 1963. This appearance allowed the band to debut
their new single, “Please Please Me,” before 6 million viewers, and marked
a pivotal moment in their career. Successive hits, including “From Me to
You” and “She Loves You” – especially the song’s catchy chorus, “Yeah, yeah,
yeah” – ensured that they became household names as their catchphrase
was echoed in newspaper headlines and television alike. By 1964, after an
appearance on the Ed Sullivan Show, their popularity in the United States
overshadowed their preeminence in Great Britain. By April, they held an
unprecedented top five spots on the Billboard Hot 100, and in Canada
they boasted nine records in the Top Ten. They quickly spearheaded a new
direction in popular music, one that extended peripherally into fashion
and the arts and, more specifically, ousted the solo singer in favor of an
irrepressible flow of Merseybeat talent that focused on group dynamics.
The relationship between fashion, the arts, and popular music was piv-
otal to 1960s popular culture. Art colleges “were providing a free and easy
world for clever but wayward boys and girls,”6 not simply as an alternative to
university, but rather as a place to explore ideas, spawning such charismatic
and influential artists as Mary Quant, John Lennon, and Pete Townshend.
By the mid-sixties, London became the epicentre of the “swinging scene,”
the focus for European fashion, art, design, music, and theatre. It was “the
place to be seen,” with Allen Ginsberg, Julie Christie, Twiggy, Mick Jagger,
Michael Caine, and David Bailey, to name but a few, frequenting the most
glamorous restaurants and nightclubs. Its atmosphere captured by Peter
Whitehead in his documentary Tonite Let’s All Make Love in London (1967)
and in the American weekly magazine Time, which, in 1966, dedicated an
entire issue to “the Swinging City,” London was eulogized as the epitome
of modern urban culture. Even shopping became a fashion in itself as bou-
tiques proliferated; Mary Quant in New Bond Street, Granny Takes a Trip
just off King’s Road, Biba in High Street, Kensington, and Bazaar on King’s
Road, with UK magazines such as Queen, Honey, and Petticoat promoting
the new fashions to their young readers.
It was also a period of celebrity culture, with films such as Antonioni’s

Blow Up (1966), inspired by fashion photographer David Bailey’s career, and
Nicolas Roeg’s film Performance (1969), starring Mick Jagger, providing a
particular insight into both the glamor and the decadence of the period.7
Meanwhile, writers such as Arnold Wesker, John Braine, Alan Ayckbourn,
Harold Pinter, and John Osborne were hailed as the “angry young men” of
the theatre, while Michael Caine, as “Alfie,” celebrated the dubious glamor
of working class roots. It was, however, British music that promoted the
London “look” to the world, and arguably the catalyst was the Beatles; but
to what extent did their music really challenge the status quo?
Modernity, meritocracy, and change

Perhaps one of the most notable changes over the period was the challenge
to embedded class deference, at the time a defining characteristic of British
social relations.8 The end of the class war – promised by the postwar British
Labour party on the premise of reformed capitalism, and appropriated by
a reformed Conservative government under the slogan “capitalism for the
people” – seemed initially unlikely. Their defeat at the Orpington by-election
(1962) was, however, a strong indication that the Conservatives were out of
touch, and in the subsequent “night of the long knives” Harold Macmillan
expelled one third of his cabinet. Humiliating defeats in foreign policy –
not least the rejection of the UK’s application to join the Common Market
(1963) – an increasing subordination to US interests, political scandal –
the Profumo affair, and Kim Philby’s defection to the Soviet Union (1963) –
were all grist to the Labour Party’s mill, and Harold Wilson’s masterly
speech highlighting the fragility of British Intelligence arguably precipitated
Macmillan’s resignation. In retrospect, his replacement, Sir Alec Douglas-
Home – a Scottish landowner – served as a timely reminder that the upper
classes could no longer expect to be in charge, or indeed respected, simply
because of their hereditary status. Rather, public opinion indicated that the
country needed a new aristocracy, a new image. This was provided by Harold
Wilson, a former grammar school boy with a fundamental grasp on the new
media age. The 1964 general election was the first to be televised, and Labour
was returned with a majority of four. Their focus on modernity, technology,
and change proved a popular strategy, and two years later Labour were once
again returned, this time with a majority of ninety-six.
While the change in political profile seemed to indicate a more con-
temporary, “with-it” leadership, there is little doubt that Labour initially
benefited from the corrosive portrayal of Macmillan and Douglas-Home in
208 Sheila Whiteley
Private Eye, and the popularity of Ned Sherrin’s Friday night radio satire,
That Was the Week That Was. In essence, these were characterized by a
sense of pungent irreverence for the establishment, and the Beatles were
quick to follow suit. Invited to perform at the televised Royal Command
Performance in November 1963, John Lennon prefaced “Twist and Shout”
with “Would the people in the cheaper seats clap your hands, and the rest of
you, if you’ll just rattle your jewellery!” His famous wit also punctured the
formalities of the 1964 Royal Variety Show. When they were presented with
the Variety Club Silver Heart Award by Harold Wilson, Lennon’s “Thanks
for the purple heart – sorry, silver heart!” and Ringo’s “Good old Mr. Wilson
should have one!” were further indications that the age of blind deference
was coming to an end. Nevertheless, the award of Member of the Order of
the British Empire to the Beatles in 1965 was considered by many inappro-
priate, with some existing MBEs returning their medals. Lennon’s response,
that the award was “for exports,” can be interpreted both as an astute recog-
nition of the Beatles’ real value to the country, and as a refusal to acquiesce
in the “somewhat patronizing endorsement” of their artistic merit. Either
way, it was the first step into today’s world where celebrities are rewarded for
their services to Queen and country, and an indication that the separation
between high culture and popular culture was on the wane. Less forgivable,
not least by the US Bible belt, was Lennon’s 1966 oft-quoted comments on
Jesus Christ to rock journalist and friend Maureen Cleave:
Christianity will go. It will vanish and shrink . . . We’re more popular than
Jesus now; I don’t know which will go first – rock ’n’ roll or Christianity.
Jesus was all right, but his disciples were thick and ordinary. It’s them
twisting it that ruins it for me.
As William Northcutt observes, “Christ’s disciples in the southern United

States answered en masse. Record burnings and protests, death threats and
bomb scares dogged the Beatles through the South.”9 Pungent irreverence
had, it seemed, little place in the Southern States of America, where equality
was still “a dream” and where civil rights were compromised by continuing
racial discrimination.
While it could be argued that the UK was also experiencing prob-
lems in race relations, not least those involving Commonwealth immi-
grants, who were encountering widespread discrimination in housing and
employment,10 the country, as a whole, was gradually moving toward a less
class-driven society. The death of Churchill, in particular, seemed to sym-
bolize the drift towards greater equality. He had been active in politics since
the Edwardian era, and, although controversial, had proved an inspirational
leader during the war years. In retrospect, his state funeral, on January 30,
1965, heralded the end of an era. Deference toward the aristocracy was
being replaced by Harold Wilson’s emphasis on a meritocracy based on

technology and modernity. Epitomized by the Post Office Tower, high-
rise flats, wonder plastics, nylon, and the Mini, Britain’s trendy profile was
nevertheless compromised by economic crisis. The Labour party had inher-
ited huge debts – including a massive war loan from the United States –
and the period of growth promised by Wilson proved untenable. By the
end of the sixties, a wage freeze, cuts in public expenditure, union disputes,
a seamen’s strike, and a move to more coercive and punitive measures in
the sphere of industrial relations led increasingly toward a harsh “control
culture.” This, in turn, was accompanied by a series of measures directed
against the rising tide of permissiveness characterized partly by an emerging
drug culture and so-called increase in sexual promiscuity.11
Sex, love, relationships, and social reforms

In the early 1960s, the consequences of sex before marriage were consid-
ered a serious matter. There were still shotgun weddings; John Lennon
married Cynthia Powell, whom he had been dating since 1958, because
she was pregnant.12 Ninety-six percent of adults over forty-five were mar-
ried; at many universities and colleges, immediate expulsion followed being
caught in a room occupied by the opposite sex – by the end of the
decade this was modified to allow visits between the hours of 3:00 and
4:00 p.m.13 Even so, the sixties did see changes in sexual attitudes, largely
brought about by the media attention given to Dr. Spock (how to bring
up your baby),14 the Pill (no more unwanted pregnancies), and the Kin-
sey Reports15 (discussing previously taboo subjects, including masturba-
tion and the female orgasm). Parliament also confronted outmoded laws
with the Homosexual Reform Act (1967), the abolition of capital punish-
ment (1965),16 and the Abortion Act (1967).17 There was also support for
the more general concerns about freedom of expression that underpinned
such previously censored texts as D. H. Lawrence’s Lady Chatterley’s Lover,
Henry Miller’s Tropic of Cancer and Tropic of Capricorn, and William S.
Burroughs’ The Naked Lunch and Dead Fingers Talk, which attracted adverse
criticism from such contemporary writers as Dame Edith Sitwell. Violence
as spectacle also had a particular resonance in the 1960s, not least in Antonin
Artaud’s Theatre of Cruelty. Glenda Jackson (now a British Labour Member
of Parliament) appeared as Christine Keeler, “stripped, bathed and ritually
clothed as a convict to the recitation of the words of the Keeler court case.”18
She was also featured as a wildly erotic Charlotte Corday in The Persecu-
tion and Assassination of Marat as Performed by the Inmates of Charenton
under the Direction of the Marquis de Sade. Even so, the extent to which this
210 Sheila Whiteley
so-called loosening up of sexual attitudes affected the majority of the pop-

ulation is debatable. Despite an upswing in premarital sexual behavior, the
traditional pathway for the majority of women remained either marriage
or being “left on the shelf.”
As I discussed in “Love, Love, Love: Representations of Gender and
Sexuality in Selected Songs by the Beatles” (2006), early Beatles songs are
characterized by their ebullient and catchy qualities; while there is a certain
shift in emphasis from the imperative of “Love Me Do” to the discursive of
“She Loves You,” their songs, like their moptop image at the time, main-
tain a certain naivety that renders them unthreatening. They construct an
imaginary ideal whereby the teenager is invited to mentally negotiate the
experience of being young and in love. The underlying, omnipresent beat
adds to the experience – it is music to dance to, to flirt to. Not least, the
songs deflect the teenage girl’s experience of sexuality on to the terrain of
romance, so providing a way of negotiating that experience through a series
of male and female roles. As Angela McRobbie observes, “If female adoles-
cence is defined as a period of independence from parental restraints, it is
also a period of high risk in which the girl might go off the rails . . . As such,
the romantic code is like a transmission belt which carries the girl over the
limbo of adolescence, [and] delivers her safely from the family of origin to
the family of destiny.”19 Given the upswing in premarital sexual behaviour
across the 1960s, maybe one should add that this is an ideal situation, albeit
one that reflects the emphasis of the Beatles’ early love ballads.
But what of the women who don’t marry? Lennon and McCartney also
provided a particular take on the loneliness that characterized so many
women’s experience at the time. Paradoxically, it is a track on which the
group made no instrumental contribution. Rather, it is tethered by an
austere string arrangement by George Martin, and has an acute sense of
observation which resonates with both pathos and social realism, invoking
both a nostalgic and monochromatic portrait of loneliness. This is enhanced
by the matter-of-factness of the lyrics, where descriptions of the mundane
(“darning his socks in the night when there’s nobody there”) fill the two-bar
phrases, culminating in a sense of resignation as the final syllable is held
over the next bar and followed by a pragmatic evaluation of personal worth
(the “nobody came” of Eleanor Rigby’s funeral; the “what does he care” of
the equally lonely priest).
The mood of austerity and restraint is particularly evident in George
Martin’s string writing, where a heavy use of repetition – similar to the
chromaticism and unresolved dissonances in Bernard Hermann’s music for
Psycho – creates suspense and underpins the references to death: “Father
McKenzie, wiping the dirt from his hands as he walks from the grave.” Forty
years on, the inclusion of a classical infrastructure within a popular song
is less than revolutionary. At the time, it gave “Eleanor Rigby” a freshness

of approach in terms of musical arrangement which was also appropriate
to the mood of the lyrics, which, in turn, resonated with the experience of
countless women who had neither family, friendship, nor support from that
bastion of respectability, the established church. And this, surely, is why this
is a political, cultural, and socially conscious song.
In particular, the refusal of the Catholic Church to reform its attitude to
birth control seemed little less than hypocrisy, given the increasing numbers
of the poor in the so-called developing countries of the Third World and
South America. In the UK and the Republic of Ireland, illegitimacy was still
treated with a moral superiority that resulted in countless women being
imprisoned in welfare nursing homes not too different from those of the
Victorian poor houses of the nineteenth century. Birth control, backstreet
abortions, and unnecessary death were thus essential items on the feminist
agenda,20 and while the liberalism of the sixties had borne legislative fruit in
the spheres of legalized abortion and “no blame” divorce, for many people
such reforms either came too late or were considered less weighty than the
dictates of the church. Eleanor Rigby’s drab and joyless destiny, it appears,
was simply to be buried, along with her name – a sad indictment on a
church which is arguably the richest and most powerful in the Christian
world.
The Beatles were not unique in drawing attention to the problems sur-
rounding religion, marriage, and personal relationships. As Theodor Roszak
wrote in 1971, rock generally provided a means whereby young people could
explore the politics of consciousness, “love, loneliness, depersonalization,
the search for the truth of the person.”21 To some extent this is reflected in
the Beatles’ songs – not least those concerned with relationships. As they
tellingly wrote, “Try to see it my way” (“We Can Work it Out,” 1965), a
plea arguably at odds with the ebullience associated with their earlier songs,
and perhaps more in tune with older fans who had themselves experienced
failing relationships and whose expectations of lasting love were somewhat
jaded. Not least, the institution of marriage itself was under scrutiny by the
state, and legislative reform under Roy Jenkins22 (Labour Home Secretary
from 1965 to 1967) was directed at a relaxation in divorce laws. His “no
blame” divorce reflected his view that the right sort of legal framework
would provide for greater self-determination in social life and relation-
ships, and this, in turn, stimulated discussion about the constitution of the
family itself, with many considering the nuclear family model oppressive,
and other models, such as a committed partnership, or a commune, a viable
alternative.
As Polly Toynbee observes, this was a period of unparalleled social
legislation and social activism.
212 Sheila Whiteley
Peter Hain was campaigning brilliantly against apartheid, Tessa Jowell

worked for the new campaign Mind, Paul Boateng worked in an idealistic
new law centre, Nick Raynsford was emergency officer for homeless action
group Shac, Frank Field ran the Child Poverty Action Group and Patricia
Hewitt and Harriet Harman ran the National Council for Civil Liberties.
Most of that Labour generation came to politics via the myriad new
campaigns that sprang up from a passionate social engagement of those
days. Not since the Victorians was there such an explosion of new voluntary
organisations – Help the Aged, Age Concern, Sane, Action Aid, Shelter,
Crisis, Centrepoint, Community Service Volunteers, pre-school playgroups
and toy libraries filling voids in state provision.23
Social reforms were, however, costly, and Britain’s economic situation was
worsening. The USA remained committed to winning the war in Vietnam
through massive B-52 bombing campaigns, and Robert McNamara and
Lyndon B. Johnson were putting pressure on the UK to send troops to
Vietnam. Wilson’s refusal resulted in the USA withdrawing support for
sterling, and Britain’s economic situation worsened. Wages were frozen and
the Labour government began to fall apart.
The end of an era: war, political protest, and

cultural conflicts
By 1968 the war in Vietnam was in its seventh year,24 and television coverage
had brought the atrocities into the family living room. Protests escalated,
with student demonstrations across American campuses, horrifying self-
immolations,25 and breaking news of a massacre in My Lai (March 16, 1968).
The anti-war movement swept across Europe with uprisings in Paris, Rome,
Berlin, and Czechoslovakia. In the UK the Grosvenor Square demonstration
turned into a riot after an eighteen-year-old girl became trapped underneath
a police horse.
It would be misleading to suggest that the Beatles were directly involved
in political protest against the war in Vietnam. Unlike Mick Jagger, who was
at the Grosvenor Square demonstrations and whose song “Street Fighting
Man” resonated with his personal experiences on the day, the Beatles were
more aligned with the philosophy of love that characterized hippy philos-
ophy. Their 1968 song “Revolution” spelled it out: “We all want to change
the world / But when you talk about destruction / Don’t you know that
you can count me out.” Their solution, “change your head . . . free your
mind,” and the importance of love as empowering change (“All You Need is
Love,” 1967), relates to drug culture,26 to the metaphysical,27 and to “flower
power,” a slogan used by hippies in the late sixties and early seventies as
a symbol of their non-violence ideology, rooted in their opposition to the

Vietnam War. Therefore, it is not too surprising that their 1967 album, Sgt.
Pepper’s Lonely Hearts Club Band, was less a political protest and more, in
Allen Ginsberg’s words, “an exclamation of joy, a discovery of joy and what
it was to be alive . . . It was actually a cheerful look around the world: the first
time, I would say, on a mass scale.”28 Despite the murder of Che Guevara,
the race riots in Detroit, and the gathering discontent at universities in both
the USA and the UK, Sgt. Pepper seemed at the time to exemplify a mood
of “getting better.” “Holes” were being “fixed,” love would still be there at
sixty-four, and the Band promised to “turn you on.”
“For anyone who was young at the time,” writes Steve Turner, “the music
automatically evokes the sight of beads and kaftans, the sound of tinkling
bells and the aroma of marijuana masked by joss sticks.”29 Peter Blake’s
pop art design for the record sleeve became instantly collectable, and even
the pseudo-military figure of Sgt. Pepper himself seemed little more than
a send-up of the infamous Kitchener recruitment poster from the 1914–18
war. It was Edwardian chic, drawing on the current craze for military
uniforms, quickly echoed in Biba’s Carnaby Street fashions, and copied by
fans worldwide. “The kids tried to identify with their heroes’ music,” writes
Greil Marcus. “They wanted costumes, Salvation Army band coats, bells,
beads, painted faces and all the other absurd paraphernalia.”30 Even so,
despite its mood of optimistic escapism – appropriate to 1967’s Summer of
Love – there was confrontation in the apocalyptic vision of the final song,
“A Day in the Life.”
Opening with softly strummed acoustic guitar chords, the verse describes
a suicide with a conciseness comparable to that displayed in “Eleanor Rigby”:
“I read the news today, oh boy.” Built on a series of tense, reflective pas-
sages, followed by soaring releases, the dispassionate account of events is
reinforced by the simplicity of narration, both verbally and through the
music. There is no extraneous detail, and the pentatonic melody follows
the natural inflection of the words. The lack of modulation also works to
make the imagery more powerful as it evokes the monotonous repetition
of newscasting and the reading of horrendous events which are passively
consumed and then forgotten. Conformity (“A crowd of people stood and
stared”) conjures up images of the amorphous mass, the mindless credulity
of “them.” Materialism is confronted by the headlines “about a lucky man
who made the grade,” the response “Well I just had to laugh” linking the
song to George Harrison’s metaphysical “Within You Without You,” “the
people who gain the world and lose their soul.”31
The “out there” is then rejected, with the refrain “I’d love to turn you
on” precipitating an electronic crescendo, a musical metaphor for a drug-
induced “rush,” as the audience is moved on to a differently coded though
214 Sheila Whiteley
thematically connected idea. The music has a nervous dissonance as the

percussive drumbeat melts into a panting chug, but again there is a move
toward psychedelic flight and release, “Found my way upstairs and had a
smoke / Somebody spoke and I went into a dream.” The dream, however,
is more an evocation of a nightmare, and the final “I’d love to turn you on”
leads directly into a cacophony of noise, suggesting both anarchy and chaos.
As the final song on the album, “A Day in the Life” takes on board
“the lonely people,” and, with wit, tenderness, and a cutting-edge musical
arrangement by George Martin, calls into question the meaning of con-
temporary society. To ignore the vision is to invoke the consequence, and
the final instrumental crescendo paints a scenario of devastation that is
balanced only by Lennon’s invitation to psychedelic experience, “I’d love to
turn you on.” The connection between hallucinogenics and visionary reli-
gion thus falls into place; they are complementary pathways in the search for
an alternative reality to the atrocities of war. As Timothy Leary observed at
the time, the album “gave voice to a feeling that the old ways were out . . . it
came along at the right time that summer.”32 Exactly one month after its
release, the famous editorial by William Rees-Mogg, “Who Breaks a Butter-
fly on a Wheel,” appeared in The Times, defending the position of the Rolling
Stones, who had been imprisoned after admitting to taking drugs. Some
three weeks later, the same paper published an advertisement advocating
the legalization of marijuana, to which the Beatles were signatories.
It is, perhaps, extraordinary that the Beatles should follow Sgt. Pepper
with a double album that reflects on their five-year musical history. It was
musically clever, but for many the so-called “White Album” (The Beatles,
November 1968) suggested that the group was disintegrating, that this was
both an ironic take on their earlier successes and a testimony to Lennon
and McCartney’s individual talents, with little to suggest either literary
or musical unity. Unlike in their earlier collaborations, the majority of
songs on the album were sung by the author: John Lennon, “I’m So Tired,”
“Happiness is a Warm Gun,” “Sexy Sadie,” “Dear Prudence,” “Julia,” “Glass
Onion,” “Revolution 1,” and “The Continuing Story of Bungalow Bill”; Paul
McCartney, “I Will,” “Mother Nature’s Son,” “Helter Skelter,” “Honey Pie,”
“Martha My Dear,” “Rocky Raccoon,” and the opening track, “Back in the
USSR,” which satirizes the absurdities of the Cold War by situating nostalgia
within Soviet Georgia. Even so, the fact that the album failed to demonstrate
any particular theme or conceptual reference point compromised their role
as “spokesmen for their generation,” not least with student activists. The
year 1968 was a period of violence, with the assassination of Martin Luther
King and Senator Robert F. Kennedy foregrounding the problems of racial
conflict and continuing mass protest against the war in Vietnam. The fact
that “Revolution” was released only three days after the student uprising
in Paris (May 6), and that their response to murder and conflict was little
more than an ironic ‘Marseillaise’ within a framework of “Love, Love,
Love,” seemed to many a total disregard of serious political issues. This, it
seems, was left to John and Yoko, whose much publicized quest for peace
in Vietnam is narrated in “The Ballad of John and Yoko” (May 1969) and
“Give Peace a Chance” (1969).
Meanwhile, the Torry Canyon, the world’s first supertanker, had broken
up on the coast of Cornwall; a gas explosion in Tower Hamlets, London,
had brought down a block of high-rise flats; dockers, Post Office workers
and civil servants were on strike, and Commonwealth immigrants were
being made the scapegoats for the country’s problems. It seemed to many
that the party was over. The association of LSD with Satanism, which had
resulted in the murder of Sharon Tate and six others by the Manson family
(August 9, 1969), and the violence at the Rolling Stones concert at Altamont
(December 6, 1969), provided a grim reminder that the freedoms promised
by the sixties cultural revolution were little more than a stoned dream.
LSD was made illegal under the Dangerous Drugs Act, pirate radio was
suppressed, the Youth International Party was formed, and the Pentagon
was exorcised.
By 1969 the Beatles were splitting up, and despite the release of Abbey
Road (1969), their final group album, and the subsequent release of Hey
Jude and Let It Be (1970), there was an increasing involvement with their
individual careers, with five solo albums released that year. Paul had married
Linda Eastman, Ringo was a father, and John had divorced Cynthia and
married Yoko Ono.33 Apple,34 which had been set up in 1968 to support
new bands and make films, was losing money, and the rows over who owned
what arguably contributed to the breakup. Paul left on April 10, 1970, and
on June 19 the Conservative Party was returned to power. While I do not
wish to imply a simplistic cause and effect, for many the two events seemed
to herald the end of an era.
Time, place, and cultural change

This raises the question of the extent to which the Beatles can be considered
an intrinsic part of the decade’s sociocultural zeitgeist. With regard to pop-
ular music, there is no doubt that their songs became the foremost expres-
sion of the poetry of everyday life. Written in the vernacular, they revealed a
world of colorful images, with McCartney constructing stories and charac-
ters and Lennon writing first-person testimonies, including his exploration
of the metaphysical through hallucinogenics. Their albums opened up new
avenues within popular music: pastiches of goodtime twenties songs, simple
216 Sheila Whiteley
rock and roll, folk songs, tongue-in-cheek parodies, country and western
ballads, hints of Elizabethan romanticism, surrealism, comedy, wit, and sen-
timentality. Yet, as much as the Beatles offered a mood of contemporeity –
not least in their engagement with Carnaby Street culture, psychedelia, and
hippy philosophy – they also provided insights into their past. In “Poly-
thene Pam” Lennon recalls his Liverpool club days, “Lovely Rita” eulogizes
a “meter maid,” while “Penny Lane” and “Strawberry Fields Forever” are
lasting reminders of the Liverpool of their youth. It is, however, their stub-
born northern-ness, their Liverpool humor, and their disregard and con-
tempt for the pomposity of class-based social relations that situate them
most accurately in the zeitgeist of the sixties. As Mick Jagger observed at
the time, “The Stones might speak to one’s personal condition in a way
that the Beatles did not, but the Beatles were universal.”35 They may not
have offered solutions to the problems of a society which revolved around
materialism, repressive affluence, and individual conformity, but they nev-
ertheless provided insights, celebrating what was, for their countless fans
worldwide, a cheerful alternative.
12 Beatles news: product line extensions and
the rock canon
gary burns
The record-collector magazine Goldmine has a department now called “All

Things Elvis” but formerly called “Elvis News.” I once mentioned to a friend,
much more a Presley enthusiast than I, that I did not see how there could
be such a magazine column or much “news” about Elvis, who had already
been dead many years. My friend looked at me as if I were crazy – how
could I be so unaware of the perpetual flow of reissues, newly discovered
recordings, books written by Presley’s acquaintances, accomplishments by
or tabloid stories about daughter Lisa Marie Presley, and developments
involving Graceland or Elvis’s estate?
Viewed this way, most of the actual, journalistic “news” (loosely defined)
is about Elvis’s aftermath – either his survivors or the latest product line
extensions growing from his 1950–70s career. Another type of “news” is
the abundant research (again, loosely defined) that continues to be pro-
duced by writers ranging from scholars to amateur memoirists to fanzine
publishers.
There is, obviously and justifiably, substantial and ongoing interest in
Elvis. The “news” about him is actually the discursive and commercial
afterlife of celebrity.1 Elvis is no longer here, but “news” about him still
arises, often in the form of pseudo-events and public relations.
A similar phenomenon is observable with respect to bands that no longer
exist but whose members are still alive. Cream, the Who, the Police, Van
der Graaf Generator, the Stooges, and many others have recently re-formed,
creating new music to write about. Surviving members of bands that do
not re-form generate new solo albums or other projects, not to mention
almost inevitable speculation and interview questions about possible future
reunions.
Aside from Elvis Presley, the most prominent musical act that gen-
erates “news,” despite being defunct, is the Beatles. For years following
their dissolution there was immense interest in the activities of the indi-
vidual Beatles and in the possibility of a reunion. Even after John Lennon
died in 1980, there was hope of John’s son Julian Lennon substituting for
his father in some future reunion.2 A reunion of sorts finally happened
in 1995, with the surviving “Threetles” adding accompaniment to two
[217]
218 Gary Burns
John Lennon demo tapes (“Free as a Bird” and “Real Love”). The recordings
were released under the Beatles’ name in conjunction with the Anthology
project (a video documentary, three double-CD packages, and eventually
a book). A music video was produced and released for each of the “new”
songs.3 All of this activity garnered much press attention and spurred sales
of new and old Beatles product.
In the last few years there has been, not surprisingly, quite a bit of Beatles
“news.” Much of this is reported on such websites as www.whatgoeson.com,
www.thebeatles.com, www.georgeharrison.com, www.johnlennon.com,
www.paulmccartney.com, and www.ringostarr.com. The band itself had a
“new” album in 2006, Love, consisting of mashups and remixes by the Bea-
tles’ producer, George Martin, and his son Giles. The album was a spinoff
project connected with a Cirque du Soleil stage production, also called Love,
built around Beatles recordings. The second installment of reissues of the
Beatles’ original US albums on Capitol appeared in 2006. In 2007 Apple
Records settled a long dispute with Apple, Inc., the computer company,
over use of the word “Apple” as a trademark. Speculation was rampant
that the Beatles’ catalog of recordings would soon be made available for
downloading, possibly through Apple, Inc.’s iTunes service. The individ-
ual Beatles have also been in the “news.” Paul McCartney’s acrimonious
divorce from Heather Mills was tabloid fodder. He performed at Live 8 in
2005 and released two new albums in 2006 and another in 2007. Ringo
Starr released a new album in 2005. George Harrison’s album Living in the
Material World was reissued in 2006. And a John Lennon movie, The U.S. vs.
John Lennon, appeared at about the same time that the “final” FBI files on
John Lennon were released to historian Jon Wiener following “twenty-three
years of litigation.”4 Between April 2006 and April 2007 each Beatle was the
subject of a cover story in Goldmine.
As Ian Inglis states: “While it may appear trite to repeat it, the Beatles
have indeed changed the world, and our perceptions of it, in a way that only
a handful of popular entertainers – Chaplin, Monroe, Presley, Dylan – have
been able to do.”5 The Beatles have been “in the news” internationally since
about 1963, and are still “in the news” in the same manner as Elvis Presley
and also in ways that Elvis never achieved. Truly, the Beatles are a cultural
touchstone, alive in both “dream and history,” as Devin McKinney put it in
the subtitle of his own obsessive, sprawling book on the subject.
While it may seem preposterous to treat the Beatles’ commercial success
separately from their status as sociocultural icons, that is what I am going
to do in this analysis of the Beatles as public figures. It is clear that the
Beatles, aided by savvy business allies, were quite deliberate in their effort
to become the world’s biggest and greatest rock band. At the same time,
they could not possibly have known how fruitful their striving would be or
219 Beatles news: product line extensions and the rock canon
what their stardom would ultimately mean for themselves or for the world.
Thus it is possible to observe the Beatles and their agents as producers,
constantly honing their craft, seeking publicity, hawking product; and,
somewhat alternatively, as objects of admiration, imitation, critique, study,
and parasitism.
The commercial and artistic afterlife of the Beatles is mostly a function
of deliberate, skillful marketing of various product line extensions derived
from the Beatles brand. Much of this activity has been traditional music
industry practice, but some has been innovative and trendsetting.
The marketing of a b(r)and

The Beatles brand originally referred to the group as a working band, then
quickly to the classic songs and sound recordings that today constitute the
Beatles’ “canon.” From their earliest days as recording artists the Beatles
also promoted their brand by engaging in radio and television appearances,
both as musicians and as celebrities in a broader sense. John Lennon and
Paul McCartney wrote songs for other recording artists, including songs
that were not also recorded by the Beatles. Songs written and recorded by
the Beatles were widely covered by other recording artists, contributing
to the image of the Beatles as virtuoso writer-performers and earning a
bonanza of songwriting and publishing royalties.
The American licensing and release of the Beatles’ original UK recordings
took an unusual path that continues to have commercial ramifications.
Capitol, the US affiliate of the Beatles’ UK label, EMI/Parlophone, declined
to release some of the earliest Beatles recordings, which resulted in one of
the first US Beatles albums being released by the independent label Vee-
Jay. Capitol later reissued most of this material on an album called The
Early Beatles. Meanwhile, as Beatlemania erupted in 1964, some pre-EMI
recordings of the Beatles surfaced. On these tracks, the Beatles appear mostly
as a backup band for singer Tony Sheridan, but the numerous reissues of
this material have all stressed the Beatles’ authorship more than that of the
more audible Sheridan.
These complications diluted EMI’s control of the Beatles brand, and
even today the Tony Sheridan recordings – admittedly a minor part of
the Beatles product line – are owned by Universal rather than EMI. In
addition, the US versions of Beatles albums, with a few exceptions, dif-
fered greatly from their UK counterparts. The reason for this was that
US customers were used to about twelve songs per LP, whereas in the
UK about fourteen songs per album was the norm. The UK market was
also accustomed to EP (extended play) releases – 7-inch discs featuring,
220 Gary Burns
usually, two songs per side. In the US market EPs were not a customary
format.
As a result, and as an example, the UK album With the Beatles, containing
fourteen tracks, was issued in the United States as Meet the Beatles, with
twelve tracks. Meet the Beatles included three songs not found on With the
Beatles and excluded five songs from the latter album, all of which showed
up in the United States on The Beatles’ Second Album (an album that was
not issued in the UK). The Beatles were so prolific as recording artists in
the middle and late 1960s that some of their albums in the US market
consisted almost entirely of displaced tracks from previous UK albums and
EPs, singles not included on UK albums, and movie soundtrack music
not included on UK albums (i.e. orchestral [non-Beatles] music recorded
for the Beatles films Help! and Yellow Submarine). Beatles purists then
and now have generally objected to the US Beatles albums because of
their lack of faithfulness to the UK originals, because of their low value to
the customer on a tracks per dollar basis, and because they appeared to
be rather thoughtlessly packaged. The Beatles themselves were irked by
the treatment their albums received from Capitol. Legend has it that the
infamous, withdrawn “butcher” cover art of the USA-only Yesterday . . . and
Today album was intended by the Beatles as a protest against what they saw
as the butchering of their albums by Capitol.
The US versions of the Beatles’ albums have seen a curious resurrection
on compact disc. Originally, the definitive UK versions of the albums were
the only CDs released, and, what’s more, the earliest albums were issued
on CD in mono only, because it was thought they did not sound good
in their primitive and sometimes artificial stereo versions. These aesthetic
justifications notwithstanding, a reissue program for the US Capitol albums
began in 2004, with each album presented in both mono and stereo. Thus
the original problems of Capitol’s avarice and poor execution have become
a latter-day opportunity for further product line extension – an occasion
both for additional avarice and to address genuine demand by completist
and nostalgic fans.
Similarly, the Beatles famously resisted “greatest hits” repackagings of
their works and generally did not appear on label samplers or other com-
pilation albums, partly because, in today’s parlance, such actions would
dilute the Beatles brand. After the band’s demise, such repackaging became
common. It continued in 2000 with 1, a compilation of Beatles number-
one chart hits. A package like this can serve to introduce the band to a new
generation of fans and as a handy career-spanning summary even for fans
who already own some or all of the original albums.6
The Beatles’ forays into television and radio have already been men-
tioned as means by which the Beatles brand was propagated across media.
The main commercial purpose of these appearances was to promote record

sales. Other cross-media ventures, while still serving to promote Beatles
records, also generated new product for immediate sale. John Lennon pub-
lished two books (In His Own Write and A Spaniard in the Works) that
became bestsellers and received critical acclaim.7 Other books by and about
the Beatles have followed by the dozen. Those that do not generate money
directly for the Beatles do so indirectly by keeping the brand visible. The 2000
book The Beatles Anthology is remarkable for many reasons, but especially as
a major new literary and pictorial product emanating from a long-defunct
collective.
The Beatles also spread their brand to film in A Hard Day’s Night (1964),
Help! (1965), Magical Mystery Tour (a 1967 telefilm), Yellow Submarine
(1968), and Let It Be (1970). It was hardly a new idea for recording stars to
appear in films, but the Beatles were exemplary practitioners of this type
of crossover. In particular, A Hard Day’s Night and Yellow Submarine were
groundbreaking works, notwithstanding the Beatles’ tenuous connection
with the latter film.8 John Lennon and Ringo Starr also had minor careers
as film actors (Lennon: How I Won the War [1967]; Starr: Candy [1968], The
Magic Christian [1969], and occasional later work). Paul McCartney (The
Family Way [1966]) and George Harrison (Wonderwall [1968]) dabbled in
film music. Harrison’s Wonderwall Music soundtrack album was the first
solo album by a Beatle, and, along with Lennon’s duo albums with Yoko
Ono, paved the way for the Beatles’ solo careers.
The breakup of the Beatles into four solo acts is an event that looms
with mythic importance in the history of rock music and, indeed, in the
history of the equally mythic 1960s. From about 1964 to 1970 the Beatles
and the entity called the “counterculture” seemed to be “together.” Shortly
after that came disco, corporate rock, the “me” decade, the “culture of
narcissism,” and “psychobabble.”9 The fragmentation of the Beatles seemed
to correspond, at least in some ways, with individualistic trends in American
society. McCartney became domesticated, Lennon participated in primal
scream therapy, and Harrison became more religious. These are caricatures,
of course, but the fact is that the Beatles brand persisted, and its strength
enabled each Beatle to have a successful solo career, albeit without any
individual developing a “product line” as distinguished as that of the band.
Despite the band’s unfortunate dissolution, it must also be said that the
breakup was a commercial success, producing numerous hit singles and
albums, perhaps in greater number than a united band would have achieved.
For completist fans it became, and remains, necessary to keep up with four
careers instead of one.
In addition to the well-established means of product line extension
discussed above, the Beatles have been pioneers and early adopters of other
222 Gary Burns
innovative commercial techniques. Most importantly, the Beatles created

Apple, originally conceived as a sort of countercultural conglomerate with
operations not only in music but also in fashion, electronics, and film.10
All branches other than the music division quickly fell by the wayside, but
the Apple record label still exists and has belatedly and perhaps surprisingly
become an effective vehicle for the ongoing commercial exploitation of
Beatles product. (Frank Sinatra had established Reprise Records in 1960,
but Apple was the first instance of a rock band starting a record label of any
significance. The model set by the Beatles with Apple was quickly copied by
other rock bands seeking some measure of independence from the much-
despised major record labels. Rock band boutique labels established over
the next several years included the Moody Blues’ Threshold label, Jefferson
Airplane’s Grunt, and the eponymous Rolling Stones label.) Apple went
about its business rather chaotically but released numerous hits by the
Beatles as a band and as individuals. Further, recording artists including
Mary Hopkin, Badfinger, James Taylor, and Billy Preston had hits on the
Apple label.
More recently Apple and the surviving Beatles have tinkered with existing
recordings in various ways to produce new Beatles product. As already
mentioned, the “newest” Beatles album, Love, is an authorized mashup,
possibly inspired by Danger Mouse’s unauthorized 2004 mashup The Grey
Album, which combined the Beatles’ 1968 White Album (officially titled
The Beatles) with Jay-Z’s 2003 release The Black Album.
Another “new” product, Let It Be . . . Naked, released in 2003, is a remixed
and reordered version of the 1970 album Let It Be. Phil Spector’s produc-
tion, which either ruined or saved the original album, depending on one’s
opinion, is removed in the 2003 revision.
The Anthology CDs included other examples of altered tracks in addi-
tion to numerous archival, unreleased recordings. As mentioned, the long-
anticipated, albeit virtual, reunion realized in “Free as a Bird” and “Real
Love” was a highlight of the Anthology project. A third reunion track,
“Now and Then” (also known as “Miss You”), remains unfinished and un-
released, but may eventually be completed by McCartney and Starr.11 If
such a prospect seems both desperate and tantalizing, it is a sign that the
Beatles remain the apotheosis of both commercial popularity and canonical
textuality in rock music.
The Beatles in the rock pantheon

In fact, and as a preface to my discussion of the Beatles as canonical figures,
it is worth emphasizing that popularity and eminence are reciprocal, at least
in rock music and at least sometimes. One reason the Beatles became so
popular is that people thought they were good. And one reason people think
the Beatles are good is because they were so popular. To be both “popular”
and “good” is, at least potentially, to be “important.”
Prior to the late 1960s it probably was not widely believed that rock
or most other popular music was “important.” Now few people would
dispute that it is. There is a Rock and Roll Hall of Fame and Museum,
an International Association for the Study of Popular Music, a journal
called Popular Music published by no less a cultural arbiter than Cambridge
University Press, and an Institute of Popular Music at the University of
Liverpool, in the Beatles’ home town. These institutions are only a few of
the hundreds of organizations and publications devoted to the reverent but
critical – and, most importantly, serious – study of popular music. This
enterprise owes its existence, in no small measure, to the Beatles.
We may identify three types of canon pertinent to the study of rock
music – sociological, literary, and musicological. The Beatles are canonical
figures in all three of these domains. By “canon” I mean a group of founders
or revered persons or master practitioners (such as the Beatles); or a group
of texts thought to be masterpieces or “standard” works or representative
specimens (such as the Beatles’ songs); or a group of texts that constitute
an artist’s finished, published, official corpus of work in some format (such
as the Beatles’ EMI and Apple albums and the songs therein).
Rock’s sociological canon

The Beatles are foundational members in what I am calling the sociological
canon of rock music. They were crucial in establishing the importance of
rock as a social phenomenon. After the Beatles, rock, whatever its artistic
merit, could no longer be viewed as a trivial force in Western culture.
Despite their long apprenticeship, which later came to light in biographies,
in most people’s awareness the Beatles seemed to burst upon the scene as
something fresh, unprecedented, and overwhelming. This was Beatlemania,
and its manifestation in the United States in early 1964 was quickly and
lastingly taken to be not merely the latest musical fad but a response to the
assassination of President John F. Kennedy.12
Following Beatlemania, the Beatles continued to prove they were not
only hit-makers but news-makers. John Lennon’s ‘more popular than Jesus’
comment caused a religious backlash in the United States. Upon the death
of their manager, Brian Epstein, the Beatles’ presence at a retreat in Ban-
gor, Wales, with Maharishi Mahesh Yogi, became widely known and drew
attention to the band’s flirtation with Eastern religion. Indian music, drugs,
and an overarching psychedelicism became a fad over the next few years,
spurred partly by the Beatles’ 1967 album Sgt. Pepper’s Lonely Hearts Club
224 Gary Burns
Band and by imagery such as the psychedelic photo portrait of John Lennon
on the cover of the January 9, 1968, issue of Look magazine.
A perception of the Beatles as anti-establishment avatars grew from their
dress and hairstyles, from the aforementioned trappings of psychedelia,
from their formation of Apple (notwithstanding Apple’s status as a capi-
talist undertaking), and from their song lyrics. Lennon was the only Beatle
to become seriously political, and mostly that happened after he left the
Beatles.13 Still, the political implications of songs like “Nowhere Man,”
“Taxman,” “Piggies,” “Revolution,” and the Plastic Ono Band’s “Give Peace
a Chance” were hard to overlook and generally added momentum to the
leftward movement of youth culture at the time, as did Lennon’s, Starr’s,
and especially Harrison’s pioneering ventures into benefit rock in the early
1970s.
The rumored death of Paul McCartney in 1969 and John Lennon’s actual
death in 1980 provided definitive proof, if any were still needed, that the
Beatles were more than musicians. The McCartney farce is a case study in
the sociology of rumor, but is more illuminating in its baroque elaboration
as a conspiratorial, utopian, but apocalyptic myth.14 Lennon’s murder, on
the other hand, was a shattering reality that touched the world as few events
had since the very assassination of JFK that Beatlemania had purportedly
assuaged.15 This is an extraordinary fact.
If we want to discern why Lennon’s death was such a shock we should
perhaps make some comparisons. Elvis Presley’s death only three years
earlier in 1977 did not stop the world the way Lennon’s death did. One
could argue that the difference is explained by the fact that Lennon was
murdered. But Marvin Gaye, who died in 1984, was also shot dead, and
by his own father. Arguably, then, Gaye was less famous, a lesser star, than
Lennon. Then again, George Harrison’s death in 2001 was not violent,
although he had been stabbed by an intruder at his house in 1999. Harrison
was fifty-eight when he died – Lennon was forty. None of this satisfactorily
explains why the death of John Lennon was a defining moment of the
late twentieth century. The breakup of the Beatles had been, to borrow a
cliché, the end of an era. But the breakup could always be undone, thereby
extending or reviving the “era” that had seemed to have passed. When
Lennon died, that truly was the end of the Beatles and of the hope that they
could ever be resurrected, and of the innocent, comforting, naı̈ve belief that
the world at large could, somehow, be “together” in the 1960s sense of the
term.
Rock’s literary canon

If Lennon is the most important of the Beatles in a sociological sense, he
was also the most accomplished wordsmith in the band, and it is mainly
because of him that the Beatles belong in what I am calling the literary
canon of rock music. The towering figure in any such canon must be Bob
Dylan, but if the Beatles rank below Dylan as rock poets, it is not far below,
and their skill as musicians easily makes them (i.e. Lennon and McCartney)
better overall songwriters than Dylan.
But that is not a very significant distinction. Both Dylan and the Beatles
(along with others) made people notice that rock songs were well written
and meaningful. Prior to this, popular music had been largely ignored or
treated as sub-art or as a social problem by critics. Adorno didn’t like the
music in the 1940s. Hayakawa didn’t like the words in the 1950s.
In the 1960s, scholars and other serious observers finally started to write
favorably about popular music, and by then they had something indis-
putably good to write about (although there had always been literary and
musical quality, often unnoticed, in pop). It helped that John Lennon was
a book author and that the books were clever and substantial and praised
by critics. As I will explain below, the Beatles’ songs and records have by
now been repeatedly and microscopically analyzed, with close attention
to both words and music. It nonetheless bears emphasizing that the Bea-
tles’ words have sometimes been the subject of analyses that downplay or
ignore the musical aspects of the Beatles’ art. James Sauceda’s book The
Literary Lennon treats Lennon as an author, as distinct from a songwriter,
and says practically nothing about the Beatles’ songs.16 David Pichaske, one
of the foremost literary analysts of song lyrics, includes the lyrics to the
entire Sgt. Pepper album, plus numerous other songs by the Beatles and
others, in his poetry textbook and anthology Beowulf to Beatles.17 Pichaske
devotes a chapter to the Beatles in his critical and analytical tome The Poetry
of Rock.18 The Beatles’ song lyrics have been published many times, with
and without accompanying sheet music.19 Paul McCartney has published
a book of poetry and lyrics (Blackbird Singing)20 and a children’s book.21
Harrison published a rather skimpy autobiography-cum-lyric-anthology.
The Beatles’ lyrics as a body of work are subjected to statistical content
analysis in a study by West and Martindale22 that concludes that the Bea-
tles evolved as creative songwriters over the course of their career as a
band.
Rock’s musical canon

However, the Beatles’ exalted position in the popular music pantheon
derives only partly from the words they wrote. Well-crafted song lyrics
made English professors take note, which was a crucial event in the ulti-
mate legitimation of what tardily became known as popular music studies.
But even before the celebration of the Beatles as songwriters it was clear
that they were phenomenal performers and recording artists, which placed
226 Gary Burns
them, almost from the beginning of Beatlemania, in what I am calling rock’s

musical canon.
The British Invasion of the mid-1960s, led by the Beatles, brought dozens
of UK recording artists to concert venues and radio and TV airwaves in the
United States. During this period British acts had hundreds of hit recordings
in the USA and around the world. The Beatles were first among equals in
this musical movement. Then they adapted to changing conditions (as some
of their compatriots did not) and proved their durability as leaders in the
emerging rock culture.
It is hard for those too young to have been teenagers in the 1960s to
believe, but the Dave Clark Five and Herman’s Hermits were, at that time,
almost as big as the Beatles. If there had been a rock canon at the time,
the DC5 and Herman would have been in it. Critical opinion nowadays
would place them in a second tier behind the Beatles and about a half dozen
other British Invasion bands that are more respectfully remembered than
are Clark and Herman. In this more elite, probably canonical, group are the
Rolling Stones, the Kinks, the Who, the Animals, the Yardbirds, and Pink
Floyd.
This group of bands and the Beatles, along with others including (canon-
ical) “response” bands such as the Byrds and the post-Invasion Beach Boys,
established conventions of artistic practice and understanding that defined
“rock” for many years. These conventions still have great influence, despite
erosion over the years, and still affect some of our judgments about quality.
I will expound briefly on five of these conventions.
First, in “rock” it became important for performers to write their own
songs – Kill Brill, we might say. The Beatles excelled at this; Herman’s
Hermits did not.
Second, “rock” is an art, whereas it had been unnecessary or difficult to
think of popular music in this way prior to the mid-sixties. The art school
background of many British rock musicians, documented by Frith and
Horne,23 undoubtedly contributed to an art-based ideology, as did critical
acclaim for the Beatles’ use of such devices as the Aeolian cadence, discussed
below.
Third, “rock” posited the LP album as an art form, whereas the primary
unit of recorded popular music had, heretofore, been the individual song
of about three minutes’ duration. The landmark album for purposes of this
discussion is the Beatles’ Sgt. Pepper, notwithstanding the fact that their
earlier albums Rubber Soul and especially Revolver are today sometimes
regarded as better than Sgt. Pepper.
There is also dispute about whether Sgt. Pepper was the first “concept
album,” although it was in any case one of the first. It was the album to live up
to after its debut in 1967. It was one of the first albums to include printed
lyrics, a gatefold cover, and elaborate packaging. It was one of the first
albums to be built around a theme, such as it was, and around a dramatic
pretense (the Beatles in costume and in character as another band). Sgt.
Pepper included no hit singles. It was one of the first albums in which the
end of one song overlapped with the beginning of the next, conveying the
impression of a larger work.
Fourth, “rock” musicians played their own instruments, although, fifth,
“rock” music also expanded the palette of musical instruments, musical
styles, and studio production techniques acceptable in combination with
status quo practices inherited from the early 1960s music industry. Thus it
was important that the Beatles were good musicians and singers, whereas it
was a problem for the Monkees, initially, that they did not play their own
instruments (more precisely, it was a problem that this fact became widely
known). The use of session musicians was a bad thing if they substituted
for the credited band, a good thing if they supplemented and were in some
way directed by the credited band and used to advance the art form.
We see in these conventions an emerging romantic, auteurist ideology of
originality, expression, transcendent genius, and authenticity. This ideology
played out in teen magazines, which quickly mutated, parallel to the music
itself, into more ambitious and ostensibly more high-minded journalistic
outlets such as Rolling Stone, Crawdaddy, and Fusion (which had begun as
New England Teen Scene). The writing in these magazines ranged from teen
or celebrity gossip to rigorous analysis.
The Beatles were one of the first rock bands susceptible to this level of
analysis, and were thus instrumental, at least indirectly, in the founding
of popular music studies. Even before the teen magazines became more
serious, the Beatles had been praised in The Times – in 1963! – for, among
other things, using an “Aeolian cadence” in their rather insubstantial song
“Not a Second Time.”24 An Aeolian cadence is a chord change, at the end of
a song, from vi to I. A better example than “Not a Second Time” is “Help!” –
but “Help!” was not released until 1965.25 The remarkable thing is not that
the Beatles were using Aeolian cadences (without knowing the name for
them) but that a music critic for The Times was noticing it in 1963.26
The comment about the Aeolian cadence has, ever since, been used as
a joke and as an example of overanalysis, the academicization of some-
thing the Beatles did instinctively or spontaneously or with knowledge
drawn from real-world apprenticeship and experimentation and creativ-
ity. Still, the Beatles’ mastery – instinctive or otherwise – of the rules of
mainstream tune-writing was so striking that it allowed and practically
demanded acknowledgment by critics and, indeed, by scholars.
Just as English professors have analyzed Beatles lyrics as poetry, music
professors have written exhaustively about the musical qualities of the
228 Gary Burns
Beatles’ songs and records. The Beatles’ entire catalog (i.e. canon) of record-
ings has been transcribed and published in musical scores.27 Starting as
early as 1973 with a book by Wilfrid Mellers,28 there have been numer-
ous, extended analyses of the Beatles’ musical oeuvre, often on a song-by-
song basis, sometimes including analysis of lyrics along with the music,
and sometimes highly technical in their use of music theory. Treatments
in this vein, besides that of Mellers, include those of O’Grady,29 Riley,30
Dowlding (a journalistic, song-by-song discussion with little musical or lyri-
cal analysis),31 MacDonald,32 Hertsgaard,33 Pollack,34 and Walter Everett’s
monumental two-book set.35 In addition, several Beatles albums have entire
books devoted to them.36 My point is not that the Beatles deserve this level
of scholarly, quasi-scholarly, journalistic, and fan attention – they probably
do, but in any case the publications indicate that the Beatles enjoy a canoni-
cal status that is unprecedented for popular musicians. Even for the Beatles’
contemporaries of elevated stature, such as Bob Dylan, the Rolling Stones,
and the Beach Boys, the books are not as numerous, as serious, or as good.
The Dave Clark Five are not even on this “chart.”
The Beatles and Popular Music Studies

As I have suggested, the Beatles were an important spur to academic activ-
ities that resulted eventually in a somewhat formalized field of popular
music studies. For decades prior to the 1960s, there had been scholarly
studies of popular music (in the broad sense) published in journals such
as American Quarterly, Et Cetera, Ethnomusicology, the American Journal of
Sociology, and the Journal of American Folklore. One of the first academic
studies of rock music was an article about Beatlemania published in 1966.37
Another Beatlemania study38 and an analysis of Beatles lyrics39 followed
in 1969. Larry Smith’s PhD dissertation about the Beatles, which may be
the first dissertation about rock music, appeared in 1970.40 The Journal
of Popular Culture, early in its history, published a colloquy from 1969 to
1971 about the Beatles and the “serious” study of popular music.41 Shortly
thereafter, in 1971, the journal Popular Music and Society began, partly as
a sort of academic product line extension of the Journal of Popular Cul-
ture. Throughout its history Popular Music and Society (which I now edit)
has published numerous articles about the Beatles, including several for
a special issue on the band in 1998 and a recent tour de force analysis by
Barbara Bradby42 suggesting, among other things, that the odd use of pro-
nouns in “She Loves You” positioned the singing Beatles as go-betweens or
“vehicles of female discourse,”43 representing a “breakthrough for girls.”44
Even though I am drastically truncating and oversimplifying the argument
developed in Bradby’s article, it should be clear that Bradby has a novel and
compelling explanation for at least part of the power and popularity of the
Beatles.
I close with this example because I believe it represents the best in recent
studies of the Beatles and provides the academic community with a model
for ongoing scholarship. It opened my ears to new ways of understanding
the Beatles’ music – ways that had not occurred to me in forty years of
reasonably careful listening, thinking, and writing. To me, Bradby’s article
was news – good news. It is a safe bet that there will continue to be Beatles
news for many years to come, much of it commercially motivated, some
driven by fan obsession and admiration, some seeking to understand and
explain this most singular band, their canonical music, and the mania that
has still not quite stopped swirling around them.
13 “An abstraction, like Christmas”: the Beatles
for sale and for keeps
john kimsey
When, in a generation or so, a radio-active, cigar-smoking child, picnicking on Saturn, asks you
what the Beatle affair was all about – Did you actually know them? – don’t try to explain all about
the long hair and the screams! Just play the child a few tracks from this album and he’ll probably
understand what it was all about. The kids of AD 2000 will draw from the music much the same
sense of well being and warmth as we do today. derek taylor 1
Beatles press officer Derek Taylor got some things wrong in his 1964 liner
notes for Beatles for Sale. Certainly he was off with the Saturn bit, and
the claim with which he closed – Beatles for Sale “is the best album yet” –
missed the mark by 180 degrees, at least if you accept the critical consensus
that sees the band’s fourth LP as a cover-filled rush job, the exhausted
gasp that pretty much had to follow the ecstatic peak of A Hard Day’s
Night.
But Taylor was on to something about AD 2000. On November 13
of that year, Apple Corps released 1, a CD collecting twenty-seven chart-
topping Beatles singles which, in its first week, sold 3.6 million copies, a sales
pace that held up for weeks, such that 1 became the year’s biggest-selling
album and the top seller “in 30 countries.”2 In the same month, ABC
television broadcast a two-hour documentary, Beatles Revolution, which
featured luminaries such as Salman Rushdie, J. K. Rowling, Al Green, and
President Bill Clinton attesting not just to the Beatles’ tunefulness but to
their transformative impact on world culture. The month before had seen
the Rock and Roll Hall of Fame and Museum unveil a huge exhibit entitled
Lennon: His Life and Work, an installation designed to showcase its late
subject as both multimedia artist and world-historical individual. Late fall
was also rollout time for the print edition of the Beatles Anthology, the last
phase of a documentary project which first went public (in televisual and
audio form) in November 1995. And oh yes, in December, A Hard Day’s
Night, the band’s cheeky, innovative film debut, was re-released in select US
theaters. When, at the end of 2005, the show business bible Variety marked its
hundredth anniversary by publishing a list of the 100 entertainment “Icons
of the Century,” the Beatles took another trophy. The top ten included Louis
Armstrong, Marilyn Monroe, Mickey Mouse, and Elvis Presley, but Variety
ranked the Beatles toppermost of the poppermost.3
[230]
231 The Beatles for sale and for keeps
It was the turn of the century of course, and the millennium to boot, and
hence a season for lists, retrospectives, and nostalgia-mongering. Striking,
though, was the Beatles’ prominence in both sales charts and less quan-
tifiable registers of meaning. According to the editors of In My Life, a late
nineties collection of writing inspired by the Beatles, “Their music circum-
scribes a small but important evolutionary history of the changing politics,
spirituality and mores of the second half of the twentieth century,” so that
a book about “encounters with the Beatles” is also “a book about each one
of us.”4
Whether we define “popular” in terms of units purchased or people’s
experience – by the numbers or by the zeitgeist – the Beatles seem to have
it covered, and this has long been one of their tricks, this ability to bridge
domains. Thus, in the sixties they managed both to dominate show business
and make music seen as having “the highest artistic quality.”5 If, as many
analysts have suggested, the twentieth century marks the moment when
the boundaries delimiting high from mass culture were once and for all
dissolved, then it seems apt to regard the Beatles as epochal.
But it has not always seemed so. The band’s progress from sixties star-
dom to millennial symbol was not inevitable. As early as 1976, rock critic
Greil Marcus saw himself having to defend the Beatles from a “consensus”
that dismissed them as “imitative, lightweights, yea-sayers, softies, ordinary
musicians, vaguely unhip, unimaginative lyrically, and, above all, ‘clever’ –
that is, merely clever. You know, the Beatles just wanted to hold your hand,
while the Stones wanted to pillage your town, etc.”6 And following punk, the
Beatles’ stock fell further: “As the Seventies advanced, the apolitical Beatles
came to seem irrelevant,” writes Ian MacDonald, “and by the Eighties they
were regarded by the pop press as museum pieces. Only when a psychedelic
revival occurred in pop culture during the late Eighties did the Beatles’
records start to make emotional sense to their young descendants.”7
Coincident with this revival was the reintroduction, in 1987, of the
Beatles catalog through the then young medium of the compact disc, a
move timed to mark the twenty-year anniversary of Sgt. Pepper’s Lonely
Hearts Club Band – the LP widely regarded as the Beatles’ magnum opus,
the apotheosis of psychedelia, and/or the most influential rock album of all
time.
In the same year, EMI commissioned Beatles researcher Mark Lewisohn
to write The Complete Beatles Recording Sessions (published in 1988), a com-
pendious diary chronicling the group’s studio history. Based on pioneering
work by EMI engineer John Barrett, the book mapped the mass of mixes,
submixes, mastertakes and outtakes housed in the Abbey Road vaults –
hundreds of hours’ worth of Beatles material, never before archived coher-
ently. Abbey Road’s Ken Townsend described Lewisohn’s book as “the first
232 John Kimsey
and only one to tell the story of [the group’s] recording career” and “the
definitive reference work for Beatles’ fans everywhere.”8 Lewisohn’s book
in turn nourished several others. For example, Ian MacDonald’s Revolution
in the Head: The Beatles’ Records and the Sixties, published in 1994, drew on
Lewisohn’s raw session data and added rich, critically astute song-by-song
commentary to produce a book that made the Beatles come alive for many
readers too young to have witnessed things first-hand. In the post-punk
interval, a scholarly discourse on the Beatles as recording artists – as masters
of what Evan Eisenberg terms “phonography,” the art of using the studio not
simply to store but to construct musical compositions – began to emerge
and, alongside it, a more friendly critical climate.9
In 1992, rumors began to appear in the press suggesting that yet unheard
Beatles songs were secreted away in the Abbey Road vaults. Then, in a Jan-
uary 1994 New Yorker article begun as a profile of Lewisohn, journalist Mark
Hertsgaard confirmed that the Beatles were planning to issue unreleased
material culled from the archives. Moreover, this project would see the three
surviving Beatles coming together to work on new material. Hertsgaard had
been invited by EMI to listen to some of the closely held archive tapes, some-
thing he portrayed as a great privilege.10 His follow-up book, A Day in the
Life (1995), attempted to make the case to a broad, non-technical audience
that the Beatles were, above all, exemplary modern artists.
This foreshadowed the carefully executed, massively promoted Beatles
Anthology project of the mid-nineties. While some complained that the
Anthology was mostly hype, others, such as musicologist Walter Everett,
saw great value in it: “While the Anthology . . . closes a very long chapter
in Beatles history, it also inspires a very strong sense that the Beatles are
beginning anew.”11 The Anthology racked up tremendous sales numbers,
with many purchases being made by young consumers. It came out during
the heyday of Britpop, a new movement that looked for inspiration to the
sixties British Invasion. As a lavish retrospective on the band synonymous
with sixties cultural change, Anthology helped position the Beatles for the
millennium sweepstakes.
None of this had to happen, of course. It’s not as if with the Anthology
Apple finally perfected mass-mediated mind control. The 2006 Love album
received press coverage almost as breathless as that for the Anthology without
making a comparable impact. But in exerting control over “the repertoire
of products available for cultural consumption,” Apple and EMI helped
prepare the way for the Anthology’s enthusiastic reception.12 In the words of
Simon Frith, while consumers can make “creative” meanings for the prod-
ucts of the culture industries, both “what is available to us” and “what we can
do” depend in part on “decisions made in production, made by musicians,
entrepreneurs and corporate bureaucrats, made according to governments’
and lawyers’ rulings, in response to technological opportunities.”13 This

chapter will consider such factors while tracing attempts, by Apple Corps
and EMI, individual Beatles and their representatives, to invoke, inscribe,
or re-frame the band’s historical legacy – a legacy that is at once cultural
and economic. It will concentrate on the period from the late eighties to
2007.
The Beatles on CD
In 1987, Beatles music was made available for the first time in the com-
pact disc format. With George Martin overseeing the remastering process,
EMI/Parlophone released twelve Beatles albums on CD: Please Please Me;
With the Beatles; A Hard Day’s Night; Beatles for Sale; Help!; Rubber Soul;
Revolver; Sgt. Pepper’s Lonely Hearts Club Band; Magical Mystery Tour; The
Beatles (a.k.a. the White Album); Abbey Road; and Let It Be.14 This sequence
mirrored the Beatles’ LPs as they had been originally released in the UK.15
In addition, the 1988 follow-up CDs, Past Masters Volumes 1 and 2, collected
tens of single releases – e.g., “We Can Work It Out”/“Day Tripper” – which
had not been included on UK albums.16
As is well known, Beatles LPs released in the US during the 1960s were,
up through Revolver, configured quite differently from their UK counter-
parts. This was due to Capitol Records’ policy of stretching the product for
the American market. At Parlophone in the UK, it was standard practice to
include fourteen songs on a Beatles LP. Moreover, “UK chart protocol” mil-
itated against including single releases on albums.17 In the USA, pop/rock
customs were different. A typical LP – e.g., Beach Boys Today!, or the Byrds’
Fifth Dimension – featured ten to twelve songs and often included recently
released singles as part of the package. Knowing what the market would
bear, Capitol simply lopped a few songs off each UK Beatles album, creat-
ing a surplus which could then be exploited. By tossing a half dozen such
surplus tracks together with, say, two recent singles, Capitol could come up
with ten “extra” Beatles tracks, enough to generate a “new” album. Though
it was the band’s sixth album on Parlophone, Rubber Soul was its eighth
on Capitol. Moreover, if one takes into account the two US-only LPs that
appeared on labels other than Capitol – Introducing the Beatles (Vee Jay,
1963) and A Hard Day’s Night (United Artists, 1964) – then Rubber Soul
counts as the band’s tenth LP in the American market.
So, in December 1965, UK consumers were offered a Rubber Soul con-
taining fourteen tracks, the first of which was “Drive My Car.” Meanwhile,
US consumers were offered an LP of the same name containing only twelve
tracks, with “Drive My Car” not among them. Instead, the US Rubber Soul
234 John Kimsey
kicked off with “I’ve Just Seen a Face,” a song from the UK version of Help!
(an LP that, in its US version, filled out nearly half its length with orchestral
passages from the film soundtrack). Additional songs (such as “Nowhere
Man,” “If I Needed Someone,” and “What Goes On”) which were integral
to Rubber Soul as the Beatles assembled it were not included on the US
release.
The sort of slicing and dicing which Capitol engaged in was perhaps
excusable early on, when the Beatles seemed like a singles-based hit-making
machine and British beat just another youth craze. But by Rubber Soul, the
Beatles had begun to see themselves less as teen market tunesmiths and
more as artists with a musical vision, and were crafting LPs accordingly. In
this light, Capitol’s blithe reconfiguration of opuses like Rubber Soul and
Revolver – and its creation of chimeras like Yesterday & Today (an album,
non-existent in the UK, which the American audience was led to think came
between Rubber Soul and Revolver) – seems at best heavy-handed, and at
worst brazenly dismissive of the authors’ intentions. Of course, in 1965, the
very notion that pop singers might be auteurs with notable intentions was
new. Along with Bob Dylan, the mid-sixties Beatles would be key to pop’s
transformation into something people took seriously.
Generations of Americans had grown up listening to the Capitol LPs
and hence to arguably impoverished versions of masterworks like Revolver
or landmarks like Please Please Me.18 The 1987 CD releases meant to correct
this distorted image by returning to the UK selections and sequences. From
1987 to 2003, the only officially available Beatles CDs were the Parlophone
editions. Thus, a new generation of Beatles listeners was to be raised on
what one might call the band’s proper albums and intentions.
And yet this itself produced a new demand from Beatles fans who, back
in the sixties, had come of age with the Capitol releases.19 In a few years,
bootleggers were creating their own CD versions of the Capitol albums as
well as rarities such as the mono mix of Sgt. Pepper.20 Not having access
to master tapes, bootleggers such as “Dr. Ebbets” of the Dr. Ebbets Sound
System relied on pristine vinyl LPs of the type produced in limited edition
by Mobile Fidelity Sound Lab in the early eighties.21 Such bootleggers
transferred the vinyl LPs to CD using higher sampling rates than those
available to Martin and company in the mid-eighties. Some listeners think
these bootlegs sound better than the 1987 CD remasters, which are held to
have a harsh, “tinny” quality thought to be typical of digital audio of the
mid-eighties period.22
As if in response to this trend, in 2004 Capitol released the first of several
projected CD boxed sets presenting the Capitol LPs in both mono and stereo
formats along with the original artwork and lavish additional packaging.
The Capitol CDs also faithfully reproduced other features peculiar to the
Capitol Records releases: for instance, Capitol in the sixties was in the habit
of adding extravagant doses of reverb to Beatles mixes, with the thought
that this would make them “jump” more when aired on car radios. This no
doubt irked the Beatles and their production team, who, by Rubber Soul,
were using minimal amounts of reverb in their recordings.23
Nonetheless, even in a narrative that privileges the Beatles’ artistry over
Capitol’s commercialism, the Capitol releases can be said to play an impor-
tant role. Consider again the Capitol version of Rubber Soul: lacking four
songs that appeared on its UK counterpart, it can seem a travesty. And yet
this is the LP – the American Rubber Soul – that shook Brian Wilson, such
that he was inspired to embark on Pet Sounds, a record which sustained
moods, textures, and lyrical themes across an album’s length and which
strongly influenced Sgt. Pepper:
I was sitting around a table with friends, smoking a joint, when we heard
Rubber Soul for the very first time; and I’m smoking and getting high and
the album blew my mind because it was a whole album with good stuff! It
flipped me out so much I said, I’m going to try that, where the whole album
becomes a gas.24
Starting with the bluegrass-flavored, acoustic twelve-string-driven “I’ve

Just Seen a Face,” segueing into the Celtic modalism of “Norwegian Wood,”
strolling on through “Michelle,” “Girl,” “I’m Looking Through You,” and
“In My Life,” the Capitol Rubber Soul seems dominated by woody instru-
mental textures and gentle, laidback rhythms. Start the same LP with the
faux-Memphis funk of “Drive My Car,” add the glistening, metallic sheen
of “Nowhere Man” and “If I Needed Someone,” and a very different spell
is cast. Listening to the Capitol Rubber Soul, many Americans assumed that
the Fabs had gone folk – in post-MTV parlance, unplugged – for an entire
LP. This was a fortuitous consequence of Capitol’s fiddling with Parlophone
products. To the extent that it inspired Pet Sounds, though, the accident
might be deemed a happy one.
Live at the BBC

In 1989, Apple Corps won a longstanding legal dispute with EMI concerning
underpaid royalties. In addition to a multi-million pound settlement, Apple
chief Neil Aspinall secured veto power over any future Beatles releases
from EMI.25 This cleared the way for Apple to roll out a sequence of
carefully researched retrospectives featuring previously unreleased material.
Though the Anthology is the best-known of these, prior to the Anthology
came The Beatles Live at the BBC, released in 1994. This double-CD set
assembled nearly seventy tracks by the band, all recorded at BBC studios for
radio broadcasts during 1962–5, many of them live to tape. The collection
236 John Kimsey
included Lennon-McCartney hits and funny interview bits, but the great
majority of numbers were cover tunes. Indeed, Live at the BBC provides a
picture window on to what the Beatles must have been like as a working
club band. They rip through fifties era numbers with rollicking ease and
show themselves to have been even closer students of artists such as Chuck
Berry, Arthur Alexander, Carl Perkins, and the Everly Brothers than their
early LPs would suggest. And, as showcased here, the Beatles appear to have
been particular devotees of obscure rockabilly B sides by groups like the
Johnny Burnette Trio and the Jodimars. Indeed, if one wished to argue,
as some have, that the early Beatles were at heart a rockabilly band, one
could point to Live at the BBC as Exhibit A. A report on the band’s radio
audition, written by the BBC producer in charge at the time, seems to
concur. Producer Peter Pilbeam described the early Beatles as “an unusual
group. Not as ‘Rocky’ as most, more country and western with a tendency
to play music.”26 Live at the BBC provides an extended look at this “unusual
group” and the music it favored in its formative years.
The Anthology
In 1995, the Beatles Anthology debuted. A sweeping chronicle of the band’s
career produced in house by Apple, the Anthology took the form of a
ten-hour, eight-part documentary film, three double-CD sets featuring
previously unreleased material, and a stylishly appointed, 368-page coffee-
table book which reproduced selected images and most of the dialog from
the film. The sheer maximalism of the project might suggest delusions of
grandeur, but the Anthology was enthusiastically received and “made the
Beatles an enormous media property again.”27 The first of the CD sets was
issued in 1995 and contained music recorded as early as 1958 and as late
as 1964; the Anthology 2 and 3 sets, covering the band’s middle and late
periods respectively, were released a few months apart in 1996. All featured
track-by-track annotations by Lewisohn.
Anthology 1 also included a new Beatles song recorded in the 1990s, an
intended coup that brought to mind clichés about the magic of technol-
ogy. The process began in 1994 at the ceremony inducting John Lennon,
solo artist, into the Rock and Roll Hall of Fame.28 At the ceremony,
where McCartney did the honors for his old partner, Ono gave McCart-
ney some cassette tapes containing demos Lennon had made at home in
the late 1970s.29 Collaborating with producer Jeff Lynne and engineer Geoff
Emerick, the three surviving Beatles – nicknamed the Threetles – proceeded
to add voices and instruments, hooks and countermelodies to Lennon’s
rough, lo-fi voice/piano renditions of “Free as a Bird” and “Real Love.”
Thus adorned, the two songs became the opening tracks, respectively, of
the CD sets Anthology 1 and 2, and were also released as CD singles.30 A third
demo was slated for the same treatment and same slot on Anthology 3, but
after completing work on the second song, Harrison declined to participate
further and work on the third demo ceased.31
Of course, expectations for such a record were huge and, as a Beatles
effort, “Free as a Bird” was judged decidedly sub-par by close critics such
as MacDonald and Tim Riley. Riley mistakenly attacked McCartney for
the song’s hackneyed middle eight (composed, except for a few words, by
Lennon), while MacDonald found the only high point to be the key change
setting up Harrison’s soaring, horn-like slide guitar solo.32 Other astute
listeners were clearly moved by a virtual Beatles reunion: at a King Crimson
concert ten days after the song’s release, rock avantist Adrian Belew stunned
the crowd by dialing up a piano patch on his guitar synthesizer and giving
a pitch-perfect solo rendition of “Free as a Bird.” It was a hail-to-the-chief
gesture, the flip side to Jimi Hendrix whipping out the Sgt. Pepper theme
at the Saville Theatre just three days after that album’s release on June 1,
1967.33
The bulk of all three Anthology CD compilations consists of previously
unreleased demos, outtakes, and live recordings of songs from the Beatles
repertoire that are, as songs, mostly familiar. Notable exceptions include “If
You’ve Got Trouble” and “That Means a Lot,” Lennon-McCartney compo-
sitions recorded during the Help! sessions but absent from the album or film.
Yet even with known songs, alternative renditions of the type collected here
can be revelatory: Harrison’s pensive, acoustic-guitar-and-voice demo for
“While My Guitar Gently Weeps” from Anthology 3 contrasts strikingly with
the thudding rock number found on the White Album. Illuminating too is
take 1 of “Tomorrow Never Knows,” included on Anthology 2. This land-
mark Beatles creation appears here shorn of its most distinctive features –
the tambura, the syncopated drum figure, the harmonic shift to the mixoly-
dian VII, the backwards guitar solo, and, above all, the otherworldly tape
loops that stir the song’s “seething dazzle.”34 Titled “Mark I” at this nascent
moment, the song bears paltry resemblance to “the thrilling orgy of sound”
which closes Revolver.35 In particular, the Anthology outtake allows one to
appreciate the power of McCartney’s contribution to this visionary Lennon
song, for it was he who cooked up the tape loop idea, as well as the loops
themselves – the coup de grâce so notable by its absence here.36
The video Anthology debuted in November 1995 when a three-part, six-
hour version was broadcast by ITV in the UK and ABC TV in the USA. The
film became available for retail purchase in the fall of 1996. In its DVD boxed
set incarnation the Anthology is divided into eight parts, and clocks in at
over ten hours, with an additional eighty-one minutes of special features.37
Directed by Geoff Wonfor and produced by Apple chief Neil Aspinall and
Chips Chipperfield, the documentary draws on a store of footage, much of it
238 John Kimsey
collected during the sixties by Aspinall, who at the time served as the Beatles’
road manager. Aspinall was gathering material for a retrospective eventually
given the working title The Long and Winding Road. With the breakup of
the band and the many years of ensuing infighting, the project was put
aside, even as Aspinall went on to become de facto CEO of Apple.38 When,
in 1989, the aforementioned lawsuit with EMI was settled, the moment
seemed right for a return to the project. Known for his skill at mediating
between all concerned even when the various Beatle camps were feuding,
Aspinall convinced McCartney, Starr, Ono, and even a reluctant Harrison
to come aboard.39 To add to the store of material already collected, new
interviews were done with the three surviving Beatles in both one-on-one
and group settings. Lennon’s voice was included by way of the many audio
and video interviews he had given during the period 1963–80. These were
then woven together to create a narrative that, starting with recollections
of childhood, closely tracks the group through formation, struggle, mania,
and megastardom to its official dissolution in 1970. In place of a single
voiceover narrator, the Anthology presents the voices of the four Beatles in
a polyphonic tapestry. The Anthology is thus described as the Beatles’ story
“in their own words.”40
This is both a strength and a weakness of the project. It is, for instance,
most intriguing to hear the Beatles themselves discuss, say, meeting Elvis
Presley, or being roughed up by the Marcos government of the Philippines,
or whether Magic Alex may have had a hand in the uproar at Rishikesh in
1968. At the same time, it can be frustrating, for the Beatles’ are nearly the
only voices one hears on such topics. The other prominent interviewees are
Aspinall, Derek Taylor, and George Martin, all members of the band’s inner
circle. As MacDonald notes, once Ono declined to take part as an inter-
viewee, then “other wives and lovers were ruled out,” and this, combined
with the fact that the project was controlled from top to bottom by Apple,
gives the Anthology a “Party Line tinge.”41
Another drawback to this approach is that the Beatles, quite under-
standably, have difficulty making the case for their own artistic greatness.
Autobiographers usually do, as one doesn’t want to boast, and anyway, one
may have written a masterpiece like, say, “Eleanor Rigby” and still have little
of interest to say about the fact or artifact. Commentary and analysis is not
the artist’s job; it does, however, seem necessary to any attempt at a defini-
tive portrait. In the Anthology, the Beatles’ greatness is taken for granted;
nowhere is it explained, explored, or considered in any critical depth. In
this sense, though it offers much to the Beatles fan, the film preaches to the
choir. It’s doubtful whether a young person not already familiar with the
band and its enormous impact would, on viewing Anthology, comprehend
what all the fuss has been about.
Contrast this approach to that taken by the 1987 Granada Television

special It Was Twenty Years Ago Today, produced to mark the twentieth
anniversary of the release of Sgt. Pepper. This documentary – assembled,
like the Anthology, in close consultation with Derek Taylor – featured fresh
interviews with the surviving Beatles, but also talking heads as diverse as
Allen Ginsberg, Roger McGuinn, Barry Miles, Abbie Hoffman, Wilfred
Mellers, William Mann, William Rees-Mogg, Paul Kantner, and Michelle
Phillips. It argues for the album’s greatness, but does so by placing it in a
broad cultural and historical context while offering a range of viewpoints,
including the odd dissenting voice:
interviewer: Is love all you need? . . .

abbie hoffman: No. (Smiles.) It’s nice to have. (Laughs.) It’s nice, as is
peace. But it is not, and this is basically the flaw in Beatle politics: Justice is
all you need.42
By comparison, the Anthology film seems guarded, centripetal. There is

a telling moment near the end when Harrison remarks, concerning Beatle-
mania, “You know [the fans] gave their money and . . . their screams, but the
Beatles kind of gave their nervous systems, which is a much more difficult
thing to give.”43 It is as if the Beatles, having expended so much, now mean
to take something back. That something is, of course, their own story, and
their strategy for reclaiming it in the Anthology involves not only banishing
outsiders, but also revealing certain things while concealing others. (There
is, for instance, virtually no mention of the orgiastic escapades the group
got up to during their concert tours.) The gaps, though, are overshadowed
by the great size of the edifice – all that film, tape, talk, and music. Harrison’s
wry remark evokes spectacle and sacrifice, something on the order, say, of a
bullfight. Juxtaposed in the film with Starr’s and McCartney’s affirmations
of love – love among “four guys” and “love” and “peace” as the band’s
“spirit” – it hints at something messianic.44 But then every autobiogra-
phy is a piece of mythology, constructing an identity for its author/subject
while pretending to reveal the already-there. Approached with this in mind
and supplemented with critical and contextualizing material, the Anthology
becomes a vital resource on Beatles music and culture.
Revisionisms
In November 2002, McCartney released Back in the US, a live double
album documenting his recent North American concert tour.45 Lennon-
McCartney songs accounted for nineteen of the album’s thirty-five tracks,
and in the listings for these, McCartney reversed the authors’ credit so that
240 John Kimsey
his own name came first. The songs in question were indeed McCartney
compositions, whether in whole (e.g., “Hey Jude”) or in large part (e.g., “We
Can Work It Out”), but the move sparked cries of foul from some Beatles
fans and from Yoko Ono. Her spokesman, Elliot Mintz, called McCartney’s
action “a misguided act of Beatle revisionism” and “an attempt to rewrite
history.” Meanwhile McCartney rep, Geoff Baker, attributed the move to
McCartney’s concern about his “place in history.”46
In the previous twenty-four months, McCartney had released a new
solo album, supported it with a record-setting world tour, and headlined
the Queen’s Jubilee, the Superbowl, and the post-9/11 Concert for New
York. He had also published a book of poetry, exhibited a collection of his
abstract paintings, and overseen the release of both a Wings anthology and
the experimental opus Liverpool Sound Collage. In spring 2001, he also gave
several high-profile interviews in which he sounded a persistent theme:
“With the computer generation coming in and data being stored . . . there
probably is a scenario in the future where someone will think that ‘Hey
Jude,’ ‘Let It Be,’ ‘The Long and Winding Road’ . . . were written by the guy
who came first.”47 Envisioning a time when data banks might abbreviate
Beatles songwriting credits to something on the order of, say, “jlennon&,”
McCartney feared he was headed for history’s delete file.
To many, such talk seemed inappropriate if not absurd. In one inter-
view, CNN’s Larry King remarked, “There’s no one who doesn’t know
you,” as if to reassure this most famous, wealthy, and talented of celebri-
ties that everything was OK.48 Yet as early as 1981 McCartney had voiced
concern that, in the wake of Lennon’s murder, a “cult” had emerged –
one which deified Lennon, often at his own expense.49 Of course, since his
murder, Lennon’s image, legend, and aura have grown so that they cast
a long shadow, not just over McCartney, but over contemporary culture.
Anthony Elliott has argued that “since his tragic death in 1980 at the age
of 40 . . . Lennon has become an object of mourning, of fantasy, of intense
feelings of hope and dread” – a “transcendent hero” who “haunts our
culture.”50
What appears to haunt McCartney is the impossibility of meeting and
competing with such a figure on a level playing field.
king: Do you ever think he gets more credit than you?

m ccartney: No, I – what’s happened since he died is that . . .
king: There’s a martyrdom.
m ccartney: You can’t blame people. You know, there’s a lot of sympathy. It
was such a shocking way to go that you want to try and give him
everything. But the trouble is that there is . . . revisionism, where certain
people were saying, “Well . . . the only thing Paul ever did was book the
studio.”51
In Paul McCartney: Many Years From Now, a biography written in close

collaboration with its subject, Barry Miles argues that public perception
of the Lennon-McCartney collaboration has been skewed by Lennon and
Ono’s one-sided account, which has been ubiquitous in the media. During
the 1970s, he claims, “John and Yoko did as many as ten interviews a day,”
whereas Paul remained quiet, a situation Many Years From Now means to
correct with detailed reflections from McCartney, particularly regarding the
artistic practices and processes that informed Beatles music-making.52
For a sense of what Miles is talking about, consider the following passage
by Jann Wenner, editor and publisher of Rolling Stone. Wenner hitched his
magazine’s wagon to the Lennon-Ono star in 1971 with the publication of
the book-length interview, Lennon Remembers. In his Introduction to the
new edition (2000), Wenner writes: “The publication of these interviews was
the first time that any of the Beatles, let alone the man who had founded
the group and was their leader, stepped outside that protected, beloved
fairy tale and told the truth” about “the sugar-coated mythology of the
Beatles and Paul McCartney’s characterization of the breakup.”53 Some of
the tropes deployed here have become crude common sense about Lennon
and the Beatles. According to Wenner, Lennon is the founder, leader, and
truth-teller, while the Beatles, and McCartney in particular, are sugar-plum
fairies. Note too that the structuring opposition – courage and risk-taking
on one side, sentimentality and scheming on the other – is heavily gender-
coded. This reproduces rock orthodoxy’s masculinist agenda, where those
things read off as “feminine” are disdained as mere “pop.”54
According to Miles, then, a certain kind of “Beatles revisionism” is long
overdue. It’s a delicate business, though, for since his death Lennon has
been canonized as “St. John,” and so “any attempt at . . . objective assess-
ment of his role in the Beatles” risks looking like bad form.55 Many Years
From Now cuts against popular images of McCartney as “cute Beatle” or
sappy balladeer, portraying its subject as a quintessential sixties bohemian
who embraced the artistic avant garde well before his partner. This charac-
terization works to bolster McCartney’s rock credentials in that the figure
of the “edgy innovator” fits with rock codes of authenticity in a way that,
say, “effervescent tunesmith” does not.56 Indeed, the stock narrative that
pits Lennon the uncompromising rocker against McCartney the calculating
showman is a version of rock’s never-ending story, the conflict between
being real and selling out. According to George Martin, that story reduces
both parties to caricature and arguably says more about the workings of
rock ideology than it does about the Lennon-McCartney partnership.57
Drawing on Miles among many other sources, Ian MacDonald’s updated
Revolution in the Head portrays McCartney as the “de facto musical director”
of the band from Revolver onward.58 In his recent memoir, Here, There and
242 John Kimsey
Everywhere: My Life Recording the Beatles, Geoff Emerick, the band’s chief
engineer during that second half of its career, concurs:
It might have been [Lennon’s] band in the beginning, and he might have
assumed the leadership role in their press conferences and public
appearances, but throughout all the years I would work with them, it always
seemed to me that Paul McCartney, the soft-spoken bass player, was the real
leader of the group, and that nothing got done unless he approved of it.59
Summer of Love, George Martin’s account of the making of Sgt. Pepper,

paints a similar picture. In the face of what Emerick calls “conventional wis-
dom” about the Beatles,60 such accounts amount to an emerging counter-
narrative.
Let It Be . . . Naked
Released in 2003, the Let It Be . . . Naked CD presented a remixed version
of the Beatles’ Let It Be LP from 1970. Liner notes characterized Let It
Be . . . Naked as a restoration project in tune with the original agenda of
Let It Be, which began as a back-to-basics effort in January 1969. At first
titled Get Back, the 1969 project aspired to show the Beatles “as nature
intended,” without frills or production flourishes, but in a few weeks’ time
the whole thing unraveled.61 Over a year later, Lennon, Harrison, and
Allen Klein brought producer Phil Spector in to assemble the tapes into a
soundtrack album for the forthcoming Let It Be film. Lennon was pleased
with Spector’s work, but McCartney was appalled, particularly at Spector’s
addition of orchestra and choir to his sparsely arranged ballads “Let It Be”
and “The Long and Winding Road,” moves on which the composer was
not consulted.62 By contrast, Let It Be . . . Naked, produced by Paul Hicks,
Gary Massey, and Allan Rouse, received McCartney’s enthusiastic support.
Indeed, the CD amounted to something he had long sought – an edition
of the album from which all traces of Spector had been scrubbed. Though
Spector-less versions of Let It Be had circulated for years among bootleggers,
Let It Be . . . Naked purported to have better sound quality than the bootlegs
and something else besides. Digital technology had been used to clean up
the old tracks, a twenty-first-century intervention that, according to the
liner notes, removed a layer of unwanted interference. The authentic music
could now stand revealed: “It’s just the bare tapes,” said McCartney, “just
the bare truth.”63
Talk of bare truth aside, though, Let It Be . . . Naked had a case to make;
namely, that the popular reading of the 1970 album and film – as document-
ing the group’s hateful, hurtful collapse – is wrong. In his liner notes, Kevin
Howlett attributes this impression to director Michael Lindsay-Hogg’s hav-
ing cut the film to emphasize moments of conflict. In fact, says Howlett,
a fuller picture of the project shows it had plenty of “happy moments.”64

As if to underscore the point, Let It Be . . . Naked includes a bonus “Fly on
the Wall” disc containing excerpts, most less than thirty seconds long, in
which the band can be heard talking, singing, and having a jolly good time.
This audio montage may presage a new edition of the film, cut to a similar
template.
Museum politics65
Meanwhile, Lennon’s star hovers far above the fray. This is partly due to his
status as “transcendent hero” and partly to Ono’s tireless promotion of her
late husband as a champion of peace.
In November 2006, she took out a full-page ad in the New York Times
calling for December 8th, the anniversary of Lennon’s killing, to become an
annual occasion for “healing ourselves” and the world.66 In late April 2007,
Amnesty International announced the forthcoming release of a “historic
double CD,” Instant Karma: The Amnesty International Campaign to Save
Darfur. The Warner Brothers album features over twenty Lennon songs
performed by rock and pop stars ranging from U2 to Christina Aguilera.
At Ono’s behest, all proceeds go to Amnesty’s campaign to “focus attention
and mobilize activism around the urgent catastrophe in Darfur and other
human rights crises.”67 Earlier in the same month, the BBC announced
that one of Lennon’s former possessions, the upright piano on which he
composed “Imagine,” would be carried to Memphis, Tennessee, to the site
of the National Civil Rights Museum on the anniversary of Martin Luther
King’s assassination. There it would be photographed, for the piano, which
is owned by pop star George Michael, is set “to tour global sites of past
violence to promote peace.” A “documentary film and photo album” would
come out of the tour, with proceeds marked for “charity.”68
These news items attest to the particular quality of Lennon’s enduring
presence. He once suggested that, with songs such as “Give Peace A Chance,”
he meant to be an advertising man – a jingle-writer – but one who sold
peace instead of detergent powder.69 In the sign economy of the twenty-
first century, it is not just anthems like “Imagine” that function as mythic
signifiers of “change”;70 Lennon’s iconic aura is such that an object once
touched by him can be treated as if imbued with mana, like a piece of the
true cross. Lennon the man died in 1980, but John Lennon the symbol
continues to inspire idealism, promote causes, and generate revenue – in
other words, to do cultural work.
Ono is a close overseer of her late husband’s estate and the chief custo-
dian of his memory. By funding selected projects and controlling access to
244 John Kimsey
his oeuvre, she helps shape the Lennon image and keep it in the public eye.
Thus, a recent BBC documentary project was canceled, reportedly because
Ono was displeased with its depiction of Lennon.71 On the other hand, The
U.S. vs. John Lennon, a 2006 documentary detailing the couple’s anti-war
activism, received her full support. The makers of this independent film
acknowledge they could not have succeeded in their work without the sup-
port Ono provided, which included access to Lennon’s solo catalog.72 The
film portrays Lennon and Ono as exemplary advocates who, in the late six-
ties, made a bold commitment – to put the weight of their celebrity behind
the crusade to stop the Vietnam War, something they did at great risk to
their own safety and well-being. It does not, however, highlight Lennon’s
later repudiation of his New Left involvements, even though in one of his
last interviews he described “Power to the People” – a song trumpeted in
the film – as having been “written in the state of being asleep and wanting to
be loved by Tariq Ali and his ilk.”73 Indeed, in the same interview, he said:
“I dabbled in so-called politics in the late Sixties and Seventies . . . out of
guilt . . . for being rich” and “against my instincts.”74 The film-makers hope
to shed light on Orwellian outrages like the FBI’s COINTELPRO opera-
tion and to inspire contemporary anti-war activists with Lennon and Ono’s
example. A film more attuned to the mercurial, even contradictory, shifts
of Lennon’s political views has yet to be made.
Given Ono’s art world background, it is perhaps not surprising that she
has nurtured numerous galleries, installations, and museums undertaking
to honor the Lennon corpus. The exhibit Lennon: His Life and Work, which
was unveiled at the Rock and Roll Hall of Fame and Museum in fall 2000,
is a case in point. This massive, exquisitely appointed exhibit was timed
to coincide with what would have been Lennon’s sixtieth birthday. It also
fitted neatly with the millennial year, framing Lennon as an epochal figure,
an embodiment of the late twentieth-century zeitgeist.75
Featuring an array of striking artifacts as well as audio, video, and
interactive components, the exhibit culminated in what Marsha Ewing
called a “Song Sanctuary” – a “hushed” space on the Hall’s top floor where
the lyrics to more than twenty Lennon compositions were mounted on
the wall.76 The curatorial commentary accompanying these told a story
cut from the classic rock template. Curator James Henke placed Lennon’s
early Beatles writing (and, by implication, the Beatles themselves) under
the sign of artifice and alienation, noting that with potboilers like “Run For
Your Life” Lennon had been churning out product and not expressing his
inner self.77 He framed “In My Life” as the turning point at which Lennon
found his own voice and vocation, a quest for authenticity that eventually
mandated he leave the Beatles.78
In the Introduction to the exhibit catalog, Henke calls Lennon “the

leader of the biggest rock group ever,” while going on to claim that
his influence extended well beyond rock and roll. He excelled as a poet, a
writer, a filmmaker and an artist. He was a political activist. He had a huge
social conscience, and an enormous wit. Though it may sound like a cliché,
he was, truly, a spokesperson for a generation. And perhaps more important
than anything else, he was a seeker of the truth, a person whose life reflected
the values and beliefs that he spoke of.79
To portray Lennon as the epitome of truth, Henke follows rock ideological

practice and constructs an inauthentic Other to serve as counterfoil. “Con-
ventional wisdom” comes in handy here, as McCartney gets stuck with the
role.80
Thus, while the catalog entry paints “In My Life” as Lennon’s break-
through to truly personal, inner-directed songwriting, it concludes on a
competitive note: “The British music magazine Mojo . . . recently ranked ‘In
My Life’ the ‘Greatest Song of All Time,’” beating out three other songs
including “the McCartney composition, ‘Here, There and Everywhere.’”81
Implicitly pitting the partners against each other, the entry also assumes that
“In My Life” is solely Lennon’s invention, a dubious assumption at best.
By contrast, McCartney claims to have set the entire lyric to music, while
Lennon himself said that Paul “helped with the middle eight musically.”82
Pointing to musicological features, McCartney says: “The melody struc-
ture’s very me.”83 On this point MacDonald agrees, noting that the tune’s
wide interval skips reflect McCartney’s “vertical” approach to melody as
opposed to Lennon’s “horizontal” one.84 Acknowledging this difference in
characteristic styles, Everett85 points out that the pair nevertheless worked
together so long and intimately that “each seems to have internalized . . . the
style of the other.”86 Given this, Everett concludes that the question is ulti-
mately undecidable.87
Whatever the answer, such information seems pertinent to any discus-
sion of “In My Life” as a “work.” It can be said to point up not just a
disagreement between the two partners, but also the profound complexity
of their collaboration. However, the exhibit leaves the impression that there
is no debate about attribution and no reason to consider the duo’s unique
collaborative dynamic.
It does, however, treat as profound Lennon’s collaboration with Ono,
highlighting, through a range of installations and displays, their perfor-
mance art, activism, love affair, and family life. This is unsurprising, in that
Lennon himself frequently affirmed their partnership as having no equal.
But it must be said that the exhibit reflects Ono’s particular version of
246 John Kimsey
things, something it does not advertise prominently. At the very back of

the 176-page catalog, following the lyric and photo credits, one reads: “All
artifacts collection of Yoko Ono Lennon.” This perhaps accounts for the
fact that out of seventy-two artifacts listed in the catalog, only eighteen refer
to the Beatles.88
Calling “the establishment of collections a form of symbolic conquest,”
Eileen Hooper-Greenhill argues that museum displays work to “produce
visual narratives that are apparently harmonious, unified and complete.”
This tendency, combined with the fact that such displays are typically “pre-
sented with anonymous authority,” has a naturalizing effect.89 The con-
structed quality of the narrative is elided, and parochial viewpoints begin to
look like plain truth. Timothy Luke argues for reading exhibitions partly in
terms of what they omit or leave out, since displays “are part of an ongoing
struggle by individuals and groups to establish what is real, to organize
collective interests and to gain command over what is regarded as having
authority.”90 Lennon: His Life and Work allows Ono to present a version of
the Lennon story with which it is difficult to argue; part of the difficulty,
though, lies in the fact that the story is visually materialized but not verbally
explicit.
The Lennon exhibit remained at the Rock Hall for two years. Meanwhile,
Ono has shepherded similar projects, including the establishment, in 2000,
of a Lennon museum at the Saitama arena in Tokyo,91 and the 2005 exhibit
John Lennon: Unfinished Music, put on by the Cité de la Musique in Paris. A
240-page volume, published to accompany the Cité exhibit, presents fifteen
essays from a variety of journalists, art critics, and academics, all of whom
build on the notion that Lennon was “un artist ‘complet’” – a total artist
whose endeavors as a writer, designer, and “plasticien” crossed boundaries
in liberating ways and deserve to be considered on the same plane as his
music.92 Art historian Emma Lavigne, curator of the Cité exhibit, begins
her essay “John Lennon: Unfinished Music, une exposition inachevée,” with
a quote from a 1970 encounter between Lennon and Marshall McLuhan.
Lennon complains that the Beatles have become “a museum, an institution,”
by which he means an oppressive, ossified structure, something that we have
to “obliterate . . . or change.”93 She goes on to say that Unfinished Music does
not intend to “museumize” Lennon.94 Nonetheless, the man who once said,
“Avant garde is French for bullshit,” appears poised to become an art world
hero in a way that, say, McCartney, Harrison, and Starr do not.95
Love
Projects like Amnesty International’s Instant Karma, which yoke rock music
and media to humanitarian relief efforts, descend from the Concert for
Bangladesh, the star-studded benefit organized by George Harrison in 1971
to raise awareness about, and money for, famine relief in south Asia. Con-
current with the 1973 release of his solo album Living in the Material
World, Harrison announced the founding of the Material World Charita-
ble Foundation, an organization which has gone on to provide support
to organizations such as Médecins Sans Frontières and “hundreds of indi-
viduals . . . with . . . special needs.”96 In November 2002, family and friends
organized the Concert for George, a memorial staged at the Royal Albert
Hall on the first anniversary of Harrison’s death. Proceeds from the concert
and the related CD and DVD went to the Foundation. The concert featured
a bevy of rock artists, almost all close friends of the deceased, performing
Harrison songs with an all-star band led by Eric Clapton. Starr and McCart-
ney gave moving tributes, and Monty Python, whose films Harrison had
funded, fended off false piety by baring some famous behinds. The concert
also featured, at its outset, an hour’s worth of Indian music, the high point
of which was a composition, “Arpan,” written by Ravi Shankar especially
for the occasion. Calling for both Indian and European instruments as well
as performance styles, the piece was rendered by a virtuosic ensemble led by
Shankar’s daughter Anoushka. It was a poignant salute to a man who had
used his celebrity to push “open the door that . . . had separated the music
of much of the world from the West.”97
In his last years, Harrison laid the groundwork for an innovative and
controversial Beatles collaboration. The Love project began in talks between
Harrison and Guy Laliberté, founder of Cirque du Soleil, the wildly inventive
circus troupe known for blending high-wire derring-do with high Romantic
fantasy. In 2000, Harrison attended a party thrown by Laliberté following the
Montreal Grand Prix, and they began to discuss the possibility of a Cirque
show set to Beatles music.98 The fit seemed apt: both the Beatles and Cirque
could be said to have taken a street art form – rock and roll in one case, circus
acrobatics in another – and turned it into something giddily sublime.99
Harrison and his wife, Olivia, secured McCartney’s support by squiring him
to the Cirque spectacle O, from which McCartney emerged duly impressed.
With Starr and Ono also giving the nod, Apple and its lawyers began a
long negotiation with Cirque concerning what would become “the first
authorized theatrical show” ever set to Beatles music.100 By the end of June
2006, Beatles: Love was up and running at the Mirage Hotel on the Las Vegas
strip “in a purpose-built theatre erected at the cost of $120 million.”101
Taking particular inspiration from the band’s psychedelic period, the
show offers in place of, say, bewigged Beatles imitators, a phantasmagoric
joyride with controls set for “sensory overload.”102 To this end, the audience
is bathed in “360-degree” electronic sound sent through more than 6,000
speakers, some looming from the rafters, some so tiny they tuck into the
headrest of one’s seat.103
248 John Kimsey
Then there is the soundtrack itself, also “purpose-built” to exact spec-

ifications. The main architect is Giles Martin, son of Sir George and a
successful producer/engineer in his own right. George Martin oversaw his
son’s work and is credited as producer, but he left the audio heavy lifting
to Giles. The resulting soundscape promises to present Beatles music “as
never before,” while adding nothing new to sounds the Beatles actually
recorded.104 It does so by remixing, recombining, and recontextualizing
such sounds, interventions made feasible by twenty-first-century digital
audio technology. In the words of the elder Martin: “The brief on this show
was that I should use all previous recordings in any way I wanted. It gave us
carte blanche to muck about.”105
To start, Giles ventured into the vaults and reviewed every scrap of Beatles
material found there. In addition to mixes of songs (final or otherwise),
he also examined the multi-track tapes from which such mixes had been
generated. In the process, he discovered that basic maintenance was long
overdue, as the original tapes had never been properly backed up, that is,
copied in high fidelity against the possibility of deterioration or loss. His first
step then was to make safeties of all the tracks, and he did so by transferring
them from the analog to the digital domain.106
With the sounds thus separated and stored as computer data, it became
possible not just to remix Beatles tracks, but to apply to them the full
panoply of production tricks offered by digital mixing programs like Pro
Tools.107 One could slash and sample and generate mashups – uprooting,
say, Ringo’s lead vocal from “Octopus’s Garden” and replanting it among
the lush, cinematic strings of “Good Night.” No matter that the former song
was recorded in the key of E and the latter in G; the string track can be pitch-
shifted to E without changing its tempo, something impossible in the analog
domain, where pitch is a function of tape speed. Before pursuing such radical
options, though, the Martins paused to get approval from McCartney, Starr,
Olivia Harrison, and Ono. Giles created a demo, the highlight of which
was the superimposition of vocals and melody instruments from “Within
You, Without You” on the rhythm track of “Tomorrow Never Knows.”
McCartney was particularly enthused at the Martins taking things so “far
out,” and with that they proceeded accordingly.108
The Love soundtrack was released in November 2006 in both CD and
DVD-audio form, the latter featuring 5.1 surround sound and an additional
three minutes of material beyond the CD’s 78 minutes.109 As a single-disc
attempt to encompass the range of the band’s work, Love recalls the 1
compilation. But where 1 drew its selections from the top of the pop charts
and hovered, one might say, near the surface of Beatles music, Love plumbs
mysterious depths. Thus, while 1 omitted “Strawberry Fields Forever” on
the ground that it did not quite top the charts, Love makes this extraordinary
song a centerpiece. True, Love’s version of “Strawberry Fields” is a creature

of the remix process, assembled from disparate takes, some previously
unheard; but one could argue that this is in keeping with the spirit of the
original, which was itself “partly cut into shape physically, like electronic
music” and which never fully satisfied Lennon.110 Numerous reviewers of
the Love album recounted skepticism turning to delight, with many noting
the vibrant sound quality of the recordings. Such writers also paid homage
to Starr, whose one-of-a-kind drum style comes mightily to the fore in the
remixes.111 Geoff Emerick, though, decried the project as a presumptuous
meddling with masterpieces.112
Unauthorized digital meddling with Beatles music has created a stir in
recent years. DJ Danger Mouse’s Grey Album (2004) mashed up instru-
mental segments of the White Album with vocals from Jay-Z’s Black Album,
while the Beachles’ Sgt. Pet Sounds’ Lonely Hearts Club Band (2006) jammed
chunks of Sgt. Pepper together with vocal and instrumental tracks retrieved
from the Beach Boys’ Pet Sounds box. In both cases, EMI responded with
cease and desist orders, but the Grey Album became a cause célèbre on
the internet, where postmodern music fans organized to facilitate its mass
free distribution.113 Some young listeners no doubt got an Oedipal jolt
from seeing the godlike Beatles thus brought down to earth. Thirtysome-
thing Giles Martin was, one might say, the right man to provide a riposte
while keeping things well within the family. In discussing the Martins’
painstaking approach, Giles insisted: “We’re concerned about the Beatles’
legacy.”114 Love can be seen, then, as an officially approved, major-label-
backed mashup, an effort to contain the profligate dissemination of Beatles
music in the digital domain. And, like the Anthology film, the Love sound-
track seems to say that the Beatles make world enough; no need to go mixing
with outsiders.
Making and taking

Reportedly miffed at Capitol’s lackluster promotion of both the Love sound-
track and his own 2005 release Chaos and Creation in the Back Yard, McCart-
ney announced in March 2007 that he was leaving EMI/Capitol, the label
he had been associated with for most of his career. His upcoming album,
Memory Almost Full, would be released on Hear Music, a new, upstart label
created by the international coffee shop chain Starbucks in partnership
with Concord Music.115 Media reports noted that older, established rock
artists have difficulty getting new releases played on the radio, such that
their core audience often remain in the dark about such things. Claim-
ing “It’s a new world,” McCartney expressed hope that with Starbucks
250 John Kimsey
bistros in more than twenty countries playing his music, he would be able
to reach listeners, old and young, more directly.116 In addition to being
released on CD, Memory Almost Full was made available for online down-
loading, a move that foreshadowed the announcement, in May, that EMI
would soon release McCartney’s full post-Beatles catalog “across all digital
platforms.”117 In June, EMI announced that Starr’s solo back catalog was
set for online release as well.
For weeks, rumors had swirled that summer 2007 would see the Bea-
tles catalog itself made available for legal downloading. In its customary
fashion, Apple Corps had resisted the downloading trend, making Beat-
les music conspicuous by its absence from the online realm. Apple Corps’
reservations reportedly concerned the sound quality of mp3s, the prospect
that sales of mp3s might hurt sales of CDs, and the fact that online music
consumers typically purchase individual songs as opposed to full-length
albums, the format thought to feature the Beatles at their best.118 Several
2006 stories on the Love project mentioned that the entire Beatles cata-
log had of late been digitally remastered, welcome news for those purists
who complain that the 1987 CD remasters sound sketchy – inferior to the
original LPs and outdated in the light of more recent advances in digital
technology.119 In addition, in February and March 2007, Apple Corps set-
tled two long-standing lawsuits seen as roadblocks to any online venture.
The first determined that Apple Corps could not prevent Apple Inc., mak-
ers of the Mac and the iPod, from using the Apple logo in music-related
endeavors, a resolution that some thought would free the two corporations
to collaborate on, say, a pre-loaded Beatles iPod, if not an exclusive deal with
Apple Inc.’s iTunes Music Store.120 The second suit, claiming that EMI had
grossly underpaid royalties during the period 1994–9, was settled in Apple
Corps’ favor, with the Beatles receiving a “multi-million pound” payout
from EMI.121
Analysts speculated that a Beatles downloading craze might bring EMI
out of the financial doldrums in which it, like other music industry giants,
had been stuck for some time.122 But in April it was announced that EMI
and Apple Inc. had struck a deal, one which included scores of EMI artists,
but not the Beatles.123 McCartney indicated that details of an online Beatles
launch were “virtually settled,” but provided no target.124
April’s biggest Beatles news concerned the departure, after decades of
service, of Neil Aspinall as Apple Corps CEO. Some reports indicated that
the move had long been in the works, and that, with the settlement of the
two lawsuits, the moment was right for the sixty-five-year-old to bow out
gracefully.125 However, other accounts sounded a note of alarm, suggesting
that differences between Aspinall and the Apple Corps board had become
irreconcilable. In these, Aspinall was depicted as the calm, cool hand who
had steered the Beatles back to superstar status with ambitious, tasteful
projects like the Anthology – someone who, having been present at the
creation, was deeply averse to moves that might be seen as crassly commer-
cial. Hinted at was a shameless scheme to “flood the market” with Beatles
merchandise, a scheme which Aspinall supposedly could not stomach.126
Flood the market? Some would argue that the damage had already been
done with Aspinall-led undertakings like Anthology, 1, and Love. Others
might say that if there’s profit to be made from “I Am the Walrus” ring-
tones, then a CEO, particularly one from the entertainment business, can
be fairly expected to chase it. Aspinall’s replacement as chief of Apple Corps
is the fifty-one-year-old Jeff Jones, a respected music industry executive
who has devoted his career to repackaging and relaunching superstar back
catalogs.127 As a Vice President at Sony/BMG, Jones oversaw the media
giant’s Legacy division, which has won plaudits for carefully organized,
well-annotated reissues such as the expanded 2005 edition of Miles Davis’s
’Round About Midnight. Still, news stories taking Aspinall’s part emphasized
Jones’s involvement in seemingly endless repackagings of the Elvis Presley
catalog. Apparently, right-thinking people don’t want the Beatles going the
way of the Reese’s Peanut Butter Cup “King” pack.128 In public statements,
Jones has affirmed the notion that forthcoming Apple projects should
strive to balance commercial opportunity with “Beatle credibility.”129 Mov-
ing the Beatles catalog online is said to be at the top of his priority
list.130
Band and brand

In January 2007, the Official UK Charts Company announced a change in
how it tallies the chart position of singles. Henceforth, online downloads
would be counted alongside purchases of physical units, an approach taken
by Billboard in the US nearly two years earlier. More significantly for the
Beatles, downloads of “golden oldies” would be counted as well.131 British
bookmakers were soon taking bets on which Beatles track would go to
number one once the catalog officially comes online. Some even foresaw
an all-Beatles Top Ten in the offing, while others derided this as wishful
thinking.132
Thirty-seven years after their breakup, and at a moment when the land-
scape of the music business appears to be shifting seismically, the Beatles
are still a focus of hope and concern: perhaps the pop charts will once again
be dominated by “quality” music; perhaps a Beatles downloading craze will
save an ailing record industry; perhaps an online Beatles launch will confirm
that the digital medium has at last truly arrived. Then again, such events
252 John Kimsey
might also signal the death of the long-playing album, the format that the
Beatles, among others, made synonymous with serious rock.
Such scenarios speak to the Beatles’ unique status within rock culture.
According to Keir Keightley, rock ideology is founded on a “paradox.”133
Though “rock has involved millions of people buying a mass-marketed,
standardized commodity . . . available virtually everywhere, these purchases
have produced intense feelings of freedom, rebellion, marginality, opposi-
tionality, uniqueness and authenticity.”134 Unlike, say, folk or jazz, which
have fostered such feelings while remaining distant from the commercial
mainstream, rock wants it both ways: On one hand, it reproduces the cri-
tique of mass culture that sees forces of mass production, consumption, and
communication as threats to the autonomy and integrity of the individual.
On the other, it re-frames that critique, claiming that one can consume the
products of mass culture without compromising one’s integrity, provided
one searches out those mass culture artifacts or experiences that are authen-
tic and shuns those that are alienated. Of course, qualities like authenticity
and alienation do not inhere in artifacts. They are rhetorical constructions
whose meanings are loaded and ambiguous; so much so that “negotiating
the relationship between the ‘mass’ and the ‘art’ in ‘mass art’ has been the
distinguishing ideological project of rock culture since the 1960s.”135
This is a project to which the Beatles have been central. They are protag-
onists of a rock historical narrative that turns on the question: Is it possible
to sell out (be immensely popular) without selling out (compromising one’s
integrity)? For many, the Beatles prove that this ideological project is not
an impossible dream.
Treating the Beatles as a prestige brand, in the manner indicated by
Aspinall and Jones, may simply be savvy marketing – a canny nod to con-
sumers who cherish this conception of the Beatles and rock music. Or it
may be that such executives are themselves true believers who aspire to
balance the “bad” kind of selling out with the “good.” Fears over flooding
the market bespeak what John Storey calls the “elitist and reactionary” idea
that “more (quantity) always means less (quality),” a position he associates
with critics of popular culture.136 Keightley argues that rock is a form of
popular culture built on elitism and moralism – on “processes of exclusion”
having to do with taste, and a conception of taste that blends aesthetic
considerations about beauty with ethical ones about complicity with the
system.137
Thus far, the Beatles, perhaps more than any comparable figures, have
been able to serve both masters. They continue to epitomize the rock ideal
of the band – music as “organic” expression, as something made by a
“self-sufficient . . . self-contained” gang of talented, uppity autodidacts.138
They also define the music industry model of a brand – music as signature
commodity, as merchandising empire, as golden goose.139 For the moment

at least, band and brand abide. Will this continue to be the case? Though
one cannot predict the path of Beatles reception, a few trends seem worthy
of note.
If the Britpop movement of the mid-nineties is an indication, then Bea-
tles music retains the power not just to impress – or oppress – young musi-
cians, but to inspire them directly. Britpop aligned grunge with encroaching
Americanization, purporting to enlist sixties British icons like the Beatles
and the Kinks in a campaign of homegrown resistance. Whatever this pop
war’s substance, a new generation of hipsters and hypesters found cur-
rent uses for decades-old British rock.140 More recently, the mashup trend,
as exemplified by Danger Mouse and the Beachles, suggests that digital
musicians regard the Beatles’ records as rich pop “compost,” despite EMI’s
attempts to police such poaching.141 Composer James Russell Smith has
argued that the Beatles’ do-it-yourself approach helped demystify artistic
“creation” for a generation of music enthusiasts. Writing their own songs,
playing their own instruments, taking lead roles in arranging the music
and producing the records, the Beatles disrupted the division of labor that
had structured popular music-making for a half century and suggested to
sixties era amateurs “that maybe, just maybe we too could strike a spark
from the once forbidden fires of genius.”142 Smith has expressed concern
that, to later generations, the Beatles’ human-scale achievements may seem
as distant and magical as those of Romantic titans, but developments such
as these suggest the music persists as part of a useable past.143 According to
MacDonald, such engagement “can only be fruitful for young pop musi-
cians,” for “together and individually, the Beatles amount to a veritable
academy of pop cultural values and talents.”144
In this regard, it should be noted that, starting in the 1980s, popular
music and the Beatles in particular began to be taken up by the traditional
academy. As volumes like this one attest, major educational institutions
now see the Beatles as a bona fide topic of scholarly inquiry. Beatles studies –
what one might call Fabology – is a growing field that engages historians,
cultural theorists, sociologists, and musicologists. It would appear that the
Beatles’ place in the history books, if not the pop charts, is assured.
Moreover, the Beatles are now at home in the nursery: generations of
parents have introduced their children to the music in what has become
a secular ritual, something that’s not the case with, say, the music of the
Rolling Stones.145 In the words of Ritchie Unterberger, “waves and waves of
kids continue to discover and get enthusiastic about [the Beatles] year after
year, decade after decade.”146 In fact, this phenomenon is so widespread it
has become the butt of jokes, as in the 1998 film Sliding Doors, where one
character quips, “Everybody’s born knowing the Beatles lyrics instinctively.
254 John Kimsey
They’re passed into the fetus subconsciously along with the amniotic stuff.
In fact, they should be called ‘The Fetals.’”147 On this view, one might shrug
at the Beatles flooding the market, as they appear to have flooded everything
else.
Unterberger continues: “There’s a timelessness about the joy, curiosity,
and ceaseless, almost self-actualizing hunger they had to constantly change
that’s immediately tangible, almost overpowering, in their music.”148 Seen
simultaneously as agents of change and vessel of family values, the Bea-
tles make an appealing myth for modern liberalism – which, like rock,
wants to have it both ways.149 In such light, another statement from Derek
Taylor comes to mind, this one made years after he retired from Apple. In
Hertsgaard’s A Day in the Life, Taylor is quoted as saying the Beatles are “an
abstraction, like Christmas.”150 According to him, they stood for “hope,
optimism, wit, lack of pretension, [the idea] that anyone can do it, provided
they have the will to do it. They just seemed unstoppable.”151 One could add
that over the years, the Beatles have, like Christmas, performed a cultural as
well as an economic function – serving at once as symbol of high idealism
and engine of mass consumption. Indeed, at Christmas time in the modern
West, humane sentiments cohabit with hyper-commerce, as if compassion
and capital had no quarrel. And when the old songs come on, it’s hard not
to be carried along.
Notes
1 Six boys, six Beatles: the formative years Brown, 2005], 2). Perhaps betraying some
1 Antonio Gramsci, Selections from the Prison incredulity at this revelation, Spitz adds that “no
Notebooks, ed. and trans. Quintin Hoare and one was sure how George squared such activities
Geoffrey Nowell Smith (London: Lawrence & with upright Mimi.” Thirdly, until 2000, it was
Wishart, 1971), 324. widely accepted that the first Brian Epstein had
2 Billy Shepherd, The True Story of the Beatles heard of the Beatles was when “Raymond
(London: Beat Publications, 1964); Hunter Jones,” a regular customer of Epstein’s NEMS
Davies, The Beatles (New York: McGraw Hill, music store, placed an order for a copy of the
1968; rev. edns., New York: Norton, 1985, 1996); German single “My Bonnie.” This was attested
Barry Miles, Paul McCartney: Many Years From by Epstein himself in his memoir (A Cellarful of
Now (London: Secker & Warburg; New York: Noise [London: Souvenir Press, 1964], 43), and
Holt, 1997); and The Beatles, The Beatles by his assistant Alastair Taylor (with Martin
Anthology (London: Cassell; San Francisco: Roberts, Yesterday: The Beatles Remembered
Chronicle, 2000). [London: Sidgwick & Jackson, 1988], 6). No
3 Albert Goldman, The Lives of John Lennon subsequent biographer was able to trace Jones,
(New York: William Morrow, 1988); Ray but this did not shake their faith in the story.
Connolly, John Lennon 1940–1980: A Biography Only the Mersey Beat editor Bill Harry, in a 1997
(London: Fontana, 1981); and Henry W. interview with Bob Spitz (which was not
Sullivan, The Beatles with Lacan: Rock ’n’ Roll as published until nine years later), was skeptical of
Requiem for the Modern Age (New York: Peter the role of “Jones” in bringing the existence of
Lang, 1995). the band to Epstein’s attention, since this
4 Epstein, A Cellarful of Noise; Cynthia Lennon, supposed event occurred several months after
A Twist of Lennon (London: Star Books, 1978); Harry had supplied Epstein with copies of
Sutcliffe and Thompson, Stuart Sutcliffe. Mersey Beat in which the Beatles were heavily
5 Three examples of biographical confusion featured (The Beatles, 265–6). Meanwhile, in
can be adduced here. The earliest “official” 2000, Alastair Taylor admitted in the late Debbie
biography, by Billy Shepherd, published in 1964, Geller’s television documentary and book about
mistakenly dated the meeting of Lennon and Epstein that he had invented “Raymond Jones”
McCartney at Woolton Fete as July 1955, when because, while a number of individuals had
Paul was only thirteen, instead of 1957. This enquired after the disc, he needed to show that
error was repeated as late as 1981 by an eminent an order had been placed so as to persuade
American critic in the authoritative Rolling Epstein to buy a box of discs from Polydor in
Stone history of rock (Greil Marcus, “The Germany (Debbie Geller and Anthony Wall
Beatles,” in Jim Miller [ed.], The Rolling Stone (eds.), The Brian Epstein Story [London: Faber &
Illustrated History of Rock and Roll [London: Faber, 2000], 35). Nevertheless, as late as 2003,
Picador, 1981], 177–89). Second, the Philip Norman, in the “revised and updated”
occupational status of Lennon’s uncle George edition of his Shout! The True Story of the Beatles
Smith is given by most authors as the owner of a ([London: Sidgwick & Jackson, 2003], 126),
small dairy business; but Pauline Sutcliffe once again repeated the story that Jones was “an
claims, without supporting evidence, that he 18-year-old Huyton boy” and even that Epstein
was simply an employee and that John had remembered him as a fan of Carl Perkins.
exaggerated his uncle’s importance and his own Norman’s book may have been updated, but
social status (Pauline Sutcliffe and Douglas clearly not revised, at least on this point!
Thompson, Stuart Sutcliffe: The Beatles’ Shadow 6 Sutcliffe and Thompson, Stuart Sutcliffe, 74.
and His Lonely Hearts Club [London: Sidgwick 7 Ray Coleman, Brian Epstein
& Jackson, 2001], 34). Meanwhile, Bob Spitz (Harmondsworth: Penguin, 1990), 507.
says that at some stage Uncle George left the 8 Barry Miles, The Beatles: A Diary – An
dairy business to become a bookmaker, quoting Intimate Day by Day History (New York: Barnes
Lennon’s cousin Stanley Parkes from an & Noble, 2004), 4.
unpublished interview made in 1985 for 9 Peter Hennessey, Having It So Good: Britain
Goldman’s book (The Beatles [New York: Little, in the Fifties (London: Allen Lane, 2006), 9.
[255]
256 Notes to pages 11–21
10 Ibid., 19. 37 Simon Frith and Howard Horne, Art Into

11 The Beatles, The Beatles Anthology, 38. Pop (London: Methuen, 1987).
12 Miles, The Beatles: A Diary, 55. 38 Miles, The Beatles: A Diary, 50.
13 Ibid. 39 Phil Bowen, A Gallery To Play To: The Story
14 John Lennon was won over to the producer of the Mersey Poets (Exeter: Stride Publications,
George Martin when he realized that Martin 1999).
had produced albums by the group and by Peter 40 Royston Ellis, Rave (Northwood: Scorpion
Sellers, who starred in the Goon Show with Press, 1960).
Spike Milligan and Harry Secombe. Another 41 Miles, The Beatles: A Diary, 53.
link was Dick Lester, the director of the two 42 Coleman, Brian Epstein, 172.
Beatles films. Lester had directed the Goons’ 43 John Lennon, School Days, which he wrote
short The Running, Jumping and Standing Still during his time at grammar school (no record of
Film. publication).
15 Peter Townshend, The Family Life of Old 44 Michael Wood, “John Lennon’s
People (London: Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1957), Schooldays,” in Elizabeth Thomson and David
108. Gutman (eds.), The Lennon Companion:
16 Peter Brown, with Steven Gaines, The Love Twenty-Five Years of Comment (London:
You Make: An Insider’s Story of the Beatles Macmillan, 1987, 146 (originally published in
(London: Macmillan, 1983), 29. New Society, June 27, 1968).
17 Sutcliffe and Thompson, Stuart Sutcliffe, 18. 45 Miles, The Beatles: A Diary, 23.
18 Townshend, The Family Life of Old People, 46 On the character and history of skiffle see
108. Brian Bird, Skiffle: The Story of Folk-Song with a
19 Sutcliffe and Thompson, Stuart Sutcliffe, 47. Jazz Beat (London: Robert Hale, 1958); Chas
20 Miles, The Beatles: A Diary, 20. McDevitt, Skiffle: The Definitive Inside Story
21 The Beatles Anthology, 36. (London: Robson, 1997); and Michael Brocken,
22 The Beatles, The Beatles Anthology (London: “Was It Really Like That?: Rock Island Line and
Cassell; San Francisco: Chronicle, 2000), 36. the Instabilities of Causational Popular Music
23 Tony Judt, Postwar: A History of Europe since Histories,” Popular Music History 1/2 (2006),
1945 (London: Heinemann, 2005), 395. 147–66.
24 Dominic Sandbrook, Never Had It So Good: 47 Roland Barthes, “Musica practica,” in
A History of Britain from Suez to the Beatles Roland Barthes, Image–Music–Text, trans.
(London: Abacus, 2000), 206. Stephen Heath (London: Fontana; New York:
25 Ian MacDonald, Revolution in the Head: The Noonday Press, 1977), 149.
Beatles’ Records and the Sixties (London: Fourth 48 Alan J. Porter, Before They Were Beatles: The
Estate, 1994), 65. Early Years 1956–60 (Bloomington, IN: Xlibris,
26 Ibid., 457. 2003), 18.
27 Miles, The Beatles: A Diary, xi. 49 Quoted in Richard Mabey, The Pop
28 Sullivan, The Beatles with Lacan, 86. Process (London: Hutchinson Educational,
29 Ibid., 86. 1965), 48.
30 Ibid., 61. 50 The Beatles, The Beatles Anthology, 36–7.
31 Hennessey, Having It So Good, 69–70. 51 Porter, Before They Were Beatles, 152.
32 Ibid., 74. 52 Eve Kosofsky Sedgwick, Between Men:
33 Ibid., 75–6. English Literature and Male Homosexual
34 Miles, The Beatles: A Diary, 40–3. Desire (New York: Columbia University Press,
35 Originating in the East End of London, the 1985), 89.
Teddy boys (or Teds) were a much reviled youth 53 Cynthia Lennon, A Twist of Lennon, 134.
group. They were linked to rock and roll and the 54 Bob Spitz, The Beatles: The Biography, 2nd
cinema “riots” that occurred during showings of edn. (New York: Little, Brown, 2007), 37. Brian
Rock Around the Clock. Some Teddy boys were Bird’s 1958 book Skiffle made a parallel point.
prominent in the attacks on Caribbean He wrote that for young men, singing was a
immigrants in the Notting Hill “riots” of 1958 “sissy extra” in school and “whereas in the past a
in London. For non-metropolitan teenagers young man sang only in his bath” – as private as
such as Lennon and Harrison, it was possible to Lennon and Shotton’s sylvan seclusion – “now
detach the look of the Teds from their he does so openly on every occasion when he
subculture or lifestyle. foregathers with his friends” (56–7). Thanks to
36 Alan Clayson and Pauline Sutcliffe, Simon Frith for this reference.
Backbeat: Stuart Sutcliffe – The Lost Beatle, 55 Porter, Before They Were Beatles, 33.
(London: Pan, 1994), 17. 56 Miles, The Beatles: A Diary, 30.
57 Julia Baird, with Geoffrey Guiliano, John 3 Hunter Davies, The Beatles (New York:
Lennon: My Brother (New York: Henry Holt, McGraw Hill, 1968), 107.
1988), 30 (emphasis added). 4 Quoted in David Simons, Studio Stories (San
58 Miles, The Beatles: A Diary, 24. Francisco: Backbeat Books, 2004), 18.
59 The addition of new words had a very 5 All quotations from the author’s telephone
practical dimension: songs were often learned interview with Van Dyke Parks, March 2007.
from radio broadcasts and it was impossible to 6 From
memorize or even note down all the lyrics at www.nonesuch.com/artists/brian-wilson.
one listening. This necessity – to create new 7 Brian Wilson interviewed by Andy Battaglia,
words to fill in gaps – was undoubtedly a spur to August 30, 2005 at
the composition of wholly new songs. Alan www.avclub.com/content/node/40133/2
Porter mentions another example from the early (accessed May 18, 2009).
days of the group: a Burl Ives record of “Worried 8 Author’s telephone interview with Van Dyke
Man Blues” was so scratched that some lyrics Parks, March 2007.
were indecipherable, so John improvised 9 Jim Irvin, “The MOJO Interview: George
replacements (Porter, Before They Were Beatles, Martin,” MOJO 160 (March 2007), 37.
37). 10 Paul McCartney, quoted on the Beatles
60 Coleman, Brian Epstein, 169. Ultimate Experience website:
61 Miles, The Beatles: A Diary, 36–7; Coleman, www.beatlesinterviews.org/dba01please.html
Brian Epstein, 182. (accessed May 28, 2009).
62 Miles, The Beatles: A Diary, 51. 11 Geoff Emerick, and Howard Massey, Here,
63 Ibid., 52–3. There, and Everywhere: My Life Recording
64 Barbara Bradby, “She Told Me What to Say: the Music of the Beatles (New York: Gotham,
The Beatles and Girl-Group Discourse,” Popular 2006), 44.
Music and Society 28/3 (2005), 359–90. 12 George Harrison, interviewed with the other
65 Quoted in the Beatles, The Beatles Beatles by Larry Kane in Chicago, August 20,
Anthology, 49. 1965; at the Beatles Ultimate Experience website:
66 Ibid. www.beatlesinterviews.org/db1965.0820.
67 Lutgard Mutsaers, “Indorock: An Early beatles.html (accessed May 28, 2009).
Eurorock Style,” in Popular Music 9/3 (1990), 13 Ibid.
307–20. 14 Emerick and Massey, Here, There, and
68 In 1961, Stuart Sutcliffe decided to leave the Everywhere, 70–1.
group and remain in Hamburg with his new 15 Ibid., 70.
girlfriend, Astrid Kirchherr, and to study art 16 Mark Lewisohn, The Complete Beatles
there with Eduardo Paolozzi. He died in Recording Sessions, 36.
Hamburg in April 1962. 17 Ibid., 38.
69 George Martin, quoted in Kenneth Womack, 18 Emerick and Massey, Here, There, and
Long and Winding Roads: The Evolving Artistry Everywhere, 81.
of the Beatles (New York: Continuum, 2007), 19 Ringo Starr, interviewed on the US radio
51. program Inner-view in two parts, 1976; at the
70 MacDonald, Revolution in the Head, 93. Beatles Ultimate Experience website:
71 These include Clayson and Sutcliffe, www.beatlesinterviews.org/db1976.00rs.
Backbeat; MacDonald, Revolution in the Head; beatles.html (accessed May 18, 2009).
Spitz, The Beatles; Jeff Russell, The Beatles 20 Keith Badman, The Beatles: Off the Record
Album File and Complete Discography, rev. edn. (New York: Omnibus, 2000), 210–11.
(London: Blandford, 1989); and Bill Harry, The 21 As reported on
Book of Beatle Lists (Poole: Javelin, 1985). http://www.rarebeatles.com/photopg7/nonusa/
72 Listed in Kevin Howlett, The Beatles at the php7466.htm.
Beeb 1962–65: The Story of Their Radio Career 22 Author’s interview with Van Dyke Parks,
(London: BBC Publications, 1982). March 2007, continued by email.
23 Ringo Starr, interviewed on Inner-view.
2 The Beatles as recording artists 24 George Harrison, interviewed by Crawdaddy
1 Gareth Pawlowski, How They Became the magazine, February 1977.
Beatles (New York: Dutton, 1989), 36. 25 Lewisohn, The Complete Beatles Recording
2 The Beatles Ultimate Experience website, Sessions, 63.
First Radio Interview, October 28, 1962, at 26 Paul McCartney, interviewed by Alan Smith
www.beatlesinterviews.org/db1962.1028. on June 16, 1966, and published in the New
beatles.html (accessed May 18, 2009). Musical Express, June 24, 1966; at the Beatles
Ultimate Experience website: 59 John Lennon, “John Lennon and Yoko Ono:
www.beatlesinterviews.org/db1966.0616. Candid Conversation.”
beatles.html (accessed May 18, 2009). 60 Ibid.
27 Lewisohn, The Complete Beatles Recording 61 Lewisohn, The Complete Beatles Recording
Sessions, 64. Sessions, 99.
28 Ibid., 67–9. 62 Ibid.
29 Ibid., 70. 63 Badman, The Beatles, 288.
30 Badman, The Beatles, 206. 64 Lewisohn, The Complete Beatles Recording
31 Geoffrey Giuliano, The Lost Beatles Sessions, 96.
Interviews (New York: Plume Books, 1994), 65 Ibid.
236. 66 Emerick and Massey, Here, There, and
32 Emerick and Massey, Here, There, and Everywhere, 188.
Everywhere, 120–3. 67 Badman, The Beatles, 289.
33 Ibid., 84. 68 John Lennon, interviewed by Norrie
34 Badman, The Beatles, 208. Drummond on May 19, 1967, published in the
35 Emerick and Massey, Here, There, and New Musical Express, May 27, 1967; at the
Everywhere, 116. Beatles Ultimate Experience website:
36 Ibid. http://www.beatlesinterviews.org/db1967.0519.
37 Badman, The Beatles, 209. beatles.html.
38 Ibid., 208. 69 John Lennon, quoted in Playboy, “Playboy
39 John Lennon, interview in New Musical Interview with John Lennon,” 1980, at
Express, March 11, 1966; at the Beatles Ultimate http://www.john-lennon.com/
Experience website: playboyinterviewwithjohnlennonandyokoono.
www.beatlesinterviews.org/db1966.0311. htm (accessed May 29, 2009).
beatles.html. 70 Badman, The Beatles, 389.
40 Paul McCartney, interviewed by Alan Smith. 71 Ringo Starr, interviewed on Inner-view.
41 Badman, The Beatles, 256. 72 Walter Everett, The Beatles as Musicians:
42 Emerick and Massey, Here, There, and Revolver Through the Anthology (New York:
Everywhere, 190. Oxford University Press, 1999), 175.
43 Badman, The Beatles, 263. 73 Lewisohn, The Complete Beatles Recording
44 Emerick and Massey, Here, There, and Sessions, 138.
Everywhere, 135. 74 Badman, The Beatles, 387.
45 Ibid., 139. 75 Ibid., 397.
46 Ibid., 141. 76 Ringo Starr, interviewed on Inner-view.
47 John Lennon, quoted in Playboy, “Playboy 77 Badman, The Beatles, 344.
Interview with John Lennon,” 1980, as 78 Ibid., 381.
reproduced at www.john-lennon.com/ 79 Emerick and Massey, Here, There, and
playboyinterviewwithjohnlen- Everywhere, 260–1.
nonandyokoono.htm. 80 Badman, The Beatles, 381.
48 Badman, The Beatles, 265. 81 Ibid.
49 Lewisohn, The Complete Beatles Recording 82 Kenneth Womack, Long and Winding Roads:
Sessions, 91. The Evolving Artistry of the Beatles (New York:
50 Badman, The Beatles, 257. Continuum, 2007), 1.
51 Jeff Russell, The Beatles Complete 83 Russell, The Beatles Complete Discography,
Discography (New York: Universe Publishing, 153.
2006), 97. 84 Lewisohn, The Complete Beatles Recording
52 Badman, The Beatles, 269. Sessions, 168–9.
53 John Harris, “Sgt. Pepper, the Day the World 85 Emerick and Massey, Here, There, and
Turned Day-Glo,” MOJO 160 (March 2007), Everywhere, 277.
72. 86 Ibid., 280.
54 Emerick and Massey, Here, There, and 87 Womack, Long and Winding Roads, 293.
Everywhere, 88. 88 Russell, The Beatles Complete Discography,
55 Lewisohn, The Complete Beatles Recording 142.
Sessions, 204. 89 Ibid.
56 Ibid., 95. 90 Lewisohn, The Complete Beatles Recording
57 Harris, “Sgt. Pepper,” 76. Sessions, 191.
58 Emerick and Massey, Here, There, and 91 Emerick and Massey, Here, There, and
Everywhere, 189. Everywhere, 322.
3 Rock and roll music and His Production Team to the Beatles’ New
1 Paul McCartney, quoted in The Beatles, The Sound,” in Russell Reising (ed.), “Every Sound
Beatles Anthology (London: Cassell; San There Is”: The Beatles’ Revolver and the
Francisco: Chronicle, 2000), 23. Transformation of Rock and Roll (Aldershot:
2 John Lennon, quoted in ibid., 67. Ashgate, 2002), 151.
3 Quoted in Mark Lewisohn, The Complete 7 See Mark Lewisohn, The Complete Beatles
Beatles Recording Sessions: The Official Story of Chronicle (London: Hamlyn, 2000), 136–79.
the Abbey Road Years (London: Hamlyn, 1988), 8 Lewisohn remarks, however (ibid., 181), that
16. the band’s frustration with their live audience’s
4 Quoted in ibid., 24. inability to listen quietly prompted them to give
5 Ibid. up trying to replicate their earlier inspired
performances at the Cavern Club and drove
4 “Try thinking more”: Rubber Soul and the Lennon to shout (inaudible) obscenities at the
Beatles’ transformation of pop crowds. Such vexation no doubt contributed to
1 Mary Gaitskill, Veronica (New York: Vintage, the Beatles’ embracing of the studio, a secure
2005), 28–9. space where they could control the quality of
2 The darker flipside of this latter type, the their music (indeed, where they could hear their
“beautiful but suddenly dead teenager” genre music!) and reward careful listeners with richly
represented in songs such as “Endless Sleep” brocaded sounds and thoughtful lyrics.
(death is foiled in this one), “Patches,” “Teen 9 Quoted in The Beatles, The Beatles Anthology,
Angel,” “Last Kiss,” and “Leader of the Pack” 193.
largely affirms a romanticized notion of 10 Quoted in ibid., 197.
adolescent love rather than prompting any 11 Indeed, many of the Beatles’ fans were
soul-searching. Notable among other parodists disappointed, despite the band’s more measured
of the “death rock” genre, Jimmy Cross alludes approach to change.
to Beatlemania in setting up the tragedy: “I 12 One need not cite the riots provoked by the
remember we were cruising home from the radical musical innovations of Stravinsky,
Beatles concert. I’d had such a wonderful Schoenberg, Berg, and others to understand the
evening, sitting there watching my baby shock and frustration of audiences over abrupt
screaming, and tearing her hair out, and experimentalism. In one notorious example, the
carrying on. She was so full of life.” Baby dies in Beatles’ contemporary Bob Dylan faced the
a car crash on the way home, of course, but wrath of his traditional folk audience when he
months later Cross’s narrator digs up her corpse. merged pop technology (“going electric”) with
3 Paul McCartney claimed that the title riffed his folk aesthetic. In Dylan’s case, the
on an “old blues guy’s” disparaging comment experiment resulted in a wider audience, but
about Mick Jagger’s “plastic soul.” Quoted in countless examples of the reverse exist. Some
The Beatles, The Beatles Anthology (London: notable ones include Rick Nelson (use of
Cassell; San Francisco: Chronicle, 2000), 193. honky-tonk aesthetic), Elvis Costello
4 “Love Me Do,” the Beatles’ first single, (experimentation with multiple non-pop/rock
appeared on October 5, 1962, while the Rubber genres), and the Violent Femmes (inclusion of
Soul sessions commenced on October 12, 1965. “Christian” lyrics). Too much adherence to
See William J. Dowlding, Beatlesongs (New York: one’s “brand,” however, can lead to charges of
Fireside, 1989), 29, 112. being formulaic, stale, etc.
5 Greg Clydesdale disputes this, arguing that 13 Theodor Adorno, “On the Contemporary
“the Beatles’ early compositions showed no sign Relationship of Philosophy and Music,” in
of their later genius”: “Creativity and Richard Leppert (ed.), Essays on Music
Competition: The Beatles,” Creativity Research (Berkeley: University of California Press, 2002),
Journal 18 (2006), 129–39, 132. 135.
6 Kari McDonald and Sarah Hudson Kaufman 14 Theodor Adorno, “Why Is the New Art so
cite the Rubber Soul sessions as integral to the Hard to Understand?,” in Richard Leppert (ed.),
more sophisticated aesthetic: “In earlier Essays on Music (Berkeley: University of
recording sessions, the Beatles followed strict California Press, 2002), 128, 131.
studio guidelines, defining where, when, and 15 Theodor Adorno, “On Popular Music,” in
how they were to record. Beginning with Rubber Richard Leppert (ed.), Essays on Music
Soul, the Beatles began to break these rules by (Berkeley: University of California Press, 2002),
extending their hours in the studio. By Revolver, 453. Adorno further notes that in typical pop
this was common practice”: “‘Tomorrow Never music, “recognition” becomes an end in itself,
Knows’: The Contributions of George Martin thus stifling the spontaneity necessary for
advanced art. In Rubber Soul, the Beatles move 33 Womack, Long and Winding Roads, 120.
between the two modes. 34 Riley, Tell Me Why, 165. Riley aptly notes
16 Lewisohn, The Complete Beatles Chronicle, that “none of them mean the same thing below
202. the surface.”
17 Walter Everett, The Beatles as Musicians: The 35 McKinney, Magic Circles, 115.
Quarry Men Through Rubber Soul (New York: 36 Womack, Long and Winding Roads, 124.
Oxford University Press, 2001), 315. Everett Womack reminds readers that the song was
adds that the quirky intro results “from an written for Help!, which no doubt helps explain
apparent overdub of McCartney’s its relative lack of sophistication.
bottleneck-slide guitar over the bass/drum 37 Sheila Whiteley, “Love, Love, Love:
track.” Representations of Gender and Sexuality in
18 Tim Riley, Tell Me Why: The Beatles – Album Selected Songs by the Beatles,” in Kenneth
by Album, Song by Song, the Sixties and After Womack and Todd F. Davis (eds.), Reading the
(Cambridge, MA: Da Capo, 2002), 157. Beatles: Cultural Studies, Literary Criticism, and
19 Indeed, when the song carries the sexual the Fab Four (Albany: State University of New
metaphor to its conclusion, he, not she, will be York Press), 65.
the driver, and her body, potentially the site of 38 John Lennon, quoted in The Beatles, The
her autonomy, becomes reinscribed as a car, an Beatles Anthology, 197. Lennon further adds that
object. he disliked “Run for Your Life.”
20 Quoted in Barry Miles, Paul McCartney: 39 Everett provides a possible rationale with his
Many Years From Now (London: Secker & observation that “Run for Your Life” and “Drive
Warburg; New York: Holt, 1997), 270. My Car” function as “effective bookends [being]
21 The Beatles, of course, have a history of the only two straightforward hard-rocking
toying with their interviewers and duping them blues-oriented numbers”: The Beatles as
with bogus responses. Musicians, 312.
22 Riley, Tell Me Why, 158. Riley correctly 40 Adorno, “On Popular Music,” 439. Adorno
identifies as innovative the song’s strategy of contrasts this with “serious” music, which relies
“inference rather than . . . description.” This on a “concrete totality” in which details are
methodology comes closer to Adorno’s never “an enforcement of a musical scheme.”
conception of the “tension” required by Adorno suggests that the pop listener focuses on
serious music. See Adorno, “On Popular differences in the details and avoids
Music,” 440. contemplation of the whole. In Rubber Soul, the
23 Walter Everett, quoted in The Beatles, The Beatles had not yet abandoned the pop musical
Beatles Anthology, 193. scheme as dramatically as they were to do in
24 Everett, The Beatles as Musicians, 333. albums such as Revolver and Abbey Road.
25 Interestingly, Dowling reports that Lennon
exclusively penned “No Reply,” while 5 Magical mystery tours, and other trips:
McCartney was solely responsible for “You yellow submarines, newspaper taxis, and the
Won’t See Me.” See Dowlding, Beatlesongs, 82, Beatles’ psychedelic years
116. 1 Stanislav Grof, MD, LSD Psychotherapy:
26 Kenneth Womack, Long and Winding Roads: Exploring the Frontiers of the Hidden Mind
The Evolving Artistry of the Beatles (New York: (Alameda, CA: Hunter House, 1980), 25.
Continuum, 2007), 118. 2 See Steve Turner, The Gospel According to the
27 Michael Fraenkel, “Passing of Body” in Death Beatles (London: Westminster John Knox Press,
Is Not Enough: Essays in Active Negation 2006), for a full discussion of the evening.
(London: C. W. Daniel, 1939), 24. 3 Bob Spitz, The Beatles: The Biography (New
28 John Lennon, quoted in The Beatles, The York: Little, Brown, 2005), 564–6.
Beatles Anthology, 193. 4 Dr. Max “Feelgood” Jacobson, a personal “Dr.
29 Devin McKinney, Magic Circles: The Beatles Robert” for Timothy Leary, Andy Warhol, and
in Dream and History (Cambridge, MA: Harvard others, also served as John F. Kennedy’s personal
University Press, 2003), 100; Theodor Adorno, physician during his presidency, and often
“The Aging of the New Music,” in Richard administered “vitamin” injections that left JFK
Leppert (ed.), Essays on Music (Berkeley: flushed and excited (Martin A. Lee and Bruce
University of California Press, 2002), 181. Shlain, Acid Dreams: The Complete Social
30 Adorno, “Why Is the New Art so Hard to History of LSD: The CIA, the Sixties, and Beyond
Understand?,” 130. [New York: Grove Press, 1985], 102).
31 Riley, Tell Me Why, 163. 5 Steve Turner, A Hard Day’s Write: The Stories
32 Everett, The Beatles as Musicians, 329. Behind Every Beatles Song (New York:
HarperCollins, 1999; London: Carlton, 2000), 21 Emerick, Here, There, and Everywhere, 8–10.
111. 22 Barry Miles, Paul McCartney: Many Years
6 Timothy Leary, Ralph Metzner, and Richard from Now (New York: Henry Holt, 1997), 291–2.
Alpert, The Psychedelic Experience: A Manual 23 See, for instance, Stuart Madow and Jeff
Based on “The Tibetan Book of the Dead” (New Sobul, The Colour of Your Dreams: The Beatles’
Hyde Park, NY: University Books, 1964), 14. Psychedelic Music (Pittsburgh: Dorrance
7 For our more detailed analysis of the Publishing, 1992), 4; and Riley, Tell Me Why,
psychedelic dimension of Sgt. Pepper’s Lonely 178.
Hearts Club Band, see Russell Reising and Jim 24 Walter Everett, The Beatles as Musicians:
LeBlanc, “The Whatchamucallit in the Garden: Revolver through the Anthology (New York:
Sgt. Pepper and Fables of Interference,” in Oxford University Press, 1999), 44.
Olivier Julien (ed.), Sgt. Pepper and the Beatles: 25 Ibid., 49.
It Was Forty Years Ago (Aldershot: Ashgate, 26 Lewisohn, The Complete Beatles Chronicle,
2009). For two excellent cultural histories of 220.
psychedelia, from which we have both learned, 27 For more on the Beatles’ frequent use of the
see Lee and Shlain, Acid Dreams. subtonic (VII) chord during this period, see
8 Timothy Leary, Flashbacks: An Autobiography Ger Tillikens, “A Flood of Flat-Sevenths,” in
– A Personal and Cultural History of an Era (New Reising (ed.), “Every Sound There Is,” 121–36.
York: Putnam, 1983), 261. 28 Miles, Paul McCartney, 286–7.
9 Timothy Leary, High Priest (Berkeley: Ronin, 29 Everett, The Beatles as Musicians, 66.
1995), 4, 6, 7. Leary also changes “Albert Hall” 30 Ibid., 66.
to “Alpert Hall,” a reference to his colleague, 31 The Beatles, The Beatles Anthology, vol. 3 of
Richard Alpert (later Baba Ram Das), in the the televised series, directed by Geoff Wonfor
following: “Now he knows how many moles it (Apple, 1996).
takes to fill the Alpert Hall.” 32 While scholars like Everett maintain that Sgt.
10 Cited in Jay Stevens, Storming Heaven: LSD Pepper, along with the single that preceded it in
and the American Dream (New York: Atlantic the winter of 1967, “capture the Beatles at their
Monthly Press, 1987), 57. peak of creativity, and the introspective
11 Albert Hofmann, LSD: My Problem Child psychedelia in the words and sounds of these
(Los Angeles: Tarcher, 1983), 15. records would revolutionize popular music even
12 Leigh Henderson, “About LSD,” in LSD: Still more thoroughly than the Beatles did in 1964,”
with Us after All These Years (New York: others, like Tim Riley, feel that “Sgt. Pepper is
Lexington Books, 1994), 45–6. the Beatles’ most notorious record for the wrong
13 Jim DeRogatis, Kaleidoscope Eyes: Psychedelic reasons – a flawed masterpiece that can only
Rock from the ’60s to the ’90s (Secaucus, NJ: echo the strength of Revolver” (Everett, The
Carol Publishing Group, 1996), 10. Beatles as Musicians, 87; Riley, Tell Me Why,
14 Sheila Whiteley, The Space between the 203). For a thorough summary of critical
Notes: Rock and the Counter-Culture (London: responses to Revolver since the 1960s, see
Routledge, 1992), 4. Reising, “Introduction: ‘Of the Beginning,’”
15 Geoff Emerick, with Howard Massey, Here, 2–9.
There, and Everywhere: My Life Recording the 33 Lewisohn, The Complete Beatles Chronicle,
Music of the Beatles (New York: Gotham, 2006), 235.
167. 34 The Beatles, The Beatles Anthology, vol. 6,
16 Russell Reising, “Introduction: ‘Of the directed by Geoff Wonfor (Apple, 1996).
Beginning,’” in Russell Reising (ed.), “Every 35 Everett, The Beatles as Musicians, 84.
Sound There Is”: The Beatles’ Revolver and the 36 Miles, Paul McCartney, 303–6, 349–50.
Transformation of Rock and Roll (Aldershot: 37 George Harrison, I Me Mine (San Francisco:
Ashgate, 2003), 7. Chronicle Books, 2002), 106.
17 Tim Riley, Tell Me Why: A Beatles 38 Everett, The Beatles as Musicians, 132;
Commentary (New York: Knopf, 1988), 176. Lewisohn, The Complete Beatles Chronicle,
18 Spitz, The Beatles, 596–7, 600. 253.
19 Mark Lewisohn, The Complete Beatles 39 Everett, The Beatles as Musicians, 138,
Chronicle (London: Hamlyn, 2000), 216. 143.
20 For more on Starr’s work on “Tomorrow 40 Ibid., 141.
Never Knows,” and on Revolver in general, see 41 David Sheff, “John Lennon and Yoko Ono:
Steven Baur, “Ringo Round Revolver: Rhythm, Candid Conversation,” Playboy, January 1981,
Timbre, and Tempo in Rock Drumming,” in 112.
Reising (ed.), “Every Sound There Is,” 171–82. 42 Grof, LSD Psychotherapy, 29.
43 R. D. Laing, The Politics of Experience (New 6 Revolution

York: Ballantine, 1967), 190. 1 These included John Lennon’s acting role in
44 Leary, High Priest, 234. Leary summarized How I Won the War (Dick Lester, 1967), Paul
the impact of his first LSD experience in McCartney’s music for The Family Way (Roy
representative terms: “It was the classic Boulting, 1966), George Harrison’s film score
visionary voyage and I came back a changed for Wonderwall (Joe Massot, 1968) and Ringo
man. You are never the same after you’ve had Starr’s acting role in Candy (Christian
that one flash glimpse down the cellular time Marquand, 1968).
tunnel. You are never the same after you’ve had 2 Christopher Booker, The Neophiliacs: The
the veil drawn” (34). Revolution in English Life in the Fifties and Sixties
45 Sidney Cohen, The Beyond Within: The LSD (London: Collins, 1969), 311–13.
Story (New York: Atheneum, 1966), 177. 3 Mark Hertsgaard, A Day in the Life: The
46 Everett, The Beatles as Musicians, 104. Music and Artistry of the Beatles (New York:
47 Alan Bisbort and Parke Puterbaugh, Rhino’s Delacorte, 1995), 228.
Psychedelic Trip (San Francisco: Miller Freeman, 4 Ian MacDonald, Revolution In The Head: The
2000), 74. Beatles’ Records and the Sixties (London: Fourth
48 Stevens, Storming Heaven, 57. Estate, 1994), 187–8.
49 The first words spoken (by John Lennon) in 5 T. J. O’Grady, The Beatles: A Musical
the 1967 television movie Magical Mystery Tour. Evolution (Boston: Twayne, 1983), 148.
“Mystery tours” were popular, low-budget 6 David Sheff, The Playboy Interviews with John
getaways in Britain during the period, Lennon and Yoko Ono, ed. G. Barry Golson
involving day trips on buses to surprise (New York: Playboy Press, 1981), 172.
locations. 7 Bob Neaverson, The Beatles Movies (London:
50 Cam Cloud, The Little Book of Acid Cassell, 1997), 92.
(Berkeley: Ronin, 1999), 11. 8 Bruno Edera, Full Length Animated Feature
51 Cohen, The Beyond Within, 108. Films (London: Focal Press, 1977), 87.
52 Madow and Sobul, The Colour of Your 9 Derek Taylor, sleeve notes, The Beatles, Yellow
Dreams, 62, 68. Submarine (Apple PMC 7070, 1969).
53 Emerick, Here, There, and Everywhere, 10 Barry Miles, Paul McCartney: Many Years
214–16. from Now (London: Secker & Warburg, 1997),
54 See Marsha Alexander, The Sexual Paradise 449.
of LSD (North Hollywood: Brandon House, 11 George Harrison, I Me Mine (London: W. H.
1967); and Warren Young and Joseph Hixson, Allen, 1982), 118.
LSD on Campus (New York: Dell, 1966). See also 12 Sheffn, The Playboy Interviews, 162–3.
R. N. Ellson, Sex Happy Hippy (San Diego: 13 Wilfrid Mellers, Twilight of the Gods: The
Corinth, 1968). Beatles in Retrospect (London: Faber & Faber,
55 G. Gordon Liddy, Will: The Autobiography of 1973), 138.
G. Gordon Liddy (New York: St. Martin’s, 1996), 14 Miles, Paul McCartney, 465.
148. 15 Walter Everett, The Beatles As Musicians:
56 Lee and Shlain, Acid Dreams, 117. As the Revolver through the Anthology (New York:
authors note, Liddy’s later “arsenal of dirty Oxford University Press, 1999), 195.
tricks included LSD and other hallucinogens to 16 Sheff, The Playboy Interviews, 158.
neutralize political enemies of the Nixon 17 See, for example, the comments of Apple
administration.” director Denis O’Dell, in Denis O’Dell and Bob
57 Miles, Paul McCartney, 190. Lennon’s Neaverson, At The Apple’s Core: The Beatles from
comment is cited in G. Barry Golson, The the Inside (London: Peter Owen, 2002), 101–2;
Playboy Interviews with John Lennon and Yoko and of Rolling Stone editor and founder Jann
Ono: The Final Testament (New York: Berkeley, Wenner, in Nicholas Schaffner, The Beatles
1981), 191. Forever (New York: McGraw Hill, 1977), 113.
58 Ian MacDonald, Revolution in the Head: The 18 The Beatles, The Beatles Anthology (London:
Beatles’ Records and the Sixties (New York: Cassell, 2000), 305.
Henry Holt, 1994), 258. 19 See, for example, Lennon’s angry response
59 Emphasis added. to Epstein’s comments during the recording of
60 Stevens, Storming Heaven, 206. “Till There Was You,” in Ray Coleman, Brian
61 Malden Grange Bishop, The Discovery of Epstein (Harmondsworth: Penguin, 1990), 175.
Love: A Psychedelic Experience with LSD-25 20 Mark Lewisohn, The Complete Beatles
(New York: Dodd, Mead & Co., 1963), 134. Recording Sessions: The Official Story of the
62 Ibid., 139. Abbey Road Years (London: Hamlyn, 1988), 141.
21 Geoffrey Giuliano, Two of Us: John Lennon Granted, Paul had been riding George hard, but
and Paul McCartney Behind the Myth (New the rehearsal tapes reveal that “George had
York: Penguin, 1999), 128. finally had enough of John’s unwillingness (or
22 Jann Wenner, Lennon Remembers: The inability) to engage in rational communication.
Rolling Stone Interviews (Harmondsworth: His resentment was heightened by Yoko’s
Penguin, 1971), 51. habitual and presumptuous tendency to speak
23 David Quantick, Revolution: The Making of in John’s place which, if accepted, would give
the Beatles’ White Album (London: Unanimous, her a voice in the future of the group equal to or
2002), 13. overshadowing his own” (Doug Sulpy and Ray
24 O’Dell and Neaverson, At the Apple’s Core, Schweighhardt, Get Back: The Unauthorized
133–4. Chronicle of the Beatles’ “Let It Be” Disaster [New
25 Hertsgaard, A Day in the Life, 254. York: St. Martin’s, 1997], 169).
26 Chris Salewicz, McCartney: The Biography 5 Sulpy and Schweighhardt, Get Back, 177.
(London: Queen Anne Press, 1986), 202. 6 Philip Norman, Shout! The Beatles in Their
27 Malcolm Doney, Lennon and McCartney Generation (New York: MJF, 1981), 383.
(New York: Hippocrene, 1981), 89. 7 Paul recalls: “It was like when he told Cynthia
28 Philip Norman, Shout! The True Story of the he was getting a divorce. He was quite buoyed up
Beatles (London: Hamish Hamilton, 1981), 340. by it” (The Beatles, The Beatles Anthology, 347).
29 Ed Whitley, “The Postmodern White 8 Nicholas Schaffner gives the date as April 9
Album,” in Ian Inglis (ed.), The Beatles, Popular (The Beatles Forever [Harrisburg, PA: Cameron
Music and Society: A Thousand Voices (New House, 1977], 131), adding that the insert was
York: St. Martin’s, 2000); Jan Wenner, Lennon placed inside “British copies of the album, but
Remembers (London: Macmillan, 2000), 105–25. deleted by Klein . . . from the American ones”
30 Allan Kozinn, The Beatles (London: (135). According to McCartney, however, only
Phaidon, 1995), 180. the press received the insert-added albums:
31 O’Grady, The Beatles, 150. Barry Miles, Paul McCartney: Many Years From
32 Whitley, “The Postmodern White Album,” Now (New York: Henry Holt, 1997), 574; see
122–3. also Barry Miles, The Beatles: A Diary – An
33 Schaffner, The Beatles Forever, 111. Intimate Day by Day History (New York: Barnes
34 Quantick, Revolution, 141. & Noble, 2004), 316; and Mark Lewisohn, The
35 Mellers, Twilight of the Gods, 131–2. Complete Beatles Chronicle (New York:
36 Double albums released in the preceding Harmony, 1992, 2000), 341.
two years included Bob Dylan, Blonde on Blonde 9 The two key studies are, respectively, William
(May 1966); Frank Zappa and the Mothers of K. Wimsatt, Jr., and Monroe C. Beardsley, “The
Invention, Freak Out (July 1966); Donovan, A Intentional Fallacy,” in Vincent B. Leitch (ed.),
Gift from a Flower to a Garden (April 1968); and The Norton Anthology of Theory and Criticism
Cream, Wheels of Fire (June 1968). (New York: Norton, 2001), 1374–87; and
37 Giuliano, Two of Us, 132. Roland Barthes, “The Death of the Author,” in
Roland Barthes, Image–Music–Text, trans.
7 On their way home: the Beatles in 1969 and Stephen Heath (New York: Noonday Press,
1970 1977), 142–8. “The evaluation of the work of art
1 Walter Everett, The Beatles as Musicians: remains public; the work is measured against
Revolver through the Anthology (New York: something outside the author,” write the former
Oxford University Press, 1999), 244–5. (1381). “A text is not a line of words releasing a
2 Ibid., 144. single ‘theological’ meaning (the ‘message’ of
3 The last session, that is, until the three the Author-God) but a multi-dimensional space
surviving Beatles regrouped to finish John’s in which a variety of writings, none of them
demos “Free as a Bird” in 1994 and “Real Love” original, blend and clash,” writes Barthes (146).
in 1995. 10 The concept of “timeless” art, although
4 This version contradicts the common making a post-2000 comeback, is a tenet of
assumption voiced by Mark Lewisohn (Day by modern and romantic notions of art – in short,
Day: A Chronology 1962–1989 [New York: of humanism. In this vein, Kennneth Womack
Harmony, 1990], 114), Ian MacDonald argues that “the Beatles espouse a sense of hope
(Revolution in the Head: The Beatles’ Records and and the promise of humanity and sameness in
the Sixties [London: Fourth Estate, 1994], 264), the face of an increasingly inexplicable present”
and Steve Matteo (33 1/3: Let It Be (New York: (298); they urge “us to embrace the restorative
Continuum, 2004], 48) that George left because powers of love, friendship, and a universalizing
of chronic mistreatment at Paul’s hands. belief in a redeemable past” (Long and Winding
Roads: The Evolving Artistry of the Beatles [New 19 Paul had a right to be angry. John had
York: Continuum, 2007], 306). already released three non-Beatle albums
11 This is not to say that postmodern (Unfinished Music, No. 2: Life with the Lions,
approaches have no place in the analysis of Wedding Album, Plastic Ono Band Live Peace in
Beatles music in 1969 and 1970; however, it is to Toronto) and two singles (“Give Peace a
say that reliable readings begin with knowledge Chance,” “Cold Turkey”) – all 1969 – and one
of the history of these so-called swan-songs. On single (“Instant Karma”) in 1970; George had
the topic of closure alone, Let It Be and Abbey released one solo album (Electronic Sound) in
Road confound the conventional idea of ending, 1969, and Ringo had released one solo album in
thus bringing into question postmodernism’s 1970 (Sentimental Journey).
much-debated concept of origins in works of 20 Psychedelic/baroque pop trailed the Beatles
art. like bad karma into 1969 in the form of the
12 As late as his last interviews in 1980, Lennon Yellow Submarine soundtrack (UK release
denied any paranoia. He insisted that Paul January 17, 1969), which included indulgences
sabotaged his (John’s) songs by cultivating “this like “Only a Northern Song” and “It’s All Too
atmosphere of looseness and casualness and Much.”
experimentation . . . I begin to think, well maybe 21 Lewisohn, The Complete Beatles Chronicle,
I’m paranoid. But it’s not paranoid; it’s absolute 306, 309.
truth” (David Sheff, The Playboy Interviews with 22 Wenner, Lennon Remembers, 118.
John Lennon and Yoko Ono, ed. G. Barry Golson 23 Tim Riley, Tell Me Why: A Beatles
[New York: Playboy Press, 1981], 162). Ian Commentary (New York: Knopf, 1988),
MacDonald accuses Lennon of being the real 292.
saboteur: “McCartney left no technical blemish 24 Matteo, 33 1/3, 49–55.
on any Beatles tracks, whoever wrote them. By 25 Ibid., 127.
comparison, Lennon’s crude bass playing on 26 These official versions were “recorded at
“The Long and Winding Road” . . . amounts to Savile Row on 28 January and remixed on 7
sabotage when presented as finished work” April” (Lewisohn, The Beatles Recording
(Revolution in the Head, 272). In 1969, John, not Sessions, 172).
Paul, was the one usually unfocused, out of 27 Sex and religion were sufficiently taboo
tune, tuned out, or late to sessions. subjects in 1969 that an audacious use of them –
13 John Lennon, quoted in Bob Spitz, The “Christ, you know it ain’t easy . . . They’re going
Beatles: The Biography (New York: Little, Brown, to crucify me”; “We’re only trying to get us
2005), 803. some piece/peace” – got John’s “ballad” banned
14 This division of labor occurred in February, on the BBC and many American radio stations.
all Beatles consenting to it. 28 George Martin, quoted in The Beatles, The
15 Variously recorded in the main sources, Beatles Anthology, 337.
John’s outburst was, “I’m sick of being fucked 29 Perhaps a bit melodramatically, Bob Spitz
about by men in suits sitting on their fat arses in describes Lennon on two typical days in the first
the city.” half of 1969: “With his painfully thin frame,
16 Mark Lewisohn, The Beatles Recording gaunt face, stringy unkempt hair, and bloodshot
Sessions (New York: Harmony, 1988), 172–6. eyes, John looked demonic, like a zombie had
17 Miles, Paul McCartney, 548. claimed his tormented soul” (The Beatles, 813);
18 In their study of the Apple saga, Peter he “jabbered incessantly in a thickening
McCabe and Robert Schonfeld accuse Paul of Liverpool brogue, but incoherently, like a
hypocrisy: “For somebody who claims to have lunatic, and his appearance reflected it; he
been so repulsed by Allen Klein, Paul looked gaunt, sickly, from the heroin he
McCartney was nevertheless quite prepared to ingested, his hair long, unkempt, and stringy”
reap a lot of benefits of Klein’s hard (834).
work . . . When things went well and Klein 30 MacDonald, Revolution in the Head, 292.
secured good deals, Paul promptly placed his 31 Spitz, The Beatles, 338.
signature on the dotted line. When he felt things 32 Abbey Road, Ringo told Max Weinberg, “was
were not going his way, or were not to his liking, tom-tom madness. I had gotten this new kit
he ran to the open arms of the Eastmans, who made of wood, and calfskins, and the toms had
were only too delighted to have the opportunity so much depth. I went nuts on the toms” (ibid.,
to denounce Allen Klein as a terrible person” 185).
(Peter McCabe and Robert D. Schonfeld, Apple 33 Paul’s contribution (piano and bass) to the
to the Core: The Unmaking of the Beatles [New tune’s “swampiness” is discussed in Miles, Paul
York: Pocket Books, 1972], 175–6). McCartney, 553.
34 Linda Martin and Kerry Segrave, Anti-Rock: London: British Film Institute, 1998), which
The Opposition to Rock ’n’ Roll (New York: Da offers detailed commentary on critical and
Capo, 1993), 47. theoretical approaches to the study of star
35 Geoff Emerick remembers that John “flatly images. A star’s image is an evolving composite
refused to participate at all in the making of of traits emanating from a wide range of media
‘Maxwell’s Silver Hammer,’ which he derisively texts including promotion (that is, materials
dismissed” (Geoff Emerick and Howard Massey, created specifically to advance the star) and
Here, There, and Everywhere: My Life Recording publicity (or what the media learn about a star –
the Music of the Beatles [New York: Gotham, though this is sometimes “planted” by the star
2006], 280–1). “Rococo craftsmanship on a in service of their publicity), as well as work
Gothic but hollow shell,” Walter Everett calls the product (here, the music, films, books, etc., of
tune, a judgment shared by the other three the former Beatles), and commentary about a
Beatles “marking their exits” (The Beatles as star’s work and life (63). See also Christine
Musicians: Revolver Through the Anthology, Gledhill’s introduction to her edited volume,
253, 251). Stardom: Industry of Desire (London: Routledge,
36 More conflicting reports: While MacDonald 1991), in which she defines the star as “an
says the tune “appealed strongly to all four of intertextual construct produced across a range
them” (Revolution in the Head, 275), Emerick, of media and cultural practices” (xiv–xv).
who was there, says Paul “was very unhappy, not 2 For a detailed account of the Beatles’ evolving
only with the song itself, but with the idea that image and its context in the 1960s, see Michael
the music . . . was being obliterated with Frontani, The Beatles: Image and the Media
noise . . . [He] seemed too beaten down to argue (Jackson: University Press of Mississippi,
the point with a gleeful Lennon, who seemed to 2007).
be taking an almost perverse pleasure at his 3 The Record Industry Association of America
bandmate’s obvious discomfort” (Here, There, (RIAA) began certifying gold albums (500,000
and Everywhere, 300). units sold) in 1958, and platinum albums (1
37 Sheff, The Playboy Interviews, 171. million units sold) in 1976. From 1958 to 1988,
38 Everett, The Beatles as Musicians: Revolver the RIAA required sales of 1 million units to
Through the Anthology, 259. certify a single as gold, and 2 million for
39 Emerick, Here, There, and Everywhere, platinum certification. In 1989, these
293–4. requirements for singles were lowered to
40 Ibid., 289. 500,000 and 1 million units sold for gold and
41 Ibid., 295. platinum certification, respectively.
42 Paul recast “Cold Turkey” to brilliant effect 4 See Renata Adler, “Screen: “Candy,”
as “Let Me Roll It” on 1973’s Band on the Run. Compromises Galore,” review of Candy
43 Wenner, Lennon Remembers, 120. (Cinerama Releasing Corporation movie),
44 John Lennon, quoted in Peter Doggett, Let It New York Times, December 18, 1968, 54: “The
Be / Abbey Road (New York: Schirmer, 1998), movie . . . manages to compromise . . . almost
123. anyone who had anything to do with it.” Candy
45 By Everett’s reckoning. Sulpy and was followed by a better-received starring role in
Schweighhardt (Get Back, 276) time the track at director Joseph McGrath’s The Magic Christian
8:23. (1969), co-starring Peter Sellers. The New York
46 Where millions hear majesty in “Let It Be,” Times’s Roger Greenspun called Starr’s
Ian MacDonald hears “complacent uplift rather performance “fine,” in a film that was “funny,”
than revelation” (Revolution in the Head, 270). and full of “lovely victories” (‘Screen: Satirical
47 Dickinson wrote (c. 1862): “Renunciation – ‘Magic Christian,’” New York Times, February
is a piercing Virtue – / The letting go / A 12, 1970, 29).
Presence – for an Expectation” (Poem 745, in 5 See William C. Woods, “Ringo Goes it Solo,
Thomas H. Johnson (ed.), Final Harvest: Emily Pleasantly Enough,” review of the sound
Dickinson’s Poems [Boston, MA: Little, Brown, recording Sentimental Journey (Apple LP),
1961]). Washington Post, May 17, 1970, 142: “pleasant
48 Let It Be . . . Naked’s bonus disc of studio enough . . . [but] nothing is revealed in this
chatter is a paltry twenty-two minutes culled collection . . . except that Ringo can’t sing, which
from thousands. we knew already, and that he doesn’t know it,
which we didn’t know.” Lennon felt
9 The solo years “embarrassed” about the album (see Jann
1 See Richard Dyer’s landmark study of the Wenner, Lennon Remembers: The Rolling Stone
Hollywood movie star apparatus, Stars (1980; Interviews (London: Verso, 1971).
6 See Don Heckman, “Recordings: Making a 14 See Tom Carson, “Bad Boy,” Rolling Stone,
Star of Starr,” review of the sound recording July 12, 1978, 52. Indicating a growing
Beaucoups of Blues (Apple LP), New York Times, disaffection with the ex-Beatles, Carson
November 22, 1970, 133: “What is remarkable continues, “but a record like Wings’ London
is . . . that he does it so well.” Town is trash with pretensions, which is worse.”
7 In addition to a documentary he made about 15 See Richard Williams, “Solo Beatles,” review
British glam rocker T Rex, Born to Boogie of the sound recording All Things Must Pass
(1972), Starr appeared in a number of films of (Apple LP), by George Harrison, The Times
variable quality, including Frank Zappa’s Saturday Review, January 23, 1971, 17.
surrealist depiction of life on the road with the 16 Among musicians playing on All Things
Mothers of Invention, 200 Motels (1971), Must Pass were Ringo Starr, Alan White
Ferdinando Baldi’s spaghetti western Blindman (drums), Klaus Voormann (bass), Gary Brooker,
(1971), the critical and commercial failure Son Gary Wright, and Billy Preston (keyboards),
of Dracula (directed by Freddie Francis, 1974), Pete Drake (pedal steel guitar), members of
and Ken Russell’s Lisztomania (1975). Badfinger (acoustic guitars) and, late of Delaney
Noteworthy more for their directorial excess and Bonnie and Friends, and now evolving into
than the contributions of their actors, these Derek and the Dominoes, Eric Clapton (guitar),
films did little to further Starr’s acting career. Carl Radle (bass), Jim Gordon (drums), and
8 The New York Times’s Loraine Alterman Bobbie Whitlock (organ and piano), as well as
called Ringo an “instant knockout” and Dave Mason (guitar), and Jim Price and Bobby
“sensational album” (“Ringo Dishes Up,” New Keys (trumpet and saxophone, respectively).
York Times, November 25, 1973, 188). 17 According to Simon Leng, in his detailed
9 Most notable were those surrounding 2006 study of Harrison’s solo work, While My
promoter Bill Sargent’s 1976 offer of $50 million Guitar Gently Weeps (New York: Hal Leonard,
for one performance, and those circulating at 2006), even Harrison considered some of the
the time of the Concerts for Kampuchea in album “overcooked” (85). In the booklet
1979, though reunion rumors were a permanent accompanying his 2001 remaster of the album,
fixture of the 1970s, often fanned by the four Harrison acknowledged Spector’s help in getting
principals. the record made, and, in a flash of his
10 See Ben Gerson, “Records: Ringo,” review of understated sense of humor, noted: “In his
the sound recording Ringo (Apple LP), by Ringo company I came to realize the true value of the
Starr, Rolling Stone, December 20, 1973, 73. Hare Krishna Mantra.”
Gerson expanded on his point: “It is not 18 See Jon Landau, “Singles: ‘My Sweet
polemical and abrasive like Lennon’s, harsh and Lord’/‘Isn’t It A Pity,” Rolling Stone, December
self-pitying like Harrison’s, or precious and 24, 1970, 56. “My Sweet Lord” was number one
flimsy like McCartney’s, but balanced, airy and in the US singles chart, and, backed with “What
amiable.” Is Life,” number one in the UK.
11 Rolling Stone’s reviewer called it a “pleasant 19 See Tom Zito’s “Within Him, Without
collection . . . in the winning tradition of Ringo’s Them: The Consciousness of George Harrison”
breakthrough album, Ringo” (Tom Nolan, (Washington Post, January 3, 1971, F1–F2). Zito
“Good Night Vienna,” April 24, 1975, 62). judged that the album “would add much
12 See Larry Rohter, “No Reason to Cry,” speculation to the still unanswered question” –
Washington Post, November 3, 1976, D14: “Who was really the genius behind the Beatles?”
“Rotogravure is a routine album.” Even a Time magazine found the album an “expressive,
positive review in Melody Maker, which called it classily executed personal statement . . . one of
“such a nice jolly record,” could not help the the outstanding rock albums in years” (William
album on to the British charts. See “Jolly Nice, Bender, “Let George Do It,” November 30, 1970,
Ringo,” October 23, 1976, 27. 57). The New York Times’s Don Heckman wrote:
13 See Chris Welch, “Albums: Ringo Starr: “If anyone had any doubts that George Harrison
Ringo the 4th,” Melody Maker, February 11, was a major talent, they can relax . . . This is a
1978, 20: “There comes a point where a man release that shouldn’t be missed” (“Pop: Two
singing flat and stripped of all legend and and a Half Beatles,” December 20, 1970, 104).
nostalgia becomes just a man singing flat.” See 20 See, for example, “Fellow Traveling with
also, Stephen Holden’s review (“Ringo the 4th,” Jesus” (Time, September 6, 1971, 54–5), which
Rolling Stone, November 17, 1977, 94), in which described the Way and the Process, two
he judges the album to be “little more than the movements enjoying some popularity among
seedy extravagance of an exiled aristocrat whose the young. The “Jesus Craze” was the focus of a
legend resounds ever more faintly.” Life feature, also from 1971 (December 31, 1971,
38–9). Additionally, Look published a lengthy “there isn’t a bad cut, but at the same time there
feature on the growth in popularity of revivals aren’t as many obvious stand-outs as there were
among American youth (Brian Vachon, “The on [All Things Must Pass]” (Michael Watts,
Jesus Movement is Upon Us,” February 9, 1971, “Living in the Material World,” June 9, 1973, 3).
5–21). 25 See Jim Miller, “Dark Horse: Transcendental
21 Interestingly, late in 1969, there were press Mediocrity,” Rolling Stone, February 13, 1975,
rumors that Lennon would play Christ in the 76. Miller painted a bleak picture: “Stripped of
Tim Rice / Andrew Lloyd Webber musical Jesus the Beatles’ company . . . Harrison’s weaknesses
Christ Superstar, to be performed at St. Paul’s as a musician have gradually surfaced.”
Cathedral. Apparently he was interested, but it Specifically, “his voice has always been dogged
was decided that “a relative unknown should by a limited range and poor intonation, just as
have the starring role,” for “someone like his guitar playing, adequate for fills within
Lennon would imprint his own personality to precise arrangements, has always been
such an extent that people would read the star’s rudimentary and even graceless in an affecting
character into the character of the part” (See sort of way . . . How long will his fans continue
“John and Yoko’s Christmas Gifts,” Rolling to tolerate such mediocrity? . . . George Harrison
Stone, January 21, 1970, 6). has never been a great artist, as he himself must
22 See Ben Gerson, “Records: All Things Must know . . . the question becomes whether he will
Pass” (Rolling Stone, January 7, 1971, 46). The ever again be a competent entertainer.”
New Yorker’s Ellen Willis was impressed by the 26 See “Dark Horse,” High Fidelity, April 1975,
album’s “beautiful sound” and an Indian 101.
influence that had been “integrated quietly” 27 The ever-welcoming Melody Maker, though
(“Rock, Etc.: George and John,” review of All approaching the album “with some trepidation,
Things Must Pass [Apple LP], by George fearing a lot of whining sitar, thudding tablas
Harrison, and John Lennon/Plastic Ono Band and groaning out-of-tune voices,” happily
[Apple LP], by John Lennon, New Yorker, found that “the Sacred Cowboy has produced a
February 27, 1971, 95–7). good one” (“Harrison: Eastern Promise,”
23 The single, the concert, and the resulting December 21, 1974, 36).
Concert for Bangladesh album and film, were 28 See John Rockwell, “Music: George
forerunners of Bob Geldof and Midge Ure’s Harrison,” New York Times, December 21, 1974,
efforts for Ethiopian hunger relief, including the 19. See also Larry Rohter, “For Harrison, Some
Band Aid project and the single “Do They Know Things Must Pass,” Washington Post, December
It’s Christmas” (1984), and the Live Aid concert 14, 1974, C1, which notes the Washington DC
(1985) and resulting film and recordings, as well audience’s bewilderment at Harrison’s musical
as Michael Jackson and Lionel Ritchie’s charity arrangements and the paucity of Beatles tunes.
single for East African famine relief, “We Are the The New Yorker was similarly unimpressed (“At
World” (1985), Farm Aid (held annually since the Garden,” January 13, 1975, 30).
1985), Live 8 (2005), and the Live Earth (2007) 29 See Dave Marsh, “Extra Texture,” review of
concerts, films, and recordings. McCartney also Extra Texture (Read All About It), by George
followed Harrison’s lead, organizing, with UN Harrison, Rolling Stone, November 20, 1975, 75.
Secretary-General Kurt Waldheim, the Concerts 30 For positive comment, see Richard Meltzer,
for the People of Kampuchea, to benefit the “George Harrison Surrenders the Goodies,”
victims of Pol Pot’s regime in Cambodia, in Village Voice, December 20, 1976, 89; see also
December 1979. “Harrison regains his Rubber Soul,” Melody
24 See Stephen Holden, “Records: Living in the Maker, November 27, 1976, 23. The New York
Material World,” Rolling Stone, July 19, 1973, 54: Times’s influential critic John Rockwell,
“A seductive record . . . the album stands alone however, found that the album, exhibiting “a
as an article of faith, miraculous in its radiance.” certain plodding monotony,” “just isn’t very
Less impressed, the New York Times’s Ian Dove interesting” (“Pop Life,” New York Times,
called it an “informally produced . . . December 24, 1976, 44). High Fidelity painted
mélange . . . Introspection . . . abounds here, but much of the album as “semi-listenable dreck –
it sounds like notes in passing” (“Records: some of it pallid, some of it self-righteous and
Harrison’s Turn,” June 6, 1973, 37). See also stupid” (“George Harrison: Thirty-Three &
David Sterritt, “Latest from ex-Beatles 1/3,” March 1977, 140).
McCartney, Harrison,” Christian Science 31 The New York Times’s John Rockwell found
Monitor, June 29, 1973, 12: “The music never the Beatle era music “delightful,” while finding
jells solidly enough to support the lyrics’ that the solo material retained a “flowing
mystical didacticism.” Melody Maker judged: appeal”(“Pop Life,” New York Times, December
24, 1976, 44). The Washington Post’s Larry Beatles,” June 29, 1970, 8). Similarly, Time’s
Rohter called the album “an absolute delight” review, though judging it inferior to his Beatles
(“Dear Santa: All I Want for Christmas Is No. classics, called the album a “tour de force” that
11578,” Washington Post, December 19, 1976, “in mood and style . . . marks the same kind of
147). return to simple pleasures . . . that characterizes
32 Though not ending until 1977, the marriage Bob Dylan’s recent work . . . Overall, the new
had been rife with turmoil for years. Boyd, who album is good McCartney – clever, varied, full
had long been the object of Eric Clapton’s desire of humor” (“Music: Hello, Goodbye, Hello,”
(voiced in his recording “Layla”), married the April 20, 1970, 57). Newsweek’s Hubert Saal
guitarist in 1979 (divorced 1988). opined: “What’s extra special about the record is
33 Films include Time Bandits (1981), Neil the incredible richness of melody, the
Jordan’s Mona Lisa (1986), the disastrous tastefulness and wit of the lyrics and the
Shanghai Surprise (1986, starring newlyweds expressive range of McCartney’s voice,” and, of
Madonna and Sean Penn), and director Bruce the album’s fourteen songs, “There’s not a loser
Robinson’s critically acclaimed Withnail and I in the bunch” (“The Beatles Minus One,” April
(1987) and How to Get Ahead in Advertising 20, 1970, 95).
(1989). 37 Lennon took the photo to be a dig at his and
34 See Robert S. Spitz, “George Harrison on the Ono’s “bagism” of the 1969 peace campaign,
Move,” Washington Post, March 4, 1979, A1. during which he and Ono appeared at press
Later the writer of the respected and mammoth conferences and other public events completely
The Beatles: A Biography (2005), Spitz praised covered by a bag, hence, they maintained,
the album’s “sense of structure,” which had freeing their message of peace of the stereotypes
been absent from the previous four “dreadful and bigotry that would otherwise attend their
mistakes.” Here, Harrison “once again proves a appearances.
first-rate composer.” The Christian Science 38 See Jon Landau, “‘Ram,’” Rolling Stone, July
Monitor reviewer found the album “not so 8, 1971, 42. Melody Maker called the album,
cloying,” but judged that it “suffer[ed] from a which failed to “match up” to Harrison’s and
blissfully droning and boring sameness” (Sara Lennon’s albums (All Things Must Pass and
Terry, George Harrison, Christian Science Plastic Ono Band, respectively), a “good album,
Monitor, March 22, 1979, 22). Rolling Stone’s by anybody’s standards,” but, “you expect too
Stephen Holden noted that co-producer Russ much from a man like Paul McCartney. It must
Titleman and Harrison had presented be hell living up to a name” (Chris
arrangements that were “the most concise and Charlesworth, “Mutton dressed as Ram?,”
springy to be found on any Harrison record” Melody Maker, May 27, 1971, 11). The Christian
(“George Harrison,” Rolling Stone, April 19, Science Monitor’s David Sterritt criticized
1979, 90). High Fidelity opined that the album McCartney’s use of “second-hand
seemed to demonstrate that Harrison was Beatlisms . . . But this is an eclectic
“ageing more gracefully than expected” package . . . All in all, it looks like another Beatle
(“George Harrison,” May 1979, 125). has done it again” (“On the Disc Scene:
35 See Nicholas Schaffner, The Beatles Forever ‘Ram,’” Christian Science Monitor, July 7, 1971,
(New York: McGraw-Hill, 1978), 135; John 4).
Blaney, Lennon and McCartney: Together Alone 39 Robert Palmer, reviewing Tug of War (1981),
(London: Jawbone Press, 2007), 31–2. grasped an essential fact about McCartney’s
36 See Langdon Winner, “Records: McCartney” compositions: “One can’t lambaste Mr.
(Rolling Stone, May 14, 1970, 50). Regarding McCartney too strenuously for writing
Wenner’s alteration of Winner’s review, see sentimental, home-and-hearth lyrics; that’s the
Robert Draper, Rolling Stone Magazine: The kind of person he is. And one of the big changes
Uncensored History (New York: Doubleday, the Beatles made . . . was their insistence that
1990), 99. The mainstream press was less artists write their own kind of songs, about their
bothered by the album’s promotion. The own realities” (“Paul McCartney’s Latest is
Christian Science Monitor’s David Sterritt Exquisite but Flawed,” New York Times, April 25,
applauded McCartney’s effort: “Here one 1982, Section 2, pp. 1, 19).
realizes again what a crucial factor to the Beatles’ 40 See John Mendelsohn, “‘Wild Life,’” review
success was his talent as both songwriter and of Wild Life (Apple LP), by Wings, Rolling Stone,
singer . . . It’s [McCartney’s] simple and slight, January 20, 1972, 48; and David Sterritt, “Discs:
and it’s all deliberately delightful,” and judged: Hello, Paul – Bye-bye Beatles,” review of
“With Paul, unquestionably, lies the future path McCartney (Apple LP), by Paul McCartney,
for Beatle fans” (“Discs: Hello, Paul – Bye-bye Christian Science Monitor, June 29, 1970, 8.
41 See, for example, Craig McGregor’s “Rock’s 12). The New York Times’s Ian Dove noted that
‘We Are One’ Myth” (New York Times, May 9, McCartney, “the romantic, the seeker after
1971, D15). In the aftermath of Altamont, melody,” had fared less well with the critics than
which blighted the countercultural ideal of Lennon’s introspection and Harrison’s
community under an alcohol and drug-fueled blossoming talent – approaches “more
explosion of thuggery and violence, McGregor fashionable to trendy critical ears” – but judged
questioned the most idyllic and cherished claim the new LP McCartney’s best to date (“Records
of the counterculture, “We are all one.” by McCartney,” May 2, 1973, 37).
42 British troops fired on civil rights protesters 48 See Loraine Alterman, “Pop: Paul’s Grooves
in Derry, Northern Ireland, killing fourteen, Will Grab You,” New York Times, December 2,
including six minors. 1973, 208. See also Jon Landau, “Band on the
43 McCartney’s interaction with the law Run” (Apple LP), Rolling Stone, January 31,
included a 1980 arrest for cannabis possession 1974, 48, 50. The Washington Post’s Tom Zito
while entering Japan for a Wings tour. called it “largely enjoyable, insubstantial fluff
44 Sir Lew Grade convinced McCartney to ensconced in some of the best rock melodies
make the special, produced by the same team currently being written” (“The Beatles: Looking
responsible for Elvis Presley’s “comeback Back,” P8). High Fidelity called Band on the Run
special” on NBC, in 1968. Grade, who controlled McCartney’s “best since Ram,” and noted: “Not
half the publishing royalties for McCartney’s everyone need be a poet . . . and the music’s lack
songs, questioned the co-writing credits that of lyrical import diminishes the product not at
Linda McCartney was getting on a number of all” (“Paul McCartney: Band on the Run,” April
songs on Ram. He agreed to stop pressing the 1974, 124).
issue if McCartney would do the special. 49 The Washington Post’s Tom Zito called Venus
45 Among the “routines” were McCartney and Mars the “first true post-Beatles Beatles
giving an acoustic performance of a medley album,” mixing “clever, provocative lyrics,
including “Blackbird,” “Bluebird,” “Michelle,” hummable melodies, unusual tonalities,
and “Heart of the Country,” while his wife classical timbres and a refined audio
snapped photographs; Wings performing “Mary approach . . . in brief, just the sort of things we’d
Had a Little Lamb” in a pastoral setting; and a expect of a new Beatles record” (“Hey, Venus,
Busby Berkeley-inspired dance number Could That Be a New Beatles Album?,” July 6,
featuring McCartney singing “Gotta Sing, Gotta 1975: 71). Melody Maker concluded that “this
Dance” and hoofing it with dancers attired in new collection of songs will eventually sink into
half woman / half man regalia. See John J. the collective rock consciousness and become
O’Connor’s “TV: McCartney and His Group on widely appreciated as another triumph for
ABC Tonight” (New York Times, April 16, 1973, Wings and their song writing bass player”
75), in which he judged that the performances (“Wings: Shooting Stars!,” May 31, 1975, 22).
by McCartney and Wings made the special 50 Rolling Stone’s Stephen Holden found At the
“definitely worth watching.” Yet the Washington Speed of Sound to lack the “effervescence” of its
Post’s Tom Zito, (“Hamming and Homage,” predecessor, but nevertheless applauded
April 17, 1973, B6) bemoaned the emphasis McCartney’s ability to “play the studio like an
placed on Linda McCartney, leading him to instrument,” so evident on this ‘spectacularly
“speculate what heights McCartney, and also well arranged and recorded” effort. More proof
John Lennon, might be able to reach were they that McCartney had gained some level of
not respectively Paul and Linda and John and acceptance with the once hostile Rolling Stone
Yoko . . . Mrs. McCartney’s previous critics, the review of “Silly Love Songs” found it
careers . . . certainly don’t qualify her to perform an “acceptably didactic” and “clever retort” to
in public.” The Times’s reviewer Alan Coren his critics. Nevertheless, Holden registered
jibed that it “was not the sort of programme you concern over McCartney’s studio dexterity
make a come-back with. It was the sort of hampering his songwriting, for “the best
programme you make a come-back after” McCartney songs will most certainly outlast all
(“James Paul McCartney,” May 11, 1973, 11). the studios in which they were recorded” (“On
46 See Lenny Kaye, “Red Rose Speedway,” the Wings of Silly Love Songs,” May 20, 1976,
Rolling Stone, July 5, 1973, 68. 67, 69).
47 The Christian Science Monitor noted a 51 See Mark Kernis, “McCartney and Wings
“sometimes facile, sometimes vulgar Just Won’t Fly,” Washington Post, April 16, 1978,
hipness . . . but nothing quite disturbs the quiet A1. Kernis griped about “music so light that it
listenability of Paul’s cheery work” (Sterritt, may disappear altogether.” Rolling Stone’s Janet
“Latest From ex-Beatles McCartney, Harrison,” Maslin found the album “so lighthearted” that
the “feeling of familial strength and affection is ignorance is bliss or something” (Wenner,
virtually the only thing that binds it to earth” Lennon Remembers, 106).
(June 15, 1978, 89, 91–2). High Fidelity, 60 The Christian Science Monitor’s David
however, applauded the album as a distinct Sterritt commented on the “excruciatingly
improvement over the “melodic milk” of At the powerful” solo effort: “The overall tone of the
Speed of Sound, and welcomed the deeper record is so open and self-revelatory that it
complexity of the lyrics which indicated a “more seems as impolite for the listener to quarrel with
complete artist” (Toby Goldstein, “London them as it is for Lennon to inflict them on his
Town: So What’s Wrong with Silly Love Songs?,” audience” (“Plastic Ono Band,” 4). The New
July 1978, 120). York Times’s Don Heckman, however, was less
52 Rolling Stone quipped that “McCartney’s impressed, calling the album a “group of empty
gross indulgence is matched only by his selections,” and continuing: “Curiously, the
shameless indolence, and Back to the Egg album resembles Paul McCartney’s recent solo
represents the public disintegration of a outing [i.e. McCartney] in its dogged emphasis
consistently disappointing talent” (Timothy upon musical self-centeredness. Clearly, these
White, “Back to the Egg,” August 23, 1979, 56). are two artists who lost something important
The Washington Post was somewhat more when their intimate working partnership
charitable, finding that, from “a purely pop deteriorated” (“Pop: Two and a Half Beatles,”
standpoint,” the album was “difficult to fault,” 104). The Times Saturday Review’s Richard
but that McCartney was sounding “more like a Williams called the album “almost unbearably
McCartney imitator” (Harry Sumrall, “Paul stark. It is not an album I can put on for
McCartney’s Scrambled ‘Egg,’ July 22, 1979, pleasure” (“Solo Beatles,” January 23, 1971, 17).
A1). The New York Times’s John Rockwell found The New Yorker’s Ellen Willis, in her generally
the album “curiously indifferent and casual” positive review of the album, called the music
(“The Pop Life,” June 29, 1979, C24). “artfully simple,” with lyrics that are “mostly
53 See Stephen Holden, “McCartney II,” spare, sometimes biting, sometimes
Rolling Stone, July 24, 1980, 54. See also self-indulgent” (“George and John,” February
Rockwell, “The Pop Life,” C14. The Washington 27, 1971, 97).
Post’s Richard Harrington (“McCartney and 61 New Left radical and one-time president of
Sinatra: The Past Is Still Best,” June 15, 1980, the Students for a Democratic Society (SDS)
A1) found the album a “miserable mistake.” Todd Gitlin, in reacting to Lennon’s first two
54 See Jann Wenner, “Man of the Year: John solo albums and the publication of Lennon
Lennon,” Rolling Stone, February 7, 1970, Remembers, applauded Lennon for shedding the
24–5. myths of the Beatles and the counterculture, and
55 See Wenner, Lennon Remembers, 41. for providing a path for a badly fragmented and
56 Ibid., 75. rudderless movement: “Lennon revives the idea
57 The proceeds financed a black-culture of leader as exemplar.” He expressed a desire
center in London. that Lennon’s authenticity and “public struggle
58 The Plastic Ono Band was Lennon and to be free” might spark a new “commonality”
Ono’s ever-changing band – in effect, whoever that could resuscitate political and social
they were playing with at the time. Among those activism (“John Lennon Speaking . . . .,”
playing in the band were Eric Clapton, Yes Commonweal, September 22, 1972, 500–3).
drummer Alan White, bassist Klaus Voormann, 62 Among causes picked up by Lennon and
Harrison, and Starr. In September 1969, Ono was the plight of members of a Scottish
Lennon, Ono, Clapton, Voorman, and White shipbuilders union threatened with losing their
played the Toronto Rock and Roll Revival. Their jobs due to the withdrawal of subsidies from the
performance was released as Live Peace in British government. They also protested against
Toronto, 1969, in December of that year, and the presence of British troops in Northern
rose to number ten in the US album charts. Ireland, backed efforts to have the case of
59 Lennon described the role of the artist in the convicted A6 murderer James Hanratty
1971 Rolling Stone interview: “If I could be a reexamined (Hanratty was the last man
fuckin’ fisherman, I would! . . . It’s no fun being executed in Great Britain, in 1965), and
an artist . . . I resent performing for fuckin’ supported the editors of Oz, an underground
idiots who won’t know – who don’t know – paper that was on trial for obscenity.
anything. ’Cause they can’t feel – I’m the one 63 See Tom Zito, “Peace, Love, Art, and Yoko,”
that’s feeling, ’cause I’m the one expressing what Washington Post, October 9, 1971, C1.
they are trying to. They live vicariously through 64 Melody Maker’s Roy Hollingsworth gushed:
me and other artists . . . But the pain . . . “It’s the best album of the year and for me it’s
the best album he’s done, with anything or with McCartney’s – “Irish” songs: “How sad that the
anyone at any time” (“Pop Albums: Imagine,” only thing in years on which he and Paul have
October 9, 1971, 21). The Christian Science agreed should have drawn from both their very
Monitor’s David Sterritt called the album “solid worst work. Neither “The Luck of the Irish” nor
and likeable” (“Will the Real Beatle Please Sing [McCartney’s] “Give Ireland Back to the Irish”
Out?,” January 28, 1972, 13). The Washington can do anything but increase the bigotry of the
Post’s Tom Zito called it an “ambitious and already ignorant” (“Albums: Some Time in New
almost fully realized effort. Far and away better York City,” 25). Yet, in an earlier review
than his first solo album” (“Christmas Records,” appearing in the magazine, Roy Hollingsworth
November 28, 1971, 128). called it “the full fist of revolt . . . It is certainly
65 See “Records: ‘Imagine,’” review of the the most valid, most relevant snarl at The
sound recording Imagine (Apple LP), by John Powers That Be that there ever has been” (“The
Lennon, Rolling Stone, October 28, 1971, 48. People’s Album,” Roy Hollingsworth, “Albums:
66 Wenner, Lennon Remembers. Some Time in New York City,” review of Some
67 See Gitlin, “John Lennon Speaking . . . .” Time in New York City [Apple LP], by John
68 Inmates had seized prison guards, leading to Lennon and Yoko Ono, with the Plastic Ono
a four-day standoff that culminated with New Band, Melody Maker, June 10, 1972, 9).
York governor Nelson Rockefeller ordering an 73 Reviewing Lennon’s previous album,
assault by New York state troopers, leaving Imagine, High Fidelity’s critic identified
twenty-eight prisoners and nine hostages dead. Lennon’s unique perspective and appeal:
69 See Jon Wiener, Come Together: John Lennon “Lennon . . . demands that his audience not only
in His Time (1984; Chicago: Illinois University judge his music but judge him as well. Pop
Press, 1991). Wiener’s brilliant study of albums rarely make such intriguing demands on
Lennon’s political evolution, with his Gimme the listener; for that alone John Lennon passes
Some Truth: The John Lennon FBI Files muster with me” (Henry Edwards, “The
(Berkeley: University of California Press, 1999), Provocative Lennon–Ono Marriage,” January
paints a harrowing picture of a paranoid Nixon 1972, 77).
administration run amok in the maintenance of 74 The New York Times’s Loraine Alterman
its power. judged the album “a fascinating piece of work”
70 A contentious custody battle with Ono’s (“Ringo Dishes Up,” November 25, 1973, 188).
former husband, Tony Cox, continued for years The Washington Post’s Tom Zito noted that the
and ended with Cox defying the court’s granting album was full of “raunchy rock ’n’ roll as well
of custody to the Lennons and disappearing as bouncy, soaring, string-infused songs, but it’s
with Kyoko in 1977. Kyoko reestablished contact Lennon’s heavy lyrics about politics and life that
with her mother in the early 1990s. really matter.” The review was mildly critical of
71 According to the New York Times, the single Lennon’s paeans to Ono: “Lennon’s
“Woman is the Nigger of the World”/“Sisters, O lyrics . . . sometimes get so personal that they
Sisters”) received a citation from the New York bore the listener” (“The Beatles: Looking Back
chapter of the National Organization of Women Ten Years,” February 17, 1974, P8). Calling the
(NOW), for its “strong profeminist statement” album “an attractive rock-oriented collection,”
(Laurie Johnston, “Women’s Group to High Fidelity’s Henry Edwards wrote: “I think
Observe,” August 25, 1972, 40). John Lennon best serves his talents when he
72 “What can one say when confronted with dispenses with the heavy-handed propaganda
incipient artistic suicide?” wondered Rolling that has marred his recent recorded excursions.
Stone’s Stephen Holden, over this “shallow and Mind Games offers promise for the future”
derivative” and condescending album: “Their (“Mind Games,” March 1974, 109). Rolling
[Lennon and Ono’s] strategy seems to be to try Stone’s Jon Landau, while critical of Lennon’s
to radicalize what they must envisage as an “worst writing yet,” nevertheless marked the
ignorant stupid mass of working-class teenagers album as an improvement over Some Time in
and ghetto dwellers by ‘getting down to their New York City. Mind Games revealed “another
level’” (“Records: Some Time in New York City,” major artist of the Sixties [i.e. Dylan is also
July 20, 1972, 48). Even Britain’s Melody Maker, singled out] lost in the changing musical
loath to criticize the work of the solo Beatles, environment of the Seventies, helplessly trying
commented, “I’m afraid people are right when to impose his own gargantuan ego upon an
they criticize him for sitting comfortably at audience that has already absorbed his insights
home in New York and writing about something and is now waiting hopefully for him to chart
on which he’s in no way qualified to pontificate.” a new course” (“Mind Games,” January 3,
Particularly troubling were Lennon’s – and 1974, 61).
75 Rolling Stone’s Ben Gerson applauded the Village Voice a month after Lennon’s murder,
album’s “relative clear-headedness” (“Walls and called Double Fantasy, with “its rich, precise
Bridges,” November 21, 1974, 76). sound, command of readymades from New
76 Lennon and his band played “Imagine,” Orleans r&b to James Brown funk, from magical
“Slippin’ and Slidin’,” and “Stand By Me.” mystery dynamics to detonating synthesizers,”
Lennon, whose relationship with Sir Lew Grade one of “the two albums released in 1980 (Poly
had suffered since Grade’s purchase of Lennon Styrene’s dreamlike Transluscence is the other)
and McCartney’s publishing rights from Dick to put the anonymous usages of studio rock to
James in 1969, had decided to follow striking artistic purpose” (“Symbolic
McCartney’s lead and make peace with Grade. Comrades,” January 14, 1981, 32). High
Grade’s ATV had distributed McCartney’s James Fidelity’s Mitchell Cohen grieved the loss of
Paul McCartney special. Lennon and the transformation of the album by
77 In October 1975, the New York State his murder from a welcome “step” to “a stop”
Supreme Court reversed the deportation order, (“John Lennon’s Last,” February 1981, 92). And
chastised the INS for its “selective prosecution” Rolling Stone’s Stephen Holden, in a review
of the Lennons, and ordered that his application perhaps softened in the wake of his slaying,
for residency be reconsidered. noted of Lennon that he seemed “calm,
78 See Laurence Shames’s lengthy account of confident, and content . . . He doesn’t appear
trying to track down the reclusive Lennon, driven to deliver a major statement – so
“John Lennon, Where Are You?,” Esquire, naturally he does” (“Lennon’s Music: A Range
November 1980, 32. of Genius,” January 22, 1981, 70).
79 See Dave Marsh’s “An Open Letter to John 82 In the wake of Lennon’s death, Double
Lennon” (Rolling Stone, November 3, 1977, 50). Fantasy was awarded the 1981 Grammy for
Marsh’s piece perfectly captures the unique Album of the Year.
leadership role filled by rock stars in the 1960s, 83 “Lennon Has a Legacy,” Nation, December
and retained by some part of the audience in the 20, 1980, 657.
1970s: “Always before, you’ve been there, if not 84 Todd Gitlin, “The Lennon Legacy,” The
defining the issues and causes for us, at least Center Magazine, May/June 1981, 4.
putting them in some kind of context or 85 See Terry Eastland, “In Defense of Religious
blowing any smug and silly convictions apart. I America,” Commentary, June 1981, 45; also
am not of the opinion that you are the only Dorothy Rabinowitz, “John Lennon’s
person in the world who can do that – for me, Mourners,” Commentary, February 1981, 58–61.
doing it is the essence of what being a rock star 86 See Richard Brookhiser, “John Lennon,
(rather than an entertainer or whatever) is all RIP,” National Review, December 31, 1980,
about. But you always did it best.” 1555. He continued: “It is hard to think of a
80 See John Lennon and Yoko Ono, “A Love zany idea zipping through the ether which the
Letter from John and Yoko, To People Who Ask Beatles, as cultural lightning rods, did not
Us What, When and Why,” New York Times, conduct – psychedelia, Maharishi Mahesh Fakir,
May 27, 1979, E20. all we are saying is give peace a chance.”
81 Melody Maker’s Ian Pye blasted the album as 87 See Chet Flippo, Yesterday: The
a “godawful yawn [that] reeks of an indulgent Unauthorized Autobiography of Paul McCartney
sterility” (“Double Fantasy,” November 22, (New York: Doubleday, 1989), 373–4.
1980, 26). The Washington Post’s Richard 88 See David Wild, “‘The Lives of John
Harrington labeled it “commercial, Lennon,’” Rolling Stone, October 6, 1988, 21.
easy-listening pablum . . . What’s obvious from Irish rock band U2’s lead singer, Bono, went
“Double Fantasy” is that Lennon and Ono are after the author on 1988’s Rattle and Hum
no longer avant-gardists, but derriere guards” album, where, on the obviously Lennon-
(“Pap From John and Yoko,” November 26, inspired “God Part II,” he sings of Goldman:
1980, A1). But Lennon and Ono had defenders, “Instant karma’s gonna get him, if I don’t get
including the influential Robert Palmer and him first.”
Robert Christgau. Palmer, reviewing the single 89 The Village Voice’s Davitt Sigerson
“(Just Like) Starting Over,” backed with Ono’s commented: “After a decade of drivel, it has
“Kiss Kiss Kiss,” in the New York Times, noted taken McCartney only six tunes’ worth of Tug of
that Lennon’s track, though “sentimental and War’s meaty entertainment to get us ready for
somewhat obvious,” confirmed his stature as a some more of the old charm. Readier, indeed,
consummate pop tunesmith (“The Pop Life: than at any time since Abbey Road” (“Paul
‘[Just Like] Starting Over,’” October 24, 1980, Carries That Weight,” May 11, 1982, 64). The
C15). Christgau, in a review appearing in the New York Times’s Robert Palmer called the
album an “exquisitely crafted though lyrically (1975). Noteworthy more for their directorial
flawed new album . . . his most ambitious piece excess than for the contributions of their actors,
of work in a number of years . . . as finely crafted these films did little to further Starr’s acting
as his work with the Beatles. It’s too bad Mr. career.
Lennon isn’t around to goad him into making a 93 Starr also played “Mr. Conductor” on the
masterpiece” (“Paul McCartney’s Latest is American spinoff Shining Time Station, which
Exquisite but Flawed,” New York Times, April 25, debuted at the end of the decade.
1982, Section 2, pp. 1, 19). Stereo Review’s Mark 94 See Stephen Holden, “Pop View: Rock
Peel was less convinced, stating: “McCartney has Grows Up, Gracefully and Otherwise,” New York
been coasting on inoffensive product for so long Times, November 8, 1987, H29. Holden found
that when he tries to turn up the energy this Cloud Nine to be a “pleasingly tuneful album”
time out, not a lot happens” (“McCartney and which “explicitly evokes the Beatles’ more
Friends,” June 1982, 76). romantic psychedelic music of the late 1960s.”
90 Critics, both those applauding and those Holden found that the arrangements “may even
criticizing the album, agreed that Harrison be an improvement over those on Mr.
largely ignored contemporary music currents. Harrison’s 1970 post-Beatle blockbuster, All
Melody Maker’s Ray Coleman said of Harrison: Things Must Pass.” The Christian Science
“Remaining true to himself and his convictions, Monitor was similarly impressed by “an amiable
he’s produced an album redolent of a more collection of songs . . . [several of which] happily
optimistic, positive period in our history, recall the Beatles” (Amy Duncan, “Soundtakes:
musical and otherwise” (“George Harrison: George Harrison, Cloud Nine,” November 18,
Somewhere in England,” June 6, 1981, 27). The 1987, 21). Rolling Stone’s David Wild called the
New York Times’s Robert Palmer applauded “All album an “expertly crafted, endlessly infectious
Those Years Ago” for being “plainspoken and record” – Harrison’s best since All Things Must
musically effective.” Yet he also criticized Pass. The album was “an especially
Harrison, who “has said most of what he says heartwarming return to form because it suggests
here before, and in more effective songs.” Harrison has come to terms with his own
Further, the “studio players and rock veterans Beatledom . . . Cloud Nine is a totally fab record
who back him sound utterly anonymous and that lives up to the legacy of all those years ago”
interchangeable; Mr. Harrison’s crying guitar is (“‘Cloud Nine,’” December 3, 1987, 80).
the album’s only distinctive instrumental voice, 95 The New York Times’s John Rockwell judged
and there isn’t nearly enough of it” (“Two Icons that Traveling Wilburys: Volume One, “in its
of Rock Music,” May 31, 1981, D23). Rolling buoyant good spirits, clever songwriting and
Stone’s critic concluded a generally negative impassioned singing and playing,” is “as
review of the album with this characterization good-spirited an album as you’re likely to hear
of Harrison: “The most paradoxical of the this year” (“Old Timers Out for a Spin Cut a
ex-Beatles, George Harrison is an enigmatic Couple of Disks,” November 13, 1988, H27).
mixture of exquisite craftsmanship and The Washington Post’s Mike Joyce called the
heavy-handed hack work, touching sincerity album “hard to resist” (“Records: Traveling
and plain disingenuousness. As it stands, Wilburys Vol. 1,” November 16, 1988, D7).
Somewhere in England is neither here nor there” 96 After three years of negotiations between the
(August 6, 1981, 44). surviving Beatles, the Beatle widows, Apple
91 See Robert Palmer, “The Pop Life: Did Corps Ltd., Cirque du Soleil, and the MGM
Ringo Starr Alone Escape Trap of Beatles?,” New Mirage, and after two years of production, The
York Times, November 11, 1981, C26. See also Beatles: Love premiered in June 2006, and
Nicholas Schaffner, “Stop and Smell the Roses,” continues to play in the theater constructed for
Rolling Stone, February 4, 1982, 55, in which the it.
album is judged “altogether innocuous and 97 Harrison’s guest appearances included work
intermittently engaging.” on Jeff Lynne’s 2001 Electric Light Orchestra
92 In addition to a documentary he made album Zoom, as well as a new composition,
about British glam rocker T Rex, Born to Boogie “Horse to the Water,” which appeared on Jools
(1972), he appeared in a number of films of Holland’s Small World, Big Band (2001), and
variable quality, including Frank Zappa’s had been the focus of Harrison’s last recording
surrealist depiction of life on the road with the session, barely two months before his death.
Mothers of Invention, 200 Motels (1971), 98 See Adam Bernstein, “George Harrison
Ferdinando Baldi’s spaghetti western, Blindman Dies, 58, Pushed Fab Four in New Directions,”
(1971), the critical and commercial failure Son Washington Post, December 1, 2001,
of Dracula (1974), and Ken Russell’s Lisztomania A01.
99 See Allan Kozinn, “Music of a Beatle Who similarly ametrical speech-based rhythms in
Never Stopped,” New York Times, November 17, “Happiness is a Warm Gun,” done in a manner
2002, A27. Kozinn called the music “vintage similar to those in “Across the Universe,” of
Harrison” – “Harrison’s trademark slide guitar which Lennon himself has said, “Such an
shines through everywhere . . . This is not a extraordinary meter and I can never repeat it!”
guitarist who retired to the garden.” G. Barry Golson (ed.), John Lennon and Yoko
100 Live collections include Unplugged (1991), Ono: The Final Testament (New York: Berkley
Paul is Live (1993), and Tripping the Live Books, 1981), 202.
Fantastic. 3 Hypermeter, a term coined by Edward T.
101 See Stephen Holden, “Songs of Innocence Cone in Musical Form and Musical Performance
and Experience for the Pop Fan of a Certain (New York: Norton, 1968), in which book it is a
Age,” New York Times, November 28, 1997, E1, central issue, refers to the combinations of
33. measures, the downbeats of which have
102 The divorce was settled in July 2007, with alternately strong and weak accents, so that a
Mills reportedly receiving a settlement of £70 metric pattern, often repeated in a regular way
million. such as four bars plus four bars, exists at levels
103 Reviewing Starr’s follow-up, Vertical Man, greater than that within the bar. Cone’s
the New York Times’s Alann Kozinn, in hypermeter is a refinement of a method of
discussing Starr’s decade-long effort at rhythmic analysis, relating patterns of rhythmic
“rekindling a career,” noted that Time Takes modes to the accents of prosody, developed by
Time “should have done the trick: it was bright, Grosvenor W. Cooper and Leonard B. Meyer in
energetic and pleasantly Beatlesque, but it The Rhythmic Structure of Music (Chicago:
disappeared without hitting the charts” (“Ringo University of Chicago Press, 1956).
Outdistances His Past, Finally,” June 21, 1998, 4 Numbers in parentheses refer to the
AR28). corresponding timings programmed into the
104 Starr recognized that his recording career compact discs.
had hit hard times, telling the New York Times: 5 It should be made clear that because the
“From Goodnight Vienna on, the records were Beatles did not notate their music in any way, all
going downhill . . . It wasn’t the producers’ or determinations as to time signatures in any
the musicians’ fault, but mine. I was just turning discussion or transcription of the Beatles’ music
up, really. I wasn’t involved” (Alann Kozinn, are based solely upon a listener’s interpretation
“Ringo Starr, a 60’s [sic] Relic? Not if He Can of accent and tempo. So whereas the Beatles
Help It,” May 31, 1992, H24). often played “shuffle” rhythms that divided
105 The New York Times’s Alan Kozinn called beats into three parts, they would have been
Vertical Man, with its roster of guests (including unaware that they were playing in 6/8, 9/8, or
Harrison and McCartney, Joe Walsh, Tom Petty, 12/8 meters. And any discussion below as to
Steve Cropper, Brian Wilson, Steven Tyler, Ozzy meters such as 18/8 or 24/8 simply reflects
Osbourne, and Alanis Morisette), “a tightly compound measures that are extended by one
crafted, appealingly upbeat album . . . clearly or more (two, or four, in these two examples)
meant as entertainment rather than innovation” dotted quarter-beats. Not only did the Beatles
(“Ringo Outdistances His Past, Finally,” June 21, not read music, but they only rarely resorted to
1998, AR28). the notation of even the chord changes; they
normally played and sang all of their own parts
10 Any time at all: the Beatles’ free phrase “by memory,” teaching parts to each other via
rhythms “head arrangements.” They often had trouble
1 This essay is based on presentations made in recalling the correct lyrics, and so sometimes
1996 to Music Theory Midwest in Kalamazoo recorded their vocals while reading from their
and to the Society of Music Theory in Baton lyrics.
Rouge. Each song title mentioned in the text is 6 In many 1969 recordings with the Beatles,
followed by an abbreviation in parentheses Harrison routes his amplified guitar signal
indicating the compact disc on which the reader through a Leslie cabinet, characterized by its
may locate the song. Table 10.1 provides rotating horns, originally intended for a
identifying features of these albums. Hammond organ. The rotating speaker
2 These concepts have been well rehearsed, but, produces a Doppler-shifted vibrato along with a
with regard to related topics, I wonder why strong tremolo in dynamics, giving the
interest has not been recorded in the freely sustaining guitar tones an atmospheric,
ametrical introductions to “Drive My Car” and whirring quality. The Telecaster is a solid-body
“Here, There and Everywhere,” or in the Fender guitar known for its metallic tone,
chiefly through its wide use through the 1960s 13 This and following sentences are based upon
in country music. A guitar’s lead pickup is the Schenkerian method, which clarifies the
closest to the bridge, thus having the best relationship between surface and structural
location to amplify the string’s upper partials, levels of harmony and counterpoint. According
for a biting tone that cuts through the texture to this theory, a single melody (in our case the
better than the “rhythm pickup,” closer to the lead vocal line sung by John Lennon) is a
middle of the string for more emphasis composite of several structural voices governed
on the fundamental and warmer lower partials. by stepwise motion: (1) a controlling upper
7 While other arrangements are common, voice, which at its deepest level represents a
phrases usually group themselves into pairs, so stepwise descent from the primary tone (the
that an initial phrase, the antecedent, poses a initiating fifth scale degree, Sol) to the first scale
problem (as by ending with a half cadence) that degree (Do), a descent that is ornamented by
is solved by an “answering” phrase, the neighbors and other material of lesser structural
consequent (which always closes with a more value, and (2) inner voices that may be initiated
conclusive authentic cadence). Such an by members of the upper voice but then descend
arrangement, even if the group contains more below it, and may even, through registral
than a single antecedent or consequent phrase, transfer, place “inner-voice” material up above
is referred to as a period, a standard tonal form the lay of the “upper” voice. Thus, a single
for hundreds of years before it was adopted by melodic part is a polyphonic web, arpeggiating
the Beatles. among several underlying voices. The upper and
8 In usage (chiefly British) pertaining to inner voices are all supported by the bass voice,
classical music, the term “bridge” usually refers which carries most of a passage’s harmonic
to a transition. In popular music, it connotes information. I have written elsewhere about the
instead a section that contrasts with the verses expressive relationships between upper and
and chorus. It frequently begins with a tonicized inner voices in the vocal music of Mozart,
subdominant and often leads to a tonicized Schubert, the Beatles, Billy Joel, and Paul Simon.
dominant, ending with a dissonant, While developed for music from the common
retransitional dominant seventh to prepare the practice period, Schenkerian analysis is quite
return of the following verse. And the term applicable to a great deal of rock and other
“verse” is not synonymous with its use in popular musics, particularly examples, such as
relation to the introductory section of a Tin Pan “I Should Have Known Better,” that reside
Alley number. Instead, the verse of a rock song is completely or mostly within the major-minor
the passage that is repeated numerous times in system. The system is chosen here, at the risk of
between choruses, with different stanzas of its being new to many readers, because of the
lyrics for at least its first two appearances. great musicality it reveals in terms of metric,
9 William Rothstein, Phrase Rhythm in Tonal phrasal, registral, and expressive relationships.
Music (New York: Schirmer, 1989), 80–1. 14 The Moog is a module-based analog
10 Mozart’s frequent dependence upon such a electronic instrument controlled by a keyboard
conclusory extension is the topic of Janet through which voltages are given particular
Schmalfeldt, “Cadential Processes: The Evaded waveshapes, and are filtered and amplified,
Cadence and the ‘One More Time’ Technique,” according to “patches” that lead one circuit to
Journal of Musicological Research 12 (1992), control another at the performer’s discretion.
1–52. Most popular among the English progressive
11 The term “elision” is often used either to rock bands of the 1970s, the Beatles – at George
indicate (1) the simultaneous ending of one Harrison’s instigation – were among the
phrase with the beginning of another, or (2) the pioneers of the Moog in Abbey Road.
absence of some material that is either present 15 For Fred Lerdahl and Ray Jackendoff, a
only hypothetically, or was present in a melodic anacrusis, thus beginning a phrase
previously heard version and is later before the (hypermetric) downbeat, has the
abbreviated. For the sake of clarity, the term grouping out of phase with the (hyper)metrical
“enjambment” will be taken from the study of structure. (Such is the device discussed above in
prosody to indicate here only the first of these regard to the extended example in “There’s a
two meanings, and “elision” will refer only to Place” but also evident on the surface of many
the second. other references, beginning with Example 1.)
12 Oswald Jonas, Introduction to the Theory of See their A Generative Theory of Tonal Music
Heinrich Schenker, trans. and ed. John Rothgeb (Cambridge, MA: MIT Press, 1983), 33–4.
(1934; New York: Longman, 1982), 7–9. Jonas’s Rothstein discusses this phenomenon in Phrase
German term is “Knupftechnik.” Rhythm in Tonal Music, 21–2.
16 In rock music, harmonic rhythm usually 7 Donatella Maraschin, “The Swinging 60s,” in
determines where the barlines fall, as metric London: Summer Living (London: Morris Visitor
patterns are always based on chords changing on Publications, June–July 2006), 29–32.
downbeats (this pattern, once established, is 8 For culturalist Marxist historian Edward
often contradicted later), and because chords Thompson, class remained a product of
tend to change once per measure. For example, nineteenth-century modernity. As Andy Wood
“I Want to Hold Your Hand” opens with a verse observes: “One of the achievements of the
of two four-bar phrases, chords changing for middle-class student revolt of the era [the 1960s]
each of the eight bars. This verse is followed by a was the establishment of social history as a key
four-bar phrase of eight chords, changing twice contender in academic historical writing” (Andy
per measure, thus doubling the harmonic Wood, The Politics of Social Conflict: The Peak
rhythm. Country, 1520–1770 [Cambridge: Cambridge
17 Metric modulation is a term coined by University Press, 1999], 10). See, for example,
Elliott Carter for a type of transition perhaps Edward Thompson, The Making of the English
invented by Alban Berg but favored in his own Working Class (1963; New York: Penguin, 1975).
compositions. The effect is based on durations 9 William M. Northcutt, “The Spectacle of
remaining constant while their context as beat Alienation: Death, Loss, and the Crowd in Sgt.
divisions changes. For example, the eighth notes Pepper’s Lonely Hearts Club Band,” in Kenneth
that in one passage may divide the beat into two Womack and Todd F. Davis (eds.), Reading the
parts may serve as the pivotal connecting tissue Beatles: Cultural Studies, Literary Criticism, and
to another passage where the same eighths, the Fab Four (Albany: State University of New
moving at the same tempo, may be reinterpreted York Press, 2006), 130.
as triplet eighths because beats now contain 10 Problems surrounding racial discrimination
three, not two, of these values. Thus, the continued throughout the 1960s. The passing of
beat-marked tempo is altered significantly the Race Relations Act (1968) had been opposed
(sometimes through a 2:3 or 3:2 ratio, but often by Enoch Powell, Conservative MP for
through much more complex subdivisions) Wolverhampton South West; and his “Rivers of
while submetrical units (such as beat-dividing Blood” speech (April 20, 1968) set out his
eighths) remain constant. premise that unless immigrants were
repatriated, the streets of Britain would come to
11 The Beatles as zeitgeist be “foaming with much blood,” like the River
1 John Lennon’s original skiffle group, the Tiber (an allusion to Virgil’s Aeneid).
Quarrymen, was joined by Paul McCartney in 11 In the minds of most social historians, the
1956 and George Harrison in 1958. The group’s sexual revolution was primarily the product of
name subsequently changed to Moondogs and the 1960s. While acknowledging the earlier rise
eventually the Silver Beetles (in emulation of of Alfred Kinsey, Hugh Hefner, and an
Buddy Holly and the Crickets). Ringo Starr increasingly defiant youth culture, most scholars
finally joined the Beatles in 1962, replacing portray these pre-sixties developments as
drummer Pete Best. precursors of the rapid liberalization of sexual
2 As Mark Abraham estimated in his early behavior that was soon to follow. This is to say,
study, The Teenage Consumer (London: London while most scholars identify a general loosening
Press Exchange, 1959) (since supported by of sexual attitudes during the forties and fifties,
further studies), there was a growth in the real they do not detect a significant upswing in
earnings of unmarried teenagers of 50 percent premarital sexual behavior until the 1960s. See
as compared with 1938. This was double the rate Alan Petigny, “Illegitimacy, Postwar Psychology,
for adult earnings in the same period. Most and the Reperiodization of the Sexual
significant was the proportion of uncommitted Revolution,” Journal of Social History 38/1
or “discretionary” spending money available – (2004), p.1.
calculated to be about £900 million. 12 John Lennon married Cynthia Powell on
3 UKTV History, The 60s: The Beatles Decade, August 23, 1962. He later said he married
program 1. Cynthia because she was pregnant with his child
4 Russell Reising, “Every Sound There Is”: The (Julian) and he felt it was the right thing to do.
Beatles’ Revolver and the Transformation of Rock 13 UKTV History, The 60s: The Beatles Decade,
and Roll (Aldershot: Ashgate, 2002), p. 6. program 5.
5 John Lennon’s band, the Quarrymen, being 14 Benjamin McLane Spock (1903–98), an
one such example. American pediatrician, published The Common
6 UKTV History, The 60s: The Beatles Decade, Sense Book of Baby and Child Care in 1946. His
program 1. approach to childcare influenced several
generations of parents to be more flexible and and its Youthful Opposition (New York: Faber &
affectionate toward their children, and to treat Faber, 1971).
them as individuals, rather than focusing on 22 Roy Jenkins was also responsible for the
discipline. abolition of theater censorship. As Home
15 The Kinsey Reports are two books on Secretary he had given government support to
human sexual behavior, Sexual Behavior in the David Steel’s Private Member’s Bill for the
Human Male (1948) and Sexual Behavior in the legalization of abortion, and Leo Abse’s Bill for
Human Female (1953), by Dr. Alfred C. Kinsey, the decriminalization of homosexuality.
Wardell B. Pomeroy, and others. Kinsey was a 23 Polly Toynbee in the Guardian, July 21, 2004,
zoologist at Indiana University and the founder at www.guardian.co.uk/politics/2004/jul/21/
of the Institute for Sex Research. The findings labour.politicalcolumnists (accessed May 28,
challenged conventional beliefs about sexuality 2009).
and discussed subjects that had previously been 24 The US involvement in Vietnam goes back
taboo, including masturbation, the female to the 1950s, but President J. F. Kennedy’s 1961
orgasm, homosexuality, and sadomasochism. dispatch of 400 Special Operations
16 In 1965 the Labour MP Sydney Silverman, Forces-trained (Green Beret) soldiers to teach
who had committed himself to the cause of the South Vietnamese how to fight what was
abolition for more than twenty years, proposed called counter-insurgency war against
a Private Member’s Bill on abolition which was Communist guerrillas in South Vietnam
passed on a free vote in the House of Commons provides one starting date. When Kennedy was
by 200 votes to 98. (A free vote, traditional for assassinated in November 1963, there were more
issues of conscience such as abortion and than 16,000 US military advisers in South
capital punishment, is one in which the party Vietnam, and more than 100 Americans had
whips do not issue directions to MPs.) It was been killed. Kennedy’s successor, Lyndon B.
subsequently adopted by the House of Lords by Johnson, committed the United States most
204 to 104 against. fully to the war. In August 1964, he secured from
17 The Abortion Act (1967) regulates abortion Congress a functional (not actual) declaration
by registered practitioners and provides free of war: the Tonkin Gulf Resolution. Then, in
medical aid through the National Health February and March 1965, Johnson authorized
Service. It was introduced by David Steel as a the sustained bombing, by US aircraft, of targets
Private Member’s Bill backed by the north of the 17th Parallel, and on March 8 he
government, and after a heated debate and a free dispatched 3,500 Marines to South Vietnam.
vote passed on October 27, 1967. It came into Legal declaration or no, the United States was
effect on April 27, 1968. now at war (John Whiteclay (ed.), The Oxford
18 A. S. Byatt, Babel Tower (London: Vintage, Companion to American Military History
1997), 168. [Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1999]).
19 Angela McRobbie, “Jackie Magazine: 25 These included Alice Herz, an
Romantic Individualism and the Teenage Girl,” eighty-two-year-old survivor of Nazi terror, who
in Angela McRobbie, Feminism and Youth set herself on fire in Detroit shortly after
Culture (London: Macmillan, 1991), 135–88 President Johnson announced major troop
(first published as “Jackie: An Ideology of increases and the bombing of North Vietnam
Adolescent Femininity,” Stencilled Occasional (March 15, 1965); Quaker Norman Morrison,
Paper 53, Women’s Series [Birmingham: Centre setting himself on fire and dying outside
for Contemporary Cultural Studies, 1978]). Secretary of Defense Robert McNamara’s
20 Betty Friedan’s 1963 book The Feminine Pentagon office (November 2, 1965); and
Mystique challenged the view that women can Catholic worker Roger Laporte, self-immolating
find satisfaction in the exclusively traditional opposite the United Nations Building.
role of wife and mother; radical feminists 26 Their 1966 album Revolver is now
identified patriarchy – as a system characterized interpreted as transforming the vocabulary of
by power, dominance, hierarchy, and popular music, with “Tomorrow Never Knows”
competition – as both universal and oppressive, topping the list of British psychedelia (Jon
while the emerging women’s movement of the Savage, “100 Greatest Psychedelic Classics,”
late 1960s identified sisterhood as a cohesive MOJO 43 [June 1997], 61), attempting to
revolutionary force for developing self-identity. “recreate what tripping actually sounds like”
Spare Rib, Women’s Voice, Women’s Report, and (Russell Reising, “Every Sound There Is”: The
the Red Flag provided communication networks. Beatles’ Revolver and the Transformation of
21 Theodor Roszak, The Making of a Counter Rock and Roll [Aldershot: Ashgate, 2002],
Culture: Reflections on the Technocratic Society 235).
27 In 1966–7 the Beatles retreated into Images of Elvis Presley in American Culture,
Hinduism and Transcendental Meditation, 1977–1997: The Mystery Terrain (New York:
adopting the Maharishi Mahesh Yogi as spiritual Haworth Press, 1997); G. L. Reece, Elvis Religion:
guide; and they all admitted that they had taken The Cult of the King (London and New York:
drugs – including LSD. George Harrison Tauris, 2006); and G. B. Rodman, Elvis After
remained a Hindu throughout his life, donating Elvis: The Posthumous Career of a Living Legend
a manor house in Watford, UK, to the Krishna (London and New York: Routledge, 1996).
movement. 2 This proposal was mentioned by Paul
28 Allen Ginsberg in It Was Twenty Years Ago McCartney on camera in The Beatles Anthology
Today, directed by John Sheppard for Granada TV special in 1995.
Television, UK, 1987. 3 See Gary Burns, “Refab Four: Beatles for Sale
29 Steve Turner, A Hard Day’s Write: The in the Age of Music Video,” in Ian Inglis (ed.),
Stories Behind Every Beatles Song (New York: The Beatles, Popular Music and Society: A
HarperCollins, 1999; London: Carlton, 2000), Thousand Voices (Basingstoke: Macmillan,
144. 2000), 176–88.
30 Peter McCabe and Robert D. Schonfeld, 4 Jon Wiener, “The Last Lennon File,” The
Apple to the Core: The Unmaking of the Beatles Nation, January 8–15, 2007, 4; see also his
(New York: Pocket Books, 1972), 86–7. Gimme Some Truth: The John Lennon FBI Files
31 By 1967, after 300 tours worldwide, the (Berkeley: University of California Press, 1999).
Beatles withdrew from public performances and 5 Ian Inglis, The Beatles, Popular Music, and
engaged totally with studio production. Society, “Introduction,” xv.
32 Timothy Leary, cited in Charlie Gillett, The 6 An amusing and very grumpy critique of
Sound of the City (London: Souvenir Press, Beatles reissues and pseudo-reunions appears in
1970), 353. J. Lewis, “‘Over My Dead Body!,’” Uncut (May
33 Their seven-bedroom house in Weybridge 2007), 75.
had cost John Lennon £20,000, but was on the 7 See also Lennon’s posthumously published
market in 2006 for £5.95 million. John and Yoko Skywriting by Word of Mouth and Other
recorded their album Two Virgins there in May Writings, Including The Ballad of John and Yoko
1968. It was released in November that year. (New York: Harper & Row, 1986).
34 Apple Records was launched in 1968 with 8 Yellow Submarine is an animated film in
Ron Kass as Managing Director, Peter Asher as which the Beatles are represented visually as
the company A&R (artists and repertoire) cartoon figures. On the soundtrack we hear
person, and Tony Bramwell in charge of actual Beatles records, but during dialog
promoting the products. Apple advertisements segments the Beatles’ lines are spoken by voice
and posters announced the venture and asked actors rather than by the Beatles themselves.
for tapes to review, but very few artists were This idiosyncratic approach was borrowed from
signed as a result. Most who were signed owed the 1964–7 TV cartoon series The Beatles, which
their success to personal preferences of the was innovative in its own right but not an
directors. The first artist signed to this label was artistic achievement in the same league as Yellow
James Taylor. Badfinger was a true success story Submarine. See Mitchell Axelrod, BeatleToons:
for Apple Records. Mary Hopkin, James Taylor, The Real Story Behind the Cartoon Beatles
and Billy Preston had their moments in the sun. (Pickens, SC: Wynn Publishing, 1999); “The
Of course, the Beatles and their solo Apple Beatles,” Television Chronicles 3 (1995), 8–15;
Records faired well, but Apple Records received P. Gorman, “Badly Drawn Boys,” MOJO (July
only two non-Beatles gold record awards (Mary 2000), 20–1; Robert R. Hieronimus, Inside the
Hopkin, “Those Were the Days,” and Badfinger, Yellow Submarine: The Making of the Beatles’
“Come and Get It”). Apple Records lasted from Animated Classic, editing and compilation
August 1968 through May 1976. assistance by Laura Cortner (Iola, WI: Krause
35 Carey Schofield, Jagger (London: Methuen, Publications, 2002).
1983), 130. 9 See Gary Burns, “The Myth of the Beatles,”
South Atlantic Quarterly 86 (1987), 169–80; T.
12 Beatles news: product line extensions and Wolfe, “The ‘Me’ Decade and the Third Great
the rock canon Awakening,” New York, August 23, 1976, 26–40;
1 There are several books on this subject, Christopher Lasch, The Culture of Narcissism:
including Gail Brewer-Giorgio, Is Elvis Alive? American Life in an Age of Diminishing
(New York: Tudor, 1988; Greil Marcus, Dead Expectations (New York: Norton, 1978); R. D.
Elvis: A Chronicle of a Cultural Obsession (New Rosen, Psychobabble: Fast Talk and Quick Cure in
York: Doubleday, 1991); George Plasketes, the Era of Feeling (New York: Atheneum, 1977);
and Theodor Roszak, The Making of a Counter 20 Paul McCartney, Blackbird Singing: Poems
Culture: Reflections on the Technocratic Society and Lyrics 1965–1999, ed. A. Mitchell (New
and its Youthful Opposition (Garden City, NY: York: Norton, 2001).
Doubleday, 1969). 21 Paul McCartney, Geoff Dunbar, and Philip
10 See Stefan Granados, Those Were the Days: Ardagh, High in the Clouds (New York: Dutton
An Unofficial History of the Beatles Apple Children’s Books, 2005). McCartney has also
Organization 1967–2002 (London: Cherry Red published a book (Paintings [Boston: Little,
Books, 2002). Brown, 2000]) that consists mainly of
11 “Method in Their Fabness,” MOJO, May photographic reproductions of his paintings.
2007, 14. This is not, strictly speaking, a literary venture,
12 See Inglis, The Beatles, Popular Music, and but is perhaps relevant because it is a book.
Society. 22 Alan West and Colin Martindale, “Creative
13 See Jon Wiener, Come Together: John Lennon Trends in the Content of Beatles Lyrics,”
in His Time (New York: Random House, 1984). Popular Music and Society 20/4 (1996),
14 See Donald Alport Bird, Stephen C. Holder, 103–25.
and Diane Sears, “Walrus Is Greek for Corpse: 23 Simon Frith and Howard Horne, Art Into
Rumor and the Death of Paul McCartney,” Pop (London and New York: Methuen, 1987).
Journal of Popular Culture 10 (1976), 110–21; 24 “What Songs the Beatles Sang . . . ,” The
Burns, “The Myth of the Beatles”; R. Gary Times, December 27, 1963, Arts section, 4
Patterson, “The Walrus Was Paul”: The Great (uncredited article “From Our Music Critic,”
Beatle Death Clues of 1969 (Oak Ridge, TN: who was William Mann).
Excursion Productions and Publications, 1994); 25 Other examples include “All My Loving”
A. J. Reeve, Turn Me On, Dead Man: The and “It’s Only Love.”
Complete Story of the Paul McCartney Death 26 As Walter Everett points out, Arthur
Hoax (Ann Arbor, MI: Popular Culture Ink, Alexander’s song “Anna (Go to Him),” which
1994); and Barbara Suczek, “The Curious Case the Beatles had recorded, was a “likely model”
of the ‘Death’ of Paul McCartney,” Urban Life for “Not a Second Time” (The Beatles as
and Culture 1 (1972), 61–76. Musicians: The Quarry Men Through Rubber
15 See Vic Garbarini, Brian Cullman, and Soul [New York: Oxford University Press, 2001],
Barbara Graustark, Strawberry Fields Forever: 192). And to The Times critic’s comparison of
John Lennon Remembered (New York: Bantam “Not a Second Time” with Mahler’s Das Lied
Books, 1980); Fenton Bresler, The Murder of von der Erde, Everett responds: “Good grief! It’s
John Lennon (London: Sidgwick & Jackson, ‘Mama Said’ or ‘When My Little Girl Is Smiling,’
1989); Fred Fogo, “I Read the News Today”: The not Mahler” (ibid., 392).
Social Drama of John Lennon’s Death (Lanham, 27 The Beatles Complete Scores (Milwaukee: Hal
MD: Rowman & Littlefield, 1994); and Anthony Leonard Corporation, 1989).
Elliott, The Mourning of John Lennon (Berkeley: 28 Wilfrid Mellers, Twilight of the Gods: The
University of California Press, 1999); see also Beatles in Retrospect (London: Faber & Faber,
Jack Jones, Let Me Take You Down: Inside the 1973).
Mind of Mark David Chapman, the Man Who 29 T. J. O’Grady, The Beatles: A Musical
Killed John Lennon (New York: Villard Books, Evolution (Boston: Twayne, 1983).
1992). 30 Tim Riley, Tell Me Why: A Beatles
16 James Sauceda, The Literary Lennon: A Commentary (New York: Knopf, 1988; Vintage,
Comedy of Letters – The First Study of All the 1989), revised as Tell Me Why: The Beatles –
Major and Minor Writings of John Lennon (Ann Album by Album, Song by Song, the Sixties and
Arbor, MI: Pierian Press, 1983). See also M. E. After (Cambridge, MA: Da Capo, 2002).
Roos, “The Walrus and the Deacon: John 31 William J. Dowlding, Beatlesongs (New York:
Lennon’s Debt to Lewis Carroll,” Journal of Fireside, 1989).
Popular Culture 18.1 (1984), 19–29, for a 32 Ian MacDonald, Revolution in the Head: The
primarily literary analysis. Beatles’ Records and the Sixties (London: Fourth
17 David R. Pichaske (ed.), Beowulf to Beatles: Estate; New York: Henry Holt, 1994).
Approaches to Poetry (New York: Free Press, 33 Mark Hertsgaard, A Day in the Life: The
1972). Music and Artistry of the Beatles (New York:
18 David R. Pichaske, The Poetry of Rock: The Delacorte, 1995).
Golden Years (Peoria, IL: Ellis Press, 1981). 34 Alan W. Pollack, “Notes on . . . ” series of
19 An example is Alan Aldridge (ed.), The online analyses of Beatles songs, the “Official”
Beatles Illustrated Lyrics (London: Macdonald, rec.music.beatles home page (1989–2001), at
1969). www.recmusicbeatles.com.
35 Everett, The Beatles as Musicians: The 42 Bradby, “She Told Me What to Say.”
Quarry Men Through Rubber Soul, and The 43 Ibid., 359.
Beatles as Musicians: Revolver Through the 44 Ibid., 371.
Anthology (New York: Oxford University Press,
1999). See also Todd Compton’s article in the 13 “An abstraction, like Christmas”: the
Journal of Popular Culture, a painstaking Beatles for sale and for keeps
attempt to determine which Beatle made what I would like to thank the following individuals:
authorial contribution to every Beatles song. research assistant Steve Gibons, who did
And see Kenneth Womack and Todd F. Davis’s translations from French; George Healey, Linda
collection, Reading the Beatles: Cultural Studies, Healey, and Jim Kimsey, who helped in
Literary Criticism, and the Fab Four (Albany: gathering materials; and Reg Gant, Maureen
State University of New York Press, 2006), for Hennessey, and Carol Kimsey, who got me to
excellent analyses of the Beatles as canonical the show on time.
figures in each of the three realms under 1 Derek Taylor, liner notes, Beatles for Sale CD,
consideration in the present study – 1987 (original 1964).
sociological, lyrical, and musical. 2 “Year 2000 Annual Review,” online posting,
36 Revolver: Russell Reising, “Every Sound www.cyber-beatles.com/year2000.htm (accessed
There Is”: The Beatles’ Revolver and the May 21, 2009).
Transformation of Rock and Roll (Aldershot: 3 “Beatles named ‘icons of the century,’” BBC
Ashgate, 2002); Sgt. Pepper: George Martin, with News website, October 16, 2005, at
William Pearson, Summer of Love: The Making http://news.bbc.co.uk/go/pr/fr//2/hi/
of Sgt. Pepper (London: Macmillan, 1994); Allan entertainment/4344910.stm (accessed April 28,
F. Moore, The Beatles: Sgt. Pepper’s Lonely 2007).
Hearts Club Band (Cambridge: Cambridge 4 Robert Cording, Shelli Jankowski-Smith, and
University Press, 1997); The Beatles (the White E. J. Miller Laino (eds.), In My Life: Encounters
Album): David Quantick, Revolution: The with the Beatles (New York: Fromm
Making of the Beatles’ White Album (London: International, 1998), “Introduction,” n.p.
Unanimous; Chicago: A Cappella, 2002); Peter 5 Mark Hertsgaard, A Day in the Life: The
Doggett, Let It Be / Abbey Road (New York: Music and Artistry of the Beatles (New York:
Schirmer; London: Prentice Hall International, Delta, 1995), 318.
1998); and Steve Matteo, Let It Be (New York 6 Greil Marcus, “The Beatles,” in Jim Miller
and London: Continuum, 2004). (ed.), The Rolling Stone Illustrated History of
37 A. J. W. Taylor, “Beatlemania – A Study in Rock and Roll, rev. and updated edn. (New York:
Adolescent Enthusiasm,” British Journal of Random House, 1980; London: Picador, 1981),
Social and Clinical Psychology 5 (1966), 184.
81–8. 7 Ian MacDonald, Revolution in the Head: The
38 Evan Davis, “Psychological Characteristics Beatles’ Records and the Sixties, fully updated
of Beatle Mania,” Journal of the History of Ideas edn. (London: Pimlico, 1998), 328.
30 (1969), 273–80. 8 Ken Townsend, “Preface” to Mark Lewisohn,
39 L. P. R. Santiago, “The Lyrical Expression of The Complete Beatles Recording Sessions: The
Adolescent Conflict in the Beatles’ Songs,” Official Story of the Abbey Road Years (London:
Adolescence 4 (1969), 199–210. Hamlyn, 1988), 4. Regarding “definitive”
40 Larry R. Smith, “The Beatles as Act: A Study accounts of the Beatles’ recording history and
of Control in a Musical Group,” PhD thesis, practices, Lewisohn’s book has now been
University of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign supplanted by Kevin Ryan and Brian Keyhew,
(1970). Recording the Beatles: The Studio Equipment and
41 Geoffrey Marshall, “Taking the Beatles Techniques Used to Create Their Classic Albums
Seriously: Problems of Text,” Journal of Popular (Houston: Curvebender, 2006).
Culture 3 (1969), 28–34; N. V. Rosenberg, 9 Evan Eisenberg, “Phonography,” in The
“Taking Popular Culture Seriously: The Recording Angel: The Experience of Music from
Beatles,” Journal of Popular Culture 4 (1970), Aristotle to Zappa (New York: Penguin, 1987),
53–6; G. W. Lyon, Jr., “More on Beatles Textual 158–9.
Problems,” Journal of Popular Culture 4 (1970), 10 Hertsgaard, A Day in the Life, 324.
549–52; R. A. Peterson, “Taking Popular Music 11 Walter Everett, The Beatles as Musicians:
Too Seriously,” Journal of Popular Culture 4 Revolver through the Anthology (New York:
(1971), 590–4; see also Henry Pleasants, “Taking Oxford University Press, 1999), 295.
the Beatles Seriously,” Stereo Review (November 12 John Storey, “The Politics of the Popular,” in
1967), 52–4. An Introductory Guide to Cultural Theory and
Popular Culture (Athens, GA: University of Martin, Emerick, and the Beatles all agree that
Georgia Press, 1993), 199. the mono (as opposed to stereo) mix is the one
13 Simon Frith, “Introduction: Everything into which the team put its greatest effort.
Counts,” in his Music for Pleasure: Essays in the 21 These audiophile vinyl editions of the
Sociology of Pop (New York: Routledge, 1988), 6. Beatles’ LPs, made by Mobile Fidelity Sound Lab
14 While he remastered all the Parlophone LPs from original masters, have been out of print for
during the mid-eighties, Martin went a step many years.
further with both Help! and Rubber Soul. Citing 22 Brown, “Beatles fans kept waiting”; see also
dissatisfaction with the original mixes, he Alex Petridis, “The Beatles, Love,” Guardian,
actually remixed these two 1965 LPs. See Ryan November 17, 2006, at http://arts.guardian.
and Keyhew, Recording the Beatles, 402. co.uk/film-andmusic/story/0,,1949254,00.html
15 An exception was made in the case of (accessed November 17, 2006).
Magical Mystery Tour, a record that originally 23 Ryan and Keyhew, Recording the Beatles, 407.
appeared as a six-song EP on Parlophone in the 24 Quoted in Geoffrey Guiliano, Two of Us:
UK. The CD version of Magical Mystery Tour John Lennon and Paul McCartney Behind the
mirrored the 1967 Capitol/US release, which Myth (New York: Penguin, 1999), 64. See also
added singles such as “Penny Lane” and Philip Lambert, Inside the Music of Brian Wilson
“Strawberry Fields Forever” to the Parlophone (New York: Continuum, 2007), 224.
EP lineup to form an eleven-song LP. Also, it 25 MacDonald, Revolution in the Head, 331.
should be noted that, during the same See also Allan Kozinn, “A high-wire feat for
mid-eighties period, the soundtrack of Yellow Beatles music,” International Herald Tribune,
Submarine was remastered and released on CD June 23, 2006, at www.iht.com/-articles/2006/
along with the twelve “official” albums. 06/23/news/beatles.php (accessed June 24,
16 During the period 1973–82, several LP 2006).
compilations of Beatles music were released: the 26 Quoted in Kevin Howlett, “The Beatles’
double albums The Beatles 1962–1966 and The Radio Sessions 1962–65,” in CD booklet, The
Beatles 1967–1970 (a.k.a. the “red” and “blue” Beatles Live at the BBC (Apple, 1994), 7.
albums) both appeared on Apple in 1973, while 27 MacDonald, Revolution in the Head, 335.
in ensuing years Capitol released Rock and Roll 28 The Beatles had been inducted as a band at
Music (1976), Love Songs (1977), Rarities the Rock Hall’s inaugural ceremony in 1988;
(1980), Reel Music (1982), and 20 Greatest Hits McCartney and Harrison waited, respectively,
(1982). In addition, Capitol released a live until 1999 and 2004 to be inducted as solo
album, The Beatles at the Hollywood Bowl, in artists.
1977. Of all these, only The Beatles 1962–1966 29 MacDonald, Revolution in the Head, 330.
and The Beatles 1967–1970 have been officially 30 The CD single releases were called
released on CD, and they appeared in 1993. maxi-singles and configured like EPs of old: the
17 MacDonald, Revolution in the Head, 201. first led off with “Free as a Bird” and followed it
According to this UK custom, “anything issued with three tracks of outtakes from the period
as a single could not be included in an LP covered by Anthology 1. The second led with
released in the same year” (201). The Beatles “Real Love” and followed it with three tracks of
observed this rule strictly except in the case of outtakes from the period covered by Anthology
their first Parlophone LP, Please Please Me, 2.
which included four songs previously released as 31 This third song is sometimes referred to by
singles. the title “Now and Then.” Scattered news items
18 The Capitol version of Revolver provides a during 2006–7 reported that McCartney and
striking illustration. It contains three fewer Starr had returned to working on “Now and
tracks than its Parlophone counterpart, all of Then” with a plan to incorporate “archive
them Lennon songs, a serious misrepresentation tracks” featuring Harrison. See, for example,
of Lennon’s contribution to the album many “Unheard Beatles ‘last great song’ set for
consider the Beatles’ finest. release,” Webindia.com, April 30, 2007, at http://
19 Mark Brown, “Beatles fans kept waiting on news.webindia123.com (accessed May 1, 2007).
remasters,” March 18, 2006, Rocky Mountain 32 Tim Riley, Tell Me Why: The Beatles – Album
News, at www.rockymountainnews.com/drmn/ by Album, Song by Song, the Sixties and After
spotlight columnists/article/0,2777,DRMN (Cambridge, MA: Da Capo, 2002), 406;
23962 4475849,00.html (accessed March 20, MacDonald, Revolution in the Head, 332.
2006). 33 King Crimson in concert, Rosemont
20 The mono mix of Sgt. Pepper has never been Theatre, Rosemont, Illinois, November 29, 1995.
officially released in CD form even though 34 MacDonald, Revolution in the Head, 170.
35 Mark Lewisohn, liner notes, The Beatles 54 Keir Keightley, “Reconsidering Rock,” in
Anthology Volume 2, CD (Apple Corps Ltd. / Simon Frith, Will Straw, and John Street (eds.),
EMI Ltd., 1996), 19. The Cambridge Companion to Pop and Rock
36 Barry Miles, Paul McCartney: Many Years (Cambridge and New York: Cambridge
From Now (New York: Henry Holt, 1997), University Press, 2001), 109–42, 117.
291–2; Geoff Emerick and Howard Massey, 55 Miles, Many Years From Now, x.
Here, There, and Everywhere: My Life Recording 56 Keightley, “Reconsidering Rock,” 136.
the Beatles (New York: Gotham Books, 2006), 57 George Martin, with William Pearson,
111–12. McCartney oversaw the selection of Summer of Love: The Making of Sgt. Pepper
music for the Anthology. (London: Pan Books, 1995), 137–8.
37 The DVD boxed set appeared in 2003. The 58 MacDonald, Revolution in the Head, 153.
Anthology film had previously been available in 59 Emerick and Massey, Here, There, and
VHS and laser disc formats. Everywhere, 43.
38 As an Apple executive, Aspinall always 60 Ibid., 98.
eschewed formal titles. 61 The Beatles Anthology (San Francisco:
39 MacDonald, Revolution in the Head, 331. Chronicle Books, 2000), 319.
40 Todd Leopold, “Ladies and gentlemen, the 62 Ibid., 323.
Beatles! – in their own words,” CNN, October 5, 63 Quoted in Kevin Howlett, liner notes, Let It
2000, at http://archives.cnn.com/2000/books/ Be . . . Naked, CD booklet (Apple Corps Ltd. /
news/10/05/beatles.anthology (accessed May 15, EMI Records Ltd., 2003), n.p.
2007). 64 Ibid.
41 MacDonald, Revolution in the Head, 334. 65 The term “museum politics” comes from the
42 It Was Twenty Years Ago Today, film, directed writing of political scientist Timothy Luke. See
by John Sheppard (Granada Television, UK, his Museum Politics: Power Plays at the
1987). Exhibition (Minneapolis: University of
43 The Beatles Anthology, DVD boxed set Minneapolis Press, 2002).
(Apple, 2003), “Episode 8: Abbey Road.” 66 Quoted in “John Lennon’s widow calls for
44 Ibid. healing,” USA Today, November 26, 2006, at
45 Much of the discussion in this section draws www.usatoday.com/life/people/2006–11-26-
on John Kimsey, “Spinning the Historical ono x.htm (accessed November 28,
Record: Lennon, McCartney, and Museum 2006).
Politics,” in Ken Womack and Todd F. Davis 67 “Artists unite in donating tracks to ‘Instant
(eds.), Reading the Beatles: Cultural Studies, Karma: The Amnesty International Campaign
Literary Criticism and the Fab Four (Albany: to Save Darfur,’ to be released by Warner Bros.
State University of New York Press, 2006), Records June 12,” Market Wire News, April 30,
197–213. 2007, at www.marketwire.com/mw/release
46 “Paul McCartney defends songwriting credit (accessed May 6, 2007).
switch,” AP Wire, December 18, 2002, at 68 “Lennon’s piano to make peace tour,” BBC
www.salon.com/wire/2002/12/18/mccartney News website, April 3, 2007, at
(accessed December 19, 2002). http://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/entertainment/
47 Terry Gross, interview with Paul McCartney, 6521055.stm (accessed May 26, 2007).
Fresh Air, National Public Radio, WHYY, 69 David Sheff, All We Are Saying: The Last
Philadelphia, April 30, 2001. Major Interview with John Lennon and Yoko Ono,
48 Larry King, “Paul McCartney Discusses ed. G. Barry Golson (New York: St. Martins,
‘Blackbird Singing,’” interview, Larry King Live, 2000), 216; see also John and Yoko’s Year of Peace,
CNN, New York, June 12, 2001. film, directed by Paul McGrath (Canadian
49 Hunter Davies, The Beatles, 2nd rev. edn. Broadcasting Corporation, 2000).
(New York: Norton, 1996), 368. 70 Ono, quoted in “Artists unite in donating
50 Anthony Elliott, The Mourning of John tracks to ‘Instant Karma.’”
Lennon (Berkeley: University of California Press, 71 “Controversial Lennon film is axed,”
1999), 1, 4. Metro.co.uk, February 21, 2007, at
51 King, “Paul McCartney Discusses ‘Blackbird www.metro.co.uk/fame/article.html?in article
Singing.’” id=38284-&in page id=7&in a source
52 Miles, Paul McCartney, x. (accessed February 22, 2007).
53 Jann Wenner, Lennon Remembers: The 72 John Scheinfeld, “In Bed with Yoko Ono,”
Rolling Stone Interviews (1971; New York: Guardian Unlimited Arts Blog, December 7,
Verso, 2000), x. 2007, http://blogs.guardian.co.uk/film/2006/12/
in bed with yoko ono.html (accessed 94 Ibid., 9.

December 7, 2006). 95 “Avant-garde is . . . ”: quoted in Sean
73 Sheff, All We Are Saying, 216. O’Hagan, “Macca beyond,” Observer,
74 Ibid., 96. September 18, 2005, at http://observer.guardian.
75 Kimsey, “Spinning the Historical Record,” co.uk/omm/story/0,1569834,00.html (accessed
202. My discussion throughout this section May 28, 2007).
draws closely on this 2006 essay. For a more 96 “Material World Foundation,” George
detailed discussion of the Lennon exhibit, the Harrison.com, n.d., at
reader is referred to that piece. www.georgeharrison.com/mwf (accessed April
76 Marsha Ewing, “John Lennon: his life and 16, 2007). Over the years, McCartney and Starr
work – shaking up the house that rock built,” have also been strong on charitable work, Starr
Instant Karma, October 21, 2000, at as founder of the Lotus Foundation, McCartney
www.instantkarma.com/jolrockhallstory1.html as supporter of the Adopt a Minefield campaign
(accessed November 3, 2002); quoted in Kimsey, and People for the Ethical Treatment of
“Spinning the Historical Record,” 203. Animals, among other groups.
77 James Henk (ed.), Lennon: His Life and Work 97 Philip Glass, “George Harrison,
(Cleveland, OH: Rock and Roll Hall of Fame World-Music Catalyst and Great-Souled Man:
and Museum, 2000), 101. Open to the Influence of Unfamiliar Cultures,”
78 Ibid., 98. New York Times, December 9, 2001, Section 2,
79 Ibid., 9. 33.
80 Kimsey, “Spinning the Historical Record,” 98 “It’s big-top Beatles, by George,” June 30,
209. 2006, Sydney Morning Herald,
81 Henke (ed.), Lennon: His Life and Work, 98. www.smh.com.au/news/arts/its-bigtop-beatles-
82 Sheff, All We Are Saying, 178. by-george/2006/06/29/1151174333873.html
83 Quoted in Miles, Many Years From Now, (accessed May 21, 2009).
277. It should be noted that McCartney has no 99 Guy Laliberté, dedicatory remarks, The
history of prevaricating about such matters. Beatles Love / Cirque du Soleil program, 2006,
84 MacDonald, Revolution in the Head, 151. n.p.
85 Everett, The Beatles as Musicians: Revolver 100 “It’s big-top Beatles, by George.”
through the Anthology, 319. 101 Tom Doyle, “Love Story: George and Giles
86 Kimsey, “Spinning the Historical Record,” Martin Remixing the Beatles,” Sound on Sound
208. 22/5 (March 2007), 152–7, 157.
87 Everett, The Beatles as Musicians: Revolver 102 Olivia Harrison, quoted in Ann Powers,
through the Anthology, 320. “Fab foray by Cirque du Soleil,” Los Angeles
88 Kimsey, “Spinning the Historical Record,” Times Calendarlive.com, June 30, 2006, at
206. www.calendarlive.com (accessed June 30, 2006).
89 Eileen Hooper-Greenhill, Museums and the 103 Doyle, “Love Story,” 157.
Interpretation of Visual Culture (New York: 104 Jasper Rees, “The Beatles as never before,”
Routledge, 2000), 151; quoted in Kimsey, Daily Telegraph, October 25, 2006, at
“Spinning the Historical Record,” 206. www.telegraph.co.uk (accessed October 26,
90 Luke, Museum Politics, xxiv; quoted in 2006). The one exception is “While My Guitar
Kimsey, “Spinning the Historical Record,” 205. Gently Weeps,” where George Martin, working
91 Diana Plater, “Yes, Yoko Ono approves,” at the request of Olivia Harrison, composed a
news.com.au, n.d., at www.news.com.au/ string part to accompany her husband’s acoustic
travel/story/0,23483,21491474–27983,00.html demo, the same one featured on Anthology 3.
(accessed April 3, 2007). 105 Quoted in Doyle, “Love Story,” 153.
92 Laurent Bayle, “Preface” to John Lennon: 106 Ibid., 154.
Unfinished Music, Musée de la Musique, 20 107 Ibid.
Octobre 2005–25 Juin 2006 (Paris: Cité de la 108 Ibid., 153; “far out”: see Dan Cairns, “The
Musique, 2005), 7. All translations from French next big thing will be Beatlemania,” Times
in this chapter were done by my research Online, June 4, 2006, at
assistant Steve Gibons. http://entertainment.timesonline.co.uk/tol/
93 Quoted in Emma Lavigne, “John Lennon: arts and entertainment/articles670037.ece
Unfinished Music, Une Exposition Inachevée,” (accessed June 4, 2006).
John Lennon: Unfinished Music, Musée de la 109 The Yellow Submarine Songtrack, released
Musique, 20 Octobre 2005–25 Juin 2006 (Paris: in 1999, was the first Beatles release to feature
Cité de la Musique, 2005), 9–12, 9. 5.1 surround sound mixes.
110 Pete Townshend, “I Know That It’s a music/news/2007/04/emibeatles 0403 (accessed

Dream,” MOJO Special Edition: John Lennon May 29, 2007).
(Winter 2000), 146. 124 Quoted in Brian Garrity, “Exclusive:
111 Cairns, “The next big thing”; see also Pete McCartney Goes Digital, Beatles ‘Virtually
Paphides, “Beatles and mash with the fifth Fab,” Settled,’” Billboard, May 10, 2007, at
Times Online, November 17, 2006, at www.billboard.com/bbcom/news/article
http://entertainment.times-online.co.uk display.jsp?vnu content id=1003583922
(accessed November 18, 2006). See also Petridis, (accessed May 11, 2007).
“The Beatles: Love.” 125 On March 24, 2008, less than a year after
112 Mark Caro, “Yesterday . . . and Today – stepping down from his position as head of
Why We Still Love it When the Beatles Turn Us Apple, Neil Aspinall died of lung cancer. He was
On,” Chicago Tribune, February 11, 2007, Arts sixty-six. See Richard Williams, “Obituary: Neil
and Entertainment, 1. Aspinall,” Guardian, April 25, 2008,
113 “Grey Tuesday: Free the Grey Album,” Grey www.guardian.co.uk/music/2008/mar/25/
Tuesday, February 24, 2004, at uk.obituaries (accessed April 26, 2008).
www.greytuesday.org (accessed April 14, 2007). 126 Quoted in Fiona Cummins, “Mad Apple:
114 Quoted in Chris Goodman, “Beatles take Exclusive – Fifth Beatle quits in row with
bigger bite out of Apple,” Daily Express, April ‘money-crazy’ board,” Daily Mirror, April 11,
22, 2007, at www.express.co.uk/posts/view/5048 2007, at www.mirror.co.uk/news/topstories/tm
(accessed April 22 and 25, 2007). headline=madapple&method=full&objectid=
115 “McCartney Inks Deal with Starbucks,” 18886813&siteid=89520-name page.html
Songwriters Guild, n.d., at (accessed April 12, 2007); see also Goodman,
www.songwritersguild.com/mccartney.html “Beatles take bigger bite.”
(accessed April 2, 2007). 127 Dean Goodman, “‘Fifth Beatle’ Aspinall
116 Quoted in Jeff Leeds, “Plunge in CD sales quits top job,” Reuters, April 10, 2007, at
shakes up big labels,” New York Times, May 28, www.reuters.com/article/industryNews/
2007, at idUSN1041291820070411 (accessed April 10
www.nytimes.com/2007/05/28/arts/music/- and 11, 2007).
28musi.html?ei=5090&en= 128 The packaging for this candy product
89793f4128e3ba8e&ex=1338004800 (accessed features Presley’s image.
May 29, 2007). 129 Goodman, “Beatles take bigger bite.”
117 Quoted in “McCartney’s back catalogue 130 Aidan Malley, “Beatles unlikely to turn up
heading online: EMI,” CBC Arts, May 15, 2007, on iTunes until 2008,” Apple Insider, June 1,
at www.cbc.ca.arts/music/story/2007/05/15/ 2007, at www.appleinsider.com/articles/07/06/
mccartney-emi-online.html (accessed May 15, 01/beatles unlikely to turn up on itunes
2007). until 2008.html (accessed June 2007, 1).
118 Caro, “Yesterday . . . and Today”; see also 131 “New Chart Rules,” Official UK Charts Co.
Mark Savage, “Will the Beatles go digital at website, December 30, 2006, at
last?,” BBC News website, February 7, 2007, at www.theofficialcharts.com/rules press
http://newsvote.bbc.co.uk (accessed February 9, release.php (accessed January 7, 2007).
2007). 132 Savage, “Will the Beatles.”
119 Brown, “Beatles fans kept waiting on 133 Keightley, “Reconsidering Rock,” 125.
remasters”; see also Petridis, “The Beatles: 134 Ibid., 109.
Love.” 135 Ibid., 109.
120 Goodman, “Beatles take bigger bite”; see 136 Storey, “The Politics of the Popular,” 197.
also Terry Lawson, “Beatles iPod could signal 137 Keightley, “Reconsidering Rock,” 109,
end of the CD,” Philadelphia Daily News, March 133.
1, 2007, at www.philly.com/mld/dailynews/ 138 Ibid., 134.
living/16807441.htm (accessed March 1, 2007). 139 Greg Kot, “Toppermost of the
121 Christopher Hope, “Beatles join the iPod Poppermost,” in June Skinner Sawyers (ed.),
revolution,” Daily Telegraph, April 12, 2007, at Read the Beatles (New York: Penguin, 2006),
www.telegraph.co.uk/news/main.jhtml?xml=/ 324. See also John Robinson, “Chewing on the
news/2007/04/12/nbeatles12.xml (accessed Apple Corps,” Guardian Unlimited, September
April 12, 2007). 16, 2006, http://arts.guardian.co.uk/features/-
122 Goodman, “Beatles take bigger bite.” story/0,1873555,0.html (accessed September 22,
123 Evan Hansen and Michael Calore, “Apple 2006).
still can’t buy Beatles’ love,” Wired, April 3, 140 John Dower, writer/director, Live Forever,
2007, at www.wired.com/entertainment/ film (Passion Pictures, 2003).
141 “If you think of culture as a great big Beatles: music and film,” October 29, 2006,
garden, it has to have its compost as well”: Brian www.well.com/conf/inkwell.vue/topics/
Eno, quoted in Michael Jarrett, “Authenticity,” 285/Ritchie-Unterberger-The-Unrelease-.html
in his Sound Tracks: A Musical ABC, 3 vols. (accessed November 1, 2006).
(Philadelphia: Temple University Press, 1998), I, 147 Sliding Doors, film, directed by Peter
193. Howitt (Intermedia Films, 1998).
142 Ed Smith, “Following the Genius with Four 148 Quoted in Inkwell.
Heads; or, Why I Became a Composer,” in 149 See Frith, “Everything Counts,” 2: “Far
Cording, Jankowski-Smith, and Miller Laino from being counter-cultural, rock articulated
(eds.), In My Life, 239. the reconciliation of rebelliousness and capital.”
143 Ibid., 243. 150 Quoted in Hertsgaard, A Day in the Life,
144 MacDonald, Revolution in the Head, 335. 191.
145 Thanks to Ellis Clark for this comparison. 151 Ibid.
146 Quoted in Inkwell: Artists and Authors
Topic 285: Ritchie Unterberger, “The unreleased
Beatles discography, 1962–1970
UK Singles releases
“My Bonnie”/“The Saints”; January 5, 1962, Polydor NH 66–833 (as Tony
Sheridan and the Beatles)
“Love Me Do”/“P.S. I Love You”; October 5, 1962, Parlophone R 4949
“Please Please Me”/“Ask Me Why”; January 11, 1963, Parlophone R 4983
“From Me to You”/“Thank You Girl”; April 11, 1963, Parlophone R 5015
“She Loves You”/“I’ll Get You”; August 23, 1963, Parlophone R 5055
“I Want to Hold Your Hand”/“This Boy”; November 29, 1963, Parlophone R 5084
“Can’t Buy Me Love”/“You Can’t Do That”; March 20, 1964, Parlophone R 5114
“A Hard Day’s Night”/“Things We Said Today”; July 10, 1964, Parlophone R 5160
“I Feel Fine”/“She’s a Woman”; November 27, 1964, Parlophone R 5200
“Ticket to Ride”/“Yes It Is”; April 9, 1965, Parlophone R 5265
“Help!”/“I’m Down”; July 23, 1965, Parlophone R 5305
“We Can Work It Out”/“Day Tripper”; December 3, 1965, Parlophone R 5389
“Paperback Writer”/“Rain”; June 10, 1966; Parlophone R 5452
“Eleanor Rigby”/“Yellow Submarine”; August 5, 1966, Parlophone R 5493
“Strawberry Fields Forever”/“Penny Lane”; February 17, 1967, Parlophone R 5570
“All You Need Is Love”/“Baby, You’re a Rich Man”; July 7, 1967, Parlophone R
5620
“Hello Goodbye”/“I Am the Walrus”; November 24, 1967, Parlophone R 5655
“Lady Madonna”/“The Inner Light”; March 15, 1968, Parlophone R 5675
“Hey Jude”/“Revolution”; August 30, 1968, Apple [Parlophone] R 5722
“Get Back”/“Don’t Let Me Down”; April 11, 1969, Apple [Parlophone] R 5777
(as the Beatles with Billy Preston)
“The Ballad of John and Yoko”/“Old Brown Shoe”; May 30, 1969, Apple
[Parlophone] R 5786
“Something”/“Come Together”; October 31, 1969, Apple [Parlophone] R 5814
“Let It Be”/“You Know My Name (Look Up the Number)”; March 6, 1970, Apple
[Parlophone] R 5833
UK EP releases
Twist and Shout, July 12, 1963, Parlophone GEP 8882 (mono)
A: “Twist and Shout”; “A Taste of Honey.” B: “Do You Want to Know a Secret”;
“There’s a Place.”
The Beatles’ Hits, September 6, 1963, Parlophone GEP 8880 (mono)
A: “From Me to You”; “Thank You Girl.” B: “Please Please Me”; “Love Me Do.”
The Beatles (No. 1), November 1, 1963, Parlophone GEP 8883 (mono)
A: “I Saw Her Standing There”; “Misery.” B: “Anna (Go to Him)”; “Chains.”
All My Loving, February 7, 1964, Parlophone GEP 8891 (mono)
A: “All My Loving”; “Ask Me Why.” B: “Money (That’s What I Want)”; “P.S. I
[286] Love You.”
287 Beatles discography, 1962–1970
Long Tall Sally, June 19, 1964, Parlophone GEP 8913 (mono)
A: “Long Tall Sally”; “I Call Your Name.” B: “Slow Down”; “Matchbox.”
Extracts from the film A Hard Day’s Night, November 6, 1964, Parlophone GEP
8920 (mono)
A: “I Should Have Known Better”; “If I Fell.” B: “Tell Me Why”; “And I Love
Her.”
Extracts from the album A Hard Day’s Night, November 6, 1964, Parlophone GEP
8924 (mono)
A: “Any Time at All”; “I’ll Cry Instead.” B: “Things We Said Today”; “When I
Get Home.”
Beatles for Sale, April 6, 1965, Parlophone GEP 8931 (mono)
A: “No Reply”; “I’m a Loser.” B: “Rock and Roll Music”; “Eight Days a Week.”
Beatles for Sale (No. 2), June 4, 1965, Parlophone GEP 8938 (mono)
A: “I’ll Follow the Sun”; “Baby’s in Black.” B: “Words of Love”; “I Don’t Want
to Spoil the Party.”
The Beatles’ Million Sellers, December 6, 1965, Parlophone GEP 8946 (mono)
A: “She Loves You”; “I Want to Hold Your Hand.” B: “Can’t Buy Me Love”;
“I Feel Fine.”
Yesterday, March 4, 1966, Parlophone GEP 8948 (mono)
A: “Yesterday”; “Act Naturally.” B: “You Like Me Too Much”; “It’s Only Love.”
Nowhere Man, July 8, 1966, Parlophone GEP 8952 (mono)
A: “Nowhere Man”; “Drive My Car.” B: “Michelle”; “You Won’t See Me.”
Magical Mystery Tour, December 8, 1967, Parlophone MMT-1 (mono) / SMMT-1
(stereo)
A: “Magical Mystery Tour”; “Your Mother Should Know.” B: “I Am the Walrus.”
C: “The Fool on the Hill”; “Flying.” D: “Blue Jay Way.”
UK Album releases
Please Please Me, March 22, 1963, Parlophone PMC 1202 (mono) / PCS 3042
(stereo)
Side 1: “I Saw Her Standing There”; “Misery”; “Anna (Go to Him)”; “Chains”;
“Boys”; “Ask Me Why”; “Please Please Me.” Side 2: “Love Me Do”; “P.S. I
Love You”; “Baby It’s You”; “Do You Want to Know a Secret”; “A Taste of
Honey”; “There’s a Place”; “Twist and Shout.”
With the Beatles, November 22, 1963, Parlophone PMC 1206 (mono) / PCS 3045
(stereo)
Side 1: “It Won’t Be Long”; “All I’ve Got to Do”; “All My Loving”; “Don’t Bother
Me”; “Little Child”; “Till There Was You”; “Please Mister Postman.” Side 2:
“Roll over Beethoven”; “Hold Me Tight”; “You Really Got a Hold on Me”; “I
Wanna Be Your Man”; “Devil in Her Heart”; “Not a Second Time”; “Money
(That’s What I Want).”
A Hard Day’s Night, July 10, 1964, Parlophone PMC 1230 (mono) / PCS 3058
(stereo)
Side 1: “A Hard Day’s Night”; “I Should Have Known Better”; “If I Fell”; “I’m
Happy Just to Dance with You”; “And I Love Her”; “Tell Me Why”; “Can’t
Buy Me Love.” Side 2: “Any Time at All”; “I’ll Cry Instead”; “Things We Said
Today”; “When I Get Home”; “You Can’t Do That”; “I’ll Be Back.”
Beatles for Sale, December 4, 1964, Parlophone PMC 1240 (mono) / PCS 3062
(stereo)
Side 1: “No Reply”; “I’m a Loser”; “Baby’s in Black”; “Rock and Roll Music”;
“I’ll Follow the Sun”; “Mr. Moonlight”; “Kansas City”/“Hey! Hey! Hey!
Hey!” Side 2: “Eight Days a Week”; “Words of Love”; “Honey Don’t”; “Every
Little Thing”; “I Don’t Want to Spoil the Party”; “What You’re Doing”;
“Everybody’s Trying to Be My Baby.”
Help!, August 6, 1965, Parlophone PMC 1255 (mono) / PCS 3071 (stereo)
Side 1: “Help!”; “The Night Before”; “You’ve Got to Hide Your Love Away”;
“I Need You”; “Another Girl”; “You’re Going to Lose That Girl”; “Ticket to
Ride.” Side 2: “Act Naturally”; “It’s Only Love”; “You Like Me Too Much”;
“Tell Me What You See”; “I’ve Just Seen a Face”; “Yesterday”; “Dizzy Miss
Lizzy.”
Rubber Soul, December 3, 1965, Parlophone PMC 1267 (mono) / PCS 3075
(stereo)
Side 1: “Drive My Car”; “Norwegian Wood (This Bird Has Flown)”; “You Won’t
See Me”; “Nowhere Man”; “Think for Yourself”; “The Word”; “Michelle.”
Side 2: “What Goes On”; “Girl”; “I’m Looking through You”; “In My Life”;
“Wait”; “If I Needed Someone”; “Run for Your Life.”
Revolver, August 5, 1966, Parlophone PMC 7009 (mono) / PCS 7009 (stereo)
Side 1: “Taxman”; “Eleanor Rigby”; “I’m Only Sleeping”; “Love You To”; “Here,
There, and Everywhere”; “Yellow Submarine”; “She Said She Said.” Side 2:
“Good Day Sunshine”; “And Your Bird Can Sing”; “For No One”; “Doctor
Robert”; “I Want to Tell You”; “Got to Get You into My Life”; “Tomorrow
Never Knows.”
A Collection of Beatles Oldies, December 9, 1966, Parlophone PMC 7016
(mono) / PCS 7016 (stereo)
Side 1: “She Loves You”; “From Me to You”; “We Can Work It Out”; “Help!”;
“Michelle”; “Yesterday”; “I Feel Fine”; “Yellow Submarine.” Side 2: “Can’t
Buy Me Love”; “Bad Boy”; “Day Tripper”; “A Hard Day’s Night”; “Ticket to
Ride”; “Paperback Writer”; “Eleanor Rigby”; “I Want to Hold Your Hand.”
Sgt. Pepper’s Lonely Hearts Club Band, June 1, 1967, Parlophone PMC 7027
(mono) / PCS 7027 (stereo)
Side 1: “Sgt. Pepper’s Lonely Hearts Club Band”/“With a Little Help from My
Friends”; “Lucy in the Sky with Diamonds”; “Getting Better”; “Fixing a Hole”;
“She’s Leaving Home”; “Being for the Benefit of Mr. Kite!” Side 2: “Within
You Without You”; “When I’m Sixty-Four”; “Lovely Rita”; “Good Morning,
Good Morning”; “Sgt. Pepper’s Lonely Hearts Club Band (Reprise)”; “A Day
in the Life”; “Sgt. Pepper’s Inner Groove” [unlisted].
The Beatles [the “White Album”], November 22, 1968, Apple [Parlophone] PMC
7067–7068 (mono) / PCS 7067–7068 (stereo)
Side 1: “Back in the USSR”; “Dear Prudence”; “Glass Onion”; “Ob-La-Di, Ob-
La-Da”; “Wild Honey Pie”; “The Continuing Story of Bungalow Bill”; “While
My Guitar Gently Weeps”; “Happiness Is a Warm Gun.” Side 2: “Martha My
Dear”; “I’m So Tired”; “Blackbird”; “Piggies”; “Rocky Raccoon”; “Don’t
Pass Me By”; “Why Don’t We Do It in the Road”; “I Will”; “Julia.” Side 3:
“Birthday”; “Yer Blues”; “Mother Nature’s Son”; “Everybody’s Got Some-

thing to Hide Except Me and My Monkey”; “Sexy Sadie”; “Helter Skelter”;
“Long Long Long.” Side 4: “Revolution 1”; “Honey Pie”; “Savoy Truffle”;
“Cry Baby Cry”; “Can You Take Me Back” [unlisted]; “Revolution 9”; “Good
Night.”
Yellow Submarine, January 17, 1969, Apple [Parlophone] PMC 7070 (mono) / PCS
7070 (stereo)
Side 1: “Yellow Submarine”; “Only a Northern Song”; “All Together Now”;
“Hey Bulldog”; “It’s All Too Much”; “All You Need Is Love.” Side 2: “Pepper-
land” (instrumental); “Sea of Time”/“Sea of Holes” (instrumental); “Sea of
Monsters” (instrumental); “March of the Meanies” (instrumental); “Pepper-
land Laid Waste” (instrumental); “Yellow Submarine in Pepperland” (instru-
mental).
Abbey Road, September 26, 1969, Apple [Parlophone] PCS 7088 (stereo)
Side 1: “Come Together”; “Something”; “Maxwell’s Silver Hammer”; “Oh! Dar-
ling”; “Octopus’s Garden”; “I Want You (She’s So Heavy).” Side 2: “Here
Comes the Sun”; “Because”; “You Never Give Me Your Money”; “Sun King”;
“Mean Mr. Mustard”; “Polythene Pam”; “She Came in through the Bath-
room Window”; “Golden Slumbers”; “Carry That Weight”; “The End”; “Her
Majesty” [unlisted].
Let It Be, May 8, 1970, Apple [Parlophone] PCS 7096 (stereo)
Side 1: “Two of Us”; “Dig a Pony”; “Across the Universe”; “I Me Mine”; “Dig
It”; “Let It Be”; “Maggie Mae.” Side 2: “I’ve Got a Feeling”; “One after 909”;
“The Long and Winding Road”; “For You Blue”; “Get Back.”
US Singles releases
“My Bonnie”/“The Saints”; April 23, 1962, Decca 31382 (as Tony Sheridan and
the Beat Brothers)
“Please Please Me”/“Ask Me Why”; February 25, 1963, Vee-Jay VJ 498
“From Me to You”/“Thank You Girl”; May 27, 1963, Vee-Jay VJ 522
“She Loves You”/“I’ll Get You”; September 16, 1963, Swan 4152
“I Want to Hold Your Hand”/“I Saw Her Standing There”; December 26, 1963,
Capitol 5112
“Please Please Me”/“From Me to You”; January 30, 1964, Vee-Jay VJ 581
“Twist and Shout”/“There’s a Place”; March 2, 1964, Tollie 9001
“Can’t Buy Me Love”/“You Can’t Do That”; March 16, 1964, Capitol 5150
“Do You Want to Know a Secret”/“Thank You Girl”; March 23, 1964, Vee-Jay VJ
587
“Love Me Do”/“P.S. I Love You”; April 27, 1964, Tollie 9008
“Sie Liebt Dich” [“She Loves You”]/“I’ll Get You”; May 21, 1964, Swan 4182
“A Hard Day’s Night”/“I Should Have Known Better”; July 13, 1964, Capitol
5122
“I’ll Cry Instead”/“I’m Happy Just to Dance with You”; July 20, 1964, Capitol 5234
“And I Love Her”/“If I Fell”; July 20, 1964, Capitol 5235
“Matchbox”/“Slow Down”; August 24, 1964, Capitol 5255
“I Feel Fine”/“She’s a Woman”; November 23, 1964, Capitol 5327
“Eight Days a Week”/“I Don’t Want to Spoil the Party”; February 15, 1965, Capitol
5371
“Ticket to Ride”/“Yes It Is”; April 19, 1965, Capitol 5407
“Help!”/“I’m Down”; July 19, 1965, Capitol 5476
“Yesterday”/“Act Naturally”; September 13, 1965, Capitol 5498
“We Can Work It Out”/“Day Tripper”; December 6, 1965, Capitol 5555
“Nowhere Man”/“What Goes On”; February 21, 1966, Capitol 5587
“Paperback Writer”/“Rain”; May 30, 1966, Capitol 5651
“Eleanor Rigby”/“Yellow Submarine”; August 8, 1966, Capitol 5715
“Strawberry Fields Forever”/“Penny Lane”; February 13, 1967, Capitol 5810
“All You Need Is Love”/“Baby, You’re a Rich Man”; July 17, 1967, Capitol 5964
“Hello Goodbye”/“I Am the Walrus”; November 27, 1967, Capitol 2056
“Lady Madonna”/“The Inner Light”; March 18, 1968, Capitol 2138
“Hey Jude”/“Revolution”; August 26, 1968, Apple [Capitol] 2276
“Get Back”/“Don’t Let Me Down”; May 5, 1969, Apple [Capitol] 2490 (as the
Beatles with Billy Preston)
“The Ballad of John and Yoko”/“Old Brown Shoe”; June 4, 1969, Apple [Capitol]
2531
“Something”/“Come Together”; October 6, 1969, Apple [Capitol] 2654
“Let It Be”/“You Know My Name (Look Up the Number)”; March 11, 1970, Apple
[Capitol] 2764
“The Long and Winding Road”/“For You Blue”; May 11, 1970, Apple [Capitol]
2832
US EP Releases
The Beatles, March 23, 1964, Vee-Jay VJEP 1–903 (mono)
A: “Misery”; “A Taste of Honey.” B: “Ask Me Why”; “Anna (Go to Him).”
Four by the Beatles, May 11, 1964, Capitol EAP 1–2121 (mono)
A: “Roll over Beethoven”; “All My Loving.” B: “This Boy”; “Please Mister
Postman.”
4 by the Beatles, February 1, 1965, Capitol R 5365 (mono)
A: “Honey Don’t”; “I’m a Loser.” B: “Mr. Moonlight”; “Everybody’s Trying to
Be My Baby.”
US Album releases
Introducing the Beatles [first issue], July 22, 1963, Vee-Jay VJLP 1062 (mono) / SR
1062 (stereo)
“Boys”; “Love Me Do.” Side 2: “P.S. I Love You”; “Baby It’s You”; “Do You
Want to Know a Secret”; “A Taste of Honey”; “There’s a Place”; “Twist and
Shout.”
Meet the Beatles!, January 20, 1964, Capitol T 2047 (mono) / ST 2047 (stereo)
Side 1: “I Want to Hold Your Hand”; “I Saw Her Standing There”; “This Boy”;
“It Won’t Be Long”; “All I’ve Got to Do”; “All My Loving.” Side 2: “Don’t
Bother Me”; “Little Child”; “Till There Was You”; “Hold Me Tight”; “I Wanna
Be Your Man”; “Not a Second Time.”
Introducing the Beatles [second issue], January 27, 1964, Vee-Jay VJLP 1062
(mono)
“Boys”; “Ask Me Why.” Side 2: “Please Please Me”; “Baby It’s You”; “Do You
Want to Know a Secret”; “A Taste of Honey”; “There’s a Place”; “Twist and
Shout.”
The Beatles’ Second Album, April 10, 1964, Capitol T 2080 (mono) / ST 2080
(stereo)
Side 1: “Roll over Beethoven”; “Thank You Girl”; “You Really Got a Hold on
Me”; “Devil in Her Heart”; “Money (That’s What I Want)”; “You Can’t Do
That.” Side 2: “Long Tall Sally”; “I Call Your Name”; “Please Mister Postman”;
“I’ll Get You”; “She Loves You.”
A Hard Day’s Night, June 26, 1964, United Artists UA 6366 (mono) / UAS 6366
(stereo)
Side 1: “A Hard Day’s Night”; “Tell Me Why”; “I’ll Cry Instead”; “I Should Have
Known Better” (instrumental); “I’m Happy Just to Dance with You”; “And I
Love Her” (instrumental). Side 2: “I Should Have Known Better”; “If I Fell”;
“And I Love Her”; “Ringo’s Theme (This Boy)” (instrumental); “Can’t Buy
Me Love”; “A Hard Day’s Night” (instrumental).
Something New, July 20, 1964, Capitol T 2108 (mono) / ST 2108 (stereo)
Side 1: “I’ll Cry Instead”; “Things We Said Today”; “Any Time at All”; “When
I Get Home”; “Slow Down”; “Matchbox.” Side 2: “Tell Me Why”; “And I
Love Her”; “I’m Happy Just to Dance with You”; “If I Fell”; “Komm, Gib Mir
Deine Hand” [“I Want to Hold Your Hand”].
The Beatles’ Story, November 23, 1964, Capitol TBO 2222 (mono) / STBO 2222
(stereo)
Side 1: Interviews plus extracts from “I Want to Hold Your Hand”; “Slow
Down”; “This Boy.” Side 2: Interviews plus extracts from “You Can’t Do
That”; “If I Fell”; “And I Love Her.” Side 3: Interviews plus extracts from “A
Hard Day’s Night”; “And I Love Her.” Side 4: Interviews plus extracts from
“Twist and Shout” (live); “Things We Said Today”; “I’m Happy Just to Dance
with You”; “Long Tall Sally”; “She Loves You”; “Boys.”
Beatles ’65, December 15, 1964, Capitol T 2228 (mono) / ST 2228 (stereo)
Side 1: “No Reply”; “I’m a Loser”; “Baby’s in Black”; “Rock and Roll Music”;
“I’ll Follow the Sun”; “Mr. Moonlight.” Side 2: “Honey Don’t”; “I’ll Be Back”;
“She’s a Woman”; “I Feel Fine”; “Everybody’s Trying to Be My Baby.”
The Early Beatles, March 22, 1965, Capitol T 2309 (mono) / ST 2309 (stereo)
Side 1: “Love Me Do”; “Twist and Shout”; “Anna (Go to Him)”; “Chains”;
“Boys”; “Ask Me Why.” Side 2: “Please Please Me”; “P.S. I Love You”; “Baby
It’s You”; “A Taste of Honey”; “Do You Want to Know a Secret.”
Beatles VI, June 14, 1965, Capitol T 2358 (mono) / ST 2358 (stereo)
Side 1: “Kansas City”/“Hey! Hey! Hey! Hey!”; “Eight Days a Week”; “You Like
Me Too Much”; “Bad Boy”; “I Don’t Want to Spoil the Party”; “Words of
Love.” Side 2: “What You’re Doing”; “Yes It Is”; “Dizzy Miss Lizzy”; “Tell Me
What You See”; “Every Little Thing.”
Help!, August 13, 1965, Capitol MAS 2386 (mono) / SMAS 2386 (stereo)
Side 1: “James Bond Theme” [unlisted]; “Help!”; “The Night Before”; “From
Me to You Fantasy” (instrumental); “You’ve Got to Hide Your Love Away”;
“I Need You”; “In the Tyrol” (instrumental). Side 2: “Another Girl”; “Another
Hard Day’s Night” (instrumental); “Ticket to Ride”; “The Bitter End”/“You
Can’t Do That” (instrumental); “You’re Going to Lose That Girl”; “The
Chase” (instrumental).
Rubber Soul, December 6, 1965, Capitol T 2442 (mono) / ST 2442 (stereo)
Side 1: “I’ve Just Seen a Face”; “Norwegian Wood (This Bird Has Flown)”; “You
Won’t See Me”; “Think for Yourself”; “The Word”; “Michelle.” Side 2: “It’s
Only Love”; “Girl”; “I’m Looking through You”; “In My Life”; “Wait”; “Run
for Your Life.”
Yesterday . . . and Today, June 20, 1966, Capitol T 2553 (mono) / ST 2553 (stereo)
Side 1: “Drive My Car”; “I’m Only Sleeping”; “Nowhere Man”; “Doctor Robert”;
“Yesterday”; “Act Naturally.” Side 2: “And Your Bird Can Sing”; “If I Needed
Someone”; “We Can Work It Out”; “What Goes On”; “Day Tripper.”
Revolver, August 8, 1966, Capitol T 2576 (mono) / ST 2576 (stereo)
Side 1: “Taxman”; “Eleanor Rigby”; “Love You To”; “Here, There, and Every-
where”; “Yellow Submarine”; “She Said She Said.” Side 2: “Good Day Sun-
shine”; “For No One”; “I Want to Tell You”; “Got to Get You into My Life”;
“Tomorrow Never Knows.”
Sgt. Pepper’s Lonely Hearts Club Band, June 2, 1967, Capitol MAS 2653
(mono) / SMAS 2653 (stereo)
Side 1: “Sgt. Pepper’s Lonely Hearts Club Band”/“With a Little Help from My
Friends”; “Lucy in the Sky with Diamonds”; “Getting Better”; “Fixing a Hole”;
“She’s Leaving Home”; “Being for the Benefit of Mr. Kite!” Side 2: “Within
You Without You”; “When I’m Sixty-Four”; “Lovely Rita”; “Good Morning,
Good Morning”; “Sgt. Pepper’s Lonely Hearts Club Band (Reprise)”; “A Day
in the Life.”
Magical Mystery Tour, November 27, 1967, Capitol MAL 2835 (mono) / SMAL
2835 (stereo)
Side 1: “Magical Mystery Tour”; “The Fool on the Hill”; “Flying”; “Blue Jay
Way”; “Your Mother Should Know”; “I Am the Walrus.” Side 2: “Hello
Goodbye”; “Strawberry Fields Forever”; “Penny Lane”; “Baby, You’re a Rich
Man”; “All You Need Is Love.”
The Beatles [the “White Album”], November 25, 1968, Apple [Capitol] SWBO
101 (stereo)
Side 1: “Back in the USSR”; “Dear Prudence”; “Glass Onion”; “Ob-La-Di, Ob-
La-Da”; “Wild Honey Pie”; “The Continuing Story of Bungalow Bill”; “While
My Guitar Gently Weeps”; “Happiness Is a Warm Gun.” Side 2: “Martha My
Dear”; “I’m So Tired”; “Blackbird”; “Piggies”; “Rocky Raccoon”; “Don’t Pass
Me By”; “Why Don’t We Do It in the Road”; “I Will”; “Julia.” Side 3: “Birth-
day”; “Yer Blues”; “Mother Nature’s Son”; “Everybody’s Got Something to
Hide Except Me and My Monkey”; “Sexy Sadie”; “Helter Skelter”; “Long
Long Long.” Side 4: “Revolution 1”; “Honey Pie”; “Savoy Truffle”; “Cry Baby
Cry”; “Can You Take Me Back” [unlisted]; “Revolution 9”; “Good Night.”
Yellow Submarine, January 13, 1969, Apple [Capitol] SW 153 (stereo)
Side 1: “Yellow Submarine”; “Only a Northern Song”; “All Together Now”; “Hey
Bulldog”; “It’s All Too Much”; “All You Need Is Love.” Side 2: “Pepperland”
(instrumental); “Sea of Time”/“Sea of Holes” (instrumental); “Sea of

Monsters” (instrumental); “March of the Meanies” (instrumental); “Pep-
perland Laid Waste” (instrumental); “Yellow Submarine in Pepperland”
(instrumental).
Abbey Road, October 1, 1969, Apple [Capitol] SO 383 (stereo)
Side 1: “Come Together”; “Something”; “Maxwell’s Silver Hammer”; “Oh! Dar-
ling”; “Octopus’s Garden”; “I Want You (She’s So Heavy).” Side 2: “Here
Comes the Sun”; “Because”; “You Never Give Me Your Money”; “Sun King”;
“Mean Mr. Mustard”; “Polythene Pam”; “She Came in through the Bath-
room Window”; “Golden Slumbers”; “Carry That Weight”; “The End”; “Her
Majesty” [unlisted].
Hey Jude, February 26, 1970, Apple [Capitol] SW 385 (stereo)
Side 1: “Can’t Buy Me Love”; “I Should Have Known Better”; “Paperback
Writer”; “Rain”; “Lady Madonna”; “Revolution.” Side 2: “Hey Jude”; “Old
Brown Shoe”; “Don’t Let Me Down”; “The Ballad of John and Yoko.”
Let It Be, May 18, 1970, Apple [Capitol] AR 34001 (stereo)
Side 1: “Two of Us”; “Dig a Pony”; “Across the Universe”; “I Me Mine”; “Dig
It”; “Let It Be”; “Maggie May.” Side 2: “I’ve Got a Feeling”; “One after 909”;
“The Long and Winding Road”; “For You Blue”; “Get Back.”
Select bibliography
“101 Greatest Beatle Songs,” MOJO 146, January 2006.

Abraham, Mark, The Teenage Consumer (London: London Press Exchange, 1959).
Adler, Renata, “Screen: ‘Candy’, Compromises Galore,” review of Candy (Cinerama
Releasing Corporation movie), New York Times, December 18, 1968, 54.
Adorno, Theodor, “The Aging of the New Music,” Essays on Music, in Richard
Leppert (ed.), Essays on Music (Berkeley: University of California Press, 2002),
181–202.
“On the Contemporary Relationship of Philosophy and Music,” in Richard
Leppert (ed.), Essays on Music (Berkeley: University of California Press, 2002),
135–61.
“On Popular Music,” in Richard Leppert (ed.), Essays on Music (Berkeley:
University of California Press, 2002), 437–69.
“Why Is the New Art so Hard to Understand?,” in Richard Leppert (ed.),
Essays on Music (Berkeley: University of California Press, 2002), 127–34.
“Albums: Some Time in New York City,” review of Some Time in New York City
(Apple LP), by John Lennon and Yoko Ono, with the Plastic Ono Band, Melody
Maker, October 7, 1972, 25.
Aldridge, Alan (ed.), The Beatles Illustrated Lyrics (London: Macdonald, 1969).
Alexander, Marsha, The Sexual Paradise of LSD (North Hollywood: Brandon House,
1967).
Alterman, Loraine, “Pop: Paul’s Grooves Will Grab You,” review of Band on the Run
(Apple LP), by Paul McCartney and Wings, New York Times, December 2, 1973,
208.
“Ringo Dishes Up a ‘Hot Fudge Sundae,’” review of Mind Games (Apple
LP), by John Lennon, and Ringo (Apple LP), by Ringo Starr, New York Times,
November 25, 1973, 188.
Anson, Robert Sam, “At the Garden,” New Yorker, January 13, 1975, 30.
Gone Crazy and Back Again: The Rise and Fall of the Rolling Stone Generation
(Garden City: Doubleday, 1981).
Axelrod, Mitchell, BeatleToons: The Real Story Behind the Cartoon Beatles (Pickens,
SC: Wynn Publishing, 1999).
Babiuk, Andy, Beatles Gear: All the Fab Four’s Instruments, from Stage to Studio (San
Francisco: Backbeat, 2001).
Badman, Keith, The Beatles: Off the Record (New York: Omnibus, 2000), reissued as
The Beatles: Off the Record: The Dream Is Over (New York: Omnibus, 2002).
The Beatles Diary, II: After the Breakup, 1970–2001 (London: Omnibus
Press, 2001).
Baird, Julia, with Guiliano, Geoffrey, John Lennon: My Brother (New York: Henry
Holt, 1988).
[294]
295 Select bibliography
Barthes, Roland, “The Death of the Author,” in Roland Barthes, Image–Music–Text,

trans. Stephen Heath (London: Fontana; New York: Noonday Press, 1977),
142–8.
“Musica practica,” in Roland Barthes, Image–Music–Text, trans. Stephen
Heath (London: Fontana; New York: Noonday Press, 1977), 149–54.
Baur, Steven, “Ringo Round Revolver: Rhythm, Timbre, and Tempo in Rock
Drumming,” in Russell Reising (ed.), “Every Sound There Is”: The Beatles’
Revolver and the Transformation of Rock and Roll (Aldershot: Ashgate, 2002),
171–82.
“Beatle George Harrison Dies,” Cable News Network (CNN), December 1, 2001, at
http://archives.cnn.com/2001/SHOWBIZ/Music/11/30/harrison.obit (accessed
August 26, 2005).
Beatles, The, The Beatles Anthology (London: Cassell; San Francisco: Chronicle,
2000).
The Beatles Anthology (television series), directed by Geoff Wonfor (Apple,
1996).
Beatles Ultimate Experience website: www.beatlesinterviews.org.
“The Beatles,” Television Chronicles 3 (1995), 8–15.
The Beatles Complete Scores (Milwaukee: Hal Leonard Corporation, 1989).
Bender, William, “Let George Do It,” review of All Things Must Pass (Apple LP), by
George Harrison, Time, November 30, 1970, 57.
Bernstein, Adam, “George Harrison Dies, 58, Pushed Fab Four in New Directions,”
Washington Post, December 1, 2001, A01.
Best, Pete, and Doncaster, Patrick, Beatle! The Pete Best Story (London: Plexus, 1985).
Bird, Brian, Skiffle: The Story of Folk-Song with a Jazz Beat (London: Robert Hale,
1958).
Bird, Donald Alport, Holder, Stephen C., and Sears, Diane, “Walrus Is Greek for
Corpse: Rumor and the Death of Paul McCartney,” Journal of Popular Culture 10
(1976), 110–21.
Bisbort, Alan, and Puterbaugh, Parke, Rhino’s Psychedelic Trip (San Francisco: Miller
Freeman, 2000).
Bishop, Malden Grange, The Discovery of Love: A Psychedelic Experience with LSD-25
(New York: Dodd, Mead & Co., 1963).
Blaney, John, Lennon and McCartney: Together Alone (London: Jawbone Press,
2007), 31–2.
Booker, Christopher, The Neophiliacs: The Revolution in English Life in the Fifties and
Sixties (London: Collins, 1969).
Bowen, Phil, A Gallery To Play To: The Story of the Mersey Poets (Exeter: Stride
Publications, 1999).
Bradby, Barbara, “She Told Me What to Say: The Beatles and Girl-Group
Discourse,” Popular Music and Society 28/3 (2005), 359–90.
Bresler, Fenton, The Murder of John Lennon (London: Sidgwick & Jackson, 1989).
Brewer-Giorgio, Gail, Is Elvis Alive? (New York: Tudor, 1988).
Brocken, Michael, “Was It Really Like That?: Rock Island Line and the Instabilities of
Causational Popular Music Histories,” Popular Music History 1/2 (2006),
147–66.
Brookhiser, Richard, “John Lennon, RIP,” National Review, December 31, 1980,
1555.
Brown, Peter, with Gaines, Steven, The Love You Make: An Insider’s Story of the
Beatles (London: Macmillan, 1983).
Burns, Gary, “Refab Four: Beatles for Sale in the Age of Music Video,” in Ian Inglis
(ed.), The Beatles, Popular Music and Society: A Thousand Voices (Basingstoke:
Macmillan, 2000), 176–88.
“The Myth of the Beatles,” South Atlantic Quarterly 86 (1987), 169–80.
Byatt, A. S., Babel Tower (London: Vintage, 1997).
Carr, Roy, and Tyler, Tony, The Beatles: An Illustrated Record (New York: Harmony,
1975).
Carson, Tom, “Bad Boy,” review of Bad Boy (Polidor/Portrait LP), by Ringo Starr,
Rolling Stone, July 12, 1978, 52.
Charlesworth, Chris, “Mutton Dressed as Ram?,” review of Ram (Apple LP), by Paul
and Linda McCartney, Melody Maker, May 27, 1971, 11.
Christgau, Robert, “Symbolic Comrades,” Village Voice, January 14, 1981, 31–2.
Clayson, Alan, George Harrison: The Quiet One (London: Sidgwick & Jackson,
1989).
Ringo Starr (1996; London: Sanctuary, 2003).
Clayson, Alan, and Sutcliffe, Pauline, Backbeat: Stuart Sutcliffe – The Lost Beatle
(London: Pan, 1994).
Cloud, Cam, The Little Book of Acid (Berkeley: Ronin, 1999).
Clydesdale, Greg, “Creativity and Competition: The Beatles,” Creativity Research
Journal 18 (2006), 129–39.
Cohen, Mitchell, “John Lennon’s Last,” review of Double Fantasy (Geffen LP), by
John Lennon and Yoko Ono, High Fidelity, February 1981, 92.
Cohen, Sidney, The Beyond Within: The LSD Story (New York: Atheneum, 1966).
Coleman, Ray, Brian Epstein (Harmondsworth: Penguin, 1990).
Lennon (New York: McGraw-Hill, 1986), revised and updated as Lennon:
The Definitive Biography (London: Pan, 1995).
“George Harrison: Somewhere in England,” review of Somewhere in
England (Dark Horse LP), by George Harrison, Melody Maker, June 6, 1981,
27.
Cone, Edward T., Musical Form and Musical Performance (New York: Norton,
1968).
Connolly, Ray, John Lennon 1940–1980: A Biography (London: Fontana, 1981).
Cooper, Grosvenor W., and Meyer, Leonard B., The Rhythmic Structure of Music
(Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1956).
Cording, Robert, Jankowski-Smith, Shelli, and Miller Laino, E. J. (eds.), In My Life:
Encounters with the Beatles (New York: Fromm International, 1998).
Coren, Alan, “James Paul McCartney,” review of James Paul McCartney (ATV
television program), The Times, May 11, 1973, 11.
Cott, Jonathan, “Two Virgins,” review of Two Virgins (Apple LP), by John Lennon
and Yoko Ono, Rolling Stone, March 1, 1969, 20.
“Dark Horse,” review of Dark Horse (Apple LP), by George Harrison, High Fidelity,
April 1975, 101.
Davies, Hunter, The Beatles (New York: McGraw-Hill, 1968; rev. edns., New York:
Norton, 1985, 1996).
Davis, Evan, “Psychological Characteristics of Beatle Mania,” Journal of the History
of Ideas 30 (1969), 273–80.
DeRogatis, Jim, Kaleidoscope Eyes: Psychedelic Rock from the ’60s to the ’90s
(Secaucus, NJ: Carol Publishing Group, 1996).
Dickinson, Emily, Poem 745, in Thomas H. Johnson (ed.), Final Harvest: Emily
Dickinson’s Poems (Boston, MA: Little, Brown, 1961).
Doggett, Peter, Let It Be / Abbey Road (New York: Schirmer; London: Prentice Hall
International, 1998).
Doney, Malcolm, Lennon and McCartney (New York: Hippocrene, 1981).
Dove, Ian, “Records: Harrison’s Turn,” review of Living in the Material World (Apple
LP), by George Harrison, New York Times, June 6, 1973, 37.
“Records by McCartney,” review of Red Rose Speedway (Apple LP), by Paul
McCartney and Wings, New York Times, May 2, 1973, 37.
Dowlding, William J., Beatlesongs (New York: Fireside, 1989).
Draper, Robert, Rolling Stone Magazine: The Uncensored History (New York:
Doubleday, 1990).
Duncan, Amy, “Soundtakes: George Harrison, Cloud Nine,” review of Cloud Nine
(Dark Horse LP), by George Harrison, November 18, 1987, 21.
Dyer, Richard, Stars, new edn., with a supplementary chapter by Paul McDonald
(London: British Film Institute, 1998; 1st edn. 1980).
Dylan, Bob, “Love Minus Zero / No Limit,” Bringing It All Back Home (Columbia,
1965).
Eastland, Terry, “In Defense of Religious America,” Commentary, June 1981,
39–45.
Ebert, Roger, “Cinema: Two Virgins and Number Five, by Yoko Ono and John
Lennon,” Rolling Stone, December 21, 1968, 15, 30.
Edera, Bruno, Full Length Animated Feature Films (London: Focal Press, 1977).
Edwards, Henry, “Mind Games,” review of Mind Games (Apple LP), by John
Lennon, High Fidelity, March 1974, 109.
“The Provocative Lennon–Ono Marriage,” review of Imagine (Apple LP), by
John Lennon, High Fidelity, January 1972, 77.
Elliott, Anthony, The Mourning of John Lennon (Berkeley: University of California
Press, 1999).
Ellis, Royston, Rave (Northwood: Scorpion Press, 1960).
Ellson, R. N., Sex-Happy Hippy (San Diego: Corinth, 1968).
Emerick, Geoff, and Massey, Howard, Here, There, and Everywhere: My Life
Recording the Music of the Beatles (New York: Gotham, 2006).
Epstein, Brian, A Cellarful of Noise (London: Souvenir Press, 1964).
Everett, Walter, The Beatles as Musicians: The Quarry Men Through Rubber Soul
(New York: Oxford University Press, 2001).
The Beatles as Musicians: Revolver Through the Anthology (New York:
Oxford University Press, 1999).
“Fellow Traveling with Jesus,” Time, September 6, 1971, 54–5.
Fletcher, Colin, “Beat and Gangs on Merseyside,” New Society, February 20, 1964.
Flippo, Chet, Yesterday: The Unauthorized Autobiography of Paul McCartney (New

York: Doubleday, 1989).
Fogo, Fred, “I Read the News Today”: The Social Drama of John Lennon’s Death
(Lanham, MD: Rowman & Littlefield, 1994).
Fraenkel, Michael, “Passing of Body” in Death Is Not Enough: Essays in Active
Negation (London: C. W. Daniel, 1939).
Friedan, Betty, The Feminine Mystique (New York: Norton, 1963).
Frith, Simon, “Introduction: Everything Counts,” in Simon Frith, Music for
Pleasure: Essays in the Sociology of Pop (New York: Routledge, 1988), 1–10.
Frith, Simon, and Goodwin, Andrew (eds.), On Record: Rock, Pop and the Written
Word (New York: Pantheon, 1990).
Frith, Simon, and Horne, Howard, Art Into Pop (London and New York: Methuen,
1987).
Frontani, Michael, The Beatles: Image and the Media (Jackson: University Press of
Mississippi, 2007).
Gaitskill, Mary, Veronica (New York: Vintage, 2005).
Garbarini, Vic, Cullman, Brian, and Graustark, Barbara, Strawberry Fields Forever:
John Lennon Remembered (New York: Bantam Books, 1980).
Geller, Debbie, and Wall, Anthony (eds.), The Brian Epstein Story (London: Faber &
Faber, 2000).
“George Harrison,” review of George Harrison (Dark Horse LP), by George
Harrison, High Fidelity, May 1979, 124–5.
“George Harrison: Thirty-Three & 1/3,” review of Thirty-Three & 1/3 (Dark Horse
LP), by George Harrison, High Fidelity, March 1977, 140.
Gerson, Ben, “Records: All Things Must Pass,” review of All Things Must Pass (Apple
LP), by George Harrison, Rolling Stone, January 7, 1971, 46.
“Records: Imagine,” review of Imagine (Apple LP), by John Lennon, Rolling
Stone, October 28, 1971, 48.
“Records: Ringo,” review of Ringo (Apple LP), by Ringo Starr, Rolling Stone,
December 20, 1973, 73.
“Walls and Bridges,” review of Walls and Bridges (Apple LP), by John
Lennon, Rolling Stone, November 21, 1974, 72, 74, 76.
Gillett, Charlie, The Sound of the City (London: Souvenir Press, 1970).
Gitlin, Todd, “John Lennon Speaking . . . ” Commonweal, September 22, 1972,
500–3.
“The Lennon Legacy,” The Center Magazine, May/June 1981, 2–4.
Giuliano, Geoffrey, The Lost Beatles Interviews (New York: Plume Books, 1994).
Two Of Us: John Lennon and Paul McCartney Behind the Myth (New York:
Penguin, 1999).
Gledhill, Christine, Stardom: Industry of Desire (London: Routledge, 1991).
Goldman, Albert, The Lives of John Lennon (New York: William Morrow, 1988).
Goldstein, Toby, “London Town: So What’s Wrong with Silly Love Songs?,” review
of London Town (Capitol LP), by Paul McCartney, High Fidelity, July 1978,
120.
Golson, G. Barry (ed.), John Lennon and Yoko Ono: The Final Testament (New York:
Berkeley Books, 1981).
The Playboy Interviews with John Lennon and Yoko Ono: The Final Testament
(New York: Berkeley, 1981).
Goodwin, Andrew, Dancing in the Distraction Factory: Music, Television and Popular
Culture (Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1992).
Gorman, P., “Badly Drawn Boys,” MOJO (July 2000), 20–1.
Gould, Jonathan, Can’t Buy Me Love: The Beatles, Britain, and America (New York:
Harmony, 2007).
Gramsci, Antonio, Selections from the Prison Notebooks, ed. and trans. Quintin
Hoare and Geoffrey Nowell-Smith (London: Lawrence & Wishart, 1971).
Granados, Stefan, Those Were the Days: An Unofficial History of the Beatles Apple
Organization 1967–2002 (London: Cherry Red Books, 2002).
Graustark, Barbara, “The Real John Lennon,” Newsweek, September 29, 1980,
76–7.
Greenspun, Roger, “Screen: Satirical ‘Magic Christian,’” review of The Magic
Christian (Commonwealth United movie), New York Times, February 12, 1970,
29.
Grof, Stanislav, MD, LSD Psychotherapy: Exploring the Frontiers of the Hidden Mind
(Alameda, CA: Hunter House, 1980).
Grossberg, Lawrence, We Gotta Get Out of This Place: Popular Conservatism and
Postmodern Culture (New York: Routledge, 1992).
Harrington, Richard, “McCartney & Sinatra: The Past Is Still Best,” review of
McCartney II (Parlophone/EMI LP), by Paul McCartney, Washington Post, June
15, 1980, A1.
Harrington, Richard, “Pap from John and Yoko,” review of Double Fantasy
(Geffen LP), by John Lennon and Yoko Ono, Washington Post, November 26,
1980, A1.
Harris, John, “Sgt. Pepper, the Day the World Turned Day-Glo,” MOJO 160 (March
2007), 72–89.
Harrison, George, I Me Mine (London: W. H. Allen, 1982; San Francisco: Chronicle
Books, 2002).
“Harrison: Eastern Promise,” review of Dark Horse (Apple LP), by George Harrison,
December 21, 1974, 36.
“Harrison Regains His Rubber Soul,” review of Thirty-Three & 1/3 (Dark Horse LP),
by George Harrison, Melody Maker, November 27, 1976, 23.
Harry, Bill, The Book of Beatle Lists (Poole: Javelin, 1985).
Heckman, Don, “Pop: Two and a Half Beatles on Their Own,” review of All Things
Must Pass (Apple LP), by George Harrison, and Plastic Ono Band (Apple LP), by
John Lennon, New York Times, December 20, 1970, 104.
“Recordings: Making a Star of Starr,” review of Beaucoups of Blues (Apple
LP), New York Times, November 22, 1970, 133.
Henderson, Leigh, “About LSD,” in LSD: Still with Us after All These Years (New
York: Lexington Books, 1994).
Hennessey, Peter, Having It So Good: Britain in the Fifties (London: Allen Lane,
2006).
Hertsgaard, Mark, A Day in the Life: The Music and Artistry of the Beatles (New York:
Delacorte, 1995).
Hieronimus, Robert R., Inside the Yellow Submarine: The Making of the Beatles’
Animated Classic, editing and compilation assistance by Laura Cortner (Iola, WI:
Krause Publications, 2002).
Hofmann, Albert, LSD: My Problem Child (Los Angeles: Tarcher, 1983).
Holden, Stephen, “George Harrison,” review of George Harrison (Dark Horse LP),
by George Harrison, Rolling Stone, April 19, 1979, 90.
“Lennon’s Music: A Range of Genius,” Rolling Stone, January 22, 1981, 64–7,
70.
“Living in the Material World,” review of Living in the Material World
(Apple LP), by George Harrison, Rolling Stone, July 19, 1973, 54.
“McCartney II,” review of McCartney II (Parlophone/EMI LP), by Paul
McCartney, Rolling Stone, July 24, 1980, 54.
“On the Wings of Silly Love Songs,” review of Wings at the Speed of Sound
(Capitol LP), by Wings, Rolling Stone, May 20, 1976, 67, 69.
“Pop View: Rock Grows Up, Gracefully and Otherwise,” review of Cloud
Nine (Dark Horse LP), by George Harrison, New York Times, November 8, 1987,
H29.
“Records: Sometime in New York City,” review of Some Time in New York
City (Apple LP), by John Lennon and Yoko Ono, with Elephant’s Memory,
Rolling Stone, July 20, 1972, 48.
“Ringo the 4th,” review of Ringo the 4th (Polydor/Atlantic LP), by Ringo
Starr, Rolling Stone, November 17, 1977, 94.
“Songs of Innocence and Experience for the Pop Fan of a Certain Age,”
review of Flaming Pie (Capitol CD), by Paul McCartney, New York Times,
November 28, 1997, E1, 33.
Hollingsworth, Roy, “Albums: Some Time in New York City,” review of Some Time
in New York City (Apple LP), by John Lennon and Yoko Ono, with the Plastic
Ono Band, Melody Maker, June 10, 1972, 9.
“Pop Albums: ‘Imagine,’” review of Imagine (Apple LP), by John Lennon,
Melody Maker, October 9, 1971, 21.
Howlett, Kevin, The Beatles at the Beeb 1962–65: The Story of Their Radio Career
(London: BBC Publications, 1982).
“The Beatles’ Radio Sessions 1962–65,” in CD booklet, The Beatles Live at
the BBC (Apple, 1994), 7–12.
Hudson, Winthrop S., Religion in America, 3rd edn. (New York: Charles Scribner’s
Sons, 1981).
Inglis, Ian (ed.), The Beatles, Popular Music, and Society: A Thousand Voices (New
York: St. Martin’s, 2000).
“Conformity, Status and Innovation: The Accumulation and Utilization of
Idiosyncrasy Credits in the Career of the Beatles,” Popular Music and Society 19/3
(1995), 41–74.
Irvin, Jim, “The MOJO Interview: George Martin,” MOJO 160 (March 2007), 37–40.
Jarrett, Michael, “Authenticity,” in Michael Jarrett, Sound Tracks: A Musical ABC, 3
vols. (Philadelphia: Temple University Press, 1998), I, 189–201.
Johnston, Laurie, “Women’s Group to Observe Rights Day Here Today,” New York
Times, August 25, 1972, 40.
“Jolly Nice, Ringo,” Melody Maker, October 23, 1976, 27.

Jonas, Oswald, Introduction to the Theory of Heinrich Schenker, trans. and ed. John
Rothgeb (1934; New York: Longman, 1982).
Jones, Jack, Let Me Take You Down: Inside the Mind of Mark David Chapman, the
Man Who Killed John Lennon (New York: Villard Books, 1992).
Jones, Nick, “The Rolling Stone Interview: George Harrison,” Rolling Stone,
February 24, 1968, 16.
Joyce, Mike, “Records: Traveling Wilburys Vol. 1,” review of The Traveling Wilburys:
Volume One (Warner Brothers LP), by the Traveling Wilburys, Washington Post,
November 16, 1988, D7.
Judt, Tony, Postwar: A History of Europe since 1945 (London: Heinemann, 2005).
Kaye, Lenny, “Red Rose Speedway,” review of Red Rose Speedway (Apple LP), by
Paul McCartney and Wings, Rolling Stone, July 5, 1973, 68.
Kernis, Mark, “McCartney and Wings Just Won’t Fly,” review of London Town
(Parlophone/EMI LP), by Wings, Washington Post, April 16, 1978, A1.
Kinsey, Alfred C., Sexual Behavior in the Human Female (Philadelphia: W. B.
Saunders, 1953).
Sexual Behavior in the Human Male (Philadelphia: W. B. Saunders, 1948).
Kot, Greg, “Toppermost of the Poppermost,” in June Skinner Sawyers (ed.), Read the
Beatles (New York: Penguin, 2006), 322–6.
Kozinn, Allan, The Beatles (London: Phaidon, 1995).
“Music of a Beatle Who Never Stopped,” review of Brainwashed (Dark
Horse CD), by George Harrison, New York Times, November 17, 2002, A27.
“‘Ram,’” review of Ram (Apple LP), by Paul and Linda McCartney, Rolling
Stone, July 8, 1971, 42.
“Ringo Outdistances His Past, Finally,” review of Vertical Man (Mercury
LP), by Ringo Starr, New York Times, June 21, 1998, AR28.
“Ringo Starr, a 60’s [sic] Relic? Not if He Can Help It,” New York Times, May
31, 1992, H24.
Laing, R. D., The Politics of Experience (New York: Ballantine, 1967).
Lambert, Philip, Inside the Music of Brian Wilson (New York: Continuum, 2007).
Landau, Jon, “Band on the Run,” review of Band on the Run (Apple LP), by Paul
McCartney and Wings, Rolling Stone, January 31, 1974, 48, 50.
“Mind Games,” review of Mind Games, by John Lennon, Rolling Stone,
January 3, 1974, 61.
“Singles: ‘My Sweet Lord’ / ‘Isn’t It a Pity,’” review of “My Sweet Lord” /
“Isn’t It a Pity” (Apple single), by George Harrison, Rolling Stone, December 24,
1970, 56.
Lasch, Christopher, The Culture of Narcissism: American Life in an Age of
Diminishing Expectations (New York: Norton, 1978).
Leary, Timothy, Flashbacks: An Autobiography – A Personal and Cultural History of
an Era (New York: Putnam, 1983).
High Priest (Berkeley: Ronin, 1995).
Leary, Timothy, Metzner, Ralph, and Alpert, Richard, The Psychedelic Experience: A
Manual Based on “The Tibetan Book of the Dead” (New Hyde Park, NY:
University Books, 1964).
Lee, Martin A., and Shlain, Bruce, Acid Dreams: The Complete Social History of LSD:
The CIA, the Sixties, and Beyond (New York: Grove Press, 1985).
Lerdahl, Fred, and Jackendoff, Ray, A Generative Theory of Tonal Music (Cambridge,
MA: MIT Press, 1983).
Leng, Simon, While My Guitar Gently Weeps: The Music of George Harrison (New
York: Hal Leonard, 2006).
“Lennon Has a Legacy,” Nation, December 20, 1980, 657.
“Lennon Returns MBE,” Variety, November 26, 1969, 2.
Lennon, Cynthia, A Twist of Lennon (London: Star Books, 1978).
Lennon, John, The Penguin John Lennon (Harmondsworth: Penguin, 1965).
Skywriting by Word of Mouth and Other Writings, Including The Ballad of
John and Yoko (New York: Harper & Row, 1986).
Lennon, John, and Ono, Yoko, “A Love Letter From John and Yoko, To People Who
Ask Us What, When and Why,” New York Times, May 27, 1979, E20.
Lewis, J., “‘Over My Dead Body!,’” Uncut, May 2007, 74–6.
Lewisohn, Mark, liner notes, The Beatles Anthology Volume 2, CD (Apple Corps
Ltd. / EMI Ltd., 1996), 4–45.
The Beatles Day by Day: A Chronology 1962–1989 (New York: Harmony,
1990).
The Beatles Recording Sessions (New York: Harmony, 1988).
The Complete Beatles Chronicle (New York: Harmony, 1992; London:
Hamlyn, 2000).
The Complete Beatles Recording Sessions: The Official Story of the Abbey Road
Years (London: Hamlyn, 1988).
Liddy, G. Gordon, Will: The Autobiography of G. Gordon Liddy (New York: St.
Martin’s, 1996).
Luke, Timothy, Museum Politics: Power Plays at the Exhibition (Minneapolis:
University of Minneapolis Press, 2002).
Lyon, G. W., Jr., “More on Beatles Textual Problems,” Journal of Popular Culture 4
(1970), 549–52.
Mabey, Richard, The Pop Process (London: Hutchinson Educational, 1965).
Madow, Stuart, and Sobul, Jeff, The Colour of Your Dreams: The Beatles’ Psychedelic
Music (Pittsburgh: Dorrance Publishing, 1992),
McCabe, Peter, and Schonfeld, Robert D., Apple to the Core: The Unmaking of the
Beatles (New York: Pocket Books, 1972).
McCartney, Paul, Blackbird Singing: Poems and Lyrics 1965–1999, ed. A. Mitchell
(New York: Norton, 2001).
Paintings (Boston: Little, Brown, 2000).
McCartney, Paul, Dunbar, Geoff, and Ardagh, Philip, High in the Clouds (New York:
Dutton Children’s Books, 2005).
McDevitt, Chas, Skiffle: The Definitive Inside Story (London: Robson, 1997).
MacDonald, Ian, Revolution in the Head: The Beatles’ Records and the Sixties
(London: Fourth Estate; New York: Henry Holt, 1994; fully updated edn.,
London: Pimlico, 1998).
McDonald, Kari, and Kaufman, Sarah Hudson, “‘Tomorrow Never Knows’: The
Contributions of George Martin and His Production Team to the Beatles’ New
Sound,” in Russell Reising (ed.), “Every Sound There Is”: The Beatles’ Revolver
and the Transformation of Rock and Roll (Aldershot: Ashgate, 2002), 139–57.
McGregor, Craig, “Rock’s ‘We Are One’ Myth,” New York Times, May 9, 1971, D15.
McKinney, Devin, Magic Circles: The Beatles in Dream and History (Cambridge, MA:
Harvard University Press, 2003).
McRobbie, Angela, “Jackie Magazine: Romantic Individualism and the Teenage
Girl,” in Angela McRobbie, Feminism and Youth Culture (London: Macmillan,
1991), 135–88 (first published as “Jackie: An Ideology of Adolescent Femininity,”
Stencilled Occasional Paper 53, Women’s Series [Birmingham: Centre for
Contemporary Cultural Studies, 1978]).
Maraschin, Donatella, “The Swinging 60s,” In London: Summer Living (London:
Morris Visitor Publications, June–July 2006), 29–32.
Marcus, Greil, “The Beatles,” in Jim Miller (ed.), The Rolling Stone Illustrated
History of Rock and Roll, revised and updated edn. (New York: Random House,
1980; London: Picador, 1981), 177–89.
Dead Elvis: A Chronicle of a Cultural Obsession (New York: Doubleday,
1991).
Marsh, Dave, “Extra Texture,” review of Extra Texture (Read All About It) (Apple
LP), by George Harrison, Rolling Stone, November 20, 1975, 75.
“An Open Letter to John Lennon,” Rolling Stone, November 3, 1977, 50.
Marshall, Geoffrey, “Taking the Beatles Seriously: Problems of Text,” Journal of
Popular Culture 3 (1969), 28–34.
Martin, George, with Jeremy Hornsby, All You Need Is Ears (New York: St. Martin’s,
1979).
Martin, George, with William Pearson, Summer of Love: The Making of Sgt. Pepper
(London: Macmillan, 1994; London: Pan Books, 1995).
Martin, Linda, and Segrave, Kerry, Anti-Rock: The Opposition to Rock ’n’ Roll (New
York: Da Capo, 1993).
Maslin, Janet, “London Town,” review of London Town (Parlophone/EMI LP), by
Wings, Rolling Stone, June 15, 1978, 89, 91–2.
Matteo, Steve, 33 1/3: Let It Be (New York: Continuum, 2004).
Let It Be (New York and London: Continuum, 2004).
Mellers, Wilfrid, Twilight of the Gods: The Beatles in Retrospect (London: Faber &
Faber, 1973).
Meltzer, Richard, “George Harrison Surrenders to Goodies,” review of Thirty Three
& 1/3 (Dark Horse LP), by George Harrison, Village Voice, December 20, 1976,
87–9.
Mendelsohn, John, “‘Wild Life,’” review of Wild Life (Apple LP), by Wings, Rolling
Stone, January 20, 1972, 48.
“Method in Their Fabness,” MOJO, May 2007, 14.
Miles, Barry, The Beatles: A Diary – An Intimate Day by Day History (New York:
Barnes & Noble, 2004).
Paul McCartney: Many Years From Now (London: Secker & Warburg; New
York: Henry Holt, 1997).
Miller, Jim, “Dark Horse: Transcendental Mediocrity,” review of Dark Horse (Apple
LP), by George Harrison, Rolling Stone, February 13, 1975, 75–6.
Moore, Allan F., The Beatles: Sgt. Pepper’s Lonely Hearts Club Band (Cambridge:
Cambridge University Press, 1997).
“Music: ‘Hello, Goodbye, Hello,’” review of McCartney (Apple LP), by Paul
McCartney, Time, April 20, 1970, 57.
Mutsaers, Lutgard, “Indorock: An Early Eurorock Style,” in Popular Music 9/3
(1990), 307–20.
Neaverson, Bob, The Beatles Movies (London: Cassell, 1997).
Negus, Keith, “Popular Music: Between Celebration and Despair,” in John Downing
and Annabelle Sreberny-Mohammadi (eds.), Questioning the Media, 2nd edn.
(London: Sage, 1995).
Nolan, Tom, “Goodnight Vienna,” review of Goodnight Vienna (Apple LP), by
Ringo Starr, Rolling Stone, April 24, 1975, 62.
Norman, Philip, Shout! The Beatles in Their Generation (New York: MJF, 1981) =
Shout! The True Story of the Beatles (London: Hamish Hamilton, 1981; revised
and updated edn., London: Sidgwick & Jackson, 2003).
Northcutt, William M., “The Spectacle of Alienation: Death, Loss, and the Crowd in
Sgt. Pepper’s Lonely Hearts Club Band,” in Kenneth Womack and Todd F. Davis
(eds.), Reading the Beatles: Cultural Studies, Literary Criticism, and the Fab Four
(Albany: State University of New York Press, 2006), 129–46.
O’Connor, John J., “TV: McCartney and His Group on ABC Tonight,” review of
James Paul McCartney (ABC television program), New York Times, April 16,
1973, 75.
O’Dell, Denis, and Neaverson, Bob, At The Apple’s Core: The Beatles from the Inside
(London: Peter Owen, 2002).
O’Grady, T. J., The Beatles: A Musical Evolution (Boston: Twayne, 1983).
O’Neill, William L., Coming Apart: An Informal History of America in the 1960s
(Chicago: Quadrangle Books, 1971).
Palmer, Robert, “Paul McCartney’s Latest is Exquisite but Flawed,” New York Times,
April 25, 1982, Section 2, pp. 1, 19.
“The Pop Life: Did Ringo Starr Alone Escape Trap of Beatles?,” review of
Stop and Smell the Roses (RCA LP), by Ringo Starr, November 11, 1981, C26.
“The Pop Life: ‘(Just Like) Starting Over,’” review of “Just Like Starting
Over”/“Kiss Kiss Kiss,” by John Lennon and Yoko Ono, October 24, 1980, C15.
“Two Icons of Rock Music,” review of Somewhere in England (Dark Horse
LP), by George Harrison, New York Times, May 31, 1981, D23.
Patterson, R. Gary, “The Walrus Was Paul”: The Great Beatle Death Clues of 1969
(Oak Ridge, TN: Excursion Productions and Publications, 1994).
“Paul McCartney: Band on the Run,” review of Band on the Run (Apple LP), by Paul
McCartney and Wings, High Fidelity, April 1974, 124.
Pawlowski, Gareth, How They Became the Beatles (New York: Dutton, 1989).
Peel, Mark, “McCartney and Friends,” review of Tug of War (Columbia LP), by Paul
McCartney, Stereo Review, June 1982, 76.
Peterson, R. A., “Taking Popular Music Too Seriously,” Journal of Popular Culture 4
(1971), 590–4.
Petigny, Alan, “Illegitimacy, Postwar Psychology, and the Reperiodization of the
Sexual Revolution,” Journal of Social History 38/1 (2004), 63–79.
Pichaske, David R., The Poetry of Rock: The Golden Years (Peoria, IL: Ellis Press,
1981).
Pichaske, David R. (ed.), Beowulf to Beatles: Approaches to Poetry (New York: Free
Press, 1972).
Plasketes, George, Images of Elvis Presley in American Culture, 1977–1997: The
Mystery Terrain (New York: Haworth Press, 1997).
Pleasants, Henry, “Taking the Beatles Seriously,” Stereo Review, November 1967,
52–4.
Pollack, Alan W., “Notes on . . . ” series of online analyses of Beatles songs, the
“Official” rec.music.beatles home page (1989–2001), at
www.recmusicbeatles.com.
Porter, Alan J., Before They Were Beatles: The Early Years 1956–60 (Bloomington, IN:
Xlibris, 2003).
Pye, Ian, “Double Fantasy,” review of Double Fantasy (Geffen LP), by John Lennon
and Yoko Ono, Melody Maker, November 22, 1980, 26.
Quantick, David, Revolution: The Making of the Beatles’ White Album (London:
Unanimous; Chicago: A Cappella, 2002).
Rabinowitz, Dorothy, “John Lennon’s Mourners,” Commentary, February 1981,
58–61.
Reece, G. L., Elvis Religion: The Cult of the King (London and New York: Tauris,
2006).
Reeve, A. J., Turn Me On, Dead Man: The Complete Story of the Paul McCartney
Death Hoax (Ann Arbor, MI: Popular Culture Ink, 1994).
Reising, Russell, “Every Sound There Is”: The Beatles’ Revolver and the
Transformation of Rock and Roll (Aldershot: Ashgate, 2002).
Reising, Russell, and LeBlanc, Jim, “The Whatchamucallit in the Garden: Sgt. Pepper
and Fables of Interference,” in Olivier Julien (ed.), Sgt. Pepper and the Beatles: “It
Was Forty Years Ago” (Aldershot: Ashgate, 2009).
Riley, Tim, Tell Me Why: A Beatles Commentary (New York: Knopf, 1988; Vintage,
1989), revised as Tell Me Why: The Beatles – Album by Album, Song by Song, the
Sixties and After (Cambridge, MA: Da Capo, 2002).
Rockwell, John, “Music: George Harrison,” New York Times, December 21, 1974,
19.
“Old Timers Out for a Spin Cut a Couple of Disks,” review of The Traveling
Wilburys: Volume One (Warner Brothers LP), by the Traveling Wilburys, New
York Times, November 13, 1988, H27.
“The Pop Life,” review of Back to the Egg (EMI/Columbia LP), by Wings,
New York Times, June 29, 1979, C24.
“The Pop Life,” review of The Best of George Harrison (Capitol/EMI LP), by
George Harrison, New York Times, December 24, 1976, 44.
“The Pop Life,” review of McCartney II (Parlophone/EMI LP), by Paul
McCartney, New York Times, July 11, 1980, C14.
“The Pop Life,” review of Thirty Three & 1/3 (Dark Horse LP), by George
Harrison, New York Times, December 24, 1976, 44.
Rodman, G. B., Elvis After Elvis: The Posthumous Career of a Living Legend (London
and New York: Routledge, 1996).
Rohter, Larry, “Dear Santa: All I Want for Christmas is No. 11578,” review of The
Best of George Harrison (Capitol/EMI LP), by George Harrison, Washington Post,
December 19, 1976, 147.
“For Harrison, Some Things Must Pass,” Washington Post, December 14,
1974, C1.
Roos, M. E., “The Walrus and the Deacon: John Lennon’s Debt to Lewis Carroll,”
Journal of Popular Culture 18/1 (1984), 19–29.
Rosen, R. D., Psychobabble: Fast Talk and Quick Cure in the Era of Feeling (New York:
Atheneum, 1977).
Rosenberg, N. V., “Taking Popular Culture Seriously: The Beatles,” Journal of
Popular Culture 4 (1970), 53–6.
Roszak, Theodor, The Making of a Counter Culture: Reflections on the Technocratic
Society and its Youthful Opposition (Garden City, NY: Doubleday, 1969; New
York: Faber & Faber, 1971).
Rothstein, William, Phrase Rhythm in Tonal Music (New York: Schirmer, 1989).
Russell, Jeff, The Beatles Album File and Complete Discography, rev. edn. (London:
Blandford, 1989).
The Beatles Complete Discography (New York: Universe Publishing, 2006).
Ryan, Kevin, and Kehew, Brian, Recording the Beatles: The Studio Equipment and
Techniques Used to Create Their Classic Albums (Houston: Curvebender, 2006).
Saal, Hubert, “The Beatles Minus One,” review of McCartney (Apple LP), by Paul
McCartney, Newsweek, April 20, 1970, 95.
Salewicz, Chris, McCartney: The Biography (London: Queen Anne Press, 1986).
Sandbrook, Dominic, Never Had It So Good: A History of Britain from Suez to the
Beatles (London: Abacus, 2000).
Santiago, L. P. R., “The Lyrical Expression of Adolescent Conflict in the Beatles’
Songs,” Adolescence 4 (1969), 199–210.
Sauceda, James, The Literary Lennon: A Comedy of Letters – The First Study of All
the Major and Minor Writings of John Lennon (Ann Arbor, MI: Pierian Press,
1983).
Savage, Jon, “100 Greatest Psychedelic Classics,” MOJO 43 (June 1997), 56–67.
Sawyers, June Skinner (ed.), Read the Beatles: Classic and New Writings on the
Beatles, Their Legacy, and Why They Still Matter (New York: Penguin, 2006).
Schaffner, Nicholas, The Beatles Forever (New York: McGraw Hill; Harrisburg, PA:
Cameron House, 1977).
Schmalfeldt, Janet, “Cadential Processes: The Evaded Cadence and the ‘One More
Time’ Technique,” Journal of Musicological Research 12 (1992), 1–52.
Schofield, Carey, Jagger (London: Methuen, 1983).
Sedgwick, Eve Kosofsky, Between Men: English Literature and Male Homosexual
Desire (New York: Columbia University Press, 1985).
Shames, Laurence, “John Lennon, Where Are You?,” Esquire, November 1980, 31–8,
40, 42.
Sheff, David, “John Lennon and Yoko Ono: Candid Conversation,” Playboy 28/1
(January 1981), 75–114, 144.
The Playboy Interviews with John Lennon and Yoko Ono, ed. G. Barry Golson
(New York: Playboy Press, 1981; New York: St. Martins, 2000).
Shepherd, Billy, The True Story of the Beatles (London: Beat Publications, 1964).
Sigerson, Davitt, “Paul Carries That Weight,” review of Tug of War (Parlophone/EMI
LP), by Paul McCartney, Village Voice, May 11, 1982, 64.
Simons, David, Studio Stories (San Francisco: Backbeat Books, 2004).
“Somewhere in England,” review of Somewhere in England (Dark Horse LP), by
George Harrison, Rolling Stone, August 6, 1981, 44.
Smith, Larry R., “The Beatles as Act: A Study of Control in a Musical Group,” PhD
thesis, University of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign (1970).
Southall, Brian, Abbey Road (Wellingborough: Patrick Stephens, 1985).
Spitz, Bob, The Beatles: The Biography (New York: Little, Brown, 2005; 2nd edn.,
2007).
Spitz, Robert S., “George Harrison on the Move,” review of George Harrison (Dark
Horse LP), by George Harrison, Washington Post, March 4, 1979, A1.
Spizer, Bruce, The Beatles on Apple Records (New Orleans: 498 Productions, 2003),
reissued as The Beatles Solo on Apple Records (New Orleans: 498 Productions,
2005).
Spock, Benjamin McLane, The Common Sense Book of Baby and Child Care (New
York: Pocket Books, 1946).
Sterritt, David, “Discs: Hello, Paul – Bye-bye Beatles,” Christian Science Monitor,
June 29, 1970, 8.
“Latest from ex-Beatles McCartney, Harrison,” review of Red Rose Speedway
(Apple LP), by Paul McCartney and Wings, and Living in the Material World
(Apple LP), by George Harrison, Christian Science Monitor, June 29, 1973, 12.
“On the Disc Scene: ‘Ram,’” review of Ram (Apple LP), by Paul and Linda
McCartney, Christian Science Monitor, July 7, 1971, 4.
“Plastic Ono Band,” review of Plastic Ono Band (Apple LP), by John
Lennon, Christian Science Monitor, March 19, 1971, 4.
“Will the Real Beatle Please Sing Out?,” Christian Science Monitor, January
28, 1972, 13.
Stevens, Jay, Storming Heaven: LSD and the American Dream (New York: Atlantic
Monthly Press, 1987).
Storey, John, “The Politics of the Popular,” in John Storey (ed.), An Introductory
Guide to Cultural Theory and Popular Culture (Athens, GA: University of Georgia
Press, 1993), 181–202.
Suczek, Barbara, “The Curious Case of the ‘Death’ of Paul McCartney,” Urban Life
and Culture 1 (1972), 61–76.
Sullivan, Henry W., The Beatles with Lacan: Rock ’n’ Roll as Requiem for the Modern
Age (New York: Peter Lang, 1995).
Sulpy, Doug, and Schweighhardt, Ray, Get Back: The Unauthorized Chronicle of the
Beatles’ “Let It Be” Disaster (New York: St. Martin’s, 1997).
Sumrall, Harry, “Paul McCartney’s Scrambled ‘Egg,’” review of Back to the Egg
(EMI/Columbia LP), by Wings, Washington Post, July 22, 1979, A1.
Sutcliffe, Pauline, and Thompson, Douglas, Stuart Sutcliffe: The Beatles’ Shadow and
His Lonely Hearts Club (London: Sidgwick & Jackson, 2001).
Taylor, A. J. W., “Beatlemania – A Study in Adolescent Enthusiasm,” British Journal
of Social and Clinical Psychology 5 (1966), 81–8.
Taylor, Alistair, with Roberts, Martin, Yesterday: The Beatles Remembered (London:
Sidgwick & Jackson, 1988).
Terry, Sara, “George Harrison,” review of George Harrison (Dark Horse LP), by
George Harrison, Christian Science Monitor, March 22, 1979, 22.
Thompson, Edward, The Making of the English Working Class (1963; New York:
Penguin, 1975).
Thomson, Elizabeth, and Gutman, David (eds.), The Lennon Companion:
Twenty-five Years of Comment (Basingstoke and London: Macmillan, 1987).
Thribb, E. J., “George Harrison: George Harrison,” review of George Harrison (Dark
Horse / Warner Brothers LP), by George Harrison, Melody Maker, February 24,
1979, 29.
Tillikens, Ger, “A Flood of Flat-Sevenths,” in Russell Reising (ed)., “Every Sound
There Is”: The Beatles’ Revolver and the Transformation of Rock and Roll
(Aldershot: Ashgate, 2002), 121–36.
Townsend, Ken, “Preface” to Mark Lewisohn, The Complete Beatles Recording
Sessions: The Official Story of the Abbey Road Years (London: Hamlyn, 1988).
Townshend, Peter, The Family Life of Old People (London: Routledge & Kegan Paul,
1957).
Turner, Steve, The Gospel According to the Beatles (London: Westminster John Knox
Press, 2006).
A Hard Day’s Write: The Stories Behind Every Beatles Song (New York:
HarperCollins, 1999; London: Carlton, 2000).
Vachon, Brian, “Jesus Movement is Upon Us,” Look, February 9, 1971, 5–21.
Ward, Ed, “Unfinished Music No. 2: Life with the Lions,” review of Unfinished Music
No. 2: Life with the Lions (Apple LP), by John Lennon and Yoko Ono, Rolling
Stone, August 9, 1969, 37.
Warwick, Neil, Kutner, Jon, and Brown, Tony, The Complete Book of the British
Charts: Singles and Albums, 3rd edn. (London: Omnibus, 2004).
Watts, Michael, “Living in the Material World,” review of Living in the Material
World (Apple LP), by George Harrison, Melody Maker, June 9, 1973, 3.
Weinberg, Max, The Big Beat: Conversations with Rock’s Great Drummers (Chicago:
Contemporary Books, 1984).
Welch, Chris, “Albums: Ringo Starr: Ringo the 4th,” review of Ringo the 4th
(Polydor/Atlantic LP), by Ringo Starr, Melody Maker, February 11, 1978, 20.
Wenner, Jann, Lennon Remembers: The Rolling Stone Interviews (New York: Fawcett
Popular Library; London: Verso; and Harmondsworth: Penguin, 1971; New
York: Verso, 2000).
“Man of the Year: John Lennon,” Rolling Stone, February 7, 1970, 24–5.
West, Alan, and Martindale, Colin, “Creative Trends in the Content of Beatles
Lyrics,” Popular Music and Society 20/4 (1996), 103–25.
“What Songs the Beatles Sang . . . ,” The Times, December 27, 1963, Arts section, 4
(uncredited article “From Our Music Critic,” who was William Mann).
Whitburn, Joel, Joel Whitburn Presents Billboard’s Top 10 Charts, 1958–1988
(Menomonee Falls, WI: Record Research, 1988).
Whitburn, Joel (ed.), Billboard Top Pop Singles, 1955–2002, 10th edn. (Menomonee
Falls, WI: Record Research, 2004).
White, Timothy, “Back to the Egg,” review of Back to the Egg (EMI/Columbia LP),
by Wings, Rolling Stone, August 23, 1979, 55–6.
Whiteclay, John (ed.), The Oxford Companion to American Military History (Oxford:
Oxford University Press, 1999).
Whiteley, Sheila, The Space Between the Notes: Rock and the Counter-Culture
(London: Routledge, 1992), 39–60.
“Love, Love, Love: Representations of Gender and Sexuality in Selected
Songs by the Beatles,” in Kenneth Womack and Todd F. Davis (eds.), Reading the
Beatles: Cultural Studies, Literary Criticism, and the Fab Four (Albany: State
University of New York Press, 2006), 55–70.
Whitley, Ed, “The Postmodern White Album,” in Ian Inglis (ed.), The Beatles,
Popular Music and Society: A Thousand Voices (London: Macmillan, 2000),
105–25.
Wiener, Jon, Come Together: John Lennon in His Time (New York: Random House,
1984; Chicago: University of Illinois Press, 1991).
Gimme Some Truth: The John Lennon FBI Files (Berkeley: University of
California Press, 1999).
“The Last Lennon File,” The Nation, January 8–15, 2007, 4–5.
Wild, David, “‘The Lives of John Lennon,’” review of Albert Goldman, The Lives of
John Lennon (New York: William Morrow, 1988), Rolling Stone, October 6, 1988,
21.
Wild, David, “Cloud Nine,” review of Cloud Nine (Dark Horse LP), by George
Harrison, Rolling Stone, December 3, 1987, 80.
Williams, Richard, “Solo Beatles,” review of All Things Must Pass (Apple LP), by
George Harrison, and Plastic Ono Band (Apple LP), by John Lennon, The Times
Saturday Review, January 23, 1971, 17.
Willis, Ellen, “Rock, etc.: George and John,” review of All Things Must Pass (Apple
LP), by George Harrison, and John Lennon / Plastic Ono Band (Apple LP), by
John Lennon, New Yorker, February 27, 1971, 95–7.
Wimsatt, William K., Jr., and Beardsley, Monroe C., “The Intentional Fallacy,” in
Vincent B. Leitch (ed.), The Norton Anthology of Theory and Criticism (New
York: Norton, 2001), 1374–87.
“Wings: Shooting Stars!,” review of Venus and Mars (Capitol/EMI LP), by Wings,
Melody Maker, May 31, 1975, 22.
Winner, Langdon, “Records: Instant Karma,” review of “Instant Karma” (Apple
single), Rolling Stone, April 16, 1970, 48, 50.
“Records: McCartney,” review of McCartney (Apple LP), by George
Harrison, Rolling Stone, May 14, 1970, 50.
Wolfe, T., “The ‘Me’ Decade and the Third Great Awakening,” New York, August 23,
1976, 26–40.
Womack, Kenneth, Long and Winding Roads: The Evolving Artistry of the Beatles
(New York: Continuum, 2007).
Womack, Kenneth, and Davis, Todd F. (eds.), Reading the Beatles: Cultural Studies,
Literary Criticism, and the Fab Four (Albany: State University of New York Press,
2006).
Wood, Andy, The Politics of Social Conflict: The Peak Country, 1520–1770
(Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1999).
Wood, Michael, “John Lennon’s Schooldays,” in Elizabeth Thomson and David
Gutman (eds.), The Lennon Companion: Twenty-Five Years of Comment (London:
Macmillan, 1987), 145–9 (originally published in New Society, June 27, 1968).
Woods, William C., “Ringo Goes it Solo, Pleasantly Enough,” review of Sentimental
Journey (Apple LP), Washington Post, May 17, 1970, 142.
Young, Michael, and Willmott, Peter, Family and Kinship in East London (London:
Routledge and Kegan Paul, 1957).
Young, Warren, and Hixson, Joseph, LSD on Campus (New York: Dell, 1966).
Zito, Tom, “The Beatles: Looking Back Ten Years,” Washington Post, February 17,
1974, P1, P8.
“Christmas Records,” review of Imagine (Apple LP), by John Lennon,
Washington Post, November 28, 1971, 128.
“Hamming and Homage,” review of James Paul McCartney (ABC television
program), Washington Post, April 17, 1973, B6.
“Hey, Venus, Could That Be a New Beatles Album?,” review of Venus and
Mars (Capitol LP), by Wings, Washington Post, July 6, 1975, 71.
“Peace, Love, Art, and Yoko,” Washington Post, October 9, 1971, C1.
“Within Him, Without Them: The Consciousness of George Harrison,”
Washington Post, January 3, 1971, F1–F2.
Index
Abbey Road, 56, 58–60, 83, 125, 132–6, 146, Best, Mona, 23
149, 153, 167, 199, 215, 233 Best, Pete, 9, 10, 11, 13, 22, 24, 26, 33, 34
Adorno, Theodor, 77, 82, 88, 225 Big 3, the, 22
ADT (Artificial Double Tracking), 51 Billy J. Kramer and the Dakotas, 70, 73
Aguilera, Christina, 243 Bishop, Malden Grange, 110–11
Alexander, George, 143 Black Dyke Mills Band, 118, 146
All Things Must Pass, 128, 130, 149, 154, 156, Black, Cilla, 20
157–8, 159, 163, 170, 179 Blackbird, 225
Alpert, Richard, 90, 103 Blake, Peter, 98, 180
Andrew, Sam, 93 Bonzo Dog Band, the, 105, 118
Animals, the, 41, 73, 108, 226 Bowie, David, 175
Antonioni, Michelangelo, 207 Bradby, Barbara, 228–9
Apple Records, 128, 142–52, 222, 250 Brahms, Johannes, 186
Ardagh, Philip, 225 Braine, John, 207
Armstrong, Louis, 34, 230 Brainwashed, 179
Asher, Jane, 113, 145 Brecht, Bertolt, 78
Asher, Peter, 144, 145, 151 Brodax, Al, 116
Aspinall, Neil, 13, 143, 237, 238, 250, 251 Bromberg, David, 156
Astaire, Fred, 122 Brookhiser, Richard, 176
Axton, Hoyt, 157 Brown, Peter, 12
Ayckbourn, Alan, 207 Burdon, Eric, 108
Burnett, Johnny, 156
Bach, Barbara, 178 Burroughs, William, 209
Back in the US, 239 Byrds, the, 75, 93, 104, 130, 226, 233
Back to the Egg, 168
Bad Boy, 157 Caine, Michael, 206, 207
Badfinger, 150, 159, 222 Caldwell, Alan, 22
Bailey, David, 206, 207 Candy, 155, 221
Baird, Julia, 21 Carlos, John, 112
Baker, Ginger, 149 Carroll, Lewis, 51
Band on the Run, 147, 157, 167 Carter, Jimmy, 175, 177
Band, the, 130, 156 Caveman, 178
Barham, John, 158 Cavern Club, 25, 26, 33, 50, 66, 67, 70, 134
Barrett, John, 231 Chaos and Creation in the Back Yard, 249
Barthes, Roland, 19 Chaplin, Charlie, 218
Beach Boys, the, 35, 36, 41, 55, 93, 226, 228, Chapman, Norman, 12
233, 249 Charles, Ray, 24
Beachles, the, 249, 253 Chiffons, the, 161
Beatles Anthology, the, 218, 221, 222, 232, 233, Chipperfield, Chips, 237
235, 236–9, 251 Choose Love, 182
Beatles for Sale, 41, 74, 135, 230, 233 Christie, Julie, 206
Beatles, The (the “White Album”), 55–6, Churchill, Winston, 10, 208
117–24, 125, 146, 153, 167, 214, 228, 233 Cirque du Soleil, 105, 179, 218, 247
Beaucoups of Blues, 150, 156, 162 Clapton, Eric, 41, 55, 119, 123, 135, 147, 148,
Beethoven, Ludwig van, 59, 186 149, 150, 157, 160, 178, 247
Belew, Adrian, 237 Clarke, Allan, 23
Berio, Luciano, 93 Clash, the, 168
Bernstein, Elmer, 156 Cleave, Maureen, 208
Berry, Chuck, 25, 40, 55, 75, 133, 172, 174, 205, Clinton, William J. (Bill), 230
206 Cloud Nine, 178, 181
Best of George Harrison, the, 161 Cloud, Cam, 105
[311]
312 Index
Coasters, the, 21 Epstein, Brian, 9, 25–6, 56, 66, 70, 71, 77, 113,
Cochran, Eddie, 21 117, 119, 143, 223
Cockburn, Bruce, 108 Esquivel, Juan Garcia, 36
Cohen, Sidney, 103, 105 Evans, Allan, 73
Concert for Bangladesh, 149, 158 Evans, Mal, 53
Connolly, Ray, 9 Everett, Walter, 95, 125, 228, 245
Cookies, the, 23, 68 Everly Brothers, the, 21, 22, 68
Corday, Charlotte, 209 Ewing, Marsha, 244
Costello, Elvis, 180 Extra Texture, 161
Cox, Kyoko Chan, 169, 172
Cream, 118, 217 Fairport Convention, 105, 130
Crompton, Richmal, 19 Family Way, The, 221
Crosby, Bing, 34 Farrow, Prudence, 122
Fenton, Shane, 68
Danger Mouse, 222, 249, 253 Ferry, Bryan, 150
Dark Horse, 159 Fireman, the, 180
Dave Clark Five, the, 41, 73, 226, Flaming Pie, 179
228 Fletcher, Colin, 19
Davies, Hunter, 9, 33, 177 Flowers in the Dirt, 180
Davies, Ray, 77 Fonda, Peter, 90
Davis, Carl, 180 Fool, the, 144
Davis, Miles, 251 Ford, Mary, 36
Davis, Rod, 21 Formby, George, 22
Dekker, Thomas, 135 Frampton, Peter, 157, 168
Delaney and Bonnie and Friends, 158 Frankael, Michael, 81
Dell-Vikings, the, 21 Freelance Hellraiser, the, 180
DeRogatis, Jim, 92 Freeman, Robert, 71
Dickinson, Emily, 139 Frith, Simon, 17, 232
Doggett, Peter, 228 Fury, Billy, 68
Domino, Fats, 115, 121, 134
Donegan, Lonnie, 18, 20, 21, 206 Gaitskill, Mary, 75
Donovan, 105 Garry, Len, 22
Doors, the, 93 Gaye, Marvin, 224
Doran, Terry, 143 Geffen, David, 175
Double Fantasy, 175 Geller, Debbie, 26
Douglas-Home, Alec, 207 Gentle, Johnny, 23, 24
Dowlding, William J., 228 George Harrison, 162
Drake, Pete, 156 Gerry and the Pacemakers, 25, 41,
Drifters, the, 73 70
Driving Rain, 181 Gerson, Ben, 158, 171
Dubček, Alexander, 112 Get Back Project, 58, 149, 242
Dunbar, Geoff, 225 Gibb, Maurice, 156
Dylan, Bob, 41, 75, 93, 117, 130, 158, 159, 161, Ginsberg, Allen, 206, 239
170, 171, 179, 218, 225, 228, 234 Gitlin, Todd, 171, 176
Give My Regards to Broad Street, 180
Eastman, Linda, see McCartney, Linda Goffin, Gerry, 130
Ecce Cor Meum, 180 Goldman, Albert, 9, 177
Ed Sullivan Show, the, 42, 206 Goodnight Vienna, 151, 156, 175
Edison, Thomas, 34 Goon Show, 12, 23
Eisenberg, Evan, 232 Goons, the, 22
Electronic Sound, 148 Grade, Lew, 175
Elephant’s Memory, 148, 172 Gramsci, Antonio, 9
Elliott, Anthony, 240 Grant, Cary, 103
Ellis, Royston, 17 Green, Al, 230
Ellmann, Richard, 1–2 Griffiths, Eric, 11, 19, 22
Emerick, Geoff, 38, 39–40, 41, 45, 46, 48, 49, 50, Grof, Stanislav, 90, 100
51, 52, 53, 55, 57, 58, 59, 60, 94, 98, 119, 136, Gustafson, Johnny, 22
177, 178, 242, 249 Guthrie, Woody, 18
313 Index
Hain, Peter, 212 Johnson, Lyndon Baines, 212

Hamilton, Richard, 117 Jones, Brian, 45
Hanton, Colin, 20, 21, 65 Jones, Jeff, 251
Hard Day’s Night, A (album), 40, 65, 73, 75, 76, Jones, Quincy, 156
230, 233 Jones, Raymond, 66
Hard Day’s Night, A (film), 73, 113, 221, 230 Jones, Spike, 36, 37
Harrison, Dhani, 162, 179 Jowell, Tessa, 212
Harrison, George, early years, 12–13, 16; solo Judt, Tony, 14
years, 157–62, 177, 178
Harrison, Olivia Trinidad Arias, 162, 247, 248 Kaempfert, Bert, 65, 66
Harrison, Pattie Boyd, 159, 160 Kaleidoscope, 104
Harry, Bill, 9, 17 Kantner, Paul, 239
Hayakawa, S. I., 225 Kass, Ron, 144, 151
Help! (album), 77, 88, 135, 233, 234, 237 Kaye, Lenny, 9
Help! (film), 41, 113, 220, 221 Keeler, Christine, 209
Hendrix, Jimi, 95, 104, 237 Keightley, Keir, 252
Henke, James, 244 Keltner, Jim, 147
Herman’s Hermits, 41, 73, 226 Kennedy, John F., 168, 224
Hertsgaard, Mark, 228, 232, 254 Kennedy, Robert F., 112, 214
Hicks, Paul, 242 Kesey, Ken, 98
Higginbotham, Daryl, 151 King Crimson, 237
Hodge, Chris, 151 King, Carole, 130
Hoffman, Abbie, 172, 239 King, Larry, 240
Hofmann, Albert, 92, 104 King, Martin Luther, Jr., 112, 214, 243
Holiday, Billie, 34 King, Tony, 151
Hollies, the, 23, 41 Kinks, the, 73, 89, 93, 226, 253
Holly, Buddy, 22, 23, 25, 65, 205 Klein, Allen, 58, 127, 128, 129, 147, 151
Hooper-Greenhill, Eileen, 246 Kozinn, Allan, 121, 179
Hopkin, Mary, 116, 118, 132, 146, 222 Kyd, Thomas, 133
Hopkins, Nicky, 147, 170
Horne, Howard, 17 Laing, R. D., 100
Hot Chocolate Band, the, 148 Laliberté, Guy, 179, 247
How I Won the War, 221 Landau, Jon, 164, 167
Howlett, Kevin, 242 Laozi, 115
Hudson, Mark, 182 Lavigne, Emma, 246
Huxley, Aldous, 91, 110 Lawrence, D. H., 209
Leadbelly (Huddie William Ledbetter), 18
Idle, Eric, 161 Leary, Timothy, 90, 91, 100, 103, 106, 110, 133
Imagine, 147, 154, 157, 163, 170, 173 Lennon, Alfred “Freddie,” 12
In His Own Write, 221 Lennon, Cynthia Powell, 9, 20, 116, 209, 215
Incredible String Band, the, 105 Lennon, John Winston Ono, early years, 12, 13,
Inglis, Ian, 218 16, 17; solo years, 168–77
Isley Brothers, the, 68 Lennon, Julia Stanley, 12, 18
Lennon, Julian, 52, 116, 122, 217
Jackson, Glenda, 209 Les Stewart Quartet, the, 22
Jackson, Michael, 179 Lester, Richard, 73
Jagger, Mick, 44, 45, 165, 206, 207, 212, 216 Let It Be (album), 60–1, 125, 130–2, 136–41,
James Paul McCartney, 166 146, 157, 162, 215, 222, 228, 233, 242
James, Dick, 129 Let It Be (film), 153, 221
Janov, Arthur, 169 Let It Be . . . Naked (album), 140, 222, 242–3
Jay-Z, 222, 249 Levy, Morris, 174
Jefferson Airplane, 89, 93, 107, 222 Lewisohn, Mark, 39, 40, 41, 44, 45, 46, 60, 68,
Jenkins, Roy, 211 77, 129, 131, 231, 232
John Lennon/Plastic Ono Band, 130, 147, 154, Liddy, G. Gordon, 106
156, 157, 163, 167, 169, 170, 173, 174 Lindisfarne, 105
John, Elton, 175 Lindsay-Hogg, Michael, 242
Johnny and the Moondogs, 23 Little Richard, 21, 25, 55, 68, 73, 75, 121, 206
Johns, Glyn, 58, 132 Live at the BBC, 235–6
314 Index
Live in Red Square, 181 Marvin, Hank, 11

Liverpool 8, 182 Maslow, Abraham, 81
Liverpool Oratorio, 155, 180 Mason, Barry, 67
Liverpool Sound Collage, 180, 240 Massey, Gary, 242
Living in the Material World, 159, 218, 247 Matteo, Steve, 131, 228
Livingston, Alan, 71 MC5, 172
Lomax, Jackie, 116, 118, 132, 144, 146, 147, 149, Mellers, Wilfred, 116, 228, 239
151 Meltzer, Richard, 161
London Town, 168 Memory Almost Full, 181, 249
Love, 89, 105, 179, 218, 222, 246–9, 250, 251 Mendelsohn, John, 165
Love, Mike, 42, 122 Merseybeat, 19
Lowe, Duff, 65 Metzner, Ralph, 90, 103
Luke, Timothy, 246 Michael X, 169
Lush, Richard, 51 Michael, George, 243
Lynne, Jeff, 179 Mickey Mouse, 230
Lyttleton, Humphrey, 115 Mike Douglas Show, The, 172
Miles, Barry, 9, 10, 13, 14, 239, 241
McBean, Angus, 71 Milk and Honey, 155
McCartney II, 168 Miller, Henry, 209
McCartney, 126, 130, 147, 164 Miller, Steve, 132
McCartney, Beatrice, 181 Mills, Heather, see McCartney, Heather
McCartney, Heather (née Mills), 166, 181, 218 Mind Games, 173
McCartney, James Paul, early years, 12, 13, Mintz, Elliot, 240
15–16; solo years, 162–8, 177–8 Mirror, the, 104
McCartney, Jim, 11, 18, 22 Mitchell, Mitch, 119
McCartney, Linda (née Eastman), 113, 120, Moby Grape, 93
123, 128, 129, 162, 171, 180, 181, 215 Modern Jazz Quartet, the, 151
McCartney, Mary Mohin, 22, 139 Monkees, the, 227
McCartney, Mary, 166 Monroe, Marilyn, 218, 230
McCullough, Henry, 165 Monty Python, 161, 162, 247
MacDonald, Ian, 14, 109, 133, 228, 231, 232, Moody Blues, the, 222
238, 241, 245, 253 Moon, Keith, 173
McGuinn, Roger, 210 Moore, Allan F., 228
McKinney, Devin, 82, 86, 218 Moore, Tommy, 24
McLuhan, Marshall, 246 Most, Mickie, 148
Macmillan, Harold, 204, 207 Mozart, Wolfgang Amadeus, 139, 192
McNamara, Robert, 212 Murray, Mitch, 25, 67
McRobbie, Angela, 210 Mutsaers, Lutgard, 25
Madow, Stuart, 106
Magic Christian, The, 128, 132, 155, 221 Nash, Graham, 23
Magical Mystery Tour (album), 97–111, 112, Nerk Twins, the, 23
143, 233 Newman, Randy, 156
Magical Mystery Tour (film), 125, 221 Newmark, Andy, 160
Maharishi Mahesh Yogi, 99, 113, 118, 122, 223 Newton, Huey, 172
Mann, Manfred, 73 Nilsson, Harry, 156, 173, 175, 177, 178
Mann, William, 239 Nixon, Richard M., 112, 173
Mansfield, Ken, 145 Norman, Philip, 126, 205
Manson, Charles, 55, 215 Northcutt, William, 208
Mao Zedong, 168, 173
Marcos, Ferdinand, 43, 238 O’Grady, Terence, 121, 228
Mardas, Alexis, “Magic Alex,” 131, 144 Off the Ground, 180
Martin, George, 22, 25, 26, 33, 34, 36, 37, 38, Old Wave, 155
39, 41, 46, 49, 50, 52, 57, 58, 59, 65, 66, 68, 76, 1, 220, 230, 248, 251
88, 92, 94, 98, 105, 115, 119, 123, 131, 132, Ono, Yoko, 10, 56, 58, 113, 117, 119, 120, 123,
133, 156, 164, 167, 177, 178, 181, 210, 214, 127, 133, 143, 148, 151, 169, 171, 172, 173,
218, 228, 233, 238, 242, 248–9 174, 175, 215, 221, 238, 240, 241, 243, 244,
Martin, Giles, 105, 218, 248–9 245, 246, 247, 248
Marvelettes, the, 40, 41 Orbison, Roy, 67, 73, 75, 179
315 Index
Osborne, John, 207 Ricky and Dave, 23

Osmond, Humphrey, 91 Riddle, Nelson, 150
Owen, Alun, 73 Riley, Tim, 78, 80, 85, 131, 228
Owens, Buck, 150 Ringo, 151, 156, 175
Ringo Rama, 182
Pang, May, 174 Ringo the 4th, 157
Parks, Van Dyke, 35–6, 37, 43 Ringo’s Rotogravure, 157, 175
Parnes, Larry, 23, 68 Rock ’n’ Roll, 174
Past Masters, 233 Rockwell, John, 168
Paul, Les, 36 Roeg, Nicolas, 207
Peel, David, 148 Rolling Stones, the, 41, 73, 104, 130, 138, 178,
Pentangle, 105 205, 214, 216, 222, 226, 228, 253
Perkins, Carl, 73, 178, 206 Ronettes, the, 150
Pet Sounds, 35, 36, 37, 235 Roosevelt, Franklin D., 176
PETA (People for the Ethical Treatment of Rory Storm and the Hurricanes, 12, 22, 24, 26
Animals), 181 Roszak, Theodor, 211
Peter and Gordon, 41 Rothko, Mark, 139
Petty, Tom, 179 Rothstein, William, 190
Philby, Kim, 207 Rouse, Allan, 242
Phillips, Michelle, 239 Rowling, J. K., 230
Photograph: The Very Best of Ringo Starr, 182 Rubber Soul, 41, 43, 44–5, 73, 75–89, 167, 205,
Pichaske, David R., 225 226, 233, 235
Pink Floyd, 41, 104, 226 Rubin, Jerry, 148, 172
Pinter, Harold, 207 Run Devil Run, 180
Pipes of Peace, 179 Rushdie, Salman, 230
Plastic Ono Band, the, 147, 148, 169, 224 Russell, Leon, 150, 159
Platters, the, 157
Please Please Me, 25, 38, 39, 65, 68–9, 233, 234 Sandbrook, Dominic, 14
Polanski, Roman, 215 Sauceda, James, 225
Police, the, 217 Scaggs, Boz, 150
Pollack, Alan W., 228 Schweighhardt, Ray, 126
Powell, Enoch, 112 Scott, Jack, 65
Presley, Elvis, 21, 25, 65, 70, 71, 76, 88, 205, 217, Scott, Tom, 161
218, 224, 230, 238 Seales, Bobby, 172
Presley, Lisa Marie, 217 Sedgwick, Eve Kosofsky, 20
Press to Play, 180 Sentimental Journey, 128, 137, 150, 155
Preston, Billy, 59, 131, 135, 137, 140, 149, 150, Sex Pistols, the, 168
151, 156, 158, 159, 160, 161, 222 Sgt. Pepper’s Lonely Hearts Club Band, 35, 47,
48–54, 88, 91, 97–111, 112, 143, 171, 180, 213,
Quant, Mary, 206 214, 223, 225, 226, 228, 231, 233, 234, 235,
Quantick, David, 228 237, 239
Quarrymen, the, 9, 11, 18, 19, 20–3, 65 Sgt. Pet Sounds’ Lonely Hearts Club Band, 249
Shadows, the, 11
Ram, 147, 163, 164, 170 Shakespeare, William, 133
Raskin, Gene, 146 Shankar, Ravi, 149, 160, 179, 247
Raynsford, Nick, 212 Shapiro, Helen, 69
Reagan, Ronald W., 176 Shepherd, Billy, 9
Rebels, the, 20 Sheridan, Tony, 24, 33, 65, 219
Red Rose Speedway, 166 Sherrin, Ned, 208
Redding, Otis, 104 Shirelles, the, 23, 68
Rees-Mogg, William, 214, 239 Shotton, Pete, 19, 20
Revolver, 41, 43, 44, 45–8, 75, 76, 77, 79, 82, 83, Silver Beetles, the, 23, 205
88, 93–6, 98, 101, 104, 106, 109, 110, 205, 226, Simon, Paul, 161
228, 233, 234, 241 Sinatra, Frank, 134
Rice, Tim, 158 Sinclair, John, 172
Richard, Cliff, 11, 67, 70, 181, 204 Sitwell, Edith, 209
Richards, Keith, 119, 149, 165, 204 Skiffle, 18–23
Richards, Ron, 67 Smile, 37, 43, 163
316 Index
Smith, Alan, 137 U2, 243

Smith, Bessie, 34 Unfinished Music No. 1: Two Virgins, 147
Smith, James Russell, 253 Unfinished Music No. 2: Life with the Lions, 132
Smith, Larry, 228 Unterberger, Ritchie, 253
Smith, Norman, 41 U.S. vs. John Lennon, The, 218, 244
Smith, Patti, 166
Smith, Tommie, 112 Van der Graaf Generator, 217
Sobul, Jeff, 106 Van Eaton, Lon and Derek, 150, 151
Some Time in New York City, 171, 172, 173 Vartan, Sylvie, 72
Somewhere in England, 177, 178 Vaughan, Ivan, 21
Spaniard in the Works, A, 221 Velvet Underground, the, 77
Spector, Phil, 35, 37, 60–1, 137, 138, 140, 150, Venus and Mars, 167
157, 170, 172, 173, 174, 222, 242 Vertical Man, 182
Spizer, Bruce, 72 Vincent, Gene, 65
Spock, Benjamin, 209 Voormann, Klaus, 137, 147, 148, 149, 151, 156,
Standing Stone, 180 170
Starr, Ringo (Richard Starkey), early years, 13,
16; solo years, 155–7 Wall, Anthony, 26
Steppenwolf, 104 Walls and Bridges, 174
Stewart, Rod, 150 Webber, Andrew Lloyd, 158
Stills, Stephen, 178 Weeks, Willie, 160, 161
Stockhausen, Karlheinz, 93 Wenner, Jann, 154, 163, 164, 170, 241
Stooges, the, 217 Wertheimer, Alfred, 71
Stop and Smell the Roses, 155, 178 Wesker, Arnold, 207
Sullivan, Henry, 9, 14 Whalley, Nigel, 21
Sulpy, Doug, 126 White, Alan, 137, 170
Sundown Playboys, the, 151 White, Andy, 67
Supremes, the, 73 Whitehead, Peter, 206
Sutcliffe, Pauline, 9 Whiteley, Sheila, 92
Sutcliffe, Stuart, 9, 10, 11, 13, 16, 23, 24 Who, the, 41, 122, 217, 226
Wiener, Jon, 172, 218
13th Floor Elevators, 104 Wild Life, 9, 165
33 & 1/3, 161 Williams, Larry, 73, 121
Tate, Sharon, 215 Wilson, Brian, 35, 36–7, 43, 77, 235
Tavener, John, 151 Wilson, Carl, 42
Taylor, Alistair, 143, 145 Wilson, Harold, 204, 207, 208, 209 .
Taylor, Alvin, 161 Wings, 165–8
Taylor, Derek, 43, 147, 230, 238, 239, 254 Wings at the Speed of Sound, 167
Taylor, James, 116, 145, 147, 151, 222 Wings over America, 168
Tepper, Ron, 43 Wingspan: Hits and History, 181
Texans, the, 22 With the Beatles, 25, 40, 65, 70–1, 220, 233
Thomas the Tank Engine and Friends, 178 Womack, Kenneth, 59, 84
Thoreau, Henry David, 101 Wonder, Stevie, 178
Thurmond, Strom, 172 Wonderwall Music, 221
Time Takes Time, 155, 182 Wood, Ron, 178
Titelman, Russ, 162 Working Classical, 180
Townsend, Ken, 40, 45, 51, 231 Wright, Gary, 161
Townshend, Pete, 77, 206
Townshend, Peter, 12, 13 Yardbirds, the, 41, 93, 226
Toynbee, Polly, 211 Yellow Submarine (album), 56
Traveling Wilburys, the, 179 Yellow Submarine (film), 98, 105, 113–14, 220,
Troggs, the, 41 221
Troy, Doris, 149, 151, 158 Yes, 103
Tug of War, 177, 178, 180 Young, Neil, 104
Twiggy, 206
Twin Freaks, 180 Zappa, Frank, 173

Kenneth Womack (Ed.) - The Cambridge Companion To Beatles (2009)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Kenneth Womack (Ed.) - The Cambridge Companion To Beatles (2009)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Kenneth Womack (Ed.) - The Cambridge Companion To Beatles (2009)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What is the book about?

What is the book about?

What are the three main sections of the book?

What are the three main sections of the book?

The Cambridge Companion to the Beatles

Clearly organized into three sections, covering Background, Works,

◦ Cambridge University Press 2009

This publication is in copyright. Subject to statutory exception

First published 2009

Library of Congress Cataloguing in Publication data

ISBN 978-0-521-86965-2 Hardback

Cambridge University Press has no responsibility for the persistence or

List of tables [page ix]

Introducing the Beatles Kenneth Womack [1]

Part III • History and influence

13 “An abstraction, like Christmas”: the Beatles for sale and

6.1 Major musical sources of The Beatles [page 122]

Gary Burns is Professor of Communication at Northern Illinois University, Editor of

Kenneth Womack is Professor of English at Penn State University’s Altoona College.

As I do when I re-encounter the Beatles, Francesca occasionally con-

1940 July 7: Ringo Starr [Richard Starkey] born in Liverpool

1942 June 18: James Paul McCartney born in Liverpool

1943 February 25: George Harrison born in Liverpool

1957 July 6: McCartney meets Lennon after a Quarrymen

1958 February: Harrison joins Lennon and McCartney as a member

1959 August 29: the Quarrymen begin an extensive engagement at

1961 February 9: the Beatles perform at Liverpool’s Cavern Club,

April–July: the Beatles perform on the Reeperbahn in

1962 January 1: the Beatles audition, unsuccessfully, for Decca

1963 January 11: “Please Please Me”/“Ask Me Why” single released by

March 22: Please Please Me album released by Parlophone

1964 February 9: the Beatles perform on the Ed Sullivan Show in New

1965 February 11: Starr marries Maureen Cox

August 15: the Beatles perform at Shea Stadium before an

1966 January 21: Harrison marries Pattie Boyd

1967 February 17: “Strawberry Fields Forever”/“Penny Lane” single

August 27: Brian Epstein is found dead in London from an

1968 February–April: the Beatles visit the Maharishi’s compound at

1969 January 2: principal photography for the Get Back project

1970 March 6: “Let It Be”/“You Know My Name (Look Up the

1980 December 8: Lennon is assassinated in New York City

2001 November 29: Harrison dies of cancer in Los Angeles

genesis of Apple from holding company to multi-faceted artistic enterprise,

Beatles’ reception, repackaging, and self-defining (and, indeed, self-

committing himself to a full-time career as a musician with leading Liver-

School, work, and youth culture

Early music training and experience

Skiffle, rock and roll, and the Quarrymen

The final performance of the Quarrymen took place in August 1959 at

US rock and roll

Eddie Cochran (2 songs)

Everly Brothers (6 songs)

Buddy Holly (11 songs)

Little Richard (12 songs)

Carl Perkins (11 songs)

Elvis Presley (8 songs)

Larry Williams (6 songs)

Other rock and roll (15 songs)

Rhythm and blues and Motown (18 songs)